Today’s News 2nd May 2020

  • Why Didn't The Constitution Stop This?
    Why Didn't The Constitution Stop This?

    Authored by Robert Wright via The American Institute for Economic Research,

    The genius of the U.S. Constitution is that the Framers, especially James Madison and Alexander Hamilton, saw it as a constraint on bad policymaking.

    Given the number of really bad policies that various US governments and officials, from school boards to POTUS, have implemented, especially recently, it is high time to restore weakened or lost Constitutional restraints against arbitrary rule.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Five forces threaten Americans with destruction:

    1) nature;

    2) foreign powers;

    3) the national government;

    4) state and local governments;

    5) themselves.

    The threat from 3, 4, and 5 is double-edged, meaning that Americans can be harmed by the actions of those forces as well as by their inaction.

    The national government, for example, can harm Americans by being insufficiently prepared for natural catastrophes and foreign incursions, as with Hurricanes Katrina and Rita and the 9/11 attacks. It can also harm Americans, though, by doing too much, as with the invasion of Iraq and the way-too-long occupation of Afghanistan. (Relying too much on FEMA instead of states or private initiatives may be another example, but less clear cut than the needless wars.)

    The national and state governments are supposed to check each other’s power, so that if one overreaches, the other can thwart it. We usually think about this in terms of “states’ rights” but in fact federalism, as the concept is sometimes called, runs both ways: the states should check the national government when necessary but the national government should also check the power of the states when they overreach, as they sometimes do.

    Advocates of states’ rights often cite the Tenth Amendment, which reads in its entirety “The powers not delegated to the United States by the Constitution, nor prohibited by it to the States, are reserved to the States respectively, or to the people.” Because the word “expressly” does not occur before “delegated” in the ratified version of the amendment, however, it is among the weakest parts of the Constitution.

    Traditionally, though, the states retained primary control of so-called “police powers,” the powers that form the legal basis for the economic lockdowns that have imprisoned most Americans for over a month now. Books have been written about this stuff so obviously I cannot relate all the details and nuances involved but ultimately they matter little in the present case. The key point is that police powers, national, state, or local, do not provide carte blanche to governments. Specifically, the Constitution constrains state police powers in numerous ways.

    Importantly, courts see Constitutional rights as tradeoffs between conflicting interests. So while the Constitution says that the national and state governments cannot infringe individual speech rights, they can pass laws that make it illegal for an individual, for example, to falsely yell “fire” in a crowded theater. The notion is that the property and natural rights of the theatergoers trump the free speech rights of the liar.

    Similar restrictions apply to the right of assembly. All Americans have the right to assemble with other Americans for any lawful purpose but state police powers, the positive duty of states to protect the physical safety of assemblers and non-assemblers, mean that governments may restrict assemblies through permit systems.

    Similar arguments are made to defend the pistol permit systems common in many states. They are bogus but show how far courts go to balance one person’s rights with those of others. If you believe that gun control laws should be followed because they are laws passed by democratically elected representatives you have missed the point of the Constitution, which, again, is to constrain policymakers, to protect individual Americans from the national and state governments and also other Americans.

    Just because a majority wants some policy doesn’t mean that that policy is a good idea, after all. I imagine at one point in March 2020 a majority of Americans might have thought it a good idea to deport, tax, infect, or maybe even kill Chinese-Americans in order to make “them” pay for what “they” did to “us.” (I don’t want to link to evidence of that … just look at your social media feeds if you need evidence.) That is a typically ugly human reaction to trauma but one that would have been proven empirically wrong as well as morally bankrupt and economically inane (sunk costs). Thankfully, the Constitution remained strong enough to prevent that horror.

    It did not, however, prove strong enough to prevent state governments from taking their police powers too far. They engaged in fancy word play to hide the fact that they acted without a shred of precedent. What they imposed is not a quarantine, which constrains the movement of sick people, nor a cordon sanitaire, which locks people into an afflicted area, nor a protective sequestration, which locks people out of an unafflicted area. Instead, they have implemented partial martial law (military rule essentially) by imprisoning Americans in their own homes without due process of law and stolen their property by shuttering their businesses. (Some recompense has been attempted but of course only bluntly and at a cost to all taxpayers, including those in states that did not shutter most businesses.)

    Remember, just because a state has general police powers doesn’t mean it can do whatever it wants, whenever it wants, simply because its actions are popular, or passed into law, or urged by some scientist. Imagine, for example, if some executive thought everyone ought to drink bleach, crazy as that seems, and actually mandated it. Would you do it? (Hint: Don’t do it! Even if some guy in a suit or lab coat tells you that you must.) What if some leader believed that the coronavirus is spread primarily by clothing and mandated that we all go naked in public, except for our masks and gloves of course? Or if one thought an EMP (electromagnetic pulse) would solve the problem (and destroy all computers in the process)?

    Any promulgation that violates the Constitution, in any way, shape, or form, is null and void. A federal judge has the authority to declare any state law or executive order unconstitutional and demand that it be revoked. Judges generally give governments broad leeway to protect “public health” but the policies must be rational and they must weigh the rights of all involved parties. Historically, many government epidemic responses never got litigated because the crises passed before suits could be brought and because quarantines, cordons, and sequestrations can make rational sense in specific situations. But, again, state governments for some reason have tried to combat the novel coronavirus with novel policies that come with huge negative side effects for everyone — workers, consumers, and taxpayers — and that have and will continue to cause deaths, minimization of which is the ostensible goal of lockdown policies.

    Why draconian lockdown rules have not yet been deemed unconstitutional I still do not know, but the fact that a former federal judge who teaches at Harvard apparently does not know the difference between a quarantine and a lockdown might provide a clue.

    Another clue might come from the fact that the courts, like the rest of the country, are run by the people most at risk of dying from COVID-19. But at least lawsuits have finally begun to be filed in significant numbers

    Once a federal court (especially SCOTUS, from which there is no appeal) declares a law unconstitutional, as SCOTUS has often done to state laws throughout US history, the political dynamic changes dramatically. States must comply or face that other side of federalism, where the U.S. government has the duty to protect American citizens from their own state governments under the 14th Amendment, one of the Constitution’s strongest.

    The national government has intervened before, most dramatically during the Civil War, but as recently as the Civil Rights Movement. In 1957, President Dwight D. Eisenhower federalized the National Guard of Arkansas in order to enforce federal court rulings in Little Rock. Arkansas duly passed laws, highly popular laws, mandating the “social distancing” of people with different skin tones, but that did not matter because the federal government has to weigh all the Constitutional rights of all Americans. No matter what.

    Similarly, President Lyndon B. Johnson federalized the Alabama National Guard in 1965 to protect peaceful protestors marching from Selma to Montgomery from Alabama state troopers. No joke, look it up.

    Federalization of state military forces has plenty of precedent: Trump has already federalized some national guard units to help with coronavirus relief efforts in Washington, California, and New York (not to enforce lockdowns) and to “protect” the southern border, something that every president since Ronald Reagan, including President Barack Obama, has done. Richard Nixon federalized some units too, in 1970 in response to a US postal strike. President George Washington himself led federalized militia troops to put down a federal tax rebellion in western Pennsylvania in 1794.

    If National Guard troops refused to follow the President’s orders, things could get ugly very quickly but hopefully matters will not come to that. After all, nobody (yet) wants to drag people from their homes, only to allow those who wish to engage in lawful commercial intercourse to do so, just like those students in Little Rock only wanted an equal education and those marchers simply wanted to exercise their First Amendment rights.

    In a sense, then, Trump was right when he claimed that he has the authority to force states to re-open their economies, provided a federal judge declares state lockdowns unconstitutional and state governments refuse to comply with his or her order. 

    In that scenario, the Constitution itself can be blamed for causing a spike in COVID-19 deaths should one occur after reopening.

    We will not be trading off lives for lucre at that point, we will be trading off lives for liberty, just as I argued at the outset of the crisis. Now, let a politician say that we must give up the Constitution to save one life. I dare him or her!


    Tyler Durden

    Sat, 05/02/2020 – 00:00

  • Macau Gaming Revenues Down 97% As Travel Restrictions Take Toll
    Macau Gaming Revenues Down 97% As Travel Restrictions Take Toll

    April gross gaming revenues at Macau casinos are down a staggering 96.8% year-on-year to MOP$754 million (US$87 million), as tourism to the gambling mecca has virtually disappeared due to travel restrictions barring the entry of all non-residents aside from those from mainland China, Hong Kong and Taiwan.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Meanwhile, China’s Guangdong Province introduced a mandatory 14-day quarantine for anyone returning from Macau, including Guangdong residents, according to Inside Asian Gaming.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    An attendant checks the temperature of a tourist at the entrance to the Galaxy Macau casino and hotel

    For the first four months of 2020, Macau’s GGR is down 68.7% year-on-year to MOP$31.24 billion compared with MOP$99.74 billion over the same period in 2019.

    Empty casinos

    As IAG notes in a separate Friday report, Macau casinos are virtual ghost towns – with the MGM Macau seeing the most foot traffic for the third week in a row out of 11 properties surveyed.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    On average, each gaming floor had around five players (37%) on tables and nine players (63%) on slots. MGM Macau was by far the busiest with 23 players at the tables and eight on slots, while The Venetian Macao came in second best with eight at the tables and 15 on slots. Once again, Sands Cotai Central was quietest with only a single slots player. –Inside Asian Gaming

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Macau has had 45 confirmed COVID-19 cases,  3,792 suspected cases, 37 recoveries, and zero deaths.


    Tyler Durden

    Fri, 05/01/2020 – 23:40

  • There Is No Exit From COVID-19, Only Containment
    There Is No Exit From COVID-19, Only Containment

    Authored by M.K.Bhadrakumar via The Indian Punchline blog,

    From this point, the buck stops with the Modi government, as the country trudges along the Covid highway. The political move to tap into the residual spirit of Indian federalism in our highly polarised polity helped so far, as the central government could inject into its decisions a look of national consensus. Whereas, the central government took all major decisions and most minor decisions. 

    However, the physical or material conditions vary from state to state while on the other hand, the time is approaching for the central government to make a thorny decision — when or how to restart the economy that was shut down almost overnight. 

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Clearly, an economy of India’s size won’t start back up simply because the government so decided. The refrain is that the restart will be gradual. But the devil lies in the details. Under what circumstances will businesses be allowed to reopen? It seems certain regions and businesses / industries may be put on a fast track. The MSME sector, which employs 12 crore workers need special attention.

    However, defining a yardstick will be difficult because the economy is a complex web of supply chains and interlocking pieces with a dynamics of their own. In an interview with the BBC Radio last week, the owner of Mahindra & Mahindra said he just couldn’t see any possibility of his company becoming operational before May 2021, since, amongst other things, it doesn’t make sense to make cars without the numerous suppliers and sales outlets first reviving and, importantly, until consumer confidence revives. 

    Clearly, epidemiologists’ recommendations or the government’s decisions will not be the last word. If a manufacturer in Chennai depends on a part made in Ahmedabad, for example, where the virus is still spreading, a government fiat to start production becomes meaningless. Simply put, it is going to take much longer to thaw the economy than it took to freeze it. 

    Then, there is the co-relation between a phased reopening of the economy and public health benchmarks. The best that can be said about the lockdown is that it probably slowed down the spread of the virus. But we’re chasing a chimera here. The authenticity of the figures available is in serious doubt. No one is to blame because tracking the coronavirus is difficult in such abnormal conditions of lockout.

    Today’s New York Times reported that the coronavirus death toll in the US is actually far higher than reported. The FT also came out with a stunning report today that Britain’s actual death toll could be plausibly in the region of 41000, as against hospital death data that show 17,337 people having died.

    The plain truth is that there is no “exit strategy” possible out of the lockdown in the absence of a vaccine or a proven therapy.

    “We will have to learn to live with the virus,” French Prime Minister Édouard Philippe put it starkly on April 28, while outlining his plan to start reopening the country at the National Assembly in Paris, until a vaccine or effective treatment is available.

    This stark reality ought to leave with the Indian states a free hand to develop their own road maps and decide either to persist in lockdown or pull themselves out in different ways and at different speed. What cannot be overlooked is that all this is taking place under the threat of a second global wave or outbreak — a disaster scenario.

    Epidemics come in waves. In the Spanish flu pandemic of 1918, the deadliest in history, the first wave was nothing in comparison with the virulent second wave, which left a horrific trail. No doubt, this is a Catch-22 situation — whether suppressing the virus further to stall a repeat outbreak or the lifting of restrictions quicker to limit the economic fallout should take precedence. The biggest risk is that you open too fast, too broadly. 

    The warning from Germany on lockdown easing conveys a sombre message. Only a week since the easing began in Germany with the reopening of shops (with all conceivable precautions put in place with characteristic Teutonic efficiency and thoroughness), it appears that Berlin may have to re-tighten its lockdown because the virus is spreading too fast.

    The virus reproduction rate – measuring how many the average person with Covid-19 infects – increased to 1.0. (Any value above 1.0 is seen as leading to exponential increase in infections.) Chancellor Angela Merkel is on record that a rise to 1.2 ( of the so-called “RE number”) could mean hospitals reach a crisis point in July: “If we get to 1.2 people, so everyone is infecting 20 per cent more, out of five people one infects two and the rest one, then we will reach the limit of our healthcare system in July”.

    Remember, this is one of the richest countries in the world — and a social democracy with a well developed healthcare system. It is a worrying sign. Surely, there are many variables swirling in the ether, and epidemiology is a complex business.

    The bottom line is that with no vaccine or cure insight, the government will have to decide how many deaths would be acceptable to restore a shattered economy. If the “RE” number lifts after an easing of restrictions on 3rd May and we’re forced to back-pedal, the economic damage will be amplified, leave aside the potential to demoralise the public’s resolve. 

    Mass testing of asymptomatic people appears to be the defining measure of success globally in tackling the virus, but in India, we lack the infrastructure for it. Time and testing are key and the longer a quarantine can be extended the better, and the more testing made available, the easier it would be to properly calibrate a reopening and respond to any new outbreak. No doubt, waiting until comprehensive testing provides a better map of where the infection has spread. 

    Devi Sridhar, the chair of global public health at Edinburgh Medical School and director of the Global Health Governance program, recently tweeted on the three options open. Sridhar wrote:

    “There are few short-term options.

    1: Let the virus go and thousands die.

    2: Lockdown and release cycles which will destroy economy and society.

    3: Aggressive test, trace, isolate strategy supported with soft physical distancing.”

    Having said that, the horrifying twin-reality still remains to be that an end to lockdown will by no means represent a return to normality, and, equally, a second, far more destructive wave is virtually an unavoidable possibility, notwithstanding the infection-reducing social distancing as a “new normal” in our daily life. 

    Under the circumstances, while dampening public expectations may not be the best option in politics, public morale is best sustained on the basis of transparent, realistic communication. This is a long haul. Make no mistake that in the absence of a safe and effective vaccine and/or a safe and effective drug to eliminate the COVID-19 infection once it has occurred, our narrative narrows down to a containment strategy attuned to Indian conditions, quintessentially – which, by no means, becomes an exit strategy.  


    Tyler Durden

    Fri, 05/01/2020 – 23:20

  • New Coronavirus Study Claims Outbreak Will Last Longer Than 2 Years As 2/3rds Of Humanity Infected
    New Coronavirus Study Claims Outbreak Will Last Longer Than 2 Years As 2/3rds Of Humanity Infected

    It’s been a while since we saw a study projecting an extremely dire endgame for the coronavirus outbreak.

    Yet, as the battle over whether to reopen immediately or wait a few more weeks becomes almost universally-partisan, a non-peer-reviewed study out of the midwest projected that the virus could kick around for another 2 years, and that the outbreak won’t subside until more than 60% of the global population is immune, Bloomberg reports.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    According to the research from the Center for Infectious Disease Research and Policy at the University of Minnesota, the coronavirus pandemic is likely to last as long as two years and won’t be controlled until about two-thirds of the world’s population is immune.

    The report was written by CIDRAP director Michael Osterholm and medical director Kristen Moore, Tulane University public health historian John Barry, and Harvard epidemiologist Marc Lipsitch, whose name has appeared on other important coronavirus research and commentary.

    Furthermore, because so many of those infected by the virus are asymptomatic or mostly asymptomatic, lockdowns and other aggressive measures might not be enough to stamp it out completely. This ‘invisibility’ is what makes SARS-CoV-2 such a challenging virus to contain.

    This might help explain why Sweden’s approach has been so popular, while offering perhaps the best argument yet for why states might as well reopen. According to the researchers, the virus will likely keep on coming in waves perhaps until the end of 2022, or even longer, as drug companies scramble to develop a vaccine, or a cure.

    Because of its ability to spread from person to person without the presence of symptoms, the virus will likely be much harder to control than the flu. The virus is deadlier than the flu, too – and certain mutated strains have been found to be significantly more virulent.

    According to the report, people might actually be at their most infectious before symptoms even start to appear.

    “Risk communication messaging from government officials should incorporate the concept that this pandemic will not be over soon,” they said, “and that people need to be prepared for possible periodic resurgences of disease over the next two years.”

    That’s the last thing equity traders probably want to hear on Friday.


    Tyler Durden

    Fri, 05/01/2020 – 23:00

  • Oregon County Says "No Whites Allowed"
    Oregon County Says "No Whites Allowed"

    Authored by Simon Black via SovereignMan.com,

    Are you ready for this week’s absurdity? Here’s our Friday roll-up of the most ridiculous stories from around the world that are threats to your liberty, your finances, and your prosperity… and on occasion, poetic justice.

    “No whites allowed” safe space for employees of Oregon county

    Do you know what’s been missing from the government’s response to coronavirus?

    You might think– ‘more testing kits’, or ‘honest information’.

    Nope. According to at least one county in the US state of Oregon, the biggest issue right now is establishing “safe spaces” where no white people are allowed.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    This is how Multnomah County, Oregon is rewarding its employees who are working during the pandemic: the county government announced that one of their departments will host “a grounding space for Black, Indigenous, and People of Color (BIPOC) employees to share, heal, connect, and get grounded in a space that is not dominated by whiteness.”

    The safe-space was announced in a daily report to county employees fighting coronavirus.

    When asked, a county spokesperson assured the public that it is perfectly legal to discriminate against their white employees.

    She explained, “The space excludes no one. It is based on shared lived experience not identity. The same way our employee resource groups for veterans, parents, and people with a disability are based on life experience and not identity. All are welcome here.”

    Except white people.

    Try to wrap your mind around that double-speak.

    Click here to read the full story.

    *  *  *

    Police testing “Pandemic Drones”

    Connecticut police will be testing a new “pandemic drone.”

    It is so named because the drone is “equipped with a specialized sensor and vision systems that can display fever/temperature, heart and respiratory rates, as well as detect people sneezing and coughing in crowds, and wherever groups of people may work or congregate.”

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    The company that builds the drones announced the partnership with police.

    “The technology can accurately detect infectious conditions from a distance of 190 feet as well as measure social distancing for proactive public safety practices.”

    If you already think the government expansion of power and surveillance has gone too far, just wait until Robocop gets involved.

    Click here for the full story.

    *  *  *

    Shocking: China loves the World Health Organization

    We have been talking about the World Health Organization a lot over the past couple weeks.

    Now, China decided to send an extra $30 million to the World Health Organization after the US announced a temporary funding freeze due to its missteps.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    A Chinese official said the gift to WHO “reflects the support and trust of the Chinese government and people for the WHO”.

    Just in case you needed another reason NOT to trust the World Health Organization.

    Click here for the full story.

    *  *  *

    Congressional Budget Office sees a $3.7 trillion deficit this year alone

    Tax revenue is drying up from a locked-down economy, at the same time spending is massively ballooning,

    Over the past years we’ve asked rhetorically: if the US runs trillion dollar deficits during the best of times, what happens during the tough times?

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Now that the world has hit the tough times, and the answer to that question is no surprise:The Congressional Budget Office estimates that this year’s budget deficit will be $3.7 trillion.

    That means the government will spend $3.7 trillion dollars more than they take in from taxes.

    To put that number in context, $3.7 trillion constitutes almost 20% of the entire US economy.

    Click here for the full story.

    *  *  *

    And to continue learning how to ensure you thrive no matter what happens next in the world, I encourage you to download our free Perfect Plan B Guide.


    Tyler Durden

    Fri, 05/01/2020 – 22:40

  • China Revives Centuries-Old Social Distancing Hat For Students
    China Revives Centuries-Old Social Distancing Hat For Students

    Students in eastern China wore social distancing hats as they returned to school following the coronavirus outbreak

    Images and videos have surfaced on popular Chinese social media platforms of students wearing self-made airplane winged hats on their heads and face masks in a classroom. 

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    “The longest ever winter vacation for Hangzhou’s elementary students ended this week, as first to third grades returned to the classroom. One school in the city, Yangzheng Primary School, gave its students an early assignment: fashion their own homemade “one-meter hats,” to remind the youngsters to stay a meter apart at all times,” reported RT News

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Social distancing hats were only to be taken off during lunchtime, local media said. While walking through doorways and narrow hallways, students had to navigate carefully. These hats have become mandatory in Hangzhou for all students. 

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    About two hours north up the coast, Shanghai welcomed back middle and high school students. Schools across China have reopened in the last several weeks. Wuhan, the hardest-hit area in China, reopened earlier this month. 

    It seems like social distancing hats have been around for centuries. Possible revival? 

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    Someone has made a social distancing hat with lasers. 

    American educators are studying how China is reopening schools amid the threats of another coronavirus wave. Social distancing hats are likely coming to the US when schools open. 


    Tyler Durden

    Fri, 05/01/2020 – 22:20

  • Why Michael Flynn Was Set Up
    Why Michael Flynn Was Set Up

    Authored by Roger Simon via The Epoch Times,

    The more we learn about the evils done to Michael Flynn, and they increase day by day, the more the FBI comes to resemble the KGB.

    Or is it the earlier version, the NKVD, whose leader Lavrentiy Beria famously declared “Show me the man and I’ll find you the crime.”

    James Comey – the head of the FBI during this period of extraordinary moral turpitude – never said anything anywhere near that pithy or memorable but he did Beria one better. He, with Peter Strzok, whose feckless emails to his paramour continue to amaze, and various other bit players – some revealed others yet to be revealed – of this sorry saga, didn’t just find a crime, they invented one.

    In all fairness, the Soviets, pre and post-Beria, often did the same, putting the darkness in “Darkness at Noon” with forced confessions as in the Metro-Vickers Affair (1933) when innocent Brits took the hit for the failure of Stalin’s “Five-Year Plan.”

    What was really going on with what was essentially the “forced confession” of Michael Flynn?

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Attorney Andrew C. McCarthy said on Tucker Carlson Thursday night that Flynn wasn’t the target. It was Trump. Flynn was just a “seasoned intelligence professional” (McCarthy’s words) who had to be implicated and put out of the way in order to reach the president, the real bull’s eye.

    That’s likely true, but it’s also likely that wasn’t the only reason. Flynn was by himself a target.

    During the transition, it is said Obama gave Trump two pieces of advice on whom he considered to be the current greatest threats to the United States, so the new president could be forearmed—Kim Jong-un and Michael Flynn.

    Michael Flynn? (I’d add several exclamation points and question marks, but it’s tacky.). Why would he be of anywhere near that importance to be put in the same conversation as the nuclear-armed dictator of North Korea?

    The answer, I believe, is a four letter word: Iran.

    The Iran Deal (Joint Comprehensive Plan of Action or JCPOA) was, with the Affordable Care Act, one of the twin pillars of Obama’s presidency on which he wanted to base his legacy.

    I’m not going into here the many theories of why, beyond that legacy, Obama was so attached to the JCPOA, but, by the time Trump was elected, it was already under heavy criticism due to the Islamic Republic’s violent activities in the Syrian civil war and elsewhere, arming Hezbollah, Hamas, the Houthis and other proxies with moneys that came via America and—naive as it now sounds—were supposed to be for the improvement of the lives of the Iranian people.

    Flynn was known to have been one of the most adamant opponents of the Iran Deal within the Obama administration in the first place and, with his military record as a three-star general plus aforementioned intelligence expertise, perhaps the most powerful one.

    So bringing down Flynn was a two-for, striking a blow at the new president while hopefully helping to preserve the Iran Deal. The second part didn’t work, but the first did… for a while.

    It’s therefore not totally surprising—what is these days?—that the newly-revealed documents have “SCO “ (Special Counsels Office) scrawled on them, among other incriminating notes indicating a “setup” was in the cards for Flynn.

    That means these statements exculpating Trump’s newly-appointed National Security Adviser went to Mueller’s office where someone (Mueller? Weissman?) ignored them and continued with what Trump has colloquially, and I think too loosely, branded a “hoax.” It was far more than that. It was a form of defenestration.

    When we look for the Mr. Big in all this, as we are tempted to do as—we can be more confident now— more rolls out, we should not settle for James Comey, as culpable as he may be. This bizarre character who self-identified on Twitter as the theologian Reinhold Niebuhr is not the end to the story.

    We are looking at a Netflix series with a plot that gets increasingly complicated. It goes past Comey and into the intelligence agencies and the State Department—a real life version of “Scandal” with, I regret to tell show runner Shonda Rhymes, the liberals and progressives almost always the villains.

    When it reaches Brennan and Obama, it may not even end there. Maybe even John Durham doesn’t know. (Kidding. I hope.)


    Tyler Durden

    Fri, 05/01/2020 – 22:00

  • "Gone In 60 Seconds" – 19 Children In North Carolina Steal 46 Cars From Dealerships 
    "Gone In 60 Seconds" – 19 Children In North Carolina Steal 46 Cars From Dealerships 

    Crime has increased during every recession since the 1950s. As people lose their jobs, they sometimes resort to theft and robbery to compensate for lost income. As a depression unfolds across America, a group of 19 kids, ages 19 to 16, have been accused by law enforcement for stealing over a million dollars in vehicles from dealerships under the cover of the pandemic. 

    The thefts began on March 17, and occurred across numerous auto dealerships in Winston-Salem, North Carolina, reported WXII NBC.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Winston-Salem Police said 18 break-ins were reported at dealerships in the region, along with two in Kernersville. 

    In total, 46 vehicles were stolen, worth about $1.14 million. Police said all but three were recovered. 

    It appears these kids were just shy of the 50 mark, something that movies buffs would know if they’ve seen the movie “Gone in 60 Seconds,” where Nicolas Cage had to steal 50 luxury cars in one night to save his brother from a crime lord. Now there were no reports suggesting the kids were working for an organized crime organization, that would take the cars and part them out or load them up in sea containers for overseas clients

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    But there’s something that is troubling to us. How the heck did they kids get a hold of the technology, remember, most cars today need key fobs or laser cut keys – to start these vehicles?

    Police have been denied custody orders from the Forsyth County Department of Juvenile Justice for the children. They said one adult was arrested, 19, Mekeal Binns, was charged with possession of a stolen motor vehicle, and remains in Forsyth County Detention Center.

    Here are some of the dealerships the kids targeted: 

    • Flow Honda, 2600 Peters Creek Parkway
    • Flow Lexus, 801 Jonestown Road
    • Enterprise Rentals, 3080 University Parkway
    • Parkway Ford, 3150 University Parkway
    • Flow Audi, 465 Silas Creek Parkway
    • Modern Infinity, 1500 Peters Creek Parkway
    • Bob King Kia, 1725 Link Road
    • Modern Toyota, 3178 Peters Creek Parkway
    • Volvo, 701 Peters Creek Parkway
    • Parkway Ford, 2104 Peters Creek Parkway
    • Flow Subaru, 425 Silas Creek Parkway
    • Flow Chevrolet, S. Stratford Road

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Map of dealerships that saw thefts 

    Authorities have asked the dealerships to better secure cars during the virus lockdowns. Looting was also seen in South Carolina in early April during statewide stay-at-home orders.


    Tyler Durden

    Fri, 05/01/2020 – 21:40

  • Johnstone: The Way Liberals Smear Tara Reade Is Everything Rape Survivors Fear
    Johnstone: The Way Liberals Smear Tara Reade Is Everything Rape Survivors Fear

    Authored by Caitlin Johnstone via Medium.com,

    Former Georgia state congresswoman and gubernatorial candidate Stacey Abrams, who is on the Joe Biden running mate short list and making no secret of her desire for the job, said on CNN Tuesday night that she did not believe rape allegations against Biden to be credible.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    “The New York Times did a deep investigation and they found that the accusation was not credible. I believe Joe Biden,” Abrams said when pressed on further corroborating evidence that Biden’s accuser Tara Reade had been talking about a sexual assault by the then-senator way back in the nineties.

    CNN’s Don Lemon pressed Abrams on the contradiction between her earlier “believe women” rhetoric about conservative Supreme Court Justice Brett Kavanaugh’s accuser, to which Abrams responded that Kavanaugh’s accuser was not given a fair hearing but Tara Reade was. Past tense. Over and done with now.

    Lemon did not ask why Abrams considers The New York Times the official arbiter of who was and was not raped. He did not challenge her false assertion that The New York Times concluded Reade’s accusation was “not credible”. He did not point out that the investigation by the The New York Times took place prior to the emergence of the corroborating evidence in question. Abrams was allowed to coolly insert a false, baseless narrative into public consciousness and move on.

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    In reality, The New York Times is not the authority on who has and has not been sexually assaulted. That’s not a thing.

    In reality, The New York Times did not conclude that Reade’s accusation is not credible, only that they “found no pattern of sexual misconduct by Mr. Biden, beyond the hugs, kisses and touching that women previously said made them uncomfortable” (which they later quietly edited down to “found no pattern of sexual misconduct by Mr. Biden” at the instruction of the Biden campaign, a very blatant act of journalistic malpractice).

    In reality, The New York Times has smeared Reade with a scandalous hit piece dismissing her allegations because she has written approvingly of Russian president Vladimir Putin, implying that either:

    (A) Reade is a Russian agent fabricating the allegations to help Trump, or

    (B) that it’s okay to rape women if they disagree with beltway consensus foreign policy.

    In reality, two new corroborating pieces of evidence have been added to the growing pile since The New York Times published its “investigation” into Reade’s allegations: footage of Reade’s mother anonymously calling in to Larry King Live in 1993 during Reade’s last month of employment with Biden saying that her daughter was considering going to the press with a very serious allegation against a very prominent senator, and a former neighbor saying that Reade had told her about the sexual assault in the mid-nineties.

    I have never been in the “always believe all women” camp; it’s a narrative that’s too easy to manipulate once you get enough people believing it. But at this point there are basically only two possibilities: either:

    (A) Tara Reade was going around lying to her closest confidants in the 1990s with the very long-term goal of one day thwarting Biden’s third presidential bid decades later, or

    (B) a powerful man sexually assaulted a woman. One of these, in my opinion, is a lot more probable than the other.

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    I’ve been avoiding writing much about Tara Reade, for a lot of reasons. Firstly I’m a survivor of multiple rapes and it brings up a lot of ouch for me, especially since whenever I write about rape as a problem I always get a deluge of highly triggered men (and sometimes one or two highly traumatized women) calling me a man-hater and saying all kinds of nasty things to me. Secondly I’ve been trying not to spend too much time on the details of an election we all know is fake anyway between two establishment candidates we already know are deeply depraved.

    But mostly I avoid the subject because it’s just so goddamn gross. It’s gross to watch liberals going around pretending they believe that Handsy Uncle Hair Sniffer would never dream of shoving his fingers into a woman without her consent. It’s gross watching the language of leftism being borrowed to defend pure, relentless victim smearing. It’s gross watching people who’ve built their political identities around pretending to care about women try to spin these allegations as Reade being dishonest for partisan reasons, when in reality that’s exactly what they themselves are doing.

    Due to my experiences with and sensitivity to the subject matter, going through this stuff feels kind of like getting punched in the privates over and over again. There are smears everywhere, from the establishment narrative managers to their brainwashed rank-and-file herd.

    Yesterday some “KHive” asshole told me that Reade is mentally ill and talking about her experience will probably drive her to suicide, citing a baseless smear by McResistance pundit Sally Albright as his evidence. There’s a Twitter thread with thousands of shares going around right now where some liberal combed through all Reade’s old tweets highlighting typos she made and claiming they show Reade tweeting “in a Russian accent”.

    It’s really, really gross.

    And it hurts.

    And there are definitely a whole lot of rape survivors experiencing the same thing about this story right now.

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    This is exactly the nightmare scenario that sexual assault survivors imagine when they contemplate coming forward. It’s why so many of them don’t. Especially when their attacker is powerful.

    Nobody wants to have their name dragged through the mud by widely esteemed mainstream news media outlets. Nobody wants to have their entire past and entire social media history dug through to find anything that can be spun in the most negative light possible. Nobody wants to be told over and over again that they’re a liar, that they’re crazy, that they’re confused, all because they know they were sexually assaulted and said so. Nobody wants what can easily be the most traumatic experience of their life turned into a weapon to bludgeon them with before jeering crowds of millions all around the country.

    And that sucks.

    It sucks because if we’re to build a healthy world we’re going to have to get rid of all the people who shouldn’t be in power, and the very first lot we should eliminate are the ones who abuse their power to assault the sexuality of other human beings. If you use your power to rape people, you will with absolute certainty use it to do other unconscionable things as well, so eliminating those who do so is the first step toward health. That’s step one, and we can’t even get there, because blind partisan hackery turns pussyhat-wearing liberals into a bunch of snarling male supremacists.

    I was 19 the first time I was raped. The last time I was 39. I never reported my attackers, for reasons the specifics of which I’m not interested in explaining or defending, but let’s just say that there are many messages you get sent by society telling you that if you report your rapist you are ruining a man’s life, destroying his family, career and future over one “mistake”. That it’s better just to suck it up because you’re strong and you can handle it.

    You are taught that if you report your rape, you will be treated like the criminal, and the “investigation” that will take place will not put its spotlight on the accused, but on you, the accuser. You will have to defend your life choices and your character when you’re in the process of attempting to recover from a deeply harmful assault. You are taught that if you report these things that it’s you that will be shunned and shamed by members of your own tribe. And if the person is powerful, then you also know that this will likely end your career.

    All these things are happening to Tara Reade right now. None of that has changed. Millions of young girls are being sent that message, once again, all across America, on screens large and small. They are being shown that if you accuse someone who has power over you of rape, you will be demonized and attacked, even by people who say they care about you, about a profoundly sensitive matter involving the most traumatic thing you’ve ever experienced.

    And the thing is, that message is not a false message. You absolutely can be made the subject of vicious attacks if you accuse the wrong person of raping you. Attacks which press all your most painful buttons. Attacks which will try to convince you that you are insane. Attacks which will try to drive you insane.

    And that sucks.

    And I don’t know what can be done about it.

    *  *  *

    Thanks for reading! The best way to get around the internet censors and make sure you see the stuff I publish is to subscribe to the mailing list for my website, which will get you an email notification for everything I publish. My work is entirely reader-supported, so if you enjoyed this piece please consider sharing it around, liking me on Facebook, following my antics onTwitter, checking out my podcast on either YoutubesoundcloudApple podcasts or Spotify, following me on Steemit, throwing some money into my hat on Patreon or Paypal, purchasing some of my sweet merchandise, buying my books Rogue Nation: Psychonautical Adventures With Caitlin Johnstone and Woke: A Field Guide for Utopia Preppers. For more info on who I am, where I stand, and what I’m trying to do with this platform, click here. Everyone, racist platforms excluded, has my permission to republish, use or translate any part of this work (or anything else I’ve written) in any way they like free of charge.

    Bitcoin donations:1Ac7PCQXoQoLA9Sh8fhAgiU3PHA2EX5Zm2

     


    Tyler Durden

    Fri, 05/01/2020 – 21:20

  • Newsom "Put Politics Over Data" With Beach Closure Order, Newport Mayor Says
    Newsom "Put Politics Over Data" With Beach Closure Order, Newport Mayor Says

    Update: It’s not just Newport Beach…

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    *  *  *

    Authored by Ivan Pentchoukov via The Epoch Times,

    A mayor in California’s Newport Beach has accused Gov. Gavin Newsom of placing politics over data with the decision to close the beaches in Orange County.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Mayor Will O’Neill pointed to data showing that every beach community in Los Angeles County – where the beaches have been closed for a month – had higher rates of infection than Orange County’s open beach communities.

    “Without speaking to a single local official in Newport Beach, Governor Newsom has put politics over data, and substituted his will for our judgment from 428 miles away in Sacramento,” O’Neill wrote on Twitter.

    “Los Angeles County closed their beaches over a month ago and data now shows that every single Los Angeles County beach community has a higher per capita COVID infection rate than Orange County’s open beach communities.”

    “Any restriction that invokes health and safety to shut down freedom of movement needs to be grounded in data to show that such activities are direct threats to health and safety. That showing was not made today. OC’s forty-two miles of beaches can and should be safely opened,” O’Neill added.

    Newsom ordered all beaches in Orange County to be closed on April 30, explaining that “we’re guided by health.”

    “We’re guided by your health and the health of others,” Newsom said.

    Newport Beach City Council earlier this week voted to reject an ordinance that would have closed beaches for the next three weekends.

    There were over 1,000 emails sent to city officials expressing views on the matter before the vote, including 664 asking for beaches to stay open and 391 wanting them closed.

    The council asked city workers to ramp up enforcement of social distancing measures, which include people staying six feet from individuals they don’t live with. More police officers and lifeguards will be on the beaches in the coming days, the city said in a press release.

    “The vast majority of the beach visitors this weekend were practicing social distancing, but many were not,” the city said in its statement.

    According to statistics shared during the council meeting, some 90,000 people went to beaches over the past weekend.

    San Clemente, where some beaches are also open, delayed taking action on a similar proposal. The city announced beaches were reopening on April 25.

    Crowds gathered on the beaches on April 25 and 26 as temperatures soared and many beaches nearby remained closed, including Los Angeles County beaches and most in San Diego County.

    Newsom, a Democrat, reacted to photographs showing throngs enjoying the sand, calling them “an example of what not to see” and “what not to do” if state residents want to continue making progress against the CCP (Chinese Communist Party) virus.

    “The reality is we are just a few weeks away, not months away, from making measurable and meaningful changes to our stay-at-home order,” the governor said, referring to his harsh mandate that has largely kept people confined in their homes since mid-March.

    “This virus doesn’t take the weekends off. This virus doesn’t go home because it’s a beautiful sunny day around our coasts,” he added.


    Tyler Durden

    Fri, 05/01/2020 – 21:00

  • What You Need To Know About Govt. Grants, Loans, & Forbearance To Survive The Pandemic Economy
    What You Need To Know About Govt. Grants, Loans, & Forbearance To Survive The Pandemic Economy

    Authored by Diane Kennedy via The Organic Prepper blog,

    We learned a lot from the 2008-2009 Great Recession. As a CPA and real estate investor, I learned that sometimes there was absolutely nothing you can do to save a bad deal. I learned that people often hang on to an old way of life much too long, putting their future in jeopardy. I learned that some people never recover, emotionally, from a financial loss while others bounce back, stronger than ever.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    It might be too early to make your walk-away plan, but it’s never too soon to look at your options. Where are you right now?

    Your goal right now is to look at how you can have more money coming in and less money going out. There are some government programs and lender programs to help. Remember, though, that these are only temporary fixes. But as a taxpayer, you may be eligible to get this money and it may help you survive the pandemic financially.

    (Editor’s NoteI’m well aware that many people have no interest whatsoever in taking help from the government. This being said, you may be eligible for certain programs that have recently been introduced. This money may help you survive if you’ve lost your job or lost income due to the pandemic. Nobody is twisting your arm and forcing you to take this money but if you are struggling to survive financially, here’s what you need to know about these temporary fixes. ~ Daisy)

    As we move into a new economy, you’re most likely going to need new strategies. For now, let’s get you through the next couple of months. Then, look at what’s next for you and your family.

    Let’s start with the money that comes into your household. Cash flow in.

    The Government Economic Stimulus Payment

    The economic stimulus payments have begun to be distributed, but it’s an uneven roll-out.

    If the IRS doesn’t have your direct deposit information, they’re going to mail a check to the address you used on the last tax return you filed. But it could take a while. They’ve estimated it will take 5 weeks to get all of the checks mailed that they know about.

    If you want your payment faster, go to the irs.gov portal. If you haven’t filed 2018 or 2019 because the amount of taxable income you had was under the income threshold ($12,200) click on the “non-filer” button. If you have filed 2018 or 2019 and the IRS doesn’t have your direct deposit information, click on “Get My Money.” This is also the portal you’ll use to find out the status of your payment.

    If they can’t find your record, it could be because they think you weren’t due a payment, because you have SSI (social security disability), VA benefits, or because of some glitch in their system. Just keep checking back at irs.gov.

    The stimulus payments are not a lot and, at this point, it’s just a one-time thing. But it is something.

    Pandemic Unemployment Insurance (PUI)

    A more interesting program is the Pandemic Unemployment Insurance (PUI) addition to regular unemployment. Under PUI there are some important changes:

    • The waiting period for unemployment is gone,

    • The federal government will give you an additional $600 per week on top of what the state gives you.

    • The additional $600/week will last from 3/29/2020 -7/25/2020,

    • Self-employed persons and people who didn’t work the minimum amount that is normally required for unemployment will qualify,

    • General unemployment insurance payments will last for 39 weeks.

    The states are responsible for making this happen and most of them have not done so yet. It doesn’t mean you won’t get the money. It just means you have to wait a little longer.

    Reduce the cash going out

    Now, let’s look at what you can do to reduce the cash going out of your house.

    The most common forms of debt payments in the American household are home mortgage, car payments, and credit card payments. There are some options to reduce or delay some of your current payments.

    It doesn’t mean less debt. In fact, it usually means more debt because of additional interest costs, But at least you don’t have to pay right now.

    Mortgage payments

    The term for not paying your mortgage is forbearance. That means your mortgage payments are not currently due. Currently, government-backed loans are mandatory 3-12 months forbearance periods.

    If you have a Fannie Mae or Freddie Mac backed loan, the lender is required to give you several options for paying back the missed payments. This is important! The last thing you want is to skip 3 months of payments through forbearance, and then find out the lender is going to collect all 4 payments in the next month or start foreclosure right away.

    These options they are now told they have to offer are:

    • A loan extension so that the missed payments are added to the end of the mortgage

    • A loan modification so that the monthly mortgage payments are reduced

    • A repayment plan so that the forborne amount is spread out over several months’ time

    • A full lump sum repayment

    For more information on these new rules, go to this article.

    If you’re not sure what type of loan you have, you can contact Fannie or Freddie directly to see if your loan qualifies.

    • Fannie Mae. 1-800-2FANNIE (8am to 8pm EST) KnowYourOptions.com/loanlookup › …

    • Freddie Mac. 1-800-FREDDIE (8am to 8pm EST) FreddieMac.com/mymortgage ›

    Please note these rules only apply to government-backed mortgages.  Private mortgages don’t have these required options and may demand payment in full after the forbearance period ends.

    Car payments

    Do you have a car payment that you can’t make? A number of car loan companies and leasing companies have programs in place to delay or extend the term of your contract.

    Check in at https://cars.usnews.com/cars-trucks/coronavirus-payment-relief to see if your lender is offering such a deal. Communication is always best in cases like this. Here’s an article about talking to creditors.

    Credit cards

    Many credit card companies are coming forward with forbearance programs as well. They may allow you to put off making a payment, make a smaller payment, reduce your interest rate or eliminate late fees. Some credit card issuers have also agreed to not report the late payments to credit bureaus. That means your credit score wouldn’t be impacted, at least not by this.

    You can find out more information on these programs at https://www.foxbusiness.com/money/credit-card-forbearance-programs-bills

    What happens next?

    Now that you’ve got the next few months at least settled down, the question is, now what?

    First – don’t depend on the government, but be prepared to get the money they’re offering. The new coronavirus economic stimulus and tax acts have created a whole new group of grants, loans, and tax breaks. We call these CoronaTax.

    Congress has given us four CoronaTax bills. The first one dealt mainly with funding for important health agencies. The gold is in the next two bills.

    From the book, CoronaTax: Free Money! New Opportunities!, the purpose of these next two bills is:

    • Keeping you employed (if you currently have a job),

    • Keeping your employees working (assuming you have a business)

    • If you can’t work now (or your business can’t), getting you some income fast,

    • Providing sick & paid leave for your employees, with the government’s help, and

    • Giving businesses special tax breaks. (source)

    Get your family stable financially. Then learn about what’s possible for the next step. Form a strategy and implement perspective.

    We’ve got a new economy coming. Be prepared with knowledge, strategies, and action.


    Tyler Durden

    Fri, 05/01/2020 – 20:40

  • "The Last Ship": US Navy Keeping COVID-19 "Clean" Carrier Out At Sea Indefinitely 
    "The Last Ship": US Navy Keeping COVID-19 "Clean" Carrier Out At Sea Indefinitely 

    The US Navy is keeping warships with crew deemed “clean” — that is, completely free of coronavirus cases — deployed for an additional length of time with no port calls and no deployment end date amid a worsening crisis aboard other ships, as Reuters reports:

    On any given day, the U.S. aircraft carrier Harry S. Truman can be found off the Atlantic coast of the United States, probably somewhere between Virginia and Florida. Its crew would love to come home to their families. But they can’t. They’re just too valuable right now.

    That’s because the Truman is a “clean” ship, free from the coronavirus thanks to a longer-than-expected deployment at sea that started in November. The deployment has kept its battle-ready 4,500 crew out of reach of a pandemic that is wreaking havoc elsewhere in the Navy.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    The Norfolk, Va-based Harry S. Truman in Atlantic Ocean. US Navy image

    At this point at least four US Navy aircraft carriers — the USS Theodore Roosevelt, the USS Ronald Reagan, the USS Carl Vinson and the USS Nimitz — have reported cases of coronavirus, crimping their operations. Most notably the Roosevelt had over a month ago been diverted from its original mission in the West Pacific, and now has 1,102 sailors that have tested positive for COVID-19.

    Reuters further reports US officials have confirmed more than two dozen warships now have crew with coronavirus infections while at port.

    And this week the guided-missile USS Kidd which arrived in San Diego Tuesday at least 78 active cases out of a 330-person crew, or about 25% of total personnel on board, reports the San Diego Union-Tribune

    We noted last month that Chinese state media appeared gleeful that US carriers and battle ships are seeing operations increasingly hampered by COVID-19, with the PLA Navy recently boasting it’s own missions are “not impacted”.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Guided-missile destroyer USS Kidd (DDG 100) arrives in San Diego, April 28, 2020. U.S. Navy Photo

    “This is a really weird situation for us,” USS Truman ship commander Captain Kavon Hakimzadeh told Reuters in a phone interview. Anxiety is growing among the crew over what’s essentially become an ‘indefinite’ deployment with uncertainty over when they’ll return to port, as their families at home and on shore navigate local lockdown orders, given the Navy has put no date on the ship’s return.

    “The crew members interviewed said they understood why the Truman needed to remain offshore to ensure combat readiness,” Reuters continues. “The virus ripped through another carrier, the Theodore Roosevelt, infecting more than 1,100 sailors.”

    And further, “Being so close to home is a constant reminder for sailors of the strain on their families in the United States, where in just months coronavirus-related deaths have reached at least 62,800, surpassing the number of Americans killed in the Vietnam War.”

    If this bizarre scenario of a whole crew stuck indefinitely adrift at sea due to a pandemic devastating civilization on land sounds familiar, the report includes this somewhat eerie reminder from Hollywood:

    In a world awash with dark Hollywood dramas, one television show that’s been popular among the Truman crew is “The Last Ship.” It imagined a U.S. Navy destroyer that was at sea, in radio silence, when a deadly pandemic devastated the world.

    Senior Chief Petty Officer Kevin Dublynn said one of his shipmates had mentioned it to him.

    “He felt like, ‘Oh, man. This is just like ‘The Last Ship’ show,’” Dublynn said. “I was like, ‘No, it’s not,’” adding the Navy had plenty of ships.

    Steven Kane, the TV show’s co-creator and executive producer, said the 2014-2018 TNT drama explored how ill-intentioned people could exploit a pandemic and how easily a virus could wipe out a ship.

    An outbreak wipes out civilization on land while a “last ship” is at sea:

    No doubt there are other “clean” Navy ships out there, so it’s very likely the number of ‘indefinite’ deployments at sea will grow. 

    This as America’s rivals look on closely, especially China and Russia, eager to see just how severely operations and military readiness will be impacted across the Navy and Department of Defense. 


    Tyler Durden

    Fri, 05/01/2020 – 20:20

  • Venezuela's Gold Vaults Empty As Iran Takes Bullion For Oil Services Rendered
    Venezuela's Gold Vaults Empty As Iran Takes Bullion For Oil Services Rendered

    With cash levels dwindling and its once mighty oil sector on its knees and needing help desperately, OilPrice.com’s Tsvetana Paraskova reports that Nicolas Maduro’s regime in Venezuela is paying Iran in gold for help with Venezuela’s crumbling oil industry, U.S. Special Representative for Venezuela Elliott Abrams said at a conversation with Washington-based think tank Hudson Institute this week.

    Venezuela’s oil output is at record lows…

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    And, its cash reserves are at record lows

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    And since, over the past few weeks, Iran has been sending more and more planes to Venezuela, Abrams said that “our guess is that they are being paid in gold,” he said.

    “Those planes that are coming in from Iran that are bringing things for the oil industry are returning with the payments for those things: gold,” Abrams said.

    In April alone, Venezuela loaded 9 tons of gold, worth around US$500 million, on airplanes for Iran, in exchange for Iranian help for repairing Venezuela’s crumbling refineries, sources with direct knowledge of the matter told Bloomberg this week.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    We suspect Venezuela’s gold vaults are running extremely dry. At last count, in August 2019, it was around 100 tons…

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    But that was before Maduro started to dramatically increase his sales of Venezuelan Gold around the world.

    [ZH: It makes perfect sense for Iran to demand payment in gold since even the official Bolivar is utterly worthless. For a sense of just how gold is supposed to behave in a hyperinflationary environment, we note that in January 2010, a Venezuelan could by an ounce of gold for 1000 so-called “Strong”-Bolivars.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Today, that same ounce of yellow metal costs your average Venezuelan 300 billion “strong”-Bolivars (which were devalued by 1000:1 in March 2018) or 300 million ‘new’- Bolivars…]

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    On Thursday, U.S. Secretary of State Mike Pompeo also mentioned the Iranian-Venezuelan cooperation, saying, “We are deeply concerned about Iran’s destabilizing behavior in Venezuela- over the last few days, Iranian aircraft have transferred unknown support to the regime.”

    “Over the last few days, multiple aircraft belonging to Mahan Air have transferred unknown support to the Maduro regime. Birds of a feather. This is the same terrorist airline that Iran uses to move weapons and fighters around the Middle East. These flights must stop, and countries should do their part to deny overflights, just as many have already denied landing rights to this sanctioned airline,” Secretary Pompeo said at a press conference earlier this week.

    The U.S. has stepped up pressure on the Maduro regime in recent months, the latest being ordering U.S. supermajor Chevron to wind down its Venezuelan operations by the end of the year. Halliburton has also said it will suspend most of its operations in Venezuela, after Washington tightened the noose around Caracas by banning U.S. oil companies operating in the country from drilling for oil, transporting it, or providing any equipment for use in Venezuela.


    Tyler Durden

    Fri, 05/01/2020 – 20:00

  • Gundlach Stunned To Learn Fed Hasn't Purchased A Single Corporate Bond Yet
    Gundlach Stunned To Learn Fed Hasn't Purchased A Single Corporate Bond Yet

    Yesterday, when discussing the Fed’s latest $6.66 trillion balance sheet, we said that more than one month after the Fed announced its backstop for investment grade bonds and ETFs (followed shortly after by an expansion into fallen angel junk bonds), “what is most interesting is that so far the Fed has not yet purchased a single corporate bond, whether investment grade of fallen angel junk. In other words, without lifting a finger, the Fed’s “whatever it takes” jawboning managed to inject trillions “in value” in countless debt and credit products.”

    Today, none other than the bond king Jeff Gundlach made this discovery, tweeting that “the Fed has not actually bought any Corporate Bonds via the shell company set up to circumvent the restrictions of the Federal Reserve Act of 1913.  Must be the most effective jawboning success in Fed history if that is true.”

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    He’s right: the Fed – or rather Blackrock which is doing the Fed’s bidding in the open market as part of operation Covid bailout- has indeed not purchased a single bond, whether IG or HY.

    And why should the Fed get its hands dirty and enter the corporate bond market if all it takes is a promise that it could enter the market. There is just one problem: if the lack of purchases comes as a surprise to Gundlach, what about the rest of the market, where the majority of investors appear rather confident that they are merely flipping bonds to the Fed when in reality they are just trading among each other in piece of paper that are already massively overvalued as we discussed last weekend in “Unprecedented Pace Of Corporate Debt Issuance Has Crippled Corporate Fundamentals“, and where as Morgan Stanley pointed out, leverage is already exploding even as bond prices soar!

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    However, now that the Fed’s unwillingness to enter the market is a “thing”, it may leave Powell with no other choice than to start buying.

    In fact, as Bank of America writes today in “A Note To Fed” – a report apparently meant to precipitate the Fed’s decision to get off the fence and to start waving it in “a lot of investors (including non-credit ones) have bought IG corporate bonds the past two months on the expectation they can sell to you. So would be helpful if you soon began buying broadly and in size.”

    The problem, if the Fed does not start “buying broadly and in size” is that the bond market may soon suffer from a very painful indigestion of the record IG bond issuance that has taken place in the past two months, first profiled here.

    And, as BofA updates, new investment grade issuance reached another monthly record of $296.6bn in April following a $261.4bn tally in March – significantly above the previous record of $175.5bn from January 2017 – bringing the YTD cumulative to $807.1bn, the fastest start to the year ever and 82% ahead of the pace in 2019.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Some more details on what all this new debt is being put to use for:

    Refinancing-related issuance remains high at $100.6bn, including $52.4bn going towards commercial paper and credit revolver repayments. In addition we estimate $104.1bn of COVID-19 liquidity-related issuance from banks and companies that drew credit lines or mentioned liquidity in the use of proceeds language, and $58.6bn of frontloaded issuance for M&A, share buybacks, dividends, and capex (some deals fit multiple categories). New issue performance improved in April. With $59.4bn of redemptions in April, net issuance totaled $237.2bn when defined as gross issuance minus maturities, calls, tenders and open market repurchases.

    Use of funds notwithstanding, the bigger issue is that so far the record supply glut has only been made possible due to the seemingly endless IG demand that has enabled this unprecedented issuance flood. However, if investors start asking when and how they will be able to flip all this massively overpriced paper to the dumbest, price-indiscriminate buyer in the room – i.e., the Fed – first the demand and then the supply could collapse.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Which begs the question: while Mario Draghi managed to get away for years with merely vowing to do “whatever it takes” to restore confidence in the euro, will Powell be able to repeat the ECB veteran’s record and cause another massive bond bubble a la what Boeing has managed to do in just a few short weeks with its latest $25BN bond issuance

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    … without lifting a finger, and instead let his successor deal with the even bigger debt crisis that is guaranteed to follow as the average IG credit metric is now smack in the middle of what was one junk bond territory?


    Tyler Durden

    Fri, 05/01/2020 – 19:59

  • Maryland Deploys National Guard To Protect Covid Tests From Feds
    Maryland Deploys National Guard To Protect Covid Tests From Feds

    Maryland Gov. Larry Hogan told the Washington Post in a live interview on Thursday that thousands of COVID-19 tests obtained by the state from South Korea are protected in a secret location by the National Gaurd. 

    “The National Guard and the State Police are both guarding these tests at an undisclosed location,” Hogan said. 

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Maryland Gov. Larry Hogan

    “There had been reports of, for example in Massachusetts, Gov. Charlie Baker told the story of his planeload …with masks was basically confiscated by the federal government,” he said, adding that, “it was a little bit of a concern” knowing the federal government would attempt to seize the tests. 

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    “We spent about 22 days and nights dealing with this whole transaction with Korea. We dealt with the Korean Embassy, folks at the State Department … and our scientists on both sides trying to, you know, figure out these tests,” Hogan said, noting that the purchase of the tests was also in coordination with the Food and Drug Administration (FDA).

    “And then at the last moment, I think 24 hours before, we got the sign-off from the FDA and Border and Customs, to try to make sure that we landed this plane safely,” he continued.

    According to Hogan, the plane was instructed to land at Baltimore/Washington International Thurgood Marshall Airport rather than airports in Washington because it would be harder for the federal government to seize the tests:

    “We landed it there with a large contingent of Maryland National Guard and Maryland State Police, because this was an enormously valuable payload. It was like Fort Knox to us, because it’s going to save the lives of thousands of our citizens,””he said.

    Hogan said National Guard troops are currently protecting the tests at an undisclosed location. “These things are being distributed; they’re [National Guard] helping us distribute the tests,” he said. We showed in March how the National Guard was deployed across the Baltimore Metropolitan Area as cases and deaths continued to soar in the state. 

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Baltimore City COVID-19 Dashboard

    It was noted in the interview that Maryland received upwards of 500,000 tests from South Korea. It was reported last month that China continues to flood the world with defective medical equipment. Washington state purchased thousands of tests from China, which some turned out to be “contaminated.” 


    Tyler Durden

    Fri, 05/01/2020 – 19:40

  • Get Russian…
    Get Russian…

    Authored by Caitlin Johnstone via Medium.com,

    Dissent is Russian, or haven’t you heard?

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Dissent is Russian.

    Peace activism is Russian.

    Exposing war crimes is Russian.

    Inconveniencing Democrats is Russian.

    Tara Reade? Russian.

    Julian Assange? Russian.

    Jill Stein? Russian.

    Tulsi Gabbard? Russian.

    Russia? You bet your sweet ass that’s Russian.

    Conspiracy theories are Russian.

    Alternative media are Russian.

    It’s Russian to ask questions.

    It’s Russian to reveal objective facts.

    It’s Russian to tell the truth.

    Truth is Russian in an empire of lies.

    If truth is Russian, I don’t want to be Australian.

    If truth is Russian, you can call me Svetlana.

    If truth is Russian, then I will ascend to the clouds by climbing a Tolstoy novel, kicking my feet out in front of me with my bum low to the ground balancing a bottle of vodka atop a fur hat whilst shouting “Stallone was the bad guy in Rocky IV” until my voice is hoarse.

    If truth is Russian, then let’s all get Russian.

    Get as Russian as possible.

    Get aggressively Russian.

    Get offensively Russian.

    Get Russianly Russian.

    Get so Russian it hurts.

    Get so Russian they write Palmer Report articles about you.

    Get so Russian that Rachel Maddow spits your name like it’s poison.

    Get so Russian that Putin calls you and says tone it down.

    Get so Russian that Khabib Nurmagomedov has nightmares about fighting you.

    Camus said “The only way to deal with an unfree world is to become so absolutely Russian that your very existence is an act of  rebellion,” or something like that.

    So get Russian, baby.

    Fold your arms and get low on the dance floor.

    Get low, shorty,

    get low, low, low.

    Get low,

    get low,

    and get Russian…

    *  *  *

    Thanks for reading! The best way to get around the internet censors and make sure you see the stuff I publish is to subscribe to the mailing list for my website, which will get you an email notification for everything I publish. My work is entirely reader-supported, so if you enjoyed this piece please consider sharing it around, liking me on Facebook, following my antics onTwitter, checking out my podcast on either YoutubesoundcloudApple podcasts or Spotify, following me on Steemit, throwing some money into my hat on Patreon or Paypal, purchasing some of my sweet merchandise, buying my books Rogue Nation: Psychonautical Adventures With Caitlin Johnstone and Woke: A Field Guide for Utopia Preppers. For more info on who I am, where I stand, and what I’m trying to do with this platform, click here. Everyone, racist platforms excluded, has my permission to republish, use or translate any part of this work (or anything else I’ve written) in any way they like free of charge.

    Bitcoin donations:1Ac7PCQXoQoLA9Sh8fhAgiU3PHA2EX5Zm2


    Tyler Durden

    Fri, 05/01/2020 – 19:20

  • Kroger Begins Limiting Purchases On Ground Beef And Pork In Some Stores
    Kroger Begins Limiting Purchases On Ground Beef And Pork In Some Stores

    From bank run to bacon run.

    In an ominous confirmation of the just published article “Why The Meat Shortages Are Going To Be Much Worse Than Most Americans Are Anticipating“, the slowdown at meat processing plants from the coronavirus outbreak has led to a wave of panic-shopping at supermarkets, and some grocery stores are now imposing limits on meat purchases.

    In a Friday email, supermarket chain Kroger said that it has put “purchase limits” on ground beef and fresh pork at some of its stores following growing concerns over meat shortages due to coronavirus-induced supply disruptions. Other large grocers say they expect to be out of stock on different types of cuts soon.

    The world’s biggest meat companies, including Smithfield Foods, Cargill, Conagra, JBS and Tyson Foods have halted operations at about 20 slaughterhouses and processing plants in North America as workers fall ill, stoking global fears of a meat shortage.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    The United Food and Commercial Workers International Union estimated on April 28 that 20 meatpacking and food processing workers have died so far, and just today at least 180 workers tested positive for the virus at a Tyson plant in Washington. The union said last week the closures have resulted in a 25% reduction in pork slaughter capacity and a 10 percent reduction in beef slaughter, the Epoch Times reported.

    Earlier this week, President Trump signed an executive order compelling meat plants to stay open during the crisis, which however was met with stiff resistance by labor unions, due to the lack of proper health standards at the plants.

    Adding to the challenge, meat sales are up around 40% on recent weeks, according to data from grocery industry trade group FMI. “The demand for product also makes it difficult to keep the store shelves stocked as they were at pre-pandemic levels,” said a group spokesperson.

    While grocers don’t expect meat shortages – yet – they say they are adjusting to the spike in demand and the difficulties securing supply, similar to McDonalds which said on Thursday it had started to ration meet amid supply chain “concerns.”

    “We feel good about our ability to maintain a broad assortment of meat and seafood for our customers because we purchase protein from a diverse network of suppliers,” said a Kroger representative. “There is plenty of protein in the supply chain. However, some processors are experiencing challenges.”

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    A spokesperson for Wegman’s said, “we may not have every product cut or variety available for the next few weeks,” but the company does not anticipate any shortages. We’ll check back in a few weeks to see if the shortages have begun.

    The slowdown is also hitting smaller chains: New York City grocery chain Morton Williams’ co-owner Avi Kaner said the “most severe shortages have been with packaged cold cuts,” because consumers want pre-packaged items right now instead of meat from the deli counter. “Beef prices have increased the most, followed less so by pork and poultry.”

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Worker cleans an empty display for eggs inside a Ralphs supermarket in Los Angeles, Calif., on March 15, 2020

    At Karns Food in Pennsylvania, the chain has put limits on ground beef and some fresh chicken. “We do anticipate periodic out of stocks and higher prices in the coming weeks,” said Andrea Karns, a representative of Karns Food in Pennsylvania.

    While meat may be harder to find, Karns is using the shortage as an opportunity to expand its seafood selection, including fresh lobsters from Maine and Maryland crabs. Now if only the vast majority of America’s population which hasn’t worked in over a month could afford lobsters and crabs…


    Tyler Durden

    Fri, 05/01/2020 – 19:10

  • Biden Bumbles Over Tara Reade Answers During Tense MSNBC Interview
    Biden Bumbles Over Tara Reade Answers During Tense MSNBC Interview

    Joe Biden’s personnel records from his days in the Senate have come under the microscope after former staffer Tara Reade says she filed a formal sexual assault complaint against him – an allegation he officially denied on Friday.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Biden, who graduated from the University of Delaware and served as Delaware’s senator, transferred the records to the university in 2011 – which announced a change to their expected unsealing shortly before Biden announced his bid for the White House. Meanwhile, Biden has refused to allow a search of the roughly 1,875 boxes of documents and 415 gigabytes of electronic records, as detailed yesterday by Jonathan Turley.

    Biden’s excuse? That the records could expose unrelated things he’s said or done which could be ‘taken out of context’ and used against him before the November election.

    On Friday, however, Biden stammered through an awkward MSNBC interview in which host Mika Brzezinski pressed him on whether he would allow a narrow search for records only pertaining to Tara Reade.

    Brzezinski: Personnel records aside, are you certain there was nothing about Tara Reade in those records – and if so, why not approve a search of her name in those records?

    Biden: Approve a search of her name?

    Brzezinski: Yes, and reveal anything that might be related to Tara Reade in the University of Delaware records?

    Biden: There is nothing. They wouldn’t… They’re not there. And I, I, I… you know, I don’t understand the point you’re trying to make! There are no personnel records by definition.

    Brzezinski: I’m just talking about her name, not anybody else in those records – a search for that. [awkward silence] Why not do a search for Tara Reade’s name in the University of Delaware records.

    Biden: Look, I mean, who does that search?

    Brzezinski: Perhaps the University of Delaware?

    Watch (University of Delaware question starts at 55 seconds):

    Turley weighs in:

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.jshttps://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js


    Tyler Durden

    Fri, 05/01/2020 – 18:55

  • SUVs Are Being Parked In The Middle Of The Ocean As Auto Inventory Crisis Deepens
    SUVs Are Being Parked In The Middle Of The Ocean As Auto Inventory Crisis Deepens

    What happens when you have an auto glut that simply won’t go away? What do you do with all of those unsold cars? It’s a question we first explored way back in 2014 in an article called “Where the World’s Unsold Cars Go to Die”. In that piece, we highlighted images from around the world of various places unsold cars were being stored. 

    Back then, we could have never predicted that a pandemic would be the black swan that would have caused the next historic buildup of auto inventory. But now, with ports at capacity, tankers carrying automobiles – at least those tanker that aren’t carrying oil – are being told to stay out at sea.

    Such was the case on April 24 when a cargo of 2,000 Nissan SUVs was approaching the port of Los Angeles. They were told to drop anchor about a mile from the port and remain there. The port was full and the glut is indicative of just how the industry has collapsed in the U.S. 

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    John Felitto, a senior vice president for the U.S. unit of Norwegian shipping company Wallenius Wilhelmsen told Bloomberg: “Dealers aren’t really accepting cars and fleet sales are down because rental-car and fleet operators aren’t taking delivery either. This is different from anything we’ve seen before. Everyone is full to the brim.”

    Though the Nissan shipment was eventually received 5 days later, Kipling Louttit, executive director of the Marine Exchange of Southern California said: “It is very abnormal for a container ship, a car carrier or a cruise ship not to go right to the berth, discharge and be on their way.”

    The Long Beach terminal south of LA is capable of storing several thousand vehicles. Cars usually spend a short amount of time there before being relocated to lots 5 to 8 miles away. Then, they’re sent to dealers. 

    But the collapse in sales last month caused a backlog buildup. Ships had to divert to other ports and others had to wait to discharge cargo. The Port of Hueneme needed to find space for an additional 6,000 surplus cars. Kristin Decas, the port’s director and chief executive officer said: “You can’t stack cars. We even looked at using the Ventura County Fairgrounds.”

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Toyota has gone as far as to lease additional space at a sports venue in California. Hyundai also found additional space and has said that its West Coast inventories were “elevated”. 

    Nissan spokesman Chris Keeffe said: “The company is optimizing the flow of the vehicles and positioning them closer to dealers for quick availability when the market recovers and customers return to showrooms.”

    Demand for cars and trucks in the U.S. is expected to drop 27% to 12.5 million vehicles this year, according to Bloomberg. Recall, we wrote just yesterday that Edmunds shared those sentiments: April is slated to be the worst month on record for U.S. auto sales. 

    Edmunds forecasts that just 633,260 new cars and trucks will be sold in the U.S. for an estimated seasonally adjusted annual rate (SAAR) of 7.7 million. This reflects a 52.5% decrease in sales from April 2019, and a 36.6% decrease from March 2020.

     

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Edmunds analysts note that this would be the lowest-volume sales month on record; the second worst month for sales in the past 30 years was January of 2009, when 655,000 vehicles were sold.

    “April auto sales took the biggest hit we’ve seen in decades,” said Jessica Caldwell, Edmunds’ executive director of insights.

    “These bleak figures aren’t just because consumers are holding back on their purchases — fleet sales are seeing an even more dramatic drop as daily rental business has dried up. Like many other industries, the entire automotive sector is struggling as the coronavirus crisis continues to cripple the economy.”


    Tyler Durden

    Fri, 05/01/2020 – 18:45

Digest powered by RSS Digest

Today’s News 1st May 2020

  • Swiss Health & Tranquility Law Sparks "Desperate" Snitching To Counter Lockdown-Deniers
    Swiss Health & Tranquility Law Sparks “Desperate” Snitching To Counter Lockdown-Deniers

    A post-corona world has given rise to corona-moral shaming is translating into people snooping and snitching on their neighbors who break social distancing rules to police and town authorities.

    Folks in Switzerland have taken snooping and snitching to an entirely different level during lockdowns, as many have used private detectives to do their dirty work, reported Reuters

    Christian Sideris, the founder of Seeclop, a Geneva-based private eye, has said requests for snooping on neighbors have been extraordinary, considering people have been confined to their homes for at least a month, many are living in frustrations of others around them.  

    “We have a lot of these types of cases because people are confined and on top of each other all day,” Sideris said, describing some callers as “desperate.”

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    He said requests to snoop on neighbors in pre-corona times was generally 2-4 times per year, but since the lockdown, he said his phone has been ringing non-stop. 

    “The Swiss are known for complaining about their neighbors, often using rules designed to keep the noise down. These are rigorously enforced in Geneva, where 16th Century protestant reformer John Calvin banned instrumental music when he was in charge,” Reuters noted. 

    Geneva’s Public Health and Tranquility Law are relatively strict, and people generally use these rules to enforce peace and quiet among neighborhoods. In some cases, playing a musical instrument or doing home construction after 9 pm can result in a $10,000 fine. 

    Police said noise complaints have doubled in April to 1,233 during the lockdowns. People have called the cops on their neighbors for kids playing soccer inside and late-night home improvements. It was even to the point, police said that someone called them as a neighborhood choir, intended to lift spirits, was singing to loud.

    Snooping and snitching are not just limited to parts of Europe, but we have explained before, the US government has asked citizens to do the spying for them. We have covered this topic on several occasions, read “Concerned Citizens Or Rats? Americans Snitch On Local Businesses & Neighbors Amid Shutdowns” and “”Just Snap A Photo” – De Blasio Explains How To Snitch On Fellow New Yorkers Breaking Social Distancing Rules.” 


    Tyler Durden

    Fri, 05/01/2020 – 02:35

  • A Protest From France: "Rule By Experts" Is A Grave Error
    A Protest From France: “Rule By Experts” Is A Grave Error

    Authored by Jörg Guido Hülsmann via The Mises Institute,

    After WWI, the distinguished British economist Edwin Cannan was asked, somewhat reproachfully, what he did during the terrible war years. He replied: “I protested.” The present article is a similar protest against the current lockdown policies put into place in most countries of the Western world to confront the current coronavirus pandemic.

    Here in France, where I live and work, President Macron announced on Thursday, March 12, that all schools and universities would be shut down on the following Monday. On that Monday, then, he appeared on TV again and announced that the entire population would be confined starting the very next day. The only exceptions would be “necessary” activities, especially medical services, energy production, security, and food production and distribution. This policy response was apparently coordinated with other European governments. Italy, Germany, and Spain have applied essentially the same measures.

    I think that these policies are understandable and well intentioned. Like many other commentators, I also think that they are wrongheaded, harmful, and potentially disastrous. An old French proverb says that the way to hell is plastered with good intentions. Unfortunately, it seems as though the present policies are no exception.

    My protest concerns the basic ideas that have motivated these policies. They were clearly enunciated by President Macron in his TV address of March 12. Here he made three claims that I found most intriguing.

    • The first one was that his government was going to apply drastic measures to “save lives” because the country was “at war” with the COVID-19 virus. He repeatedly used the phrase “we are at war” (nous sommes en guerre) throughout his talk.

    • Secondly, he insisted right at the very beginning that it was imperative to heed the advice of “the experts.” Monsieur Macron literally said that we all should have to listen to and follow the advice of the people “who know”—meaning who know the problem and who know how best to deal with it.

    • His third major point was that this emergency situation had revealed how important it was to enjoy a state-run system of public healthcare. How lucky are we to have such a system and to be able to rely on it, now, in the heat of the war against the virus! Unsurprisingly, the president insinuated that this system would be reinforced in the future.

    Now, these are not the private ideas of Monsieur Macron. They are shared by all major governments in the EU and by many governments in other parts of the world. They are also shared by all major political parties here in France, as well as by President Macron’s predecessors. Therefore, the purpose of the following remarks is not to criticise the president of this beautiful country, or his government, or any person in particular. The purpose is to criticise the ideas on which the current policy is based.

    I do not have any epidemiological knowledge or expertise. But I do have some acquaintance with questions of social organisation, and I am also intimately familiar with scientific research and with the organisation of scientific research. My protest does not concern the medical assessment of the COVID-19 virus and its propagation. It concerns the public policies designed to confront this problem.

    As far as I can see, these policies are based on one extraordinary claim and two fundamental errors. I will discuss them in turn.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    An Extraordinary Claim

    The extraordinary claim is that wartime measures such as confinement and shutdowns of commercial activity are justified by the objective of “saving lives” that are at risk because of the burgeoning coronavirus pandemic.

    Over here in Europe, we have heard American presidents use such expressions since the 1960s, as in “the war on poverty” or the “war on drugs” or “the war on terrorism” or more recently “the war on climate change.” Odd language of this sort seemed to be one of America’s many eccentricities. It also did not escape our notice that none of these would-be wars have ever been won. Despite the great sums of money that the US government has spent to fight them, despite the new state institutions that were put in place, and despite the great and growing infringements on the economic and civil liberties of ordinary Americans, the problems themselves never went away. Quite the opposite; they were perpetuated and aggravated.

    Most of the European governments have now joined ranks with the Americans and consider that they, too, are at war—with a virus. It is therefore appropriate to insist that this is metaphorical language. A war is a military conflict designed to protect the state—and thus of the very institution that is commonly held to guarantee the lives and liberties of the citizens—against malicious attack from an outside power, usually another state. In a war, the very existence of the state is under attack. Clearly, this is not so in the present case.

    Moreover, there can be no war with a virus, simply because a virus does not act. At most, therefore, the word “war” can be used here metaphorically. It then serves as a cover and justification of infringements of the very civil and economic liberties that the state is supposed to protect.

    Now, in the traditional conception, the state is supposed to protect and promote the common good. Protecting the lives of the citizens might therefore, arguably, justify massive state interventions. But then the very first question should be: How many lives are at stake? Government epidemiologists, in their most dire estimates—whose factual basis is still not solidly established—have considered that about 10 percent of the infected persons might be in need of hospital care and that a large part of those would die. It was also already known by mid-March that this mortal threat in the great majority of cases concerned very old people, the average COVID-19 victim being around eighty years of age.

    The claim that wartime measures, which threaten the economic livelihood of the great majority of the population and also the lives of the poorest and most fragile people of the world economy—a point on which I will say more below—are in order to save the lives of a few, most of whom are close to death anyway, is an extraordinary claim, to say the least.

    Without going into any detail, let me just highlight that this contention squarely contradicts the abortion policies that Western governments have applied since the 1970s. There, the reasoning was exactly the other way around. The personal liberty and comfort of the women who wished to abort their children was given priority over the right to lives of these yet unborn children. According to World Health Organization (WHO) figures, each and every year, some 40–50 million babies are aborted worldwide. In 2018 alone, more than 224,000 babies have been aborted in France. However serious the current COVID-19 pandemic may yet become, it will remain a small fraction of these casualties. Not only have governments neglected to “save lives” when it comes to abortions. They have in point of fact condoned and funded the killing of human beings on a massive scale.

    They still do so now. Here in France, all hospital services have been run down to free up capacity for the treatment of COVID-19 victims—all except one. Abortion services run unabated and have recently been reinforced by the legal obligation for hospital staff to provide abortions (previously it was possible for individual doctors to refuse this out of personal conviction).

    The pretention that drastic policies are justified in order to “save lives” also flies into face of past policy in other areas. In the past, too, it would have been possible to “save lives” by allocating a greater chunk of the government’s budget to state-run hospitals, by further reducing speed limits on highways, by increasing foreign aid to countries on the brink of starvation, by outlawing smoking, etc. To be sure, I do not wish to make a case for such policies. My point is that it has never been the sole or highest goal of government policy to “save lives” or to extend them as much as possible. In fact, such a policy would be utterly absurd and impractical, as I will explain further below.

    It is difficult to avoid the impression that the “war to save lives” is a farce. The truth seems to be that the COVID-19 crisis has been used to extend the powers of the state. The government obtains the power to control and paralyse all other human concerns in the name of prolonging the lives of a select few. Never has this principle been admitted in a free country. Few tyrannies have managed to extend their power this far.

    The current beneficiaries of these new powers are the elder citizens and a few others. But make no mistake. It is likely that their destinies only serve as a pretext to justify the creation of new and unheard-of powers for the state. Once these new powers are firmly established, there is no reason why the elderly should remain especially dear to those in power. It must be feared that the very opposite will be the case.

    Now, in order to avoid any misunderstanding, I do not claim that the present French government seeks to grab power over life-and-death decisions, or dictatorial powers to introduce socialism through the backdoor under the cover of COVID-19. In fact, I cannot imagine that Monsieur Macron and his government are driven by sinister motivations. I think they have the best of all intentions. But the point here is precisely that there is a difference between doing good and wishing to do good.

    A Grave Error: Rule by Experts

    So far, I have commented on a political issue. But there are also matters of fact. And this brings me to the two aforementioned errors.

    The first fundamental error is to hold that is that the experts know and all the rest of us should trust them and do as they tell us.

    The truth is that even the most brilliant academics and practitioners have in-depth knowledge only in a very narrow field; that they have no particular expertise when it comes to devising new practical solutions; and that their professional biases are likely to induce them into various errors when it comes to solving large-scale social problems such as the current pandemic. This is patent in my own discipline, economics, but not really different in other academic fields. Let me explain this in some more detail.

    The kind of knowledge that can be acquired by scientific research is just a preliminary to action. Research gathers facts and yields partial knowledge of causal connections. Economics tells us, for example, that the size of the money stock is positively related to the level of unit prices. But this is not the whole picture. Other causes come into play as well. Real-world decision-making cannot just rely on facts and other bits of partial knowledge. It must weigh the influence of a multitude of circumstances, not all of which are well known, and not all of which are directly related to the problem at stake. It must come to balanced conclusions, sometimes under rapidly changing circumstances.

    In this respect, the typical expert is no expert at all. How many laureates of the Nobel Prize in economics have earned any significant money by investing their savings? How many virologists or epidemiologists have established and operated a privately run clinic or laboratory? I would never trust a colleague who had the folly to volunteer to direct a central planning board. I do not trust an epidemiologist who has the temerity to parade as a COVID-19 czar. I do not believe a government that tells me that it somehow knows “the experts” who know best how to protect and run an entire country.

    Furthermore, consider that scientific knowledge is, at best, a state of the art. The precious thing about science is not to be seen in the results, which are hardly ever final. What is crucial is the scientific process, which is a competitive process based on disagreements about the validity and relevance of different research hypotheses. This process is especially important when it comes to new problems—such as a new virus which spreads in unheard-of ways and has unheard-of effects. It is precisely in such circumstances, when the stakes are high, that the impartial confrontation and competitive exploration of different points of view is of paramount importance. Research czars and central planners are here of no use at all. They are part of the problem, not part of the solution.

    A government which bets the house on one horse and hands the management of a pandemic over to a single person or institution achieves, at best, only one thing: that all citizens receive the same treatment. But it thereby slows down the very process which leads to the discovery of the best treatments, and which makes these treatments rapidly available to the greatest number of patients.

    It is also important to keep in mind that academics—and this includes epidemiologists just as much as economists and lawyers—are typically government employees and that this colours their approach to any practical problem. They are likely to think that serious problems, especially large-scale problems touching most or all citizens, should be solved by state intervention. Many of them are in fact incapable of imagining anything else.

    This problem is reinforced through a nefarious selection bias. Indeed, those academics who opt for an administrative or political career, and who make it into the higher ranks of the civil service, cannot fail to be convinced that state action is suitable and necessary to solve the most important problems. Otherwise they would hardly have chosen such careers, and it would also be virtually out of the question that for them to end up in leadership positions. A good example among many others is the current WHO director Tedros Adhanom, who I understand is a former member of a communist organisation. The point is not that a WHO director should have no political opinions or that Dr. Adhanom is an evil or incompetent person. The point is that it is unsurprising that men like him occupy leadership positions in state-run organisations, and that the approach he envisions to deal with a pandemic is likely to be coloured by his personal political preconceptions, not only by medical information and good intentions.

    Another Momentous Error: Neglect of Economics

    Along with such selection bias comes a peculiar ignorance in regard to the functioning of complex social orders. This brings me to the second fundamental error that vitiates the COVID-19 policies. It consists in thinking that civil and economic liberties are some sort of a consumers’ good—maybe even a luxury good—that can only be allowed and enjoyed in good times. When the going gets tough, the government needs to take over and all others should step back—into confinement if necessary.

    This error is typical for people who have spent too much time among politicians and in public administrations. The truth is that civil and economic liberty is the most powerful vehicle to confront virtually any problem. (The notable exception is that liberty does not help to consolidate political power.) And the reverse side of the same truth is that governments typically fail whenever they set out to solve social problems, even very ordinary problems. Think of state-run education or housing projects. I will return to this point further below.

    Because of the mechanics of the political process, governments are liable to overreact to any problem that is big enough to make it into the news and to become an issue for voters. Governments will then typically zoom in on this one problem. In their perception, it becomes the most important of all problems that humanity has to solve. If such a government has no clue about economics, it is liable to propose one-plan technical solutions that completely neglect the social and political dimension of what it means to solve a problem. In the present case, the “experts” have blithely proposed to shut down the entire economy because this is what “works.”

    Now, I do not contest that shutdowns are effective in slowing down the transmission speed of a pandemic. I have no opinion at all on the most suitable way to deal with pandemics or other problems of virology or medicine. But as an economist I know the crucial importance of the fact that there is never ever only one single goal in human life. There is always a great and diverse array of objectives that each of us pursues. The practical problem for each person is to strike the right balance, most notably to act in the right temporal sequence. Translated to the level of the economy as a whole, the problem is to allocate the right amounts of time and material resources to the different objectives.

    For most people, protecting their own lives and the lives of their families has a very high importance. But irrespective of how important this objective is, in practice it cannot be perfectly achieved. To protect my life, I need food. Thus, I need to work. Thus, I need to expose myself to all kinds of risks that are associated with leaving the safe space of my house and encountering nature and other humans. In short, human lives cannot be perfectly protected, even by those who are ready to subordinate everything else to doing so. It is a practical impossibility. When it comes to protecting lives, the only question is: how much am I willing to risk my life and the lives of those who depend on me? And it more than often turns out that by risking much one protects best. What holds true for the eternal life of one’s soul also holds true for the mundane material life down here on earth: “For whoever wishes to save his life will lose it, but whoever loses his life for my sake will find it” (Matt 16:25).

    Now, most people do not actually cherish the preservation of their lives, or the extension of their life spans, as the single highest goals. Smokers, meat eaters, drinkers prefer a shorter, more joyful life, to a longer life of abstinence. Policemen, soldiers, and many citizens are more than often driven by the love of their country and by a love of justice. They would rather die than live under slavery or tyranny. Priests would risk their lives rather than forsake their commitment. A believer in Christ would rather risk death than apostasy. Sailors risk their own lives to provide for their families. Medical doctors and nurses are willing to risk their lives to help patients with infectious diseases. Rugby players and racecar drivers risk their lives not only for the glory of winning, but also for the excitement and satisfaction that comes with performing well under danger. Many young men and women gladly trade the excitement of dance for the risk of catching COVID-19.

    All of these people, in one way or another, make material contributions to the livelihood of all others. Smokers and drinkers ultimately pay for their consumption, not with money (which serves them only as a tool for exchange with others), but with the goods and services that they themselves provide to others. If they could not indulge in their consumption, their motivation to help others would diminish or vanish altogether. If policemen, soldiers, sailors, and nurses did not have a relatively low risk-aversion, their services would be provided only at much higher cost, and possibly not at all.

    The preferences and activities of all market participants are interdependent. In the market order, each one helps all others in pursuing their goals, even if these goals may ultimately contradict his own. The meat eater might be a mechanic who repairs the cars of vegetarians, or an accountant who does the bookkeeping for a vegetarian NGO. The soldier also protects pacifists. Among the pacifists may be farmers who grow the food consumed by soldiers, etc.

    It is impossible to disentangle all of these connections, and it is not necessary. The point is that in a market economy the factors determining the production of any economic good are not just technical. Through exchange, through the division of labour, all production processes are interrelated. The effectiveness of doctors and nurses and their assistants does not only depend on the people who directly supply them with the materials that they need. Indirectly, it also depends on the activities of all other producers who do not have the slightest thing to do with medical services in hospitals. Even in an emergency situation, it is therefore necessary to respect the needs and priorities of these others. Locking them away, locking them down, far from facilitating the operation of hospitals, will eventually come to haunt the latter as well when supply chains wither and consumer staples start lacking.

    Now one might contend that such consequences only obtain in the longer run and that a government confronted with an emergency situation needs to neglect long-run issues and focus on the short-run emergency. This sounds reasonable, which is why governments have appealed to arguments of this sort with great regularity in other areas, most notably to justify expansionary macroeconomic policies, which also trade off the present against the future.

    But the reasoning is flawed in the present case. The root of the error is to consider the COVID-19 virus an immediate threat to human lives whereas the lockdown policies are not. But this is not the case. How many people have committed suicide because the lockdown measures have driven them to depression and insanity? How many did not receive life-saving treatments because hospital beds and staff were restricted to COVID-19 victims? How many have become victims at home because of the lockdown-induced aggression of their spouses? How many have lost their jobs, their companies, their wealth, and will be driven to suicide and aggression in the months to come? How many people in the poorest countries of the world economy are now driven to starvation because households and firms in the developed world have cut back demand for their products?

    The inevitable conclusion is that, even in the short run, lockdown policies are costing the lives of many people who would not otherwise have died. In the short and in the long run, the current lockdown policy does not serve to “save lives,” but to save the lives of some people at the expense of the lives of others.

    Conclusion

    The lockdown policies are understandable as a panic reaction of political leaders who want to do the right thing and who have to make decisions with incomplete information. But upon reflection—and certainly in hindsight—they are not good policy. The lockdowns of the past month have not been conducive to the common good. Although they have saved the lives of many people, they have also endangered—and are still endangering—the lives and livelihoods of many others. They have created a new and dangerous political precedent. They have reinforced the political regime uncertainty—to use Robert Higgs’s felicitous phrase—that bears on the choices of individuals, families, communities, and firms in the years to come.

    The right thing to do now is to abandon these policies swiftly and entirely. The citizens of free countries are able to protect themselves. They can act individually and collectively. They cannot act well when they are locked down. They will greet any honest and competent advice on what they can and should do, upon which they will proceed responsibly, whether alone or in coordination with others.

    The greatest danger right now is in the perpetuation of the ill-conceived lockdowns, most notably under the pretext of “managing the transition” or other spurious justifications. Is it really necessary to walk through the endless list of management failures of government agents? Is it necessary to remind ourselves that people who have no skin in the game are irresponsible in the true sense of the word? These would-be managers should have stayed out of the picture from the very beginning. Instead, so far, they have managed to get everybody else out of the picture. If they are allowed to go on, they might very well turn the present calamity—big as it is—into a true disaster.

    The historical precedent that comes to mind is the Great Depression of the 1930s. Then, too, the free world was confronted with a painful recession, when the implosion of the stock market bubble entailed a deflationary meltdown of the financialised economy, along with massive unemployment. This recession, dire as it was, could have remained short, as all the previous recessions in the US and elsewhere had been. Instead it was turned into a multiyear depression, thanks to folly of FDR and his government, who had the pretention of managing the recovery with government spending, nationalisations, and price controls.

    It is not too late. It is never too late to recognise an honest error and correct a wrong course of action. Let us hope that President Macron, President Trump, and all other people of goodwill may rapidly come to their senses.


    Tyler Durden

    Fri, 05/01/2020 – 02:00

  • China's 'Belt And Road' Partners Beg Beijing For Bilateral Bailouts
    China’s ‘Belt And Road’ Partners Beg Beijing For Bilateral Bailouts

    China’s cash-strapped partners in their “Belt and Road” (BRI) global development project have been begging Beijing for debt relief amid the coronavirus pandemic, according to the Financial Times.

    And according to Chinese policy advisers, the Xi regime is considering several options – including suspending interest payments on loans from the country’s financial institutions. That said, outright debt forgiveness is unlikely.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    According to Washington-based consultancy RWR Advisory, Chinese financial institutions have lent an estimated $461bn for BRI projects since 2013 – making it the largest development initiative in the world.

    “We understand a lot of countries are looking to renegotiate loan terms,” said one researcher at China Development Bank, which spearheads hundreds of billions of dollars in BRI projects globally along with the Export-Import Bank of China.

    “But it takes time to strike a new deal and we cannot even travel abroad right now. The BRI loans are not foreign aid. We need to at least recoup principal and a moderate interest,” said the researcher on condition of anonymity.

    “It is OK for 20 per cent of our portfolio projects to have problems,” they added, “But we can’t tolerate half of them going under. We might consider extending loans and giving interest relief. But in general our loans are issued according to market principles.”

    The BRI, which was launched in 2013 as the signature foreign policy initiative of President Xi Jinping, is aimed at building infrastructure and boosting China’s influence around the world. Most of the 138 countries that have officially signed up to the BRI are developing nations, many with the weakest credit ratings in the world. -Financial Times

     <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>
    In particular, BRI partners in several African nations – which have received approximately $143bn in BRI loans between 2000 and 2017 – are understood to have applied for debt relief.

    A policy adviser to the Chinese government, who declined to be identified, said that Beijing’s preferred option in dealing with national requests for debt relief would be to “suspend interest payments” on loans.

    However, some borrowers with “good market order” may be allowed to reschedule their loans. Forgiving debt permanently would be a “last option”, the adviser said. -Financial Times

    Earlier this month China agreed to freeze bilateral loan repayments for low-income countries until the end of the year, agreeing to a G20 initiative which covered “all official bilateral creditors,” including lending from Chinese policy banks.

    That said, diplomats say that the process of sifting through which loans from various countries would be eligible, while negotiations are being undertaken with China on a bilateral basis. According to the FT, China consequently has a ton of leverage.

    According to researcher Mei Guanqun of the Beijing think-tank China Center for International Economic Exchanges, China has yet to solidify plans for dealing with the mounting debt-relief requests.

    “But there are a few rules of thumb,” he said. “First, China’s commercial banks like [Bank of China] and [Industrial and Commercial Bank of China] are unlikely to forgive loans because they are under pressure from Beijing to meet financial targets.”

    “Second, China Development Bank and China ExIm Bank may provide sovereign loan relief to countries that are friendly with us,” added Mei. “We may cut interest rates by a few percentage points or have it removed. We could also reduce principal payment by a moderate amount. The idea is to keep borrowers from going under, which may undermine our interest.”

    According to Andrew Davenport, COO of RWR Advisory, Beijing is concerned that BRI will be interpreted to have resulted in “predatory economic behavior” by which China will be able to claim valuable assets as collateral when countries can’t pay their debts.

    “The narrative certainly matters and indeed they seem to worry about it,” said Davenport. “If they can persuade people not to always be looking at what mischief Beijing is up to but rather to see the ‘goodness’ on offer, that’s a winning formula for China.


    Tyler Durden

    Fri, 05/01/2020 – 01:10

  • Escobar: Thinking Beyond Planet-Lockdown
    Escobar: Thinking Beyond Planet-Lockdown

    Authored by Pepe Escobar via The Asia Times,

    Between the unaccountability of elites and total fragmentation of civil society, Covid-19 as a circuit breaker is showing how the king – systemic design – is naked. 

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    We are being sucked into a danse macabre of multiple complex systems “colliding into one another,” producing all kinds of mostly negative feedback loops.   

    What we already know for sure, as Shoshana Zuboff detailed in “The Age of Surveillance Capitalism,” is that “industrial capitalism followed its own logic of shock and awe” to conquer nature. But now surveillance capitalism “has human nature in its sights.” 

    In “The Human Planet: How We Created the Anthropocene,” analyzing the explosion in population growth, increasing energy consumption  and a tsunami of information “driven by the positive feedback loops of reinvestment and profit,” Simon Lewis and Mark Maslin of University College, London, suggest that our current mode of living is the “least probable” among several options. “A collapse or a switch to a new mode of living is more likely.” 

    With dystopia and mass paranoia seemingly the law of the (bewildered) land, Michel Foucault’s analyses of biopolitics have never been so timely, as states across the world take over biopower – the control of people’s life and bodies. 

    David Harvey, once again, shows how prophetic  was Marx, not only in his analyses of industrial capitalism but somehow – in “Grundrisse: Foundations of the Critique of Political Economy” – even forecasting the mechanics of digital capitalism: 

    Marx, Harvey writes, “talks about the way that new technologies and knowledge become embedded in the machine: they’re no longer in the laborer’s brain, and the laborer is pushed to one side to become an appendage of the machine, a mere machine-minder. All of the intelligence and all of the knowledge, which used to belong to the laborers, and which conferred upon them a certain monopoly power vis-à-vis capital, disappear.”

    Thus, adds Harvey, “the capitalist who once needed the skills of the laborer is now freed from that constraint, and the skill is embodied in the machine. The knowledge produced through science and technology flows into the machine, and the machine becomes ‘the soul’ of capitalist dynamism.” 

    Living in ‘Psycho-Deflation

    An immediate – economic – effect of the collision of complex systems is the approaching New Great Depression. Meanwhile, very few are attempting to understand Planet Lockdown in depth – and that goes, most of all, for post-Planet Lockdown. Yet a few concepts already stand out. State of exception. Necropolitics. A new brutalism. And, as we will see, the new viral paradigm.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    So, let’s review some the best and the brightest at the forefront of Covid-19 thinking. An excellent road map is provided by “Sopa de Wuhan” (“Wuhan Soup’), an independent collection assembled in Spanish, featuring essays by, among others, Giorgio Agamben, Slavoj Zizek, Judith Butler, David Harvey, South Korean Byung-Chul Han and Spaniard Paul Preciado.

    The last two, along with Agamben, were referenced in previous essays in this running series, on the Stoics,  Heraclitus,  Confucius, Buddha and Lao Tzu, and contemporary philosophy examining The City under The Plague

    Franco Berardi, a 1968 student icon now professor of philosophy in Bologna, offers the concept of “psycho-deflation” to explain our current predicament. We are living a “psychic epidemic … generated by a virus as the Earth has reached a stage of extreme irritation, and society’s collective body suffers for quite a while a state of intolerable stress: the illness manifests itself at this stage, devastating in the social and psychic spheres, as a self-defense reaction of the planetary body.” 

    Thus, as Berardi argues, a “semiotic virus in the psycho-sphere blocks the abstract functioning of the economy, subtracting bodies from it.” Only a virus would be able to stop accumulation of capital dead in its tracks: “Capitalism is axiomatic, works on a non-verified premise (the necessity of unlimited growth which makes possible capital accumulation). 

    Every logical and economic concatenation is coherent with this axiom, and nothing can be tried outside of this axiom. There is no political way out of axiomatic Capital, there’s no possibility of destroying the system,” because even language is a hostage of this axiom and does not allow the possibility of anything “efficiently extra-systemic.”

    So what’s left? “The only way out is death, as we learned from Baudrillard.” The late, great grandmaster of simulacrum was already forecasting a systemic stall back in the post-modernist 1980s.  

    Croatian philosopher Srecko Horvat , in contrast, offers a less conceptual and more realist hypothesis about the immediate future: “The fear of a pandemic is more dangerous than the virus itself. The apocalyptic images of the mass media hide a deep nexus between the extreme right and the capitalist economy. Like a virus that needs a living cell to reproduce itself, capitalism will adapt itself to the new 21st century biopolitics.”   

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Workers disinfecting street in Tehran during Covid-19 pandemic, March 19, 2020. (Tasnim News Agency, CC BY 4.0, Wikimedia Commons)

    For the Catalan chemist and philosopher Santiago Lopez Petit, coronavirus can be seen as a declaration of war: “Neoliberalism unabashedly dresses up as a war state. Capital is scared,” even as “uncertainty and insecurity invalidate the necessity of the same state.” Yet there may be creative possibilities when “obscure and paroxistic life, incalculable in its ambivalence, escapes algorithm.” 

    Our Normalized Exception 

    Giorgio Agamben caused immense controversy in Italy and across Europe when he published a column in late February on “the invention of an epidemic.” He later had to explain  what he meant. But his main insight remains valid: The state of exception has been completely normalized. 

    And it gets worse“A new despotism, which in terms of pervasive controls and cessation of every political activity, will be worse that the totalitarianisms we have known so far.”  

    Agamben redoubles his analyses of science as the religion of our time: “The analogy with religion is taken literally; theologians declared that they could not clearly define what is God, but in his name they dictated rules of conduct to men and did not hesitate to burn heretics. Virologists admit they don’t know exactly what is a virus, but in its name they pretend to decide how human beings shall live.”     

    Cameroonian philosopher and historian Achille Mbembe, author of two indispensable books, “Necropolitics” and “Brutalisme,”has identified the paradox of our time“The abyss between the increasing globalization of problems of human existence and the retreat of states inside their own, old-fashioned borders.”   

    Mbembe delves into the end of a certain world, “dominated by giant calculation devices,” a “mobile world in the most polymorphous, viral and near cinematic sense,” referring to the ubiquity of screens (Baudrillard again, already in the 1980s) and the lexicography, “which reveals not only a change of language but the end of the word.” 

    Here we have Mbembe dialoguing with Berardi – but Membe takes it much farther: “This end of the word, this definitive triumph of the gesture and artificial organs over the word, the fact that the history of the word ends under our eyes, that for me is the historical development par excellence, the one that Covid-19 unveils.” 

    The political consequences are, inevitably, dire: “Part of the power politics of great nations does not lie in the dream of an automated organization of the world thanks to the manufacturing of a New Man that would be the product of physiological assemblage, a synthetic and electronic assemblage, and a biological assemblage? Let’s call it techno-libertarianism.”

    This is not exclusive to the West: “China is also on it, vertiginously.” 

    This new paradigm of a plethora of automated systems and algorithmic decisions “where history and the word don’t exist anymore is in frontal shock with the reality of bodies in flesh and bones, microbes, bacteria and liquids of all sorts, blood included.”

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Rendering of Open Cobalt 3D hyperlinks connecting five virtual spaces. (Julian Lombardi, CC BY-SA 3.0, Wikimedia Commons)

    The West, argues Mbembe, chose a long time ago to “imprint a Dionysiac course to its history and take the rest of the world with it, even if it doesn’t understand it. The West does not know anymore the difference between beginning and ending. China is also on it. The world has been plunged into a vast process of dilaceration where no one can predict the consequences.”      

    Mbembe is terrified by the proliferation of “live manifestations of the bestial and viral part of humanity,” including racism and tribalism. 

    This, he adds, conforms our new viral paradigm. 

    His analysis certainly dovetails with Agamben’s: “I have a feeling that brutalism is going to intensify under the techno-libertarianism drive, be it under China or hidden under the accoutrements of liberal democracy. Just like 9/11 opened the way to a generalized state of exception, and its normalization, the fight against Covid-19 will be used as a pretext to move the political even more towards the domain of security.”

    “But this time”, Mbembe adds, “it will be a security almost biological, bearing with new forms of segregation between the ‘immunity bodies’ and ‘viral bodies’. Viralism will become the new theatre for fractioning populations, now identified as distinct species.”

    It does feel like neo-medievalism, a digital re-enacting of the fabulous “Triumph of Death” fresco in Palermo. 

    Poets, Not Politicians 

    It’s useful to contrast such doom and gloom with the perspective of a geographer. Christian Grataloup, who excels in geo-history, insists on the common destiny of humanity (here he’s echoing Xi Jinping and the Chinese concept of “community of shared destiny”): “There’s an unprecedented feeling of identity. The world is not simply an economic and demographic spatial system, it becomes a territory. Since the Great Discoveries, what was global was shrinking, solving a lot of contradictions; now we must learn to build it up again, give it more consistence as we run the risk of letting it rot under international tensions.”        

    It’s not the Covid-19 crisis that will lead to another world – but society’s reaction to the crisis. There won’t be a magical night – complete with performances by “international community” pop stars – when “victory “will be announced to the former Planet Lockdown. 

    What really matters is a long, arduous political combat to take us to the next level. Extreme conservatives and techno-libertarians have already taken the initiative – from refusal of any taxes on the wealthy to support the victims of the New Great Depression to the debt obsession that prevents more, necessary public spending.   

    In this framework, I propose to go one step beyond Foucault’s biopolitics. Gilles Deleuze can be the conceptualizer of a new, radical freedom. Here is a delightful British series that can be enjoyed as if it were a serious Monty Python-ish approach to Deleuze. 

    Foucault excelled in the description of how meaning and frames of social truth change over time, constituting new realities conditioned by power and knowledge. 

    Deleuze, on the other hand, focused on how things change. Movement. Nothing is stable. Nothing is eternal. He conceptualized flux – in a very Heraclitean way. 

    New species (even the new, AI-created Ubermensch) evolve in relation with their environment. It’s by using Deleuze that we can investigate how spaces between things create possibilities for The Shock of the New. 

    More than ever, we now know how everything is connected (thank you, Spinoza). The (digital) world is so complicated, connected and mysterious that this opens an infinite number of possibilities.

    Already in the 1970s, Deleuze was saying the new map – the innate potentially of newness – should be called “the virtual.” The more living matter gets more complex, the more it transforms this virtual into spontaneous action and unforeseen movements. 

    Deleuze posed a dilemma that now confronts us all in even starker terms. The choice is between “the poet, who speaks in the name of a creative power, capable of overturning all orders and representations in order to affirm difference in the state of permanent revolution which characterizes eternal return: and that of the politician, who is above all concerned to deny that which ‘differs,’ so as to conserve or prolong an established historical order, or to establish a historical order which already calls forth in the world the forms of its representation.”    

    The time calls for acting as poets instead of politicians.

    The methodology may be offered by Deleuze and Guattari’s formidable “A Thousand Plateaus” – significantly subtitled “Capitalism and Schizophrenia,” where the drive is non-linear. We’re talking about philosophy, psychology, politics connected by ideas running at different speeds, a dizzying non-stop movement mingling lines of articulation, in different strata, directed into lines of flight, movements of deterritorialization. 

    The concept of “lines of flight” is essential for this new virtual landscape, because the virtual is conformed by lines of flight between differences, in a continual process of change and freedom. 

    All this frenzy, though, must have roots – as in the roots of a tree (of knowledge). And that brings us to Deleuze’s central metaphor; the rhizome, which is not just a root, but a mass of roots springing up in new directions. 

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    All this frenzy must have roots. (StockSnap from Pixabay)

    Deleuze showed how the rhizome connects assemblies of linguistic codes, power relations, the arts – and, crucially, biology. The hyperlink is a rhizome. It used to represent a symbol of the delightful absence of order in the internet, until it became debased as Google started imposing its algorithms. Links, by definition, always should lead us to unexpected destinations. 

    Rhizomes are the antitheses of those Western liberal “democracy” standard traits – the parliament and the senate. By contrast, trails – as in the Ho Chi Minh trail – are rhizomes. There’s no masterplan. Multiple entryways and multiple possibilities. No beginning and no end. As Deleuze described it, “the rhizome operates by variation, expansion, conquest, capture, offshoot.” 

    This can work out as the blueprint for a new form of political engagement –as the systemic design collapses. It does embody a methodology, an ideology, an epistemology and it’s also a metaphor. The rhizome is inherently progressive, while traditions are static. As a metaphor, the rhizome can replace our conception of history as linear and singular, offering different histories moving at different speeds. TINA (“There is no alternative”) is dead: there are multiple alternatives. 

    And that brings us back to David Harvey inspired by Marx. In order to embark onto a new, emancipatory path, we first have to emancipate ourselves to see that a new imaginary is possible, alongside a new complex systems reality.

    So let’s chill – and de-territorialize. If we learn how to do it, the advent of the New Techno Man in voluntary servitude, remote-controlled by an all-powerful, all-seeing security state, won’t be a given.  

    Deleuze: a great writer is always like a foreigner in the language through which he expresses himself, even if it’s his native tongue. He does not mix another language with his own language; he carves out a non pre-existent foreign language within his own language. “He makes the language itself scream, stammer, murmur. A thought should shoot off rhizomatically – in many directions. 

    I have a cold. The virus is a rhizome. 

    Remember when Trump said this was a “foreign virus?”

    All viruses are foreign – by definition. 

    But Trump, of course, never read “Naked Lunch” by Grandmaster William Burroughs. 

    Burroughs: “The word is a virus.”


    Tyler Durden

    Fri, 05/01/2020 – 00:20

  • CDC Extends Social Distancing Guidelines To Apply To Pets
    CDC Extends Social Distancing Guidelines To Apply To Pets

    Now that the first domesticated dog has tested positive for for the novel coronavirus, joining at least one tiger at the Bronx Zoo, it’s probably worth noting that the CDC earlier this month extended America’s social distancing guidelines to include pets.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    To be clear: there’s no evidence of pets infecting humans, but that doesn’t mean it can’t happen. So far, tests suggested that the viral strains found in animals weren’t concentrated enough to cause infection in humans, but nobody can say for certain.

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    Instead of allowing your dog to run around the neighborhood without a leash, sniffing the anus of every fellow canine, the new guidelines advise Americans to “treat pets as you would other human family members.”

    “Do not let pets interact with animals or people outside the household,” the CDC said.

    Dog owners should avoid taking their fur-babies to dog parks, or any places where they might risk infection.

    More importantly, the guidelines recommend that “if a person inside the household becomes sick, isolate that person from everyone else, including pets.”

    While the CDC acknowledged that much research still needs to be done, there’s enough evidence now to suggest that pets can be infected by humans.

    Outside the US, a handful of other house pets, including both cats and dogs, have been infected in Japan and in China, according to unconfirmed reports.

     

     


    Tyler Durden

    Fri, 05/01/2020 – 00:00

  • How Fanatics Hack Our Minds (And Why We Let Them)
    How Fanatics Hack Our Minds (And Why We Let Them)

    Authored by Barry Brownstein via The American Institute for Economic Research,

    In his 1841 book Extraordinary Popular Delusions and the Madness of Crowds, Charles MacKay wrote, During seasons of great pestilence men have often believed the prophecies of crazed fanatics, that the end of the world was coming. Credulity is always greatest in times of calamity.”

    During the COVID-19 crisis, there has been no shortage of “crazed fanatics.”

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    In a recent interview, Bill Gates claimed that “normalcy will only return when we’ve vaccinated the entire global population.” Acknowledging that the “economic hit” will be immense, he proclaimed, “but [we] don’t have a choice.” That is, no choice other than to go down the path Gates prescribes.  

    Then, to deflect criticism from his prescribed path, Gates sets up a mystical strawman opponent who wants to “ignore what’s going on here.” 

    Dr. Ezekiel Emanuel was an architect of Obamacare. Emanuel too proclaimed, “We will not be able to return to normalcy until we find a vaccine or effective medications.” 

    Rhetorically, Emanuel asked, “How are people supposed to find work if this goes on in some form for a year and a half? Is all that economic pain worth trying to stop COVID-19?”

    Emmanuel didn’t invite a dialogue on his questions. He answered his questions with the cry of every other fanatic, “The truth is we have no choice.”

    Fanatics proclaim their way is the only way forward and want us to believe “we have no choice.” 

    Notice, Gates and Emmanuel present a false dilemma, two alternatives: shut down the economy for many months to come or do nothing. You either support the lockdowns, or you’re a threat to public health.

    Gates and Emmanuel refuse to acknowledge other possibilities. They fail to see the limitless possibilities that arise from voluntary adjustments by businesses and individuals.

    Through this COVID-19 crisis, fanatics have weaponized the false dilemma logical fallacy to obscure “rational, honest debate.” “This insidious tactic has the appearance of forming a logical argument, but under closer scrutiny it becomes evident that there are more possibilities than the either/or choice that is presented.”

    You may recognize this tactic in various other forms. You either want educational spending by government to increase, or you’re against education. You either want higher taxes on the “wealthy,” or you want the poor to go without healthcare.

    Foxes and Hedgehogs

    Those who use the false dilemma tactic and think in black and white terms have the worst records as forecasters. In his book, Enlightenment Now, Steven Pinker reports on the research of University of Pennsylvania professor Philip Tetlock, who interviewed 284 forecasters to understand the makeup of an accurate forecaster from the many more who are “often mistaken but never in doubt.”

    Tetlock metaphorically drew on the Greek poet Archilochus who wrote, “The fox knows many things, but the hedgehog knows one big thing.” “The hedgehogs are more the big idea people, more decisive,” Tetlock observes. For forecasters, decisiveness is not a good quality. Don’t rely on the forecasts of hedgehogs.

    A physician with the mindset of a hedgehog might remove your tonsils to cure repeated sore throats. Medical hedgehogs wouldn’t be knowledgeable of dietary and lifestyle changes that could support your health. 

    Pinker warns, those “with Big Ideas—left-wing or right-wing, optimistic or pessimistic—which they held with an inspiring (but misguided) confidence” were the worst forecasters. Having a narrow focus, hedgehogs can’t see the big picture beyond their specialization. In the words of Nobel laureate Daniel Kahneman, they labor under “an enhanced illusion of their skill.” Their forecasts, Kahneman adds, “produce poorer predictions than dart-throwing monkeys who would have distributed their choices evenly over the options.”

    The black-or-white thinking of these poor forecasters stems from their desire “to squeeze complex problems into the preferred cause-effect templates.” Ideas and evidence that don’t fit their theories are treated as “irrelevant distractions.”

    Fame leads to arrogance. Kahneman writes, “The more famous the forecaster the more flamboyant the forecasts.” Tetlock observes, “Experts in demand were more overconfident than their colleagues who eked out existences far from the limelight.”

    Pinker adds that poor forecasters are allergic to the ambiguities of life and “to wishy-washy answers.” Rather than looking for evidence that contradicts their position, they pile “up reasons why they were right and others wrong.” Such experts “were unusually confident and likelier to declare things ‘impossible’ or ‘certain.’ Committed to their conclusions, they were reluctant to change their minds even when their predictions clearly failed. They would tell us, ‘Just wait.’”

    We already hear the “just wait” threat from experts who assure us that if we don’t keep following their advice, the second wave of COVID-19 will inevitably be “far more dire” and the “potentially overwhelming outbreak.”  

    Foxes are the “superforecasters.” Pinker instructs that they are “not necessarily brilliant,” but “they have personality traits that psychologists call ‘openness to experience’ (intellectual curiosity and a taste for variety), ‘need for cognition’ (pleasure taken in intellectual activity), and ‘integrative complexity’ (appreciating uncertainty and seeing multiple sides).”

    Superforecasters are actively looking for their mindset biases. Pinker writes of the best forecasters, “They constantly ask themselves, ‘Are there holes in this reasoning? Should I be looking for something else to fill this in? Would I be convinced by this if I were somebody else?’”

    Politicians and central planners listen to fanatical hedgehogs who insist their way is the only way. The hedgehogs may be decisive, but their forecasts are often spectacularly wrong. 

    Why Hysteria is Contagious 

    Jonathan Sumption, a former UK Supreme Court Justice, recently warned, “When human societies lose their freedom, it’s not usually because tyrants have taken it away. It’s usually because people willingly surrender their freedom in return for protection against some external threat.”

    Sumption blames the public for demanding draconian actions. Most “don’t pause to ask whether the action will work. They don’t ask themselves whether the cost will be worth paying.” 

    Because of herding behavior, “hysteria is infectious.”

    If you were handed two cards with lines on each, one clearly shorter than the other, could you tell the difference? If you think this is a ridiculous question, think again.   

    In one of psychology’s most famous experiments, Solomon Asch showed that if you’re in a group and most of the group members claim the shorter line is longer, you might just go along. In his book You Are Not So Smart, David McRaney reports, “In Asch’s experiments, 75 percent of the subjects caved in on at least one question [about the length of the lines]. They looked at the lines, knew the answer everyone else was agreeing to was wrong, and went with it anyway.” 

    Perhaps even worse, those who changed their correct answers to conform with others “seemed oblivious to their own conformity. When the experimenter told them they had made an error, they came up with excuses as to why they made mistakes instead of blaming the others.”

    If you’re sure you would go against the grain, consider this: “The percentage of people who conformed grew proportionally with the number of people who joined in consensus against them.” 

    Imagine you are in a meeting, and a significant decision is to be made. You think your manager’s plan is ditzy. You are ready to speak out when you see everyone else in the meeting is agreeing with your manager. Would you behave like a mouse and go along? If you’ve ever gone along with a poor decision, don’t beat up on yourself; it’s tough to go against the herd.

    Perhaps you think Asch’s experiments merely show there is no reason to dispute the crowd when the situation is trivial. Sadly, research shows when something significant is on the line, fewer people will buck the herd. 

    In his book The Science of Fear, Dan Gardner reports on experiments by psychologists Robert Baron, Joseph Vandello, and Bethany Brunsman found that conformity goes up “so long as the judgments are difficult or ambiguous, and the influencing agents are united and confident.” 

    Gardner wondered, would new evidence “make us doubt our opinions?” The answer, Gardner found, is, “Once we have formed a view, we embrace information that supports that view while ignoring, rejecting, or harshly scrutinizing information that casts doubt on it.” Confirmation bias trips us up from changing our mind.

    The latest evidence suggests COVID-19 is not as high a risk as initially thought. If you think such evidence will convince your neighbors or Facebook friends that it’s time to end the lockdowns, you will be endlessly frustrated. Our neighbors care what other people think. If you live in an area where support for the lockdowns is widespread, your neighbor will likely go along. Remember, the more nuanced an issue is, and the more critical the problem, the more the desire to conform goes up. 

    We are living through both a pandemic and a contagious madness of global proportions.

    Politicians who led us down this destructive lockdown path won’t be changing their view until their “solution” is politically untenable.

    In his conclusion to The Road to Serfdom, Hayek warns, “We shall not grow wiser before we learn that much that we have done was very foolish.” To grow wiser, we first need to “free ourselves” from a mindset that obscures our errors. We will continue to make errors as long as we continue to believe “what we have done in the recent past was all either wise or inevitable.” 

    We have become a nation of professional victims. We are not victimized by the coronavirus or by politicians and “experts.” We are victims of our choice to conform in support of their policies. Stephen Covey has observed, “It’s easy to take responsibility for the good things in our lives, but the real test comes when things aren’t going well.” 

    Today, we can take responsibility for changing our minds. We are each 100% responsible for how we choose to interpret our experience of life. In her timeless book, The Discovery of Freedom Rose Wilder Lane explained why some prefer to turn over responsibility to authority. When something goes wrong, they proclaim I am an innocent victim of forces beyond my control. Pretending we are innocent is a steep price we pay for losing our freedom.

    Writes Mackay, “Men, it has been well said, think in herds; it will be seen that they go mad in herds, while they only recover their senses slowly, one by one.”

    When we choose to see beyond the “we have no choice” mindset, limitless solutions will begin to come into view. The future of America depends, not upon bailouts or a fast-tracked vaccine, but upon individuals choosing to recover their senses.   


    Tyler Durden

    Thu, 04/30/2020 – 23:40

  • China Refuses WHO Request To Take Part In Coronavirus Origin Probe
    China Refuses WHO Request To Take Part In Coronavirus Origin Probe

    At a time when President Trump has officially accused the Wuhan Institute Of Virology of being the cause for the worst pandemic in modern history (as we did first all the way back in January), claiming he has seen evidence that the lab is in fact the origin, potentially exposing China to trillions in global damages and reparations, not to mention the ire of millions of people around the globe who have lost family or loved ones to the Wuhan Virus, one would think – if indeed it was as innocent as it claims – that China would do everything in its power to open up the Institute for the entire world to inspect and prove its innocence. In fact, one would even think China would even make Peng Zhou – whom we singled out in January and who is now being investigated by “the Five Eyes‘ for his role in the Wu Flu epidemic – accessible to the world to remove even the smallest trace of doubt his lab had anything to do with the coronavirus release.

    One would be wrong.

    As Reuters reports, the World Health Organization (WHO) – which as has already been demonstrated has been doing China’s bidding, PR and damage control ever since the pandemic emerged – has been refused an invitation to take part in a Chinese investigation into the origins of COVID-19. Almost as if China has something to hide even from the organization that it so explicitly control each and every day.

    Sky News spoke to Dr Gauden Galea, the WHO’s representative in China, on Thursday who reported that China refused requests by WHO officials to participate in an investigation.

    “We know that some national investigation is happening but, at this stage, we have not been invited to join,” Dr Galea was quoted as saying.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Gauden Galea, WHO representative in China

    “WHO is making requests of the health commission and of the authorities… The origins of virus are very important, the animal-human interface is extremely important and needs to be studied.

    He is right. And yet, even though the WHO has been exposed as China’s lapdog, China refuses to grant the only international health organization access. For some odd reason the WHO never bothered to ask “why”?

    He said it was crucial to know “as much as possible” in order to prevent a “reoccurrence”. When asked by Sky News whether there was a good reason for the WHO to not be included in the investigation, Dr Galea said: “From our point of view, no”.

    But from China’s… yes.

    Dr Galea told Sky News that while WHO was confident the virus was “naturally occurring” – and once again, the WHO shows that it can’t even approach this most critical of tasks with an open mind and is already prejudicted by the pro-China position even though the US president himself today said he has seen evidence that virus indeed originated in the Wuhan lab – the laboratory’s logs would need to be “part of any full report, any full look at the story of the origins”. So far, WHO has not been able to investigate the logs, he said.

    The WHO representative also said China would have to explain why no new cases of COVID-19 were reported in the country for a significant period of time in early January. Not that China would ever answer.

    So while the “establishment” of pro-China healthcare workers and faux Facebook “fact checkers” such as the grotesque case of the borderline criminally conflicted Danielle Anderson, among those who have pushed the “conspiracy theory” that China knows more than its letting on about the virus – some three months after this website of course – are US President Donald Trump, French President Emmanuel Macron and German Chancellor Angela Merkel, who said the more transparent China is, the better.

    Meanwhile, Trump has withdrawn funding from the WHO over concerns about its transparency and for placing too much trust in China.

    As for China, the bigger question is not if Beijing is lying but when, if ever, it is telling the truth: even the pro-establishemnt, anti-Trump Associated Press reported earlier this month that China was aware of the virus’ seriousness and the possibility of human-to-human transmission days before warning citizens. But China maintains it acted swiftly to deal with the virus and has been transparent with both the WHO and other countries.

    Australia’s Foreign Minister Marise Payne has been one of the strongest advocates for a global inquiry into the virus, saying mid-April that Australia would “insist” on one. However, as we reported previously, demonstrating that Beijing won’t even accept being questioned let alone probed, China took offense to that, saying Australia was just parroting the views of the United States, while France, Britain and the European Union and threatened an import boycott.

    Even tiny New Zealand, whose real estate market is largely at the whim of Chinese oligarchs, has expressed an interest in looking into how the pandemic occurred, but hasn’t specifically singled out reviewing China’s role. New Zealand Prime Minister Jacinda Ardern also signalled an inquiry should happen once the pandemic was over.

    “There have been politicians around the world who have said, ‘Look, in the aftermath of this, we do need to look at what happened and whether or not there are areas we could as a global community improve our response’,” she explained last week. “I think that’s common sense. Of course, we want to make sure we learn from what has been a global pandemic that has shaken the globe in a way that none other has for many decades” she said in her most politically correct tone, desperate not to offend China.

    Finally, confirming just how political any potential probe would be, a terrified NZ Foreign Minister Winston Peters said on Tuesday that he trusted China wouldn’t punish New Zealand for taking part in an inquiry.

    “It is very hard to conceive, no matter what country it is, of there not being a desire from every country around the world – including the country of origin – for an investigation to find out how this happened,” he said, adding laughably “I’m not worried about [potential ramifications] because China has promised me they don’t behave that way.”

    The funniest part about the bolded sentence is that he actually wasn’t kidding.


    Tyler Durden

    Thu, 04/30/2020 – 23:34

  • Time For A Gap Year: Harvard Tells Students Prepare For Likelihood Of Online Only Fall Courses
    Time For A Gap Year: Harvard Tells Students Prepare For Likelihood Of Online Only Fall Courses

    In what could be a precedent-setting move by arguably the world’s most prestigious academic institution, Harvard University announced Monday that the extreme uncertainty surrounding the coronavirus pandemic and accompanying economic shutdowns means the school is mulling the possibility of going to online only classes for the Fall semester.

    “We cannot be certain that it will be safe to resume all usual activities” by autumn, university provost Alan Garber wrote in a school-wide memo on Monday, reports the WSJ. “Consequently, we will need to prepare for a scenario in which much or all learning will be conducted remotely.”

    And in a statement sure to be met with collective eye-rolling among a student body prepared to drop some $70,000+ only to kick the year off with months or possibly more of sub-par ‘remote learning’ courses, school spokesman Jason Newton added in an email, “The primary message is that the University is moving forward with the fall semester, rather than delaying it.”

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Harvard University, file image via Flickr

    We doubt the students and families, many of which are likely going into debt to get that top-rate and in most cases out-of-state education, will see it that way (though in Harvard’s case – an exception to the norm – its massive endowment and extremely selective acceptance rate means at least 70% of students receive typically massive financial aid, tuition breaks and scholarships via the school’s ample means). 

    Last week Harvard announced it has cancelled freshman pre-orientation programs set to take place in August, suggesting further that the Fall semester just won’t happen like it normally would in physical classrooms and on campus.

    As we detailed earlier, more broadly across the nation college administrations have remained aloof to student demands either for refunds from this year or greatly reduced tuition for online format classes in the future, given it’s just not the same. But these institutions naturally aren’t feeling generous given most are in mere survival mode, making both budget and in some cases staff cuts. 

    Schools are already losing tens of millions in campus and summer fees given shutdowns, not to mention sports programs being shuttered, also as the the question of whether in-person instruction will even happen next Fall remains the biggest anxiety-inducing huge unknown, potentially delivering a financial fatal blow to a number of already struggling schools. Endowment values have plunged along with markets to boot. And then there’s a no doubt a greatly diminished incoming freshman class, and with that severely declining numbers of tuition checks coming in.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Getty images

    Last week The Washington Post summarized the crisis quite well: “The coronavirus crisis is forcing a reckoning over the price and value of higher education” — given that at the root of this, WaPo noted, is this: “Schools geared toward full-time students… offer, in normal times, academic programs with a personal touch, including seminars, laboratory classes, office hours and research opportunities with faculty.”

    If Harvard eventually announces an online-only Fall semester, it’s most likely many others will follow suit, leaving tuition-paying families to ponder the increasingly attractive possibility of taking a well-timed gap year. As Forbes comments on this trend:

    College students, but particularly current high school seniors, are considering taking a gap year while they wait for campus life to resume… This year, students will have to think outside of the box of the traditional gap year occupations. Rather than begin their college career through online classes, students will be dipping their toes into various nontraditional and professional opportunities.

    After all, who wants to drop an initial $40K to $60K or more to potentially sit in the family living room for Fall 2020 and take online classes?

    Should this ‘domino effect’ happen, the financial blow to many higher-ed institutions (though not Harvard or wealthy Ivy League schools it should be noted) could prove irreversible and even fatal to continuing operations.


    Tyler Durden

    Thu, 04/30/2020 – 23:20

  • America The Victim: Are Enemies Lining Up For Revenge In The Wake Of COVID-19?
    America The Victim: Are Enemies Lining Up For Revenge In The Wake Of COVID-19?

    Authored by Philip Giraldi via The Strategic Culture Foundation,

    When in trouble politically, governments have traditionally conjured up a foreign enemy to explain why things are going wrong.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Whatever one chooses to believe about the coronavirus, the fact is that it has resulted in considerable political backlash against a number of governments whose behavior has been perceived as either too extreme or too dilatory. Donald Trump’s White House has taken shots from both directions and the response to the disease has also been pilloried due to repeated gaffes by the president himself. The latest mis-spoke, now being framed by Trump’s press secretary as sarcasm, involved a presidential suggestion that one might consider injecting or imbibing disinfectant to treat the disease, either of which could easily prove lethal.

    So, the administration is desperate to change the narrative and has decided to hit on the old expedient, namely seeking out a foreign enemy to distract from what is going on in the nation’s hospitals. The tale of malevolent foreigners has been picked up by a number of mainstream media outlets and has proven especially titillating because there is not just one bad guy, but instead at least four: China, Russia, North Korea and Iran.

    The accepted narrative is that America’s enemies are now taking advantage of a moment of weakness due to the lockdown response to the coronavirus and have stepped up their attacks, both physical and metaphorical, on the Exceptional Nation Under God.

    The most recent claim that the United States is being targeted involves an incident in mid-April during which a swarm of Iranian gunboats allegedly harassed a group of American warships conducting a training exercise in the Persian Gulf by crossing the bows and sterns of the U.S. vessels at close range. The maneuvers were described by the Navy as “unsafe and unprofessional” but the tiny speedboats in no way threatened the much larger warships (note the photo in the link which illustrates the disparity in size between the two vessels).

    Donald Trump characteristically responded to the incident with a tweet last Wednesday: “I have instructed the United States Navy to shoot down and destroy any and all Iranian gunboats if they harass our ships at sea.” Although no context was provided, the president commands the armed forces and the tweet essentially defined the rules of engagement, meaning that it would be up to the ships’ commanders to determine whether or not they are being harassed. If so, the would be able to open fire and destroy the Iranian boats. Of course, there might be a physical problem in “shooting down” a gunboat that is in the water rather than in the air.

    In the Mediterranean the threat against the U.S. consisted of two Russian jet fighters flying close to a Navy P8-A submarine surveillance plane. The Russian fighters were scrambled from Hmeymim air base in Syria after the U.S. aircraft approached Syrian airspace and Russian military facilities. One of the fighters, a SU-35 carried out an “unsafe” maneuver when it flew upside down at high-speed 25 feet in front of the Navy plane.

    Also in mid-April, North Korea meanwhile fired cruise missiles into the Sea of Japan amidst rumors that its head of state Kim Jong Un might be dead or dying after major surgery. President Trump was unconcerned about the missiles and also commented that he had received a “nice note” from the North Korean leader.

    Wars and rumors of wars notwithstanding, China continues to be the principal target for Democrats and Republicans alike on Capitol Hill. GOP congressmen are reportedly urging sanctions against China while there are already a number of coronavirus lawsuits targeting Chinese assets in U.S. courts, at least one of which has a trillion dollar price tag. Theories about the deliberate weaponization of the Wuhan virus abound and they are also mixed in with stories of how Beijing unleashed the weapons and is now engaged in Russia style social media intervention to promote the notion that the United States has proven incapable of handling what has become a major medical emergency. However, those who are pushing the idea that the Chinese communist party has declared war by other means fail to explain why the government in Beijing is so keen on destroying its largest export market. If the U.S. economy goes down a large part of the Chinese economy will go with it, particularly if China’s second largest export market Europe is also suffering.

    The craziness of what is going on in the context of the disruption caused by the coronavirus has apparently increased the normal paranoia level at the top levels of the U.S. government. Pentagon plans to fight a war with Russia and China simultaneously, first mooted in 2018, are still a work in progress in spite of the fact that Washington has fewer cards to play currently than it did two years ago. The economy is down and prospects for recovery are speculative at best, but the war machine rolls on. Many Americans tired of the perpetual warfare are hoping that the virus aftermath will include demands for a genuine national health system that will perforce gut the Pentagon budget, leading to an eventual withdrawal from empire.

    In spite of the hysteria, it is important to note that no Americans have been killed or injured as a result of recent Iranian, Russian, Chinese and North Korean actions. When you station ships and planes close to or even on the borders of countries that you have labeled as enemies it would be reasonable to expect that there will be pushback. And as for taking advantage of the virus, it is the United States that has suggested that it would do so in the cases of Iran and Venezuela, exerting “maximum pressure” on both countries in their times of troubles to bring about regime change.

    If those countries that are accustomed to being regularly targeted by the United States are taking advantage of an opportunity to diminish America’s ability to intervene globally, no one should be surprised, but it is a fantasy to make the hysterical claim that the United States has now become the victim of some kind of vast international conspiracy.


    Tyler Durden

    Thu, 04/30/2020 – 23:00

  • Yuan Crashes After Trump Weighs Blocking Retirement Fund Access To Chinese Stocks As War Of Words Escalates
    Yuan Crashes After Trump Weighs Blocking Retirement Fund Access To Chinese Stocks As War Of Words Escalates

    Having tumbled yesterday on the first set of headlines reporting on the Trump administration’s plans to seek ‘COVID reparations’ amid accusations of Chinese ‘meddling’ in the US election (obviously not in favor of Trump), the Chinese yuan legged dramatically lower in this evening’s illiquid session which sees most of Asia closed for May Day, after Bloomberg reports that Trump is exploring blocking a government retirement fund from investing in Chinese equities considered a national security risk.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Trump made his initial threats from the Rose Garden at the White House Monday after he was pressed by a reporter over a German newspaper report suggesting that China should be issued a $160 billion invoice for the impact on Europe’s economy.

    The president responded he had a “much easier” idea:

    “We have ways of doing things a lot easier than that,” Trump told the coronavirus press briefing. “Germany’s looking at things, and we’re looking at things, and we’re talking about a lot more money than Germany’s talking about.”

    “We haven’t determined the final amount yet. It’s very substantial,” Trump added, suggesting it would be significantly more than the $160 billion floated in German media.

    Asked whether he was considering the use of tariffs or even a debt write-offs for China (something which Larry Kudlow vehemently rejected earlier on Thursday), Trump would not offer specifics.

    “There are many things I can do,” he said. “We’re looking for what happened.”

    Since then various plans have been proposed, but Trump escalated the war of words further, during an Oval Office interview with Reuters  published Wednesday night,  saying that he thinks that China is determined to see him lose the November election based on Beijing’s response to the coronavirus, and that he is considering various ways to punish the Chinese government which he he again blamed for allowing the virus to spread across the world.

    “China will do anything they can to have me lose this race,” Trump said in the interview and said he was looking at different options in terms of consequences for Beijing over the virus. “I can do a lot,” he said.

    Which was quickly followed by denials from Chinese Foreign Ministry spokesman Geng Shuang, saying that China has no interest in interfering in internal U.S. affairs (unless of course that ‘affair’ involves investigating the origin of COVID-19). China hopes some people in U.S. won’t drag country into its internal processes, Geng said.

    And tonight, Bloomberg reports that, after months of pressure from concerned lawmakers, according to a person familiar with the internal deliberations, the Trump admin is planning an executive order to block a 2017 decision that The Thrift Savings Plan, the federal government’s retirement savings fund, would transfer a massive $50 billion to an international fund which would mirror the MSCI All-Country World Index.

    The issue being China’s addition to the index, and thus the fund being forced to allocate significant capital to the Chinese stock markets, at a time when the gloves between the two nations are clearly off.

    Needless to say, the optics of the US halting capital from entering China would be staggering and could result in a reversion of China-bound capital flows across all Western countries until the current war of words between Trump and Xi rages. The only problem is that, as we noted yesterday, this particular war of words could last a long time, since there is no longer any impetus to kiss and make up, and if anything, Trump will only escalate the anti-China sentiment into the election (and after), to keep pounding that the collapse resulting from the coronavirus pandemic is not his fault, but rather’s Beijing, even as China pursues a mirror image approach, blaming the US for launching the pandemic.

    The most obvious market reaction for now is in Offshore Yuan which has collapsed in the last two days, extending losses tonight…

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Source: Bloomberg

    Of course, much of Asia is on May-Day holiday so liquidity is low, but Yuan’s move is significant nevertheless…

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Source: Bloomberg

    Bloomberg reports that Senator Marco Rubio, a Florida Republican, applauded reports of the move in a statement Thursday.

    “It’s outrageous that five unelected bureaucrats appointed by the previous administration have ignored bipartisan calls from Congress to reverse this short-sighted decision, and I applaud President Trump for directing his administration to take swift action preventing this from going forward,” he said.

    We would expect China to be furious at this discussion and wonder what they will do to stall this move – one suggestion, given the weakness in US equity futures overnight, is to push volatility back into US markets – to shake the faith in the dramatic market rebound (that The Fed enabled).


    Tyler Durden

    Thu, 04/30/2020 – 22:52

  • Restaurant Recovery Begins As Money Spent On Dining Posts First Increase In Weeks
    Restaurant Recovery Begins As Money Spent On Dining Posts First Increase In Weeks

    Today’s -4.8% GDP print was dire, but it would have been even worse had it not been for a spike in discretionary spending as Americans found themselves under house arrest for the second half of March. Given the importance of consumer spending on GDP, we looked at trends in the restaurant space amidst Covid-19 related headwinds, courtesy of Clover data compiled by Morgan Stanley. What we found is that for the first time in weeks there was a clear WoW improvement in dining spend, an indication that the worst is over for the restaurant industry. 

    Here are some observations from the dining trends chart below:

    • Small business food and drink saw a slight WoW improvement, with volumes down 21% the week ending April 19th vs a normalized level, compared to the prior week’s down 25%.
    • Broader restaurant trends also improved WoW, with restaurant sales now down 49% YoY the week ending April 19th (vs. -60% YoY the week prior). QSR continues to perform better than restaurants,now down 14% YoY (vs. down 31% YoY the week prior)

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Confirming the above observations, a new survey from Hospitality Trends indicates that pent-up demand for restaurants is elevated, even as many consumers maintain their off-premises frequency.

    While takeout and delivery are the only restaurant options available for the vast majority of consumers across the country, based on weekly surveys conducted by the National Restaurant Association beginning in late-February, the proportion of consumers using these off-premises options remained remarkably consistent throughout the coronavirus crisis.

    In fact, six in 10 adults say they ordered takeout or delivery from a restaurant for a dinner meal last week – a level that has held relatively steady during the past two months. In addition, an off-premises lunch purchase was made by roughly four in 10 adults during each of the last nine weeks. 20% of consumers say they picked up a breakfast meal, snack or beverage in the morning from a coffee shop or restaurant last week. This is down from roughly three in 10 adults who reported similarly in late-February.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    For restaurants that are offering off-premises options, the good news is that many consumers want more. 52% of adults say they are not ordering takeout or delivery from restaurants as often as they would like. As a point of comparison, 44% reported similarly when the Association fielded the same question in mid-January.

    58% percent of baby boomers say they would like to order takeout or delivery more frequently right now. This is roughly 10% points higher than their counterparts in the younger generations.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Not surprisingly, a strong majority of consumers say they would like to be dining out at restaurants more frequently – as this option is largely unavailable throughout most of the country. 83% of adults say they are not eating on the premises at restaurants as often as they would like. This is up from 45% who reported similarly in mid-January, and by far the highest level in the two decades that the Association has been fielding this survey question.

    Baby boomers (90%) are the most likely to report that they would like to be eating at restaurants more often, though at least three in four adults in each age group want to increase their frequency. This suggests that as dining room doors being to reopen, pent-up demand among consumers will be strong.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>


    Tyler Durden

    Thu, 04/30/2020 – 22:40

  • Deutsche Bank Capitulates: Starts Charging Negative Rate On All New Deposit Accounts Over €100,000
    Deutsche Bank Capitulates: Starts Charging Negative Rate On All New Deposit Accounts Over €100,000

    It has been a long time coming and it’s finally here.

    When the ECB first unleashed negative rates across Europe in 2014, banks were loathe to match the central bank’s deposit rates for their clients to those charged by the ECB over fears depositors would simply take their money and go elsewhere. After all, the premise of paying a bank for the privilege of holding your money is still absolutely insane to most normal people.

    However, as the years went by, and as the ECB’s negative rates kept rising – or rather dropping – banks were forced to quietly admit they had no choice and starting at the very top, targeting only corporate clients and the biggest depositors, European banks started imposing negative deposit rates while hoping they could avoid going all the way to the smaller savers.

    Indeed, just last November, Deutsche Bank vowed that it would pass on negative interest rates only to larger corporate customers or the deposits of wealthy individuals and spare most retail clients, Deputy Chief Executive Officer Karl von Rohr said, explaining that German banks have already paid several billion euros in penalty rates for their deposits with the European Central Bank and Deutsche Bank’s payments amount to “several hundred million euros for 2019.”

    Now, less than half a year later, the Frankfurt-based bank – which itself is in dire financial straits – has capitulated and to avoid paying the ECB’s punitive rate will soon introduce negative interest rates for even its medium depositors.

    A Deutsche Bank spokesman told Handelsblatt that “The ongoing pressure from negative interest rates makes it necessary for Deutsche Bank to charge custody fees for new accounts exceeding €100,000 starting May 18, 2020.” The “deposit rate” of -0.5% is equal to the rate the ECB charges banks for money parked there.

    “This helps us on the earnings side, but above all it helps to prevent further inflows of particularly high deposits that cost us money,” wrote Manfred Knof, head of the bank’s German private customer business, to his employees. This applies “especially in the event that other banks further adjust their conditions and their customers are looking for an alternative for their deposits with us.”

    In other words, with the ECB flooding the European financial system with a tsunami of liquidity – one which it expanded today with yet another meaningless long-term refi operation as if that will do anything to help banks who can  no longer earn a net interest margin arb become solvent – Europe’s banks no longer need deposits, and in fact will do everything they can to push away all but the smallest depositors. The good news, for now, is that “existing account contracts are not affected” however we expect that to change soon.

    So with European banks finally cracking down on the bulk of their depositors instead of just the top 1% and corporate clients, what happens next?

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Well, savers who collectively owns trillions in European bank deposits that are now non grata have two options: either pull the money out, convert it to cash and store it in a safe (something Germany has a lot of experience with especially in late 2016 when Deutsche Bank was on the verge of collapse, sparking a rush to buy safes) where it is outside of the financial system – this is precisely the alternative the ECB prepared for several years ago when it stopped printing the €500 banknote, or more likely, buy alternative physical assets which – in a time of pervasive deflation and negative rates – do not charge a penalty rate, such as gold or even cryptos.

    So if over the next few months a wave of “mysterious” buying emerges and lifts all non-traditional assets which prevent central banks from imposing penalty rates, we will know why: the real great rotation has finally begun.


    Tyler Durden

    Thu, 04/30/2020 – 22:20

  • LatAm Bailout Veteran Says Emerging Market Crisis Is The "Worst He's Ever Seen"
    LatAm Bailout Veteran Says Emerging Market Crisis Is The “Worst He’s Ever Seen”

    With the Nasdaq set to erase all of its 2020 losses after strong earnings from the tech giants, and stocks generally surging on the assumption that, as UBS put it, “lockdowns are lifted by the end of June and do not need to be re-imposed”, especially with today’s favorable if conflicting remdesivir news, it is easy to forget that emerging markets are facing their private hell as a result of widespread economic shutdowns, poor healthcare conditions which will only exacerbate the coronavirus pandemic, the dollar’s relentless strength, and trillions in dollar-denominated debt maturing in the next few years which the chronically strong US dollar will make prohibitively impossible to repay.

    But don’t take our word for it: according to Bill Rhodes, CEO of Rhodes Global Advisors and a veteran of countless international bailouts in the 1980s and 1990s, the debt crisis that’s erupted across the world’s emerging markets is “the worst he’s ever seen.”

    Rhodes, 84, is perhaps the world’s foremost expert on emerging markets in peril: the former Citigroup executive is a veteran of the 1980s Brady Plan that re-set the clock for Latin America’s struggling economies by creating a new debt structure for developing nations that’s largely in place to this day.

    “It’s going to be difficult,” Rhodes said in an interview with Bloomberg discussing the coming EM crisis. “You need to have some sort of coordination between the private and the public sectors.”

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Pedestrian walks through the deserted Plaza de Mayo in Buenos Aires on March 20. Photographer: Sarah Pabst/Bloomberg

    The problem: three decades after a coordinated rescue of emerging markets orchestrated by US Treasury Secretary Nicholas Brady (the person responsible for the term Brady Bonds) the global pandemic is again challenging the world for a solution, and this time a raft of private bondholders must also be on board. More than 90 nations have already asked the IMF for help amid the pandemic.

    The first challenge is that the $160 billion debt renegotiated during the Brady Plan pales next to the $730 billion that the Institute of International Finance says must be restructured by the end of 2020; the final number could be far greater.

    Adding to the difficulties of the next global bailout, unlike 1989, when the loans were mostly held by banks and defaults had already happened, now it’s split between hundreds of creditors ranging from New York hedge funds to Middle Eastern sovereign wealth funds and Asian pension funds. Getting them all in the same room will be a challenge, forget about getting them all to agree on one outcome.

    Following in the footsteps of forbearance protocols enabled across the US, academics and officials are pushing for steps that would allow developing nations to pause bond payments through at least 2020, if not even longer, until the coronavirus fades and economies stabilize enough to analyze debt sustainability. And since one’s debt is always someone else’s asset, that proposal is upsetting creditors on Wall Street who depend on those funds to keep their portfolios afloat and to generate current income.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Meanwhile, G-20 leaders and multilateral organizations are already working toward relief for nations to stay current on debt. The IMF and Paris Club asked the Washington-based IIF to coordinate a standstill, and the United Nations is calling for a new global debt body.

    The other big challenge is that bureaucrats have to not only reach a solution, they have a strict time limit in which to do so: dollar-denominated debt from 18 developing nations already trades at spreads of at least 1,000 basis points over U.S. Treasuries. While the top three insolvent outliers – Venezuela, Argentina and Lebanon – were grappling with their own problems before the pandemic, others are fast approaching those levels amid currency sell-offs and record-shattering outflows.

    Rhodes’ dire warning echoes that of another EM expert: Anna Stupnytska, Fidelity International’s head of global macro and investment strategy, told Bloomberg “I’m really worried about emerging markets,” adding that Brazil, Mexico, Colombia, South Africa, India and Indonesia may be among the most vulnerable to a virus-related crisis. She expects the coming months to be critical.

    Stupnytska, who isn’t expecting a V-shaped economic recovery anywhere, said that weak public health systems, political worries and doubts on central bank independence are “really unhelpful” for EM nations, and that other than parts of Asia, large sections of developing nations are yet to see a peak in coronavirus cases.

    “So we are potentially looking at some emerging markets crisis even over the next few months.”

    With the clocking ticking, some sort of forbearance on debt payments – currently the most popular idea to help emerging markets – has to be agreed upon and soon; it would also need to extend beyond 2020, according to Anna Gelpern, a law professor at Georgetown University who spent six years at the Treasury. A coordination group could offer standardized terms to all of a country’s creditors that automatically push out payments, however how all creditors will get on the same page is unclear. After all, with memories still fresh of the massive profits Elliott Management earned by holding out on the Argentina debt restructuring early this century, what is to prevent all creditors to pursue this path?

    Bloomberg agrees, noting that “it will be no easy task to convince private creditors, especially those with large emerging-market exposure, to take a hit by deferring debt payments.”

    Zambia has started talks to postpone its arrears, while Argentina has proposed a plan to restructure its debt that includes a three-year payment moratorium. Neither country has found much traction with its creditors who demand a payment and in full upon maturity.

    “Countries that look to markets and are willing to engage market participants have found success in bridging the Covid financial shock,” said an optimistic Hans Humes, CEO of Greylock Capital Management, which has been involved in most emerging-market restructurings over the past quarter-century. Many would disagree with his cheerful assumption.

    Then again maybe creditors will find it in their bank accounts, if not hearts, to grant a reprieve: bondholders already granted Ecuador a delay on coupon payments until August, which may save the government as much as $1.35 billion this year, as it deals with one of the region’s worst virus outbreaks and a sell-off in oil.

    Alternatively, “the time and resource costs of pursuing market debt relief may outweigh the benefits,” especially if a country plans to default anyway, Goldman’s Dylan Smith wrote in an April 17 note. Plus, “it is not clear that the fiduciary duties of large bondholders toward their investors would allow them to provide lenience to debtors, even if they privately support the initiative.”

    And you thought OPEC deals were complicated.

    Lee Buchheit, a four-decade veteran of the restructuring world, said forcing each nation to renegotiate on its own would only exacerbate the pain. “Here we have a planet-wide phenomenon that is going to make a number of countries have to face unsustainable debt positions.”


    Tyler Durden

    Thu, 04/30/2020 – 22:00

  • "Don't Close RAZOR": Flynn FBI Setup Continues To Unravel As Texts Reveal Strzok Went Off The Rails
    “Don’t Close RAZOR”: Flynn FBI Setup Continues To Unravel As Texts Reveal Strzok Went Off The Rails

    Update (1745ET): President Trump said at a press conference today that he would consider bringing Michael Flynn back into the administration, saying that his former national security adviser is “essentially exonerated.”

    *  *  *

    After a US District Court Judge unsealed four pages of FBI emails and handwritten notes which provided the strongest evidence of a perjury trap, attorney and journalist @Techno_Fog has just connected two more damning dots.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    According to a new filing in Flynn’s case, the FBI investigation into Trump’s former National Security Adviser was called “Crossfire Razor.”

    Notably, on January 1, 2017, the FBI’s Washington DC field office recommended closing the case against Flynn after finding “no derogatory information” against him.

    “The goal of the investigation was to determine whether [Flynn], associated with the Trump campaign, was directed and controlled by and/or coordinated activities with the Russian Federation in a manner which is a threat to the national security and/or possibly a violation of the Foreign Agents Registration Act,” reads an FBI memorandum.

    “Following the initiation of captioned case, the [Crossfire Hurricane] team conducted a check of logical databases for any derogatory information on [Flynn],” it continues, concluding: “No derogatory information was identified in FBI holdings.”

    Text messages sent by former FBI official Peter Strzok the same day reveal his intent to continue his pursuit of Flynn.

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    To review, as Sara Carter detailed last night, the FBI emails and handwritten notes revealed that the retired three-star general was being targeted for prosecution according to Flynn’s attorney, Sidney Powell.

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    As we noted earlier Thursday:

    ***

    In one of the emails dated Jan. 23, 2017, FBI lawyer Lisa Page, who at the time was having an affair with Strzok and who worked closely with him on the case discussed the charges the bureau would bring on Flynn before the actual interview at the White House took place. Those email exchanges were prepared for former FBI Deputy Director Andrew McCabe, who was fired by the DOJ for lying multiple times to investigators with DOJ Inspector General Michael Horowitz’s office.

    Former FBI Director James Comey, who was fired by President Trump for his conduct, revealed during an interview with Nicolle Wallace last year that he sent the FBI agents to interview Flynn at the White House under circumstances he would have never done to another administration.

    “I probably wouldn’t have done or maybe gotten away with in a more organized investigation, a more organized administration,” Comey said. “In the George W. Bush administration … or the Obama administration, two men that all of us, perhaps, have increased appreciation for over the last two years.”

    In the Jan 23, email Page asks Strzok the day before he interviews Flynn at the White House:

    “I have a question for you. Could the admonition re 1001 be given at the beginning at the interview? Or does it have to come following a statement which agents believe to be false? Does the policy speak to that? (I feel bad that I don’t know this but I don’t remember ever having to do this! Plus I’ve only charged it once in the context of lying to a federal probation officer). It seems to be if the former, then it would be an easy way to just casually slip that in.

    “Of course as you know sir, federal law makes it a crime to…”

    Strzok’s response:

    I haven’t read the policy lately, but if I recall correctly, you can say it at any time. I’m 90 percent sure about that, but I can check in the am.

    In the motion filed earlier this week, Powell stated “since August 2016 at the latest, partisan FBI and DOJ leaders conspired to destroy Mr. Flynn. These documents show in their own handwriting and emails that they intended either to create an offense they could prosecute or at least get him fired. Then came the incredible malfeasance of Mr. Van Grack’s and the SCO’s prosecution despite their knowledge there was no crime by Mr. Flynn.”

    Attached to the email is handwritten notes regarding Flynn that are stunning on their face. It is lists of how the agents will guide him in an effort to get him to trip up on his answers during their questioning and what charges they could bring against him.

    “If we get him to admit to breaking the Logan Act, give facts to DOJ & have them decide,” state the handwritten notes.

    “Or if he initially lies, then we present him (not legible) & he admits it, document for DOJ, & let them decide how to address it.”

    The next two points reveal that the agents were concerned about how their interview with Flynn would be perceived saying “if we’re seen as playing games, WH (White House) will be furious.”

    “Protect our institution by not playing games,” the last point on the first half of the hand written notes state.

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js<!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    From the handwritten note:

    Afterwards:

    • interview

    • I agreed yesterday that we shouldn’t show Flynn (redacted) if he didn’t admit

    • I thought @ it last night, I believe we should rethink this

    • What is (not legible) ? Truth/admission or to get him to lie, so we can prosecute him or get him fired?

    • we regularly show subjects evidence, with the goal of getting them to admit their wrongdoing

    • I don’t see how getting someone to admit their wrongdoing is going easy on him

    • If we get him to admit to breaking the Logan Act, give facts to DOJ & have them decide

    • Or if he initially lies, then we present him (not legible) & he admits it, document for DOJ, & let them decide how to address it

    • If we’re seen as playing games, WH will be furious

    • Protect our institution by not playing games

    (Left column)

    • we have case on Flynn & Russians

    • Our goal is to (not legible)

    • Our goal is to determine if Mike Flynn is going to tell the truth or if he lies @ relationship w/ Russians

    • can quote (redacted)

    • Shouldn’t (redacted

    Review (not legible) stand alone

    It appears evident from an email from former FBI agent Strzok, who interviewed Flynn at the White House to then FBI General Counsel James Baker, who is no longer with the FBI and was himself under investigation for leaking alleged national security information to the media.


    Tyler Durden

    Thu, 04/30/2020 – 21:55

  • Silver Hasn't Been This Cheap In 5,000 Years Of Human History
    Silver Hasn’t Been This Cheap In 5,000 Years Of Human History

    Authored by Simon Black via SovereignMan.com,

    More than 4,000 years ago, the city of Kanesh was quickly becoming an important commercial trading hub within the ancient Assyrian Empire.

    Kanesh was located in the dead center of modern day Turkey, so it was perfectly situated on the route between the Mediterranean and the Black Sea, and between Europe and Asia Minor.

    As a result, Kanesh became a popular trading post. And merchants, scribes, and moneylenders from all over the Assyrian Empire traveled there to profit from the boom in copper, tin, and textiles.

    What’s extraordinary about this period of history is how many records remain from those day-to-day transactions.

    The Assyrians borrowed the writing system from ancient Mesopotamia and routinely chiseled their commercial trades on clay ‘cuneiform’ tablets.

    Tens of thousands of these tablets have been discovered by modern archaeologists, so we have an incredible amount of detail about ancient financial transactions.

    For example, one tablet on display at the Met in New York City documents the terms of a loan that originated in Kanesh some time in the 19th century BC.

    According to the table, an Assyrian merchant named Ashur-idi loaned 3kg of silver to two traders, with 1/3 of the amount to be repaid in one year’s time.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    This was fairly common back then: gold and silver were both used as a medium of exchange in ancient times. But this was before coins existed, so transactions would be settled based on weight.

    In ancient Babylonia, for instance (which rose to power after the Assyrian Empire faded), the cuneiform tablets from that era tell us that the price of barley averaged about 17 grams of silver per 100 quarts.

    And merchants would use elaborate scales to weigh gold and silver when exchanging their goods.

    Gold and silver were also exchangeable for each other. Another tablet from ancient Babylonia during the time of Nebuchadnezzer states that 5 shekels of silver were worth ½ shekel of gold.

    (A shekel in ancient times was a unit of weight, equivalent to about 8.33 grams.)

    This implies a 10:1 ratio between silver and gold.

    We’ve discussed this ratio several times; the gold/silver ratio has existed for thousands of years, and up until the 20th century, it remained within that ancient range of between 10 to 20 units of silver per unit of gold.

    In modern times, gold and silver are no longer used as a medium of exchange. But there’s still been a long-standing ratio that has persisted for decades.

    One ounce of gold has typically been valued at 50 to 80 ounces of silver. Rarely does the ratio go higher (or lower). And when it has, prices have always corrected.

    As of this morning the ratio is 112, meaning it now takes 112 ounces of silver to buy one ounce of gold; and today’s level is spitting distance from the ratio’s all-time high of 120, which it reached last month.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    And when I say “all-time high,” I mean it. Ancient cuneiform tablets prove that silver has never been so cheap relative to gold in literally thousands of years of human history.

    If history is any guide, this means that the ratio should eventually narrow, i.e. the price of silver should rise and/or the price of gold should fall, bringing the ratio back to its more normal range.

    And there are plenty of ways to potentially make money from this.

    The Chicago Mercantile Exchange, for example, offers a financially-settled futures contract for traders to speculate on the Gold/Silver ratio.

    But the CME’s gold/silver ratio contract is very thinly traded and difficult to purchase, so it might not be the best approach.

    In theory, one way to speculate that the gold/silver ratio will return to historic norms would be to ‘short’ gold contracts and go ‘long’ silver contracts, i.e. speculate that the price of gold will fall while the price of silver will rise.

    But, personally, there’s no chance I would bet against gold right now.

    I’ve written for the past several weeks that I approach this entire pandemic from a position of ignorance and uncertainty.

    EVERY possible scenario is on the table, and no one can say for sure what’s going to happen next.

    There are very few things that are clear. But in my view, one thing that has become clear is that western governments will print as much money as it takes to bail everyone out.

    According to the Congressional Budget Office, the US federal government will post a $3.6 TRILLION deficit this Fiscal Year due to all the bailouts. Plus the Federal Reserve has already printed $2 trillion.

    Frankly I think they’re just getting started.

    With this incomprehensible tsunami of government debt and paper money flooding the system, real assets are a historically great bet.

    We’ve talked about this before: real assets are things that cannot be engineered by politicians and central banks– assets like productive land, well-managed businesses, and yes, precious metals.

    And they all tend to do very well when central banks print tons of money.

    Farmland, for example, was one of the best performing assets during the stagflation of the 1970s.

    And financial data over the past several decades shows that whenever they print lots of money, the price of gold tends to increase.

    Right now, in fact, the price of gold is relatively cheap compared to the current money supply.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    And the price of silver is ridiculously cheap compared to gold. Again, silver has never been cheaper in 5,000 years.

    This is why I’d rather just own physical silver. I’m not interested in betting against gold because I expect they’ll continue to print money. In fact I’m happy to buy more gold.

    And while we cannot be certain about anything, there’s a strong case to be made that the price of silver could soar.

    And to continue learning how to ensure you thrive no matter what happens next in the world, I encourage you to download our free Perfect Plan B Guide.


    Tyler Durden

    Thu, 04/30/2020 – 21:40

  • Pompeo Demands Countries Block Airspace To Iran's 'Terrorist Airline' After Venezuela Deliveries
    Pompeo Demands Countries Block Airspace To Iran’s ‘Terrorist Airline’ After Venezuela Deliveries

    The US is going on the offensive once again against Venezuela, this time attempting to break up growing Iranian cooperation and assistance to Caracas. The two so-called ‘rogue states’ recently targeted for US-imposed regime change are helping each other fight coronavirus as well as Washington-led sanctions. Specifically Tehran has ramped up cargo deliveries related getting Venezuela’s derelict oil refineries fully operational.

    Secretary of State Mike Pompeo in new statements has called on international allies to block airspace specifically for Iran’s Mahan Air, currently under US sanctions, and which has in recent days delivered cargoes of “unknown support” to the Venezuelan government, according to Pompeo’s words. 

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Last year Mahan Air officially announced direct flights to Venezuela. Image via AFP

    Late last week it was revealed Venezuela received a huge boost in the form of oil refinery materials and chemicals to fix the catalytic cracking unit at the 310,000 barrels-per-day Cardon refinery, essential to the nation’s gas production.

    Repair of the refinery is considered essential to domestic gasoline consumption, the shortage of which has recently driven unrest amid general food and fuel shortages, especially in the rural area. 

    Mahan Air is considered to have close ties to the Islamic Revolutionary Guard Corps (IRGC), and its deliveries to Caracas are expected to continue.

    “This is the same terrorist airline that Iran used to move weapons and fighters around the Middle East,” Pompeo asserted in his Wednesday remarks.

    Pompeo demanded the flights “must stop” and called on all countries to halt sanctioned aircraft from flying through their airspace, and to further refuse access to their airports.

    Mahan Air first came under sanctions in 2011 as Washington alleged it provided financial and non-financial support to the IRGC.


    Tyler Durden

    Thu, 04/30/2020 – 21:20

  • McDonalds Starts To Ration Meat Amid Supply Chain "Concerns"
    McDonalds Starts To Ration Meat Amid Supply Chain “Concerns”

    Just days after the CEO of Tyson Foods warned that the “food supply chain is breaking”, the disruptions due to the coronavirus are starting to surface not only in households and grocery stores, but also across corporate America, and even McDonald’s has now said it is changing how it is doling out beef and pork to its restaurants as a result.

    The company has placed items like burgers, bacon and sausage on “controlled allocation,” according to Business Insider. Additionally, the company’s distribution centers have been placed on “managed supply”.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    This means that the company is now going to be rationing meat supplies based on demand, instead of just ordering what the company thought was necessary. And while it doesn’t yet mean the company is facing shortages, it does suggest that even the largest US fast food restaurant believes further scrutiny of its inventory is warranted as the next may very well be shortages.

    Two key McDonald’s suppliers are Smithfield and Tyson – names we have covered extensively (here  and here) over the last month as they grapple with the coronavirus causing significant production bottlenecks. More than 5,000 factory workers have contracted the coronavirus, with at least 20 of those dying. 

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    McDonald’s executives said mid-week that major production reductions were expected through “at least” the first half of May. McDonald’s CEO said on Thursday that the company, so far, had not had a supply chain break. 

    He also admitted, however, the state of the meat industry was “concerning” and that the company was “monitoring it, literally, hour by hour.”

    Tyson chairman John Tyson said last weekend: “As pork, beef and chicken plants are being forced to close, even for short periods of time, millions of pounds of meat will disappear from the supply chain. As a result, there will be limited supply of our products available in grocery stores until we are able to reopen our facilities that are currently closed.”

    Meanwhile, reflecting the growing supply scarcity, we previously reported that wholesale American beef prices had jumped 6% to a record high of $330.82 per 100 pounds, a 62% increase from the lows in February.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

     


    Tyler Durden

    Thu, 04/30/2020 – 21:08

  • April Will Be The Worst Month On Record For Auto Sales
    April Will Be The Worst Month On Record For Auto Sales

    In a world breaking economic records left and right, we can add one more: April is set to be the worst month ever for auto sales.

    According to the car shopping experts at Edmunds, April will be a record down month for the auto industry – for obvious reasons – forecasting that just 633,260 new cars and trucks will be sold in the U.S. for an estimated seasonally adjusted annual rate (SAAR) of 7.7 million. This reflects a 52.5% decrease in sales from April 2019, and a 36.6% decrease from March 2020.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Edmunds analysts note that this would be the lowest-volume sales month on record; the second worst month for sales in the past 30 years was January of 2009, when 655,000 vehicles were sold.

    “April auto sales took the biggest hit we’ve seen in decades,” said Jessica Caldwell, Edmunds’ executive director of insights. “These bleak figures aren’t just because consumers are holding back on their purchases — fleet sales are seeing an even more dramatic drop as daily rental business has dried up. Like many other industries, the entire automotive sector is struggling as the coronavirus crisis continues to cripple the economy.”

    Edmunds experts note that plans for easing shelter-in-place orders across the country in May could open up opportunities for automakers and dealers to capture some deferred demand, but there is still economic uncertainty ahead.

    “April is likely the bottom for auto sales, so hopefully there’s only room for improvement from here,” said Caldwell. “But with employment and consumer confidence at new lows, the question remains: Will people be in the position to purchase new cars? Although automakers are doing their part by offering landmark incentives, those might not be enough if consumers cannot recover financially from this crisis.”

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Edmunds estimates that retail SAAR will come in at 6.7 million vehicles in April 2020, with fleet transactions accounting for 13.0% of total sales.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

     


    Tyler Durden

    Thu, 04/30/2020 – 20:40

  • Berman: Game Over For Oil… The Economy Is Next
    Berman: Game Over For Oil… The Economy Is Next

    Authored by Art Berman,

    It’s game-over for most of the U.S. oil industry.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Prices have collapsed and storage is nearly full. The only option for many producers is to shut in their wells. That means no income. Most have considerable debt so bankruptcy is next.

    Peggy Noonan wrote in her column recently that “this is a never-before-seen level of national economic calamity; history doesn’t get bigger than this.” That is the superficial view.

    Coronavirus has changed everything. The longer it lasts, the less the future will look anything like the past.

    Most people, policy makers and economists are energy blind and cannot, therefore, fully grasp the gravity or the consequences of what is happening.

    Energy is the economy and oil is the most important and productive portion of energy. U.S. oil consumption is at its lowest level since 1971 when production was only about 78% of what it was in 2019. As goes oil, so goes the economy…down.

    The old oil industry and the old economy are gone. The energy mix that underlies the economy will be different now. Oil production and price are unlikely to regain late 2018 levels. Renewable sources will fall behind along with efforts to mitigate climate change.

    It’s Really Bad

    2020 global liquids demand may average 20 mmb/d less than in 2019 (Figure 1). This estimate is really a thought experiment because it is impossible to know what supply and demand are in the present much less in the next quarter or beyond. This is a time of unimaginable flux and uncertainty because no one knows how long economic activity will be depressed, how long it will take to recover or if it will recover.

    The estimate in Figure 1 differs from most forecasts in two important ways. First, I believe that supply will fall much faster than most other sources. That is because storage will soon be full and shutting in production will be the only option for many producers.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Figure 1. 2020 global oil demand may average 20 million barrels per day lower than in 2019.
    Source: OPEC, IEA, Vitol, Trafigura, Goldman Sachs and Labyrinth Consulting Services, Inc.

    Second, I doubt that there will be a demand recovery in the third quarter despite the re-opening of businesses in the second. That is because we are in a global depression. Unemployment will remain high and consumers will be damaged from lack of income over the months of quarantine. The truth is that I doubt that demand will ever recover.

    Economies will re-start slowly. A useful analogy is being at a traffic light behind 25 stopped cars. The light will change from green to red before your car begins to move. It may take several light changes before you get to the other side of the intersection.

    U.S. consumption has fallen about 30% from 20 mmb/d in January to 14 mmb/d in April. Refinery intakes are already 25% lower than in the first quarter of the year and will fall further as consumption decreases. Refineries will close.

    Most U.S. refineries require intermediate and heavy crude oil that must be imported. Few U.S. grades of oil can be used to produce diesel without blending them with imported oil. That is because they are too light to contain the organic compounds need to make diesel. Redesigning refineries will not change this.

    The world’s natural resource extraction, shipping and distribution system relies on diesel. As refineries close and less diesel is produced, there will be lower levels of natural resource extraction, less manufacturing and less buying of goods.

    Diesel cannot be produced without first producing gasoline. The U.S. has had a gasoline surplus since late 2014 and the current surplus is the highest in 5 years (Figure 2).

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Figure 2. U.S. gasoline comparative inventory has increased 30 million barrels since March 20 to a record level of 28.4 million barrels more than the five-year average. Source: EIA and Labyrinth Consulting Services, Inc.

    Diesel demand is less elastic than gasoline demand because of its critical role in heavy transport. What will happen to the excess produced gasoline if storage is full? Will it be burned?

    Those who see an opportunity for renewable energy in the demise of oil need to think again. The manufacture of solar panels, wind turbines and electric cars depend on diesel all along the supply chain from extraction to distribution of finished products. A world in economic depression will default to the cheapest and most productive fuels. Oil will be cheap and abundant for a long time. There will be little money or appetite for the massive equipment changes that renewable sources require. Climate change will not be high in the consciousness of people struggling to survive.

    Figure 3 is another thought experiment in which I use tight oil rig count and output to estimate forward levels of U.S. production. The normal trajectory is an estimate of how production might decline as rigs are idled from lack of capital investment. It suggests that tight oil production might decrease by about 50% from 7 to 3.5 mmb/d by July 2021.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Figure 3. Thought experiment based on rig count through April 2020 and 12-month lagged production.
    Source: Baker Hughes, EIA DPR, Drilling Info and Labyrinth Consulting Services, Inc.

    The shut-in trajectory suggests that tight oil production may fall below 3 mmb/d by June of this year. Since tight oil accounts for about 55% of U.S. output, total crude oil and condensate production could decline from 12 mmb/d to 5.5 mmb/d by the end of the first half of 2020. This estimate is much more aggressive than EIA forecasts because EIA hasn’t adequately modeled the speed of shut in production with full storage levels.

    Energy is the Economy

    Gross domestic product (GDP) is proportional to oil consumption (Figure 4). That’s because oil is the economy. Every aspect of production and use of goods and services requires burning fossil energy. There are approximately 4.5 years of human labor in a barrel of oil (N. J. Hagens, personal communication and The Oil Drum). No other energy source comes close to that level of energy density.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Figure 4. Gross domestic product (GDP) is proportional to oil consumption
    Source: EIA, World Bank and Labyrinth Consulting Services, Inc.

    Those who believe that the world will function the same on lower energy density sources like wind and solar should review their old physics text books. You cannot fit 4.5 years of work from sunlight or wind into the 5.6 cubic feet space of a barrel of oil.

    Seventeen investment analysts recently estimated that U.S. GDP would contract an average of 30-35% in 2020 (Figure 5) within a range of 9-50%. The correlation shown in Figure 4 suggests it will decrease by about 20-25% based on estimated decrease in U.S. oil consumption. Any value within this spectrum is catastrophic.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Figure 5. U.S. GDP to contract 30-35% in 2020 based on estimates by seventeen investment analysts
    Source: Charles Schwab and Labyrinth Consulting Services, Inc.

    Economist Lawrence Summers has warned that the U.S. financial system may collapse because of cascading defaults. Approximately 25% of U.S. renters did not pay their landlords and 23% of Americans did not make their mortgage payment in April. When people don’t pay their creditors, creditors in turn cannot pay their creditors. For comparison, a 28% mortgage default rate contributed to the 2008 financial collapse.

    Joseph Stiglitz recently explained that the current pandemic will affect the developing world more severely than it has developed countries. It might lead to mass migration problems that could dwarf the dislocations of the last six years out of Africa and the Middle East.

    Slouching Toward Bethlehem

    Many will probably find my analysis overly pessimistic. Crude oil markets do not. Negative WTI futures prices last week could not have sent a stronger signal for producers to cease and desist.

    Large segments of the U.S. oil industry will have to be nationalized before the year is over. The price of oil is too low to justify the cost of extraction even if storage were available. The value of a barrel of oil, however, is 4.5 man-years of work and that productivity multiplier will be essential if the U.S. economy is to avoid collapse or for it to recover if collapse is unavoidable.

    The United States has engaged in the foolish practice of draining America first since the beginning of tight oil production a decade ago. There was value up to the point that domestic oil substituted for imported light oil but exporting more was dumb. That is true especially now that someone else’s oil will be cheap to buy for years.

    There are few moments when we may truly say that things are different now. This is one of those moments. We do not know what awful form the future may take, what rough beast slouches toward Bethlehem to be born.

    The game is over for oil. We should place all of our attention on saving the economy.

    I hope that we learn to view what is happening as a chance to simplify and to learn to be satisfied with no more than what we need. It is unlikely that we will have much choice.


    Tyler Durden

    Thu, 04/30/2020 – 20:20

Digest powered by RSS Digest

Today’s News 30th April 2020

  • As Italian Crime Drops By 66.6% During Lockdown, Loan Sharks Focus Lasers
    As Italian Crime Drops By 66.6% During Lockdown, Loan Sharks Focus Lasers

    After the Italian government placed the entire country under a coronavirus lockdown, the crime rate dropped by 2/3 (or 66.6%, as Reuters reports) vs. the same month last year, according to a Wednesday statement by the interior ministry.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    There were 68,069 crimes registered across the country in March vs. 203,723 the previous year.

    The ministry did not provide details, noting only that domestic violence fell 37.4%, a smaller drop than the overall crime rate, while robberies at pharmacies, one of the few businesses allowed to stay open, dropped 28.2%. –Reuters

    That said, the ministry also warned that once restrictions are lifted – which could be as soon as Monday – organized gangs could try to take advantage of struggling Italians.

    To that end, reports of criminal loan-sharking jumped 9.1% according to the report, indicating that those who cannot obtain traditional financing are turning to illegal lending networks to make ends meet.

    Earlier this month, prosecutors told Reuters that Italian mafia clans were taking advantage of the coronavirus outbreak to ingratiate themselves with low income families, while The Guardian reported nearly three weeks ago that videos have surfaced of known Mafia gangs distributing free food to quarantined families who have run out of cash.

    “For over a month, shops, cafés, restaurants and pubs have been closed,” said Nicola Gratteri – head of the Catanzaro prosecutor’s office and antimafia investigator according to The Guardian. “Millions of people work in the grey economy, which means that they haven’t received any income in more than a month and have no idea when they might return to work. The government is issuing so-called shopping vouchers to support people. If the state doesn’t step in soon to help these families, the mafia will provide its services, imposing their control over people’s lives.

    To date, Italy has suffered more than 27,000 deaths and over 200,000 infections.

    The Interior Ministry also warned that the mafia would try to tap into recovery funds offered by the EU to revive the death-spiraling economy, which Reuters notes is expected to be the worst recession wince WWII.

    This may favor corruption and illicit relations between entrepreneurs, public officials and criminal organizations,” the Ministry said, adding that it had beefed up police monitoring to try and prevent the mafia from taking advantage of the situation. In particular, ” the agro-food chain, health infrastructure, the supply of medical equipment, the hotel tourism sector, catering and the retail distribution sectors of small and medium-sized companies” will be kept under close watch.


    Tyler Durden

    Thu, 04/30/2020 – 02:35

  • 77th Brigade: Is British Military Waging An Information War On Its Own Population?
    77th Brigade: Is British Military Waging An Information War On Its Own Population?

    Authored by Mike Robinson via 21stCenturyWire.com,

    Last Wednesday, during the daily UK Government Coronavirus livestream, the head of the British Army, General Sir Nick Carter, bragged:

    We’ve been involved with the Cabinet Office Rapid Response Unit, with our 77th Brigade helping to quash rumours from misinformation, but also to counter disinformation. Between three and four thousand of our people have been involved, with around twenty thousand available the whole time at high readiness.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    To understand the implications of this statement, we have to go back to 2018, when Carter gave a speech to the Royal United Services Institute.

    “In our 77th Brigade,” he said, “… we have got some remarkable talent when it comes to social media, production design, and indeed Arabic poetry. Those sorts of skills we can’t afford to retain in the Regular component but they are the means of us delivering capability in a much more imaginative way than we might have been able to do in the past.”

    77th Brigade

    Previously known as the ‘Security Assistance Group’, 77th Brigade was stood up in 2015 as part of ‘Army 2020’. The Security Assistance Group had been established following the amalgamation of the Media Operations Group, 15 Psychological Operations Group, Security Capacity Building Team, and the Military Stabilisation and Support Group.

    77th Brigade is described on their website as being about ‘information and outreach’. But what does that mean? General Carter again:

    We also, though, need to continue to improve our ability to fight on this new battlefield, and I think it’s important that we build on the excellent foundation we’ve created for Information Warfare through our 77th Brigade, which is now giving us the capability to compete in the war of narratives at the tactical level. [Emphasis mine]

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    It is in this context, then, that Carter’s words from last week’s livestream should be viewed. Carter has acknowledged that the British military is waging war on a section of its own population.

    ‘Rapid Response Unit’

    Carter mentioned working with the Cabinet Office’s ‘Rapid Response Unit’. Established in April 2018 and also known as the ‘fake news unit’, the Rapid Response Unit was given an initial six months’ funding. It brought together a “team of analysts, data scientists and media and digital experts,” armed with cutting-edge software, to “work round the clock to monitor online breaking news stories and social media discussion.”

    According to the RRU’s head, Alex Aiken:

    The unit’s round the clock monitoring service has identified several stories of concern during the pilot, ranging from the chemical weapons attack in Syria to domestic stories relating to the NHS and crime.

    For example, following the Syria airstrikes, the unit identified that a number of false narratives from alternative news sources were gaining traction online. These “alt-news” sources are biased and rely on sensationalism rather than facts to pique readers’ interest.

    Due to the way that search engine algorithms work, when people searched for information on the strikes, these unreliable sources were appearing above official UK government information. In fact, no government information was appearing on the first 15 pages of Google results. We know that search is an excellent indicator of intention. It can reflect bias in information received from elsewhere.

    The unit therefore ensured those using search terms that indicated bias – such as ‘false flag’ – were presented with factual information on the UK’s response. The RRU improved the ranking from below 200 to number 1 within a matter of hours.

    The Rapid Response Unit was given permanent funding in February 2019.

    Three months following the establishment of the Rapid Response Unit, Theresa May attended the G7 summit in Quebec, Canada.

    There she announced the establishment of “a new Rapid Response Mechanism“, following Britain’s proposal for “a new, more formalised approach to tackling foreign interference across the G7” at the G7 Foreign Minister’s meeting the previous month.

    The agreement sends “a strong message that interference by Russia and other foreign states would not be tolerated,” she said.

    “The Rapid Response Mechanism,” she continued, “will support preventative and protective cooperation between G7 countries, as well as post-incident responses”, including:

    • Co-ordinated attribution of hostile activity

    • Joint work to assert a common narrative and response

    The UK government’s Rapid Response, then, is to create international agreement on a common narrative (via the ‘mechanism’), and then wage an information war on its own people to make sure that narrative is protected in the media (via the ‘unit’).

    Fusion

    During Carter’s 2018 RUSI speech, he explained the role of the mainstream press in “setting up a well-informed public debate”. He spoke about “political warfare” being war by other means, and he said that winning that war would require a “fusion” approach.

    Here, he is referring to the Fusion Doctrine, which was launched during the Theresa May regime, as part of the 2015 National Security Capability Review.

    “Many capabilities,” it said, “that can contribute to national security lie outside traditional national security departments and so we need stronger partnerships across government and with the private and third sectors.”

    It should come as no surprise, then, that the Cabinet Office’s Rapid Response Unit is not only working with the military’s 77th Brigade, but is “leading on the ‘rebuttal of false narratives’ as part of the unit … [that also] involves the Home Office, DCMS, Number 10 and other agencies.”

    The Corona-Narrative

    General Carter said his 77th Brigade is “helping to quash rumours from misinformation, but also to counter disinformation.”

    What misinformation and disinformation is 77th Brigade helping to quash? How much of the ‘disinformation’ originates from 77th Brigade in the first place?

    Part of 77th Brigade’s role is:

    ‘Monitoring and evaluating the information environment within boundaries or operational area’

    They not only ‘counter’ disinformation, but also watch social media, analysing how disinformation, including their own, spreads; mapping the internet and the networks of people sharing content between each other.

    And for that, they have thousands deployed, and tens of thousands in reserve, not only in 77th Brigade directly, but right across government and the third sector.


    Tyler Durden

    Thu, 04/30/2020 – 02:00

  • Your Freedoms Don't Have To Be Muzzled Just Because You're Wearing A Mask
    Your Freedoms Don’t Have To Be Muzzled Just Because You’re Wearing A Mask

    Authored by John Whitehead via The Rutherford Institute,

    If 2019 was the year of the street protest, of tear gas and rubber bullets, 2020 might be the year the street protest died, or perhaps fell into a deep sleep, and went online.”

    – Journalist Christopher Miller

    Despite all appearances to the contrary, martial law has not been declared in America.

    We still have rights.

    Technically, at least.

    The government may act as if its police state powers suppress individual liberties during this COVID-19 pandemic, but for all intents and purposes, the Constitution – especially the battered, besieged Bill of Rights – still stands in theory, if not in practice.

    Indeed, while federal and state governments have adopted specific restrictive measures in an effort to lockdown the nation and decelerate the spread of the COVID-19 virus, the current public health situation has not resulted in the suspension of fundamental constitutional rights such as freedom of speech and the right of assembly.

    Mind you, that’s not to say that the government has not tried its best to weaponize this crisis as it has weaponized so many other crises in order to expand its powers and silence its critics.

    All over the country, government officials are using COVID-19 restrictions to muzzle protesters.

    It doesn’t matter what the protest is about (church assemblies, the right to work, the timing for re-opening the country, discontent over police brutality, etc.): this is activity the First Amendment protects vociferously with only one qualification—that it be peaceful.

    Yet even peaceful protesters mindful of the need to adhere to social distancing guidelines because of this COVID-19 are being muzzled, arrested and fined.

    For example, a Maryland family was reportedly threatened with up to a year in jail and a $5000 fine if they dared to publicly protest the injustice of their son’s execution by a SWAT team.

    If anyone had a legitimate reason to get out in the streets and protest, it’s the Lemp family, whose 21-year-old son Duncan was gunned down in his bedroom during an early morning, no-knock SWAT team raid on his family’s home.

    Imagine it.

    It was 4:30 a.m. on March 12, 2020, in the midst of a COVID-19 pandemic that has most of the country under a partial lockdown and sheltering at home, when this masked SWAT team—deployed to execute a “high risk” search warrant for unauthorized firearms—stormed the suburban house where 21-year-old Duncan, a software engineer and Second Amendment advocate, lived with his parents and 19-year-old brother.

    The entire household, including Lemp and his girlfriend, was reportedly asleep when the SWAT team directed flash bang grenades and gunfire through Lemp’s bedroom window.

    Lemp was killed and his girlfriend injured.

    No one in the house that morning, including Lemp, had a criminal record.

    No one in the house that morning, including Lemp, was considered an “imminent threat” to law enforcement or the public, at least not according to the search warrant.

    Now what was so urgent that militarized police felt compelled to employ battlefield tactics in the pre-dawn hours of a day when most people are asleep in bed, not to mention stuck at home as part of a nationwide lockdown?

    According to police, they were tipped off that Lemp was in possession of “firearms.”

    So instead of approaching the house by the front door at a reasonable hour in order to investigate this complaint—which is what the Fourth Amendment requires—police instead strapped on their guns, loaded up their flash bang grenades and acted like battle-crazed warriors.

    This is the blowback from all that military weaponry flowing to domestic police departments.

    This is what happens when you use SWAT teams to carry out routine search warrants.

    This is what happens when you adopt red flag gun laws, which Maryland did in 2018, painting anyone who might be in possession of a gun—legal or otherwise—as a threat that must be neutralized.

    These red flag gun laws allow the police to remove guns from people merely suspected of being threats.

    While in theory it appears perfectly reasonable to want to “stop dangerous people before they act,” where the problem arises is when you put the power to determine who is a potential danger in the hands of government agencies, the courts and the police.

    Remember, this is the same government that uses the words “anti-government,” “extremist” and “terrorist” interchangeably.

    This is the same government whose agents are spinning a sticky spider-web of threat assessments, behavioral sensing warnings, flagged “words,” and “suspicious” activity reports using automated eyes and ears, social media, behavior sensing software, and citizen spies to identify potential threats.

    This is the same government that keeps re-upping the National Defense Authorization Act (NDAA), which allows the military to arrest and detain American citizens with no access to friends, family or the courts if the government believes them to be a threat.

    This is the same government that has a growing list—shared with fusion centers and law enforcement agencies—of ideologies, behaviors, affiliations and other characteristics that could flag someone as suspicious and result in their being labeled potential enemies of the state.

    Let that sink in a moment.

    If you believe in and exercise your rights under the Constitution (namely, your right to speak freely, worship freely, associate with like-minded individuals who share your political views, criticize the government, own a weapon, demand a warrant before being questioned or searched, or any other activity viewed as potentially anti-government, racist, bigoted, anarchic or sovereign), you are most likely at the top of the government’s terrorism watch list.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Moreover, as a New York Times editorial warns, you may be an anti-government extremist (a.k.a. domestic terrorist) in the eyes of the police if you are afraid that the government is plotting to confiscate your firearms, if you believe the economy is about to collapse and the government will soon declare martial law, or if you display an unusual number of political and/or ideological bumper stickers on your car.

    Needless to say, if you happen to be passionate about the Constitution and a vocal critic of government corruption, you’ve already been flagged in a government database somewhere.

    Likely, Lemp was, too.

    Now Lemp is dead and his family is devastated, outraged and desperate to make sense of what appears to be an insensible act of violence resulting in an inexcusable loss of life.

    As usual in these kinds of shootings, government officials have not been forthcoming with details about the shooting: police have refused to meet with family members, the contents of the warrant supporting the raid have not been revealed, and bodycam footage of the raid has not been disclosed.

    So in order to voice their objections to police violence and demand answers about the shooting, Lemp’s family and friends planned to conduct an outdoor public demonstration—adhering to social distancing guidelines—only to be threatened with arrest, a year in jail and a $5000 fine for violating Maryland’s stay at home orders.

    Yet here’s the thing: we don’t have to be muzzled and remain silent about government corruption, violence and misconduct just because we’re wearing masks and social distancing.

    That’s not the point of this whole COVID-19 exercise, or is it?

    While there is a moral responsibility to not endanger other lives with our actions, that does not mean relinquishing all of our freedoms.  

    Be responsible in how you exercise your freedoms, but don’t allow yourselves to be muzzled or your individual freedoms to be undermined.

    Understandably, no one wants to talk about individual freedoms when tens of thousands of people the world over are dying, and yet we must.

    The decisions we make right now—about freedom, commerce, free will, how we care for the least of these in our communities, what it means to provide individuals and businesses with a safety net, how far we allow the government to go in “protecting” us against this virus, etc.—will haunt us for a long time to come.

    At times like these, when emotions are heightened, fear dominates, common sense is in short supply, liberty takes a backseat to public safety, and democratic societies approach the tipping point towards mob rule, there is a tendency to cast those who exercise their individual freedoms (to freely speak, associate, assemble, protest, pursue a living, engage in commerce, etc.) as foolishly reckless, criminally selfish, or outright villains.

    Sometimes that is true, but not always.

    As I make clear in my book Battlefield America: The War on the American People, there is always a balancing test between individual freedoms and the communal good.

    What we must figure out is how to strike a balance that allows us to protect those who need protecting without leaving us chained and in bondage to the police state.

    We must find ways to mitigate against this contagion needlessly claiming any more lives and crippling any more communities, but let’s not lose our heads: blindly following the path of least resistance—acquiescing without question to whatever the government dictates—can only lead to more misery, suffering and the erection of a totalitarian regime in which there is no balance.


    Tyler Durden

    Thu, 04/30/2020 – 00:05

  • Portland To Ban Cars On 100 Miles Of Roadway To Promote Safe Distancing
    Portland To Ban Cars On 100 Miles Of Roadway To Promote Safe Distancing

    The city of Portland, Oregon will ban cars from 100 miles of roadway in order to encourage social distancing for people walking, biking or running during the coronavirus pandemic.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Photo: Will Vanlue

    They closures will primarily affect streets along designated neighborhoods which have lower car traffic in general, according to KGW8. Temporary barricades and signage will be installed to alert drivers of the closures.

    The plan also includes expanding space for pedestrians along streets that are “narrow or missing sidewalks,” and provide more room with pop-up walking and biking lanes.

    In business districts, PBOT said they’ll establish space so customers can line up with enough physical distance, and create dedicated loading zones for pickup and delivery.

    The city of Portland has seen a dramatic spike in speeding since the pandemic began and a major decrease in traffic congestion. 

    Further details about the plan can be found online. It’s unclear when the closures will begin. –KGW8

    When we reach the point that we can re-open, we want to make sure our transportation system is ready,” announced Portland Bureau of Transportation Director Chris Warner.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Portland residents attend the annual ‘World Naked Bike Ride,” 2019

    “Portlanders have made great use of their neighborhood streets to walk, bike, and roll during the pandemic. We’ve designed the Slow Streets|Safe Streets initiative to make sure they can continue to do this safely as we get back closer to normal.”


    Tyler Durden

    Wed, 04/29/2020 – 23:45

  • Being Afraid & Eliminating Exposure To Germs Leads To Death by Fear & Germs…
    Being Afraid & Eliminating Exposure To Germs Leads To Death by Fear & Germs…

    Authored by Gary Barnett via LewRockwell.com,

    “Do you begin to see, then, what kind of world we are creating? It is the exact opposite of the stupid hedonistic Utopias that the old reformers imagined. A world of fear and treachery and torment, a world of trampling and being trampled upon, a world which will grow not less but more merciless as it refines itself. Progress in our world will be progress toward more pain.”

    ~ George Orwell (1961). “1984”

    Death is inevitable, so never hide from life, and never allow a moment of life to be taken from you by tyrants. All government is tyrannical, and all government seeks power and control, and today it is using a purposely-created crisis in order to gain that control. We are being told by false rulers to abandon our lives, and hide away from those we care about in order to stop a virus. This is the highest form of deception, and is only meant to divide us so sinister agendas can be accomplished in the shadows.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    It has been forgotten in this day and age of total fear that our bodies, not governments, are our defense against viral agents. Maybe a few will learn from this fakery that germs are our friends. Unless our bodies are exposed to germs and viruses, natural defenses against sickness disappear, leaving the body vulnerable to every sort of germ and virus. Listening to these political trimmers therefore is detrimental to our health.

    Coronaviruses are not a threat to healthy humans with strong immune systems. Viruses cannot replicate in that environment, which means symptoms and sickness are rarely present. In addition, sunshine and high vitamin D levels are of great importance, as is diet, exercise, sleep, and relaxing calm. What this means is that government and its idiotic mandates are actually killing many people, and those deaths are due to the very governing body that is lying about how to protect your health. They are in fact causing much death, much more so than this so-called Covid-19.

    Virtually everything mandated by government to combat this virus is extremely detrimental to life, and this may be by design. As more deaths are falsely attributed to this coronavirus, more power and control will be concentrated in the hands of the State. One major factor in helping a virus to replicate and cause harm is stress. The more stress evident, the weaker the immune system of its host. When the immune system has to go into action in order to alleviate mental and physical symptoms due to stress on the body, this leaves the body undefended, and viruses take immediate advantage of this opportunity. In other words, people will get sick simply because of undue stress, stress now intentionally caused by this incompetent government.

    Unemployment causes stress, fear causes stress, financial problems cause stress, foreign agents in the form of vaccines causes stress, hunger causes stress, worry, isolation, and lack of physical activity causes stress, self-imprisonment causes stress, and any relationship or family problems due to these factors causes extreme stress.

    In addition, wearing a mask causes immediate stress to the body due to restricting airflow, and anyone with a weak immune system or with any respiratory issues whatsoever, is very susceptible to harm in this circumstance. Also, the state and health idiots claim that one should not touch their face, but wearing a mask vastly increases that touching due to the many obvious reasons to do so. Since viruses do not have the ability to jump from one person to another, masks then are not only ineffective, but may actually cause more viral spread than if not worn at all.

    Then there is the ventilator issue, which is very suspect. Ventilators are actually killing those that have a viral infection.

    “Some hospitals have reported unusually high death rates for coronavirus patients on ventilators, and some doctors worry that the machines could be harming certain patients. Mechanical ventilators push oxygen into patients whose lungs are failing. Using the machines involves sedating a patient and sticking a tube in the throat. Deaths in such sick patients are common, no matter the reason they need the breathing help. Generally speaking, 40% to 50% of patients with severe respiratory distress die while on ventilators, experts say. But 80% or more of coronavirus patients placed on the machines in New York City have died, state and city officials say.

    That is quite a statistic, given that the state and its so-called health “experts” in the administration, at the WHO, and at the CDC, have been pushing the use of ventilators since the beginning, and have used massive resources not only to greatly step up production and purchase of such machines, but have propagated far and wide on a daily basis the effectiveness of these machines in treating coronavirus patients. But with 80% of those patients dying while on ventilators, is another agenda being worked forward? Are hospitals gaining a financial advantage for putting patients on these ventilators? Is this a way to increase the death count, just as is coding any and every death as Covid, regardless whether the patient died due to other factors?

    All of the federal and state mandates to supposedly combat this virus have caused more undue death and sickness. While the extreme stress caused by these government mandates has been devastating as far as virus susceptibility is concerned, many more sicknesses, disease, and deaths are occurring simply due to government action. Stress and isolation cause any number of adverse problems, and many of those cause higher death rates than normal. The psychological harm alone is alarming and has been felt nationwide, and due to this harm, suicides have increased as well. While suicide has been increasing every year, with the onslaught of government interventions due to coronavirus, many risk factors that cause suicide have been greatly enhanced, and this will most likely not only lead to many more suicides this year, but will also lead to higher suicide rates for years to come. How many more will kill themselves in the future due to measures initiated by government during this so-called crisis? There is no way to know for certain, but indications are that it will far exceed the deaths of this 2020 virus scam.

    The bottom line is this; sickness and death due to the government response to this manufactured pandemic will be multiple times greater than the death toll due to this coronavirus. But it is much worse than that, because the deaths due to this response will continue to rise for years to come, as people struggle to stay afloat in a country whose economy has been destroyed. Early and unnecessary death, suicide, family abuse, violence, despair, starvation, and loneliness will continue to reek havoc on Americans, causing any number of continuing health problems and death.

    Population control through higher mortality and sterilization is evident in the government’s agenda, and distancing, isolation, forced vaccination, and undue stress are sought in order to facilitate this plan. The only viable solution as I see it is to eliminate government at every level possible.

    “The state lies in all the tongues of good and evil, and whatever it says is lies, and whatever it has, it has stolen, everything it is, is false, it bites with stolen teeth, and it bites often, it is false down to its bowels.”

    Friedrich Wilhelm Nietzsche, Thus Spoke Zarathustra [1896]


    Tyler Durden

    Wed, 04/29/2020 – 23:25

  • New Report Reveals DaVita Engaged In "Lobbying Scheme" To Target Legislation Threatening Billing Loophole
    New Report Reveals DaVita Engaged In “Lobbying Scheme” To Target Legislation Threatening Billing Loophole

    One more iron has been thrown into the fire in the ongoing skepticism of kidney dialysis company and Buffett portfolio name DaVita, which has already drawn criticism from well known short sellers like Jim Chanos and media outlets like the New York Times.

    Critics have raised numerous questions about DaVita’s business practices, but none more important than the company’s relationship with the American Kidney Fund, who has been accused of helping DaVita intentionally steer dialysis patients from lower cost government insurance to high cost commercial payors – a move that has had a profoundly positive effect on DaVita’s bottom line.

    This morning, research firm Hindenburg Research released a new investigative report highlighting that DaVita also appears to be the main funding entity behind a powerful lobbying group in California that has been set up to oppose state legislation targeting the AKF loophole. The report also exposes that many groups whose names are being used, allegedly in support of voting down the bill, had little to no knowledge that they were involved.

    The report states:

    “DaVita’s most lucrative scheme is finally becoming obvious to insurers, patients and legislators following multiple media exposés. As a result, legislation is starting to specifically target the company’s primary remaining profit center. We intend to highlight the legislative challenges currently facing DaVita at both the state and national level that we believe will persist until the loophole driving this scheme has been closed.

    As DaVita works against one of its main legislative challenges of the moment, California Assembly Bill 290, we sought to understand the company’s lobbying effort. We found that DaVita is, in characteristic fashion, engaging in what looks to be underhanded lobbying tactics in order to defend its charity scheme.”

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    The report highlights that the state of California is estimated to account for 15-20% of the company’s dialysis business and that the assemblyman who introduced the California bill “called DaVita’s charity loophole a ‘self-serving scam’ and ‘a scheme to bankroll patients’ healthcare premiums'”.

    A coalition that was formed to oppose the bill claims the support of many groups in California, but the report says, of these groups: “most readily admitted to not knowing anything about the bill and/or simply taking their cues from lobbyists or other organizations. Some didn’t even know they opposed it at all.”

    For instance, the Commander of the State of California American GI Forum told Hindenburg:

    “As far as I’m concerned, I haven’t been informed about anything that’s out there or stance that we take, etc., so I can’t really say why are we opposed to it.”

    The report also reveals that about 90% of the funding for the lobbying group has come from large for-profit dialysis corporations such as DaVita and Fresenius. DaVita is said to have represented about 60% of the group’s funding over the last 2 years, having donated over $67 million to the group in that period.

    Hindenburg writes that despite not having a position in the company’s stock, they “thought it would be important to shed light on the ridiculous abuse of the medical system that continues under a cloak of legitimate lobbying efforts.”

    You can read the full report here:

     


    Tyler Durden

    Wed, 04/29/2020 – 23:05

  • No Tanks For Old Marines – Why America's Most Powerful Fighting Force Is Restructuring
    No Tanks For Old Marines – Why America’s Most Powerful Fighting Force Is Restructuring

    Authored by Tim Kirby via The Strategic Culture Foundation,

    By 2030 the U.S. Marine Corps will have gone through a major restructuring, most notably eliminating tanks from usage all together and reducing its total number of men. America’s military at home has gone from an expensive but mostly unseen protector during the Cold War to a post 9/11 icon of mandatory worship by the Mainstream Media. So it is very surprising just how little attention this massive restructure is getting outside the veteran blogosphere. The elite of the largest, most expensive and arguably most powerful military in the World is rethinking its strategy, but why and where is this all going?

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    There is NO conspiracy

    One of the natural reactions to the U.S. government “downsizing” a branch of the military and cutting tanks will be the usual panic-based reaction that “the end is nigh” and that this “is a sign” of the end of America. This is highly unlikely to be the case. The Armed Forces have gotten from Trump everything that they want and the “checks are going through”. There is currently no lack of funding for the U.S. military so we shouldn’t pretend this is the first sign of it. Furthermore, the new 173,000 man force is only slightly smaller than its 2010 record of 200,000+ men. So is a reduction in manpower of roughly 13% a sign of an upcoming collapse? No. Does this save a massive amount of money for the military budget? No.

    The same is true for tanks, they are not being cut for financial reasons. Even with a safe overestimate of the cost of one M1 Abrams tank being $10 million there is plenty of room in the $750+ billion dollar budget for them. Cost is not the issue.

    Sorry accelerationists but this is not a sign of an upcoming collapse.

    The Cold War is finally dead

    The cliché that we are always planning to fight our “father’s war” is proven be true time and again over the course of history. The conservatively-minded well-trained generals of the Confederacy expected a purely Napoleonic campaign of musket and bayonet, and what they got was the dawn of industrialized war. The French were sure that WWI would involve volley fire and cavalry looking sharp in their bright red “pantaloons”. And, the U.S. entered Vietnam with the mindset and strategies of fighting the Axis powers, “if we just drop enough bombs, they’ll surrender for sure”.

    This is all an aspect of simple human nature as we plan for what we know and understand, not something theoretical. However, this restructure of the Marines could be the exception to the rule.

    During the Iraq War(s) it became apparent that the U.S. with forces designed to fight a Cold War were perfect for crushing Saddam Hussein’s traditional army within days. Now holding the very same country during an insurgency with those forces, that is another story.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Photo: The Abrams is a good soldier but terrible policeman.

    The Abrams which performed brilliantly against Iraq’s tanks became a sitting duck in tight urban environments where it could be hit and crippled by local yokels with primitive RPGs. Urban environments provide opportunities to strike a tank from angles that reduce the effectiveness of its armor. Similar musings have been made about the U.S. Navy with its big brilliant ships that could be easily sunk by missiles or attacks from garbage quality boats crewed by those willing to take casualties.

    Essentially, big armored targets are not is useful for war in the 21st century, when the offensive weapons that can take them out are extremely cheap by comparison, and new generations of cheap(er) anti-tank weapons continue to be developed.

    So, dumping tanks is probably a logical step. To be honest we should all give the men who made these plans a round of applause for not repeating the same mistakes of history by continuing to fight ISIS with a force designed to break the Warsaw Pact. Except, there remains one issue…

    Video: A great explanation of what the new Marine Corps is going to look like from “Matsimus”.

    China, really?

    The official logic for the restructuring claims that the real threat the Marine Corps is being designed to fight is actually China and by extension Russia, not the Taliban/Al Nusra/ISIS etc. Perhaps because hating China has become the hip cool thing to do under the Trump administration it is was easier to sell these reforms as a means to counter the dragon, but an infantry focused force with some new-fangled drones and tech is not going to be what brings down China. Infantry is what is needed to hold positions, but good luck trying to Guangzhou on foot like some Hollywood D-Day fantasy.

    What they probably mean, when stating Beijing as the real target, is that they want to counter China in some proxy conflicts in fights with small numbers where tanks are weak to today’s long range weaponry. This logic makes much more sense.

    The core of the decision to restructure seems to have come from wargames in 2018-2019. These exercises played out a proxy style conflict between the U.S. and other entities in the sands of the Middle-East. The Marine Times broke down the results of the wargames as follows…

    “But tanks and armored vehicles have had trouble surviving against the threat of precision strike and the plethora of drone and reconnaissance systems flooding conflict zones across the Middle East.”

    They also presented experience from Turkey’s moves in Syria that support the theory that tanks are going out of fashion quickly…

    “Turkey posted videos highlighting a mixed role of drones, Paladin artillery systems and aircraft pounding Syrian armor from the skies over the course of several days. The Syrian army appeared helpless to defend from the onslaught of long range systems. Even tanks camouflaged by buildings and bushes were no match for sensors and thermal imaging watching from the skies.”

    These exercises probably were the nail in the coffin for the Abrams and a big motivation to buy more drones. The Marine Times sums it up this way…

    The Corps instead is looking for mobile systems and units that can survive within the reach of precision fires to “attrit adversary forces,” create dilemmas for the enemy and “consume adversary ISR resources,” according to the report.

    In summation what does this restructure mean?

    It is not part of some way to mask the fall of the “American Empire” as the military is still well funded and the reduction of troops is minor. Tanks’ costs will be replaced by drones and other tech.

    The Marine Corps is actually trying structure itself to fight today’s war and today’s enemy.

    Based on recent wargames, the Iraq/Afghanistan Conflicts and the Syrian Civil War tanks are becoming obsolete quickly and this move to dump them may be copied by other nations.

    A 170,000+ mostly infantry force with drones will not scare China, but it will have better chances at success in occupational actions against insurgents/terrorists, or in proxy conflicts against China.

    For the contingent that believes that non-military people cannot write about the military I’d like to remind you that the governments that send armies off to die generally don’t serve, yet they make all the big military decisions. I await your hate mail.


    Tyler Durden

    Wed, 04/29/2020 – 22:45

  • "The Truce Is Over": Trump Considering Ways To Punish China, Convinced Beijing "Will Do Anything" To Make Him Lose Re-election
    “The Truce Is Over”: Trump Considering Ways To Punish China, Convinced Beijing “Will Do Anything” To Make Him Lose Re-election

    And to think just three months ago things between the US and China, which had just signed ‘Phase 1’ of the long-awaited trade deal were going “so well.”

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    In an Oval Office interview with Reuters published Wednesday night, Trump said he thinks that China is determined to see him lose the November election based on Beijing’s response to the coronavirus, and that he is considering various ways to punish the Chinese government which he he again blamed for allowing the virus to spread across the world.

    “China will do anything they can to have me lose this race,” Trump said in the interview and said he was looking at different options in terms of consequences for Beijing over the virus. “I can do a lot,” he said.

    Trump has heaped blame on China for a global pandemic that has killed at least 60,000 people in the United States and thrown the U.S. economy into a deep recession, putting in jeopardy Trump’s hopes for another four-year term.

    Worried that an attempt to reopen the economy would be hindered by a second infection wave in the fall, forcing the US to shutter again and sending the economy into an even deeper depression, Trump said he believed China should have been more active in letting the world know about the coronavirus much sooner.

    Asked whether he was considering the use of tariffs or even debt write-offs for China, Trump would not offer specifics. “There are many things I can do,” he said. “We’re looking for what happened.”

    “They’re constantly using public relations to try to make it like they’re innocent parties,” he said of Chinese officials.

    One example is Global Times Editor in Chief who is engaged in a daily stream of propaganda on twitter, vilifying Trump and the US as the following example demonstrates:

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    “China will do anything they can to have me lose this race,” said Trump. He said he believes Beijing wants Joe Biden to win the race to ease the pressure Trump has placed on China over trade and other issues.

    A senior Trump administration official told Reuters that an informal “truce” in the war of words that Trump and Xi essentially agreed to in a phone call in late March now appeared to be over.

    Earlier Wednesday, Secretary of State Michael Pompeo said that China posed a threat to the world by hiding information about the origin of the coronavirus: “The Chinese Communist Party now has a responsibility to tell the world how this pandemic got out of China and all across the world, causing such global economic devastation,” Pompeo told Fox News on Wednesday morning, during an interview in which he repeatedly criticized China’s government. “America needs to hold them accountable.”

    The comments came after China Central Television’s top evening news program on Wednesday questioned the transparency and accuracy of U.S. data on Covid-19 infections; they also followed a US government report which concluded that the Wuhan lab is the “most likely source” of the coronavirus outbreak.

     


    Tyler Durden

    Wed, 04/29/2020 – 22:30

  • Watch: 'Underground Hazard' Exposed As NYC Homeless Fill Up Subway Cars Amid Pandemic
    Watch: ‘Underground Hazard’ Exposed As NYC Homeless Fill Up Subway Cars Amid Pandemic

    “I got to send this to the governor, let him see this shit,” a 25-year veteran of New York City’s Metropolitan Transportation Authority said when posting an now viral video clip depicting a growing crisis in the city’s subways.

    The employee, subsequently confirmed in media reports as Torry Chalmers, offered video proof that throngs of the city’s homeless are now filling up empty train cars on a regular basis. 

    Chalmers and other employees are demanding “hazard pay” given that the rising number of homeless filling the subways they interact with are a huge risk amid the coronavirus pandemic, also given the Big Apple has for weeks now been the global epicenter. 

    “This is what I got to do. I got to go to work in this,” he said in the video. “It’s not making any sense. It’s nasty, nasty.”

    “People are scared when the train comes in the station,” Chalmers added. “If one car looks bad, they’ll run to another — but it’s the same problem in every car.”

    “We’re out there every day putting our lives on the line… We should get hazard pay,” he asserted.

    New York Gov. Andrew Cuomo addressed the growing crisis in the wake of growing outrage over the alarming underground hazard conditions, calling the situation “disrespectful to the essential workers who need to ride the subway system.”

    Cuomo said Tuesday, “We have to have a public transportation system that is clean, where the trains are disinfected,” and added: “It’s not even safe for the homeless people to be on trains,” Cuomo added.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    “We’re concerned about homeless people so we let them stay on the trains without protection in this epidemic of the COVID virus? No, we have to do better than that and we will,” the governor said.

    New York and other cities, especially L.A. and San Francisco have for weeks been attempting to get a handle on the homeless crisis amid the pandemic. Recently photos of Las Vegas casino parking lots which served as makeshift homeless ‘social distancing’ outdoor sleeping venues went viral

    NY Mayor Bill de Blasio has this week called on the MTA to close subway terminals to ensure homeless don’t congregate there, and for the purpose of nightly deep disinfecting. 

    And Interim New York City Transit President Sarah Feinberg commented

    “Our customers shouldn’t have to board a car that multiple people using it as a shelter and as a trash receptacle or toilet.”

    Since the crisis began the MTA has greatly reduced its service, also as hundreds of its personnel have been out sick with coronavirus, compounding the risk to the mass transit service and broader public; however, it’s considered that the city’s subway system which has never completely closed in the century of its existence is vital for daily transporting ‘essential’ workers. 


    Tyler Durden

    Wed, 04/29/2020 – 22:30

  • "What The F**k": In Expletive-Laced Rant, Elon Musk Blasts "Fascist, Undemocratic" Shelter-In-Place Orders
    “What The F**k”: In Expletive-Laced Rant, Elon Musk Blasts “Fascist, Undemocratic” Shelter-In-Place Orders

    It has been almost exactly two years since Elon Musk’s infamous conference call meltdown when the Tesla CEO snapped at RBC analyst Joseph Spak for asking “boring bonehead questions” during the Q1 2018 earnings call. Today, Musk did it again only this time instead of raging at a “bonehead” question, the notoriously volatile CEO went off on a bizarre tirade, hammering an issue he has expressed substantial displeasure with in recent days: the inability to open up the Tesla Fremont factory Calilfornia’s shelter-in-place orders.

    Just hours after the Tesla CEO tweeted his best Donald Trump impression to date, screaming “FREE AMERICA NOW” clearly displeased with the ongoing state of affairs in the US virus-stricken nation…

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    … Elon held the Tesla earnings call where toward the end, increasingly angry, Musk unleashed a 5-minute rant complete with an f-bomb in which the CEO doubled down on his stance against the shelter-in-place orders that have gripped the United States economy in recent weeks, warning that the factory shutdowns are a “serious risk” to the electric automaker’s business.

    “It will cause great harm, not just to Tesla, but to many companies,” Musk said on the call. “And while Tesla will weather the storm, there are many companies that will not. Everything people have worked for their whole life is being destroyed in real time.”

    “It’s breaking people’s freedoms in ways that are horrible and wrong and not why they came to America or built this country. What the fuck. Excuse me. Outrage. Outrage.”

    “Frankly, I would call it forcible imprisoning of people in their homes against all of, their constitutional rights, in my opinion” he said, and then slammed the government imposed shutdown of all non-essential businesses as undemocratic and downright “fascist.”

    “If somebody wants to stay in their house, that’s great and they should be able to,” he said. “But to say that they cannot leave their house and they will be arrested if they do, this is fascist.  This is not democratic, this is not freedom, give people back their goddamn freedom.”

    Of course, neither the California or federal shelter-in-place guidelines penalize those who go outside with arrest. That did not prevent Musk from concluding that “the people are going to be very angry about this and are very angry.” What he meant is that he is angry because orders prevent Tesla from building cars at the Fremont facility while the shelter in place order is active.

    The billionaire first said panic about the coronavirus “is dumb” on March 6, as the US first began reporting cases that have now topped 1 million. His eagerness to return back to business reemerged on March 19 when he said that “based on current trends, probably close to zero new cases in US too by end of April.”

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    Then on Tuesday, hours before today’s TSLA earnings call Musk escalated his complaints on Twitter, and just as he yelled at someone to “FREE AMERICA NOW”, he praised Texas’ relaxation of rules starting Friday.

    The irony, of course, is that Musk is calling the US government response to COVID-19 “fascist” while not only not criticizing but praising China on the same day he held a private conference call with the Chinese owners of the Shanghai Tesla plant…

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    … the same China which put hundreds of millions of people into forced quarantine, and those who violated the non-stop curfew “disappeared” forever.

    The even bigger irony is that Musk could care less about US freedoms and what is democratic or fascist, when all he is truly raging about is the forced shuttering of his Fremont auto plant which he has repeatedly violated city ordinances just to keep running – while putting workers’ lived in jeopardy – in hopes of beating Wall Street estimates, just so he can keep the stock price elevated above $100 billion entitling him to a $720 million payout.

    The full rant can be heard in the clip below. It begins 38:30 into the clip and lasts about 5 minutes


    Tyler Durden

    Wed, 04/29/2020 – 22:26

  • The White House's Most Influential China Hawk Suspects COVID-19 Leaked From Wuhan Lab
    The White House’s Most Influential China Hawk Suspects COVID-19 Leaked From Wuhan Lab

    Casual readers of American political reporting probably wouldn’t recognize the name, but Washington reporters and other “insiders” almost certainly know not only his name, but his reputation for being perhaps the most influential White House figure that most Americans haven’t heard of.

    His name is Matthew Pottinger, and in addition to serving as Deputy National Security Advisor in the Trump Administration, he has served as a top advisor on China policy and “the White Houses foremost China expert”, an expertise Pottinger honed while reporting for the Wall Street Journal from Beijing, where he learned the perfected his language skills.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    And in a profile published in Wednesday’s paper, the Washington Post explored Pottinger’s rise to becoming one of the most influential foreign policy voices in the West Wing began in the late 1990s, when he moved to Beijing to cover a rising China as a foreign correspondent.

    After 9/11 and the start of the wars in Iraq and Afghanistan, Pottinger decided to leave WSJ  at the age of 31 to enlist in the Marines.

    He was modestly older than many of his fellow recruits, but in an op-ed published explaining his decision, Pottinger recounted how seeing up close how Beijing treats its citizens helped instill in him a newfound respect for the US, and an intense wariness of the CCP. In one incident, Pottinger said, he was punched in the face by a government goon who attacked him while he was reporting on some sketchy business dealings involving a Chinese company.

    He also covered the SARS outbreak in 2003-2004.

    But living in China also shows you what a nondemocratic country can do to its citizens. I’ve seen protesters tackled and beaten by plainclothes police in Tiananmen Square, and I’ve been videotaped by government agents while I was talking to a source. I’ve been arrested and forced to flush my notes down a toilet to keep the police from getting them, and I’ve been punched in the face in a Beijing Starbucks by a government goon who was trying to keep me from investigating a Chinese company’s sale of nuclear fuel to other countries.

    To give credit where credit is due, WaPo was one of the first MSM organizations to seriously consider the possibility that the novel coronavirus could have leaked from a lab in Wuhan, a theory that Pottinger has been investigating since the outbreak began. Surprisingly, the paper reports that Pottinger was one of the first Trump Administration officials to push the president to call the virus the “Wuhan Virus” instead of the coronavirus, a move that was blasted as “racist” by both China and many American leftists. That recommendation, WaPo said, was based on intel obtained by Pottinger claiming Beijing was in the early stages of a misinformation campaign to try and deflect blame for the outbreak to the US.

    Pottinger’s push to use the term “Wuhan virus” has reverberated. Trump, eager to deflect blame of his own handling of the virus, escalated the rhetoric by using “Chinese virus.” Secretary of State Mike Pompeo angered allies in March when he pressured Group of Seven nations to sign a collective statement employing “Wuhan virus,” a demand they refused. Liberals called the language racist.

    To Pottinger, the critics missed the point: China’s state media had named the virus for Wuhan for weeks before suddenly pressuring the World Health Organization to formally name it covid-19. Beijing needed to own it.

    And while Pete Navarro is still unquestionably the administration’s most visible China hawk, Pottinger is heavily involved in the Trump Administration’s plan to chart a new course for the US-China relationship that would take us closer to a “decoupling”. Globalists cringe at the thought of untangling the complicated web of interconnected economic interests tying the two countries together. But the virus has undermined the view that globalization is inevitable and de-globalization would be inherently catastrophic.

    When asked who is responsible for the severity of the global coronavirus outbreak, Pottinger insists that China is to blame. Because by the time the US was receiving the first information about the virus from China in January, it was already likely too late – something that surveillance testing, as well as reports that the earliest COVID-19 death might have happened as early as Feb. 6, seem to suggest.

    Pottinger believes Beijing’s handling of the virus has been “catastrophic” and “the whole world is the collateral damage of China’s internal governance problems,” said a person familiar with his thinking, who, like others, spoke on the condition of anonymity to discuss his views.

    After first joining the Trump administration in 2017 as senior director of the National Security Council’s Asia division, Pottinger, 46, is now a pivotal player in the Trump administration’s attempts to reorient U.S. policy on China toward a more confrontational approach, according to multiple people familiar with his role.

    WaPo noted in a lengthy piece explaining the ‘failings’ of the Trump Administration during the early days of the outbreak that Pottinger was the first to push for travel bans from China and Europe. Trump’s decision to drag his feet on the European bans might have directly contributed to the explosion of cases in New York. One study found similarities between the coronavirus strain spreading in New York, and a strain spreading in Northern Italy that researchers said could explain the excessive mortality in both areas.

    Most importantly, Pottinger has pushed intelligence agencies to explore the theory that the virus may have been accidentally released from a Wuhan lab, a suspicion that was borne out in a recent government report.

    Behind the scenes, Pottinger has pushed intelligence agencies to explore the theory, popular among conservatives, that the pathogen was accidentally released by a virology lab in Wuhan, rather than a wild animal market. So far, that theory has not been proved, but Pottinger believes there is more circumstantial evidence in favor of the lab explanation, said people with knowledge of his views.

    He and like-minded State Department aides have warned outside China experts, who had criticized the administration’s use of “Wuhan virus,” that they should remain skeptical of Beijing’s motives. Their message amounted to a warning that more damaging information would come out about Beijing’s handling of the pandemic, according to four people on the calls.

    Long before the outbreak, Pottinger reportedly kept a ‘scorecard’ in his office with a ‘highly detailed’ accounting of all the ways China is undermining the US.

    As Asia director, Pottinger kept in his office a large whiteboard mapped out with a highly detailed accounting of China’s growing global influence. The diagram was labeled with military-style buzzwords such as “Lines of Effort” and “Strategic Goals,” according to people who saw it.

    A former NSC colleague called it a scorecard of all the ways “the Chinese Communist Party was attacking the West — and how we could fight back.”

    During a recent security forum, Pottinger was asked to explain why he supports ‘decoupling’ the US and China. His answer:

    “Decoupling,” he replied, “is when you have a Great Firewall where not a single Western Internet company has been able to prosper or survive in China, by design. When Christian churches are torn down and ethnic minorities are put into reeducation camps, that’s ‘decoupling.’ So the ‘decoupling’ is something that’s been underway for quite a long time – and it is not driven by the United States.”

    For all the pro-China liberals in the US, the message from Pottinger is clear: If you spend more time criticizing ‘oppression’ by the US government, you should try living in Beijing for a few years. That should be enough to change your mind.


    Tyler Durden

    Wed, 04/29/2020 – 22:25

  • 6 Central Banks & The Ponzi Scheme That Will Bankrupt The World
    6 Central Banks & The Ponzi Scheme That Will Bankrupt The World

    Authored by Egon von Greyerz via GoldSwitzerland.com,

    The destiny of the world is now in the hands of 6 central banks, Fed, ECB, BoE (England), PBOC (China), BoJ (Japan), SNB (Swiss). This in itself bodes extremely badly for the global financial system. This is like putting the villains in charge of the judicial system. For decades these central banks have totally abused their power and taken control of the world monetary system for the benefit of their banker friends and in some cases their private shareholders. 

    The central banks have totally corrupted and destroyed the financial system, by printing money and extending credit that doesn’t exist. Everyone knows that creating money out of thin air makes the money totally worthless. These bankers know, that if you stand next to the printing press and get the money first, it does have some value before it circulates. And this is exactly what they have done. Once the money reaches the people, it devalues rapidly. As Mayer Amschel Rothschild said over 200 years ago: 

    “Permit me to issue and control the money of a nation, and I care not who makes its laws.”

    WORTHLESS MONEY PRINTING LEADS TO WORTHLESS ASSETS 

    But the bankers are not just in charge of the printing press, they are also in control of the cost of money in the form of interest rates. By manipulating rates, they are setting aside the natural laws of supply and demand. So they can print unlimited amounts of money and price it at 0%. The effect of this is a debt bubble that can never be repaid and an asset bubble that is so fake that not a single asset is worth a fraction of the value it is priced at. 

    The central banks are now panicking and are creating trillions of dollars, euros etc. Add to that additional bank lending and government debt and we are in the tens of trillions.

    Just looking at the 6 biggest banks mentioned above, their balance sheets have gone  up by $3 trillion from $21 trillion at the end of February 2020 to $24T today. 

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    But this is just the beginning. We must remember that it wasn’t the Coronavirus that started the money printing. It all began back in late July 2019 when the ECB warned the world that something was seriously wrong by saying, we will do whatever it takes. A few weeks later the Fed started daily Repos of $100s of billions. This was the time when serious problems in the financial system started. 

    $5 TRILLION CREATED WITH ZERO INTRINSIC VALUE

    At the end of Sep 2019, the Fed balance sheet was $3.8T and today it is $6.6T, an increase of $2.8T most of which occurred since March 2020. During the same period (Sep 2019-April 2020) US debt grew by $2T from $22.7T to $24.7T. 

    So between the Fed and the US government, they have created almost $5T since the end of Sep 2019. Most of this increase has taken place in April 2020. Remember that this is not real money but just money fabricated out of thin air. It involved no work, no service in return and no production of goods. Thus this money has ZERO intrinsic value. It is just a computer entry of one 5 and 12 zeros. Therefore the recipients of these funds are getting fake and worthless money. 

    WHY DOESN’T THE FED JUST PRINT THE ANNUAL US GDP OF $21.5T

    If the Fed or the US government claims that they are issuing real money that has a real value, why don’t they just print $21.5 trillion annually. This equates to US annual GDP. So instead of having to work and produce goods, every US adult and child is just given $65,000 each. ($21.5T divided by 331 million population). Nobody would need to work and everyone can just spend the money as they like and live in total bliss just like in Shangri-La. Obviously someone would need to produce food and provide essential services but that could all be bought in from low cost countries.

    If the US government and the Fed really believe that they are solving all problems by printing money, why don’t they then go full out and print the annual GDP. But why then stop at $21.5T which is the current GDP? Why not print $43T to double the standard of living. Or why not go to $100T so everyone can really get wealthy. If the current system of printing $ trillions or even $10s of trillions works, I would like the Fed and the government to explain why they can’t print $100s of trillions. Are they saying that printing $10T represents real money but not $100T which would be fake? Can any serious observer believe that these 6 central banks will save the world by printing worthless money?  How far do they think they can take their Ponzi scheme before the world discovers their bluff?

    FED TO PRINT $9.5 TRILLION AND BUY ALL THE GOLD IN THE WORLD

    To test the value of the printed money, I suggest that the Fed prints $9.5 trillion and buys all the gold in the world, including jewellery, of 170,000 tonnes at the current price of $55.6 million per tonne. If they don’t understand what will happen, I can tell them. They would have real problems getting hold of 1 tonne of physical gold at that price. By the time they buy the second tonne, the market will value the dollar at its intrinsic value of ZERO and gold measured in worthless dollars will go to infinity. 

    THE END OF THE DOLLAR

    The Fed is of course not stupid. They understand the consequences of their actions. They know they are playing a very dangerous game that could fail at any time. They are also aware that the dollar since 1971 has fallen 98% in real terms, which is versus gold. By introducing the Petrodollar combined with policing the global financial system, the US has managed to maintain an artificially high value of their currency for decades. But that is now coming to an end. The combination of collapsing oil prices and countries like China and Russia abandoning the dollar will start the dollar ball rolling. Also, the unlimited printing that the US has started will soon accelerate as companies and financial institutions default, leading to a dollar crash.

    THE CURRENCY RACE TO THE BOTTOM

    In a few months time, nobody will want to hold dollars as the greenback collapses. The problem is that there is not a single solid currency today. The Euro is toast and so is the Yen and the Pound. These countries are all into massive money printing as a result of the current global crisis. So what about the Swiss franc. It has always been seen as a safehaven in periods of crisis. Well, the Swiss might be a currency to flee to for a very brief period. But if we analyse Switzerland’s National Bank, the SNB, as well as the Swiss banking system we will find big problems here like anywhere else in the world. 

    As Swiss I don’t like criticising a country which has the best political system in the world and has had very sound finances and a strong currency. But sadly the conservative Swiss banker is gone and the SNB and the whole Swiss banking system are taking risks that are hair-raising. 

    SWISS NATIONAL BANK – THE WORLD’S BIGGEST HEDGE FUND

    If we start with the SNB, it has a balance sheet which is CHF 852B ($878B) or 122% of Swiss GDP. This is the most leveraged balance sheet of any major central bank. But not only that, if we analyse the holdings of the SNB, we find that it is the biggest hedge fund in the world. Just over 76% of the holdings are in US dollars and Yen with 24% in other currencies like Yen, GBP and CAD. Almost $100B are in US stocks like Apple, Microsoft, Google etc. 

    So we find that the SNB is a massive speculator in currencies with 92% of the assets in non Swiss franc investments. This is a massive bet by a national bank against its own currency. The official reason why they are doing it is to keep the Swiss franc low against its main trading nations, the EU and the US. But it is extremely dangerous and irresponsible against the country and the shareholders to leverage the balance sheet to this extent. The biggest shareholders are the Cantons (local States) who own 55%. In Q1 2020, the SNB lost CHF38B ($39B) on its investments, mainly in the US stock market. The Cantons are dependent on the dividends from the SNB so this is a big blow. 

    But this is just the beginning for the SNB. When the US stock market falls another 30% or more, which is likely, the losses will mount. But still worse are the currency positions. For every 10% the dollar and euro fall against the Swiss, it means another $80B loss for the SNB. That will of course lead to more Swiss money printing and the Swiss franc weakening which in theory could offset the currency losses. But it is difficult to predict who wins the currency race to the bottom. Most likely is that the dollar will win closely followed by the euro and yen. And if that will be the case, the SNB will incur substantial losses before the Swiss franc loses value. 

    It is not only the SNB which is a timebomb. So is the Swiss banking system which is 5x Swiss GDP.  That is too big for a small country when debt markets come under pressure, which is already starting to happen. Relative to the size of the country the SNB will have to print massive amounts of Swiss francs which will have zero value just like all printed money. 

    The conclusion is clear. No banking system in the world is safe, including Switzerland’s. So anyone who holds major assets within the financial system be it cash or securities, is exposed to an unacceptable risk in coming months and years. 

    MARKETS

    Stocks are in a correction up in a secular downtrend which started in February. In the Dow we might be near the end of this correction or it could last slightly longer. But the risk is to the downside and anyone invested in the stock markets is likely to lose the majority of his wealth in coming months and years.

    Bonds are extremely vulnerable as credit deteriorates on a daily basis. All debt will come under pressure including Sovereign. Central banks will do what they can to hold rates down but in the end the market will win as bonds sell off and rates climb rapidly. 

    GOLD

    Gold (and silver) will be the obvious winner as currency debasement accelerates. My 18 year old target of $10,000 in today’s money is virtually guaranteed. 

    The chart below shows gold against US money supply (FMQ – Fiat Money Quantity). It shows that gold is as cheap today as it was in 1970 when the price was $35 or in 2000 when gold was $290. 

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    With massive pressure in the physical market where both the LBMA bullion banks and Comex are unable to meet their obligations to deliver physical gold, it is only a matter of time before gold breaks out properly. I don’t like making sensational forecasts of the gold price since that attracts the wrong buyers. Still 10x today’s price or $17,000 is certainly realistic with just normal inflation. The attached chart by goldchartsrus confirms that level. Gold adjusted for real inflation would be at $18,100 to be equal to the 1980 top of $850.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Hyperinflation will of course add many zeros to the gold price even though that price would be meaningless since it would only reflect the debasement of currencies. But it won’t be meaningless to the people who are still holding on to worthless dollars or euros instead of holding the only money that has survived in history which is gold. 

    Just speak to people who have lived in Venezuela, Zimbabwe, Hungary or Yugoslavia to take recent hyperinflationary examples. These people lost all their money and so will the ones who are not protected against the coming hyperinflation.

    Remember that hyperinflation does not arise as a result of demand led increases in prices but as a result of collapsing currencies. And as I have explained above, this is what we will see next as money printing accelerates. 

    Physical gold must not be seen as a speculative investment but as the only money that has survived throughout history and maintained its purchasing power. So gold is insurance and gold is wealth protection. That is why we must hold gold against a financial system and currency system which will not survive in their present form. 


    Tyler Durden

    Wed, 04/29/2020 – 22:05

  • China PMIs Expand For 2nd Month After February Crash, But Real-Time Indicators Paint Different Picture
    China PMIs Expand For 2nd Month After February Crash, But Real-Time Indicators Paint Different Picture

    And just like that, China’s February swoon is ancient history.

    After Beijing reported a dramatic rebound in March PMIs from the February crash which saw both the manufacturing and service PMIs tumble to record lows, it was virtually guaranteed that the April data would confirm a continuation of China’s “solid recovery” trend.

    After all, it has now become a political race between China and the US over whose economy is more unscathed as a result of the coronavirus pandemic as the Global Times editor in chief Hu Xijin made abundantly clear today when in response to the latest US GDP print, tweeted “Already fell 4.8% in Q1, will definitely be worse in Q2. How will President Trump explain? I guess he would say the figure is better than expected and is so much better than any other country in the world.When China sees positive growth rate in Q2,he would say the number is fake.”

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    Well, Trump certainly wouldn’t be the first to accuse China of fabricating numbers, especially in light of the latest official PMI numbers of out China which showed manufacturing dip from 52.0 to 50.8, missing expectations of 51.0 yet still in expansion territory; at the same time the Nonmanufacturing PMI printed at 53.2, up from 52.3, and well above the 52.5 consensus estimate.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    But would Trump be right if accusing China of also fabricating its PMIs which show the economy now well in expansion territory for a second month? For the answer we go to real-time activity trackers which have become so popular ever since the breakout of the coronavirus pandemic. What they show is anything but an economy that is expanding.

    First, according to channel checks, we can clearly see that the latest activity in such sectors are hotels, catering and entertanment is running far below indicative 2019 levels, with just mining and real estate roughly comparable to year ago levels.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    To be sure, while daily coal consumption is indeed on par with 2019…

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    … transportation – both ground and by air – across China remains a pale shadow of 2019 levels.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    More ominously, the all-important for China’s trade economy container throughput at major port appears to still be far below last year levels.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    And most concerning of all for the country that still barely has a functioning bankruptcy process, is that the number of bankruptcies filings is surging:

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Superimposing China and the US in industrial and consumer activity shows that while China is well ahead in terms of activity recovery, it has a ways to go before it catches up to 2019 levels. As for the US, it certainly has a ways to go.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    The final proof that China has a ways to go before it recovers, let alone is in “expansion”, come from a handful of other high-frequency indicators as shown below.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Conclusion: China’s official PMI numbers are about as credible as its coronavirus “data.”


    Tyler Durden

    Wed, 04/29/2020 – 21:42

  • 'War On Cash' Is Kicking Into Overdrive
    ‘War On Cash’ Is Kicking Into Overdrive

    Authored by James Rickards via The Daily Reckoning,

    In the depths of the 2008–09 financial crisis, Obama’s first chief of staff, Rahm Emanuel, remarked that one should never let a good crisis go to waste. You probably recall him saying that.

    He was referring to the fact that crises may be temporary but hidden agendas are permanent.

    The global elites and deep state actors always have a laundry list of programs and regulations they can’t wait to put into practice. They know that most of these are deeply unpopular and they could never get away with putting them into practice during ordinary times.

    Yet when a crisis hits, citizens are desperate for fast action and quick solutions. The elites bring forward their rescue packages but then use these as Trojan horses to sneak their wish list inside.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    The War on Cash Is Decades Old

    The USA Patriot Act that passed after 9/11 is a good example. Some counterterrorist measures were needed, of course. But the Treasury had a long-standing wish list involving reporting cash transactions and limiting citizens’ ability to get cash.

    They plugged that wish list into the Patriot Act and we’ve been living with the results ever since, even though 9/11 is long in the past.

    Obviously, the effort to eliminate cash is hardly new. It has been going on for many years and in many forms.

    The U.S. discontinued the use of large-denomination bills in the late 1960s. Until 1969, $500, $1,000, $5,000 and even $10,000 bills were issued, even though they were printed decades earlier.

    Today the largest bill is a $100 bill, but it has lost 80% of its purchasing power since 1968, so it’s really just a $20 bill from those days. Europe has ended the 500-euro note and today the largest note in euros is 200 euros.

    Ignore the Official Reasons

    Harvard professor Ken Rogoff has a book called The Curse of Cash, which calls for the complete elimination of cash. Many Bitcoin groupies say the same thing. Central banks and the IMF are all working on new digital currencies today.

    The reasons for this are said to include attacks on tax evasion, terrorism and criminal activity. There’s some truth to these claims. Cash is anonymous, so it can’t be tracked.

    But the real reason is because the elimination of cash would allow elites to impose negative interest rates, account freezes and confiscation.

    They can’t do that as long as you can go to your bank and withdraw your cash. That’s the key.

    In other words, it’s much easier for them to control your money if they first herd you into a digital cattle pen. That’s their true objective and all the other reasons are just a smokescreen.

    And now, predictably, the latest attack on cash comes courtesy of the COVID-19 pandemic.

    Crisis Meets Opportunity

    This crisis is even larger and scarier than the 2008 crisis, which gives elites even more opportunity to ram their agendas through without serious opposition. They don’t intend to let it go to waste.

    Sure enough, government agents and tech vendors are now claiming that cash is “dangerous” because it could contain traces of the coronavirus.

    While that’s not impossible, it’s highly unlikely and no more likely than getting the virus from 100 other sources including package deliveries and shopping carts.

    Should we ban cardboard boxes and shopping carts too?

    If you’re really concerned about getting coronavirus from cash, it’s simple to wear sanitary gloves during any transactions (I do). Then put the cash to one side. The virus cannot live more than 10 hours or so on an inorganic surface. After a while, your cash is safe.

    But if you get scared into giving up cash because of COVID-19, then don’t complain when you find that your financial freedom is also gone when the world moves to 100% digital money.

    Because that’s the endgame here.

    How to Protect Your Wealth

    The time to protect yourself is now. The best way is to keep a portion of your wealth outside of the banking system.

    I strongly recommend that you own physical gold (and silver). I recommend you allocate 10% of your investable assets to gold. If you really wanted to be aggressive, maybe 20%. But no more.

    Just make sure you don’t store it in a bank, because it would be subject to confiscation. That defeats the whole purpose of having this sort of protection in the first place.

    One Small Positive

    As bad as the COVID-19 crisis is, and it is that bad, there’s one small positive to come out of it: It’s finally snapped investors out of their complacency regarding gold.

    I recommended gold at $1,100 per ounce, $1,200 per ounce, $1,300 per ounce, $1,400 per ounce, $1,500 per ounce and so on… you get the picture.

    But few people cared. They just yawned. Now that gold is $1,750 per ounce (up 75% since 2015), everyone wants gold!

    There’s only one problem. You may not be able to get any.

    That’s also something I predicted. I said years ago that when you most want your gold, you won’t be able to get it because everyone will want it at the same time and the dealers will be back-ordered and the mints and refiners will shut down.

    Now it appears that’s exactly what’s happening.

    The U.S. Mint at West Point is closing. That mint produces 1-ounce American Gold Eagle coins, so this will add to the shortage of Gold Eagles. The Royal Canadian Mint also closed for coin production temporarily a few weeks ago.

    Gold refiners in Switzerland are either closed or are operating on reduced hours. Gold logistics firms like Brink’s are also cutting back hours and reducing distribution of gold bullion.

    You Still Have a Chance

    It’s still possible to find some gold bars or coins from dealers who have inventory, but delays are long and commissions are high. The scarcity factor will only get worse as gold prices continue their rally in this third great bull market in history that began in 2015.

    Gold is difficult to get now but not impossible. If you don’t have yours yet, don’t wait any longer.

    If you have to pay a bit of a premium for physical gold over the officially listed gold price, don’t worry about that. It means nothing in the long run.

    I see gold going to at least $10,000 an ounce ultimately, so paying a little more right now is not an issue. It’s just an indication of the skyrocketing demand for physical gold right now.

    When the next panic hits, and it will hit, there won’t be any gold available at any price.


    Tyler Durden

    Wed, 04/29/2020 – 21:25

  • COVID-19 Rips Through Marine Boot Camp, Dozens Of New Infections
    COVID-19 Rips Through Marine Boot Camp, Dozens Of New Infections

    We previously reported on the growing controversy over US defense readiness as relates to continuing US armed services boot camps across the country. 

    Top Pentagon brass last month said keeping entry-level recruit training operational is essential to national security amid growing concerns the COVID-19 pandemic could spread at the military training centers:

    The Pentagon has decided that keeping all the services’ entry-level training camps up and running is critical to national security. The decision was reportedly at odds with what some service leaders recommended: a temporary pause on recruit shipping until the threat of the coronavirus lessened.

    Defense Department officials overrode the recommendations from senior military leaders to halt training for 30 daysThe Washington Post reported March 16.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Recruits and drill instructors wearing face masks at Marine Corps Recruit Depot, San Diego. Image source: US Marine Corps/Marine Corps Times.

    However, beginning early this month the main military branches, starting with the Army and Marines, began “pausing” the shipping of new incoming recruits to boot camps on the East and West coasts. 

    But current ongoing boot camps would continue on, according to the late March decision, with the Pentagon saying it would frequently revisit the “pause” in additional trainees. Since then, the national Marine boot camps in San Diego and Parris Island, South Carolina have resumed receiving new Marine recruits, but with a mandatory 14-day isolation period upon arrival

    But as military analysis news site Connecting Vets Radio reports, COVID-19 has now hit Marine Corps Recruit Depot San Diego hard:  

    Almost four dozen recruits in San Diego have tested positive for the virus and have been quarantined for two weeks, according to the Marine Corps.

    The increase in COVID-19 positive recruits is related to the Marine Corps conducting more testing for the virus.  

    “We are experiencing challenging and unprecedented times…,” a video message from the Marine Corps top command said.

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    All new COVID-19 cases are in one Marine “company” but training has still been halted broadly, nor is there a current pause in new incoming recruits, making for an increasingly dangerous and tense situation concerning the potentially deadly disease.

    Spokesman for the recruit depot, Capt. Martin Harris told Marine Corps Times, “While these positive cases are currently isolated to one company and in quarantine, the increase of asymptomatic positive tests has prompted the testing of all personnel in quarantine and all recruits that arrive on the depot in the future, whether or not they present symptoms,” he explained.


    Tyler Durden

    Wed, 04/29/2020 – 21:05

  • Unsealed FBI Handwritten Notes, Emails Reveal Agents Plotted Perjury Trap On Flynn
    Unsealed FBI Handwritten Notes, Emails Reveal Agents Plotted Perjury Trap On Flynn

    Update (2030ET): Are we finally going to see some consequences for a deep state lackey?

    Shortly after the post below was completed, US Congresswoman Elise Stefanik tweeted the following:

    Devastating flashback clip of Comey just aired on @marthamaccallum show.

    When asked who went around the protocol of going through the WH Counsel’s office and instead decided to send the FBI agents into White House for the Flynn perjury trap

    …Comey smugly responds “I sent them.”

    Here is the clip:

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    Will Comey do time?

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    *  *  *

    Via SaraACarter.com,

    U.S. District Court Judge Emmet G. Sullivan unsealed four pages of stunning FBI emails and handwritten notes Wednesday, regarding former Trump National Security Advisor Michael Flynn, which allegedly reveal the retired three star general was targeted by senior FBI officials for prosecution, stated Flynn’s defense attorney Sidney Powell. Those notes and emails revealed that the retired three-star general appeared to be set up for a perjury trap by the senior members of the bureau and agents charged with investigating the now-debunked allegations that President Donald Trump’s campaign colluded with Russia, said Sidney Powell, the defense lawyer representing Flynn.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Moreover, the Department of Justice release 11 more pages of documents Wednesday afternoon, according to Powell.

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    “What is especially terrifying is that without the integrity of Attorney General Bill Barr and U.S. Attorney Jensen, we still would not have this clear exculpatory information as Mr. Van Grack and the prosecutors have opposed every request we have made,” said Powell.

    It appears, based on the notes and emails that the Department of Justice was determined at the time to prosecute Flynn, regardless of what they found, Powell said.

    “The FBI pre-planned a deliberate attack on Gen. Flynn and willfully chose to ignore mention of Section 1001 in the interview despite full knowledge of that practice,” Powell said in a statement.

    “The FBI planned it as a perjury trap at best and in so doing put it in writing stating ‘what is our goal? Truth/ Admission or to get him to lie so we can prosecute him or get him fired.”

    The documents, reviewed and obtained by SaraACarter.com, reveal that senior FBI officials discussed strategies for targeting and setting up Flynn, prior to interviewing him at the White House on Jan. 24, 2017. It was that interview at the White House with former FBI Special Agent Peter Strzok and FBI Special Agent Joe Pientka that led Flynn, now 61, to plead guilty after months of pressure by prosecutors, financial strain and threats to prosecute his son.

    Powell filed a motion earlier this year to withdraw Flynn’s guilty plea and to dismiss his case for egregious government misconduct. Flynn pleaded guilty in December 2017, under duress by government prosecutors, to lying to investigators about his conversations with Russian diplomat Sergey Kislyak about sanctions on Russia. This January, however, he withdrew his guilty plea in the U.S. District Court in Washington, D.C. He stated that he was “innocent of this crime” and was coerced by the FBI and prosecutors under threats that would charge his son with a crime. He filed to withdraw his guilty plea after DOJ prosecutors went back on their word and asked the judge to sentence Flynn to up to six months in prison, accusing him of not cooperating in another case against his former partner. Then prosecutors backtracked and said probation would be fine but by then Powell, his attorney, had already filed to withdraw his guilty plea.

    The documents reveal that prior to the interview with Flynn in January, 2017 the FBI had already come to the conclusion that Flynn was guilty and beyond that the officials were working together to see how best to corner the 33-year military veteran and former head of the Defense Intelligence Agency. The bureau deliberately chose not to show him the evidence of his phone conversation to help him in his recollection of events, which is standard procedure. Even stranger, the agents that interviewed Flynn later admitted that they didn’t believe he lied during the interview with them.

    Powell told this reporter last week that the documents produced by the government are “stunning Brady evidence’ proving Flynn was deliberately set up and framed by corrupt agents at the top of the FBI to target President Trump.

    She noted earlier this week in her motion that the evidence “also defeats any argument that the interview of Mr. Flynn on January 24 was material to any ‘investigation.’ The government has deliberately suppressed this evidence from the inception of this prosecution—knowing there was no crime by Mr. Flynn.”

    Powell told this reporter Wednesday that the order by Sullivan to unseal the documents in Exhibit 3 in the supplement to Flynn’s motion to dismiss for egregious government conduct is exposing the truth to the public. She said it’s “easy to see that he was set up and that Mr. Flynn was the insurance policy for the FBI.” Powell’s reference to the ‘insurance policy,’ is based on one of the thousands of texts exchanged by former FBI lawyer Lisa Page and her then-lover former FBI Special Agent Peter Strzok.

    In an Aug. 15, 2016, text from Strzok to Page he states, “I want to believe the path you threw out for consideration in Andy’s (former Deputy Director Andrew McCabe) office — that there’s no way he gets elected — but I’m afraid we can’t take that risk. It’s like an insurance policy in the unlikely event you die before 40.”

    The new documents were turned over to Powell, by U.S. Attorney Timothy Shea. They were discovered after an extensive review by the attorneys appointed by U.S. Attorney General William Barr to review Flynn’s case, which includes U.S. Attorney of St. Louis, Jeff Jensen.

    In one of the emails dated Jan. 23, 2017, FBI lawyer Lisa Page, who at the time was having an affair with Strzok and who worked closely with him on the case discussed the charges the bureau would bring on Flynn before the actual interview at the White House took place. Those email exchanges were prepared for former FBI Deputy Director Andrew McCabe, who was fired by the DOJ for lying multiple times to investigators with DOJ Inspector General Michael Horowitz’s office.

    Former FBI Director James Comey, who was fired by President Trump for his conduct, revealed during an interview with Nicolle Wallace last year that he sent the FBI agents to interview Flynn at the White House under circumstances he would have never done to another administration.

    “I probably wouldn’t have done or maybe gotten away with in a more organized investigation, a more organized administration,” Comey said. “In the George W. Bush administration … or the Obama administration, two men that all of us, perhaps, have increased appreciation for over the last two years.”

    In the Jan 23, email Page asks Strzok the day before he interviews Flynn at the White House:

    “I have a question for you. Could the admonition re 1001 be given at the beginning at the interview? Or does it have to come following a statement which agents believe to be false? Does the policy speak to that? (I feel bad that I don’t know this but I don’t remember ever having to do this! Plus I’ve only charged it once in the context of lying to a federal probation officer). It seems to be if the former, then it would be an easy way to just casually slip that in.

    “Of course as you know sir, federal law makes it a crime to…”

    Strzok’s response:

    I haven’t read the policy lately, but if I recall correctly, you can say it at any time. I’m 90 percent sure about that, but I can check in the am.

    In the motion filed earlier this week, Powell stated “since August 2016 at the latest, partisan FBI and DOJ leaders conspired to destroy Mr. Flynn. These documents show in their own handwriting and emails that they intended either to create an offense they could prosecute or at least get him fired. Then came the incredible malfeasance of Mr. Van Grack’s and the SCO’s prosecution despite their knowledge there was no crime by Mr. Flynn.”

    Attached to the email is handwritten notes regarding Flynn that are stunning on their face. It is lists of how the agents will guide him in an effort to get him to trip up on his answers during their questioning and what charges they could bring against him.

    “If we get him to admit to breaking the Logan Act, give facts to DOJ & have them decide,” state the handwritten notes.

    “Or if he initially lies, then we present him (not legible) & he admits it, document for DOJ, & let them decide how to address it.”

    The next two points reveal that the agents were concerned about how their interview with Flynn would be perceived saying “if we’re seen as playing games, WH (White House) will be furious.”

    “Protect our institution by not playing games,” the last point on the first half of the hand written notes state.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    From the handwritten note:

    Afterwards:

    • interview

    • I agreed yesterday that we shouldn’t show Flynn (redacted) if he didn’t admit

    • I thought @ it last night, I believe we should rethink this

    • What is (not legible) ? Truth/admission or to get him to lie, so we can prosecute him or get him fired?

    • we regularly show subjects evidence, with the goal of getting them to admit their wrongdoing

    • I don’t see how getting someone to admit their wrongdoing is going easy on him

    • If we get him to admit to breaking the Logan Act, give facts to DOJ & have them decide

    • Or if he initially lies, then we present him (not legible) & he admits it, document for DOJ, & let them decide how to address it

    • If we’re seen as playing games, WH will be furious

    • Protect our institution by not playing games

    (Left column)

    • we have case on Flynn & Russians

    • Our goal is to (not legible)

    • Our goal is to determine if Mike Flynn is going to tell the truth or if he lies @ relationship w/ Russians

    • can quote (redacted)

    • Shouldn’t (redacted

    Review (not legible) stand alone

    It appears evident from an email from former FBI agent Strzok, who interviewed Flynn at the White House to then FBI General Counsel James Baker, who is no longer with the FBI and was himself under investigation for leaking alleged national security information to the media.

    The email was a series of questions to prepare McCabe for his phone conversation with Flynn on the day the agents went to interview him at the White House. These questions would be questions that Flynn may ask McCabe before sending the agents over to interview  him.

    Email from Peter Strzok, cc’d to FBI General Counsel James Baker: (January 24, 2017)

    I’m sure he’s thought through these, but for DD’s (referencing Deputy Director Andrew McCabe) consideration about how to answer in advance of his call with Flynn:

    Am I in trouble?

    Am I the subject of an investigation?

    Is it a criminal investigation?

    Is it an espionage investigation? Do I need an attorney? Do I need to tell Priebus? The President?

    Will you tell Priebus? The President? Will you tell the WH what I tell you?

    What happens to the information/who will you tell what I tell you? Will you need to interview other people?

    Will our interview be released publically? Will the substance of our interview be released?

    How long will this take (depends on his cooperation – I’d plan 45 minutes)? Can we do this over the phone?

    I can explain all this right now, I did this, this, this [do you shut him down? Hear him out? Conduct the interview if he starts talking? Do you want another agent/witness standing by in case he starts doing this?]

    Thanks,
    Pete


    Tyler Durden

    Wed, 04/29/2020 – 20:45

  • "Holy God. We're About To Lose Everything" – Pandemic Crushes Overleveraged Airbnb Superhosts 
    “Holy God. We’re About To Lose Everything” – Pandemic Crushes Overleveraged Airbnb Superhosts 

    “History doesn’t repeat itself, but it often rhymes,” as Mark Twain is often reputed to have said. Before the 2007-2008 GFC, people built real estate portfolios based around renters. We all know what happened there; once consumers got pinched in the GFC, rent payments couldn’t be made, and it rippled down the chain and resulted in landlords foreclosing on properties. Now a similar event is underway, that is, overleveraged Airbnb Superhosts, who own portfolios of rental properties built on debt, are now starting to blow up after the pandemic has left them incomeless for months and unable to service mortgage debt. 

    We have described the financial troubles that were ahead for Superhosts in late March after noticing nationwide lockdowns led to a crash not just in the tourism and hospitality industries, but also a plunge in Airbnb bookings. It was to our surprise that Airbnb’s management understood many of their Superhosts were overleveraged and insolvent, which forced the company to quickly erect a bailout fund for Superhosts that would cover part of their mortgage payments in April. 

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    The Wall Street Journal has done the groundwork by interviewing Superhosts that are seeing their mini-empires of short-term rental properties built on debt implode as the “magic money” dries up. 

    Cheryl Dopp,54, has a small portfolio of Airbnb properties with monthly mortgage payments totaling around $22,000. She said the increasing rental income of adding properties to the portfolio would offset the growing debt. When the pandemic struck, she said $10,000 in rental income evaporated overnight. 

    “I made a bargain with the devil,” she said while referring to her financial misery of being overleveraged and incomeless. 

    Dopp said when the pandemic lockdowns began, “I thought, ‘Holy God. We’re about to lose everything.'”

    Market-research firm AirDNA LLC said $1.5 billion in bookings have vanished since mid-March. Airbnb gave all hosts a refund, along with Superhosts, a bailout (in Airbnb terms they called it a “grant”). 

    “Hosts should’ve always been prepared for this income to go away,” said Gina Marotta, a principal at Argentia Group Inc., which does credit analysis on real estate loans. “Instead, they built an expensive lifestyle feeding off of it.”

    We noted that last month, “Of the four million Airbnb hosts across the world, 10% are considered “Superhosts,” and many have taken out mortgages to accumulate properties to build rental portfolios.”  

    Airbnb spokesman Nick Papas said the decline in bookings and slump in the tourism and travel industry is “temporary: Travel will bounce back and Airbnb hosts—the vast majority of whom have just one listing—will continue to welcome guests and generate income.”

    Papas’ optimism about a V-shaped recovery has certainly not been echoed in the petroleum and aviation industry. Boeing CEO Dave Calhoun warned on Tuesday that air travel growth might not return to pre-corona levels for years. Fewer people traveling is more bad news for Airbnb hosts that a slump could persist for years, leading to the eventual deleveraging of properties. 

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    AirDNA has determined that a third of Airbnb’s US hosts have one property. Another third have two and 24 properties and get ready for this: a third have more than 24.  

    Startups such as Sonder Corp. and Lyric Hospitality Inc. manage properties for hosts that have 25+ properties. Many of these companies have furloughed or laid off staff in April. 

    Jennifer Kelleher-Hazlett of Clawson, Michigan, spent $380,000 on two properties in 2018. She and her husband borrowed $100,000 to furnish each. Rental income would net up to $7,000 per month from Airbnb after mortgage payments, which would supplement her income as a part-time pharmacist and husband’s work in academia. 

    Before the virus struck, both were expecting to buy more homes – now they can’t make the payments on their Airbnb properties because rental income has collapsed. “We’re either borrowing more or defaulting,” she said.

    Here’s another Airbnb horror story via The Journal:  

    “That sum would provide little relief to hosts such as Jennifer and David Landrum of Atlanta. In 2016, they started a company named Local, renting the 18 apartments they leased and 21 apartments they managed to corporate travelers and film-industry workers. They spent more than $14,000 per apartment to outfit them with rugs, throw pillows, art and chandeliers. They grossed about $1.5 million annually, mostly through Airbnb, Ms. Landrum said.

    They spend about $50,000 annually with cleaning services, about $25,000 on an inspector and $30,000 a year on maintenance staff and landscapers, Ms. Landrum said, not to mention spending on furnishings.

    When Airbnb began refunding guests March 14, the Landrums had nearly $40,000 in cancellations, she said. The couple has been able to pay only a portion of April rent on the 18 apartments they lease and can’t fulfill their obligations to pay three months’ rent unless bookings resume. They have reduced pay to cleaning staff and others. Adding to the stress, Georgia banned short-term rentals through April.

    “It’s scary,” said Ms. Landrum, who said she has discounted some units three times since mid-March. The Landrums have negotiated to get some leniency from apartment owners on their leases. If not, Ms. Landrum said, they would have to sell their house.”

    To make matters worse, and this is exactly what we warned about last month, Airbnb Superhosts are now panic selling properties: 

    Greg Hague, who runs a Phoenix real-estate firm, said Airbnb hosts are “desperate to sell properties” in April. 

    “There’s been a flood of people. You have people coming to us saying, ‘I’m a month or two away from foreclosure. What’s it going to take to get it sold now?'” Hague said.

    And here’s what we said in March: “We might have discovered the next big seller that could ruin the real estate market: Airbnb Superhosts that need to get liquid.” 


    Tyler Durden

    Wed, 04/29/2020 – 20:11

  • JPMorgan: "If There Is Any Good News In This Report, Don't Believe It"
    JPMorgan: “If There Is Any Good News In This Report, Don’t Believe It”

    It’s perfectly fitting that in an economy which – as of tomorrow morning – will have 30 million newly unemployed workers (and perhaps as many as 50 million), and where the recession officially began after the biggest GDP plunge since the financial crisis (soon to be followed by an even worse collapse in Q2 growth) that stocks would soar almost 3% and tech names are now flat for the year.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Some would call it a depression; others a new bull market.

    But maybe we are somehow misreading today’s GDP print? Maybe, hidden somewhere deep between the lines there was just the right amount of good news the algos were looking for and the economic crash was really a catalyst to send stocks surging? Maybe we are deluding ourselves, and it wasn’t that bad? Well, according to JPM the answer is…

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Nope, it looks like that the data was indeed bad. So bad, in fact, that stocks exploded because thanks to central planning, the worse the news for the ordinary man on the street, the richer Wall Street gets, courtesy of Powell. Here are the details from JPM:

    US GDP growth for 1Q fell 4.8% q/q saar. If there is any good news in this report, don’t believe it. These data are ugly, and are set to get much worse.

    While the outturn was not as bad as we had feared (-11.2%ar), it was modestly worse than consensus (-4.0%ar) and the largest decline since 2008. Moreover, given the likely hit to hard-to-measure service sector activity late in the quarter, there is a high likelihood of downward revisions. Notably, we have not changed our call for a 40%ar plunge in current-quarter GDP—but we lowered our 3Q20 projection so as to leave the level of GDP by 4Q20 unchanged at a huge 7% below its 4Q19 level.

    So now that we are in a quarter when the US economy is expected to shrink by 40%, or about $2 trillion, stocks are now just 10% below their all time highs, and at the current pace of levitation, will surpass the previous records in a few days.

    Incidentally, when Jerome Powell was asked what he thinks of this absolute idiocy, and if he is guilty of encouraging moral hazard and pushing stocks higher, he said that “we want markets to work, we are not focused on asset prices”, to which he added that “it’s been good to see markets working.” Which by implication means that when markets are down, they no longer “work.”


    Tyler Durden

    Wed, 04/29/2020 – 19:57

  • "It's A Weapon For The US" – China Official Renews Calls To Dethrone The Dollar
    “It’s A Weapon For The US” – China Official Renews Calls To Dethrone The Dollar

    Via SchiffGold.com,

    Last year, we reported extensively on a push toward de-dollarization by countries like Russia and China and their desire to undermine the ability of the US to weaponize the dollar as a foreign policy tool. Europe was even starting to push to dethrone the dollar as the reserve currency.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    With the Federal Reserve running the dollar printing press at full speed and the US government expanding the national debt into the stratosphere, there are renewed calls for a currency to replace the dollar as the world reserve.

    This week, Shanghai Gold Exchange (SGE) President Wang Zhenying called for a new super-sovereign currency to replace the greenback.

    Reuters reports:

    Concern has mounted among some market participants over the dollar-denominated system as the US Federal Reserve cut interest rates to near-zero and embarked on unlimited quantitative easing to contain the economic damage of the coronavirus pandemic.”

    Wang said that the Fed’s monetary policy in response to COVID-19 would eventually tank the dollar even though the current crisis has triggered a scramble for greenbacks.

    When the Fed turns on the liquidity tap, the US dollar will, in theory, be in a long-term depreciatory trend.”

    Peter Schiff has been predicting that the dollar is going to tank for quite some time. It’s a matter of when, not if.  As the coronavirus crisis began to unfold and the Fed fired up the printing press, Peter said that with the central bank and government response to the coronavirus, hyperinflation has gone from being the worst-case scenario to the most likely scenario.

    Peter has also said he thinks people will eventually start dumping dollars.

    Nobody can hold dollars. Nobody can hold any bonds denominated in dollars. This is now like a game of musical chairs where nobody wants to get caught with dollars when the music stops playing.”

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Wang not only expressed concern about the long-term stability of the dollar; he also echoed an oft-repeated criticism of the US controlling the reserve currency. America uses the privilege as a foreign policy tool. For instance, in 2014 and 2015, the blocked several Russian banks from SWIFT as relations between the two countries deteriorated. Last fall, the US threatened to lock China out of the dollar system if it didn’t follow UN sanctions on North Korea. Wang said this needs to end.

    It is a weapon for the US, but a source of insecurity for other countries. The currency the world ultimately chooses for global trade must not be one that gives someone privilege, while exposing others to insecurity.”

    A gold standard that prevented central banks from manipulating the money supply would be ideal. Peter has said that the US went off the gold standard in 1971, but he thinks the world is going to go back on it.

    The days where the dollar is the reserve currency are numbered and we’re going back to basics. You know, everything old is new again. Gold was money in the past and it will be money again in the future.”

    Regardless of what form it takes, it seems likely that efforts to push the dollar off its perch will only increase. The powers that be in America should be concerned about their currencies future as the world reserve. And Americans should be concerned about the future purchasing power of their dollars.


    Tyler Durden

    Wed, 04/29/2020 – 19:45

Digest powered by RSS Digest

Today’s News 29th April 2020

  • Italian Car Sales Plunged 98% In April
    Italian Car Sales Plunged 98% In April

    You can’t get much more of a “worse case scenario” in auto sales than watching numbers plunge an astounding 98%. But that’s exactly what has happened with new car sales in Italy, which remains mostly on lockdown, for the first 24 days of April for this year. 

    Across all sales channels in Italy, there were only 2,182 registrations, down from 107,930 the year prior, according to Automotive News Europe

    The numbers out of Italy likely provide foreshadowing for what the rest of Europe’s numbers will look like for the month of April. In Italy, showrooms closed during the beginning of March and those who had automobiles on order already were unable to take delivery of their new vehicles. March sales had already fallen 85%.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Dealers in Italy are going to be able to start re-opening May 4, after being shut down alongside of dealers in the UK, France and Spain. Germany has already allowed some of its showrooms to re-open. 

    The body that represents foreign automakers in Italy, UNRAE, reported that it expected car registrations to fall by up to 98% for the month. The Italy foreign carmakers’ association is pleading with the government to approve measures to boost car demand as soon as activities reopen, according to Bloomberg. 

    Estimates are for Italy to finish the month with total sales of between 2,500 and 2,600 units, compared to 175,654 in 2019. The total would have been even lower had Renault not registered 317 EVs in one day for a rental car company. 

    Recall, we reported that U.S. auto sales plunged to their worst numbers in a decade for March, with April numbers expected in just days. “The whole world is turned upside down right now,” one U.S. auto market researcher said in late March. 

    “There are basically no U.S. auto sales right now,” analyst Adam Jonas had commented.


    Tyler Durden

    Wed, 04/29/2020 – 02:35

  • EU Self-Censors As China's Global Intimidation Campaign Grows
    EU Self-Censors As China’s Global Intimidation Campaign Grows

    Authored by Soeren Kern via The Gatestone Institute,

    The European Union has caved in to pressure from China and has watered down a report on Chinese efforts to deflect blame for the coronavirus pandemic. Officials in Beijing reportedly threatened to block the export of medical supplies to Europe if the report was published in its original form.

    The revelations come as Chinese diplomats around the world are waging an aggressive disinformation campaign — described as a “Wolf Warrior” style of diplomacy, named after a Chinese nationalist action film series — aimed at controlling the narrative about the origins of the coronavirus.

    Chinese envoys have been especially aggressive on Twitter, which they are using to attack, intimidate and silence Western journalists, lawmakers and think tank scholars — essentially anyone who contradicts China’s official version of events.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Over the past year, more than 60 Chinese diplomats and diplomatic missions set up Twitter or Facebook accounts, according to the Reuters news agency, even though both platforms are banned in China, and have been using them to attack Beijing’s critics around the world.

    On April 21, the Brussels-based news outlet Politico Europe reported that it had received an advance copy of an EU report about Chinese and Russian disinformation activities related to the coronavirus disease (Covid-19). The report, which the EU was planning to publish that same day, included the following paragraph:

    “China has continued to run a global disinformation campaign to deflect blame for the outbreak of the pandemic and improve its international image. Both overt and covert tactics have been observed.”

    Chinese officials quickly contacted the European Union’s representatives in Beijing to try to kill the report, according to the New York Times, which also received an original version of it.

    The EU’s External Action Service eventually published the report — Covid-19 Disinformation — on April 24 but the language on China was heavily toned-down. The New York Times explained:

    “The original report cited Beijing’s efforts to curtail mentions of the virus’s origins in China, in part by blaming the United States for spreading the disease internationally. It noted that Beijing had criticized France as slow to respond to the pandemic and had pushed false accusations that French politicians used racist slurs against the head of the World Health Organization….

    “But China moved quickly to block the document’s release, and the European Union pulled back. The report had been on the verge of publication, until senior officials ordered revisions to soften the language….

    “The sentence about China’s ‘global disinformation’ campaign was removed, as was any mention of the dispute between China and France. Other language was toned down….”

    Under pressure from Chinese officials, Esther Osorio, a communications adviser to Josep Borrell, the head of the EU diplomatic service, personally intervened to delay the release of the initial report. The New York Times wrote:

    “Ms. Osorio, the aide to Mr. Borrell, asked analysts to revise the document to focus less explicitly on China and Russia to avoid accusations of bias, according to an email and interviews. She asked analysts to differentiate between pushing disinformation and aggressively pushing a narrative, and to document each ‘as we already see heavy pushback from CN’ — an abbreviation for China.”

    The EU was reportedly hoping to get better treatment for European companies in China. On April 25, however, the South China Morning Post, which also obtained a copy of the original report, revealed that Beijing had threatened to withhold medical supplies from Europe if the section on China was not removed.

    The Indian geopolitical analyst Brahma Chellaney summed up the broader implications of the EU’s actions:

    “EU self-censors its report after pressure from China. Diluting its report, EU removed references to China’s pandemic-related ‘disinformation campaign.’ EU remains a weak link in building a concert of democracies against China’s muscular authoritarianism.”

    Meanwhile, Chinese diplomats around the world, led by Foreign Minister Wang Yi, have been lashing out at governments and individuals they feel have insulted China. Some analysts say this reflects China’s growing influence in international affairs. “China wants other countries to know who’s boss,” wrote China watcher Bethany Allen-Ebrahimian.

    Other analysts argue that China’s intransigence reflects the fragility of the Chinese Communist Party and that Chinese President Xi Jinping is fueling nationalism to consolidate his control amid growing domestic anger over his mishandling of the coronavirus crisis. “All governments worry how they’ll survive this plague, but for a one-party authoritarian government, the fears are existential,” noted Kevin Libin, columnist and managing editor of Canada’s National Post.

    In any event, Chinese pressure tactics have worked in some instances — including with the European Union and the Philippines. With others, China’s bullying has backfired spectacularly.

    On April 15, Germany’s most popular newspaper, Bildpublished an article titled, “What China Owes Us So Far,” which suggested that China should pay Germany €150 billion ($162 billion) in reparations for the coronavirus pandemic. The article included an itemized list of economic damage, including €50 billion for losses to small businesses and €24 billion for lost tourism.

    The Chinese Embassy in Berlin responded by accusing Bild of racism. In a letter, embassy spokesperson Tao Lili wrote:

    “Your report not only lacks essential facts and precise timelines, but also a minimum of journalistic due diligence and fairness. Those who do as you did with today’s newspaper article fuel nationalism, prejudice, xenophobia and animosity against China. It does not do justice to the traditional friendship between our two peoples or a serious understanding of journalism. Against this background, I ask myself, where in your editorial office does the dislike of our people and our state come from?”

    Rather than being cowed into submission, Bild’s editor-in-chief, Julian Reichelt, countered with his own letter: “You Are Endangering the Entire World.” It was published in German and English and addressed directly to President Xi Jinping. Reichelt wrote:

    “You rule by surveillance. You wouldn’t be president without surveillance. You monitor everything, every citizen, but you refuse to monitor the diseased wet markets in your country.

    “You shut down every newspaper and website that is critical of your rule, but not the stalls where bat soup is sold. You are not only monitoring your people, you are endangering them — and with them, the rest of the world.

    “Surveillance is a denial of freedom. And a nation that is not free, is not creative. A nation that is not innovative, does not invent anything. This is why you have made your country the world champion in intellectual property theft.

    “China enriches itself with the inventions of others, instead of inventing on its own. The reason China does not innovate and invent is that you don’t let the young people in your country think freely. China’s greatest export hit (that nobody wanted to have, but which has nevertheless gone around the world) is Corona….

    “You have created an inscrutable, non-transparent China. Before Corona, China was known as a surveillance state. Now, China is known as a surveillance state that infected the world with a deadly disease. That is your political legacy.

    “Your embassy tells me that I am not living up to the ‘traditional friendship of our peoples.’ I suppose you consider it a great ‘friendship’ when you now generously send masks around the world. This isn’t friendship, I would call it imperialism hidden behind a smile — a Trojan Horse.

    “You plan to strengthen China through a plague that you exported. You will not succeed. Corona will be your political end, sooner or later.”

    Other recent examples of efforts by Chinese diplomats to intimidate and silence those abroad who challenge the Chinese government include:

    Australia

    On April 23, Australia’s Prime Minister Scott Morrison called on all countries that are members of the World Health Organization (WHO) to support an independent inquiry into the coronavirus pandemic. He said that all members of the WHO should be obliged to participate in a review and added that Australia would push for the inquiry during the WHO Assembly on May 17.

    China’s foreign ministry spokesman, Geng Shuang, replied: “The so-called independent inquiry proposed by Australia is in reality political manipulation. We advise Australia to give up its ideological prejudices.”

    Brazil

    China’s Ambassador to Brazil, Yang Wanming, shared a tweet, later deleted, calling the family of President Jair Bolsonaro a “huge poison” after his son Eduardo blamed the “Chinese dictatorship” for the coronavirus pandemic. The tweet drew a rebuke from Brazilian Foreign Minister Ernesto Araújo, who said the tweet was inappropriate behavior for an ambassador.

    Canada

    On April 19, the Chinese Embassy in Ottawa denounced the Macdonald-Laurier Institute (MLI), a leading Canadian think tank, after it published an open letter accusing Chinese authorities of covering up the pandemic. The Chinese Embassy wrote:

    “Recently, the Macdonald-Laurier Institute published the so-called open letter, falsely claimed that the roots of the pandemic are in a cover-up by China, carried out malicious slander and attacks on the Communist Party of China and the Chinese government, and grossly interfered in China’s internal affairs. The Chinese side expresses its firm opposition over such actions by the MLI…. We urge the MLI to abide by the professional ethics, focus on the work a think tank is supposed to do, refrain from politicizing the research work, and give up anti-China nonsense.”

    A scholar at the MLI, Kaveh Shahrooz, tweeted:

    “The Chinese embassy in Canada has issued a statement attacking the @MLInstitute, where I serve as a Senior Fellow. We are a thorn in the side of the governments like those of China, Iran, and Russia. I am immensely proud of this fact.”

    Another MLI scholar, Shuvaloy Majumdar, tweeted:

    “I would like to congratulate the PRC Embassy-Ottawa for helping draw more scrutiny to the Communist Party’s intimidation of its own people, and its continued abuse abroad.”

    The Canadian government has remained silent on the issue. Charles Burton, a senior fellow and China expert at the MLI, said that Ottawa’s silence will only embolden Beijing to make further attempts to stifle free speech in Canada:

    “One would expect that the government of Canada would engage with the Chinese embassy about such a statement. It’s clearly an attempt to interfere with freedom of expression by a Canadian think tank and make allegations against the think tank that are clearly without basis whatsoever.”

    On April 19, Alberta Premier Jason Kenney tweeted:

    “Shocked to learn that my longtime friend Martin Lee, founder of the Hong Kong Democratic Party, was arrested today together with many of #HongKong’s most prominent citizens. Martin is the elder statesman of Hong Kong democracy. I hope for his immediate release.”

    The Chinese Consulate General in Calgary responded:

    “The Premier of Alberta commented on Twitter on the lawful arrest of an anti-China rioter by the Hong Kong police. No one stays out of the law. Ignoring the facts and openly advocating for the rioters can only undermine the rule of law, which is not in Canada’s own interests. We urge local politicians to abide by the basic norms governing international relations, respect the Hong Kong SAR law enforcement, and immediately stop interfering in China’s internal affairs.”

    Kenney replied:

    “I acknowledge that Alberta doesn’t have a foreign policy and I don’t freelance in foreign policy, but I’ll just say this — when a personal friend of mine is arrested as a political prisoner, I cannot in good conscience remain silent.”

    When China regained sovereignty over Hong Kong from the British in 1997, Beijing agreed to allow Hong Kong to enjoy its freedoms until 2047, in an arrangement known as “one country, two systems.”

    On April 14, The Globe and Mail, the most widely-read newspaper in Canada, published an opinion article titled, “The Chinese Communist Party’s Culture of Corruption and Repression has Cost Lives around the World.” The article accused the CCP of concealing, destroying, falsifying, fabricating, suppressing, misrepresenting information about the epidemic; of silencing and criminalizing dissent; and of disappearing whistleblowers, “all of which reflect the breadth of criminality and corruption in the party.” The article called on the international community to hold Chinese authorities accountable for their roles in creating “one of the greatest humanitarian crises in history.”

    The Chinese Embassy in Ottawa replied that the article was “full of hatred and prejudice” against the Communist Party of China (CPC):

    “How could anyone speak of such a thing as accountability? The ‘political virus’ of stigma is more dangerous than the disease itself. Those who try to ascribe so-called ‘criminality’ to the CPC are viewing China with ideological prejudice, and the ‘political motive’ behind that is doubtful.

    “We advise those persons to focus on their domestic epidemic prevention and control efforts. To shift blames won’t help mitigate the epidemic at home, nor will it help the international cooperation in prevention and control of the pandemic.”

    On April 1, The Globe and Mail published an opinion article, “Why Would We Trust China’s Official COVID-19 Numbers?” It asked:

    “The Chinese government’s first instinct has always been to hide the facts, especially if they reveal its own failures, so why would anyone believe the data coming out of China now on COVID-19? …. The Communist government owes its very legitimacy to persuading Chinese citizens that it does a better job than democratically elected administrations in protecting their interests. To that end, it has long inflated the country’s economic growth statistics and underreported its greenhouse-gas emissions. Why would anyone expect it to be straight about its own COVID-19 epidemic?”

    The Chinese Embassy in Ottawa replied:

    “The article views that the United States is a democratic state and China is a country led by the Communist government, leading to a ridiculous conclusion that the data of the U.S. is more transparent than that of China…. This is a naked double standard. We urge The Globe and Mail to abandon prejudice, respect facts, and stop making irresponsible remarks against China’s efforts to fight against COVID-19.”

    France

    On April 14, French Foreign Minister Jean-Yves Le Drian summoned the Chinese Ambassador to France, Lu Shaye, to express his disagreement with certain recent remarks by Chinese representatives in France as part of the coronavirus pandemic. “Some recent public statements by representatives of the Chinese Embassy in France do not conform to the quality of the bilateral relationship between our two countries,” he said.

    In a series of recent media statements, Lu accused “a certain French press” of besmirching China’s image by means of “lies” about its role in the current coronavirus pandemic. These media — which he never named but which seem, in his view, to represent the entire French press — have “mocked China” in violation of “all media ethics and the most elementary good faith” with an approach which, in Lu’s words, “borders on paranoia.”

    Speaking on the cable TV channel Mandarin TV on March 15, Lu accused the media of using “propaganda” methods to “brainwash” the public. In statements posted on the embassy website on February 14 and 29, he condemned the “irresponsible” comments and “absurdities” being said in the French media about China.

    The secretary-general of Reporters Without Borders (RSF), Christophe Deloire said:

    “This ‘lesson in journalism’ for the French press is inappropriate coming from a representative of the People’s Republic of China, a country that is ranked 177th out of 180 countries in RSF’s World Press Freedom Index and is one of the world’s biggest jailers of journalists. Beijing’s censorship of the Chinese media had a very negative impact by delaying the regime’s response at the outset of the coronavirus epidemic.”

    RSF added in a press release:

    “The ambassador’s statements reflect a policy concerted at the highest level of the Chinese government that aims to control international media coverage, as RSF demonstrated in a report entitled ‘China’s Pursuit of a New World Media Order’ in 2019.”

    Germany

    On April 12, the newspaper Welt am Sonntag reported that it had received leaked documents from the German Foreign Ministry which revealed that Chinese officials had directly contacted officials and employees at several federal ministries and asked them to “express themselves positively” about China’s management of the coronavirus crisis. Chinese officials also “engaged decision-makers from the political environment including lobbyists” to use them “for Chinese interests in Germany to promote the political agenda of the Communist Party.” The Chinese Embassy in Berlin responded by accusing Welt am Sonntag of being “keen to slander and smear” China. “All kinds of stigmatization of China should be stopped.”

    India

    The Chinese Ambassador to India, Ji Rong, has repeatedly lashed out at Indian officials and media outlets. On April 8, he tweeted:

    “So-called complaint by certain Indian organizations to UNHRC asking China compensate for losses caused by #COVID19 is ridiculous & eyeball-catching nonsense. At this difficult time, we need to work together instead of stigmatizing others & shifting blame.”

    On April 10, Ji tweeted:

    “It is regrettable some Indian media published articles referring #COVID19 again as ‘WuhanVirus’,’ChineseVirus’. It is clear consensus by international community that a virus should not be linked to any specific country, region or ethnic group. Such stigmatization is unacceptable.”

    Philippines

    On March 29, the Department of Health apologized for comments it made a day earlier that two batches of coronavirus test kits provided by China were substandard. Undersecretary for Health Maria Rosario Vergeire had said that kits made by Chinese manufacturers BGI Group and Sansure Biotech were only 40% accurate in diagnosing Covid-19 and that some of them would have to be discarded. The Chinese Embassy in Manila tweeted:

    “The Chinese Embassy firmly rejects any irresponsible remarks and any attempts to undermine our cooperation in this regard.”

    Sweden

    On January 18, Swedish Foreign Minister Ann Linde summoned the Chinese Ambassador to Sweden, Gui Congyou, after compared Swedish media coverage of China to a lightweight boxer who “provokes a feud” with a heavyweight. Congyou, who has become well-known for his outspoken attacks, told the state broadcaster SVT that the “frequent vicious attacks on the Chinese Communist Party and the Chinese government by some Swedish media” were comparable to a 48kg light featherweight boxer taking on a fighter almost twice his size:

    “The 86kg boxer, out of good will to protect the lightweight boxer, advises him to leave and mind his own business, but the latter refuses to listen, and even breaks into the home of the heavyweight boxer. What choice do you expect the heavyweight boxer to have?”

    Utgivarna, a group which represents Sweden’s private and public sector media, in a statement said:

    “Time and again, China’s ambassador Gui Congyou has tried to undermine the freedom of the press and the freedom of expression under the Swedish constitution with false statements and threats. It is unacceptable that the world’s largest dictatorship is trying to prevent free and independent journalism in a democracy like Sweden. These repeated attacks must cease immediately.”

    Venezuela

    On March 18, the Chinese Embassy in Venezuela posted an angry “declaration” consisting of 17 tweets after unidentified Venezuelan lawmakers referred to the coronavirus as the “Chinese Coronavirus” or the “Wuhan Coronavirus.” The Chinese Embassy said the lawmakers were afflicted with a “political virus” and recommended they “seek treatment.” A first step, it tweeted, would be for them to “put on a mask and shut up.”


    Tyler Durden

    Wed, 04/29/2020 – 02:00

  • US Navy Takes Delivery Of Futuristic Stealth Destroyer (7 Years Late)
    US Navy Takes Delivery Of Futuristic Stealth Destroyer (7 Years Late)

    After years of delays, the US Navy has finally taken delivery of its next-generation guided-missile stealth destroyer on Friday (April 24) for the next phase of developmental and integrated at-sea testing, reports Naval Today

    For the USS Zumwalt (DDG-1000), a 16,000-ton stealth destroyer, the construction timetable in July 2008 was:

    • October 2008: DDG-1000 starts construction at Bath Iron Works

    • September 2009: DDG-1001 starts construction at Bath Iron Works.

    • April 2012: DDG-1002 starts construction at Bath Iron Works

    • April 2013: DDG-1000 initial delivery

    And so, just seven years later… here it is…

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    The stealth destroyer has operational combat systems and will conduct sea trials, according to a statement from Naval Sea Systems Command. The ship was built at Bath Iron Works in Maine and commissioned in 2016. It transited through the Panama Canal shortly after, on its way to San Diego, when it experienced propulsion issues, had to be towed back to port.

    To bring the vessel back to combat-ready, the Navy has had to pour an additional $4 billion into upgrades. We noted in March 2019, DDG 1000 departed San Diego on the first operational cruise.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    “Delivery is an important milestone for the Navy, as DDG 1000 continues more advanced at-sea testing of the Zumwalt combat system,” said Capt. Kevin Smith, DDG 1000 program manager, Program Executive Office, Ships.

     “The combat test team, consisting of the DDG 1000 sailors, Raytheon engineers, and Navy field activity teams, have worked diligently to get USS Zumwalt ready for more complex, multi-mission at-sea testing. I am excited to begin demonstrating the performance of this incredible ship.”

    By late 2019, there was talk within the ranks of the Navy that DDG 1000 could be fitted with hypersonic missiles.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    DDG 1000 is the first of the Zumwalt-class destroyers. The USS Michael Monsoor (DDG 1001) is currently being outfitted with combat systems. The SS Lyndon B. Johnson (DDG 1002) is under construction at Bath Iron Works. 

    DDG 1000 is expected to join the US Pacific fleet, where it could be soon sent to the South China Sea in a show of force against the Chinese.  


    Tyler Durden

    Wed, 04/29/2020 – 01:00

  • China's Religious Persecution In The Age Of COVID-19
    China’s Religious Persecution In The Age Of COVID-19

    Authored by Susan Crabtree via RealClearPolitics.com,

    It’s a portrait of contrasts in the age of pandemic…

    In the United States, small but passionate protests have broken out in recent weeks as some workers and worshipers chafe at being quarantined – even as most federal and state governments caution against full and abrupt re-openings.

    Meanwhile, in the People’s Republic of China, where the coronavirus originated, citizens live in abject fear over voicing the mildest of criticism about their government’s response to the outbreak and aftermath, including government actions designed to place ethnic and religious minorities in harm’s way.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Among the abuses:

    Chinese authorities are continuing to operate some factories by forcing Uyghurs, Muslims from a Central Asian ethnic group, to fill in for workers sidelined by COVID-19. To groups monitoring religious freedom, this was merely the latest example of official persecution of the Uyghurs, predominantly Turkic-speaking Sunni Muslims who number more than 10 million and live in the northwest area of the country known as Xinjiang Uyghur Autonomous region. Uyghurs consider Beijing as a colonizing power and have pushed for a separate homeland or, at least, greater autonomy for their region. In recent years, China has tightened its grip on the region, forcing at least 1 million Uyghurs into 85 identified detention camps.

    The pandemic has also increased levels of mistreatment against other groups. African residents of Guangzhou, a manufacturing hub, have been force-tested for the virus, evicted from their homes and hotels, and corralled into quarantined areas with few resources. Images on social media have showed groups of black residents sleeping on a sidewalk, visibly shaking from the cold and wearing surgical masks to protect themselves. Several African ambassadors wrote a letter to China’s foreign minister earlier this month complaining that these people were being mistreated and falsely blamed for the spread of the virus to China.

    “The Group of African Ambassadors in Beijing immediately demands the cessation of forceful testing, quarantine and other inhuman treatments meted out to Africans,” they wrote.

    Beijing has also used the pandemic as an excuse to crack down on churches that aren’t officially sanctioned by the government. In some regions, officials have removed crosses from Christian church rooftops on the pretext that religious symbols cannot be “higher” than the national flag. In December, as China’s began dealing with the coronavirus outbreak, church leaders reported that government officials told them the crosses were “too eye-catching” and would attract groups of people to gather, undermining the strict lockdowns in place.

    Pastor Jian Zhu, who was raised in China and now serves as the director of the China Institute at Lincoln Christian University in Illinois, said persecution against unsanctioned Christian churches in China is “now the worst” he has seen since the late 1970s. The systematic harassment, according to Zhu, has included asking neighbors to spy on one another as well as pressuring schoolteachers, professors and students to sign a statement denouncing their faith.

    “They are trying to eliminate Christianity from public life,” he told The Christian Post in mid-April. “Cameras are all over to watch church and Christians go to Sunday services. Families are threatened not to go to church or they will be punished or their relatives could be in trouble.”

    Since the reports about forcing Uyghurs into factories began leaking two months ago, China’s systematic efforts to cover up the origins of the coronavirus and sow disinformation about it have sparked international outrage. But neither that indignation, nor the stepped-up persecution of religious and ethnic minorities, stopped the United Nations’ Asia-Pacific group from selecting China to represent the region on the United Nations Human Rights Council Consultative Group. The consultative body consists of five member states tasked with screening applicants to become independent U.N. human rights experts.

    China’s selection on April 1 drew immediate condemnation from U.S. human rights advocates.

    “The Chinese government is one of the worst abusers of religious freedom and other human rights,” said Gary Bauer of the U.S. Commission on International Religious Freedom, a bipartisan federal government entity that monitors international threats to religious freedom. In its 2019 annual report, USCIRF called on the Trump administration to impose targeted sanctions on Chinese officials responsible for severe religious freedom violations, especially Chen Quanguo, the current Communist Party secretary of Xinjiang region.

    Other Washington officials see the pandemic as a warning against the natural tendency by those with autocratic impulses to impose top-down, heavy-handed controls.

    Police in places as disparate as Kenya and India have beaten citizens avoiding curfew; nations such as Iran and North Korea are believed by health experts to have followed China’s example in vastly underreporting COVID-19 cases; and Philippines strongman Rodrigo Duterte has used the crisis to threaten declaring martial law.

    But the United States has not been immune from these impulses. Michigan Gov. Gretchen Whitmer was widely criticized for a sweeping stay-at-home order that precluded residents from driving from one house to another and for closing off entire sections of large stores that sell gardening supplies, include plant seeds. And when President Trump said he had “absolute power” over states to determine how and when to re-open their governments, the backslash from both conservatives and liberals was fast and furious. The president quickly backtracked and has allowed governors to make their own decisions, even as Trump has publicly second-guessed Georgia Gov. Brian Kemp’s statewide re-opening of salons, gyms, and bowling alleys.

    Secretary of State Mike Pompeo in early April warned that autocracies will use the crisis “to become more aggressive, deny people their rights,” and “lie more.” He said that “in the end, they do enormous harm to the people of their nation and put the rest of the world at risk as well.” 

    In Washington, most of the fury at China so far has focused on the government’s delay and dissembling over the source and extent of the epidemic and its unseemly sway over the World Health Organization, which initially minimized the effects the outbreak. Former U.S. Ambassador to the United Nations Nikki Haley, through her advocacy group Stand for America, last week launched a petition to Congress urging lawmakers to investigate Beijing for its role in the coronavirus crisis and pass measures to halt China’s influence in the U.S. and around the world.

    But China’s religious persecution amid the pandemic is also spurring congressional scrutiny.

    Sen. Ted Cruz, who has sought to shed a light on the China’s oppression of religious minorities and political dissidents throughout his career, said he planned to amplify the need for several bills he has written aimed at punishing China for the forced Uyghur labor, along with other measures addressing Beijing’s ongoing suppression of medical experts, journalists and political dissidents.

    “Those atrocities must be confronted, not just for their own sake but because, as we have now seen through the global spread of COVID-19, they are a direct threat to America’s national security and global public health,” Cruz spokeswoman Jessica Skaggs told RealClearPolitics.

    “Once we defeat this pandemic, Sen. Cruz will continue fighting to hold China accountable for its religious persecution of minorities and its broader repression on free expression and medical information.”

    Rep. Michael McCaul, the ranking GOP member on the House Foreign Affairs Committee, said China’s and the WHO’s handling of the coronavirus crisis enabled a regional epidemic to become a global pandemic  resulting in innumerous deaths in China and around the world. McCaul, along with 16 other House Republicans, sent a letter to the White House last week asking the president to condition future funding of the WHO on Director-General Tedros Adhanom Ghebreyesus’ resignation.

    “This malfeasance is another example of the CCP’s treatment of their own people and reminds us this is the same regime who puts millions of their own citizens in ‘concentration camps’ and uses them for forced labor,” he said.

    “The international community cannot let these appalling abuses go unpunished,” he told RCP.

    “We must work together to hold the CCP accountable for these egregious human rights violations, especially amid this public health emergency that they exacerbated.” 

    This is not solely a Republican concern. Rep. James McGovern, who chairs the bipartisan Congressional-Executive Commission on China, is calling on the international community to investigate Beijing’s efforts to repress religious and ethnic minorities in the midst of a pandemic. McGovern in March sponsored a bill that would bar the U.S. from importing any goods made in the Xinjiang factories and has urged all American companies, including Amazon, Nike, Apple and Calvin Klein, to investigate their supply chains in China and cease operation if they cannot definitively rule out the use of forced labor. Republican Sen. Marco Rubio wrote a similar Senate bill.

    “Forcing Uyghurs and others to work in factories while the risk of infection is high, tearing down Christian symbols and crosses, or condoning discrimination against African migrants is completely unacceptable an should be roundly condemned by the administration and investigated by the international community,” the Massachusetts Democrat said in a statement to RCP.

    “The virus exposed what we already knew: The Chinese government is all too willing to violate the human rights of the Chinese people, and its policies pose a real risk to the world’s health as well,” McGovern added.


    Tyler Durden

    Wed, 04/29/2020 – 00:05

  • Visualizing How COVID-19 Consumer Spending Is Impacting Industries
    Visualizing How COVID-19 Consumer Spending Is Impacting Industries

    Consumer spending is one of the most important driving forces for global economic growth.

    Beyond impacting some of the factors that determine consumer spend – such as consumer confidence, unemployment levels, or the cost of living – Visual Capitalist’s Katie Jones notes that the COVID-19 pandemic has also drastically altered how and where consumers choose to spend their hard-earned cash.

    Today’s graphic pulls data from a global survey by McKinsey & Company that analyzes how consumers are reining in their spending, causing upheaval across every industry imaginable.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    While some industries are in a better position to weather the impact of this storm, others could struggle to survive.

    The Link Between Sentiment and Intent to Spend

    As consumers grapple with uncertainty, their buying behavior becomes more erratic. What is clear however, is that they have reduced spending on all non-essential products and services.

    But as each country moves along the COVID-19 curve, we can see a glimmer of increasing optimism levels, which in turn is linked to higher spending.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    India’s consumers, for example, are displaying higher levels of optimism, with more households planning to increase spend—a trend that is also evident in China, Indonesia, and Nigeria.

    Meanwhile, American consumers are still more optimistic about the future than Europeans. 37% of Americans believe the country will recover in 2 or 3 months—albeit with optimism levels at the highest for people who earn over $100K.

    Strategic Consumer Spending

    Globally, consumers continue to spend—and in some cases, spend more compared to pre-pandemic levels—on some necessities such as groceries and household supplies.

    Due to changes in media consumption habits, consumers in almost all countries surveyed say they will increase their spend on at-home entertainment. This is especially true for Korea, a country that already boasts a massive gaming culture.

    As restrictions in China lift, many categories such as gasoline, wellness, and pet-care services appear to be bouncing back, which could be a positive sign for other countries following a similar trajectory. But while consumers amp up their spending on the things they need, they also anticipate spending less in other categories.

    The Industries in the Red

    Categories showing an alarming decline include restaurants and out-of-home entertainment.

    However, there are two particularly hard-hit industries worth noting that are showing declines across every category and country:

    Travel and Transport

    The inevitable decline in the travel and transportation industry is a reflection of mass social isolation levels and tightening travel restrictions.

    In fact, the U.S. travel industry can expect to see an average decline in revenue of 81% for April and May. Throughout 2020, losses will equate to roughly $519 billion—translating to a broader $1.2 trillion contraction in total economic impact.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    According to the World Travel and Tourism Council, a staggering 50 million jobs are at risk in the industry, with 30 million of those jobs belonging to employees in Asia.

    Considering the travel and tourism industry accounts for 10.4% of global GDP, a slow recovery could have serious ramifications.

    Apparel

    Apparel is experiencing a similarly worrying slowdown, with consumption 40-50% lower in China compared to pre-pandemic levels. Both online and offline sales for businesses the world over are also taking a major hit.

    As consumers hold back on their spending, clothing brands of all shapes and sizes are forced to scale back production, and reimagine how they position themselves.

    “It’s an unprecedented interruption of an industry that has relied on speeding from one season’s sales to the next. And it is bringing with it a new sense of connectedness, responsibility and empathy.”

    – Tamsin Blanchard, The Guardian

    Towards an Uncertain Future

    Clearly the force majeure that is COVID-19 has not impacted every industry equally.

    For some, rebuilding their customer experience by appealing to changing values could result in a profitable, and perhaps much-needed revival. For other companies, there is no other choice but to play the waiting game.

    Regardless, every industry faces one universal truth: life after the pandemic will look significantly different.


    Tyler Durden

    Tue, 04/28/2020 – 23:45

  • If This Is What "The New Normal" Is Going To Look Like, It's Going To Be Horrible
    If This Is What “The New Normal” Is Going To Look Like, It’s Going To Be Horrible

    Authored by Michael Snyder via TheMostImportantNews.com,

    Are we going to allow fear of COVID-19 to fundamentally reshape social behavior for many years to come? 

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    It is hard to imagine a world where we are all afraid to shake hands with one another and where getting close enough to someone to actually have a conversation is deemed a “major risk”. 

    Yes, this virus spreads incredibly easily, but eventually this pandemic will fade and hopefully a lot of the measures that were instituted to help prevent the spread of COVID-19 will fade away too.  For example, I really don’t want Walmart telling me which direction I have to go down the aisle.  If I am in serious shopping mode, I want to be able to go up and down a particular aisle as much as I please. 

    If I get kicked out of a store someday for “going against the arrows” I am going to be really upset. 

    And I really, really don’t want to have my temperature checked when I go to eat at a restaurant, but that is apparently starting to happen all over the nation

    With staff wearing masks, checking customers’ temperatures and using disposable paper place mats, some of the nation’s restaurants reopened for dine-in service Monday as states loosened more coronavirus restrictions. But many eateries remained closed amid safety concerns and community backlash.

    Checking temperatures is not going to stop the spread of this virus, because people can spread it long before they are showing any symptoms at all.

    So that needs to stop right now.  If you try to check my temperature when I enter your establishment, I will promptly turn around and go get a burger somewhere else.

    And it isn’t just businesses that are giving in to the hysteria.

    For example, a North Carolina woman named Erin Strine burst into tears when she realized that people would be sitting next to her on a flight that she was taking…

    Strine said she was alarmed by how little social distancing was taking place on the packed flight. She expressed concern for her health when she realized she was placed in a middle seat.

    ‘I really felt like my life and the life of everyone around me was at risk,’ she said. ‘I just sat there silently crying into my mask because I was really overwhelmed by how unsafe I felt.’

    I have a really easy solution for her.

    If you feel your life is at risk, don’t get on the plane.

    This isn’t rocket science.

    Her story caused me to recall one particular horrid flight that I once had to endure.  Like her, I was in the middle seat, and two extremely overweight individuals were stationed on either side of me.  And just when I thought it couldn’t get any worse, the person directly in front of me decided to recline their seat all the way.

    But instead of whining like a baby, I took my ordeal like a man.

    Look, I am not trying to minimize the threat of COVID-19 one bit.

    In fact, I was warning about the danger that this virus posed all the way back when the very first reports were coming out of China.  Anyone that follows my work on a regular basis can easily verify this.

    At this point, there are more than a million confirmed cases in the United States and more than 56,000 people have died.

    That is serious.

    And things have been particularly nightmarish in New York

    Nearly half of all New Yorkers say they know somebody who has died of coronavirus, a new poll finds, shedding a stunning light on just how deeply the pandemic has hit the Big Apple.

    The state-wide survey, carried out by Siena College, discovered that 46 percent of New York City residents personally knew someone killed by COVID-19, as do 36 percent of respondents living in the suburbs, and 13 percent of those living upstate.

    Other areas of the country have been hit very hard as well.  In fact, the Boston Globe published 21 pages of obituaries on Sunday

    As the total confirmed COVID-19 cases approach one million this week, including over 55,000 deaths — the vast majority of these concentrated in American east coast cities, especially in the tri-state area — newspaper obituaries in the same cities are expanding to unheard of numbers of pages.

    As a stunning case in point, The Boston Globe on Sunday included an unprecedented 21 total pages of death notices due to the coronavirus pandemic.

    The newspaper said its archives showed on the same day last year, the obit section was at its usual seven pages.

    This is the biggest public health crisis that our generation has experienced so far, and anyone that is not taking it seriously is just being stupid.

    But it isn’t the end of the world.  Much, much worse things are coming, and it is important to understand that.

    If we are not able to handle this pandemic, how are we possibly going to deal with all of the stuff that we are going to have to face in the future?

    On Monday, I was absolutely horrified to learn that a top emergency room doctor in New York City had committed suicide

    The head of the emergency department at a Manhattan hospital committed suicide after spending days on the front lines of the coronavirus battle, her family said Monday.

    “She tried to do her job, and it killed her,’’ Dr. Philip Breen told the New York Times of his physician daughter, Dr. Lorna Breen, who had been medical director of the NewYork-Presbyterian Allen Hospital amid the pandemic.

    I can’t even imagine the horrors that she witnessed on a daily basis, but suicide is never, ever, ever the answer to anything.

    And nothing is ever so bad that it should make you want to kill yourself.

    No matter how difficult it was to deal with dying patients, her story never should have ended this way

    In the days leading up to her death, the 48-year-old reportedly recounted to family members a series of traumatic scenes she’d witnessed working in the Manhattan hospital, including an onslaught of patients dying in front of her before they could even be removed from ambulances.

    Breen had recently contracted COVID-19 but had returned to work at Allen after a week-and-a-half of rest. After the hospital sent her home, she re-located to Charlottesville to recuperate under the instructions of her father, Dr. Philip C. Breen.

    There is always hope.  And in her case, she could have certainly walked away from being a doctor and done something else.

    Life is such a precious gift, and to see it thrown away so needlessly is absolutely heartbreaking.

    Yes, this pandemic is going to be with us for a while.

    And yes, a lot more Americans are going to get sick and a lot more Americans are going to die.

    But at this point nothing that we can do will be able to prevent the virus from spreading, and an increasing number of Americans are simply not going to follow restrictions anyway

    Data shows that Americans are suffering from ‘quarantine fatigue’ and are venturing out of the house more often as the coronavirus pandemic continues – as researchers say that 44 states are actually going backwards when it comes to social distancing.

    A COVID‑19 mobility trends tool created by Apple shows that an increasing number of people in various major cities are now leaving the house more compared to the beginning of the month.

    If you are elderly, have a compromised immune system or are in some other high risk group, you will need to quarantine yourself for the foreseeable future.  But the rest of us are going to have to try to start resuming normal activities.

    Unfortunately, the “new normal” is likely to look a whole lot different from the “old normal”, and many people are not going to like that at all.


    Tyler Durden

    Tue, 04/28/2020 – 23:25

  • "Corona-Killing" UV Bots Could Be Deployed At Military Bases
    “Corona-Killing” UV Bots Could Be Deployed At Military Bases

    Last week President Trump suggested that injecting ultraviolet light into the body could be one method in killing COVID-19. Then, a biotech company, with unproven science, touted it could send a catheter into the throat of a patient, emitting UV rays into the body to defeat the virus.

    The push for UV products in today’s public health crisis is expected to increase, thanks to President Trump’s comments. A search trend for “does UV light kill coronavirus” has recently soared: 

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Now a robotics company is retrofitting war robots with a UV disinfection system to kill the virus in enclosed spaces. 

    Ralph Petroff, president of the North America branch of Marathon Targets, spoke with Military.com about the four-wheeled autonomous robots that could soon be deployed at military bases for UV disinfecting operations.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    “If you need them for target practice, you use them for target practice; if you need them for corona-killing, you use them for corona-killing,” Petroff said.

    He said his company has been acquiring UV disinfecting panels. Retrofitting each robot takes a matter of hours, and he said military installations had expressed interest. 

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Marathon’s specifications of the robot show that it emits 110 watts via a vertical UV mount light fixture. The light takes about one minute to disinfect a surface one foot away and a little over six minutes to sterilize from five feet away.

    The science behind UV lights killing COVID-19 is still questionable. Petroff said he has plans to double the wattage of the light fixture to ensure effectiveness.

    The market for UV disinfection has been small over the years, but since President Trump touted UVs last week, the market could rapidly grow.

    “The UV part is the easy part,” he said. “Trying to get an autonomous robot to walk around without bumping into things and knowing where it is at all times is the hard part. We mastered that a long time ago.”

    We mentioned in March that “COVID-19 is very vulnerable to UV light and heat.” If UV light is proven effective against the virus, we suspect there will be a lot more interest in UV products. 


    Tyler Durden

    Tue, 04/28/2020 – 23:05

  • Triumph Of The Woke Oligarchs
    Triumph Of The Woke Oligarchs

    Authored by Joel Kotkin via RealClearEnergy.org,

    Like the rest of the country, although far less than New York, California is suffering through the Covid-19 crisis. But in California, the pandemic seems likely to give the state’s political and corporate elites a new license to increase their dominion while continuing to keep the middle and working classes down.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Perhaps nothing spells the triumph of California’s progressive oligarchy more than Governor Gavin Newsom’s decision to off-load the state’s recovery strategy to a task force co-chaired by hedge-fund billionaire Tom Steyer. A recently failed presidential candidate, Steyer stands as a progressive funder. He is as zealous as he is rich. Steyer sometimes even found the policies adopted by climate-obsessed former governor Jerry Brown not extreme enough for his tastes.

    Some conservatives wistfully hope that the pandemic will push the climate crusaders to the side. In California, at least, the corporate aristocrats, the governmental apparat, and the progressive nonprofits have  the momentum to impose their ultra-green vision on the state’s residents. Steyer may have made much of his fortune on fossil fuels, including coal, but now, approvingly described as “a reverent Christian,” the Bay Area mogul seems to be eager to repent, both through his political largesse and as operator of a fulsomely organic ranch down the coast from his San Francisco manse.

    What Kind of Recovery Will the Oligarchy Allow?

    Steyer’s failed, self-funded presidential run was full of extreme notions, such as imposing a “state of emergency” to address climate issues, essentially shutting down fossil fuels; and, as a kind of bonus for those who still can find work, promoting a $22 an hour minimum wage while offering alms for the soon-to-be-eliminated legions of miners and energy workers.

    If this is what he wants for the recovery, Steyer will simply accelerate the state’s already poor performance in creating higher-wage middle- and working-class jobs outside those created or subsidized by government. Over the past decade, according to Chapman University’s Marshall Toplansky, the vast majority of jobs being produced in California pay under the median wage, and 40% pay under $40,000 a year. Since 2008, the state has created five times as many low-wage jobs as high-wage jobs.

    California’s climate regulatory regime, notes relocation expert Joe Vranich, has been particularly hard on manufacturing. Over the past decade, according to BLS data, California has fallen into the bottom half of states in manufacturing-sector employment growth, ranking 44th last year; its industrial new job creation has been negative, compared with gains from competitors such as Nevada, Kentucky, Michigan, and Florida. Even without adjusting for costs, no California metro ranks in the US top ten in terms of well-paying blue-collar jobs; but four metro areas—Ventura, Los Angeles, San Jose, and San Diego—sit among the bottom ten.

    Perhaps nowhere will the pain be worse than in Bakersfield, capital of California’s once-vibrant oil industry. That industry is now slated for extinction by policymakers, even as the state has emerged as the largest US importer of energy and oil, much of it from Saudi Arabia. This ultimate effort at “virtue signaling” will cost California as many as 300,000 generally high-paying jobs, roughly half held by minorities, and will particularly devastate the San Joaquin Valley, where 40,000 jobs depend on the industry.

    “Imagine that the state dictated that the entertainment industry be eliminated from Los Angeles, or the tech industry be eliminated from Silicon Valley. That is what removing the oil and agriculture industries from Bakersfield is like. It is an existential threat to the entire area,” says Rob Ball of the Kern County Council of Governments.

    Poverty and Denial

    In California today, anyone who dissents—even a scientist or respected economist—with the green party line is dismissed as a heretic who is not worth listening to. This treatment is facilitated by a media that tends to embrace the most apocalyptic projections of, for example, coastal erosion, with little attempt to ascertain the facts or look at alternative analyses.

    The predictably pious Steyer and his fellow commissioners will no doubt claim devotion to the interests of average citizen. But, as a new lawsuit filed by some 300 civil rights leaders asserts, the policies being backed by Steyer and his fellow commissioners have already had produced disastrous results for millions of Californians. The real collective badge of shame is not California’s GHG emissions but the prevalence of poverty amid enormous affluence.

    Critically, economic growth, at least outside asset- and iPhone-price inflation, is itself considered a threat to the planet within the environmental community, which largely hails the Covid lockdowns as a “fire drill” for future actions to promote “de-growth.” The open hope, as a Psychology Today writer puts it, would be to tame “the human beast” by imposing low-consumption lifestyles on hoi polloi, including in developing countries. Such policies might not affect the prospects for social media, search, or import-dependent firms like Apple, but they have already been beastly for millions of Californians.

    Even before the lockdowns, which could last until summer, California’s cost-adjusted poverty level was among the highest of any state and remained higher in 2019 than in 2007. Nearly one in five Californians—many who are working—lives in poverty (using a cost-of-living adjusted poverty rate), the highest rate of any state; the Public Policy Institute of California estimates that another 20% live in near-poverty—roughly 15 million people in total.

    The lack of upwardly mobile jobs has created poverty rates for California’s Latinos and African Americans, most of them working, and has made them poorer than their counterparts elsewhere, including in Texas, California’s primary competitor for talent, jobs and company locations and a state with a similarly diverse population. More than half of all California Latino households, now a plurality in the state, can barely pay their bills, according to a United Way study. “For Latinos,” notes longtime political consultant Mike Madrid, “the California Dream is becoming an unattainable fantasy.”

    The loss of jobs, particularly in hospitality and retail, from the coronavirus crisis could further exacerbate this situation further. The most extreme and, most obvious expression of pervasive inequality and economic dysfunction lies is evident on our streets. Indeed, even as homelessness has been reduced in much of the country, it has continued to swell in California. Roughly half the nation’s homeless population lives in the Golden State, many concentrated in disease- and crime-ridden tent cities in either its largest urban region, greater Los Angeles, (its largest urban region) or in iconic San Francisco.

    And for Our Next Act: Making the State More Vulnerable to the Next Pandemic

    When Steyer and other members of the task force—one can’t help but compare them to the crime commission run in New York City by Charles “Lucky” Luciano—decide to open the economy, they will no doubt claim, as with their climate pieties, that they are acting purely on the basis of “science”—as long as it agrees with their conclusions.

    Logic is not a strong point here, since the green lobbies and their developer allies keep pushing density and getting people out of the relative safety of their cars and into mass transit, which, along with entrenched poverty, has done much to deepen the crisis in New York, as the Manhattan Institute’s Howard Husock observes.

    As of April 26, Los Angeles County, with almost 2 million more residents than New York’s five boroughs, had suffered 913 Covid deaths, compared to 12,067 in New York City. The Big Apple accounts for over two-fifths of all US transit ridership, and its subways have repeatedly been singled out, including in a recent MIT report, as incubators of the pandemic.

    The key here may be what demographer Wendell Cox has described as “exposure density.” Compared with Angelenos, Cox suggests, New Yorkers tend to work in large, crowded workplaces and are far more mass-transit-dependent. On an average workday, more than 5 million people jostle onto the city’s subway trains – nearly 40 times as many as ride LA’s subway lines and 15 times as many when the lower-capacity light rail lines are added in. The rates of infection and death are far lower in the surrounding areas – even in more dispersed, car-dependent Orange, Riverside, and San Bernardino Counties.

    Even San Francisco, the nation’s second-densest municipality, with more than 500,000 residents, has been far more successful in controlling the virus’s spread. The city is somewhat less car-centric than greater Los Angeles; and the Bay Area transit commuting rate is about 60 percent lower than that of New York (combined statistical areas, or CSA). San Francisco has a vehicle ownership rate at least 85% higher than in the four most dense New York boroughs (Manhattan, Brooklyn, the Bronx, and Queens) and is a much smaller city; San Franciscans are far more able to cab, Uber, or drive their own vehicles, avoiding crowded public transit.

    Clearly, some ways to reduce exposure, as well as GHG emissions, would embrace telecommuting, which had been expanding and seems certain to grow in the future. But California, unlike other states, has no interest in adopting telecommuting as a key strategy; instead, it seems eager to embrace the viral formula of New York, which is driving a new exodus from the country’s premier urban center.

    They continue to push their transit and density strategy despite concerns about social distancing and a profound resistance from hoi polloi. As in many areas, the greens have no real interest in actual data: despite state climate policies designed to push people onto buses and trains, transit ridership has lagged—in Los Angeles, it is lower than in 1985—and virtually all population growth has taken place on the periphery of large metropolitan agglomerations.

    California’s problems won’t end with this pandemic.

    Under the leadership of politicians like Newsom and Steyer, however promising the future is for the tech oligarchs and green energy speculators, the Golden State seems determined to offer ever less opportunity for the state’s already struggling middle- and working-class families—except, perhaps, to get sicker when the next pandemic comes along.


    Tyler Durden

    Tue, 04/28/2020 – 22:45

  • Study Finds 'Historic' Drop In Math, Reading Scores Since Adoption Of Common Core
    Study Finds ‘Historic’ Drop In Math, Reading Scores Since Adoption Of Common Core

    Reading and math scores in the US have suffered ‘historic’ declines since most states implemented the Common Core curriculum standard six years ago, according to a new study from the Pioneer Institute.

    While Common Core was promoted as improving the international competitiveness of U.S. students in math, our international standing has remained low while the skills of average and lower performing American students have dropped in both math and reading. –Pioneer Institute

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    The study notes that in the years leading up to common core, fourth and eight-grade reading and math scores on the National Assessment of Educational Progress (NAEP) were rising gradually (2003-2013). After Common Core was implemented, scores for both grades have fallen – with eighth grade falling nearly as fast as it had been rising.

    The declines were most severe among the lowest-achieving students, which the Pioneer Institute suggests increases inequality.

    Scores for students at the 90th percentile have mostly continued their pre-Common Core trend of gradual improvement. But the farther behind students were, the more substantial the declines, with the biggest drops occurring for those at the 25th and 10th percentiles. Pioneer Institute

    So, Common Core requires more diligence and effort?

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    The sustained decline we’re now seeing, especially among our most vulnerable students, simply cannot be allowed to continue,” said Theodor Rebarber, author of “The Common Core Debacle.”

    According to the Pioneer Institute, Common Core is the product of ‘misguided progressive pedagogies and biases of the education establishment that developed it.’

    “Several of us allied with Pioneer Institute have been pointing out, ever since it was introduced, the deeply flawed educational assumptions that permeate the Common Core and the many ways in which it is at odds with curriculum standards in top-achieving countries,” said the institute in a statement.

    According to the report lower scores as a result of Common Core were predicted a decade ago.

    “Nearly a decade after states adopted Common Core, the empirical evidence makes it clear that these national standards have yielded underwhelming results for students,” said Pioneer Executive Director Jim Stergios. “The proponents of this expensive, legally questionable policy initiative have much to answer for”

    “It’s time for federal law to change to allow states as well as local school districts to try a broader range of approaches to reform,” Rebarber added. “With a more bottom-up approach, more school systems will have the opportunity to choose curricula consistent with our international competitors and many decades of research on effective classroom teaching”


    Tyler Durden

    Tue, 04/28/2020 – 22:25

  • Good News America – Old (Spending) Habits Die Hard
    Good News America – Old (Spending) Habits Die Hard

    Via DataTrekResearch.com,

    “Everything’s going to be different” is a pretty popular phrase these days. Implicit in that idea, at least in part, is the notion that our day-to-day habits are changing as we work from home, shop more online, Zoom call with colleagues and friends, and order delivery rather than going to restaurants. New normals with new habits have replaced our old routines.

    But exactly how long does it actually take for freshly acquired behaviors to really settle in? With capital markets volatility on the wane and a healthy rally today we will spare a few moments to consider the science behind habitualization.

    Our starting point: a plastic surgeon named Maxwell Maltz who trained in post-World War I Europe and had a successful practice in 1950s New York. In 1960 he published a book called “Psycho-Cybernetics: A New Way of Getting More Out of Life”. In that work he stated that, by his reckoning, it took about 21 days for most patients to get used to their new faces after surgery. And because the book was a best seller and inspired the likes of Tony Robbins and others, the idea that “21 days makes a new habit” is a popular one to this day.

    Since most Americans/Europeans have been in some form of lockdown for 3-5 weeks (we’re on Week 6 here in NYC), the 21-day rule says we should be at least somewhat habitualized to a whole range of new behaviors. Yes, once things loosen up we’ll reassemble whatever parts of our old life that can be safely recovered. But we’ll have gotten used to many new activities as well.

    Now, if you’re skeptical of the “21 days to a better life” rule, you actually have some good science on your side. The most widely cited academic paper on the topic (+1,200 citations) is titled “How are habits formed: modelling habit formation in the real world” (Lally, Jaarsveld, Potts and Wardle, 2009). Here’s the structure of the research and what it found:

    • 96 students at University College London agreed to take part in a study which asked them to pick a new healthy habit to incorporate into their daily lives. Examples: eating a piece of fruit with lunch or exercising daily.
    • Subjects kept a log for 84 days, measuring whether they had performed the new habit the prior day and how automatic it was to do so.
    • Finding #1: progress towards making a new behavior a habit is not linear. At first, you really have to force yourself to do it. It is far from natural and requires real discipline to get past the initial inertia.
    • Finding #2: it takes and average of 66 days to make a new habit essentially “automatic” and among the subjects of the study the range was anywhere from 18 to +84 days.

    The bottom line is that new habits take more like 66 days rather than 21, which is basically the difference between consumer behaviors changing dramatically and durably post-COVID versus only when required for safety reasons. Expanding on this point:

    • Emotion and fear can certainly alter behavior faster and more permanently. In New York City, I have personally witnessed loud arguments among my neighbors over mask wearing and social distancing. That’s because people have a wide array of risk tolerances and those dictate the speed/depth of new habit acquisition.
    • As US states and countries around the world reopen, we may not see dramatically new consumer behaviors versus pre-COVID life. The study we cited above showed how long it takes to develop just ONE new habit; not a whole slew of them.
    • The intersection of these 2 ideas: as long as businesses can assuage consumer fear with sensible precautions, they should be able to rely on the fact that consumers have not actually formed many new habits.

    Final thought: all this is comforting but we’d be remiss if we did not consider the current economic reality of 15-20% unemployment. There will be many people who want to return to their January 2020 habits but are unable to do so. The good news is that consumers with discretionary spending power should return to their old habits as much as they can. As they do, the US economy should be able to find its footing and rehire many of those recently furloughed, laid off or separated.

    In short, it is a very good thing indeed that old habits die hard and new ones are so difficult to develop.


    Tyler Durden

    Tue, 04/28/2020 – 22:05

  • Meet 'Salus' – The Pentagon's New COVID-Hotspot, Panic-Buying Predicting AI
    Meet ‘Salus’ – The Pentagon’s New COVID-Hotspot, Panic-Buying Predicting AI

    A new predictive technology developed by the Pentagon can anticipate product shortages could help military personnel move supplies to retailers or hospitals with geographical precision before a shortage develops during a public health crisis. 

    The Joint Artificial Intelligence Center (JAIC) developed the new prototype artificial intelligence tool that predicts and addresses shortages of food, water, medicine, and other essential goods in a geographical region during crisis times. “You have to be looking a little in the future,” said Nand Mulchandani, chief technical officer at the JAIC, who recently spoke with Defense One

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Called Salus, the new tool combines data from the Census Bureau, Medicare, hospitals, and can forecast community spreading of a virus in a geographical region, as well as pulling data from retailers and warehouses of product inventories, and develop a predictive model of where shortages could potentially be seen, right down to specific zip codes or even stores. 

    The military is working toward a “common view and a predictive capability to truly understand where the next problem sets are going to be and bringing to bear all of the logistical capability,” said Mulchandani, who spoke with Roll Call in early April. 

    The new tool has already been field test with communication systems of Northern Command and National Guard, which are both supporting FEMA’s efforts in combating the coronavirus spread. 

    Mulchandani told Defense One that the AI tool is flexible in determining different types of problems that could occur by altering the data that is piped in. 

    He said Salus was first tested by determining and developing a model of where shortages of ventilators, masks, and other medical supplies could be seen. 

    “The next question really was resource allocation like food,” he said

    It’s a given that JAIC is working on a predictive model to determine where food shortages could develop because our reporting over the last month suggests shortages could start in May.

    The tool gives the Pentagon and the government the ease of mind that during a public health emergency, supply disruptions could be addressed quickly and even preemptively. All in the effort to contain or completely mitigate the consequences of what disruptions can trigger, such as social unrest

    Is this the rise of Skynet? 


    Tyler Durden

    Tue, 04/28/2020 – 21:45

  • Watch: Pentagon Releases US Navy Footage Of UFOs, Confirms The Videos Are "Real"
    Watch: Pentagon Releases US Navy Footage Of UFOs, Confirms The Videos Are “Real”

    Via SaraACarter.com,

    The Department of Defense released Monday three unclassified videos showing the U.S. Navy’s encounters with “unidentified aerial phenomena” in an attempt to “clear up any misconceptions” regarding whether the videos – which have been circulating for years – are real. 

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    As AP reports, the three videos, the first of which was leaked in 2007 and discovered by the U.S. Navy in 2009, show small, flying objects.

    Two of the videos were recorded in January 2015, according to the Department of Defense. The other was taken in November 2004.

    In a statement, the Defense Department said the Navy “previously acknowledged” the videos were Navy videos.

    The U.S. Navy previously acknowledged that these videos circulating in the public domain were indeed Navy videos. After a thorough review, the department has determined that the authorized release of these unclassified videos does not reveal any sensitive capabilities or systems, and does not impinge on any subsequent investigations of military air space incursions by unidentified aerial phenomena,” DOD said in a statement.

    In one of the videos, a person exclaims, “What the (expletive) is that?!”

    “The aerial phenomena observed in the videos remain characterized as ‘unidentified,'” the DOD said in Monday’s statement.


    Tyler Durden

    Tue, 04/28/2020 – 21:25

  • Mnuchin Says Dead People Aren't Eligible For Stimulus Checks
    Mnuchin Says Dead People Aren’t Eligible For Stimulus Checks

    Two weeks ago we reported that in the rush to flood the population with plastic trinkets (i.e., $1,200 checks) just so the natives don’t get restless and realize that while they are getting scraps corporations, hedge funds, banks and PE firms are again getting billions, the Treasury has mistakenly mailed checks to deceased people.

    As Republican Congressman from Kentucky Thomas Massie — who one recalls was a ‘lone voice in the wilderness’ seeking to torpedo the multi-trillion bailout bill as it added to the national debt and increased Federal Reserve secrecy and power, among other things — ranted on Twitter two weeks ago just as some 80 million Americans received their direct deposits: “Ok this is insane, but just the tip of the iceberg.”

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    It now appears the Treasury Secretary agrees: on Wednesday Steven Mnuchin confirmed – just in case there is any confusion – that dead people aren’t eligible for the $1,200 stimulus payments some of them have been getting, and that their relatives and estates should pay the money back to the government.

    “You’re not supposed to keep that payment,” Mnuchin told the WSJ in an interview. “We’re checking the databases, but there could be a scenario where we missed something, and yes, the heirs should be returning that money.”

    Yes, you certainly missed something: since the payment is based on those past tax returns, some people who died in 2018 or 2019 have received money, either by direct deposit or by mail (their survivors haven’t been sure about what to do with it). The CDC estimated that just over 2.8 million Americans died in 2017 (the last year data is currently available) – which suggests the possibility that all totaled almost $3.4 billion in stimulus money could have gone to dead people (assuming each got a check for $1,200 and that their family estates filed taxes).

    Technically, the payment is a new tax credit for tax year 2020 of $1,200 per adult and $500 per child, and the payments now are based on 2018 or 2019 tax filings. That said, it isn’t clear how many payments the Treasury Department has sent to dead people or what efforts the IRS will take to claw back any payments it deems erroneous.

    The economic-relief law passed by Congress – the first of many as the US transitions to a Universal Basic Income society, i.e., free money for everyone – created a $292 billion program of payments to Americans to cushion the economic blow from the coronavirus outbreak. Already, the government has made more than 89 million payments totaling over $160 billion, with another wave hitting bank accounts and mailboxes this week. Tax experts have been puzzling over the payments to dead people since they started appearing in bank accounts earlier this month.

    “My [dead] husband was a wonderful money manager, and I think he would be happy to know he was still getting a stimulus payment,” said Heather Frazier of Wilmington, N.C., who received a $1,200 direct-deposit payment for her husband, Rob, who died in June 2018. “If they want the money back or whatever, I’ll pay it back.”

    As the Journal explains, other parts of the law contemplate a situation in which someone gets a payment now that’s larger than what they would ultimately be able to claim on their 2020 tax return. That can happen if the person’s income goes up into the range where the benefit is reduced. In those cases, the government won’t reclaim any of the money. But the dead are different because they would have been ineligible for any money to start with.

    Mnuchin didn’t differentiate between people who died in 2018 and 2019 and those who passed away or will die in 2020. People who die this year still may have a tax-filing obligation for 2020, so a case could be made that they are eligible even if those who died before this year weren’t. One hopes that doesn’t also mean that one has to file their taxes even if one is dead.

    The IRS has yet to offer written guidance to taxpayers on this issue. In practice it may prove difficult for the government to get the money back. It may be easier for some paper checks; the envelope for some payments includes a box to check and return if the recipient is deceased.

    On April president Trump said that the U.S. would get the money back: “Everything we’re going to get back. But it’s a tiny amount.”


    Tyler Durden

    Tue, 04/28/2020 – 21:05

  • Trump Invokes Defense Production Act: Who Will Be Forced To Work At Meat Plants?
    Trump Invokes Defense Production Act: Who Will Be Forced To Work At Meat Plants?

    Submitted by Daisy Luther of The Organic Prepper

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Over the past few weeks, nearly a dozen large meat processing plants have closed their doors due to widespread coronavirus among employees. Thousands of workers have become infected and at the time of publication, at least 20 have died. As a result, President Trump has invoked the Defense Production Act and just signed an executive order keeping meat processing plants open during the coronavirus outbreak.

    What is the Defense Production Act?

    The act, which was officially passed in the 1950s, give the government power over private industries.

    The Act gives the federal government broad authority to direct private companies to meet the needs of the national defense.

    Over the decades, the law’s powers have been understood to encompass not only times of war but also domestic emergency preparedness and recovery from terrorist attacks and natural disasters.

    The act authorizes the president to require companies to prioritize government contracts and orders seen as necessary for the national defense, with the goal of ensuring that the private sector is producing enough goods needed to meet a war effort or other national emergency.

    It also authorizes the president to use loans, direct purchases and other incentives to boost the production of critical goods and essential materials.

    Other provisions authorize the federal government to establish voluntary agreements with private industry and to block foreign mergers and acquisitions seen as harmful to national security. (source)

    Reports say that President Trump, who refers to himself as a wartime president, is invoking the act over deep concerns about our supply chain.

    What does this mean?

    According to Bloomberg, the President will order the facilities will remain open due to a quickly evolving breakdown of our food supply chain.

    President Donald Trump plans to order meat-processing plants to remain open as the nation confronts growing food-supply disruptions from the coronavirus outbreak, a person familiar with the matter said.

    Trump plans to use the Defense Production Act to order the companies to stay open as critical infrastructure, and the government will provide additional protective gear for employees as well as guidance, according to the person. (source)

    This is the spirit of how the Act was designed to be used. President Truman signed it into law over concerns about supplies and equipment during the Korean war and it has subsequently been used during disasters like hurricanes and other wars. Presidents Clinton and Bush both used it to supply California utilities during an energy crisis there. It was also used in early April to compel 3M to make N95 respirators.  So its use is not unprecedented.

    Unions are not pleased about this order.

    Trump’s order sets the stage for a showdown between industry giants and labor unions.

    Trump signaled the executive action at the White House on Tuesday, saying he planned to sign an order aimed at Tyson Foods Inc.’s liability, which had become “a road block” for the company. He didn’t elaborate.

    The order, though, will not be limited to Tyson, the person said. It will affect many processing plants supplying beef, chicken, eggs and pork…

    …The White House decided to make the move amid estimates that as much as 80% of U.S. meat production capacity could shut down. (source)

    Union representatives are concerned about the lack “meaningful safety requirements” for workers who will be compelled to return to plants that have been shut down due to the spread of COVID-19.

    “We only wish that this administration cared as much about the lives of working people as it does about meat, pork and poultry products,” said Stuart Appelbaum, President of the Retail, Wholesale and Department Store Union. (source)

    The White House source said that safety measures were being considered.

    The White House has been discussing the order with meatpacking executives to determine what they need to operate safely and stay open, in order to prevent shortages, the person said.

    White House General Counsel Pat Cipollone worked with private companies to design a federal mandate to keep the plants open and to provide them additional virus testing capacity as well as protective gear. (source)

    Who will be manning the factories?

    So, the question is, will workers return voluntarily to a job that Union representatives tell them is unsafe? Will these workers be mandated to return under the Defense Production Act even though many have become ill working during the pandemic?

    The United Food and Commercial Workers International Union, which represents 1.3 million food and retail workers, said Tuesday that 20 U.S. food-processing and meatpacking union workers in the U.S. have died and that an estimated 6,500 are sick or have been exposed to the virus while working near someone who tested positive.

    COVID-19, the disease caused by the virus, has infected hundreds of workers at meat-processing plants and forced some of the largest to close and others to slow production. While the output at beef and poultry plants has diminished, pork plants in the Midwest have been hit especially hard. The viral outbreaks have persisted despite efforts by the meat companies to keep workers at home with pay if they become sick. (source)

    Obviously, people have to be present to keep the plants running. What happens if current employees and union members refuse to return to the plants? Will people who have been cleared as immune by the much-touted but elusive antibody tests be pressed to work there?

    It’s clear we’re currently living through a time during which unusual things are happening and our constitutional rights no longer seem as solid as they once did. So, if the plants are mandated to be open, this leaves some pretty big questions.

    Will people return to work voluntarily? Or will we see civilians facing forced labor right here on American soil?


    Tyler Durden

    Tue, 04/28/2020 – 20:45

  • 'Infodemic': Seoul Takes Aim At CNN "Fake News" Report About Kim Jong Un's Failed Heart Surgery 
    ‘Infodemic’: Seoul Takes Aim At CNN “Fake News” Report About Kim Jong Un’s Failed Heart Surgery 

    Last week’s avalanche of headlines regarding Kim Jong Un’s ‘disappearance’ and possible death triggered initially by a report in Seoul-based outlet Daily NK, but then amplified by a CNN suggesting the North Korean leader is in “grave danger” following heart surgery, has been addressed in candid terms with fresh statements of South Korea’s Unification Minister Kim Yeon-chul.

    He rejected the unconfirmed reports as “fake news” and an “infodemic,insisting that South Korean intelligence is “confident” that there are no unusual signs regarding Kim Jong Un’s health, according to the South’s state-run Yonhap news agency.

    “It is true that he had never missed the anniversary for Kim Il Sung’s birthday since he took power, but many anniversary events including celebrations and a banquet had been canceled because of coronavirus concerns,” Kim Yeon-chul said during a parliament session.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    AP photo

    He described that Pyongyang appears to be exercising extreme caution related to the coronavirus pandemic, canceling Kim’s appearance at all public commemorations; however, North Korean media continues to report on near daily official messages sent from the leader to workers, the military, and other sectors.

    “It can be seen as a phenomenon of infodemic,” Minister Kim added in reference to the deluge of rumors surrounding the NK leader’s health. “We have intelligence capacity that allows us to say confidently that there are no unusual signs.”

    In a rare moment, the top South Korean minister took direct aim at CNN, saying, “I know that the CNN report is based on the Daily NK report, which said that (Kim) received surgery at the Hyangsan Medical Center.”

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    ROK Unification Minister Kim Yeon-chul, via AFP.

    “That cannot make sense logically. … The Hyangsan Medical Center is like a clinic, a facility incapable of performing surgery or medical procedures,” he explained.

    Speaking during the same parliamentary assembly, Foreign Minister Kang Kyung-wha also sought to quash the pervasive reports: “Despite a series of recent media reports, no unusual signs have been detected inside North Korea,” she asserted.

    As we described in our own initial reporting on the matter last weekFirst, it should be noted that the Western mainstream press often gets North Korea completely wrong — and in the case of the latest speculation a high degree of critical skepticism is warranted further given the initial source for the heart surgery claims was a US state-funded media outlet based in South Korea, the Daily NK website.

    This is appearing to be the case once again.


    Tyler Durden

    Tue, 04/28/2020 – 20:25

  • Chinagate Is The New Russiagate… And Is Far More Dangerous
    Chinagate Is The New Russiagate… And Is Far More Dangerous

    Authored by Mike Krieger via Liberty Blitzkrieg blog,

    I’ve become convinced the next major event that’ll be used to further centralize power and escalate domestic authoritarianism will center around U.S.-China tensions. We haven’t witnessed this “event” yet, but there’s a good chance it’ll occur within the next year or two. Currently, the front runner appears to be a major aggressive move by China into Hong Kong, but it could be anything really. Taiwan, the South China Sea, currency, economic or cyber warfare; the flash points are numerous and growing by the day. Something is going to snap and when it does we better be prepared to not act like mindless imbeciles for the fourth time this century.

    When that day arrives, and it’s likely not too far off, certain factions will try to sell you on the monstrous idea that we must become more like China to defeat China. We’ll be told we need more centralization, more authoritarianism, and less freedom and civil liberties or China will win. Such talk is nonsense and the wise way to respond is to reject the worst aspects of the Chinese system and head the other way.

    – From my 2019 piece: Two Paths Forward with China – The Good and The Bad

    As the clownish farce that is Russiagate slinks back into the psyop dumpster from which it emerged, an even more destructive narrative has metastasized following the U.S. government’s incompetent response to covid-19.

    It was clear to me from the start that Russiagate was a nonsensical narrative wildly embraced by a variety of powerful people in the wake of Trump’s election merely to serve their own ends. For establishment Democrats, it was a way to pretend Hillary Clinton didn’t actually lose because she was a wretched status quo candidate with a destructive track record, but she lost due to “foreign meddling.” This allowed those involved in her campaign to deflect blame, but it also short-circuited any discussion of the merits of populism and widespread voter dissatisfaction (within both parties) percolating throughout the land. It was a fairytale invented by people intentionally putting their heads in the sand in order to avoid confrontation with political reality and to keep their cushy gravy-train of entrenched corruption going.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Russiagate was likewise embraced by the national security state (imperial apparatus) for similar reasons. Like establishment Democrats, the national security state also wanted to prevent the narrative that the status quo was rejected in the 2016 election from spreading. It was incentivized to pretend Hillary’s loss was the result of gullible Americans being duped by crafty Russians in order to manufacture the idea that U.S. society was healthy and normal if not for some external enemy.

    Another primary driver for the national security state was to punish Russia for acting like a sovereign state as opposed to a colony of U.S. empire in recent years. Russia has been an increasingly serious thorn in the side of unipolarism advocates over the past decade by performing acts such as buying gold, providing safe harbor for Edward Snowden, and thwarting the dreams of regime change in Syria. Such acts could not go unpunished.

    So Russiagate served its purpose. It wasted our time for much of Trump’s first term and it helped prevent Bernie Sanders from winning the Democratic nomination. Now we get Chinagate.

    When the premier empire on the planet starts blaming external enemies for its internal problems, you know it’s almost always an excuse to let your own elites off the hook and further erode civil liberties. While it appears the novel coronavirus covid-19 did in fact come from China, and China tried to discourage other countries from taking decisive action in the early days, our internal political actors blaming China for their own lack of preparation and timely reaction is patently ridiculous.

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    If Stacy and myself were able to see the situation clearly and respond early, why couldn’t our government? This isn’t rocket science. The Chinese were acting as if the world had ended in cities across the country and we’re supposed to believe U.S. leaders simply listened to what the CCP was saying as opposed to what they were doing? How does that make any sense?

    It makes even less sense considering the Trump administration has been in an explicit cold war with China for almost two years. This concept that the American national security state just took China’s word for what was going on in the early days is preposterous. So what’s going on here? Similar to Russiagate, the increased focus on directing our ten minutes of hate at the Chinese provides cover for the elites, but Chinagate is far more dangerous because the narrative will prove far more convincing for many Americans.

    Although Russiagate was rapidly embraced by people with severe Trump Derangement Syndrome, most people just didn’t buy into it or care. Only the most dimwitted amongst us actually believed the Russians were responsible for our major problems at home, but when it comes to China the argument can be far more persuasive because many aspects of the economic relationship between the U.S. and China are in fact problematic. Specifically, the U.S. transformed itself from a nation of producers and builders into a nation of debt-driven consumption slaves over the past five decades. While China played a key role in this process, it wasn’t the driver.

    Did China force the U.S. to abandon gold convertibility in 1971, thus beginning the transition from an industrial empire into a financial one? Did China convince us to repeal Glass-Steagall, or lie about WMD in Iraq? Did China put a gun to our manufacturing executives’ heads and force them to offshore manufacturing, or did the executives do that with greed filled eyes while earning billions upon billions from labor arbitrage? China may have directly benefited from five decades of avarice-driven policy crimes committed by American “elites,” but they didn’t cause them. They are entirely homegrown.

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    Chinagate is far more dangerous than Russiagate because very serious fundamental problems within the U.S.-China economic relationship do exist. I don’t deny this, and I’m in favor of actual policies that would incentivize the American people to become producers and builders as opposed to castrated debt zombies. The problem is many of the people ratcheting up the volume on the evils of China (I don’t deny the abundance of evil) aren’t interested in bringing liberty and production back to America. Rather, they’re trying to take away more of your freedoms, economically and politically.

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    The same people who’ve been in charge of the country for the entire 21st century remain in charge. Presidential politics is pure theater in an empire. Think about it, the same people who brought you endless war, the surveillance panopticon and perpetual Wall Street crime and bailouts are supposed to take on China? The same China that made so many of them fabulously wealthy? Give me a fucking break.

    The elitist agenda isn’t to use anger at China to bring freedom and production to our shores, but to use heightened emotional fear to tighten their domestic power grip. The idea is to use Chinese authoritarianism as a model for the U.S.

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    Unsurprisingly, the usual suspects are already coming out of their snake holes to advocate for exactly that. We saw this a few days ago when Harvard Law Professor and former George W. Bush administration lawyer, Jack Goldsmith, explicitly called for Chinese-like censorship of speech on the internet.

    In the great debate of the past two decades about freedom versus control of the network, China was largely right and the United States was largely wrong. Significant monitoring and speech control are inevitable components of a mature and flourishing internet, and governments must play a large role in these practices to ensure that the internet is compatible with a society’s norms and values.

    By all means advocate for a reshuffling of the relationship between the U.S. and China that will lead to more freedom, resilience and economic vitality at home and I’ll support it, but don’t tell me we need to become China in order to defeat China. If we’re dumb enough to fall for that, we’ll get exactly what we deserve. Good and hard.

    *  *  *

    Liberty Blitzkrieg is an ad-free website. If you enjoyed this post and my work in general, visit the Support Page where you can donate and contribute to my efforts.


    Tyler Durden

    Tue, 04/28/2020 – 20:05

  • Survey Finds 50 Million Americans Have Lost Their Job In Past 6 Weeks
    Survey Finds 50 Million Americans Have Lost Their Job In Past 6 Weeks

    When Thursday’s initial claims report is published at 830am on Thursday, the Dept of Labor will confirm that the current depression is unlike any seen before, with approximately 30 million Americans losing their jobs in the past 6 weeks alone. That, however, may be underestimating the full number of Americans who have lost their jobs by as much as 50%.

    According to an online poll by the left-wing Economic Policy Institute, millions of Americans who have been thrown out of work during the coronavirus pandemic have been unable to register for unemployment benefits. The poll found that for every 10 people who have successfully filed unemployment claims, three or four people have been unable to register and another two people have not tried to apply at a time of acute economic crisis.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Official statistics show that 26.5 million people have applied for unemployment benefits since mid-March, wiping out all of the jobs gained during the longest employment boom in U.S. history, and another 3.5 million initial claims are expected to be filed this week.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    However, EPI’s survey indicates that an additional 8.9 million to 13.9 million people have been shut out of the system, said Ben Zipperer, the study’s lead author, which means that as of this week, just shy of 50 million American have lost their job since the start of March. “This study validates the anecdotes and news reports we’re seeing about people having trouble filing for benefits they need and deserve,” Zipperer said.

    Among the reasons why idled workers have been unable to get in the “pipeline”, they claim they have encountered downed websites and clogged phone lines, as the state governments that administer the program have been overwhelmed by applicants.

    “It’s a shame how you work for so many years and then when you need it, you can’t get it,” said Jim Hewes, 48, who said he was unable to file a claim online for more than two weeks after he was furloughed from his job at an Orlando, Florida, second-hand store in March. Hewes said he mailed off a paper application on April 9 but had not heard back from the state.

    “It’s almost set up to fail. It was made complicated so people would get discouraged and give up.”

    EPI surveyed 24,607 adult internet users using Google Surveys between April 13 and April 24. The poll has a confidence interval, an indicator of accuracy, of plus or minus 1%. 9.4% of poll respondents said they had successfully applied for unemployment benefits, while 3.4% said they tried but could not get through. A further 1.9% said they did not apply because the process was too difficult.

    * * *

    Among the reasons for the continuing technical challenges listed by Reuters, is that states like New Jersey and Georgia have struggled to find staffers who know how to update computer systems that run on decades-old technology. Others that have moved to newer technology have also encountered technical woes. States have also had to incorporate enhanced federal benefits that provide an extra $600 per week and extend coverage to Uber drivers and other independent contractors.

    On top of that, many states entered the crisis with fewer workers to handle unemployment claims as an improving economy had allowed them to cut staff.

    States had the equivalent of 26,360 full-time workers in their unemployment offices in the 2018 fiscal year, according to the U.S. Labor Department, down 30% from staffing levels during the peak of the Great Recession in 2009 and 2010. Many Americans who managed to file claims have yet to receive payments weeks after they lost their jobs.

    Labor Department statistics show that 71% who apply are getting payments, although that figure varies significantly by state. Florida, for example, said on Saturday it had sent payments to roughly one in five of those who had successfully submitted claims. Among those waiting are Rachel Alvarez, 44, who says she now hides snacks in her bedroom so her three children cannot eat them too quickly. The former restaurant server in Naples, Florida, says she has run through her savings since she was laid off on March 25.

    “I have nothing,” she said. “As much as I don’t want my kids to see me stress out, each one has seen me cry.”


    Tyler Durden

    Tue, 04/28/2020 – 19:45

  • Trump Could Use "Nuclear Option" To Make Saudi Arabia Pay For Oil War
    Trump Could Use “Nuclear Option” To Make Saudi Arabia Pay For Oil War

    Authored by Simon Watkins via OilPrice.com,

    President Donald Trump is considering all options available to him to make the Saudis pay for the oil price war as the crash that followed has done significant damage to the U.S. oil industry.

    With last month having seen the indignity of the principal U.S. oil benchmark, West Texas Intermediate (WTI), having fallen into negative pricing territory, U.S. President Donald Trump is considering all options available to him to make the Saudis pay for the oil price war that it started, according to senior figures close to the Presidential Administration spoken to by OilPrice.com last week. It is not just the likelihood that exactly the same price action will occur to each front-month WTI futures contract just before expiry until major new oil production cuts come from OPEC+ that incenses the U.S. nor the economic damage that is being done to its shale oil sector but also it is the fact that Saudi is widely seen in Washington as having betrayed the long-standing relationship between the two countries. Right now, many senior members on Trump’s closest advisory circle want the Saudis to pay for its actions, in every way, OilPrice.com understands.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    This relationship was established in 1945 between the U.S. President Franklin D. Roosevelt and the Saudi King at the time, Abdulaziz, on board the U.S. Navy cruiser Quincy in the Great Bitter Lake segment of the Suez Canal and has defined the relationship between the two countries ever since. As analysed in depth in my new book on the global oil markets, the deal that was struck between the two men at that time was that the U.S. would receive all of the oil supplies it needed for as long as Saudi Arabia had oil in place, in return for which the U.S. would guarantee the security of the ruling House of Saud. The deal has altered slightly since the rise of the U.S. shale oil industry and Saudi Arabia’s attempt to destroy it from 2014 to 2016 in that the U.S. also expects the House of Saud to ensure that Saudi Arabia not only supplies the U.S. with whatever oil it needs for as long as it can but also that it also allows the U.S. shale industry to continue to function and to grow.

    For the U.S., if this means that Saudi Arabia loses out to U.S. shale producers by keeping oil prices up but losing out on export opportunities to U.S. firms then that is just the price that the House of Saud must pay for the continued protection of the U.S. – politically, economically, and militarily. As U.S. President Donald Trump has made clear whenever he has sensed a lack of understanding on the part of Saudi Arabia for the huge benefit that the U.S. is doing the ruling family:

    “He [Saudi King Salman] would not last in power for two weeks without the backing of the U.S. military.”

    Trump has a very good point, as it is fair to say that without U.S. protection, either Israel or Iran and its proxy operatives and supporters would very soon indeed end the rule of the House of Saud.

    Aside from just withdrawing all such support from the Saud family right now, there are other options available to the U.S. as interim measures, although some are more practical than others. Early in the oil price war, Trump stated that “I will do whatever I have to do… to protect… tens of thousands of energy workers and our great companies,” and added that plans to impose tariffs on Saudi Arabia’s oil exports into the U.S. were “certainly a tool in the toolbox.”

    From a practical volumes perspective, putting tariffs on Saudi oil rather than Russian oil would make sense from three key perspectives.

    First, the U.S. imports around 95 per cent more oil from Saudi than it does from Russia, so sanctioning Russian oil would have little effect on the U.S.’s supply glut that is overhanging its already-stretched domestic storage facilities.

    Second, Russia is in much better economic shape than Saudi to handle any shocks to its oil-related streams of revenue, with a budget breakeven oil price of US$40 per barrel of Brent rather than Saudi’s US$84 per barrel point.

    Third, there is also the fact that Saudi currently provides one of the few large-scale sources of sour crude (including the benchmark Arab Heavy) that is available to the U.S., which is essential to its production of diesel, and to which purpose WTI is less suited. Certainly much of the U.S.’s Gulf Coast refinery system is geared towards using sourer crude, having invested heavily in coking systems and other infrastructure to better handle heavier crudes from the Middle East in recent decades. The other major historical sources of this for the U.S. are not in a position to fill the gap, with U.S. sanctions still imposed on oil imports from Venezuela, Mexican flows unreliable, and Canada’s pipeline capacity to the U.S. not able to handle any more more exports south until the long-delayed Keystone pipeline is up and running at some point in 2023.

    In a U.S. presidential election year, the last thing that a U.S. president wants is increasing diesel prices or shortages making a coronavirus-hit economy even worse. It is a fact that since the end of the First World War, the sitting U.S. president has won re-election 11 times out of 11 if the U.S. economy was not in recession within two calendar years ahead of an election whilst presidents who went into a re-election campaign with the economy in recession over the same time-frame won only once out of seven.

    This said, it may be that Trump will use the threat of such tariffs on Saudi Arabia, as his mercurial reputation may work to convince the Saudis that he is unpredictable enough to impose such taxes, regardless of the short-term economic consequences. Even as it stands, he needs to do something as around 44 million barrels of Saudi crude are expected to reach the U.S. over the next four weeks, according to oil industry and shipping data. This is around four times the most recent four-week average, according to EIA records, and it is mostly due to be delivered to the already overwhelmed Cushing delivery point. Republican Senator Kevin Cramer of North Dakota, who has advised Trump on energy issues, has been calling on the White House to take action to stop the very large crude carriers from unloading, and several senators and congressmen have threatened to vote to withhold military aid to Saudi Arabia. Trump, for his part, has so far only said that he will “look at it,” referring to stopping these new imports.

    Given the burgeoning ill-feeling towards the Saudis amongst the U.S.’s two legislative houses – from an already high base – sources in the Presidential Administration say that a forceful, but private, reiteration of the threat of the ‘No Oil Producing and Exporting Cartels Act’ (NOPEC) Bill direct to King Salman, circumventing his son Crown Prince Mohammed bin Salman, might do the trick in convincing the Saudis to dramatically increase the contextually paltry output cut last agreed with the Russians. As highlighted by OilPrice.com, the pressure for Trump to finally sign off the NOPEC Bill has been growing from the second that the Saudis began the latest oil price war.

    Specifically, the NOPEC Bill would make it illegal to artificially cap oil (and gas) production or to set prices, as OPEC, OPEC+, and Saudi Arabia do. The Bill would also immediately remove the sovereign immunity that presently exists in U.S. courts for OPEC as a group and for each and every one of its individual member states. This would leave Saudi Arabia open to being sued under existing U.S. anti-trust legislation, with its total liability being its estimated US$1 trillion of investments in the U.S. alone. The U.S. would then be legally entitled to freeze all Saudi bank accounts in the U.S., seize its assets in the country, and halt all use of U.S. dollars by the Saudis anywhere in the world (oil, of course, to begin with, is denominated in U.S. dollars). It would also allow the U.S. to go after Saudi Aramco and its assets and funds, as it is still a majority state-owned production and trading vehicle, and would mean that Aramco could be ordered to break itself up into smaller, constituent companies that are not deemed to break competition rules in the oil, gas, and petrochemicals sectors or to influence the oil price.

    The Bill came very close indeed to being passed into law when in February of last year, the House Judiciary Committee passed the NOPEC Act, which cleared the way for a vote on the Bill before the full House of Representatives. On the same day, Democrats Patrick Leahy and Amy Klobuchar and – most remarkably – two Republicans, Chuck Grassley and Mike Lee, introduced the NOPEC Bill to the Senate. Its progress was only halted after President Trump stepped in and vetoed it when the Saudis did what he told them to do (at that point, to produce more to keep oil prices under US$70 per barrel of Brent), but the option is still available for a relatively quick turnaround on turning it into law.


    Tyler Durden

    Tue, 04/28/2020 – 19:25

  • Has The Recovery Started Already? What Real-TIme Coronavirus Activity Trackers Are Showing
    Has The Recovery Started Already? What Real-TIme Coronavirus Activity Trackers Are Showing

    There was some good news in the latest coronavirus activity tracker from Goldman: signs of life amid an unprecedented collapse in aggregate demand.

    As the following chart tracking daily consumer prices shows, after cratering by as much as 50% into the middle of April, consumer prices have rebounded in the past week to -31%, which while still clearly ugly, indicates that some demand is coming back (in this case rising airfare prices).

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    That said, other real-time activity trackers are showing the opposite, namely a downward inflection point such as for example the recent decline in China Industrial Activity which has backtracked in the past two weeks, while the US Industrial Activity Tracker clearly hovered at post crisis lows of -19%. This suggests that after a forced rebound in the past month, China may be again relapsing to the global industrial malaise, even as the US has still to find the lows.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    At the same time, a more optimistic picture for China emerges when tracking consumer activity, which tracks spending in categories of consumption that are likely to be disproportionately affected by the virus, which continued to rise in China, even as it remains unchanged at -73% yoy in the US.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Real-time indicators across other sectors and countries show conflicting trends, with China clearly rebounding in real estate transactions and stabilizing for electricity consumption, while continuing to contract for weekend box office movie revenue, arguably the clearest indicator in the broader population’s confidence that the pandemic has been contained.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Sentiment remained dismal when viewed through the perspective of social networks, in this case economic sentiment as expressed on twitter.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    There was more bad news when one looked at the US economy regionally, with the Seattle area showing little sign of recovery…

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    … while “unemployment” searches remain at all time highs, indicating we have yet to hit a peak in the deterioration in the labor market.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    The silver lining: for now, at least, bankruptcies remain subdued in both the US and China, suggesting this could be the next big show to drop.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>


    Tyler Durden

    Tue, 04/28/2020 – 19:05

Digest powered by RSS Digest

Today’s News 28th April 2020

  • First Negative Oil Prices, Now Sicily Will Pay Tourists To Visit
    First Negative Oil Prices, Now Sicily Will Pay Tourists To Visit

    Everything is upside down. First, it was oil long paying “buyers” to take delivery of oil that nobody could store; now it’s popular tourism destinations paying tourists to come visit.

    It is only appropriate that the birthplace of the Italian mafia has come up with the tourism equivalent of the WTI deliverable contract: according to The Times, Sicily is offering to pay tourists half of their plane ticket, as well as a night at a hotel an attraction entry fees in a bid to encourage tourists to return.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Sicily, located off the south of Italy, most famous perhaps for giving the world the Cosa Nostra mafia, is attempting to lure foreign visitors back to the island after the lockdown ends on May 4. The offers, first reported by The Times, will be available on the island’s tourism website. They include a free night at a hotel for every three, as well as museum and archaeological entry tickets. The Government will use €50 million to fund the scheme, with losses of €1 billion ($1.6 billion) reported from March and April.

    Italy generates 13% of its GDP from tourism and is desperate to restart inbound tourism as soon as the country is reopened.

    According to News.com, it’s not the first time the island has offered cheap deals to entice people to visit. Last year, the towns of Mussomeli and Sambuca in Sicily offered houses for just $1.60 as local numbers dwindled. The catch was that new owners had to fork out up to $25,000 to renovate the houses within the first year of buying them.

    The rest of Italy is also looking at ways to restart the tourism industry after being the hotspot of coronavirus in Europe. One region has even drawn up plans for tourists to use “plexiglass boxes” while relaxing on the beach to reduce the spread of coronavirus.

    Italy is not alone in a bid to reboot tourism following a total collapse in global travel: hotels elsewhere in the world are offering guests free upgrades and extra night to encourage them to stay, as coronavirus causes bookings to plummet.


    Tyler Durden

    Tue, 04/28/2020 – 02:45

  • What The COVID-19 Crisis Means For Europe & The Eurozone
    What The COVID-19 Crisis Means For Europe & The Eurozone

    [An interview with Dr. Hulsmann, originally published in German by Die Freie Welt.]

    As a result of the corona crisis, economic life was severely restricted in many countries. How long can the economy take this?

    As long as stocks last. In other words: as long as you can allow yourself to live off previous savings. There is no difference between a family and the overall economy in this regard.

    The German federal government has passed a bailout fund of around €750 billion to stabilise the economy and save companies from bankruptcy. Can such measures mitigate the economic downturn?

    No. Such measures have two very different effects, which only give the brief appearance of a cushion.

    On the one hand, income and wealth will be massively redistributed and, on the other hand, the future will be sacrificed on the altar of contemporary concerns.

    Let me describe that in a little more detail.

    The federal government’s bailout fund generates additional income or income of €750 billion. Where does this money come from? There are three main sources to consider: taxes, public debt, and the music press. In all three cases, it is by no means the state that conjures up 750 billion out of nothing. It is the citizens who are robbed of this sum in one form or another. Taxes are not supposed to be raised this time. I therefore conclude that the citizens will be expropriated, as in the past, by devaluing their financial assets. Interest income is pushed down even further. Savings are taxed with negative interest rates, and price inflation gnaws at what is left.

    As in the past, this redistribution is justified by the fact that there would otherwise be a collapse in the financial markets, which would also severely damage the real economy. Without the manna of the rescue umbrella, many companies would go bankrupt and lay off their workers. Loans could not be reimbursed, causing the banking industry to collapse, which would affect other companies. In a word, there would be a downward spiral, standstill, and mass unemployment. The citizens would be asked to foot the bill one way or another. Either they have to fund the rescue package or they have to suffer the collapse of the entire economy. All in all, therefore, it would be much better to fleece the citizens a little bit now, rather than to expose them to even greater losses.

    This argument is correct insofar as rescue packages can prevent a short-term collapse.

    This is exactly why the appearance of a cushion is created.

    Why only apparently?

    Because this short-term success comes at the expense of the future. The downturn is mitigated in the short term, but is reinforced in the long term. With the 750 billion, companies are now being saved that have not done what companies are supposed to do. They did not manage their own savings and other people’s savings sustainably. They had a run at short-term profits and funded their ventures with loans. It is these very firms, whose incompetence has become apparent through the crisis, that are now artificially kept alive. And those who have wisely foregone credit-financed adventures will again be asked to foot the bill. Hence, the real effect of the rescue package is to bring even more funds into projects that are already on shaky feet and are led by adventurers. It is obvious what that means for the future.

    The whole thing is compounded by the fact that government spending is notoriously inefficient and corrupt anyway. Unfortunately, there is no reason to hope that people who fail in all other areas of responsibility (education, healthcare, airport construction, housing construction, national defence, etc.) will find their first-class form right now.

    Let me conclude on this question with an even more fundamental consideration. It is wrong to always avoid short-term inconveniences at the expense of the future, especially with taxpayers’ money. But that’s exactly what we’ve been doing for many decades. This little game was previously limited to banking and finance, and as a result it was only noticed by experts. It has been played on a large scale since 2008 and as a result is becoming the focus of the general public. Anyway, it’s a very stupid game. Some government-related agents benefit, but ordinary citizens cannot gain anything here in the long run.

    It would be much more sensible to seek solutions in a fundamentally different way. You can actually make a good case for taking a short-term collapse of the entire economy “on the chin”—in Boris Johnson’s memorable words—so that the economy be cured and put on a healthier basis in the long term. After all, until recently, Germans were ready to leave their homes during the winter flu season and take the risk of catching a cold. If you do not want to accept any risks and inconveniences now, you’ll get plenty of both in the long term.

    What about the monetary system? Do you expect the eurozone to fall apart or inflation to rise?

    Higher price inflation, yes, but not a disintegration of the eurozone.

    Rising price inflation is unavoidable as government and central banks do anything to prevent that less money be spent overall in the economy. Since they have the printing press, they will probably succeed. In this case, price inflation is inevitable, since the supply of goods decreases due to the curfews.

    The eurozone will stay together as long as there are no better alternatives for national governments. The Italians grumble, but just like the Greeks back then, they will be wondering what loans they will get if they give up the euro.

    We have not heard of eurobonds for a long time. Now there are calls for corona bonds. What do you think of this idea?

    Nothing at all.

    They would exacerbate the basic problems of the eurozone: even more debt, more fragility, more irresponsibility by the immediate beneficiaries in politics and finance. Corona bonds would be a disservice not only to German, but also to Italian taxpayers. In the medium and long run, they would also be a disservice to the people who are dependent on medical services in Italy. The Italian state is alone responsible for its financial calamities and for the overwhelming burden on its state-owned and state-run hospitals. But even in the current mess, it could bring substantial relief in a fairly short time, simply by immediately liberating the private sector in the healthcare services. But that’s exactly what the state doesn’t want to do. Corona bonds are intended to ensure that nothing has to change, so that in fact nothing changes in the state’s mismanagement and shortage economy. Government representatives raise their fingers and contend: “If you Germans don’t do anything for us, then people will die over here.”

    The truth is that they themselves do not want to do anything that could question Italy’s inefficient welfare state. They take the Germans into moral custody, but accept that Italians will remain underserved because they do not wish them to be provided for outside the welfare state.

    If the shutdown is lifted, how long will it take for the economy to recover? Is this just a temporary slump or is the economic crisis going on for a long time?

    Basically, the recovery can take place very quickly. My main concern is government intervention, which can prolong and increase the current difficulties. The classic example from economic history is the Great Depression of the 1930s in the USA. At that time, a simple stock market crash was so badly managed by ever new and increasingly rigid state intervention that it expanded into a long-standing economic crisis.

    How do you rate the crisis management in the different countries? The United Kingdom and the Netherlands have opted for mass immunisation, France for curfews. Which reaction do you think is the right one?

    I am not an immunologist and do not presume to define the best solution from a medical point of view. As an economist, however, I know the following: it is fundamentally wrong to put the entire economy at the service of a single goal and to commit to a single solution. Human action always involves weighing up different goals and different means. Of course, maintaining health can be of paramount importance in the short run. But even then, it is never the sole goal and there are always different means. Free competition is essential, particularly when it comes to the efficient selection of ways and means. I therefore believe that the countries that respond best are those which give citizens and families the greatest possible freedom and responsibility, and which also do not centralise political responsibility, as here in France, but hand it over to the town halls and other local authorities. Examples would be Switzerland and the Netherlands.

    Which countries will emerge from the crisis as losers and which as winners?

    That’s difficult to say at the moment, because we are not through this yet. As I said, the greatest imponderability lies in state action.

    In any case, I do not see France, Italy, and Spain among the winners, since in these countries the crisis is “used” by circles close to the state to secure and expand their own privileges, if possible with the help of corona bonds.


    Tyler Durden

    Tue, 04/28/2020 – 02:00

  • China Threatens Australia Over 'Dangerous' Investigation Into Coronavirus
    China Threatens Australia Over ‘Dangerous’ Investigation Into Coronavirus

    China has threatened Australia with an economic hit if it doesn’t stop investigating the CCP’s handling of the coronavirus, according to Sky News.

    Chinese Ambassador Cheng Jingye told the outlet on Monday that while China’s response may not have been “perfect,” Australia’s inquiry was “dangerous,” and could lead to Chinese consumers avoiding Chinese exports and travel.

    So what is being done by the Australia side?” asked Cheng. “The proposition is a kind of teaming up with those forces in Washington and to launch a kind of political campaign against China.”

    “The Chinese public is frustrated, dismayed and disappointed with what Australia is doing now,” said Cheng. “I think in the long term… if the mood is going from bad to worse, people would think ‘Why should we go to such a country that is not so friendly to China?’ The tourists may have second thoughts.

    The parents of the students would also think whether this place which they found is not so friendly, even hostile, whether this is the best place to send their kids here,” Cheng continued (via the Daily Wire). “It is up to the people to decide. Maybe the ordinary people will say ‘Why should we drink Australian wine? Eat Australian beef?’

    Australia’s Foreign Minister Marise Payne hit back against the call for an independent inquiry, saying “Australia has made a principled call for an independent review of the COVID-19 outbreak, an unprecedented global crisis with severe health, economic and social impacts.”

    “We reject any suggestion that economic coercion is an appropriate response to a call for such an assessment, when what we need is global co-operation.”

    According to Sky News reporter Tom Connell, Australian politicians are in agreement over the need for a “global independent” investigation into the Wuhan coronavirus, adding that “China’s response, of course, has been to push back and the stakes did increase today from the Chinese ambassador in this interview with the Australian Financial Review.”

    China’s opposition to an Australian investigation comes after the United States reportedly launched a “full-scale investigation” into whether COVID-19 escaped from a biolab in Wuhan, China, according to Fox News.

    According to the report, US intelligence operatives are gathering information regarding the laboratory and the initial outbreak of the virus, which was found in a horseshoe bat specimen collected by scientists from the Wuhan Institute of Virology in 2013 in a cave in Yunnan, China.


    Tyler Durden

    Tue, 04/28/2020 – 01:00

  • A Locked-Down Country Is Vulnerable To Attack
    A Locked-Down Country Is Vulnerable To Attack

    Authored by Peter Earle via The American Institute for Economic Research,

    Right now, hundreds of thousands of businesses are closed, and countless American streets are empty. Individuals, families, and businesses are rapidly burning through their savings, supply chains are atrophying, and every economic indicator is revealing a rapid retrenchment from healthy levels just one month ago. We have had a stock market crash, an oil price crash, inverted yield curves, and many other warnings revealing an economy in serious distress.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    What if, in this state of worsening economic vulnerability, the once-unthinkable were to happen yet again? 

    What would tomorrow look like if today were September 10, 2001?

    It’s true that, presently, aircraft are hardly flying and most office buildings are operating with skeleton crews, and thus the mechanics of an attack of the sort perpetrated on September 11th, 2001, are unlikely. But for all they lack, the enemies of the United States are surely not short of ideas or a terrifying form of homicidal entrepreneurialism. Propriety resists speculation as to other ways that such a thing could take place, but as a wealthy nation with many major cities, ports, and other critical points, America has and will always have vulnerabilities.

    In a state of lockdown, we are more vulnerable than ever. People are prisoners in their homes, with private firms shuttered and inert. America is in a recession, and perhaps in a depression. Government resources are depleted, and a sizable portion of the population is wandering around their home demoralized, confused, and depressed. 

    Straight talk: the United States is tremendously vulnerable right now.  

    Despite Trump’s campaign pledge to end American’s “endless wars,” soldiers, sailors, airmen, Marines, and government contractors in military roles are active every second of every day worldwide. Whether one believes that America’s foreign engagements are wholly justified or that they are an incredibly unsustainable exercise in imperial overreach – Americans in combat in four or five countries; another 150,000 troops in 800 bases spanning 150 countries; and entangling alliances in most of the remainder – the idea that these interventions don’t create new enemies, some of whom are likely to be innovative in the most sinister of ways, is both gullible and irresponsible. 

    The Congressional Research Service’s September 2002 Report “The Economic Effects of 9/11: A Retrospective Assessment” makes clear that one of the major factors blunting the full impact of the attacks was the Fed’s immediate action. 

    The economy was contracting when 9/11 occurred… The terrorist attacks did cause some severe localized effects, especially in and around the target areas, and that may have muted the magnitude of growth in the 4th quarter. The fairly modest effect may have been due to assurances given by the Federal Reserve within hours of the attack that it was still in business and that sufficient liquidity would be available for the financial community. Over the next three days the Federal Reserve added some $100 billion per day in liquidity. 

    And that only takes into account the days and weeks after the attacks. There were, of course, longer-term effects of the attacks in the tourism, airline, insurance, and food/agriculture sectors, as well as to some 18,000 small businesses near the World Trade Center, and in both New York City and Washington, D. C. more broadly. We live today with much of the legacy of that awful day, where I personally saw and experienced the devastation first-hand. 

    Fast forward to today, and we are facing a nationwide, politically-imposed economic standstill wherein the Federal Reserve has already extended massive programs of historic size and scope. The Fed Funds rate is, once again, effectively at zero. It seems doubtful that, were another such tragedy to occur, they would have much dry powder left other than unconventional monetary policy options. 

    It would be naive to think that the squeamishness and knee-jerk policy response demonstrated in the face of COVID-19 hasn’t been noticed by adversaries of the United States: most of all by those with whom any conflict is likely to be asymmetric in nature. Many of the same people who advocate for “readiness” in a military sense haven’t or don’t seem to have considered how politicians shutting down the entire US economy have increased our exposure to risk in a very short amount of time. 

    If we know that we’re vulnerable, “they” surely do as well. It is especially ironic that the Trump Administration has labeled Bitcoin and cryptocurrencies a “national security issue,” but for all we can tell either hasn’t considered or has chosen to neglect the risks posed by a prostrate economy. 

    Which points to another, more immediate fragility exposed by recent policy choices: kinetic attacks are one thing, but if the enemies of the United States know that the government will shut down our entire economy in the face of spreading disease, will the long-conjectured possibilities of more subtle but lethal assaults – the purposeful spreading of smallpox, measles, or other highly contagious diseases – appear? Will microbes be the new WMDs?

    We are now at the trough of a self-inflicted economic collapse. If military adventurism is to remain a core (if unfortunate) facet of America’s foreign policy gadgetry, I would argue for a rapid reprioritization of the economic aspects of national security. The revealed propensity to lock the U.S. economy down in the face of uncommon but not existential uncertainty represents an Achilles heel that will likely not be overlooked, at least not for long.

    Even, sadly, if arguments about liberty, prosperity, and quality of life do not resonate with many Americans, the basic notion of civil continuity should. These are admittedly uncomfortable topics which require discussion as a nation: discourse about policy, foreign and domestic, and about what we as a people are willing to bear for the doubtful benefits and already soaring costs of global interventionism. 


    Tyler Durden

    Tue, 04/28/2020 – 00:00

  • Secret 'COVID-19 Manhattan Project' Led By Billionaires Seeking To Influence Trump Admin
    Secret ‘COVID-19 Manhattan Project’ Led By Billionaires Seeking To Influence Trump Admin

    Last month Massachusetts Senator Ed Markey called for the bold and urgent launch of what he called “a Manhattan Project-type approach” to fight the coronavirus pandemic given the enormity of the health and economic impact, increasingly even harming US defense readiness.

    Apparently there has been such a group operating behind the scenes, but very unlike the original Manhattan Project it’s a private sector initiative, funded by a tiny network of ultra-rich industry titans working closely with government contacts. Meet “the secret group of scientists and billionaires pushing Trump on a Covid-19 plan” profiled in a lengthy Wall Street Journal investigation Monday:

    These scientists and their backers describe their work as a lockdown-era Manhattan Project, a nod to the World War II group of scientists who helped develop the atomic bomb. This time around, the scientists are marshaling brains and money to distill unorthodox ideas gleaned from around the globe.

    They call themselves Scientists to Stop Covid-19, and they include chemical biologists, an immunobiologist, a neurobiologist, a chronobiologist, an oncologist, a gastroenterologist, an epidemiologist and a nuclear scientist. Of the scientists at the center of the project, biologist Michael Rosbash, a 2017 Nobel Prize winner, said, “There’s no question that I’m the least qualified.”

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Getty Images

    The until now secretive group is led by a 33-year-old physician-turned-venture capitalist, Tom Cahill, and is described as an elite go-between the pharmaceutical industry and Trump administration decision-makers, or an “ad hoc review board” of sorts pursuing cutting edge outside the box ideas.

    The scientists include a dozen world renowned researchers, pathology experts and inventors closely networked at institutions ranging from The Scripps Research Lab in La Jolla, California, to Yale University School of Medicine to Harvard to MIT’s Laboratory for Nuclear Security and Policy to private companies and labs like Merck and others.

    Recommendations and ideas floated by Scientists to Stop Covid-19 have already reportedly had far-reaching influence, including affecting policy inside FDA and the Department of Veterans Affairs, and the group is reportedly advising close Pence aide Nick Ayers.

    Among other billionaire influencers and backers to the private initiative include Peter Thiel, Jim Palotta, Michael Milken, Brian Sheth, and Steve Pagliuca, among others.

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    As an example of how the group was previously able to get a confidential 17-page report (since published by the WSJ) recommending various introductory unorthodox approaches to fighting and treating the pandemic, the WSJ details :

    “Steve Pagliuca, co-owner of the Boston Celtics and the co-chairman of Bain Capital — as well as one of Dr. Cahill’s investors — helped copy edit drafts of their report, and he passed a version to Goldman Sachs Group Inc. Chief Executive David Solomon. Mr. Solomon got it to Treasury Secretary Steven Mnuchin.”

    “Much of the early work involved divvying up hundreds of scientific papers on the crisis from around the world,” the report describes of the team’s daily communications. 

    “They separated promising ideas from dubious ones. Each member blazed through as many as 20 papers a day, around 10 times the pace they would in their day jobs. They gathered to debate via videoconference, text messages — ‘like a bunch of teenagers,’ Mr. Rosbash said — and phone calls.”

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Brian Sheth, co-founder of private-equity firm Vista Equity Partners, via Bloomberg/WSJ.

    Among the ‘big ideas’ described by the network of researchers led by scientist-investor Dr. Cahill, who first gained the attention of aides within the Trump administration when they listened on an early March conference call tailored toward answering investors’ questions, include the following: 

    • Experimenting with treatments utilizing powerful anti-Ebola drugs in heavier dosages
    • The possibility of renaming the virus “SARS-2,” after the 2003 China animal virus, so that the connection is better made in the public mind with a deadly disease: “the name sounded scarier and might get more people to wear face masks. They dropped it.”
    • The group considers Hydroxychloroquine, long a focus of interest and debate in Trump administration circles, to be “a long shot at best”
    • The team has looked negatively on recent efforts to push antibody testing and ‘immunity passports’ that show recovery from the virus. 
    • They’ve sought to reduce FDA hurdles and red tape in order to get potential successful drugs out faster, especially to streamline hoped-for ‘miracle’ cures. 
    • The WSJ emphasizes further: “The scientists had in their research identified monoclonal antibody drugs that latch onto virus cells as the most promising treatment.”
    • A saliva test which is easy to administer with ultra-fast results is being pursued, one that offices and companies could utilize to make sure employees come into work virus-free each day.
    • Tech like smartphone apps to help track and gauge symptoms is a major focus. 
    • The scientists are also helping to craft state and national reopening strategies for the near and long-term.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    * * *

    Read a copy of the 17-page report drafted by the Scientists to Stop COVID-19 here.


    Tyler Durden

    Mon, 04/27/2020 – 23:40

  • Narrative Managers Argue China-Like Internet Censorship Is Needed
    Narrative Managers Argue China-Like Internet Censorship Is Needed

    Authored by Caitlin Johnstone via Medium.com,

    Neoconservative publication The Atlantic has published an article authored by two university professors titled “Internet Speech Will Never Go Back to Normal”, subtitled “In the debate over freedom versus control of the global network, China was largely correct, and the U.S. was wrong.”

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    The article is actually worth reading in full, not just because it’s outrage porn for anyone who values human communication that is unregulated by oligarchs and government agencies, but because it’s actually packed full of extensively sourced information about the way Silicon Valley tech giants are collaborating with western governments to censor speech. The only difference between this article and something you might read on some libertarian website is that this article argues that all of these regulations on speech are a good thing.

    Here’s an archive of the article if you don’t want to give clicks to The Atlantic, whose editor-in-chief Jeffrey Goldberg once assured the world that “the coming invasion of Iraq will be remembered as an act of profound morality.” Do give it a look if this interests you and you have time.

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    “In the great debate of the past two decades about freedom versus control of the network, China was largely right and the United States was largely wrong,” argue the article’s authors, one of whom is a former Bush administration lawyer.

    “Significant monitoring and speech control are inevitable components of a mature and flourishing internet, and governments must play a large role in these practices to ensure that the internet is compatible with a society’s norms and values.”

    The article paints an accurate picture of the ways in which supposedly independent social media platforms have been collaborating with governments and with each other to regulate speech and have increased that collaboration during the Covid-19 pandemic, noting how “In March 2019, Zuckerberg invited the government to regulate ‘harmful content’ on his platform” and how “As in other contexts, Facebook relies on fact-checking organizations and ‘authorities’ (from the World Health Organization to the governments of U.S. states) to ascertain which content to downgrade or remove.”

    “These platforms have engaged in ‘strategic collaboration’ with the federal government, including by sharing information, to fight foreign electoral interference,” The Atlantic reports after outlining ways in which Facebook, Twitter and Youtube have been censoring speech in “aggressive but still imperfect steps to fend off foreign adversaries.”

    “The harms from digital speech will also continue to grow, as will speech controls on these networks,” the article’s authors assert. “And invariably, government involvement will grow. At the moment, the private sector is making most of the important decisions, though often under government pressure. But as Zuckerberg has pleaded, the firms may not be able to regulate speech legitimately without heavier government guidance and involvement. It is also unclear whether, for example, the companies can adequately contain foreign misinformation and prevent digital tampering with voting mechanisms without more government surveillance.”

    This article comes out days after journalist Whitney Webb published another article worth reading titled “Techno-Tyranny: How The US National Security State Is Using Coronavirus To Fulfill An Orwellian Vision”.

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    Webb details how FOIA-obtained document by a US government organization called the National Security Commission on Artificial Intelligence (NSCAI) argues for the need to implement authoritarian measures like increased surveillance more in line with those used in China, in order to prevent the PRC from technologically surpassing the United States.

    Webb notes for example how the document “cites the use of mass surveillance on China’s ‘huge population base’ is an example of how China’s ‘scale of consumer market’ advantage allowing ‘China to leap ahead’ in the fields of related technologies, like facial recognition.”

    We’re also seeing an increase in surveillance being pushed for in a new report by the think tank Tony Blair Institute for Global Change, arguing that a drastic increase in tech surveillance is “a price worth paying” in order to fight Covid-19. Which is of course hilarious, because having the think tank of a Bush lapdog Prime Minister argue that more surveillance is a price worth paying to stop coronavirus is a lot like a bunch of muggers arguing that time saved by cutting through dark alleyways is worth the increased risk of mugging.

    So that’s great. We’re seeing mainstream narrative managers shriek about the need for new cold war escalations against China’s bad, bad authoritarian government, while simultaneously arguing that western governments should espouse Beijing’s worst authoritarian impulses. This as we’ve discussed previously is because consent needs to be manufactured in order for the US-centralized empire to take drastic steps to prevent China from surpassing it and creating a multipolar world, and the freer people are to think and act and organize, the harder that’s going to be.

    Oligarchs have no business controlling what we can and cannot say to each other. Governments have no business bringing more and more transparency to us while bringing more and more opacity to themselves. This is ugly, it is abusive, and it must end.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Freedom of speech is actually about freedom of thought. Speech is the carrying agent of thought; controlling human communication is actually about controlling the spread of ideas. Censorship is about controlling the thoughts that the public think in their heads. Speech control is mind control.

    *  *  *

    Thanks for reading! The best way to get around the internet censors and make sure you see the stuff I publish is to subscribe to the mailing list for my website, which will get you an email notification for everything I publish. My work is entirely reader-supported, so if you enjoyed this piece please consider sharing it around, liking me on Facebook, following my antics onTwitter, checking out my podcast on either YoutubesoundcloudApple podcasts or Spotify, following me on Steemit, throwing some money into my hat on Patreon or Paypal, purchasing some of my sweet merchandise, buying my books Rogue Nation: Psychonautical Adventures With Caitlin Johnstone and Woke: A Field Guide for Utopia Preppers. For more info on who I am, where I stand, and what I’m trying to do with this platform, click here. Everyone, racist platforms excluded, has my permission to republish, use or translate any part of this work (or anything else I’ve written) in any way they like free of charge.

    Bitcoin donations:1Ac7PCQXoQoLA9Sh8fhAgiU3PHA2EX5Zm2


    Tyler Durden

    Mon, 04/27/2020 – 23:20

  • The US Will Sell $4 Trillion In Debt This Year, A 300% Increase: This Is What It Will Look Like
    The US Will Sell $4 Trillion In Debt This Year, A 300% Increase: This Is What It Will Look Like

    Don’t look now, but just weeks after it passed the biggest fiscal stimulus in US history, Congress passed an additional round of fiscal measures totaling $484bn. This raises Goldman’s estimated 2020 US deficit financing need to ~$3.5 trillion. But there’s more: the bank does not think the latest measure is the final word here, and its economists expect another round totaling $550bn to pay for items such as aid to state and local governments, that haven’t been fully addressed thus far.

    On the whole, this would translate to between $3.8-$4 trillion in financing needs for 2020, almost a trillion dollar increment Goldman’s prior deficit estimate, and 300% more than the US sold in calendar 2019. Financing such a massive gap, amounting to 20% of GDP, will require a broad-based increase across maturities and product types.

    So how will the US pay for this massive financing hole. Below Goldman lays out what it believes to be a “sensible strategy” to  raise these funds. In the subsequent two years, Goldman turns optimistic and sees the deficit declining to $2.4tn in FY2021 and $1.65tn in FY2022, and reversing some of this year’s increases. We doubt it: once you go helicopter money, you never go back, just look at Japan.

    Exhibit 1 shows Goldman’s latest split for CY2020 funding. Bills are still the dominant venue for raising funds, with net supply from April to year-end coming in at around $2.1tn (and about $2.3tn for the calendar year), a magnitude large enough to mean that the bills market will have nearly doubled in size this year. That projection isn’t as far-fetched as it might seem—just in the month of April, Treasury has issued roughly $1.26tn of bills.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    This heavy near term reliance on bills is even more visible when looking at split on a fiscal year basis. Exhibit 2 shows Goldman’s projections for net bill and coupon issuance for FY2020, FY2021, and FY2022. As can be seen, as financing needs drop from nearly $4tn this year to about $2.6tn and $1.7tn in the next two years, bills again adjust as the shock absorber. This pattern should be very similar to issuance around the 2008-2009 recession, when bills outstanding shot up to over 30% of USTs outstanding, only to decline to between 15-20% over the subsequent two years.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Such an initial surge in bill issuance makes sense, according to Goldman, only when there’s reason to believe a sizable portion of the funding gap is temporary and likely to fade quickly (it would take a huge optimist to believe that’s the case now). That way, coupon auction size changes can be more gradual, and absorb less of the uncertainty/volatility in deficits. Still, given the large amount that has to be raised, even with bills doing the heavy lifting, Goldman estimates Treasury will have to fund about $1.4tn in FY2020 from coupon issuance.

    Exhibit 3 shows Goldman’s best guess of the auction sizes that would be required to raise this amount. As can be seen, auction sizes will have to be lifted fairly aggressively across the spectrum—a conservative estimates sees increases of $12-$15bn in monthly auction sizes across the front and belly, and a more conservative $5-$8bn in longer maturities. Goldman also expects the introduction of both the 20y bond at the upcoming refunding, and a 1y SOFR-linked FRN in summer. For most of the maturities, the auction sizes will hit their peak levels later this year or early next year.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    On the demand side, Goldman expects – for obvious reasons – that the Fed will remain the largest player in the market, as Helicopter money goes BRRRRR. In the bank’s most recent analysis, it had estimated that the Fed would have to absorb slightly more than $2tn of the issuance this year to maintain “normal functioning”; with the upsized deficits, the bank now believes that number is now closer to $2.4-$2.6 trillion.


    Tyler Durden

    Mon, 04/27/2020 – 23:08

  • Crude Carnage Continues Across Asia As Another Futures Contract Roll Looms
    Crude Carnage Continues Across Asia As Another Futures Contract Roll Looms

    Following last week’s bloodbathery in WTI as its May contract expired and the biggest oil ETF (US-Oh!) wreaked havoc between spot and futures markets, it appears we are set for deja vu all over again this week – except this time it’s the Brent contract that may suffer.

    “Some of this downward pressure particularly in the June contract is an increasing lack of liquidity,” said John Kilduff, a partner at hedge fund Again Capital LLC.

    This is not coming only from the USO, but also due to brokerage firms, like Marex Spectron and TD Ameritrade, restricting client’s abilities to add new positions to certain crude contracts, according to Kilduff.

    “It’s going to exacerbate the whole marrying of the June contract with the over supplied physical conditions and the lack of storage,” Kilduff said.

    As Bloomberg notes, With the Brent contract for June settlement expiring Thursday, any contracts that haven’t been closed out by then will be cash settled at a price set by the Intercontinental Exchange based on cash sales of North Sea crude on the day. Right now, physical prices are trading well below futures – Dated Brent was $16.01 a barrel on Friday.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Source: Bloomberg

    But it appears the unwinds in US-Oh! are also weighing more on the heavier-weighted (in the ETF) WTI contract – most notably June…

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    …which is down 15% further after settlement today, trading back at a $10 handle…

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    As a reminder, the ETF has changed its investment policy five times in the last two weeks, as shown in the following chart which depicted the ETF’s holdings as of Friday’s close:

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Source: Bloomberg’s Laura Cooper

    It also warned investors its valuation may deviate significantly from the underlying oil price, in effect acknowledging that it’s momentarily less focused on the price of WTI crude.

    “While it is USO’s expectation that at some point in the future it will be able to return to primarily investing in the Benchmark Futures Contract or other similar futures contracts of the same tenor based on light, sweet crude oil, there can be no guarantee of when, if ever, that will occur,” it said in the filing, adding that USO investors “should expect that there will be continued deviations between the performance of USO’s investments and the Benchmark Oil Futures Contract, and that USO may not be able to track the Benchmark Oil Futures Contract or meet its investment objective.”

    All of which suggests we have crossed the eye of the hurricane as Goldman expects the market to test global storage capacity in the next 3-4 weeksunlike WTI which was merely a Cushing event – which will likely create substantial volatility with more spikes to the downside until supply finally equals demand, as with nowhere to store the oil, supply has no other option but to be shut-in down in-line with the expected demand losses.

    Alternatively, we could see another “Monday massacre” with producers of oil willing to pay buyers to take physical possession right around the time all global capacity is full, unless of course US shale producers drastically cut output in the coming days, not weeks.


    Tyler Durden

    Mon, 04/27/2020 – 23:00

  • Sen. Tom Cotton Calls To Ban Chinese Students From Studying Science In The US
    Sen. Tom Cotton Calls To Ban Chinese Students From Studying Science In The US

    For the most part, Senator Tom Cotton has been on the ball: he was one of the first to raise objections about how China has reported their coronavirus data and was calling for investigations and accountability months before others in government even knew that the virus was a threat to the U.S. 

    Cotton is now calling for Chinese students to no longer be able to study science and technology in the U.S. and also claims that China is likely trying to steal a vaccine from the U.S. 

    On Fox News Sunday morning, Cotton said: “In the middle of a pandemic, what’s the most valuable intellectual property in the world? It’s the research that our great laboratories and life science companies are doing on prophylactic drugs, therapeutic drugs, and ultimately a vaccine.” 

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    He continued: “So I have little doubt that the Chinese intelligence services are actively trying to steal America’s intellectual property as it relates to the virus that they unleashed on the world, because, of course, they want to be the country that claims credit for finding those drugs or finding a vaccine, and then use it as leverage against the rest of the world.”

    He referred to the fact that U.S. education has trained “so many of the Chinese Communist Party’s brightest minds” as a scandal, according to the NY Post

    Cotton continued: “So I think we need to take a very hard look at the visas that we give the Chinese nationals to come to the United States to study, especially at the post-graduate level in advanced scientific and technological fields.”

    “If Chinese students want to come here and study Shakespeare and the Federalist Papers, that’s what they need to learn from America. They don’t need to learn quantum computing and artificial intelligence from America,” he concluded.

    Cotton has said that the CCP is “both criminally negligent and incompetent” in reacting the virus, which has now spread across the world.

    You can watch his full appearance with Maria Bartiromo here: 


    Tyler Durden

    Mon, 04/27/2020 – 22:40

  • Pelosi Pitches Universal Basic Income To Cope With Pandemic
    Pelosi Pitches Universal Basic Income To Cope With Pandemic

    After holding up aid to small business owners before rushing to bail out horribly managed blue states, House Speaker Nancy Pelosi is now pushing a guaranteed minimum income for Americans struggling due to the pandemic. 

    “Let’s see what works, what is operational and what needs attention,” said Pelosi during a Monday interview with MSNBC, adding “Others have suggested a minimum income, a guaranteed income for people. Is that worthy of attention now? Perhaps so. Because there are many more people than just in small business and hired by small business … that may need some assistance as well.” 

    More via CNBC:

    The idea of a government-guaranteed minimum income has gained attention in the past year thanks largely to Andrew Yang, who ran in the 2020 Democratic presidential primary on a platform built around universal basic income. Yang failed to win any delegates in the primary, but he built a devoted campaign following and raised the issue of UBI onto the national debate stage. 

    More recently, as the coronavirus pandemic has ravaged the U.S. economy and forced more than 25 million Americans to seek unemployment benefits, the idea of guaranteed income has reemerged as a possible way to stabilize the economy and help people meet their basic needs while millions of businesses are under forced closures.

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    Supporters of UBI such as Yang and Bernie Sanders (I-VT) have noted that the $1,200 cash payment for guaranteed income for those making under $90,000 per year is quite similar.


    Tyler Durden

    Mon, 04/27/2020 – 22:22

  • "Playing Into Putin's Hands" – Critics Lash-Out At Joint US-Russia Declaration On Historic Elbe Meeting
    “Playing Into Putin’s Hands” – Critics Lash-Out At Joint US-Russia Declaration On Historic Elbe Meeting

    Authored by Jason Ditz via AntiWar.com,

    In what seems a very innocuous statement, the US and Russia issued a joint commemoration this weekend of the 1945 meeting of US and Russian troops on the Elbe River, saying it showed the nations “overcoming their differences in pursuit of a greater cause.”

    The intention is to liken the common enemy, Nazi Germany in 1945, to the current foe of the coronavirus pandemic, and suggest that the US and Russia could once again put aside differences to work together in this new crisis.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Russian President Vladimir Putin, Kremlin file photo.

    But because this is 2020, and the statement involves Russia, it necessarily became a political row almost immediately, with the statement panned both by President Trump’s political rivals as a sign of his being too close to Russia, and by anti-Russia hawks who see this as Vladimir Putin trying to trick the US in some way into being less hostile.

    “The ‘Spirit of the Elbe’ is an example of how our countries can put aside differences, build trust, and cooperate in pursuit of a greater cause,” U.S. President Donald Trump and Russian President Vladimir Putin said in a joint statement on April 25. RFE/RL

    “I am sure this was a Russian initiative,” said former official Angela Stent, while Rep. Eliott Engel (D-NY) chalked it up to Trump’s “bizarre infatuation with Russia’s autocratic leader” and said he was “playing into Putin’s hands.”

    Yet the coronavirus really is an opportunity for nations to put differences aside to address mutual threats. Everywhere else in the world such initiatives are being put forward, with the UN even calling for a global ceasefire to address the pandemic. It’s only natural for the US and Russia to also address that possibility.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    US and Soviet soldiers greet each other on the Elbe in Germany on April 25, 1945. Via RFE/RL

    And typical grousing about that notwithstanding, a rapprochement between the US and Russia to focus on coronavirus would only be a good thing, bringing the world’s two biggest nuclear powers away from tensions and seeing if there are ways to cooperate.

    It is also noteworthy that the US and Russia are the two major parties to resist the UN call for a global ceasefire for the pandemic, but may still find some common ground with one another. This may suggest that the entire call for unity may not be lost on them, even if it takes some outside their comfort zone.


    Tyler Durden

    Mon, 04/27/2020 – 22:20

  • Macro Strategist: "Major Bond Markets Are Now The Most Worthless Indicators"
    Macro Strategist: “Major Bond Markets Are Now The Most Worthless Indicators”

    Exactly one month ago, when commenting on the Fed’s unlimited QE, we summarized Jerome Powell’s unprecedented nationalization of what was formerly the world’s deepest and most important market as follows: “the Fed’s takeover of bond markets (and soon all capital markets), means that any signaling function fixed income securities have historically conveyed, is now gone, probably for ever.”

    Now, with the mandatory cool down period to allow “objective contemplation”, others are starting to admit that this was the right assessment. Here is Bloomberg’s macro commentator Mark Cudmore admitting that “Interest Rates Are Past Their Sell-By Date as Guide.”

    His full note is below:

    Long considered the purest macro instrument, major bond markets are now among the most worthless of indicators.

    Conviction is hard to come by right now. It doesn’t help that our established navigation tools are broken.

    Free markets are an endangered species. Extraordinary monetary policy measures are now ordinary and bonds are the most distorted markets as a result.

    It used to be that a 10 basis point move in U.S. 10-year yields indicated a major shift in market thinking. Now? Who cares.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    The only sure message from DM bond markets is that liquidity is abundant. Even the corollary that money is cheap isn’t always strictly true for everyone, precisely because what interest rate you pay on any loan is now far more dependent on who or what you are, rather than what the base rate is in the market.

    The Fed and the ECB both meet this week. Never mind not caring about what the policy rate is, we no longer care about their interest rate guidance. Even the banks’ mutterings on inflation are largely a side-show.

    Almost everywhere, benchmark rates are near zero and will be staying that way for some time. And those policy rates are almost irrelevant to the inflation story, which is instead a narrative about when a resurgence in global economic demand will potentially clash with supply-side destruction.

    What matters from policy makers are the lending and asset-purchase programs. Even there, the message is seeping through that there are no taboos left. “Moral hazard” is an antiquated concept among the supposed stewards of the financial system. With limits removed, the marginal impact of each new measure is diminishing rapidly.

    Will stimulus solve the health crisis? Will financial market manipulation solve the real economic problems on Main Street? Does coronavirus infection provide you with subsequent immunity? When will a vaccine be widely available? Good luck working out the answers to these questions from anything 10-yr government bond yields tell you.

    So with what should we replace Treasury yields as the ultimate macro guide? Funny you should ask — I’d really appreciate it if you could let me know the answer when you find out.


    Tyler Durden

    Mon, 04/27/2020 – 22:19

  • Petition To Oust WHO's Dr. Tedros Attracts More Than 1 Million Signatures
    Petition To Oust WHO’s Dr. Tedros Attracts More Than 1 Million Signatures

    A petition demanding the immediate resignation of World Health Organization Director-General Dr. Tedros Adhanom Ghebreyesus over his handling of the coronavirus pandemic has gathered more than 1 million signatures, according to the Korean Times.

    The petition, which was started by an individual using the handle ‘Osuka Yip’ on Jan. 31, blamed Tedros and his ‘poor leadership’ for the spread of the pandemic, which has killed more than 200k people around the world. And as the FT noted last night, the true death toll could be more than 350k.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    The exact timeline of when the virus first began spreading from person to person in Wuhan remains unclear, as China has withheld reams of critical information about the early days of the pandemic. The Dr. Tedros-led WHO initially tried to help with the coverup by praising China’s response and claiming Beijing’s handling of the situation should be a “model” for countries all over the world.

    In reality, Chinese officials suppressed news about the virus, punished doctors who initially warned about the outbreak, grabbed up all the PPE and other vital equipment, while unleashing the virus on the world by failing to stop millions of Chinese travelers from leaving the country, and hundreds of thousands of people from leaving Wuhan and Hubei.

    Over the weekend, the WHO endured its latest gaffe when it said that ‘immunity passports’ wouldn’t be helpful because it’s unclear whether those who have recovered from the virus are truly immune. The WHO the next day offered a clarification, saying that the exact levels of immunity for former COVID-19 patients have yet to be closely studied. Dr. Scott Gottlieb said on CNBC Monday morning that almost every coronavirus patient would develop some level of immunity, despite preliminary research suggesting that some patients can quickly become reinfected because their bodies don’t produce enough antibodies.

    President Donald Trump accused the WHO of failing in its basic duty to warn the world of the virus and suspended US funding to the WHO – technically an arm of the UN – earlier this month. Two days later, 17 other Republicans on the House Foreign Affairs Committee backed Trump’s decision, saying they had also lost faith in Tedros.

    Disapproval of Dr. Tedros over his kowtowing to Beijing is particularly intense in Taiwan, as the government and the people accuse the WHO of ignoring the great accomplishments of local public health officials in suppressing the outbreak in the ‘renegade province’.

    The petition to oust Dr. Tedros had garnered more than 1,018,453 signature as of Monday morning.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    After announcing his plans to cut US funding for the WHO, Trump was asked at a White House press briefing whether he would reconsider the decision if Dr. Tedros was forced out. Trump refused to answer, though one of his aids called it a “good question.”


    Tyler Durden

    Mon, 04/27/2020 – 22:00

  • Life After COVID: A Look At The New Economy
    Life After COVID: A Look At The New Economy

    Authored by Daisy Luther via The Organic Prepper blog,

    Many Americans have been locked down in their homes for more than a month now, and they’re anxiously awaiting the day when things “get back to normal.”

    I regret to inform you, as I wrote previously, that we’re never going “back to normal.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    The world After COVID will not be like the world Before COVID.

    It’s very important to understand what lies ahead so we can prepare for it.

    Two reasons that the world After COVID will be so different are problems with the economy and the supply chain. Let’s take a look at both and see where we’re headed.

    The After-COVID economy for businesses

    The government stepped in fairly quickly after lockdowns began to approve a massive number of small business loans. These loans were to be distributed by the institution with which the small business does their banking.

    Unfortunately, the outcome would be laughable if it wasn’t so tragic.

    Here’s an example: Chase Bank gaveRuth’s Chris Steak House a $20 million forgivable loan meant for small businesses by dividing it up by locations instead of treating the company like the large corporation that it is. Incidentally, Chase “earned” $100K for processing the loan.  After everyone rightly lost their marbles over this, Ruth’s Chris is returning the 20 mill. Chase and Ruth’s Chris aren’t the only culprits. There were all sorts of shenanigans that meant the fund ran out of money before the legitimate small businesses could even complete their applications. For example, big banks earned ten billion dollars in fees for processing the loans and here’s a list of big companies that played around with this system and drained it of millions.

    Another round of small business loans has been approved by Congress but I’m not really holding my breath that any of this will happen in the way we’ve been told it will.

    So to summarize, a lot of the small businesses who need the money to survive haven’t gotten it yet and may never get it, but big banks and big businesses are sitting pretty with the help of their cronies in Congress. It isn’t a stretch of the imagination to say that the longer a small business stays closed, paying their expenses and holding inventory while not being able to earn income, the less likely they are to reopen successfully (or at all) once the all-clear is given.

    And if they can’t reopen? All those folks they used to employ will be out of a job.

    The After-COVID economy for individuals

    Despite seemingly generous government offerings of stimulus payments and higher-than-normal unemployment payments, getting by is about to get a whole lot harder. First of all, many people haven’t yet received their stimulus payments. Some states still haven’t rolled out their COVID unemployment registration websites, so we have unemployed folks who still haven’t gotten one thin dime.

    It isn’t going to be long before that stimulus money is gone and if unemployment hasn’t yet kicked in, the first week of May is not looking pretty. A lot of folks were unable to make rent or mortgage payments in April, and of the ones who managed to hack together last month’s payments won’t be able to pay rent and mortgages.

    It isn’t just a roof over their heads that people are worried about. The use of food banks has soared over the past month. People who were barely making ends meet before are in a hole from which they may never dig out. And this isn’t out of laziness or any other lack of “virtue” – people can’t go to work because their workplace is closed.

    And it’s a perfect storm. If people are not allowed to work and the government is not following through with its promises of aid, there will be a response – most likely in the form of civil unrest and crime waves.

    At the same time, many of those who have gotten their COVID unemployment are refusing to go back to work. Why would they go back to getting minimum wage when with unemployment and the extra $600 per week, they’re getting close the $3000 a month? Businesses can’t reopen without employees. Unfortunately, when the COVID unemployment is over (it’s currently good for a total of 3-4 months), people may not have jobs to come back to, because, as I mentioned above, the longer a business is closed while still facing expenses, the less likely that business is to survive.

    It’s very likely that even once we’re “open” again, unemployment numbers will remain extraordinarily high.

    Prices are going up.

    Meanwhile, what money people are able to scrape together isn’t going to go nearly as far as it did Before-COVID.

    A lot of folks haven’t been to the store in a month or so. When they do go back they’re going to be in for one hell of a surprise. Prices have increased on just about everything. On the products with no price increase, many companies have reverted to the rather deceptive practice of selling a smaller container for the same price as before. (We found this to be true on both peanut butter and coffee, to name two examples.) You’re going to pay more for things like meat, eggs, canned goods, pasta, frozen pizza, and other popular lockdown foods.

    As well, food manufacturers are halting promotions – so things won’t be going on sale like they used to. Of course, they’re doing this to “help”  us out by making it more expensive, thus keeping people from being able to buy as much.

    “But the tactical dynamic is that we’re in daily discussions with our customers on how to help them meet the needs of their shoppers. And many customers are looking to pull back on promotions as they try to manage the basics of just keeping their shelves stocked.” (source)

    In a given month, “22% of food on store shelves is discounted, according to the companies under its coverage, and the average discount is 23%.” According to Market Watch, getting rid of the discounts will lead to a 5% increase in sales. This means, of course, a 5% increase in what consumers are paying will occur. And that’s just for certain items. Eggs have actually tripled in price since early March and many readers have reported seeing the price of their commonly purchased items increase by 25% all the way up to double the Before-COVID price.

    Then there are the supply chain issues.

    And this isn’t the worst of the news. Shortages are appearing to occur across the country – shortages that stores struggle to hide by spreading out the inventory and filling in gaps with items that are more plentiful.

    Some of the things that are missing are products that originate in China – see this list.

    Other items, like paper products, are also sparse even though many of these things are made in the USA. It isn’t just because of so-called “hoarders” either, as the media wants us to believe. There have been shortages of TP across the globe and the main reason is the fact that everyone is now at home most of the time now. Previously, a lot of a person’s toilet paper usage was outside the home – so everyone was using those giant janitorial supply rolls. Most households are now using 40% more toilet paper than before. This interesting article goes into detail about why there isn’t a quick and easy fix for this.

    Then there are food “shortages.” Interestingly, this problem isn’t necessarily about actual shortages as much as it is processing and distribution.

    Processing plants across the country are shutting down as more and more employees become ill. At least ten large meat processing plants have closed due to the virus. Distribution issues have farmers dumping thousands of gallons of milkplowing under vegetables in the fields, and leaving potatoes to rot.

    A lot of the food being produced was destined for restaurants, hotels, and cruise ships. Diverting it to grocery stores and the millions of people using food banks right now (because they didn’t get their money from unemployment yet, remember?) is unfortunately not as easy as it should be. This article explains some of the issues with getting food to hungry people.

    One of the issues processing. With meat, in particular, this is difficult – most folks aren’t even going to be willing to process their own chickens and it’s wildly unrealistic to imagine a family in the city processing a cow or a pig. With produce, it becomes a little bit easier – anyone can wash fruits and vegetables – but employees are still needed to harvest the food.

    A lot of that scarcity could be remedied if we could reallocate things – if janitorial supplies could be sold to the general public, if farmers could sell directly to stores or consumers, and if farmers could donate unpurchased items to food banks.

    To summarize, farmers are losing billions of dollars and people are going without food, while the food we have is left to rot. Hopefully, President Trump’s new 19 billion dollar plan will allow the federal government to play matchmaker between frustrated farmers and hungry families.

    Introducing another run at UBI

    Let’s put all this information together. Here’s the TL;dr version:

    Trillions of dollars were created from thin air to “help” us through the crisis. Unfortunately, a lot of that money is now lining the pockets of massive businesses that would survive regardless.  Many small businesses will never reopen. Many jobs will never come back.

    People who are getting COVID unemployment would have to take a massive pay cut – for many, more than two thousand dollars a month – to go back to work so they have no interest in returning to their jobs. Why would they when they’re more financially secure sitting at home? But they’re not thinking ahead – these new-found riches are only coming in for 3-4 months.

    People who are not getting money are going to run out very soon (if they haven’t already) and this will result in an uptick of crime and civil unrest. Meanwhile, the money that folks have will buy less as the cost of just about everything goes up and scarcity continues.

    This all leads nowhere good. I’m not saying that COVID-19 itself was a big conspiracy but more a case of “never let a good crisis go to waste.”

    One possible outcome is Universal Basic Income.

    We’re being told we’ve got no place to go except giving away a lot of free money – although they’re calling it something different: the Emergency Money for the People Act. (I previously wrote about UBI here but I thought the trigger would be different).

    This fund would give everyone 16 and over $2000 per month for at least the next six months.

    The bill is called the Emergency Money for the People Act and would provide $2,000 a month for a guaranteed six months or until “employment returns to pre-COVID-19 levels.”

    “Pre-COVID-19 levels” mean the employment to population ratio for people ages 16 and older is greater than 60%. The monthly cash payments would not count as income.

    You could still apply for income-based federal or state assistance programs, such as assistance with purchasing food.

    Who would be eligible for the money?

    • Everyone 16 and older making less than $130,000 annually would receive $2,000 a month;

    • Married couples earning less than $260,000 would receive at $4,000 per month;

    • Qualifying families with children will also receive an additional $500 per child for up to three children.

    So a family of four with two children earning income up to $260,000 a year would receive $5,000. A single tax filer would get $2,000.

    • If you are unemployed, you are eligible for the money, as well.

    • College students will be eligible for the money. They were not eligible for the stimulus payment sent out this week if they were claimed on their parent’s income tax as a dependent.

    • Adults with disabilities were also left out of the stimulus payment since they could be claimed as dependents on others’ tax returns. They would be eligible for the Emergency Money for the People Act. (source)

    What could possibly go wrong with “free money,” right?

    Plenty. Hyperinflation is one major factor nobody’s talking about – this money they want to give away does not exist and is backed by nothing. If you think prices are super-high now, just wait.

    And then there’s the other cost.

    Trust me when I tell you there will be a high price tag for that “free” money and the cost will be liberty. Maybe it will be your freedom to decide where you work. Maybe it will be your freedom to choose what you buy. Maybe it will be mandatory vaccines or microchips or ID cards but it will cost you something that you’ll never get back.

    UBI Emergency Money for the People isn’t a done deal yet. But the government is going to feel that they’re obligated to take some kind of measures to maintain order. (Back to that civil unrest and crime again). And to some degree, they’re right – the current straits Americans are finding themselves in can be chalked up to decisions made by the government. But I can’t imagine that in this direction lies liberty.

    What can you do?

    The answer, as always, lies in self-reliance. The less you need, the better off you’ll be. I’ll go more in-depth later but below, find some general guidelines.

    1. Produce or acquire food as much as possible. Gardening; sprouting; raising livestock for meat, eggs, and dairy; hunting; and foraging are all ways to put food on the table yourself.

    2. Learn to preserve food. When food is plentiful, putting it back by canning, dehydrating, and freezing.

    3. Localize your supply chain. Find local farmers and purchase directly from them. Visit pick-your-own farms, get CSA shares, or hit up your farmer’s market. Buy in as much quantity as you can for the best prices.

    4. Slash your budget. Get spending down to a bare minimum right now while we wait to see how things pan out.

    5. Mend and repair. Instead of throwing things away and buying new when something breaks or gets damaged, learn how to fix things like clothing and household items.

    6. Make do. There are a lot of things we get that we don’t need: upgraded phones, new clothing, decorative items, updated vehicles, newer tools, and small kitchen appliances. Whenever possible, make do with the things that you already have.

    7. Make things last. Use everything to the last drop. Squeeze out that last little bit of toothpaste. Add some water to your dish soap. Use a little less detergent in the laundry. These are tiny changes that can really add up over time.

    8. Be prepared for a lack of services. At some point, as income tax revenue continues to decrease, we’ll start to see cuts in services like garbage pick-up and first responders. Start thinking now about your solutions should these things happen.

    9. Continue building your stockpile. Even though prices have gone up, continue adding food and supplies to your pantry as you can.

    10. Participate in a barter economy. If you have eggs and your neighbor has honey, see if they’re interested in a trade. Do the same with skills – swap yardwork for haircuts, repair something in return for someone else’s used item that you need, supply manual labor in return for part of someone’s harvest. If you run a small business, be open to barter within your local community.

    We’ll talk a lot more about handling these issues in upcoming articles. (Sign up here for the daily newsletter.) A shift in mindset will be essential to survive and thrive in the After-COVID world.


    Tyler Durden

    Mon, 04/27/2020 – 21:40

  • Detroit Democrats Cast Out Fellow Lawmaker Who Had Audacity To Credit Trump For HCQ COVID Cure
    Detroit Democrats Cast Out Fellow Lawmaker Who Had Audacity To Credit Trump For HCQ COVID Cure

    A Detroit Democratic lawmaker was officially censured by her party colleagues last weekend after she credited President Trump with for promoting hydroxychloroquine, which she says saved her life after she contracted COVID-19.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    According to The Detroit News, State Rep. Karen Whitsett of Detroit ‘broke protocol’ by meeting with President Trump and VP Mike Pence during an April 14 meeting of coronavirus survivors.

    “Thank you for everything that you have done,” Whitsett told Trump at the meeting. “I did not know that saying thank you had a political line. … I’m telling my story and my truth, and this how I feel and these are my words,” she said during the meeting.

    Whitsett’s penalty? She was cast out by the 13th Congressional District Democratic Party organization, which unanimously voted via Zoom on Saturday to oust the first-term lawmaker representing Michigan’s 9th House District.

    “We have the ability to be the referee when we see our leaders out there attacking and not being willing to have a discussion to find common ground,” said chairman Jonathan Kinloch. “Based on her actions and recent statements, she’s chosen to be a stand-alone Democrat with the goals of a Republican.”

    According to the resolution, Whitsett has “misrepresented the needs and priorities” of Democrats to the President and public, and that she participated in events with the Republican Women’s Federation of Michigan to express her thanks to Trump.

    Whitsett “has repeatedly and publicly praised the president’s delayed and misguided COVID-19 response efforts in contradiction with the scientifically based and action-oriented response” from Michigan’s Democratic leadership, “endangering the health, safety and welfare of her constituents, the city of Detroit and the state of Michigan.”

    The admonition means she will not get the group’s endorsement for this year nor will she be able to engage in the group’s activities for the next two election cycles. 

    Trump appeared to offer his support for the state representative late Thursday, tweeting, “Disgraceful. (Whitsett) Should join the Republican Party!” 

    The president also tweeted Friday morning about the controversy: “The Fake and totally corrupt News is after her as a means of getting to me. She’s smart and strong, knows the truth. Already a heroine to many!

    Until March, Kinloch was Democratic Gov. Gretchen Whitmer’s community liaison to southeast Michigan. He saidthe censure “speaks to the heart of Democratic representation” and should she wish, Whitsett has seven days to appeal.

    “This is done with unless she appeals,” he said. “We will begin screening someone else to support that district.” –The Detroit News

    Whitsett says she won’t engage in the “pettiness politics” of the Michigan Democratic organization, telling the Detroit News that she’s raised $450,000 in four days for resources for her district.

    I was asked to speak about my COVID experience,” she said. “The board has various issues and I don’t understand what this censure is this censure supposed to do?

    “We are in the middle of a pandemic if anyone has forgotten, which is what Jonathan and the governor should be concerned about,” she said, while stating that she had no involvement with the Republican women’s group.


    Tyler Durden

    Mon, 04/27/2020 – 21:20

  • China Brokerage Forced To Retract Report Admitting Unemployment Rate Is 20%
    China Brokerage Forced To Retract Report Admitting Unemployment Rate Is 20%

    Is China’s unemployment rate 4 times higher than the official one?

    While we would be the last to accuse China of lying about anything – and Jack Dorsey would agree – a Chinese securities brokerage may have been foolish enough to admit the truth about China’s dismal economic reality… followed by promptly retracting an analyst report Monday that put the country’s real jobless rate above 20%, far greater than the official number.

    According to an April 24 report by analysts from Shandong-based Zhongtai Securities, as many as 70 million people could have lost their jobs due to the economic fallout from the coronavirus pandemic, translating into an actual unemployment rate of around 20.5%. The surge in unemployment, according to Bloomberg which saw the report, was due to the outsize impact of the pandemic on services and small businesses, which provide the bulk of job opportunities, they said.

    The urban surveyed unemployment rate is obviously flawed in depicting the unemployment situation, because of China’s special condition that there is a very large group of migrant workers and that the urban surveyed unemployment rate couldn’t truly reflect the employment situation of migrant workers,” the analysts admitted.

    There were about 50 million fewer working migrant workers in the first quarter compared to last year, part of whom were not included in the survey, according to the 11-page original report.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    The problem: if accurate, this means that China is not only lying about the source of the coronavirus, and the number of casualties, but also about its unprecedented fallout on the economy. And to preserve confidence, Beijing is pretending that tens of millions of workers are employed when they are, in fact, jobless.

    The official unemployment rate was 5.9% in March, down from the “record-high” 6.2% in the first two months of the year, according to data from the National Bureau of Statistics, but of course that number is fabricated just like everything else in China. Like every other economic “data” point, the employment reading has been goalseeked in a tight range of around 5% since the series was first introduced in 2016, similar to GDP which had barely budged more than 0.1% vs the consensus number until the coronacrisis.

    In any case, telling the truth was a huge mistake because just like everything else, in mainland China it is verbotten for economists to critique the official job data, a topic of extremely political sensitivity to the Communist Party leadership, especially if the truth is that China is this close to the social disorder that results from tens of millions of jobless people.

    And sure enough, almost immediately after the report was published, it became inaccessible according to Bloomberg. One of the report’s authors, Zhang Chen, said by phone that it had been retracted: “Zhongtai’s attitude is that we should go by the official figures for unemployment,” Zhang said, confirming indirectly that China is lying about the official data and will censor anyone who dares to tell the truth.


    Tyler Durden

    Mon, 04/27/2020 – 21:00

  • Top Manhattan ER Doctor Commits Suicide After Treating Coronavirus Patients
    Top Manhattan ER Doctor Commits Suicide After Treating Coronavirus Patients

    In a shocking example of the psychic toll that those fighting on the front lines of the coronavirus outbreak endure, a top emergency room doctor who treated coronavirus patients at a hospital in Manhattan has committed suicide, the New York Times reports.

    Dr. Lorna M. Breen, the medical director of the emergency department at New York-Presbyterian Allen Hospital, died in Virginia on Sunday, where she was staying with family, according to her father who discussed her death with the Times.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Her father said she had described to him “devastating scenes of the toll the coronavirus took on patients,” the NYT reported.

    “She tried to do her job, and it killed her,” he said.

    Breen’s father, also an MD, said his daughter had contracted the virus, but had gone back to work after recuperating for about a week and a half. Then, the hospital sent her home again, but at this point her family moved to bring her back to Charlottesville, Va.

    Breen, 49, had no history of mental illness, but when she last spoke with her father, she reportedly described a horrifying onslaught of patients found DOA in ambulances, all of them COVID-19 patients.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Dr. Breen

    Her father asked the NYT to “make sure [Breen] is treated like a hero,” since she died doing her job and protecting this country from a devastating health care epidemic.

    “She was truly in the trenches of the front line,” he said. “She’s a casualty just as much as anyone else who has died.”

    Dr. Lawrence A. Melniker, the vice chair for quality care at the NewYork-Presbyterian Brooklyn Methodist Hospital, told the NYT that Dr. Breen was well-respected and well-liked in their hospital system.

    “You don’t get to a position like that at Allen without being very talented,” he said.

    The coronavirus has presented unusual mental health challenges for emergency physicians throughout New York, the epicenter of the crisis in the United States. As the paper added, while ER doctors are inured to treating patients will all kinds of grisly injuries, they’re not accustomed to being at risk of infection themselves, or of passing it to their colleagues.


    Tyler Durden

    Mon, 04/27/2020 – 20:44

  • WHO Mysteriously Deletes Tweet About Reinfection As 'Immunity Passports' Being Debated
    WHO Mysteriously Deletes Tweet About Reinfection As ‘Immunity Passports’ Being Debated

    The World Health Organization (WHO) on Sunday deleted an alarming tweet for unknown reasons suggesting COVID-19 infected persons could catch the disease a second time.

    The tweet was live long enough to be picked up in the media  some of which reported the information as “misleading”  before its quiet deletion later in the day.

    The tweet garnered well over ten thousand retweets and tens of thousands of “likes” before it disappeared. 

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    The controversial statement said: “There is currently no evidence that people who have recovered from #COVID19 and have antibodies are protected from a second infection.”

    Health experts and some publications immediately took issue with the phraseology, pointing out that “no evidence” will be taken broadly taken as ‘confirmation’ that people are not protected via antibodies. 

    Most epidemiologists believe COVID-19 survivors do build up some immunity, but still admit the virus is so new it hasn’t been studied enough to come to definitive conclusions.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Drive-thru coronavirus testing site in the UK, via The Guardian/Shutterstock.

    As Reason pointed out, the controversy comes as the idea of so-called “immunity passports” is being hotly debated

    On Friday, the WHO published a scientific brief on “immunity passports” — the idea that governments should grant special documents to citizens who test positive for COVID-19 antibodies, allowing them to move about freely. The WHO warned that this is premature, since “no study has evaluated whether the presence of antibodies to SARS-CoV-2 confers immunity to subsequent infection by this virus in humans.”

    The WHO is correct that scientists have not determined the degree of immunity enjoyed by COVID-19 survivors.

    One critic, statistician Nate Silver said in a tweet pushing back against the WHO’s Sunday Tweet, saying: 

    …“no evidence” means “something like ‘no definitive proof, yet’… But the average person is going to read it as ‘there’s no immunity to coronavirus,’ which is likely false and not a good summation of the evidence.”

    It appears the WHO deleted the tweet out of concern that it could be misleading to the general public, however, it’s ultimately unclear why they made this decision, instead of just updating it with more nuanced information.


    Tyler Durden

    Mon, 04/27/2020 – 20:40

  • A Federal Bailout Won't Fix States' Finances
    A Federal Bailout Won’t Fix States’ Finances

    Authored by Kevin William son via National Review.com,

    Bailing out the Illinois state pension system is the worst idea from a week in which we were discussing the health benefits of mainlining Lysol. (Please do not mainline Lysol. It will kill you.)

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Irresponsible state and local governments are attempting to exploit the fear and disruption of the coronavirus epidemic to push off the consequences of their decades of reckless and culpably dishonest policies onto the federal government. This will inspire a great deal of conversation about “moral hazard” and “fairness,” but the fundamental problem is something else: Such a bailout would not work because it would not actually solve the real-world problems that threaten to cripple state and local finances.

    Contra Mitch McConnell, the Senate majority leader, this is not exclusively a “blue state” problem.

    State and local governments are facing short-term financial problems that are tied to the epidemic and the imposition of social distancing, lost tax revenue prominent among them. With businesses forcibly closed and unemployment soaring, there is less money coming into state, county, and city tax coffers. Some states are better prepared for this than others: Wyoming maintains a “rainy-day” fund that has socked away in it funds equal to 109 percent of the state’s annual government expenditures. Alaska has more than half a year’s expenditures tucked away, North Dakota 30 percent, New Mexico 27 percent. Most states have a good deal less, and some have very little: New York has only 3 percent, Pennsylvania 1 percent, and Senator McConnell’s home state of Kentucky less than 3 percent. Illinois, to nobody’s great surprise, comes in at 0.0 percent, no doubt from spending all its money on Chicago-style avocado toast.

    Conservatives often have been critical of these funds, characterizing the reserves as excessive and arguing that the funds should be drawn down to finance tax cuts. In uncertain times, Wyoming’s big fat fund looks pretty smart.

    Illinois still looks like Illinois.

    The thing about unforeseeable circumstances is, they’re unforeseeable. Nobody knows which days are going to be rainy, though we do know with a reasonable degree of confidence how many rainy days there will be in a year or a five-year period. Responsible people and governments save up for emergencies — even if they do not know what the emergency is going to be.

    Or they used to. But when credit is cheap, the ability to use debt in lieu of emergency savings can be very alluring. And it even may make financial sense on a limited fiscal horizon.

    Because the United States has for so long relied on driving down interest rates as a form of economic stimulus, carrying lots of debt and very little cash savings may make financial sense on any given day or in any given week. If you can get a 3.5 percent mortgage with inflation at 2 percent, then it makes more sense to keep your money invested than to drain your brokerage account to buy a house or make a big down payment. If you are the federal government and can get your money for nothing, then there’s a certain sort of logic to running big deficits. State and local governments can’t usually borrow quite as cheaply as Washington can, but the incentives are much the same.

    The political incentives are even more powerful than the financial ones. A few curmudgeons and your favorite scold aside, everybody likes spending. Nobody likes paying taxes. If you can get an extra $1 trillion a year to throw at the voters without taxing them an extra $1 trillion a year, then that has strong appeal.

    But the shenanigans get more complicated than that. One of the largest problems facing state and local governments, from Illinois to Oklahoma and from Los Angeles to Dallas, is “unfunded liabilities,” meaning the differences between the promises governments have made to their employees and the money they have set aside to pay for those things.

    This mostly has to do with pensions and medical benefits in retirement. Government workers are a powerful political constituency — they run California — and they want the same thing everybody else does: more. In order to keep them happy, governments may give them bigger salaries, but these have to be paid for on an ongoing basis, which means putting these expenditures in the budget and collecting taxes to pay for them. Those taxes are not very popular with the people who have to pay them. So what governments do instead is ask their employees to forgo larger increases in salary today in exchange for more-generous pensions and retirement benefits in the future. But instead of saving the money they’ll need to pay those future benefits, irresponsible state and local governments spend that money in the here and now, shortchanging their pension funds.

    The short-term problem for ailing state and local governments is diminished tax revenue from the epidemic. That is precisely the kind of problem that can be mitigated through ordinary fiscal responsibility: Don’t take on debt in good times, carry reserves when possible, diversify revenue streams. State and local governments have long experience riding the revenue roller-coaster. In California, much of the state’s revenue comes from capital-gains taxes, while in Texas much comes from energy, and both of those states maintain rainy-day funds precisely because of their experience with the volatility of their important revenue streams. States should carry larger reserves. It is true that it is easier for Alaska to do this than it is for New York State, because Alaska has all that oil revenue, but New York State lacks oil revenue because of Governor Andrew Cuomo’s fracking ban — not because of a lack of oil.

    (What’s your excuse, Pennsylvania?)

    If you doubt that the pension issue is central here, consider Illinois’s request for a federal bailout, which proposes $10 billion in pension aid but only $1 billion to help provide health care to poor people. It also seeks $15 billion in unrestricted assistance to the state and $9.6 billion in direct aid for the cities. This proposal was put together by the Democratic state-senate leader in Illinois, Don Harmon, who knows that current and retired employees are 35 times more important to him and his party than are poor people who need health care — and he did the numbers accordingly.

    Congress cannot solve the problems in Springfield or in any other state capital — even if it knew how, and even if it wanted to. If Washington were to dump a few billion dollars into the lap of the feckless cartwheeling goobers who run Illinois, the underlying problem of chronic underfunding of future pension liabilities would remain, and Illinois would be right back where it is today in a year or two. A bailout would not solve the problem — it would keep the problem from being solved.

    Under our Constitution, Congress cannot simply dictate to Illinois how it organizes its own affairs, and those affairs are going to have to be reorganized. Specifically, Illinois is at some point going to have to enter into negotiations with its pensioners and current employees and get them to agree to accept substantially reduced benefits. The state cannot tax its way out of this hole. Illinois’s unfunded liabilities right now are $137 billion. Another way of saying that is that Illinois has about 15 years’ worth of pension contributions to make up for. Given that making up this deficit would cost Illinois 100 percent of its tax revenues for about four years, it is unlikely to be able to make up the shortfall even if it wanted to. The state already is running chronic deficits as it is.

    When it comes to the question of aid to state and local governments, Washington has to distinguish the short-term problems from the long-term problems. And the long-term problems will not — and cannot — be solved in Congress.

    Illinois and other states with similar problems have a few tools for addressing them: higher taxes, lower spending, reduced benefits, and a few outside possibilities such as asset sales, something Illinois governor J. B. Pritzker has sought to explore. How to mix and combine those approaches is a question of politics. That is has to be done is a question of math.

    And there is no sense in trying to bail out these states until they address the real problem: the epidemic of irresponsible government.


    Tyler Durden

    Mon, 04/27/2020 – 20:20

Digest powered by RSS Digest

Today’s News 27th April 2020

  • Norges Bank Considers Revoking Offer To Incoming Wealth Fund CEO After Left Wing Outrage Campaign
    Norges Bank Considers Revoking Offer To Incoming Wealth Fund CEO After Left Wing Outrage Campaign

    The scandal unfolding at Norway’s $1 trillion sovereign wealth fund, one of the largest piles of oil capital in the world, is beginning to look less like an unseemly glimpse into the incestuous world of Norway’s elite, and more like a textbook case of a cynical tabloid press emboldening critics on the far left.

    On Friday, outgoing fund CEO Yngve Slyngstad’s delivered an apology that surprised even the financial press with its seeming sincerity. In it, Slyngstad mused about how one bone-headed decision had destroyed the public trust he had carefully built over two decades.

    Julie Brodtkorb, chair of the supervisory council of Norges Bank, has said the central bank will decide by Tuesday whether to hold an extraordinary meeting to look into whether the executive board of the central bank followed the proper protocols in appointing Tangen. But we suspect they will find that the proper procedures were, in fact, followed, since Tangen’s explanation of how he ended up with the job has been widely corroborated, and clearly rules out a quid-pro-quo, an idea that was, as we said, pretty tenuous to begin with.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    The fact is, Tangen is making an enormous financial sacrifice to accept the position to lead the sovereign wealth fund. He will take a huge pay cut, and will also be forced to pay Norway’s onermous wealth tax, something his annual salary won’t even cover. He’s essentially paying to hold the job, something Tangen – a native Norwegian – once called “a dream.”

    However, the press and Norway’s political establishment are all furious at Tangen for organizing an extravagant seminar at his alma mater, the University of Pennsylvania’s Wharton School, where Slyngstad and several other Norwegian power players (including the country’s attorney general) attended. Slyngstad attended the seminar shortly after announcing his decision to step down from the leadership of the sovereign wealth fund, a decision that triggered a scramble by the central bank to find a successor who was as well-qualified as Slyngstad.

    Details about the seminar (which included performances by Sting and Gregory Porter) were published by a Norwegian tabloid, which kicked off the scandal. Many on the left raised an eyebrow when the central bank announced that it had appointed Tangen to take over the fund. The staid Norwegian culture leaves little room for Tangen’s flashy hedge funder lifestyle. Bloomberg reported that many Norwegians might “struggle to regard Tangen as a public servant” because of the coverage.

    The crux of the scandal at the central bank is that Tangen’s decision to invite Slyngstad, and then fly him back to Oslo on a private jet, a decision that he said was made to save Slyngstad the trouble of taking a train back to New York from Pennsylvania to catch a flight back to Norway, was read as a possible quid pro quo. However, that’s a pretty tenuous connection to begin with: the gift, while seemingly excessive to the common man, is merely a rounding error for Tangen.

    Plus, the timeline of events, as well as the explanations supplied by Tangen and Slyngstad, appear to support their claims that there was no quid pro quo, and that Slyngstad didn’t have much, if any, role in selecting Tangen as his replacement.

    Tangen said he didn’t apply for the position of leading the sovereign wealth fund; instead, he was contacted by head hunters from executive recruitment firm Russel Reynolds. That story has been corroborated by everybody involved.

    In an effort to “make things right,” the Norges Bank has insisted on reimbursing Tangen for the cost of Slyngstad’s flight and seminar attendance. What we want to know is: How is sticking the Norwegian taxpayer with the tab for these extravagances supposed to quell their anger? Then again, we aren’t Norwegian, and don’t have any first-hand experience with the culture.

    Still, the affair has dominated Norwegian media, thanks largely to left-wing politicians and union leaders who are now insisting that the central bank reconsider Tangen’s appointment, arguing that the ‘jetsetter’ isn’t the right candidate for Norway. Norges Bank’s Supervisory Council, the wealth fund’s watchdog, has given the central bank until April 29 to answer a list of questions surrounding the recruitment process.

    These criticisms, however, fail to take several important factors into account: As we mentioned above, Tangen is making personal sacrifices in terms of his wealth just to accept the decision, which undermines the quid-pro-quo argument, since Tangen has nothing to gain – reputationally or financially – from taking the job. He says it’s a personal dream of his to run the fund. There’s no reason to doubt this.

    In reality, these outraged left-wingers are hurting Norway: Knut Kjaer, the founding CEO of the wealth fund, told the FT that hiring Tangen was “a stroke of luck” for the fund. As we mentioned above, many feared that someone as qualified as Tangen wouldn’t emerge, despite the fund’s largess.


    Tyler Durden

    Mon, 04/27/2020 – 02:35

  • Even The EU Are A Bunch Of 'Karens': Barnier Complains About Brexit Negotiations
    Even The EU Are A Bunch Of ‘Karens’: Barnier Complains About Brexit Negotiations

    Authored by Tom Luongo via Gold, Goats, ‘n Guns blog,

    So, this happened...

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    EU lead negotiator for the free trade agreement with the United Kingdom is complaining in the press again.

    “The United Kingdom cannot refuse to extend the transition and at the same time slow down progress in important areas,” Barnier said, expressing concern that Britain has not presented concrete proposals for certain contentious issues, but did not name the areas, according to DPA news agency.

    H/T TO FORT RUSS

    For once someone is treating the EU the way it treats everyone else and they don’t like it. I guess Michel should change his name to Karen.

    Except the problem here is there’s no manager to talk to because Prime Minister Boris Johnson isn’t listening.

    The typical EU negotiations looks like this, according to former Greek Finance Minister Yanis Varoufakis.

    You walk in with a well thought out proposal, present it in detail thinking it’s the beginning of a negotiation only to find they aren’t listening at all and look at you like you’ve just sung the Swedish National Anthem.

    Well it looks like Boris Johnson and the Brits are treating Barnier and the EU with the same vague contempt that he and the EU treat everyone else and guess what?

    Karen doesn’t like it.

    Remember, the Brits have ask for an extension by June 30th to extend this transition period they are in for another two years or negotiations end on December 31st.

    If no trade deal is agreed to by the two sides by then, trade between them on WTO terms commences. Given the current state of EU politics and its sinking economic conditions the likelihood of the U.K. giving Barnier even the time of day at this point is pretty low.

    He’s behaved appallingly at every stage of these discussions, going back three years, treating the Brits like a bunch of wayward children and the EU the assuming the role of the abusive, distant father.

    If, at this late date, Barnier is accusing the Brits of stalling and complaining about it publicly then there is no deal and Johnson is dead set on a hard Brexit.

    Because while Boris may look like a buffoon, he’s as shrewd a political operator as there is.

    Because we all know what the real story is here, the EU wants to soak the U.K. for the next two and a half years while making them liable for hundreds of billions of pounds to bail out the European banking system.

    That’s why they are pushing for an extension. That’s why they are putting non-starter proposals on the table, if any at all.

    And there’s zero political will in the U.K. to give the EU another shilling.

    Moreover, with Germany ascendant within the EU at the moment, since Chancellor Angela Merkel won the latest round against the Euro-integrationists resisting the call for debt mutualization and Eurobonds, Germany needs exports to the U.K. a whole lot more than the U.K. needs exports to Germany.

    And that provides the dynamic to ensure there will be no tariffs put in place in the event of a hard Brexit. Because if they do it will gut what’s left of German exports to the U.K. and its now-suffocating automobile industry.

    It means the Germans will set a ruthless agenda in the second half of this year in budget talks while it has the Presidency of the European Commission.

    However, it also means that Italy will have a lot of leverage since the Germans don’t want to go back to the Deutschemark anymore than Italy wants to stay in the euro under the current arrangement. A new mark would be far stronger than the euro would be without Germany in it.

    And that would also crush German exports.

    I have to wonder at this point whether Merkel will reverse course on all of the terrible things she’s done to the German economy in the next six months. She has to realize, with her now commanding lead in the polls, she no longer needs the Greens to govern and doesn’t need to encourage them anymore.

    Because their agenda is toxic in the post-COVID-19 world economy. German industry is now severely disadvantaged in a world of $15-20 per barrel oil and $1.50 mcf Natural gas.

    Today the Green energy agenda makes zero sense.

    No amount of stimulus or green spending as championed by ECB President Christine Lagarde will save the European economy and political system. Moreover, the harder ball the Brits play with Barnier over a trade deal, the more they play the Swedish National Anthem game the more countries like Italy will see Brussels for the inept, dysfunctional paper tiger it is.

    And everyone may just get all those funny ideas the Brits had in 2016.

    *  *  *

    Join My Patreon if you think Wall St. spends too much time singing their own praises. Install the Brave Browser to avoid the Karens of the EU.


    Tyler Durden

    Mon, 04/27/2020 – 02:00

  • A Navy Destroyer Is Heading To Port, Crippled By Another COVID-19 Outbreak At Sea
    A Navy Destroyer Is Heading To Port, Crippled By Another COVID-19 Outbreak At Sea

    Will yet another major US Navy warship be disabled by the coronavirus pandemic like the USS Theodore Roosevelt carrier fiasco

    The Navy now reports its Arleigh Burke-class guided-missile destroyer, the USS Kidd has at least 33 confirmed COVID-19 cases among the crew, nearly doubling in the last few days from an initial 18 cases reported last Thursday.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Arleigh Burke-class guided-missile destroyer USS Kidd transits the Pacific Ocean last July, via AFP/DoD.

    The destroyer has a total crew of 350 and is currently off the Pacific coast of South America. Its mission is reportedly related to US counter-narcotics operations off coastal waters of South America.

    At least two sailors have been medically evacuated from the ship to military hospitals in San Antonio, and the destroyer has since begun returning to port for deep a disinfecting cleaning and further testing of crew.

    “The first patient transported is already improving and will self-isolate. We are taking every precaution to ensure we identify, isolate, and prevent any further spread onboard the ship,” commander US Naval Forces Southern Command and 4th Fleet, Rear Admiral Don Gabrielson, said.

    The Navy also indicated all crew have donned N95 masks and other personal protective equipment in efforts to contain the spread. 

    Furthermore an amphibious assault ship identified as the USS Makin Island has been sent to aid the USS Kidd at sea. The Makin Island reportedly has a team of naval doctors aboard, including intensive care capacity and ventilators.

    The USS Kidd plans to ramp up testing of all its crew as fears mount of another possible USS Roosevelt catastrophe. In that ongoing crisis the nuclear carrier starting late last month into April was stricken with over 850 coronavirus cases, among a crew of almost 5,000 – forcing it to dock at Guam and cut short its mission in the West Pacific.


    Tyler Durden

    Mon, 04/27/2020 – 01:05

  • Here's "Polyamory": Multi-Partner Sexual-Rights Crusade On The Horizon
    Here’s “Polyamory”: Multi-Partner Sexual-Rights Crusade On The Horizon

    Authored by John Murawski via RealClearInvestigations.com,

    It was only a few months ago that someone last treated Cassie Johns like a freak.

    During a doctor’s office visit in February, she was asked to list her emergency contacts. Johns, a preschool teacher in Seattle, wrote down two people — Chris and Joan — and identified both as her “partners.” They are two of the four romantic interests Johns has been involved with for many years.

    “‘Oh, that’s so dirty,’” Johns recalled the receptionist saying.

    “And the receptionist literally stepped back from me, in a doctor’s office.”

    Johns, 58, is a polyamorist. She follows a non-monogamous lifestyle in which multiple partners give each other consent to date and have sex with others. Johns’s longest polyamorous relationship has lasted 36 years, twice as long as her former marriage to a polyamorous man. She talks openly about her partners to her preschool students and others.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Scene from a recent TV episode of “House Hunters” featuring three adults searching for a home to build their polyamorous nest. Freepik/Wikimedia. Top Credit: YouTube/People TV/ HGTV

    But her forthrightness has a price.

    “I have lost jobs, I’ve lost an apartment, I’ve lost a car loan,” because of her lifestyle, Johns said.

    “I’ve lost friendly relations with neighbors.”

    Despite the acceptance of campus hook-up culture and Tinder-arranged trysts, more intentional forms of consensual non-monogamy – which can include polygamy, polyamory, open marriages, group marriages, swinging and “relationship anarchy” – are highly stigmatized. Such behavior is widely considered to be abusive, immoral, or emotionally stunted. People in such relationships not only face rudeness and public shaming, they also lack legal protections against discrimination in employment, housing and child custody disputes.

    Polyamorists distinguish their lifestyle from cheating and adultery because, they say, it hinges on the consent of all parties, and can involve unmarried people. Activists say such behavior is more common than many people presume. Some studies suggest that as many as a fifth of Americans have engaged in consensual non-monogamy at some point in their lives. The studies show that at any given time, an estimated 4% to 5% of the population is in a consensually non-monogamous relationship.

    While the coronavirus pandemic and social distancing are expected to put a temporary damper on polyamory, those numbers could rise if the social disincentives were removed – in part because some adulterers and cheaters could become consensual non-monogamists.

    Activists are moving to dismantle the legal and social barriers, and say their goals are beginning to take shape.

    They are laying the groundwork to have their cause become the next domino to fall in a long line of civil rights victories secured by trans people, gays, lesbians, women and blacks. Not too long ago, those marginalized groups were also viewed as unnatural, depraved or inferior, until negative judgments became socially unacceptable and often illegal.

    The aspirations of non-monogamists don’t sound like such a moonshot in an increasingly tolerant society where a transgender man can menstruate and experience childbirth, and Pete Buttigieg, a gay man married to another man, can make a serious run for U.S. president.

    As the topic breaks into the mainstream, some churches are beginning to grapple with the issue, and polyamorous students are forming university clubs and organizing events. Last fall polyamory got attention, some of it sympathetic, when California Rep. Katie Hill, was forced to resign over allegations she was having an affair with a campaign staffer in a “throuple” with her then-husband. A recent TV episode of “House Hunters” featured three adults searching for a home to build their polyamorous nest, and Hollywood celebrities are opening up about their polyamorous lifestyles as well.

    “There is plenty of evidence that consensual non-monogamy is an emerging civil rights movement,” said Heath Schechinger, a counseling psychologist at the University of California, Berkeley, and co-chair of the Consensual Non-Monogamy Task Force, recently created within  the American Psychological Association.

    “I’ve heard from a number of people advocating for relationship structure diversity over the past 20 years who are elated about this issue finally gaining traction.”

    Activists are already working with elected officials in more than a dozen local governments, especially in California, to expand local anti-discrimination ordinances to include a new protected class, “relationship structure,” said Berkeley psychologist and poly activist Dave Doleshal.

    Most efforts are at the informal stage but the city of Berkeley did consider a formal proposal to extend protections in housing, employment, business practices, city facilities or education to swingers, polyamorists and other non-monogamists. The proposal stalled last year amid concerns that it would have required employers to provide health insurance to numerous sexual and romantic partners outside of marriage.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Pro-polyamory marchers in San Francisco in 2004. Especially in California, there are moves afoot to expand local anti-discrimination ordinances to include a new protected class: “relationship structure.” Pretzelpaws/Wikimedia

    Undaunted by that setback, advocates continue to generate a body of ideas and theories that normalize non-monogamy as a form of positive sexuality — and possibly an identity — following a script followed by other marginalized groups. Their efforts have led to reassessments of non-monogamy in the psychological and legal fields, contending the relationships are emotionally healthy and ethical, and thus forging a social movement with a shared identityshared vocabulary, shared history and a shared desire for full recognition.

    And, yes, there is already a polyamory pride flag.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Over the past two decades, nearly 600 academic papers have been written on the subject of non-monogamy, according to one countincluding an assessment of the benefits to children in polyamorous families. Such research creates a body of scholarship to counteract ingrained social attitudes that poly advocates call prejudices and misconceptions. At the same time, the field has spawned more than 50 books, mostly written by women, said Kenneth Haslam, 85, a retired anesthesiologist and polyamorist in Durham, N.C., who helped create the polyamory history archive at the Kinsey Institute in Bloomington, Ind.

    Brian Watson, author of “Annals of Pornographie: How Porn Became ‘Bad’” (2016), is co-authoring a book on non-monogamy throughout history. He said it will feature 50 to 100 prominent figures, such as Victor Hugo and Virginia Woolf, and is deliberately modeled on earlier works about famous gay people.

    Just as women’s rights grew from feminist legal theory and LGBTQ rights from queer theory, non-monogamy is also developing its own historiography, scholarship and theoretical frameworks.

    Still, it’s not easy to pinpoint a polyamorist profile. They are less likely to identify as heterosexual or to conform to gender norms, but academic studies and anecdotal evidence don’t tell a single story. While some non-monogamists consider themselves neo-pagans, anarchists or socialists, others are libertarians or outwardly conventional suburbanites. Some studies say the lifestyle attracts more men, others say more women; some say it appeals to affluent whites, others say a polyamorist’s average annual income is under $40,000.

    In the legal arena, sympathetic scholars are arguing for the extension of legal reforms adopted in family law in recent decades in response to the continued erosion of the nuclear family, which is no longer America’s dominant family structure.

    At least a dozen states now recognize or allow for the possibility of a child having more than two parents, an accommodation for surrogate parents, grandparents, stepparents and other nontraditional families, according to a February legal article by Edward Stein, a professor at the Benjamin N. Cardozo School of Law at Yeshiva University in New York.

    These expansions of the legal concept of family are potential pathways for non-monogamous families to win legal rights of their own, Stein said. Another potential legal opening could be the existing precedents in domestic partnerships and civil unions that were set up locally for gays and lesbians before same-sex marriage was legalized nationwide in 2015. In both cases, legal victories for one group could be extended to another group, a common way that legal developments happen, he said.

    The first steps would likely have to be decriminalizing of adultery in the 38 states that don’t distinguish between consensual and non-consensual non-monogamy. The prohibition of adultery is comparable to anti-sodomy laws whose repeal by the Supreme Court in 2003 cleared an obstacle for recognizing gay marriage, Stein said.

    “I think what we will see is a lot of chipping away at the edges of some of the restrictions we put on what a family is and what a family does,” said Janet W. Hardy, who has written on polyamory for more than 20 years.

    “When the legal challenge comes – and it will – I don’t think it will be from people who identify themselves as poly. I think it will come from blended families and some of the other ways that we are reforming around the idea of family that are legally challenging.”

    One such example was a recent effort by Hartford, Conn., authorities to evict eight adults and three children living as a single family in a 6,000-square-foot mansion.

    The combined family was not polyamorous, said their lawyer, Peter Goselin, but shared financial, domestic and child-rearing responsibilities. In 2014 the city alleged a violation of its zoning rules for single-family homes, but after two years of litigation, the city dropped its case.

    The joint owners and residents of the home claimed a constitutional right to define a family. The octet’s lawsuit against the city includes a brief history of communal family living, from Iroquois longhouses, which housed up to 20 family units, to the communes, cooperatives and collective households of the 19th and 20th centuries.

    “They saw the implications of it,” Goselin said. “Privately they said to me we know this would be encouraging to a lot of people who are in polyamorous relationships.”

    Advocates say that the warnings against the perils of non-monogamy echo the now-debunked concerns about same-sex marriage.

    All of the well-known objections made against multi-person intimate relationships can be made against same- or opposite-sex monogamy as well, resulting in an indefensible double standard,” Ronald C. Den Otter, a political science professor at California Polytechnic Institute wrote in a 2015 article in the Emory Law Review.

    “Sadly, many two-person intimate relationships are dysfunctional, and a closer, more brutally honest look at them should not inspire confidence in their superiority.”

    Once changes get under way, things can move quickly. The rise of the modern gay rights movement in the mid-20th century led to a decision by the American Psychiatric Association in 1973 to remove homosexuality from its list of mental disorders (gender dysphoria was de-pathologized in 2012). Those medical reversals are seen as analogous to the American Psychological Association’s creation last year of its Consensual Non-Monogamy Task Force, formed to destigmatize such relationships and explore changes in public policy.

    Schechinger, the task force co-chair, said it’s much easier to stereotype and hate a marginalized group when people in the normative majority operate by stereotypes and misinformation.

    “That’s part of what the task force is seeking to accomplish – to gather empirical data, promote accurate information about CNM relationships, and ask if these relationships are causing harm or are not,” he said. “And what are the implications on society for promoting a one-size-fits-all model versus promoting people being in touch with what’s the good fit for them.”

    As with the debates over human nature during the gay rights struggle, non-monogamy advocates are also raising the possibility that desiring multiple sexual partners is less a lifestyle choice and more of a sexual orientation. But there can be little doubt that non-monogamy, the norm in the animal kingdom, is natural, and that monogamy is a cultural ideal that developed in humans. 

    But the yen for sexual variety and adventure competes with an equally insistent bugbear: jealousy. And some believe that “green-eyed monster of jealousy” is the more powerful force, making it unlikely that most people could tolerate consensual non-monogamy for their partners and accept it is a social norm.

    “In the long run there’s going to be some resistance because it’s threatening to everybody else, because they recognize the desire for multiple partners is something they have, too,” said David Barash, a zoologist and a professor emeritus of psychology at the University of Washington in Seattle, and author of “The Myth of Monogamy: Fidelity and Infidelity in Animals and People” (2001).

    “They recognize it touches something within themselves that they’d rather keep hidden. And something in their partner that they don’t want to acknowledge, either.”

    Kay Hymowitz, a scholar at the conservative Manhattan Institute, is also skeptical. Her concern is the unintended harmful consequences of disrupting long-established social norms developed to ensure that men commit to rearing their own children, and that powerful, wealthy men don’t hoard women and create a deficit of available options for other males. “Normalizing consensual non-monogamy will become yet another way to ‘privilege’ male desire,” she said. “I know, I know: There are women who believe strongly in consensual non-monogamy [and who] may truly be happier in those relationships than they would be in vanilla relationships. Good for them. But they are a small minority.”

    Hymowitz said that the individual rights of polyamorists, swingers and commune members have to be weighed against the greater social interest, and that case has yet to be made.

    “You’re creating one more arrangement that will be less stable for children and less permanent,” she said. We have enough problems as it is keeping couples together.”

    Nonetheless, longer life expectancies, greater personal freedoms for women, dating apps and the internet are transforming sexual expectations and sexual opportunities, said Elisabeth “Eli” Sheff, CEO of Sheff Consulting in Chattanooga, Tenn., which specializes in sex and gender minorities, and provides expert witness services and relationship coaching. She’s also the author of the 2014 book, “The Polyamorists Next Door: Inside Multiple-Partner Relationships and Families,” based on a longitudinal study of more than 500 polyamorists.

    “We don’t live in a monogamous society. We live in a society in which people pretend monogamy is the norm,” said Johns, the Seattle polyamorist who offered the poly mantra that it’s possible to romantically love more than one friend just as it’s possible to love more than one child.

    Non-monogamy has a long history, more ancient than King David’s multiple wives and concubines in the Old Testament. Today’s non-monogamists often cite as their inspiration novelist Robert Heinlein’s treatment of the subject in his 1961 sci-fi classic “Stranger in a Strange Land.” Gay men are sometimes hailed as trend setters because they are accustomed to flexible “monogamish” marital arrangements that allow for outside dalliances.

    One of the primary texts associated with the contemporary movement is Janet W. Hardy and Dossie Easton’s 1997 “The Ethical Slut” which lays out the best practices for what advocates hold up as consensual, ethical and responsible non-monogamy.

    “I don’t think it has ever had the groundswell that it has now,” said Hardy, who now is running into polyamorous adults brought up by polyamorous parents. “A lot of us are second-generation now.”

    Poly activists point to many parallels between earlier movements that were born underground and operated under the radar: secret clubs, insider argot, referral networks for poly-friendly therapists, doctors and lawyers. The National Coalition for Sexual Freedom‘s Kink and Poly Aware Professionals referral list includes about 300 lawyers, said Susan Wright, the Baltimore-based organization’s executive director.

    The world of polyamory overlaps with the subculture of kink and BDSM, which refers to the erotic practices of bondage, domination, submission and sadomasochism. As a sign of the movement’s maturation, some now embrace the kind of middle-class respectability that made gay marriage palatable to mainstream society.

    “We’re a very boring and respectable couple!” polyamorist Carrie Ichikawa Jenkins beamed to The Chronicle of Higher Education in 2017. Jenkins, a University of British Columbia philosophy professor, has a husband and a boyfriend, both of whom teach at UBC. The Chronicle article paints a portrait of the polyamorous triad in domestic hues befitting Norman Rockwell: “On the wall hang sepia-toned photographs of someone’s relatives. On the front porch are a swing and a coffee table with an ashtray on it.”

    The civil rights concerns of the non-monogamous and other minorities are dissimilar in some ways. Unlike earlier civil rights movements, non-monogamy has the potential of affecting a majority of the population, since membership in the group is theoretically open to everyone.

    “In a way, poly is a deeper threat to the dominant culture than gay culture,” said Geoffrey Miller, a polyamorist in an open marriage and a psychology professor at the University of New Mexico.

    Miller, a member of the APA task force, compares the state of non-monogamy movement to gay rights in 1966, in the calm before the storm of the Stonewall Riots, the 1969 protests that launched the modern gay rights movement. The closeted movement had about 50 organizations in the late 1960s but exploded to 1,000 by the mid-1970s, said John D’Emilio, a retired professor at the University of Illinois, Chicago, who taught on the history of sexuality and the LGBTQ movement, and is co-author of “Intimate Matters: A History of Sexuality in America” (1988).

    Conservatives had long warned that redefining marriage to allow same-sex unions would throw open the door to allowing any kind of marriage, from polygamy to incest. Those arguments reached a crescendo when gay marriage was winding its way through the legal system, en route to the 2015 ruling by the U.S. Supreme Court to legalize same-sex marriage. In that 5-4 decision, Chief Justice John Roberts wrote a dissenting opinion warning of what was to come.

    “It is striking how much of the majority’s reasoning would apply with equal force to the claim of a fundamental right to plural marriage,” Roberts wrote.

    “Why would there be any less dignity in the bond between three people who, in exercising their autonomy, seek to make the profound choice to marry?” 

    Princeton professor of jurisprudence Robert George was among those who warned of the slippery slope. In a 2015 article, he predicted that the civil rights challenges were inevitable, but initially judges would “swat away on procedural grounds the first few constitutional challenges to marriage laws.” Gradually the legal objections will give way to the force of logical consistency.

    He told RealClearInvestigations in an email that this process is often characterized by indignant dismissal of the logical implications, followed by total capitulation.

    “Of course, advocates of revising the law denounced us not only as ‘bigots’ but as ‘scare-mongers,’” George said.

    “There was, they insisted, no ‘slippery slope’ from same-sex marriage to polyamory. The two concepts had nothing to do with each other.

    “I could see that this was nonsense — often disingenuous nonsense,” George said. “So I am not in the least surprised to see what is happening now. We have quickly gone from, ‘It will never happen,’ to ‘You’re a bigot for thinking there is anything wrong with it.’”


    Tyler Durden

    Mon, 04/27/2020 – 00:15

  • Japan Printer Go Brrr As BOJ Launches Unlimited QE, Expands Corporate Bond Buying
    Japan Printer Go Brrr As BOJ Launches Unlimited QE, Expands Corporate Bond Buying

    As was purposefully leaked last week to avoid any chance of market surprise, that giant monetary chemistry lab that is the Bank of Japan did precisely as had been reported, and on Monday morning the BOJ joined the Fed’s and announced it would launch unlimited QE, or rather that it would purchase “a necessary amount of JGBs without setting an upper limit so that 10-year JGB yields will remain at around zero percent.” Previously, the BOJ’s guideline on government debt was to increase holdings by around 80 trillion yen ($743 billion) per year, which is ironic as the BOJ was having trouble monetizing a far smaller percentage of this amount.

    While we wish Kuroda the best of luck in overtaking the Fed and ECB in nationalizing the market, we will remind the central banker that it is not an issue of monetization demand, but rather supply, that has shrank the impact of Japan’s QE on devaluing the Japanese Yen, with the annual amount of bonds purchased by the central bank declining consistently every year as there are simply not enough bonds available in the open market for the central bank to buy, and is also one of the reasons why Japan has been urged by various entities to boost its fiscal stimulus to provide the BOJ with the “helicopter money” ammo it so desperately needs to keep the Japanese economy running.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

     

    Monday’s decision signals that the BOJ’s concern over the pandemic has intensified quickly with Bloomberg reporting that “unlimited bond buying was not an ideal option to take, in the view of some officials, as it further narrows bank’s policy choices at a time of heightened uncertainty.” On the other hand, it underscores that central banks are now fresh out of any original ideas and will keep doubling down on policies that crashed the system until the entire fiat edifice crashes.

    As was also leaked before, the central bank also increased its scope for buying corporate bond and commercial paper by raising its ceiling on holdings to 20 trillion yen, according to its statement Monday in Tokyo.

    In keeping with the now default gibberish of the past few years, Kuroda’s central bank said it will “conduct further active purchases of both JGBs and T-Bills for the time being, with a view to maintaining stability in the bond market and stabilizing the entire yield curve at a low level.”

    The BOJ said that it would keep negative rate and yield target for 10-year JGB unchanged, and added that it will continue to closely monitor the impact of coronavirus and won’t hesitate to take additional easing measures if necessary although what the BOJ can do after launching unlimited QE while it is also massively monetizing the entire stock market- short of actively starting short squeezes – was unclear.

    As Bloomberg notes, a return to relative stability in stock markets and reduced concern over the possibility of a sudden strengthening of the yen have given the BOJ some breathing space to leave its main interest rate policy levers untouched. Furthermore, the BOJ also likely saw a need to take action before the Fed and the European Central Bank meet later this week, so as not to be seen lagging behind its peers, which too have become deranged chemical labs.

    The bank had come under increasing pressure to take more action as the declaration of a nationwide state of emergency this month brought more shutdowns and a growing need for financial support.

    The central bank also said it “expects short- and long-term policy interest rates to remain at their present or lower levels,” removing a reference to a need to “pay close attention to the possibility that the momentum toward achieving the price stability target will be lost.”

    In short, the BOJ isn’t even pretending any more that it is pursuing a “stable” 2% inflation, a goal which is now – for all intents and purposes until the arrival of currency collapse and hyperinflation – impossible to achieve. Instead the only goal now is spraying helicopter money on as much of the population as possible.

    The additional measures announced by Governor Haruhiko Kuroda also show a greater degree of fiscal-monetary policy coordination, with Prime Minister Shinzo Abe unveiling more than $1 trillion in stimulus this month and an accompanying plan to issue more bonds.

    “The BOJ must be aggressive as Japan’s virus situation is getting worse,” Yoshimasa Maruyama, chief market economist at SMBC Nikko Securities, said before today’s decision. “The BOJ will continue to be walking on a tight rope with few tools left.”

    And speaking of few tools, with the BOJ decision leaked so far in advance today’s announcement was just a formality, there wasn’t even a trace of a reaction in the market.


    Tyler Durden

    Mon, 04/27/2020 – 00:14

  • "Driving The Gringos In The White House Crazy": Iran & Venezuela Deepen Sanctions-Busting Cooperation
    “Driving The Gringos In The White House Crazy”: Iran & Venezuela Deepen Sanctions-Busting Cooperation

    Two so-called ‘rogue states’ recently targeted for US-imposed regime change are helping each other fight coronavirus as well as Washington-led sanctions. 

    Late last week it was revealed Venezuela received a huge boost in the form of oil refinery materials and chemicals to fix the catalytic cracking unit at the 310,000 barrels-per-day Cardon refinery, essential to the nation’s gas supply.

    This as a fuel and food shortage crisis has driven protests and clashes with police, especially in hard-hit rural areas, over the past month.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Iran’s Mahan Air jet previously seen at Simon Bolivar International Airport, Reuters/VOA.

    “Thanks to the support of our allies in the Islamic Republic of Iran… We will overcome our difficulties,” Erling Rojas, vice minister for refining and petrochemicals in Venezuela’s Oil Ministry, stated when the much-needed refinery parts arrived last Thursday.

    He further underscored in colorfully provocative rhetoric that Iran’s support is “driving the gringos in the White House crazy.”

    It’s expected such sanctions-busting cooperation will continue between the two countries, as there’s also been an uptick in planes flying directly between capitals, as Reuters reported:

    Planes flying from Tehran landed at the Las Piedras airport on the Paraguana peninsula in western Venezuela, where Cardon is located, on Wednesday and Thursday, according to data on flight-tracking service FlightRadar24 reviewed by Reuters. The planes were operated by private Iranian airline Mahan Air.

    Washington imposed sanctions on Mahan Air in 2011, saying it provided financial and other support to Iran’s Islamic Revolutionary Guards.

    Venezuela is also busy attempting to restore operations at the 146,000-barrels-per-day El Palito refinery in central Venezuela as well.

    The two sides are further said to be deepening cooperation in terms of response to the coronavirus pandemic. It’s hit the Islamic Republic far worse over the past months, while Venezuela’s numbers are deeply uncertain given what’s attributed to lack of widespread testing and transparency. 

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    The Amuay-Cardon refinery in Paraguana, located about 350 miles West of Caracas, has in recent years suffered repeat power outages, major explosion accidents, and inability to update operational equipment due to US sanctions. Image via AFP/PRI.

    Iranian state media described a major conference call between top Iranian and Venezuelean health officials where the two sides “exchanged experiences, clinical protocols and COVID-19 preventive measures in the context of the World Health Organization’s recommendations.” It followed agreements for deepening ties amid the crisis made between Presidents Hassan Rouhani and Nicolás Maduro during an April 13 phone call.

    Iran’s COVID-19 count is a over 90,000 confirmed cases, including nearly 6,000 deaths, while Venezulea officially has 323 confirmed cases and ten deaths.


    Tyler Durden

    Sun, 04/26/2020 – 23:50

  • COVID-19 Color-Revolution: California Declares Nation Statehood As Trump Moves To Quell 'Mutiny'
    COVID-19 Color-Revolution: California Declares Nation Statehood As Trump Moves To Quell ‘Mutiny’

    Authored by Joaquin Flores via The Strategic Culture Foundation,

    Bloomberg published a stunning piece on April 9th promoting the secession of California from the U.S., in an op-ed by Francis Wilkinson titled Gavin Newsom Declares California a ‘Nation-State’, which resurrected John C. Calhoun in a neo-confederate argument favoring nullification.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Bloomberg is part a strategy to prevent Trump from a second term by way of legal means (election), and has now brought to the fore the spectre of secession or nullification. This does not mean we should normally expect some announcement by Governor Newsom that ‘The California Republic is an independent nation-state ’. Yet amazingly, it has been almost verbatim said in this way.

    The Bloomberg article details how California Governor Newsom has begun using that term and also related legal constructions in discussing how California will manage the coronavirus response on its own.

    Imagine an alternate timeline where Trump denied there was a significant threat posed by the coronavirus and adjusted policy to reflect that. After all, the mortality rate appeared very low compared to the infection rate. Then imagine that governors Cuomo and Newsom behaved similarly to how we’ve seen them perform over the past month or so. In fact, their behavior makes even more sense in our hypothetical, alternate reality. But imagine if their punches could land because there was some semblance of a reality that could support the barrage.

    As we have made the point to communicate numerous times, 25% of Americans would like their state to secede from the United States peacefully.

    In the Event 201 exercise which appears to have been made public on YouTube, the situation of Arab Springs being a result of political blow-back from coronavirus measures, is discussed briefly using the precise phrase ‘Arab Spring’. Dealing with destabilization and messaging in that context, consumes most of the last several stages of the simulation conducted in October 2019.

    Those already familiar with the Arab Spring phenomenon as intentionally created ‘Color Revolutions’, will understand the connection between what appear as ‘bottom-up’ or grass-roots activism being coordinated covertly with dual-power structures within a country which is being targeted for regime-change. Given that the original Arab Spring was not only a Color Revolution, but used the ‘too-big-to-fail’ bailout money in 2008 to corner a market on perishable goods – prices affecting targeted countries were jacked-up, causing bread-riots and public protests. Regime-change was rarely a demand of protests, rather these related to the price of food. Foreign media like CNN and Al-Jazeera appeared to put words in the mouths of protestors and talked of revolution.

    The take-away point here is that the ‘original’ Arab Spring was a concocted development, and so references to these in what many see in Event 201 as a descriptor of allegedly ‘concocted’ events now underway, as Mike Pompeo quipped is a ‘live exercise’, are quite apt. Because these are not simply matters of what we might read into the Event 201 proceedings, but how those involved in the event understood themselves and each other.

    Having seen the repeated attempts to nullify the outcome of the 2016 election raises serious questions about the scope of the aims of the current presidency. The current president seems to provoke a highly unusual, extra-partisan and extra-political conflict that occurs no more than two or three times in a century, where it seems that sacrosanct geopolitical allegiances and long-reaching security policies risk being overturned. In our alternate time-line, we may see California moving further on the secession road and Joe Biden ‘talking sense and unity’ to California ‘President’ Newsom.

    Bloomberg Hails Calhoun’s Nullification Argument

    Here are some of the key fragments from the article which are particularly revealing:

    <>

    <>

    <>

    <>

    <>

    <>

    <>

    We could also point to either the daily coronavirus press conferences headed by New York Governor Cuomo which have been broadcast nationally – positioning Cuomo as a sort of ‘anti-Trump’ or ‘alternate president’ – or we could point to the Atlantic’s fair treatment of the Texas secession movement in December of 2019. That piece deserves our attention, because it pins both the Texas and California secession movements as having had some Russian attention. The leader of the Texas movement makes an apology for having gone to Russia and attended a conference relating to Texas secession.

    That part is critical in terms of a broader strategy being used now against the American president. This is one where ostensibly foreign tactics used in fourth-generation warfare (4GW) to destabilize power in the U.S., or alternatively, 4GW tactics used by the U.S. to destabilize a foreign power – can be used also by a power-structure from within the U.S. to destabilize a particular and opposing other vector in the same country – in this case, the presidency.

    In a piece I authored at the Ron Paul Institute for Peace when such a tactic was tried and failed in Armenia, in what was called the ‘Electric Yerevan’, we explain how 4GW uses thousands of years-old hybrid warfare tactics combined with Baudrillardian hyper-reality simulation, and Freudian psychoanalysis to manipulate mass psychology. These are adapted to Gene Sharp and his student Srdjan Popovic’s developments on some of the ideas of Saul Alinksy on Color Revolution. With a federal government unresponsive to a public which is increasingly panicked over life and death questions, such as for example Covid-19, then a combination of conscious and subconscious themes are visible, leading towards destabilization and, in this case, secession.

    But how could such a potentially foreign-backed project like California (or Texas) seceding from the United States operate under the radar screen of the NSA?

    In short: insulating a country from foreign destabilization campaigns would reasonably involve taking over leadership of those campaigns. This means that intelligence would involve more than observation and intel gathering, but would also involve leading the organization – assumedly to frustration. But such an endeavor would equally well serve as a cover for actually operating the secession campaign towards success, if the aim was for the operating power-structure to leverage it against an opposing other vector such as the Trump presidency.

    This is how the U.S. intel was able to explain-away organizing, recruiting, and administering aspects of the Al Qaeda/ISIS project when journalists or intel officers without a need to know, would encounter evidence that this was indeed occurring.

    What we can understand from this Bloomberg piece in the broader context to be discussed in brief, is that this secessionist article is a fragment or artifact of another possible reality that appears to have been planned.

    Trump’s Counter-Strategy

    Trump showed signs as late as the end of February that he would continue to deny the reality of Covid-19 by calling some aspect of the public hype around it a DNC hoax, as we already h ad. In so doing, his political line was apparently predicted by the Deep State actors whom we may call team nullification. It seemed that Prime Minister Johnson’s ‘herd immunity’ approach and Brazil’s Bolsonaro’s  ‘hands-off’ attitude would soon be mirrored by Russia. Given that Russia now has just 47,000 cases and just three-hundred and sixty related deaths, and this is following a variation of the ‘internationally accepted’, symptoms-only method of determining Covid-19 (without an anti-bodies test), it would have made sense back then that Russia would down-play coronavirus following more realistic projections, if it would have the adverse effect of compounding economic woes and create problems for Putin.

    Just as the tanking of the economy would work against Trump, the coronavirus pandemic appeared a ‘lose-lose’ scenario for him provided that the public had a restored confidence in mainstream media reporting, stemming from its handling of the epidemic, which could be weaponized against Trump. In other words, Americans would listen to the media and what the WHO said, as orchestrated by team nullification, and lay serious blame on the ‘science-denying right-wing’ of Trump, Bolsonaro, Johnson, and Putin.

    That’s why the pre-coronavirus attacks on Trump as a ‘science-denier’ had much farther reaching designs than simply a manufactured public debate with Greta Thunberg over global warming. Remember that in the film Contagion it is deforestation that causes a bat to take residence at a pig-farm, where the novel coronavirus is born.

    What happened as things played out?

    Bolsonaro stayed with his version, and was ultimately removed from actual power by the military. This serves as a critical reminder by itself of what our ‘alternate timeline’ may have had in store for Trump, if we consider the ramifications of California making bolder moves to secede.

    Boris Johnson apparently became so ill that he ‘saw the light’ and changed UK policy towards a strict quarantine.

    Putin, however, never went for the predicted script and instead used the very low numbers relating to covid-19 to nevertheless issue a quarantine. This was a policy that somehow dovetailed with Trump’s, and was interestingly reinforced in the aftermath of their widely discussed phone call.

    History as told through FOIA may someday reveal what team nullification, pairing up with never-Trumper Bill Gates, may have tried to pull off. It really brings us back to Pompeo’s statement.  More to the point what he knew – when he knew it was a live exercise, and under what conditions it was discovered, planned, or allowed to play out – and to what degree. ‘Deep State’ Department Mike is an interesting being who can appear to act as a diplomat and consensus builder on policy between the Deep State and Trump.

    Trump bucked the probable response model that team nullification planned around.

    Instead he was very available to the needs of New York and California, and he approached his media strategy with three precise attacks.

    One, he made a commercial showing various state leaders including Cuomo and Newsom thanking the president for his availability and the scope of his response. This is shown in contrast with recent attacks disputing that the president has the authority to ‘open the country’.

    Two, he made a press-conference video showing how it was the WHO themselves who initially down-played the threat. This particular part shines in brilliance because leading up to and after Easter weekend, the vast majority of Trump supporters are what the mainstream media will no doubt soon be calling ‘covid-deniers’. This seemed to be leading up to some big announcement right after Easter from Trump that Covid-19 was a hoax, and attack WHO and defund it. But instead he was able to justify defunding WHO and bucking their predictive model, by showing how they underestimated the impact of the novel coronavirus.

    Three, he took to twitter and openly called out the Newsom/Cuomo ‘mutiny’.

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    None of these three moves happened randomly the week after Easter, but rather were aimed at countering moves on team nullification and on the part of Newsom and Cuomo, to declare that the president did not have authority over the states.

    This all happened immediately during the week of April 13th, and so the timing of the April 9th Bloomberg piece preparing the public for pro-secessionist talking points, was not random. Almost nothing is random.

    While we enter May with an in-tact government, future transpiring events will no doubt become ‘interestinger and interestinger’ as we venture further down the rabbit hole.


    Tyler Durden

    Sun, 04/26/2020 – 23:25

  • Goldman Sees Imminent "Momentum" Crash As All S&P Gains Come From Just 5 Stocks
    Goldman Sees Imminent “Momentum” Crash As All S&P Gains Come From Just 5 Stocks

    With a third of companies having reported Q1 results so far, earnings season has proven to be neither a spoiler nor a catalyst, with modest market reaction to some truly horrific numbers as investors are now ready to ignore earnings until well into 2021 when a V or U-shaped recovery is expected to kick in.

    That said, the numbers have been mixed, for anyone monitoring rather than looking through them because they are the fuzziest figures since Q1 2009 just after Lehman’s bankruptcy. While 65% of US companies that have reported beat estimates (vs 50% in Europe and Japan), this represents the worst margin in a decade.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Meanwhile, those hoping for some guidance will have to keep waiting as visibility from the C-suite is so poor that almost 90% of reporting companies have withdrawn guidance. Worse, the actual numbers for Q1 which caught the tail end of March as much of corporate America shut down, are coming in horrendous with US EPS of -24% yoy is coming in some 9% lower than consensus expectations, which raises questions about whether a prevailing view for rapid earnings recovery in H2 are too optimistic, as JPM cautions. On a rolling four-quarter basis, the consensus has S&P earnings surpassing pre-crisis levels by Q4 2020, which would be tough to reconcile with the JPM Economics view that GDP will not return to pre-crisis levels until after 2021, even though JPM’s Marko Kolanovic now expects new S&P500 all time highs in the first half of 2021 (using a rather ornate DCF of the entire S&P500 to justify his view).

    Which in turn brings us to something we showed two weeks ago when we noted that the “the S&P is now just a handful of mega stocks, because as the chart below shows the largest 5 stocks in S&P500 now account for 22% of market cap, even higher than during the dot com bubble.”

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Picking up on this observation, Goldman’s David Kostin in his latest Weekly Kickstart writes that the fundamental volatility captured in 1Q earnings reports explains why stock return dispersion has jumped to the highest level since the Financial Crisis. According to the Goldman strategist, “the gap between the three month returns of the S&P 500 stock one standard deviation above the average vs. one standard deviation below the average has registered 40%, nearly twice the 10-year average of 23%.”

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    What is bizarre, is that this split in the market has occurred despite average stock correlations reaching the highest levels on record, a dynamic that would normally reduce return dispersion. One explanation for this paradoxical confluence is that record correlations have been outweighed by extreme price volatility and a wide gap between the outlooks for stocks perceived to be most vulnerable to the current economic shock (virtually all stocks except the 10 biggest ones) and those with the most resilient balance sheets and business models (mostly Microsoft, Apple, Amazon, Alphabet and Facebook).

    To validate this observation, Kostin notes that Goldman’s Strong Balance Sheet basket has returned -5% YTD while the Weak Balance Sheet basket has returned -27%.

    More confounding for so-called “stock pickers” is that not only did return dispersion rise during the market sell-off, but it has also increased during the market rebound. AS a result, many stocks that outperformed during the market sell-off have continued to outperform even with the S&P 500 retracing half of its drawdown, and nowhere is this more obvious than in the steamrolling of value stocks by “growth” names…

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    … and also of large-caps over small-caps… 

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    where the divergence is now unprecedented.

    Indeed, as shown above, as the market swooned in late February and March, investors rotated to strong balance sheets, large-caps, Technology companies, and other “quality” stocks viewed as safe havens. These stocks lagged during the first two weeks of the market rebound following its March 23 bottom but have resumed their outperformance more recently as investors remain concerned about the outlook for corporate earnings despite the boost to valuations from extraordinary policy support.

    Which brings us to what is the one concern more often cited among Goldman clients. According to Kostin, the persistent outperformance of a handful of mega-cap stocks has supported the level of the S&P 500 index but raised investor concerns about narrow market breadth.

    As Kostin puts it, “many market participants – ourselves included – have expressed incredulity at the fact that the S&P 500 trades just 17% below its all-time high amid the largest economic shock in nearly a century.”

    However, below the surface of the market, the median S&P 500 constituent trades 28% below its record high. This 11
    percentage point gap is one measure of market breadth…

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    … which now stands roughly a standard deviation below its historical average.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Going back to our thesis that “The Market Is Now Just 5 Stocks“, Kostin next notes that because many of the recent  outperformers had also been market leaders prior to the coronacrisis, their recent gains have led to a surge in already- elevated market concentration. While coming into 2020, the five largest S&P 500 stocks accounted for 18% of index market cap, matching the share at the peak of the Tech Bubble in March 2000, since then, those stocks (MSFT, AAPL, AMZN, GOOGL, FB) have risen to account for 20% of market cap, representing the highest concentration on record.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Which brings us to Goldman’s ominous warning #1: “We opined in January that the earnings power and valuations of the top five stocks suggested they could avoid the fate of the top stocks in 2000. However, the further market concentration rises, the harder it will be for the S&P 500 index to keep rising without more broad-based participation.” In other words, if the dispersion continues to soar, and if the entire upside in the S&P500 is thanks to just five stocks, not even Goldman can see a happy ending.

    If that wasn’t enough, Goldman also has an ominous warning #2, namely that sharp declines in market breadth in the past, of the kind we see now, have often signaled large market drawdowns. For example, in addition to the Tech Bubble, breadth narrowed ahead of the recessions in 1990 and 2008 and the economic slowdowns of 2011 and 2016.  This is also observed empirically, as historically sharply narrowing breadth has signaled below-average 1-, 3-, and 6-month S&P 500 returns as well as larger-than-average prospective drawdowns.

    That said, Goldman refuses to put a timeline to its dour outlook, and notes that periods of narrow market breadth can last for extended periods. Since 1980, the breadth measure charted in Exhibit 2 has indicated 14 episodes of breadth narrowing more than one standard deviation, as it does today. The median episode persisted for three months, with the longest lasting 27 months from 1998-2000.

    However, eventually, “narrow market breadth is always resolved the same way. Often, narrow rallies lead to large drawdowns as the handful of market leaders ultimately fail to generate enough fundamental earnings strength to justify elevated valuations and investor crowding. In these cases, the market leaders “catch down” to weaker peers.” This is the scenario laid out by Nomura last week in our post Spectacular Momentum Crash” Imminent As Record Human Hedge Fund Selling Meets Furious Robot CTAs Buying.” In other cases, an improving economic outlook and strengthening investor sentiment help laggards “catch up” to the market leaders, which also results in a violent drawdown as the leaders get repriced sharply lower.

    The bottom line, however, is that in both cases, “on a relative basis the outperformance of market leaders eventually gives way to underperformance.”

    What does this mean in practical terms? As Goldman concludes, since 1980, its long/short Momentum factor has generated a median unconditional 12-month return of +400 bp “but a 12-month return of -300 bp following periods of narrow market breadth like today.” In short, while it may not necessarily be “spectacular”, Goldman agrees with Nomura that a momentum crash is dead ahead.  And with that pessimistic view, Goldman – which just two weeks ago called the “bottom” in the S&P500, has joined Morgan Stanley’s “notorious bear-turned-bull” Michael Wilson in warning that stocks are now overbought and that a “correction will begin soon.”

    Finally, Goldman has a word of hope for all those who have been crushed by the growth-over-value and large-over-small cap steamrolling: first, small-caps and laggards have outperformed coming out of every bear market and major market correction during the last 40 year. Furthermore, “in the past, wide valuation dispersion has been a strong signal for value stock outperformance over 2- and 3-year horizons but has been a much weaker indicator for short-term returns.”

    Now if only we had the same level of comfort as Goldman, that we are coming out of a major market correction instead of just enjoying a record bear market rally as shown in this chart from Deutsche Bank…

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    … before we enter the next one.


    Tyler Durden

    Sun, 04/26/2020 – 23:20

  • "We Haven't Had A Crisis Like This": Tom Barrack Says US Property Market Is In "Chaos"
    “We Haven’t Had A Crisis Like This”: Tom Barrack Says US Property Market Is In “Chaos”

    If there is one person who knows real estate, it’s Tom Barrack, and if what Tom Barrack sees in the US real estate market is accurate, a real estate crash worse than 2008 is coming.

    Speaking to Bloomberg TV, Barrack – whose Colony Capital owns a $50 billion real estate portfolio – said the US property market is in “chaos” and still on the verge of collapse because the federal government and local authorities are allowing renters and homeowners to skip payments because of the coronavirus.

    “We haven’t had a crisis like this,” Barrack said in an interview Friday on Bloomberg Television. “We’ve never had one where we just have a government taking of revenue.”

    In a move that prompted Moody’s to predict that up to 30% of all mortgages will default in the near future – one which we said presages the next crisis – the stimulus bill passed by Congress last month included a provision allowing borrowers to defer payments for as long as a year without penalty on federally backed mortgages. Meanwhile, cash flows have further collapsed as cities and states throughout the country have suspended evictions and foreclosures to help the tens of millions of Americans who’ve lost their jobs in the past 5 weeks.

    While lenders and landlords can normally use the legal system to enforce rent and interest obligations, “all those options are out the window”, Barrack said. One month ago, the Colony CEO was the first big real estate investor to warn publicly about the perilous state of the industry and to call for government intervention. He proposed an orchestrated forbearance, a “time out” in which any payments could be accrued onto leases and loans.

    And now that got much of what he was expecting, Barrack is suddenly getting second thoughts.

    Many of the measures he sought then, including market liquidity from the Federal Reserve and delays in new accounting rules, were adopted. Others, such as a halt on margin calls by banks and a suspension of mark-to-market requirements on financing arrangements, weren’t. One can imagine which ones were far more important to Colony Capital, whose portfolio – when marked to market – is imploding as a result of the sudden halt in inbound cash.

    Federal efforts such as the Paycheck Protection Program and Main Street Lending Program are “difficult to utilize” for companies like Colony, which is structured as a real estate investment trust, Barrack said. “We’re not using those,” he said. “We’re encouraging many of our borrowers and our users to rely on whatever subsidies they can get to continue to make their payments.”

    Looking at Colony’s real-estate portfolio, Barrack said its digital infrastructure investments – cell towers, data-storage facilities and fiber-optic networks – are holding up best. Retail and hospitality assets are the worst performers.

    Somewhat paradoxically, and refuting Barrack’s apocalyptic outlook, in April the number of Colony tenants who made rent payments was “amazingly good,” dropping only 3% to 5% from normal levels, Barrack said. But he expects fewer will remain current next month. 

    Barrack, who first saw property prices collapse during the savings and loan crisis of the 1980s, predicted that big companies like Colony, which he said still has “plenty of liquidity,” will survive the recession and real estate shakeout.

    “The people who’ll be crushed are the people who own the equity, the people who own bonds and debt, the pensioners,” he said. But it was his gloomy conclusion that was most jarring:

    “At the end of the day, the government is going to have to step in and subsidize it all if people don’t go back to work.”

    In other words, just like the government re-nationalized the housing sector in 2008 when it took over Fannie and Freddie, this time the government will have to do the same.


    Tyler Durden

    Sun, 04/26/2020 – 23:00

  • Pandemic Opportunities Arise For Trump But Will He Take Them?
    Pandemic Opportunities Arise For Trump But Will He Take Them?

    Authored by Tim Kriby via The Strategic Culture Foundation,

    The Coronavirus Pandemic much like any crisis, in a political sense, opens the doors for new opportunities. It seems as though governments cannot make major changes without a strong boot in the rear from some set of rough circumstances. Like it or not, political action requires a catalyst. Trump, the man who dreamt of Making America Great Again now has the big overarching excuse he needs to push his agenda onto the nation, but the question is just how can the President of the United States use this pandemic to his advantage?

    Firstly, it is important to note that there is nothing inherently morally evil in exploiting a crisis for political gains, unless you were the one who created the crisis in the first place. Again it cannot be understated, crisis is the catalyst for sweeping political action, and we shouldn’t blame anyone for striking while the iron is hot. Most people who do all the loud virtue signaling about tragedies being exploited by politicians seem to always go silent when the exploitation serves their interest.

    Let’s all put on our big boy pants and accept that politicians, can, will and probably should use opportunities from dark days so long as they were not the ones who darkened them in the first place.

    A Borderful World

    The same people who yesterday argued for an open world with no borders are the same ones who will beg for totalitarian levels of protection to “save” their lives from even the most minor of threats. This is probably why the heavy restrictions on international travel that are being put into place have so far met little to no resistance. 2020 feels like a trip back in time to a far less globalized and more local world that seems to have arisen at least semi-willingly. In this context, now is the perfect time for Trump to attack illegal immigration and migrant workers.

    Migrant labor is often very damaging to the host country, and is more often than not, also bad for the migrants themselves. It undercuts the cost of labor making locals lose their jobs only to have them given to an exploitable/expendable group of people to do them like slaves. This also allows the governments of the nations they came from to continue their sloth and ineptitude as their young/active populace has a means of finding work elsewhere and not fighting for change at home. This a lose/lose situation and Trump knows it.

    However, there is a persistent belief on the Left, that migrant labor is some kind of necessity and cannot be avoided. Some of the most extreme Liberals in America fear that the U.S. might starve without migrant labor helping out down on the farm, but is this really the case? Can America really starve to death in the 21st century without exploitable semi-slave labor?

    Apparently not, as about half of people who work on U.S. farms are still surprisingly American-born. Upping salaries to attract U.S. citizen farm hands would probably not drive up food costs anywhere near what the pro-migrant crowd would suggest. Modern farming does not require hordes of hands to get the corn on store shelves. Paying Americans a lot more to do the same job would seem to some to be non-viable under normal economic conditions, but this is a crisis, so the normal rules go out the window.

    Trump right now (especially with extremely cheap oil to compensate for labor cost increases) can prove that migrant workers were never really needed. Foreign, mostly illegal grunt workers, used to be a victim in the public’s eyes, but now they are plague carriers that can be removed with the free hand of a regulated market forcing Americans into their stead. A large part of Making America Great Again is a Living Wage and paying U.S. citizens $20 an hour to deal with beets would sure help move the country back towards greatness.

    Additionally, due to this panic, Trump could attack those who are trying to give birth to anchor babies, and increase the severity of travel bans from countries he doesn’t like. Both of these options are on the table at the moment while the virus is hot. Migrant labor was a key focus of Trump’s campaign, but there are many other aspects to closed borders that he could work with right now. A globalized America seems to be a much poorer and weaker one, this is the chance for Trump to put up the right economic “walls” to restore the country.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Photo: Pen strokes are much more powerful and easy to do during a national crisis.

    In Case of Fire Break China

    Trump blamed “Chy-nuh” for the virus outbreak, and he can thus blame them for America’s economic downturn, which means he is justified by bureaucratic logic to do anything he can to rid of American dependence on China. Trump has wanted to do this from day one of his presidential campaign but only now does he really have the political inertia.

    Trump says America is “winning (the) war” on the Coronavirus, which really doesn’t make any sense. How do you wage war on a virus? Then again, let him call it whatever he wants if it is going to be an excuse to re-industrialize America as if a real war was going on. Eliminating dependence on China is good for the U.S. if the virus provides the catalyst to start this process then so be it.

    It Isn’t “Welfare” If You Are Responsible For It

    Trump has already stolen some of Andrew Yang’s thunder by deciding to give money back to the taxpayers to help them survive the Covid-19 Crisis. For Conservatives, like the kind Trump claims to be, handouts and Roosevelt Era Welfare policies are seen as the devil. But, if the President were to shove Universal Basic Income down the throats of the nation it would be a massive win for the Right as it would absolve the government of many of its duties and pointless programs, and be a fantastic excuse for “small government” to be ushered in.

    If everyone gets back a $1000 or so from the government per month, then it can be legally/logically assumed that as long as the person receiving the money is sane then they have the means to take care of themselves without the State being involved. This strategy could eliminate the need for all sorts of bulky inefficient bureaucratic monstrosities like food stamps, vouchers and various forms of “assistance”. This would allow the government to vastly reduce its size as it would just throw monthly checks at the populace and let them deal with their own problems themselves, which just so happens to be part of the American Way – Personal Responsibility. And for those who waste their money, well too bad, you had your chance, the government gave you the bootstraps, you chose not to pull yourself up.

    Celebrities are Non-Essential

    Many of the media elites who hate Trump for reasons that they cannot put into cohesive arguments have found themselves to be “Non-Essential” during the crisis and have to stay home. Furthermore, the Coronavirus has helped remind society that doctors and the guys who work at grocery stores do more for society than rappers with the prefix “lil” in front of their names.

    This new glaring divide between Essential and Non-Essential labor could be very exploitable by Trump as a means to focus positive government attention on the Essentials as the backbone of his MAGA vision. It would not be surprising at all for them to receive some support from the President in the near future, especially in an election year. Two new dividing groups in American society have emerged due to the pandemic and this divide, like all divides, is exploitable and will surely be exploited by politicians.

    Taxation Is Theft Says Robin Trump

    Trump and the Republican Right hate taxes and blame them for economic stagnation. Well, the economy of the U.S. is stagnating due to the Coronavirus, so Trump really has carte blanche to go on an executive order tax slaying spree or at least propose one to his boys in Congress for them to fight for in a more constitutional way.

    It is very surprising that Trump hasn’t jumped on the “taxation is theft” mantra, but now would be a good time, any excuse to ease bureaucracy and keep Americans’ money in their pockets is urgent and justified thanks to the pandemic. Trump has the justification to kill pretty much any taxation that he sees fit.

    MAGA Time Is Now

    Obviously, real human lives have been lost to this disease internationally and that is a tragedy. No one wants their life, or the lives of their friends and family to be cut short. But the situation the world is in has the potential to create some very MAGA-ish transformations in American society if Trump is actually willing to jump on the wave and ride it out. Right now the crisis is glowing hot, the economy needs help/action, borders are now trendy again, and despite it all the U.S. is still the most powerful nation on Earth. Oh, what a lovely time it is for a charismatic President to push forward some pro-American objectives.


    Tyler Durden

    Sun, 04/26/2020 – 22:35

  • Gov. Newsom Urges "Stay Home" As Heatwave Sends Desperate Californians To Open Beaches
    Gov. Newsom Urges “Stay Home” As Heatwave Sends Desperate Californians To Open Beaches

    Tens of thousands of people flooded beaches in Southern California over the weekend as the first major heatwave of the year strikes, even as Gov. Gavin Newsom pleaded with everyone to stay home to flatten the pandemic curve. 

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Newsom tweeted Friday: “It’s going to be nice outside this weekend. You might be feeling cooped up. Ready for life to go back to “normal.” But can’t stress this enough: CA can only keep flattening the curve if we stay home and practice physical distancing. You have the power to literally save lives.”

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    Photos and videos emerged on social media over the weekend showing Huntington Beach and Newport Beach packed with thousands of people, many of whom were ignoring social distancing rules. AP News reported at least 40,000 people visited Newport Beach on Friday alone. 

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    The influx of beachgoers comes at a time when beaches remained closed in Los Angeles and San Diego counties. Mandatory stay-at-home orders have been in place since March 19. 

    Orange Country reopened its beaches with no access to parking lots and piers amid the influx of tourists rushing to resort towns. Ventura County, about 70 miles north of Los Angeles, recently reopened beaches with no access to parking lots. 

    Brian O’Rourke, a lifeguard chief at Newport Beach, told NBC News the beach was extremely crowded this weekend.

    “We haven’t had too many issues with [social distancing] as lifeguards. Our primary mission is watching the water. We’ve had dozens of ocean rescues and hundreds of preventative actions.”

    According to a tweet from the Los Angeles Police Department Chief Michel Moore, Malibu, Santa Monica, Venice, and Dockweiler beaches were absent of people on Saturday as police enforced strict closure rules. 

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    San Diego County officials said beaches would reopen Monday to swimming, surfing, paddleboarding, and kayaking. Strict social distancing rules will be enforced, which means no sitting or lying down on the beach.

    All other beaches operated by the state will remain closed. 

    Newsom has yet to issue any plan on reopening the state’s economy and or lifting lockdown measures. 

    We noted not too long ago that resort towns in Italy could implement “plexiglass cages” on the beaches to enforce social distancing. 

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Californians are fed up with Newsom’s plea to stay during the pandemic as the season’s first heatwave strikes. Could this be the makings of the second coronavirus wave


    Tyler Durden

    Sun, 04/26/2020 – 22:10

  • Diamond Offshore Files For Bankruptcy
    Diamond Offshore Files For Bankruptcy

    Once upon a time, it was the most admired offshore drilling company in the US, and a perennial LBO candidate due to its rock-solid cashflows. A little over a decade later, the cashflows are gone, and Houston’s Diamond Offshore Drilling has just filed for bankruptcy listing debts of more than $2.6 billion, blaming the “unprecedented” impact of an oil price war and the coronavirus pandemic. It joins a list of other companies that have cited the coronavirus in recent chapter 11s filings.

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    The implosion of the company comes 10 days after it missed an interest payment on $500 million worth of bonds and said it was working with advisers on various options for its future.

    In its Chapter 11 filing filed with Houston’s bankruptcy court, the company listed $5.8 billion of assets and $2.6 billion of debt, as well as $434.9 million of cash on hand. Diamond said conditions in its “highly competitive and cyclical industry” had “worsened precipitously in recent months” and while the company had taken “various actions” to shore up its finances, including borrowing $400MM under a revolving credit facility in March, Chapter 11 bankruptcy represented the best return to stakeholders.

    Well, maybe the bondholders, as we somehow doubt the equity, which last traded at 93 cents will be delighted. Major equity holders include NYSE-listed Loews Corporation, which owns 53% of Diamond, 2,500 staff who work there, and bondholders who are owed more than $2BN.

    Diamond owns deepwater rigs that can drill in water more than two miles deep. But offshore oil is among the most expensive to produce, putting the company at a disadvantage when prices plunged to less than $30 a barrel. While newer deepwater projects are less expensive, they still take longer to develop than shale wells and they still can’t compete on costs.

    In an April 16 note downgrading Diamond’s debt to the deep junky Ca2, Moody’s said the oilfield services sector would be “one of the sectors most significantly affected” by the “severe and extensive” shock from the coronavirus pandemic, falling oil pries and asset price declines.

    “There is a high likelihood that the company restructures its debts, either through an out-of-court settlement with its creditors or through the bankruptcy process,” Moody’s analysts stressed and they were right. S&P also downgraded the company on the same day, citing “the strong likelihood the outcome will result in a selective default or Chapter 11 bankruptcy.”

    Diamond Offshore adds to the more than 200 oilpatch bankruptcies dating from 2015, according to a tally by the Haynes & Boone law firm.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    About 2,500 jobs could be at stake at Diamond. The case is Diamond Offshore Drilling Inc., 20-32307, U.S. Bankruptcy Court for the Southern District of Texas (Houston).


    Tyler Durden

    Sun, 04/26/2020 – 21:50

  • Kadish: The US Needs To "Stop Playing The Chump"
    Kadish: The US Needs To “Stop Playing The Chump”

    Authored by Lawrence Kadish via The Gatestone Institute,

    The United States needs to stop playing the chump… For generations America has fattened up the very nations that would seek to destroy us.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

     

    Prior to Tokyo’s attack on Pearl Harbor, Americans bought Japanese goods, helping pay for the bombs and torpedoes that would sink the American fleet at anchor on December 7th, 1941. Japan’s sneak attack would be paid back with two nuclear strikes on Japanese cities four years later.

    Our addiction to Middle East oil helped fund the terrorists who would hijack airliners, turning them into flying missiles on the morning of September 11th. Our nation’s smart use of fracking to access enormous reserves of oil hidden under our own feet finally broke that stranglehold.

    Despite these hard won lessons, over the last twenty years America has handed China hundreds of billions of dollars every year to buy cheap goods, watched American firms ship their jobs and factories to China, and provided the Chinese with the means to create technology that threatens to eclipse our future. In the meantime, the money we sent there is allowing the Chinese to grow their nuclear arsenal and strengthen their military. In return, China has shipped us Covid-19.

    But the people of the United States are beginning to catch on to the Chinese ploy of using our money to buy their global dominance.

    A national poll finds the vast majority of Americans no longer trust Beijing. Seventy percent (70%) think the Chinese kept their Coronavirus data a secret from international healthcare professionals. In addition, 6 of 10 voters, or 59%, agree “As a result of the coronavirus pandemic, America should withdraw its manufacturing presence from China”. One-third of all voters, 31%, “strongly agree” with this statement. Only 10% “strongly disagree

    What this means is that Covid-19 has alerted Americans to the threat that faces our nation and our economic recovery. We need to suspend imports from Civilization Abusers and all enemies of democracy. We need to become and remain self- sufficient – from technology to medical supplies — so that we are never again dependent on nations that would seek to destroy us.

    It is time to stop playing the chump.

    *  *  *

    Lawrence Kadish is a real estate developer, entrepreneur, and founder and president of the Museum of American Armor.


    Tyler Durden

    Sun, 04/26/2020 – 21:45

  • US Beefs Up Gunship Presence In Gulf Ready To Back Trump's Iran 'Red Line'
    US Beefs Up Gunship Presence In Gulf Ready To Back Trump’s Iran ‘Red Line’

    American forces in the Persian Gulf have greatly bolstered their ability to respond to Iran at a moment President Trump has renewed trading threats and barbs with the Islamic Republic, ordering the US Navy “to shoot down and destroy any and all Iranian gunboats if they harass our ships at sea.”

    This includes the Pentagon bolstering its AC-130 gunships and Apache attack helicopters to target and destroy small surface threats in the Arabian Sea. Tehran has meanwhile responded with its own threats to ‘destroy’ American vessels of course.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Air Force AC-130W Stinger II. Image source: US Air Force

    It was apparently this beefed up presence that led to the April 15 confrontation about which Trump was responding by ordering destruction of boats that “harass” American vessels.

    Bloomberg explains that while the Pentagon has been closely monitoring Iran’s growing fleet of over 1,000 small boats in the gulf and Hormuz Strait, the US has in turn been provocatively beefing up its own presence. March and April US Navy exercises didn’t go unnoticed by Iran, however:

    The live-fire gunship exercises began in March as a first-time effort at coordination between Navy patrol coastal ships, the service’s P-8A Poseidon reconnaissance aircraft and the Air Force’s special operations AC-130 gunships, which are capable of nighttime attacks. Armed with a 30mm Gatling gun and precision-guided munitions, the famed gunships have been used to attack ground targets  but not naval targets  from Vietnam to Grenada, Panama, Bosnia, Iraq and Afghanistan.

    The US Navy is further deploying what it dubs a ‘Lily Pad’ approach, in order to better go on the attack against Iran’s expanding fleet of fast boats:

    Under the new approach, the Apaches can be stationed on the Puller, the Navy’s first specially designed floating sea base. The Puller, a destroyer and other, smaller U.S. vessels were practicing spotting targets for the Apaches and transmitting the information. The exercises continued through April 19.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Army AH-64 Apache helicopter during an exercise in the Persian Gulf, US Navy file image.

    One military analyst and former special assistant to naval operations, the Hudson Institute’s Bryan Clark, told Bloomberg the approach is specifically designed to “to go on the offensive against Iranian small boats, rather than simply defending against them.”

    This is as opposed to the former preferred by less effective strategy of relying purely on “deck guns and onboard helicopters, which can be overwhelmed by a large boat swarm.”

    Typically such US assets are deployed against land targets in offensive operations, but will now be used to pick off smaller targets in the contested gulf region.


    Tyler Durden

    Sun, 04/26/2020 – 21:20

  • "Coronacide"
    “Coronacide”

    Authored by Robert Gore via Straight Line Logic,

    Grasping the obvious… this was all planned beforehand.

    As the totalitarian horror unfolds before our eyes, only the willfully blind will ignore it. Only those who refuse to think will fail to grasp its implications. Only the irretrievably corrupt will embrace it.

    The Last Gasp,” Straight Line Logic, 3/24/20

    There are a lot of blind, unthinking, and corrupt people out there. Start with virus basics.

    Viruses typically show exponential growth early on, but that cannot continue or eventually the virus would take over the entire planet and then the entire universe.

    Basic Math,” Straight Line Logic, 3/25/20

    The Experts offered projections based on exponential growth even as their own statistics showed that growth curves were becoming non-exponential.

    Which means that many of the projections both globally and for the US, based as they are on exponential growth that no longer exists, will be off the mark by orders of magnitude. As this becomes clearer, the dictatorial types will panic and try to enact still more dictatorial measures.

    Basic Math

    It looks like it will be two orders of magnitude—globally from tens of millions of deaths down to hundreds of thousands and in the US from millions of deaths down to tens of thousands. If you were charitably inclined toward the Ruling Caste, you could offer the excuse that they realized their own mathematical and scientific ignorance and illiteracy and so accepted the Expert projections.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    That is not just misplaced charity; it’s downright delusional. The Ruling Caste accepted the projections because they were the avenue to what they wanted, those “dictatorial measures.”

    So now we’re supposed to believe that the powers are regretfully eliminating what’s left of our freedoms and destroying our economy to protect us from this scourge that might kill five one-hundredths of 1 percent of our population? The notion is idiotic on its face, and could only work on a docile, emasculated, and brain-dead populace who yearns for the sterile safety of a rubber room, straight jacket, and ball gag, removed three times a day when the nice nurse spoons them their gruel. They’ll be free of want and fear…and everything else.

    ***

    The powers want absolute power, period. Their panic and police states are designed to instill and further the want and fear they say they deplore. Their stocks in trade are want and fear; they’d never eliminate them even if they could….

    The Last Gasp

    Mission accomplished—they have certainly instilled and furthered want and fear, allowing them to consolidate and extend their power.

    From fearful, compliant automatons the silence was deafening. Even much of the alternative media failed to ask the most basic questions, working off of medical establishment, government, and mainstream media assumptions, projections, and scare tactics.

    Perhaps the most distressing aspect of this whole ordeal is that Americans have surrendered to panic and propaganda without a shot.

    Surrendered Without A Shot,” Straight Line Logic, 4/6/20

    The strongest and most cogent objections came from a few doctors and epidemiologists. Stanford epidemiologist John P.A. Ionnidis was one of the first. Dr. Ron Paul early on called out the coronavirus hoax.

    Unfortunately, doctors and epidemiologists also were responsible for many of the scariest projections and much of the agitation for police state measures. It’s as if the world’s auto mechanics decided that cars’ useful lives would be meaningfully extended and public safety enhanced if everyone was forced to drive 25 mph. Probably true, but think of the costs in time and money if we had to drive that slowly. The mechanics have their perspective, and doctors and epidemiologists have theirs. What’s been lacking is broader perspectives that reckon, or even acknowledge the response’s staggering costs to liberty and the economy.

    Fast forward to now. If you predict that governments’ response to the coronavirus outbreak will reveal not so hidden agendas of globalist power and domination (Why do you think they keep saying, “The world will never go back to the way it was”?), terminate the last vestiges of freedom, destroy the economy and financial markets, kill far more people than the virus itself, and set precedents for everything from enforced confinement to martial law to mandatory vaccinations to electronic money to compelled microchipped identification and surveillance whenever a group of experts makes scary projections about lethal microbes—which from now on will be almost always—you’re well on your way to being proved right on all counts.

    Surrendered Without A Shot

    If you still doubt that coronavirus response is intended to “terminate the last vestiges of freedom,” check out “Techno-Tyranny: How The US National Security Is Using Coronavirus To Fulfill An Orwellian Vision” by Whitney Webb.

    The tide has turned on coronavirus projections and the officially ginned up numbers. Unfortunately, it’s just going out on the economic damage from the response to the coronavirus. There’s a widespread propaganda ploy when the media refers to the carnage: they attribute it to the coronavirus and not the draconian measures enacted to address the coronavirus. So 26.5 million Americans filing jobless claims in five weeks is due to the coronavirus and not the decrees destroying the economy, closing businesses, and putting millions under house arrest. As if 26.5 million Americans are out sick rather than forcibly prevented from earning a living.

    It’s not like these measures even work. There is not an inverse relationship between the severity of isolation policies and severity of the disease. Keeping those with the disease isolated (the true definition of quarantine) makes sense, house arrest (the true definition of lockdown) doesn’t. Some countries that do not house arrest have death rates per million far lower than countries that do. Confining people to their homes keeps them away from sunlight and fresh air, whose therapeutic benefits have been known since the Spanish flu a century ago and were used to fight it. House arrest also makes it more difficult to exercise, another proven immune system and health builder.

    Isolation of the healthy also slows the development of herd immunity. Most people who are infected by the coronavirus will have few or no symptoms and will develop antibodies to it. To the extent home confinement actually prevents exposure, it also prevents herd immunity, potentially setting up a second wave of new cases during next autumn and winter’s flu season. The coronavirus will be a gift that keeps on giving to the Ruling Caste.

    For every thousand mentions of vaccines and potential vaccines against the coronavirus in the media, there is one mention of nature’s most potent defenses against viruses—the immune system and naturally acquired immunity. There’s only the tangential reference when they note that a disproportionate number of coronavirus deaths befall people with compromised immune systems.

    The logical, albeit unstated inference is that bolstering your immune system may be a more effective strategy for dealing with the coronavirus than trying to hide from it. Vitamins C and D, zinc, sunlight, fresh air, exercise, a healthy diet, and sleep are all proven immunity boosters, but there’s not much money in promoting them. The voices in the alternative media boosting those boosters—Bill Sardi, Dr. David Brownstein, Dr. Joseph Mercola—do far more good than the mainstream’s endless admonitions to stay indoors, wear face masks, and socially distance until Bill and Melinda find a profitable vaccine. Too bad the former don’t get a tenth of the attention the latter does.

    Now that the global numbers are headed the right direction, there are fewer stories reporting, analyzing, or putting them in any kind of context. Instead, we get personal interest stories to divert attention—patients and their loved ones struggling with the disease, medical heroes, and how celebrities are coping with enforced isolation and idleness. Most of the numbers stories are about spikes up in new cases or deaths in various localities and countries. There are few personal interest stories about the newly unemployed, food line standees, or the heroes trying to keep their small businesses afloat.

    The coronavirus response is infecting a global economy whose immune system is severely compromised by its addiction to debt. Like many of the coronavirus victims before infection, the economy was already on death’s door. The apparent economic growth during the recovery since the 2008-2009 financial crisis was bought with huge expansions of government, business, and personal debt, facilitated by all manner of central bank sleight of hand—quantitative easing, low or negative interests rates, and monetizing government debt. Its akin to a terminal patient kept alive by a constant drip feed of drugs.

    Interest compounds exponentially, leaving aside the central-bank created abomination of negative interest rates. Debt must be paid back or rolled over, it’s the debtor’s liability and the creditor’s asset, and it’s ultimately a claim on, and is often secured by, real assets and production. World debt is over 2.8 times world GDP. That number has been on a steady ascent, so the world is well past the point where additional debt buys growth greater than the debt. Most debt has funded consumption, which generates no economic return. Debt service was exacting its ever-increasing toll on a slowing global economy before the coronavirus made its appearance.

    And let’s not forget derivatives. The Bank of International Settlements puts the notional amount at $640 trillion—a conservative estimates, others are much higher—as of last June, or over 7.2 times world GDP. It’s often claimed that the true picture is nowhere as worrisome as suggested by the notional amount because many derivatives are offset by opposite positions. Netted out derivatives exposure is much less, more than 90 percent less. That’s all well and good until major counterparties start failing, as they did in the 2008-2009 financial crisis. Positions that were supposedly offset no longer are, and all hell breaks loose. The risk is then measured by the notional, not the netted, total, the one that’s at least 7.2 times world GDP.

    The impending financial and economic collapse as the debt and derivative daisy chains break is both obvious and inevitable. There will be no quick bounce back when we’re paroled from our pandemic prisons. The world needs all the production it can get simply to pay debt service, but the global production shut down and piles of new debt put us that much deeper in the hole. The Ruling Caste knows that debt and bailouts of parasitic but politically connected individuals and corporations make the collapse that much worse, but that’s part of the plan.

    In the Ruling Caste’s perfect world, there are two castes: theirs and everybody else—call it the untouchables, or better yet, the deplorables—impoverished, dependent, and subservient. A thriving, independent middle class—one of capitalism’s greatest creations—simply has no right to exist. It doesn’t need a Ruling Caste—reason enough to hate it—and must be eliminated. The global depression will eliminate it, as well as many of its former members. That a slave society may not be much fun for the masters has seemingly not entered into Ruling Caste calculations.

    The Ruling Caste has fine-tuned fear. It worked well with 9/11, but nineteen years later it’s obvious there aren’t terrorists under every bed. They couldn’t get what they wanted from their global warming doomsday scenarios and garbage science. Their models kept yielding erroneous predictions and they had to keep shoving the dire consequences farther into the future. The integrity of the research was severely compromised by committee science and so-called consensus conclusions, ad hoc and unexplained data adjustments, opacity where transparency was required, and private communications that undercut public pronouncements. Global warning just hasn’t lit any fires.

    Ah, but tell the public they’re at risk from an unseen virus, even if the risk of death is comparable to other viruses and is smaller for healthy people than risks we run everyday, and there you have something. They’ll let you: confine them to their houses, close their businesses, eliminate their jobs, prevent contact and communication with other people, encourage them to spy on and report their neighbors, stop them from going to church and other gatherings, and mandate social distancing and mask-wearing.

    One thing global warming has taught the Ruling Caste: confer payola, positions, and prestige on the Scientific Caste and you can get whatever Science you want. So roll out scary pandemic predictions from bought and paid for Experts and Voilà! people will hand you their livelihoods and their freedom. In that Ruling Caste perfect world, we’d grant them permission to execute us if the Experts recommended it, docilely lining up for the firing squad or gas chamber. Who are we to argue with the Experts?

    The coronavirus will fade, not even within field goal range (remember football?) of its advance billing. Expect no embarrassment from the Ruling Caste or its Experts. This is another giant step in their project to “Make the Truth Irrelevant.” They’ve found a special kind of fear. By vastly inflating a health risk, you can make people so afraid for their own safety that they’ll ignore skepticism, pertinent questions, contrary facts, any nonconforming science, other obvious truths, and their own imprisonment and ruin. All the precedents are now in place, and the Ruling Caste just has to make sure the next virus is more lethal than this one (but of course not so lethal or resistant to vaccination that it poses a danger to the Ruling Caste).

    When you can’t love, you hate. When you can’t build, you destroy. When you’re ignored, you scream. When you can’t tell the truth, you lie. When you can’t reason, you panic. When no one will follow you out of admiration or respect, you compel. When you can’t live, you kill.

    The Last Gasp

    As a general rule, the earlier you recognize someone is trying to kill you, the better off you’ll be.


    Tyler Durden

    Sun, 04/26/2020 – 20:55

  • "We'll Pay You To Leave" – Hawaii Wants Visitors Gone As COVID Cases Mount 
    “We’ll Pay You To Leave” – Hawaii Wants Visitors Gone As COVID Cases Mount 

    Over the last 4-6 weeks, Hawaiians have become increasingly frustrated with tourists visiting the islands during the pandemic. Many visitors are ignoring quarantine rules and have put locals at risk of contracting COVID-19

    Some residents have already organized protests near the Maui airport, holding signs that said: “TOURIST GO HOME,” “LEAVE OUR AINA!,” “TIME TO GO,” and “GO HOME.”

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Now the Hawaii Tourism Authority has issued a $25,000 grant to nonprofit Visitor Aloha Society of Hawaii (VASH) to fund a program that will pay tourists who violate quarantine rules with a one-way ticket back to their home airport, reported The New York Times

    Since the start of April, VASH has provided 20 tourists with one-way tickets away from Hawaii, sending travelers back to Guam, Alabama, and Colorado. Many of these folks were violating quarantine rules. 

    “The majority of travelers we have sent back, in my opinion, have been irresponsible in traveling to Hawaii during the Covid-19 pandemic when they know we are trying to keep Hawaii safe from the spread of this disease,” said Jessica Lani Rich, the president and chief executive of VASH.

    With beaches closed and the tourism industry ground to a halt, new tourist arrivals have plunged 99%. Many locals are riding out the virus storm at their homes while tourists are playing on beaches and hiking trails. 

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    “They either don’t get or are ignoring the message,” Lynne Matusow, a Honolulu resident told The Times. “We have locals, in masks, scolding them for sitting on beaches, with towels, umbrellas, coolers, etc. That is forbidden.”

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    Rich said many of those who VASH returned home were taking advantage of pandemic pricing for airfare that was super cheap. She said a roundtrip ticket from Oakland, California, to Honolulu was around $238. 

    “I see maybe one or two tourists a day,” said Ryan Houser, a restaurant “fish sommelier” and Waikiki resident, saying, “it’s a little offensive” when tourists go on the beach and ignore social distancing rules while locals stay at home. 

    “Our residents had to close their businesses and have financial hardships and to have people come here right now and want to vacation, it is reckless,” said Rich.

    Hawaii’s economy collapsed when the tourism industry shut down on March 17 to mitigate the spread of the virus. On Saturday, quarantines in Hawaii were extended through the end of May. 

    Strict social distancing rules in the state have kept cases lower versus other states. On Sunday, there were 604 cases with 14 death.


    Tyler Durden

    Sun, 04/26/2020 – 20:30

  • "China Did A Lot Of Things Right": Bill Gates Defends CCP, Slams America Over Handling Of Coronavirus
    “China Did A Lot Of Things Right”: Bill Gates Defends CCP, Slams America Over Handling Of Coronavirus

    Bill Gates vehemently defended China’s initial response to the coronavirus outbreak on Sunday, telling CNN’s Fareed Zakaria that the communist country – which silenced whistleblowers and lied about transmissibility – “did a lot of things right.”

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    “How would you respond to the charge that hte Chinese covered this up. They’ve essentially deceived the rest of the world, and as a result, they should be held in some way responsible for this?” asked Zakaria.

    To which Gates responded: “Well, I don’t think that’s a timely thing because it doesn’t affect how we act today. You know, China did a lot of things right. At the beginning, like any country where a virus first shows up, they can look back and say that they missed some things,” Gates said, adding “Some countries did respond very quickly and get their testing in place, and they avoided the incredible economic pain – and it’s sad that even the US that you would have expected to do this well, did it particularly poorly – but it’s not time to talk about that.

    Gates then suggested that this is the time “to take the great science we have, the fact that we’re in this together, fix testing and treatments and get that vaccine, and minimize the trillions in dollars and many things that you can’t even dimensionalize in economic terms that are awful about the situation that we’re in.

    That’s a distraction,” Gates added, regarding placing the blame on China. “I think there’s a lot of incorrect and unfair things said.

    Watch:

    We wonder why Bill Gates – one of the largest donors to the World Health Organization – is similarly defending China, which is also one of the WHO’s largest contributors.

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js


    Tyler Durden

    Sun, 04/26/2020 – 20:21

  • "We Are Moving Into The End-Game": 27 Tankers Anchored Off California, Hundreds Off Singapore As Oil Industry Shuts Down
    “We Are Moving Into The End-Game”: 27 Tankers Anchored Off California, Hundreds Off Singapore As Oil Industry Shuts Down

    Back in the late fall of 2014, when Saudi Arabia broke up OPEC for the first time and unleashed a torrent of crude oil on the world despite the protests of its fellow cartel members, oil prices crashed as a result of what then seemed to be a “calculated” move by Riyadh which hoped to put US shale out of business amid a flawed gamble betting that shale breakeven prices were around $60-80. They, however, turned out to be much lower, which coupled with Saudi misreading of the willingness of junk bond investors to keep funding US shale producers, meant that despite a 3 years stretch of low oil prices, US shale emerged stronger than ever before, with the US eventually eclipsing both Saudi Arabia and Russia as the world’s biggest crude oil producer.

    Fast forward to March 2020, when Saudi Arabia doubled down in its attempt to crush shale, only to avoid angering long-time ally Donald Trump, the Crown Prince pretended that the latest flood of oil was an oil price war aimed at Moscow not Midland. And this time, unlike 2014, with the benefit of the global economic shutdown resulting from the coronavirus pandemic, the Saudis may have finally lucked out in the ongoing crusade against US oil, because as Bloomberg writes with “negative oil prices, ships dawdling at sea with unwanted cargoes, and traders getting creative about where to stash oil”, the next chapter in the oil crisis is now inevitable: “great swathes of the petroleum industry are about to start shutting down.”

    As the recent OPEC summit so vividly demonstrated, the marginal price of oil is no longer determined by supply or cuts thereof (such as the recently announced agreement by OPEC+ for a 9.7mmb/d output cut), but rather by demand, or the lack thereof, which according to some estimate is as much as 36mmb/d lower, or roughly a third of the global oil market every day, as billions of people are stuck at home instead of driving, while major corporations mothball production in a world where major economies have ground to a halt.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    The economic impact of the coronavirus has ripped through the oil industry in dramatic phases, Bloomberg’s Javier Blas writes. First it destroyed demand as lockdowns shut factories and kept drivers at home. Then storage started filling up and traders resorted to ocean-going tankers to store crude in the hope of better prices ahead.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Now shipping prices are surging to stratospheric levels as the industry runs out of tankers, a sign of just how distorted the market has become.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Ironically, in its latest attempt to kill off shale, Saudi Arabia may have gone a step too far, as “the specter of production shut-downs – and the impact they will have on jobs, companies, their banks, and local economies – was one of the reasons that spurred world leaders to join forces to cut production in an orderly way. But as the scale of the crisis dwarfed their efforts, failing to stop prices diving below zero last week, shut-downs are now a reality. It’s the worst-case scenario for producers and refiners.

    In short, the entire oil production industry is shutting down, not because it wants to – of course – but because it has no choice. According to Goldman, in as little as three weeks there will be literally no place left on earth to store oil, and unless oil producers want to pay “buyers” to hold the oil as happened on that historic date of April 20, they have no choice but to shut in output. 

    “We are moving into the end-game,” said Torbjorn Tornqvist, head of commodity trading giant Gunvor Group. “Early-to-mid May could be the peak. We are weeks, not months, away from it.”

    Which brings us back to why in 2020 Riyadh has succeeded where it failed in 2014: as Bloomberg writes “in theory, the first oil output cuts should have come from the OPEC+ alliance, which earlier this month agreed to reduce production from May 1. Yet after the catastrophic price plunge on Monday, when West Texas Intermediate fell to -$40 a barrel, it’s the U.S. shale patch that is leading”

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    The best indicator of how the shale industry is reacting is the sudden collapse in the number of oil rigs in operation, which last week fell to a four-year low: “Before the coronavirus crisis hit, oil companies ran about 650 rigs in the US. By Friday, more than 40% of them had stopped working, with only 378 left.”

    And while there is a delay between total US oil production and the rig count, it is now obvious that US production is set to collapse next:

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    “Monday really focused people’s minds that production needs to slow down,” said the co-head of oil trading at commodity merchant Trafigura. “It’s the smack in the face the market needed to realize this is serious.” Incidentally, Trafigura, one of the largest exporters of US crude from the U.S. Gulf of Mexico, believes that output in Texas, New Mexico, North Dakota and other states will now fall much faster than expected as companies react to negative prices…

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    … evidence US commercial storage space for physical at Cushing has run out with what inventory is left having been called for – which have persisted for several days last week in the physical market.

    Until prices collapsed on Monday, the consensus was that output would drop by about 1.5MM barrels a day by December. Now market watchers see that loss by late June. “The severity of the price pressure is likely to act as a catalyst for the immediate turndown in activity and shut-ins,” said Roger Diwan, oil analyst at consultant IHS Markit Ltd.

    As detailed last week, this price shock has been especially acute in the physical market where producers of crude streams such as South Texas Sour and Eastern Kansas Common had to pay more than $50 a barrel to offload their output last week.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    And so the US industry is finally shutting down as ConocoPhillips and shale producer Continental Resources have all announced plans to shut in output. Regulators in Oklahoma voted to allow oil drillers to shut wells without losing leases; New Mexico made a similar decision. Even North Dakota, which for years was synonymous with the U.S. shale revolution, is witnessing a rapid retrenchment, as Bloomberg notes that “oil producers have already closed more than 6,000 wells, curtailing about 405,000 barrels a day in production, or about 30% of the state’s total.”

    However, it won’t be just the US: output cuts can be seen from Chad, a poor and landlocked country in Africa, to Vietnam and Brazil, producers are now either reducing output or making plans to do so. “I wouldn’t want to get sensational about it but yes, clearly there must be a risk of shut-ins,” Mitch Flegg, the head of North Sea oil company Serica Energy, said in an interview. “In certain parts of the world it is a real and present risk.”

    In emergency board meetings last week, oil companies small and large discussed an outlook that’s the most somber any oil executive has ever witnessed. For the small firms, the next few weeks will be all about staying afloat. But even for the bigger ones, like Exxon Mobil Corp. and BP Plc, it’s a challenge. Big Oil will offer an insight into the crisis when companies report earnings this week.

    Then on Friday, May 1, Saudi Arabia, Russia and the rest of OPEC+ will join the output cuts, slashing their output by 23%, or 9.7 million barrels a day. Saudi Aramco, the state-owned company has already cut production, and Russian oil companies have announced exports of their flagship Urals crude would drop in May to a 10-year low.

    And yet, as warned here repeatedly, it may still not be enough, as every week, another 50 million barrels of crude are going into storage, enough to fuel Germany, France, Italy, Spain, and the U.K. combined, with estimates that the world will run out of land-based storage some time in late May or early June. Meanwhile, what’s not stored onshore, is stashed in tankers. As Bloomberg’s Blas points out, the U.S. Coast Guard on Friday said there were so many tankers at anchor off California that it was keeping an eye on the situation.

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    But if the two dozen or so tankers piled up off the coast of California is bad…

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    … and those next to Galveston, TX is worse…

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    … what is going on in that tanker parking lot off of Singapore is absolutely insane.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    There is some good news: oil traders say after plunging by a third, US oil consumption has probably hit a bottom, and will start a very gentle recovery, although that also depends on how fast the US economy can reopen from the coronavirus coma.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    But before even a modest recovery takes hold, the great shutdown will spread through oil refining too. Over the past week, Marathon Petroleum, one of the biggest U.S. refiners, announced it would stop production at a plant near San Francisco. Royal Dutch Shell has idled several units in three U.S. refineries in Alabama and Louisiana. And across Europe and Asia, many refineries are running at half rate. U.S. oil refiners processed just 12.45 million barrels a day on the week to April 17, the lowest amount in at least 30 years, except for hurricane-related closures.

    The closures have already sent thousands packing: the oil and gas industry shed nearly 51,000 drilling and refining jobs in March, a 9% reduction that will only get worse in April. March’s job losses rise by 15,000 when ancillary jobs such as construction, manufacturing of drilling equipment and shipping are included, according to BW Research Partnership, a research consultancy, which analyzed Department of Labor data combined with the firm’s own survey data of about 30,000 energy companies.

    “We’re looking at anywhere between five and seven years of job growth wiped out in a month,” Philip Jordan, the company’s vice president said in an interview. “What makes it sort of scary is this really is just the beginning. April is not looking good for oil and gas.”

    And so, as the oil industry shuts down – at least for a few weeks (or perhaps months) – more refinery shutdowns are coming, oil traders and consultants said, particularly in the U.S. where lockdowns started later than in Europe and demand is still contracting. Steve Sawyer, director of refining at Facts Global Energy, said that global refineries could halt as much as 25% of total capacity in May.

    “No one is going to be able to dodge this bullet.”


    Tyler Durden

    Sun, 04/26/2020 – 20:05

  • Coronavirus Deaths Likely 60% Higher Than Official Numbers Reflect, FT Finds
    Coronavirus Deaths Likely 60% Higher Than Official Numbers Reflect, FT Finds

    As experts try to model the true number of coronavirus deaths, and some random ‘surveillance’ studies have suggested that – at least in some badly hit areas – the number of confirmed coronavirus cases might be many multiples of the official count, the FT has published its latest attempt at trying to ‘model’ the true coronavirus death toll.

    The FT used a fairly straightforward methodology: the paper took data on national death tolls over a certain stretch of time going back five years, calculated the mean for each country, then compared that figure to the number of deaths reported during the same time period in 2020.

    To calculate excess deaths, the FT has compared deaths from all causes in the weeks of a location’s outbreak in March and April 2020 to the average for the same period between 2015 and 2019. The total of 122,000 amounts to a 50 per cent rise in overall mortality relative to the historical average for the locations studied.

    The difference between the average from the past five years and the 2020 number is, roughly, the number of deaths caused by the coronavirus (by far the biggest differentiating factor). Across countries in the developed world, the FT found 122,000 deaths ‘in excess’ of normal levels. That’s compared with ~77k reported coronavirus deaths. If the FT’s methodolgy checks out, that would mean coronavirus deaths have been 60% higher than official statics reflect – at least in the developed world.

    The death toll from coronavirus may be almost 60 per cent higher than reported in official counts, according to an FT analysis of overall fatalities during the pandemic in 14 countries. Mortality statistics show 122,000 deaths in excess of normal levels across these locations, considerably higher than the 77,000 official Covid-19 deaths reported for the same places and time periods. If the same level of underreporting observed in these countries was happening worldwide, the global Covid-19 death toll would rise from the current official total of 201,000 to as high as 318,000.

    The only country that showed almost now deviation between ‘excess deaths’ and the number of confirmed coronavirus cases was Denmark.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Source: FT

    The gulf between the ‘official’ coronavirus death toll and the ‘excess mortality’ rate tabulated by the FT. was widest in the emerging world. In some places, the difference was ~100x (that’s 100x not 100%). Officials reported roughly 250 deaths due to the virus, but the number of ‘excess’ deaths was 10,200 in Ecuador’s Guayas Province.

    In Ecuador’s Guayas province, just 245 official COVID-19-related deaths were reported between March 1 and April 15, but data on total deaths show that about 10,200 more people died during this period than in a typical year – an increase of 350 per cent.

    If we assume that every single ‘excess’ case calculated by the FT is representative of a single case of COVID-19 (not exactly a scientific assumption, but fair enough for an estimate…), then we can compare which provinces, states and countries were most badly impacted. According to the FT, the region surrounding the Italian city of Bergamo suffered a much more severe outbreak than New York State.

    In the northern Italian region of Lombardy, the heart of Europe’s worst outbreak, there are more than 13,000 excess deaths in the official statistics for the nearly 1,700 municipalities for which data is available. This is an uptick of 155 per cent on the historical average and far higher than the 4,348 reported Covid deaths in the region. The region surrounding the Italian city of Bergamo registered the worst increase internationally with a 464 per cent rise in deaths above normal levels, followed by New York City with a 200 per cent increase, and Madrid, Spain, with a 161 per cent increase.

    The FT isn’t the only financial news organization to try and determine by how much some countries are underreporting cases and deaths linked to the novel coronavirus.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Source: FT

    Bloomberg on Sunday reported that the number of severe respiratory infections reported in Mexico over the past two months, coinciding with the end of flu season, were up more than 50% compared with last year. Experts working for the Mexican government quietly told Bloomberg that the increase is likely 100% attributable to the virus.

    Severe acute respiratory infections in Mexico spiked 50% this season compared with a year ago, almost certainly all due to coronavirus, suggesting that government figures on Covid-19 cases are far too low.

    In the most recent week, health ministry data show, Mexico registered 12,000 new cases of such respiratory infections, versus 671 in the same period a year ago.

    “Of course that jump in cases is Covid-19, because influenza is on its way out this time of year,” said Alejandro Macías, the former national commissioner for influenza in Mexico during the H1N1 outbreak. “There’s no doubt.”

    To be sure, the FT doesn’t question the general trends displayed in global data – well, at least not in developed countries like the US and Italy. But it’s just the latest reminder that armchair experts claiming that the true mortality rate for the virus is actually a small fraction of a percent are likely also gravely underestimating the total number of deaths that have gone underreported.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    This just means that the grainy videos released by brave Wuhanese during the early days of the outbreak remain the most reliable indicators of what the novel coronavirus is capable of if left unchecked.

    Though they’ve been wiped from the Chinese Internet, millions around the world witnessed the videos of dead bodies of the elderly in the streets, hospital hallways packed with the doomed, pandemonium, chaos – and Party officials firing up the crematorium out back.


    Tyler Durden

    Sun, 04/26/2020 – 19:40

Digest powered by RSS Digest

Today’s News 26th April 2020

  • Pandemic Exposes Liberalism's Free Trade, Open Borders Road To National Suicide
    Pandemic Exposes Liberalism’s Free Trade, Open Borders Road To National Suicide

    Authored by Martin Sieff via The Strategic Culture Foundation,

    Open Borders and Free Trade induce national suicide slowly and gradually, without the victims waking up to what is going on until it is too late. But the coronavirus has brought home with global clarity that human societies need governments and regulated borders for their own survival.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    The bottom line is clear, societies that have had open borders to previous major centers of infection and transmission, like Iran and Italy which kept open strong flows of people to and from China in the early stages of pandemic, suffered exceptionally badly.

    Countries obsessed with maintaining liberal values and open borders like France, Germany, the United Kingdom and the U.S. also suffered disproportionately.

    Countries that have allowed their domestic industry to decay have found they cannot now produce the crucial equipment they need, from respirators to gas masks. Countries with strong manufacturing bases like China, or with a prudent nationalist sense of preparing ahead for emergencies like Russia, have done far better. The shortage of respirators in Britain has become more than a national scandal: It is a national shame. That is another inexorable consequence of the pernicious doctrine of Free Trade.

    I documented this history in some detail in my 2012 book “That Should Still Be Us“.

    There, I showed how even the French Revolution of 1789 was in fact triggered by the catastrophic Free Trade Treaty that hapless King Louis XVI approved with England only three years before. It led immediately to the worst economic depression in French history which triggered revolution. In three years, liberal Free Trade succeeded in destroying a society that had flourished for a thousand years and the most powerful state Europe had known since the fall of the Roman Empire.

    In his classic television series and accompanying book “How the Universe Changed”, the great British broadcaster and historian James Burke showed how the discipline of statistics was responsible for discovering the way the cholera bacteria spread through contaminated water in 19th Century London, then the largest urban area ever experienced.

    Today, we see a similar pattern in the spread of the coronavirus: While half the counties in the United States remain so far virtually free of the virus, infections have soared in most major metropolitan areas, especially in so-called Sanctuary cities. Invariably these centers are ruled by liberal Democrats where illegal immigrants congregate. They are the places where the values and consequences of Free Trade and Open Borders most clearly flourish. And they ar ealso the places where the terrifying costs of those policies are most evident as well. The chickens have come home to roost.

    Countries like Russia and China itself, which have reacted most quickly and decisively to shut down international and domestic travel, have been able to keep their numbers of infections and rates of spread down.

    In Europe, by contrast, the impact of the virus has been appalling, The European Union has been as useless as New York City Mayor Bill de Blasio,. Pro-EU liberal national leaders like President Emmanuel Macron in France and the venerable Chancellor Angela Merkel in Germany (Berlin’s version of Nancy Pelosi) just sat back in bemused silence till it was too late. In Italy and Spain, the political splintering of societies has woefully added to the chaos.

    This is in fact a very old lesson indeed: The ruling elites of the world should not have had to relearn it.

    But for more than 225 years, the ruling elites of the West have mindlessly embraced Open Borders and Free Trade. Yet these have always been mere assertions of prejudice and mindless faith: They have never been proven to be true in any scientific manner.

    Instead, when we look at the factual evidence of economic history over the past two centuries, it has always been the case that developing industrial societies which protect their manufactures behind strong tariff barriers flourish with enormous foreign trade and balance of payments surpluses. Then the living standards of their people soar.

    In contrast, free market societies too powerless, or just too plain dumb to protect their economic borders get swamped by cheap manufactures and their domestic industries get decimated. This was the case with liberal free market Britain caught between the rising Protectionist powers of the United States, Japan and Germany for the next century.

    It has been true for the decline of American industry since the 1950s, the more the United States embraced global free trade, the more its own domestic manufactures and their dependent populations suffered. This never bothered the liberal intellectual elites of the East and West Coast at all. It still doesn’t. Having inflicted lasting ruin and despair on hundreds of millions of people for generations, they despise their victims as “deplorables”  for crying out in pain and seeking to end the disastrous policies.

    Russia suffered the full horrors of the merciless laissez-faire, unregulated Free Market policies of the liberal West in the 1990s. Boris Yeltsin never woke up to the catastrophe that Bill Clinton and Larry Summers were inflicting on his country. Over the past two decades, Russia’s recovery from that Abyss under President Vladimir Putin has been miraculous. National social responsibility has succeeded where the crazed, simplistic theories of Adam Smith, David Ricardo and Ayn Rand all palpably failed.

    The coronavirus pandemic therefore should serve as a wake up call to the peoples of the West, what Thomas Jefferson memorably called “A Fire Bell in the Night.” They need to start following Russia’s examples of self reliance, prudent preparation and maintaining strong borders.

    The ravages of Liberalism – its Open Borders and Free Markets – have already stripped the West of all its defenses, social, demographic, industrial and economic.

    The West is out of time: The Audit of Pandemic has been taken, and the reckoning is now due.


    Tyler Durden

    Sun, 04/26/2020 – 00:00

  • Unprecedented Pace Of Corporate Debt Issuance Has Crippled Corporate Fundamentals
    Unprecedented Pace Of Corporate Debt Issuance Has Crippled Corporate Fundamentals

    When the Fed breached a monetary taboo even Ben Bernanke did not violate when Jerome Powell announced last month he would buy investment grade bonds, it was clear that the Fed’s only solution to avoiding the bursting of the corporate debt bubble was to make it even bigger. And sure enough, the Fed’s explicit backstop of the bond market has meant the supply of IG bonds has set a record pace in 2020. According to Morgan Stanley, IG supply has totaled $693 billion through mid-April, up a staggering 63% y/y…

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    … with $435 billion pricing since the beginning of March alone. March supply set an all-time record at $264 billion, breaking the prior record by over $80 billion and a further $170 billion in the first half of April. To put that in perspective, the March total surpasses the prior record for the busiest month (January 2017) by over $80 billion. Issuance just in the first half of April already ranks in the top five busiest months on record. Four of the top 10 busiest weeks on record have occurred since the beginning of March, with the week of March 30 ranking as the busiest ever, at $118 billion of issuance.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    All to say that this was truly an unprecedented pace. Year-to-date through April 17, total supply of $693 billion is tracking 63% ahead of last year.

    And confirming what we said a month ago in “Bond Market Tears In Two“, issuance has been heavily skewed toward high-quality issuers, with issuance rated “A” making up 57% of supply from the beginning of March onwards, for obvious reasons: these are the bonds that will find a willing buyer in the Fed via Blackrock’s purchases of the LQD ETF. Drilling down, consumer Discretionary companies have raised the most new debt financing when combined with revolver draws.

    Of course, the Fed’s enabling of this epic bond bubble burst would have been impossible without the coronavirus crisis: the pandemic has produced an unprecedented market shock, with issuers experiencing an extremely sharp drop in earnings, without clarity on when the economy will begin to recover. Indeed, IG issuers have tapped financing wherever possible, including drawing on revolvers. Through April 20, IG issuers had tapped $134 billion in revolvers, putting combined bond issuance and revolver draws at $568 billion since the beginning of March.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    And while trends in the use of those proceeds point to companies using debt issuance to shore up liquidity, the IG issuance momentum has been so powerful, companies have been using corporate bonds to refi some of the revolver draws in recent weeks, as we reported last week.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    So while it is obvious by now that the Fed’s actions have triggered a tidal wave of new corporate debt issuance, one which will make the corporate sector scream for a bailout during the next, even bigger crisis, and the Fed will gladly bend over backwards yet again, what is perhaps more interesting is the fact that IG issuance tends to spike before or right at the
    start of a recession, according to Morgan Stanley.

    Looking at the period right before the early 2000s recession, trailing three-month issuance spiked in the same quarter that the recession started (1Q01). Similarly, issuance rose in the first-half of the recession surrounding the global financial crisis (peaking in 2Q08). As shown in the next two charts, in both instances issuance from “problem” sectors rose – Telecom in the early 2000s and Financials during the crisis. In the early 2000s recession, Consumer Discretionary issuance also rose sharply in the first quarter. However, in both cases, issuance did slow meaningfully from the peak for the remainder of the downturn, before returning to a more normal run-rate as the economy recovered.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    All of which leads us to the last question: what impact will all this issuance have on corporate fundamentals? Net of maturities, calls,and tenders, Morgan Stanley estimates net bond issuance for 2020 YTD to be about $400 billion. Including the draws that IG issuers have made on their revolvers, net issuance rises to ~$535 billion. To estimate how this level of issuance could impact leverage, the bank then takes its usual subset of US, non-financial companies in the IG index with publicly available data,and extrapolate from 4Q19 fundamentals. Across this subset of ~375 companies, net issuance has totaled about $314 billion when including revolver draws. These issuers had median leverage of 2.38x at the end of 2019.

    Assuming flat EBITDA, the increase in debt alone could push gross leverage +0.13x higher. However, a severe shock to the EBITDA of these companies is now assured. As such, incorporating shocks to LTM EBITDA of 10-25% shows leverage could increase by +0.41x, to nearly 1.0x year. Overall, these results suggest that leverage peaks during or after a recession when earnings fall.

    In summary, leverage is likely to rise across sectors.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    The Consumer sectors could see the largest increase in leverage, followed by Materials and Industrials sectors. Health Care is the least impacted sector, with significantly less net issuance YTD than the others.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    And so, as companies flood the market with new debt, they plant the seeds of their own overlevered demise, because while the Fed has made it frightfully easy for IG corporations to issue an unprecedented amount of debt, by doing so it has merely doomed even the most solid credits to a painful day of reckoning, one where they will have more net debt than ever, effectively assuring another avalanche of downgrades – many straight to junk – either in the current crisis, should its duration persist beyond worst case estimates, or in the next one, when the Fed will have no choice but to buy all the outstanding corporate debt.


    Tyler Durden

    Sat, 04/25/2020 – 23:33

  • Visualizing How COVID-19 Has Impacted Media Consumption, By Generation
    Visualizing How COVID-19 Has Impacted Media Consumption, By Generation

    As the coronavirus outbreak continues to wreak havoc across the globe, people’s time that would have otherwise been spent perusing malls or going to live events, is now being spent on the sofa.

    During this period of pandemic-induced social isolation, Visual Capitalist’s Katie Jones notes it’s no surprise that people are consuming vast amounts of media. Today’s graphics use data from a Global Web Index report to explore how people have increased their media consumption as a result of the outbreak, and how it differs across each generation.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    More Time to Kill

    Global Web Index found that over 80% of consumers in the U.S. and UK say they consume more content since the outbreak, with broadcast TV and online videos (YouTube, TikTok) being the primary mediums across all generations and genders.

    Unsurprisingly, 68% of consumers are seeking out pandemic updates online over any other activity. Gen Zers however, have other plans, as they are the only generation more likely to be listening to music than searching for news.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Overall, younger generations are more likely to entertain themselves by playing games on their mobile or computer. Millennials also stand out as the foodie generation, as they are the most likely to be searching for cooking recipes or reading up on healthy eating.

    Leaning on a Pillar of Trust

    Across the board, consumers view the World Health Organization (WHO) as the most trusted source of information for any COVID-19 related updates.

    This isn’t true everywhere on a regional basis, however. For example, while U.S. consumers trust WHO the most, UK consumers view their government as their most trusted news source overall.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Trust in information shared on social media is higher than word of mouth from friends and family, and even foreign government websites. That said, it is lower than information shared on the radio or news websites.

    The Need for Pandemic Positivity

    While staying abreast of pandemic updates is important, ultimately, a positive mindset and the ability to switch off will help people cope better day-to-day.

    Therefore, it seems reasonable that people are more inclined to invest in new subscription services since they have been in isolation, with almost one-third of Gen Zers considering purchasing Netflix, followed by Disney+.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Understandably, people are becoming increasingly worried about how much time they are dedicating to their screens. However, research suggests that screen time itself is no cause for concern. Rather, it’s the content we choose to consume that could have a significant impact our psychological well-being.

    Perhaps most intriguingly, the TV shows and movies that are increasing in popularity on Netflix are about pandemics – which could signify the need for people to fictionalize the chaos we find ourselves in.

    Regardless of what type of content we are consuming, the fact is that every generation is relying on their devices during this pandemic to inform and distract more than ever before, creating a huge opportunity for media companies to engage a captive audience.


    Tyler Durden

    Sat, 04/25/2020 – 23:30

  • Twitter CEO Unveils Feature To "Editorialize" Trump's Tweets As Election Looms
    Twitter CEO Unveils Feature To “Editorialize” Trump’s Tweets As Election Looms

    Authored by Cindy Harper via ReclaimTheNet.org,

    A handful of companies are controlling the majority of the world’s conversations, subtly introducing rules to close the gap of what ideas they find acceptable and slowly edging out those they don’t.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    One of the most prominent ways that tech companies have been doing that, of late, is the result of realizing that they get ample media support and can stay in the good graces of legacy media outlets when they censor content for being “misinformation.”

    The guise of protecting the world from “misinformation” is fast becoming the easiest justification for censorship online right now.

    Twitter has been one of those companies most accused of negatively impacting the public conversation and pushing for censorship.

    Twitter CEO Jack Dorsey talked about this in a livestream with Showtime hosts Desus Nice and The Kid Mero.

    “Misleading information is like the challenge of our industry right now,” Dorsey said in the Periscoped stream.

    The hosts were eager to discuss what Dorsey had in mind for punishing those who say things that is deemed to be “misinformation.”

    The example they gave is, what would happen if President Trump tweeted “potentially harmful” statements about the coronavirus?

    Dorsey responded that “labeling would come in really handy,” and talked about Twitter’s recent policy announcement that is aimed to tackle the tweets of public leaders.

    “When it’s broadcast on television, you have no ability to talk back,” Dorsey said, and while you may not think it based on Twitter’s recent actions, the ability for users to comment and disagree is an important part of Twitter, Dorsey at least says he believes.

    Dorsey said that instead of removing the tweets of world leaders, Twitter will instead introduce an “interstitial.”

    “Anything that we can do to interstitial a lot of this and provide context that is credible and might show a disagreement or a debate around the topic, I think, would be helpful,” Dorsey said.

    “The team is working on a great experiment to do just that, that we hope to launch as quickly as possible to give people a broader context for a particular tweet… I think we’ll disarm a bunch of it.

    The details are sparse so far but it appears that Dorsey plans to introduce a feature that comes in when Twitter finds a statement that a world leader makes and wants to challenge it.

    In other words, Twitter feels brave enough to place some kind of editorialized interstitial between a world leader and the reader, that alters the way the reader perceives the tweet.

    Dorsey said that Twitter’s number one focus right now is dealing with misinformation.

    The ability to create deep fakes is moving much faster and with much higher quality than the ability to detect it. So this is going to be a race, just like security is. You can never build a perfect system. You just have to be 10 steps ahead of the attackers,” he said during the stream.

    It could end up being similar to the way Facebook has decided it wants to fact-check certain statements on the platform – and has been putting an overlay on content with a link to a fact-check.

    It’s worth mentioning that Facebook’s fact-check has several times in the last month alone, “debunked” something that turned out to actually be true – so Twitter, if it too decides to play this game, must be feeling pretty confident they’re going to get it right.

    Or, perhaps, they’re just happy to brazenly wield the power anyway.


    Tyler Durden

    Sat, 04/25/2020 – 23:00

  • Singapore Man Jailed For 6 Weeks After Violating Quarantine Over "Irresistible Urge" For Pork Soup
    Singapore Man Jailed For 6 Weeks After Violating Quarantine Over “Irresistible Urge” For Pork Soup

    Sometimes, you just want a bowl of pork soup, or bak kut teh, as it’s called in Singapore. And sometimes, that is an itch that overrides all common sense until you can scratch it accordingly.

    Nobody knows this better than Alan Tham Xiang Shen of Singapore, who pleaded guilty on April 16 to violating a Stay-at-Home (SAH) order to fulfill an “irresistible urge” for the soup. In doing so, he was charged with an offense under the country’s Infectious Diseases Act, according to The Straits Times.

    Senior District Judge Ong Hian Sun called his violation of the order “socially reprehensible”, before handing him down a 6 week sentence.

    Tham arrived in Singapore from Myanmar on March 23 and was directed via SAH order to stay home at all times until April 6. He also signed a slip to acknowledge he had received the order. But instead of going home on the date he was given the order, he instead met up with his girlfriend and went to a foodcourt at Terminal 3 of Changi Airport. They then hired a private car to take them to a money changer and then to Tham’s house. 

    About two hours later – after who knows what – the couple had worked up an appetite, so they boarded a bus and went out to get the soup. The couple posted about the meal on social media. They then went to a supermarket, and finally went home.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    On March 25, Tham was paid a visit from the Immigration and Checkpoints Authority who informed him that he did not go straight home after the order was issued to him on the 23rd.

    Despite being found not to have the virus, Deputy Public Prosecutor Kenneth Chin recommended 10 to 12 weeks jail for Tham. Chin’s office said that the law is there “to prohibit socially irresponsible conduct regardless of whether any person is infected by the offender or not”. 

    Tham’s lawyers asked for either a maximum fine of $10,000 or two weeks jail. They argued that the SAH did not specify he had to go directly home after receiving it. 

    “The SAH does not impose any movement restrictions before going home, such as you must take away your meal and are not allowed to eat at the food outlet itself,” his lawyer argued, as only a lawyer can do.

    But the judge didn’t see it that way and sentenced Tham to 6 weeks of hard time. He is expected to surrender himself at the State Courts on April 30 to begin serving his time.

    All for bowl of pork soup.


    Tyler Durden

    Sat, 04/25/2020 – 22:30

  • What War Between The US & Iran Could Look Like
    What War Between The US & Iran Could Look Like

    Via Southfront.org,

    The US-Iranian standoff in the Persian Gulf has once again entered an acute phase...

    On April 22, US President Donald Trump announced that he had ordered the US Navy to “shoot down and destroy” Iranian gunboats that follow or harass US ships. In response, Commander-in-chief of the Islamic Revolution Guards Corps, Major General Hossein Salami declared on April 23 that Iran will provide a swift, “decisive” and “effective” response to US forces if they threaten Iranian “vessels or warships”.

    One of the reasons behind the escalation is the consistent and strengthening anti-Iranian rhetoric of the White House as a part of Trump’s presidential campaign. Another driving force of the US actions is likely the sharpening global economic crisis and the turmoil on the energy market that has led to the dramatic collapse of oil prices. Indeed, a new conflict in the Persian Gulf could theoretically return the oil prices to $50-60 per barrel.

    In the current situation, Iran is not interested in an escalation of the conflict with the United States. The escalation could, however, be instigated by the US military:

    • A warship or a group of warships could enter Iranian territorial waters;

    • A US military aircraft could violate Iranian airspace;

    • US forces could block for Iran the civilian maritime traffic through the Strait of Hormuz, or detain an Iranian oil tanker;

    • Warships of the US Navy could imitate an attack on an Iranian submarine;

    Iranian forces would have to respond to such a provocation. Thus, a military confrontation could start. After initiating a localized military incident, the White House would accuse Iran of aggressive actions against US forces and the US navy could carry out a demonstrative missile strike on a target or several targets inside Iran. Such an attack would prompt an Iranian response that would involve both its regular and irregular warfare capabilities.

    The IRGC Navy doctrine reflects irregular warfare principles that include the use of surprise, deception, speed, flexibility and adaptability, decentralization and highly mobile and maneuverable units,  all of which are used at sea. These include hit-and-run style surprise attacks or the amassing of large numbers of means and measures to overwhelm the enemies’ defenses. In this scenario the employed naval forces might be described as a mosquito-like swarm of small boats using their size and maneuverability to track and hunt down enemy warships.

    The IRGCN’s mosquito-fleet concept enables rapid formation of tactical groups of small crafts to carry out a surprise strike at any given time from different directions in a particular area of the offshore zone. Such groups can deploy in attack formation immediately prior to reaching the area of the attack.

    Crafts from the formation reach their assault line position either independently or in small groups. This is the way the Iranian Navy would employ the swarm concept. It is important to note the high motivation and ideological training of the mariners involved, who well understand the high level of threat to them personally in the event of the employment of this tactical scheme. IRGCN personnel are motivated and ready to accomplish any feat to defend their homeland. This factor (the high motivation of the personnel) makes a mosquito-fleet armed with missile, torpedo and anti-air weapons especially dangerous to naval forces of the US.

    The aircraft carriers and large warships of the US naval group would become the main priority target of the Iranian response. In the event that the Iranian attack succeeds, the US would have to carry out a massive strike on Iranian infrastructure objects or political and military command centers. Tehran would have either to accept their defeat in this limited confrontation or to respond with another attack on US forces in the region.

    Current US military doctrine dictates the prior employment of mobile interoperable forces, unmanned and robotized systems, as well as massive strikes with high precision weapons in conjunction with the maximum usage of electronic warfare and information warfare. If the confrontation develops further the US would be forced to conduct a limited landing operation on key parts of the Iranian coast. The success of such a limited operation under the likely condition of a strong Iranian military response is improbable. Furthermore, the move would be hampered by the weak psychological condition of US service members caused by current developments inside the US.

    The US military would have to either retreat or venture on to a large-scale military operation in the Persian Gulf region. If the number of forces involved does not allow Washington to deliver a devastating blow to Iran within 1-2 weeks, China or Russia could intervene in some form likely turning the military standoff into a frozen conflict.

    It is likely that despite all difficulties, the US would be able to create an occupation zone inside Iran, likely in the coastal area near the Strait of Hormuz.

    The Iranian oil trade would be fully blocked and the US shale industry would be rescued. At the same time, Washington would have to deal with a permanent insurgency in the occupied area.

    Another possible scenario is the defeat of the United States in this limited conflict because of significant losses in warships, aviation and service members of the involved interoperable forces.

    In this case, US influence in the region would be drastically undermined and the White House would start drawing up plans of revenge.


    Tyler Durden

    Sat, 04/25/2020 – 22:00

  • Even Warren Buffett's Portfolio Isn't "Immune" To The COVID-19 Shutdown
    Even Warren Buffett’s Portfolio Isn’t “Immune” To The COVID-19 Shutdown

    When Warren Buffett has been mentioned over the last 2 months, it’s been in the context of wondering when he’s going to deploy some of the $128 billion in (depreciating) cash he has sitting around. So far, he has yet to do that.

    At the same time, Berkshire’s portfolio has hardly been immune to the coronavirus shutdown. Names like See’s Candies and Precision Castparts are all taking hits as the global economy grinds to a halt. Buffett’s portfolio was on a run rate of churning out more than $20 billion in profit annually. That number is likely to come under pressure, according to Bloomberg

    “We’ve got a few businesses, small ones, we won’t reopen when this is over,” Charlie Munger said of the portfolio.

    While Buffett was able to navigate 2008 with his rock solid balance sheet and diversification, there has been little said from Berkshire about the recent financial crisis. 

    Buffett’s companies are undeniably tethered to the overall economy. See’s Candies, for instance, has furloughed its retail workers. Justin Brands shut down its outlets in Missouri. BNSF will likely report a decline in rail traffic. Precision Castparts temporarily halted some of its operations in April. Lawrence Cunningham, a professor at George Washington University Law School said: “There’s no fortress that’s immune to that right now.”

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Some of Buffett’s names, like Geico and Lubrizol have been able to weather most of the storm. Geico is dealing with fewer accidents as a result of less driving and Lubrizol said social distancing and work-from-home measures have become customary. Lubrizol has not cut any of its workers. 

    CEO Eric Schnur said: “It’s nowhere near business as usual, of course. But keeping people safe in a potentially unsafe situation is something we think about every day whether or not there’s a coronavirus pandemic.”

    Buffett has promised in the past that Berkshire would “forever remain a financial fortress”. But investors have been left wondering exactly what that means in terms of Buffett potentially deploying capital going forward. Berkshire underperformed the S&P 500 during the last bull market and people are wondering if Buffett will take advantage of the recent pullback (if you can even call it that) in valuations. 

    Buffett did exceptionally well during the 2008 crisis after making preferred stock/warrant deals with names like Bank of America and Goldman Sachs. Munger said the company is proceeding with caution. Berkshire is set to report earnings in May, which could shed some light into the company’s capital allocation strategies. 

    Buffett said in his 2017 shareholder letter: “Every decade or so, dark clouds will fill the economic skies, and they will briefly rain gold. When downpours of that sort occur, it’s imperative that we rush outdoors carrying washtubs, not teaspoons. And that we will do.”

    Shareholder Thomas Russo said simply of Buffett: “He’s patient. One of the best features is that he is able to see opportunities broadly.”


    Tyler Durden

    Sat, 04/25/2020 – 21:30

  • China Continues To Flood The World With Defective Medical Supplies
    China Continues To Flood The World With Defective Medical Supplies

    Authored by Soeren Kern via The Gatestone Institute,

    More than a dozen countries on four continents recently disclosed problems with Chinese-made coronavirus tests and personal protective equipment. The problems range from test kits tainted with the coronavirus to medical garments contaminated with insects. Defective Chinese face masks, purchased by Spain’s Ministry of Health, were distributed to hospitals and nursing homes across the country, and more than 100 healthcare workers who used them tested positive for Covid-19.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    A shipment from China of 8.6 million protective face masks and 150 tons of sanitary equipment arrives at Paris-Vatry Airport in France, on April 19, 2020. (Photo by Francois Nascimbeni/AFP via Getty Images)

    Gatestone Institute recently reported that millions of pieces of medical equipment purchased from China by European governments to combat the coronavirus pandemic are defective and unusable.

    Since that report, more than a dozen countries on four continents have disclosed problems with Chinese-made coronavirus tests and personal protective equipment. The problems range from test kits tainted with the coronavirus to medical garments contaminated with insects.

    Chinese authorities have refused to take responsibility for the defective equipment and in many instances have cast blame on the countries that purchased the material. They have also called on nations of the world to stop “politicizing” the problem — at the same time that Chinese President Xi Jinping and his Communist Party have sought to leverage the pandemic to assert a claim to global leadership.

    Spain, the epicenter of the coronavirus crisis in Europe, has experienced the greatest number of problems with medical equipment purchased from China.

    After the epidemic hit Spain, the Spanish government purchased medical supplies from China in the amount of €432 million ($470 million). Chinese vendors demanded they be paid up front before making any deliveries. It now appears that much of the material being supplied by China is substandard.

    In late March, for instance, the Spanish Ministry of Health revealed that more than a half million coronavirus tests it had purchased from a Chinese vendor were defective. The tests, manufactured by Shenzhen Bioeasy Biotechnology, a company based in China’s Guangdong Province, had an accurate detection rate of less than 30%. Bioeasy had claimed, in writing, that its tests had an accurate detection rate of 92%.

    After the swindle made international headlines, Bioeasy agreed to replace the tests. On April 21, however, the Spanish newspaper El País reported that all 640,000 replacement tests were also useless. The Spanish government is now seeking a refund.

    The Chinese Embassy in Madrid blamed the Spanish government for purchasing the tests from an unauthorized vendor. Bioeasy, apparently, does not have a license to sell coronavirus tests. Spain, however, has also reported problems with material purchased from vendors that are authorized by the Chinese government.

    On April 15, Spain’s Ministry of Health recalled 350,000 so-called FFP2 masks after laboratory tests determined that they were substandard. The defective masks were manufactured by Garry Galaxy Biotechnology, a company included on the Chinese government’s list of approved manufacturers of personal protective equipment. FFP2 masks are required to filter at least 94% of aerosols, but those delivered to Spain filtered only between 71% and 82% of aerosols.

    The defective masks were purchased by the Spanish Ministry of Health and distributed to hospitals and nursing homes across the country. After the defective masks were recalled, more than a hundred healthcare workers who had used them tested positive for coronavirus disease (Covid-19).

    In the northeastern Spanish region of Catalonia, local health officials on April 18 recalled 180,000 Covid-19 antibody tests — also known as serological tests — because of their low rate of detection. The tests, produced by the Chinese manufacturer Guangzhou Wondfo Biotech, were purchased by the central government in Madrid and distributed to regional health authorities to detect Covid-19 in two priority groups: healthcare personnel and elderly people in nursing homes. The Wondfo tests reportedly gave negative results to people who had previously tested positive for Covid-19, and also failed to distinguish between two types of antibodies, including those that confer immunity.

    In the eastern city of Alicante, the General Hospital recalled 640 disposable medical garments after one of the boxes from China contained cockroaches. The hospital said that it had received a total of 3,000 garments in 75 boxes and that it found two insects inside one of the boxes. It added that given the shortage of medical supplies, the garments would be sterilized, not destroyed.

    Other countries — in Europe and beyond — have also criticized the quality of Chinese medical supplies:

    • Australia. On April 1, the Australian Broadcasting Corporation (ABC) reported that the Australian Border Force (ABF) had seized nearly one million Chinese-made faulty face masks and other protective clothing that was exported to Australia to help halt the spread of coronavirus. The material was valued at A$1.2 million (US$760,000). “We started seeing this stuff arriving roughly three weeks ago when news of the pandemic was really taking off,” an ABF official told ABC. “The dodgy material is coming via air cargo because there is a backlog of sea freight at Australian ports.”

    • Austria. On April 6, the Ministry of Economic Affairs confirmed that 500,000 masks ordered from China for use in South Tyrol were “completely unusable” because they did not meet safety standards: “The result of the quality control check showed that the masks do not meet an FFP standard. When putting on the masks, it is impossible to obtain a tight fit in the area of ​​the chin and cheeks.” Minister of Economics Margarete Schramböck complained that international providers of the urgently needed FFP2 and FFP3 masks had not delivered the required quality in nine out of ten cases. On April 9, Austrian media reported that the defective mask problem was far greater than initially thought. The Austrian Red Cross ordered 20 million masks from the same Chinese manufacturer that made the defective masks for South Tyrol.

    • Belgium. On March 31, the University Hospital of Leuven rejected a shipment of 3,000 masks from China because the equipment was substandard.

    • Canada. On April 7, the City of Toronto recalled more than 60,000 surgical masks made in China. The masks, valued at more than $200,000, were provided to staff at long-term care facilities. Toronto health authorities were investigating whether caregivers were exposed to Covid-19 while wearing the equipment. The masks represented around 50% of Toronto’s inventory of surgical masks, according to Matthew Pegg, Toronto’s fire chief and general manager of emergency management.

    • Czech Republic. On March 23, the Czech news site iRozhlas reported that 300,000 coronavirus test kits delivered by China had an error rate of 80%. The Czech Ministry of Interior had paid $2.1 million for the defective kits.

    • Finland. On April 10, the Managing Director of Finland’s National Emergency Supply Agency, Tomi Lounema, resigned after he admitted to spending €10 million ($11 million) on defective protective equipment from China.

    • Georgia. On March 27, Health Minister Ekaterine Tikaradze cancelled an order for 200,000 coronavirus tests manufactured by the China-based Shenzhen Bioeasy Biotechnology Company. The move came after Spain reported that 640,000 tests that it purchased from the company were defective. She said: “Georgia had a contract with this company, but today it has been canceled. The money has not been transferred. We are negotiating with another company and at first, they will send two thousand tests. If the reliability of those is approved by us, we will purchase an additional quantity.”

    • India. On April 16, the Mumbai-based Economic Times reported that 50,000 pieces of personal protective equipment donated by China were defective and unusable.

    • Ireland. On April 6, the Health Service Executive (HSE) revealed that a large portion of the €200 million delivery of personal protective equipment supplied by China was found to be unusable for health care workers. The HSE told the Chinese company responsible for the delivery that unless the quality of the equipment being sent is guaranteed, there will not be any more deals between the two nations with regards to PPE. The government said that it was seeking a refund.

    • Malaysia. On April 16, Malaysian authorities approved the use of coronavirus test kits from South Korea after similar kits from China were found to be defective. A senior official in the Ministry of Health, Noor Hisham Abdullah, said that the accuracy of the Chinese tests was “not very good.” He expressed optimism over the South Korean tests: “Now that we have a test kit that is fast, portable and is cheap, that will make the difference.”

    • Netherlands. On March 28, the Netherlands recalled 1.3 million face masks produced in China because they did not meet the minimum safety standards for medical personnel. The so-called KN95 masks are a less expensive Chinese alternative to the American-standard N95 mask, which currently is in short supply around the world. The KN95 does not fit on the face as tightly as the N95, thus potentially exposing medical personnel to the coronavirus.

    • Philippines. On March 29, the Department of Health apologized for comments it made a day earlier that two batches of coronavirus test kits provided by China were substandard. Undersecretary for Health Maria Rosario Vergeire had said that kits made by Chinese manufacturers BGI Group and Sansure Biotech were only 40% accurate in diagnosing Covid-19 and that some of them would have to be discarded. The Chinese Embassy in Manila rejected those accusations and claimed that the kits complied with standards established by the World Health Organization. “The Chinese Embassy firmly rejects any irresponsible remarks and any attempts to undermine our cooperation in this regard,” a spokesman tweeted.

    • Slovakia. On April 1, Prime Minister Igor Matovič disclosed that more than a million coronavirus tests supplied by China for a cash payment of €15 million ($16 million) were inaccurate and unable to detect Covid-19. “We have a ton of tests and no use for them,” he said. “They should just be thrown straight into the Danube.” China accused Slovakian medical personnel of using the tests incorrectly.

    • Turkey. On March 27, Health Minister Fahrettin Koca said that Turkey had tried Chinese-made coronavirus tests but authorities “weren’t happy about them.” Professor Ateş Kara, a member of the Turkish Health Ministry’s coronavirus task force, added that the batch of testing kits were only 30 to 35% accurate: “We have tried them. They don’t work. Spain has made a huge mistake by using them.”

    • United Kingdom. On April 6, the London-based newspaper The Times reported that 17.5 million coronavirus antibody tests supplied by China were defective. The Chinese manufacturers of the tests blamed British officials and politicians for misunderstanding or exaggerating the utility of the tests. The British government, which reportedly paid at least $20 million (£16 million) for the tests, said that it was seeking a refund. Meanwhile, other coronavirus tests destined for the UK were found to be tainted with coronavirus.

    • United States. On April 17, the director of the Missouri Department of Public Safety, Sandy Karsten, revealed that 3.9 million KN95 masks manufactured in China were defective. The State of Missouri had signed a $16.5 million contract with an unidentified vendor for the masks and paid half in advance. The vendor is refusing to return the $8.25 million. Missouri Governor Mike Parson said: “We got cheated here in this state and we are going to go out there and try to get our money back and hold people accountable.” In neighboring Illinois, Governor J.B. Pritzker said that the state had spent $17 million on KN95 masks that may be unusable: “You know things come in shipments of a million — you can’t go through one mask at a time and so you try to take samples from the shipments that come in, make sure you got what you are paying for.” In Washington State, 12,000 coronavirus testing kits produced in China were recalled after some of them were found to be contaminated with the coronavirus.

    On March 30, China urged European countries not to “politicize” concerns about the quality of medical supplies from China. “Problems should be properly solved based on facts, not political interpretations,” Foreign Ministry spokeswoman Hua Chunying said.

    On April 1, the Chinese government reversed course and announced that it was increasing its oversight of exports of coronavirus test kits made in China. Chinese exporters of coronavirus tests must now obtain a certificate from the National Medical Products Administration (NMPA) in order to be cleared by China’s customs agency.

    On April 16, the Wall Street Journal reported that millions of pieces of medical equipment destined for the United States were being held in warehouses in China due to the new export restrictions imposed by the Chinese government. “We appreciate the efforts to ensure quality control,” the U.S. State Department said. “But we do not want this to serve as an obstacle for the timely export of important supplies.”

    U.S. Senator Kelly Loeffler from Georgia accused China of holding up shipments of test kits: “Testing is core to opening our country back up. I’m concerned that China’s holding up test kits. They’re playing games with trade policy to prevent us, the United States, from getting the testing that we need.”

    The coronavirus pandemic has exposed the flaws of globalization by laying bare how the West has allowed itself to become dangerously dependent on Communist China for the supply of essential health care and medical products.

    Andrew Michta, Dean of the College of International and Security Studies at the George C. Marshall European Center for Security Studies, explained:

    “The Wuhan Virus and the attendant misery that the Chinese communist state has unleashed upon the world (very much including its own people) has laid bare a core structural flaw in the assumptions underpinning globalization. It turns out that the radical interweaving of markets — which was supposed to lead to the ‘complex interdependence’ that international relations theorists have been predicting for the better part of the century would lead to an increase in global stability… has instead created an inherently fragile and teetering structure that is exacerbating uncertainty in a time of crisis….

    “If there is any good to come from the devastating impact on our nation of this pandemic brought about by the Chinese communist regime through its malice and incompetence, it will be the likely demise of enthusiasm for globalization as we know it across the West. After three decades of intellectual gymnastics aimed at convincing Americans that the off-shoring of manufacturing and the attendant deindustrialization of the country are good for us, the time has come for a reckoning.

    “Since the end of the Cold War, Western elites seem to have been in thrall to the idea that various ‘natural forces’ in the economy and politics were propelling us forward to a digitally interconnected brave new world, one in which traditional considerations of national interest, national economic policy, national security, and national culture would soon be eclipsed by an emergent peaceful global reality. This virus crisis is a wake-up call, and while some argue we are waking up too late to effectively counter current trends, my money is on the ability of the American people to rally in a crisis and on the resilience of Western democratic institutions.

    “Today, while battling the Wuhan Virus consumes the attention of our government agencies and health care systems, we should not lose sight of the foundational strategic challenge confronting the West in the emerging post-globalization era: We are in a long twilight competition with the Chinese communist regime, a struggle we cannot escape, whether we like it or not. Now is the time to wake up, develop a new strategy for victory, and to move forward.”


    Tyler Durden

    Sat, 04/25/2020 – 21:00

  • Goldman Was Furiously Buying Mortgage Bonds In The Days Before The Fed's Massive Bailout
    Goldman Was Furiously Buying Mortgage Bonds In The Days Before The Fed’s Massive Bailout

    Goldman Sachs had itself one of those patented bouts of good luck that you only see on Wall Streetfor one reason or another. 

    The investment banking giant reportedly was in the market buying up mortgage bonds during the panic selling that hit markets last month, ostensibly before the Fed came out and said they were going to backstop every industry and every market.

    The bet has “certainly made money since the Federal Reserve unveiled massive stimulus turning a crash into a rally,” according to Bloomberg

    Goldman was buying mortgage backed securities from funds that were deleveraging and were being forced to sell. Goldman charged a fee for helping other banks and funds exit their positions, as the bank was offering other parties in distress a quick way to free up cash and “escape margin calls”.

    Goldman was able to stock its coffers because of how leveraged the mortgage bond market is. Sharp drops in asset values lead to quick margin calls and forced liquidations. The move was so sharp over the last two months that some margin calls couldn’t be met, resulting in several REITs asking counterparties for forbearance agreements.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Goldman swears that all it was doing was making a market and that it would have been able to find buyers for the bonds in relatively short order. The only question is whether or not they thought that “buyer” would be the Fed.

    Goldman Sachs said in a statement: “Making markets — buying from or selling to our clients — is the core activity of our Global Markets division, and we do it regardless of markets conditions. We had no advance knowledge of any of the facilities the Fed announced and assumed risk when we bought securities from clients during this period.”

    For now, the bet just looks to have been “well timed”. The Fed stepped in soon thereafter and calmed the markets when it committed to buying unlimited amounts of Treasury bonds and mortgage securities. Goldman, in turn, sold some notes to the Fed. 

    One Bloomberg index shows theses mortgage bonds rising 3% over the last month. A Markit iBoxx benchmark of non-agency securities rose 14%.

    Goldman also reportedly executed several large trades with key clients and approached several other structured credit hedge funds to seek out trades. The bank has seen a trading increase of about 75% as of early April. 


    Tyler Durden

    Sat, 04/25/2020 – 20:30

  • More From The "New Normal" (In 50 'Darker' Headlines)
    More From The “New Normal” (In 50 ‘Darker’ Headlines)

    Via Off-Guardian.org,

    Despite the concise, well-intentioned and unavoidably ubiquitous nature of our previous Message, it seems some are still withholding their consent for necessary change.

    Though all our Responsible Media Outlets are doing their duty, it appears some members of the public do not yet understand the reality of our situation. More distressing are the efforts of a Criminal Minority to misrepresent Policy, subvert The Message and engage in dangerous questions.

    We hope the following collection – once again compiled by the good citizens at the Consent Factory – makes the nature of this new reality quite clear to all those who aren’t yet aware their lives will never be the same.

    Remember, resisting the new normal will endanger your life.

    One area of concern is that the powers detailed under the bill, as published, remain in force for two years … among the most draconian possible powers is for police, public health and immigration officers to detain people suspected of having Covid-19.”

    UK’s emergency coronavirus bill ‘will put vulnerable at risk’The Guardian (23rd March 2020)

    People who intentionally spread the coronavirus could face criminal charges under federal terrorism laws, the Justice Department’s No. 2 official said Tuesday […] “Threats or attempts to use COVID-19 as a weapon against Americans will not be tolerated.””

    Those who intentionally spread coronavirus could be charged as terroristsPolitico, (24th March 2020)

    A police force has defended using a drone camera to shame people into not driving into a national park during the lockdown, while another force said it was introducing roadblocks to stop drivers heading to tourist hotspots.”

    UK police use drones and roadblocks to enforce lockdownThe Guardian, (26th March 2020)

    Humberside Police has created an online reporting portal where people can send details of those not following social distancing rules.”

    Humberside police creates online report portal for people not social distancing, ITV news (26th March 2020)

    An Austin, Texas based technology company is launching ‘artificially intelligent thermal cameras’ that it claims will be able to detect fevers in people, and in turn send an alert that they may be carrying the coronavirus.”

    Surveillance Company Says It’s Deploying ‘Coronavirus-Detecting’ Cameras in USVICE, (18th March 2020)

    As the jogger struggled with police, screaming for help, she was filmed by residents who had absolutely zero sympathy for her plight. ‘What’s not fair is that you go out running, you bloody idiot!’, shouted the woman apparently filming the encounter.”

    Coronavirus lockdown: Jogger resists arrest in Spain and is abused by onlookers, AS.com, (21st March 2020)

    Gordon Brown has urged world leaders to create a temporary form of global government to tackle the Covid-19 pandemic … involving world leaders, health experts and international organisations that would have executive powers to coordinate the response.”

    Gordon Brown calls for global government to tackle coronavirusThe Guardian, (26th March 2020)

    South African police enforcing a coronavirus lockdown have fired rubber bullets towards hundreds of shoppers queueing outside a supermarket in Johannesburg … the police used whips to get the shoppers to observe social distancing rules.”

    South African police fire rubber bullets at shoppers amid lockdownThe Guardian, (28th March 2020)

    President Trump said Saturday he may announce later in the day a federally mandated quarantine on the New York metro region, placing “enforceable” travel restrictions on people planning to leave the New York tri-state area because of the coronavirus.”

    U.S. coronavirus-related deaths double in two daysThe Washington Post, (March 28th 2020)

    Rhode Island police began stopping cars with New York plates Friday. On Saturday, the National Guard will help them conduct house-to-house searches to find people who traveled from New York and demand 14 days of self-quarantine.”

    Rhode Island Police to Hunt Down New Yorkers Seeking RefugeBloomberg, (27th March 2020)

    A Police force has had a surge in calls from people reporting neighbours for “going out for a second run” and “gathering in their back gardens.” … “We are getting (dozens of) calls from people who say ‘I want you to come and arrest them’.

    Coronavirus: Exercise rule-breakers spark surge in police calls, BBC News, (26th March 2020)

    Police with batons and guns have moved in to protect supermarkets on the Italian island of Sicily after reports of looting by locals who could no longer afford food.”

    ‘We have to eat’: Sicilian police crackdown on locals looting supermarkets, The Local, (29th March 2020)

    The National Guard will be deployed to enforce a mile-radius coronavirus “containment area” in overwhelmed New Rochelle … the National Guard will enforce the mandated closure of ‘large gathering areas’ — including schools and houses of worship.”

    National Guard deployed to NY community with nation’s ‘largest cluster’ of coronavirusNew York Post, (10th March 2020)

    New York City residents who break social distancing rules will be subject to fines up to $500, Mayor de Blasio said Sunday … he also announced that NYPD and MTA workers would do checks of subway cars and force riders off cars that are too crowded.”

    New Yorkers who break social distancing rules will now face fines up to $500Politico, 29th March 2020)

    Anyone who leaves their house without a reasonable excuse could spend up to 6 months in prison and face an $11,000 fine under a directive [that] gives police sweeping power to enforce restrictions designed to limit the spread of coronavirus in Australia.”

    Six months in jail, $11,000 fine for leaving home without a ‘reasonable excuse’Sydney Morning Herald, (31st March 2020)

    A coronavirus app that alerts people if they have recently been in contact with someone testing positive for the virus “could play a critical role” in limiting lockdowns … but the academics say no-one should be forced to enroll – at least initially.’

    Coronavirus: UK considers virus-tracing app to ease lockdown, BBC News, (3st March 2020)

    As coronavirus lockdowns have been expanded globally, police across the world have been given licence to control behaviour in a way that would normally be extreme even for an authoritarian state.”

    Teargas, beatings and bleach: the most extreme Covid-19 lockdown controls around the worldThe Guardian, (1st April 2020)

    It is likely that we are not heading towards a general deconfinement in one go and for everyone,” Prime Minister Philippe told parliament … the interior minister noted 359,000 fines for violating the lockdown had been issued since lockdown began.”

    French PM warns lockdown will not be lifted ‘in one go’France24, (1st April 2020)

    Philippine President Rodrigo Duterte has warned he would order the country’s police and military to shoot dead anyone “who creates trouble” during a month-long lockdown of the island of Luzon enforced to halt the spread of the coronavirus.’

    ‘Shoot them dead’: Duterte warns against violating lockdownAl Jazeera, (2nd April 2020)

    French interior minister Christophe Castaner warned that “roadblocks would be set up on major highways and axes and extra police, gendarmes or soldiers dispatched to train stations and airports to verify the documents of anyone stopped out and about.”‘

    Confirmed cases pass 1 million – as it happenedThe Guardian, (2nd April 2020)

    Around the world, police forces are testing how far to go in punishing ordinary behavior.”

    How Far Should Police Go in Enforcing Coronavirus Lockdowns?New York Times (2nd April 2020)

    Western governments aiming to relax restrictions on movement are turning to unprecedented surveillance to track people infected with the new coronavirus and identify those with whom they have been in contact.”

    U.S. and Europe Turn to Phone-Tracking Strategies to Slow Spread of CoronavirusWall Street Journal, (3rd April 2020)

    If a person becomes infected, the app will automatically send a push notification to anyone they have crossed paths with in the past two weeks, to warn them of the risk of infection.”

    Privacy-mad Germany turns to app to track coronavirus spreadThe Local, (2nd April 2020)

    Google will use its mammoth collection of mobile location data to measure whether people across the globe are following government directives …”

    Google wielding its vast troves of phone-tracking data in virus fightPolitico, (4th April 2020)

    A 70-year-old township man was arrested twice on Saturday after police alleged he tried to enter two different Wawa convenience stores without a mask and became belligerent … he was charged with second-degree terroristic threats during an emergency.”

    Coronavirus NJ: Unmasked Toms River man, 70, arrested twice in one day at Wawa stores, app.com, (13th April 2020)

    Residents in Riverside County, CA, are now required to wear face coverings and could face a fine of $1,000 per violation per day if the mandate is ignored. ‘This is a valid order and enforceable by fine, imprisonment or both,’ said Sheriff Chad Bianco.”

    CALIFORNIA COUNTY FINING RESIDENTS $1,000 FOR NOT WEARING FACE MASKS IN PUBLICNewsweek, (7th April 2020)

    A family claimed a 500-mile round Lake District trip was acceptable if they wore masks and gloves, police said. The family were criticised as “absolute idiots” and called “clowns” after the force posted about it on Twitter.’

    Coronavirus: Police stop family on 500-mile Lake District trip, BBC News, (14th April 2020)

    A woman in Victoria says she was left feeling “heartbroken” and like a criminal after uniformed police officers carrying weapons interrupted her father’s funeral over the Easter long weekend to enforce social distancing rules.’

    ‘Totally disrespectful’: police interrupt funeral while enforcing social distancing rules over Easter weekendThe Guardian, (13th April 2020)

    The coronavirus pandemic has led to an unprecedented global surge in digital surveillance, researchers and privacy advocates around the world have said, with billions of people facing enhanced monitoring that may prove difficult to roll back.’

    Growth in surveillance may be hard to scale back after pandemic, experts sayThe Guardian, (14th April 2020)

    Protesters rallied to reopen North Carolina … at least one was arrested. “You are in violation of the executive order,” said police. “You are posing a risk to public health. If you do not disperse, you will be taken and processed at Wake County jail.”

    Protesters rally for NC to reopen. One woman arrested for violating governor’s order.New Observer, (14th April 2020)

    Officers have become public health police, breaking up crowds at stores … the department has mobilized the Citywide All-Out Task Force, which is usually assembled to flood high-crime areas and other assignments.”

    New Role for New York Police: Breaking Up Crowds at Trader Joe’sNew York Times, (14th April 2020)

    A South Australian couple was hit with a hefty fine from cops for nonessential travel amid the pandemic after the pair posted vacation snaps from 2019 on Facebook … the couple was warned that if they ‘posted any more photos,’ they would “be arrested.”

    Couple mistakenly fined for posting old vacation photos during coronavirus lockdownNew York Post, (14th April 2020)

    Attorney Beate Bahner challenged Germany’s coronavirus regulations in the Constitutional Court and failed. Now she has been taken to a psychiatric facility.”

    Coronavirus: Anwältin Beate Bahner will gegen Verordnung klagen – und landet selbst vor Gericht, Heidelberg24.com, (24th April 2020)

    Ms Bahner submitted a 36-page urgent motion to the Constitutional Court regarding the unlawfulness of all 16 German federal states’ Coronavirus measures … [her] interview for “incitement to commit criminal acts” is scheduled for Wednesday 15 April.

    Coronavirus lockdown: German lawyer detained for oppositionUK Column, (14th April 2020)

    Police in Berlin broke up a large birthday gathering in the early hours of Monday … a 16-year-old girl was celebrating with 31 other people … all 32 party attendees [are] being investigated for criminal offenses.”

    Berlin police bust 16th birthday party amid coronavirus lockdown, DW, (13th April 2020)

    Extraordinary times require extraordinary measures and it is about protecting the public.”

    Federal government open to new law to fight pandemic misinformation, CBC.com, 15th April 2020)

    The UK’s health secretary, Matt Hancock, has suggested “something like an immunity certificate or a wristband” in the future.’

    Coronavirus: Could biometric ID cards offer the UK a lockdown exit strategy?, Sky News, (10th April 2020)

    Attempting to issue some kind of immunity certificate to millions of Americans would be unprecedented.”

    What are ‘immunity passports’ and could they help us end the coronavirus lockdown?The Hill, (10th April 2020)

    The COVID-19 Credentials Initiative (CCI) is working on a digital certificate, [that] lets individuals prove (and request proof from others) they’ve recovered from the novel coronavirus or have received a vaccination, once one is available.”

    COVID-19 ‘Immunity Passport’ Unites 60 Firms on Self-Sovereign ID Projectcoindesk.com, (13th April 2020)

    [T]he drones use computer vision systems to monitor temperatures and heart and respiratory rates of people from above and single out people sneezing or coughing … Draganfly also sees a possible security use around borders or critical infrastructure.”

    ‘Pandemic drones’ could single people out in a crowd for coughing, sneezing, or running a temperatureBusiness Insider, (11th April 2020)

    Mobile phone tracking software could be compulsory if not enough Australians voluntarily download the application to help in coronavirus case tracing.”

    Coronavirus: Mobile tracking app could be compulsory, Morrison says, 9 News, (17th April 2020)

    The three-page document, entitled “what constitutes a reasonable excuse to leave the place where you live”, is designed to help police enforce the emergency restrictions that came into effect three weeks ago and are set to be extended.’

    Coronavirus lockdown: Police guidelines give ‘reasonable excuses’ to go out, BBC News, (16th April 2020)

    [T]here is a danger that these new, often highly invasive, measures will become the norm around the world …”

    Compulsory selfies and contact-tracing: Authorities everywhere are using smartphones to track the coronavirusBusiness Insider (14th April 2020)

    Norway unveiled its Smittestop app, which will notify users if they have been less than 2 metres from an infected person for more than 15 minutes. “To get back to a more normal life … we all have to make an effort and use this app,” PM Solberg said. […] Developers in several European countries are working on similar apps to inform people quickly when they have been in contact with someone who is infected with the virus, as part of a pan-European privacy-preserving proximity tracing (Pepp-PT) initiative.

    Coronavirus ‘under control’ in Germany, as some countries plan to relax lockdownsThe Guardian, (17th April 2020)

    Officials say they routinely saw people visit the skatepark, even children accompanied by their parents, according to the San Clemente Times … city officials followed in the footsteps of other cities and filled the skatepark with 37 tons of sand.”

    Coronavirus: San Clemente Fills Skatepark With 37 Tons Of Sand After Skaters Ignore ‘No Trespassing’ Signs, CBS Local, (17th April 2020)

    In one [Michigan] county, anyone deemed a ‘carrier and health threat’ can be detained by police and taken to an Involuntary Isolation Facility.”

    Michigan judge authorizes arresting people on suspicion of COVID-19 illness, Life Site News, (16th April 2020)

    Technology firms are processing confidential UK patient information in a data-mining operation […] Palantir, founded by rightwing billionaire Peter Thiel, is working with Faculty, a UK artificial intelligence startup, to consolidate government databases.”

    UK government using confidential patient data in coronavirus response, The Guardian, (12th April 2020)

    ‘Imagine an America divided into two classes […] “It will be a frightening schism,” a World Health Organization special envoy on Covid-19 predicted. “Those with antibodies will be able to travel and work, and the rest will be discriminated against.”’

    The Coronavirus in America: The Year AheadThe New York Times, 18th April 2020

    Riots have broken out in Paris amid anger over police ‘heavy-handed’ treatment of ethnic minorities during the coronavirus lockdown.”

    Riots break out in Paris amid anger at police ‘heavy-handed’ treatment of minorities during lockdownThe Daily Mail, (20th April 2020)

    … law enforcers have killed 18 people in Nigeria since lockdowns began on 30 March. Coronavirus has killed 12 people, according to health ministry data.”

    Coronavirus: Security forces kill more Nigerians than Covid-19, BBC News, (16th April 2020)

    We call upon the degenerate few to cease endangering our new social order.

    REMEMBER TO REPORT ANYONE DISPERSING ON ENDORSING MISINFORMATION OR CRITICISING THE STATE

    The world is different now. Unfettered expression is a luxury of the pre-Covid society. Doubt is the weapon of the virus spreader.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Pro-Infection propaganda will not be tolerated.

    Have a nice day.


    Tyler Durden

    Sat, 04/25/2020 – 20:00

  • In 2020 Oil-Exporters' Income Will Plunge By Over $1 Trillion, Forcing Widespread Stock Liquidations
    In 2020 Oil-Exporters’ Income Will Plunge By Over $1 Trillion, Forcing Widespread Stock Liquidations

    While any other time the plunge of WTI prices into negative territory last Monday would have been the story of the year, the fact that the financial press has already moved on and is focusing on whatever 100-sigma event du jour has hit, merely shows just how insane 2020 has been as a decade of central planning slowly comes unglued thanks to a black swan bat trigger that has shut down the global economy and cash flows while keeping stocks just shy of all time highs.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    However, before we relegate the historic oil move that sent the May WTI future as low as -$40 on Monday to the dustbin of history, there are some critical considerations that have to be considered, namely what are the implications of much lower oil prices this year for other asset classes? To address this question we will revisit some prior analyses on the shifts in flows and incomes resulting from oil price changes, especially those looking at the consequences stemming from the collapse of petrodollar mercantilism in 2016 when oil exporting nations saw their oil-linked income crater.

    By itself the decline in oil prices is generating a big shift in flows and incomes across the world, albeit – at least for now – smaller than the previous big shift seen between 2014 and 2016. According to JPMorgan calculations, oil consumers had spent around $2.2tr in 2019 on crude and related products with an average oil price of $64 per barrel, and in 2020 they are likely to spend less than half of that, i.e. around $1tr with an average oil price of $34 and an assumed big reduction in demand.

    This represents a hit to oil producing countries’ incomes of $1.1tr, or 1.4% of global GDP, from the combined effects of an income transfer from the oil price declines and a hit to oil demand. In contrast, in 2014, oil consumers had spent $3.4tr on crude and related products with an average oil price of $100 per barrel, and in 2016 they had spent less than half of that, i.e. $1.6tr with an average oil price of $45 per barrel during 2016. In other words there was a bigger $1.8tr or 2.2% of global GDP income transfer between oil consumers and oil producers between 2014 and 2016.

    As we discussed extensively in 2016, the massive and abrupt loss of income for oil producers during the 2015/2016 OPEC crisis had an profound impact on their behavior, especially on their saving and spending. As JPM’s Nick Panigirtzoglou writes, oil exporting countries, i.e. the countries which on net export oil (Middle East, Norway, Russia, African and LatAm), had received $1.6tr from their oil exports in 2014 and saw their oil revenue being more than halved to $770bn in 2016.

    These oil exporters’ revenues are typically recycled via two channels: via imports of goods and services from the rest of the world and via accumulation of financial assets mostly through SWFs and FX reserves. And since all of these transactions are mediated via the US Dollar, the resulting cycle has been known as the petrodollar mechanism (or petrodollar mercantilism), one which helped cement the dollar’s role as the global reserve currency.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Some more stats via JPMorgan: In 2014, around 84% or $1.34tr of the $1.6tr oil revenue was recycled via imports and the remaining 16% or $260bn was recycled via SWFs and FX reserves, mostly SWFs. In 2016, 117% or $900bn of the $770bn of  oil exporters’ revenues was recycled via imports of goods and services from the rest of the world, $130bn of which was funded by SWF and FX reserve decumulation.

    So, between 2014 and 2016, there was not only a substantial $440bn decline in spending of goods and services by oil exporters, but also a similar decline in SWF and FX reserve accumulation. The implications for SWF/FX reserve manager asset purchases were dramatic: previous equity and bond purchases via the SWF and FX reserve managers’ vehicles of oil exporters during 2014 turned into outright sales during 2015 and 2016 as shown in Figure 4.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Well, get ready for round 2.

    In 2019 oil exporting countries received around $1.1tr from their oil exports and are likely to see their revenue halved this year. Their imports of goods and services from the rest of the world would certainly decline also, but by a lot less given their already low level after severe declines during 2015 and 2016.

    As a result, JPMorgan now expects that these oil exporting countries would have to sell almost $300bn of SWFs and FX reserves, or issue significant amounts of debt to fund a shortfall in oil revenues, this year to prevent their imports from falling below the $800bn level. This implies significant selling of both bonds and equities as shown in the chart above for various scenarios/assumptions about the average oil price for this year.

    Said otherwise, not only will stock buybacks tumble by as much as 50% (according to Goldman and JPM estimates), but there will likely be roughly $200 billion in forced equity selling this year.

    As Panigirtzoglou explains further, the impact from oil income shifts should also be felt in oil companies’ financial and capital investment. Consider that oil companies had spent close to $600bn on capital equipment in 2014, falling to $410bn in 2015 and $280bn in 2016, and then recovering to around $300bn in 2017/2018 and $330bn in 2019. JPM projects at least 20% decline in 2020 to $260bn or lower, a number that is even more aggressive than a similar forecast from Goldman Sachs, which as we noted last week, expect a roughly expects an $200BN drop in capex and a $850BN plunge in overall corporate cash spending.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    As a tangent, it is easier to cut share buybacks as financial investment than capital investment. The Oil and Gas industry had spent $57bn on share buybacks in 2013, but since then buybacks were muted, averaging below $30bn per year in the years after up until 2017. The previous long retrenchment in oil companies share buybacks started reversing in 2018 by share buybacks rising to around $74bn before moderating to $65bn in 2019. It is hardly surprising that JPMorgan projects that share buybacks by oil companies will evaporate this year, thus implying a drag of around $65bn for equity markets relative to last year.

    What about the flows emanating from oil consumers (i.e., the benefit from lower oil prices)?  On previous occasions JPM had noted that the previous $1.8tr windfall seen between 2014 and 2016 was most likely equally split between the residential sector, the industrial sector and the transportation sector. These economic agents had spent a portion of their total $1.1tr oil expenditure windfall eventually but with a lag, meaning that most of that windfall was saved during 2015/2016. These savings most likely took the form of bank deposits which eventually supported bond markets via the banking system deploying these excess deposits into bond markets. As a result, the oil income windfall to oil consuming industries had likely created a bullish flow into fixed income during 2015 and 2016, bigger in size than the fixed income flows resulting from the decumulation of SWF/FX reserves of oil exporting countries during these two years.

    However, according to the JPM strategist, these positive bond flow dynamics emanating from oil consumers are unlikely to be repeated in the current conjuncture given the severe cash flow disruption and declines in incomes and with the  transportation sector in crisis. But even if these positive bond flow dynamics were to materialize, they would have been less significant relative to 2015/2016 given the current backdrop of unlimited central bank QE.

    In summary, the decline in oil prices creates a negative flow for equity markets this year via SWF decumulation and reduced share buybacks by oil companies. That said, the material negative equity flow impulse associated with the latest unwind of petrodollar recycling, is in JPM’s view of secondary importance and is outweighed in size by other institutional or retail investor equity flows, which according to the bank are likely to increase by more than $3 trillion during the last three quarters of 2020 vs. the first quarter. Here, we disagree violently with JPM as the last thing the vast majority of the population – and even the wealthiest 0.1% – will care about is putting their money in the market when they have no idea if they will have a job or what the future holds. Needless to say, if JPMorgan is wrong and this $3 trillion in incremental purchases from institutional and retail sources fails to materialize, the bank’s forecast for new all time highs in early 2021 will be a dream that is as clogged as any pipe heading into Cushing.


    Tyler Durden

    Sat, 04/25/2020 – 19:30

  • "This Is The Final Leg": Hugh Hendry Takes A Break From Retirement To Reveal His Latest Market Thoughts
    “This Is The Final Leg”: Hugh Hendry Takes A Break From Retirement To Reveal His Latest Market Thoughts

    In September 2017, Hugh Hendry stunned the world when, out of the blue one of the best investors of his generation shut down his hedge fund Eclectica (his farewell letter can be found is here) disgusted with how broken and impossible to navigate capital markets had become as a result of central bank intervention and retired to the warm embrace of St Barts, even though it was clear he still had much left to say about the investing process.

    And so, after keeping a low profile for nearly three years, overnight the contrarian investor penned a lengthy tweetstorm from his his brand new twitter account, touching on all the latest market development and laying out some of his latest investing ideas. Below, we have aggregated his thoughts for the benefit of all those curious what the Scotsman thinks about when he is not pursuing his retirement interests which according to this twitter profile include “luxury real-estate, mentoring, and paddle-surfing.”

    Never one to disappoint, Hendry reverts to his macro roots, discussing the fate of gold and the dollar in the helicopter money regime, what it would take for the S&P to hit 10,000, whether the entire VIX regime is now inverted due to central bank backstops, and asks the “two key questions”: are we transcending from a bull market in fear to a bull market in WTF!? And will QE infinity differ from its previous vintages by driving risk asset volatility levels higher??

    Hendry also touches on an old favorite topic, namely hyperinflation, a thesis which he thinks “needs stock prices to fall further and vol to rise in the conventional manner.”  But his most topical observation is what are the core criteria that will allow MMT – i.e., that fusion of the Fed and Treasury known as “helicopter money”…

    you can print as many dollars as you damn well please, as long as the yield curve doesn’t steepen and the dollar doesn’t rally precipitously…you’re good to go and MMT is dope.

    … as the alternative is game over. As usual, his stream of consciousness answers, right or wrong, are fascinating.

    The full stream is reproduced below:

    I have spent last few weeks reminiscing about the launch of The Eclectica Fund way back in 2002. Our principal objective back then was to secure the flexibility of a macro mandate to capture the emerging bull market in gold. The chart is not vol. adjusted but provides context.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    It’s remarkable how little time i allocated to the trade. We did make 50pc in the first calendar year, 2003, but then retreated as it traded flat vs the total return from the SPX 2004/6. But I do kick myself at missing the final explosive moves to the all time high 2009/12.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    I’ve had a long sabbatical. If you remember my mantra from 2005 became, “if you fear inflation, buy bonds!” The reasoning being that gold would lack an explosive pulse higher without first an economic calamnity. 2008 proved our thesis and our bond-like positioning hit jackpot.

    Today however, “if you fear inflation then you should buy more gold”. It is simple. The Fed is trying to debase the $ to help the economy. Will it help? Maybe. Will it help the stock market? Probably. Will it help gold? Definitely. This is the final leg that i envisaged in 2002.

    So gold’s got your back. My only grumble is that it reverts to a short volatility asset at the most inopportune moments like October 2008. Many good men, myself included, then missed the real action. So don’t underestimate the emotional energy you’re gonna need to hold onto this.

    I say this because unusual things are happening and I’m saying “what if the bull market in fear has peaked and we find ourselves in a bull market of WTF!?” I traded at start of April a long Aug / Short Oct Vix. I’m small offside. But a 12pc equity rally and vol is up! WTF!?

    I’m fomenting the idea that negative interest rates beget negative oil prices beget negative volatility. The causation is of course totally false but its a cute thing to say nevertheless. Let’s see if i can do better?

    The probabilities are high that gold proves rewarding as long as you can carry it for the duration of the journey. If you are willing to accept lower, much lower probabilities, then maybe there are even better trades that are insanely convex and have no counterparty risk.

    What I want to say is that 2 universal truths might be in the process of changing or flipping around. First, that option skew might change – deep OTM equity puts are typically 2x more expensive than their call equivalents; always have been but not ordained to stay that way. I think today’s policy response could create the opposite dynamic. Difficult trade to structure selling deep OTM SPX puts to buy 2x more calls without risking bankruptcy. Sure trade at cash SPX 1700 but naked and have to experience the nightmare of every point below 1700…no way

    I traded this in Japan in 2013 Sold deep OTM Nikkei put, bought an even deeper OTM put, sold an ATM call spread and bought 15pc OTM call. Or at least I think i did. But the older vintages of QE encouraged volatility to fall, not rise, and we never burst through the inertia.

    The trade was therefore before its time but I am probably one of the few risk managers anywhere with the experience of running a big options/futures book that was seeking higher equity prices and higher volatility – just ask all the Japanese vol traders that I enriched…

    Second, I think the futures curve for VIX is going to trade in backwardation; that the carry from short selling future volatility versus spot to a gullible public that was only too willing to pay almost anything to protect themselves against the next deflationary event has gone.

    The key questions: are we transcending from a bull market in fear to a bull market in WTF!? And will QE infinity differ from its previous vintages by driving risk asset volatility levels higher??

    The key is the dollar. It is to the Fed what the punitive gold reparations of the 1920 Paris Peace Accord were to the German Reichsbank and German stock prices. Which is to say that the Fed are going to have to issue many more trillions of dollars to stop the USD moving higher.

    We were wrong. All of us. It was never going to be about soulless creditors rolling over and simply enriching debtors via paying them higher and higher wages like Henry Ford. No; changes, BIG changes, in major price regimes always begin with currency debasements.

    And, remember that the dollar short is ALWAYS the largest short position. Foreign mismatching of dollar asset/liabilities is always the imperative justification to devalue the dollar to bail-out the rest-of-the-world and it always sets the stage for risk asset prices to recover.

    It’s just that a 35% fall from the highs of the greatest bull market ever has precipitated c. $8trillion in global fiscal response and probably 5x that in its monetary equivalent if we consider swap lines etc with not a day passing where that figure seems like an understatement. And then you look at the charts and to quote Raoul Pal, who else cause he seems omnipresent, but the blinking dollar hasn’t blinked; not an inch, its barely sold off at all…that’s downright frightening.

    And so here is where it gets really cookie for I believe you can’t forecast a risk recovery that witnesses the SPX reclaim its all time high. No. If that’s your mindset you have to imagine 2x or why not 3x? The SPX at 10,000 now that is a WTF idea!?

    And I’m tiring now but I just don’t see that outcome materialising unless we see another profound, I want to say debilitating, decline in the SPX below 1700. That’s why I don’t like the gold trade on its own without some kind of long vol trade to cushion if not enrich the journey.

    So maybe sell dollar cross or treasury vol as these are the naval plimsoll lines of MMT: you can print as many dollars as you damn well please, as long as the yield curve doesn’t steepen and the dollar doesn’t rally precipitously…you’re good to go and MMT is dope.

    So we know the critical lines, the levels that absolutely must not be crossed, they, the authorities, and us, we all know it. The Fed has to, and will do, everything in its powers to flatten the yield curve and prevent the dollar appreciating from here.

    And the consequences of their actions will be to becalm volatility in these assets making them a good source to fund, in the first instance, equity volatility, as I think the hyperinflation thesis needs stock prices to fall further and vol to rise in the conventional manner.

    But should this happen I would want to buy those incredibly cheap Dec 21 3000 calls and forget about funding via selling OTM puts; but I’m getting way to far ahead of myself…you see what confinement does?

    Hendry concludes with some “regional” observations, including what Hendry’s “macro volatility trade at World’s End for years” has been, and which nonetheless are just as interesting:

    Where are all the customers’ yachts? I got to tell you that they seem to be en-route to St Barts. No cases of the virus in over a month on the island and from my vantage point, over-looking the sea, there isn’t a day that passes without another mega yacht sailing past my house.

    The island is hard, almost impossible, to reach, unless you can charter a boat or your very own private jet. But where else would you rather stay if money is no option? The island is on the same time zone as NYC and it has the holy trinity of no debt, no taxes and no crime,

    And you can still finance the purchase of properties here with 20 year €uro loans fixed for less than 2%! That’s not going to last forever…St Barts has been my macro volatility trade at World’s End for years

    Like my German industrialist forefathers – I have no German ancestry ! although my name is derived from the German word hug meaning heart, mind and spirit – but markets, bankers and investors are always slow to recognise a transition to higher prices caused by currency debasement/

    When i was younger i read all  those stories of international investors – the smart ones – hoovering up hard, cash producing German assets, funded by bankers who severely underestimated the potential for increases in interest rates that would make their loan books worthless…

    Yet here we are 100 years later and my friend, who works in a restaurant, just secured 1.35PC fixed for 20 years! These loans are sure to become worthless as the pendulum finally  swings from the creditor to the debtor community. Maybe we’re all bank robbers now…WTF!!

    Still want more? Then listen to the following 12 minute podcast Hendry recorded last week, and where every sentence seems to seep with nostalgia for the Scott’s  glory investing days.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Who knows, maybe if the market remains volatile enough, Hugh will come emergy from retirement for another try?

     

     

     


    Tyler Durden

    Sat, 04/25/2020 – 19:04

  • 'Capitalism' On Life Support… Time For A Cure
    ‘Capitalism’ On Life Support… Time For A Cure

    Via The Strategic Culture Foundation,

    The Covid-19 pandemic is unleashing obscene bailouts of Western industries and companies, as well as lifelines for billionaire business magnates.

    It is grotesque that millions of workers are being laid off by corporations which are in turn receiving taxpayer funds. Many of these corporations have stashed trillions of dollars away in tax havens and have contributed zero to the public treasury. Yet they are being bailed out due to shutdowns in the economy over the Covid-19 crisis.

    Why aren’t the banks and corporations being forced by governments to pay for their workers on sick leave or in lockdown?

    It’s because the governments are bought and paid-for servants of the top one per cent. Some political leaders are the embodiment of the one per cent, like Donald Trump and senior members of the U.S. Congress.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    The biggest orgy of funny money is seen in the U.S. where the Trump administration and Congress have approved the printing of trillions of dollars to prop up corporations and banks. Meanwhile crumbs are being thrown at millions of workers and their families.

    In just five weeks, unemployment has hit a staggering 26.4 million people in the U.S. – and that’s the official figure. The real level is doubtless much higher. It is reported that the job losses have wiped out all the employment gains made over the past decade since the last financial crisis in 2008. As with the present crisis, the U.S. government arranged trillion-dollar bailouts for banks and industries back in 2008-2009. It didn’t last long until the next binge.

    In truth is this is a familiar pattern over the past century where the economy is continually salvaged from ruin by the government at the expense of ordinary workers, small businesses and taxpayers.

    The recurring rescue is proof that the system of private capital and supposed free markets is a myth.

    The system typically privatizes profit for an elite while socializing the losses for the mass of people. It has always been a version of “socialism for the rich”.

    In the distant past the salvaging of broken-down capitalism was at least conducted with a certain degree of democratization and social progress. In the New Deal era of Roosevelt in the 1930s at least government intervention went a long way to restoring workers and their rights, despite bitter opposition from capitalists. Over recent decades, however, the rescuing of capitalism has seen an ever-increasing emphasis on plying money and loans to corporations and investors while ordinary workers are neglected. This process of embezzlement reached new heights in the 2008 crash. Now under Trump the larceny has become legendary. It should be underscored though that the corruption has bipartisan endorsement from Republicans and Democrats. They are really one party beholden to big business.

    As Eric Zuesse commented in an-depth analysis published in our journal this week, the Covid-19 “top-down bailout” in the U.S. will result in even more social inequality and ultimately more dysfunction in the American economy going forward.

    “The outcome will therefore be economic collapse, and perhaps even revolution,” notes Zuesse.

    It is indisputable that capitalism is a failed system both in the U.S. and Europe. The Covid-19 pandemic and its disastrous social impact of sickness and deaths shows that such an economy cannot organize societies based on satisfying human needs. Instead, it functions to continually enrich the already wealthy while creating ever-greater numbers of impoverished and deprived. This chronic polarization of wealth has been pointed out by many critics of capitalism, including Karl Marx, and more contemporaneously by progressive economists like Richard Wolff and Thomas Picketty.

    It is fair to describe corporate capitalism (or socialism for the rich) as a pathology which produces many other pathologies, including deprivation, crime, insecurity, ecological damage, militarism, imperialism and ultimately war.

    Ironically, a virus is exposing the pathological system. And it is, inevitably, forcing a cure to arise.

    It’s time to abolish the parasitical system and implement something more civilized, effective, sustainable and democratic. That is the task of people organized to fight for their interests. The delusion of bailing out a failed and sick system must be shaken off once and for all.


    Tyler Durden

    Sat, 04/25/2020 – 19:00

  • Every Landlord Needs To See This Shocking Chart Before May 1st
    Every Landlord Needs To See This Shocking Chart Before May 1st

    Last week we identified a potential rent strike brewing among the working poor in New York City. Many of these folks are planning to skip out on May 01’s rent payment to their landlords:

    “With so many New Yorkers unable to pay rent for the foreseeable future, the current crisis is unsustainable and demands action,” Housing Justice for All and New York Communities for Change said in a recent statement. “Many tenants have no ability to pay rent, and landlords can’t collect rent from tenants who are broke.”

    Lena Melendez, a rent strike activist, said landlords “have gotten taken care of” by the government, suggesting that poor people who are quarantined in their apartments or homes do not need to pay rent because they have no money.

    And of course, the virus pandemic, triggering mass quarantines and economic depression, has exposed America’s second housing crisis. We recently noted that as many as 30% of Americans with home loans – about 15 million households – could stop paying if lockdowns continued through summer. 

    What’s more important at the moment is that landlords expecting May’s rent next week could be for a rude awakening. Mostly because “rent strike” searches across the internet have exploded in April. 

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Many of the searches surged in Oregon, New York, Washington, Colorado, and Vermont. 

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    When it comes to subregions, Monterey-Salinas, California; Boise, Idaho; Lansing, Michigan; Savannah, Georgia; and Lexington, Kentucky, saw increased “rent strike” searches over the month. 

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    And so it begins? Rent strikes across America? Or maybe at least starting in New York City first? 


    Tyler Durden

    Sat, 04/25/2020 – 18:30

  • An Egregious Statistical Horror Story
    An Egregious Statistical Horror Story

    Authored by George Gilder via The American Institute for Economic Research,

    With the latest reports of plummeting death rates from all causes, this crisis is over. The pandemic of doom erupted as a panic of pols and is now a comedy of Mash-minded med admins and stooges, covering their ifs, ands, and butts with ever more morbid and distorted statistics.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    The crisis now will hit the politicians and political Doctor Faucis who gullibly accepted and trumpeted what statistician William Briggs calls “the most colossal and costly blown forecast of all time.”

    An egregious statistical horror story of millions of projected deaths, suffused with incense and lugubrious accents from Imperial College of London to Harvard School of Public Health, prompted the pols to impose a vandalistic lockdown on the economy. It would have been an outrage even if the assumptions were not wildly astronomically wrong.

    Flattening the curve was always a fool’s errand that widened the damage.

    President Trump had better take notice. He will soon own this gigantic botch of policy and leadership. No one will notice that his opponents urged even more panicky blunders.

    The latest figures on overall death rates from all causes show no increase at all. Deaths are lower than in 2019, 2018, 2017 and 2015, slightly higher than in 2016. Any upward bias is imparted by population growth.

    Now writing a book on the crisis with bestselling author Jay Richards, Briggs concludes:

    “Since pneumonia deaths are up, yet all deaths are down, it must mean people are being recorded as dying from other things at smaller rates than usual.”

    Deaths from other causes are simply being ascribed to the coronavirus.

    As usual every year, deaths began trending downward in January. It’s an annual pattern. Look it up. Since the lockdown began in mid-March, the politicians cannot claim that their policies had anything to do with the declining death rate.

    A global study published in Israel by Professor Isaac Ben-Israel, chairman of the Israeli Space Agency and Council on Research and Development, shows that “the spread of the coronavirus declines to almost zero after 70 days—no matter where it strikes, and no matter what measures governments impose to try to thwart it.”

    In fact, by impeding herd immunity, particularly among students and other non-susceptible young people, the lockdown in the U.S. has prolonged and exacerbated the medical problem. As Briggs concludes, “People need to get out into virus-killing sunshine and germicidal air.”

    This flu like all previous viral flues will give way only to herd immunity, whether through natural propagation of an extremely infectious pathogen, or through the success of one of the hundreds of vaccine projects.

    No evidence indicates that this flu was exceptionally dangerous. On March 20th, the French published a major controlled study that shows no excess mortality at all from coronavirus compared to other flues. SARS and Mers were both much more lethal and did not occasion what Briggs’ reader “Uncle Dave” described as “taking a hammer and sickle to the economy.”

    We now know that the crisis was a comedy of errors.

    The Chinese let it get going in the raw bat markets of Wuhan. But together with the Koreans, the Chinese dithered and demurred and allowed six weeks of rampant propagation to create herd immunity before they began locking everyone up.

    Therefore, the Chinese and Koreans were among the first to recover.

    The Italians scared everybody with their haphazard health system and smoking fogies.

    Crammed together in subways and tenements, the New Yorkers registered a brief blip of extreme cases.

    Intubations and ventilators turned out not to help (80 percent died).

    This sowed fear and frustration among medical personnel slow to see that the problem was impaired hemogloblin in the blood rather than lung damage.

    The New York media piled on with panic, with bogus reports of rising deaths. “Coronavirus deaths” soared by assuming that people dying with the virus were dying from it and then by ascribing to the coronavirus other deaths among people with symptoms of pulmonary distress, even without being tested.

    Now jacking up the case rate will be further pointless testing. As Briggs points out,

    “Fauci is calling for ‘tripling’ of testing, which can only boost these dailies [case totals]. And make it seem like there’s a genuine increase occurring. Oh my! The daily reported cases are up! It must mean the disease is spreading!

    “No. It could also mean, and probably does given all the other evidence we now have from sampling, that the disease was already there, and we just now have measured it.”

    The death rate rises with further reclassification of pneumonia and other pulmonary deaths. When we reach herd immunity, and nearly everyone has the antigen, nearly all deaths can be chalked up to COVID19. Hey, it will be Quod Erat Demonstrandum for the panic mongers.

    In a fascinating open letter to German Prime Minister Angela Merkel, epidemiologist Mihai Grigoriu concludes that with the French study, corroborated by findings from a Stanford antibody seroprevalence study in Santa Clara county, “the case for extreme measures collapses like a house of cards.” Grigoriu says that since the virus has already spread widely in the general population, efforts to stop further spread are both futile and destructive.

    So let’s stop pretending that our policies have been rational and need to be phased out, as if they once had a purpose. They should be reversed summarily and acknowledged to be a mistake, perpetrated by statisticians with erroneous computer models.

    Perhaps then we can learn from this experience with the flaws of expertise not to shut down the economy again for the totally bogus “crisis” of climate change.


    Tyler Durden

    Sat, 04/25/2020 – 18:00

  • "They've Got To Feed Their Children" – Cash-Strapped Businesses Reopen In Georgia As 16 States Join Push To End Lockdowns
    “They’ve Got To Feed Their Children” – Cash-Strapped Businesses Reopen In Georgia As 16 States Join Push To End Lockdowns

    Across the US, 16 states are moving to reopen more nonessential businesses as thousands protest around the country demanding that the country be reopened now, even as governors like Andrew Cuomo advise that a recent slowdown in deaths and diagnoses suggests the lockdown is working well.

    Of these, Georgia has emerged as the most aggressive, with Gov. Brian Kemp allowing the first ‘nonessential’ businesses – a group including salons, bowling allies, tattoo parlors and gyms – to reopen.  Even President Trump is now denying that he supported Kemp’s plan, a disavowal that was reportedly news to Kemp.

    Mayors from the across state have warned residents that it’s too soon to return to some semblance of normal, and have urged businesses to remain close, and people to remain indoors. In many areas, as the Washington Post reported Saturday, businesses appear to be following this advice.

    And even the businesses that have opened aren’t operating at anything approaching full capacity, employees don masks and take other steps to ensure social distancing is maintained.

    Atlanta Mayor Keisha Lance Bottoms appeared on CNN to clear up the “confusion” that she was was putting her voters’ lives at risk: Instead, she said that businesses and individuals should ignore Kemp’s order, adding that “nothing has changed.” 

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    She declared that the 37% increase in Georgia’s mortality rate over the last week is a clear indication that the state ‘isn’t ready’ to reopen.

    “We are not on the other side of this,” Bottoms said. “It’s like we are in a tunnel, and rather than walking straight toward the light, we’re spinning around in circles. We’ll never get to the light if we don’t continue to do what we’ve done thus far, and that’s to separate ourselves socially from one another.”

    In Waycross, the county seat of Ware County, one salon owner told WaPo that the only people working on Friday and Saturday were those who absolutely needed to.

    Only a handful of the 18 hairdressers who work at Salon Cheveux came in on Friday. They donned masks, spaced their workstations apart and screened inbound customers by phone with the dedication of hospital admission nurses: Any fever recently? Or contact with someone sick? Can you wear a mask?

    It was the first day businesses reopened in Georgia, which is moving faster than any other state to ease restrictions amid the novel coronavirus pandemic. As a result, Georgia has become a flash point in the battle over whether it is time to remove the shutdown orders that have kept much of the country indoors.

    Jamie McQuaig glanced at the two cosmetologists, clad in masks, coloring customers’ hair and wondered whether coming back to work was the right decision for her family, her salon or her state.

    “I do feel like it’s too soon, but it will probably always feel like it’s too soon because we’re all scared of the virus,” she said. The nation’s response to the pandemic has left many in her shop with difficult choices. “The ones that are going back to work right now are the ones that have got to. They’ve got to feed their children. They’ve got to pay their mortgage.”

    Local officials in one particularly hard hit county have been begging Kemp to carve out an exemption for them, but he has so far refused.

    If he doesn’t, those ‘hot spots’ could swiftly reinfect the entire state. In Albany, Georgia, a small city with an extraordinarily high number of cases per capita, the mayor, Bo Dorough said he continues to warn residents to stay inside and practice social distancing. 

    The worst outbreak in the state is still raging in Dougherty County, where Albany is located. The county has a population of about 88,000, and the Georgia Department of Health has reported 1,465 confirmed cases of the virus and 108 deaths as of Friday evening. That means more than 1% of the county’s population is currently infected.

    For a time, Dougherty County had the unwelcome distinction of having one of the highest number of per capita cases in the country.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    The virus ripped across the county after two widely attended funerals. One attendee, a 67-year-old man, who was at both funerals, later tested positive, setting off what’s called the “domino effect,” according to CNN.

    Those Georgians who are returning to work have apparently accepted that they’re guinea pigs in a great national experiment with incredibly high stakes.

    After weeks of unemployment, often with uneven government help, some said they were happy to be earning paychecks but worry about the ultimate costs of abandoning isolation too soon, according to the Washington Post.

    But they won’t be the only ones for long. Tennessee’s governor has said he will allow many businesses to reopen after his shelter-in-place order expires next week. The governor of South Carolina has already said he will allow some retail stores to reopen this week. People have been walking on the beaches near Jacksonville, Fla., for a week, and on Friday, Iowa and Mississippi became the latest states to announce plans to reopen.

    As of Saturday, there were nearly 4,500 confirmed in Iowa, and yet, Gov. Kim Reynolds has said she will consider reopening more businesses, while reversing a ban on hospitals performing non-essential surgeries. And in Mississippi, which has more than 5,400 confirmed Covid-19 cases, Gov. Tate Reeves has traded the4 state’s lockdown order for a “safer-at-home” order, which will remain in effect for two weeks, beginning Monday.

    Across Georgia, more than 22,000 people have tested positive and nearly 900 have died. The state has tested < 1% of its residents.

    Trump was correct when he said on Thursday that Georgia hasn’t met the benchmarks released by the White House. They include a downward trajectory of confirmed cases over 14 days.

    Here’s a map of the US breaking down what various states are planning, courtesy of the NYT:

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    The big question looking ahead: Will Georgia’s decision make the state look like Sweden, or Wuhan?

    Because it’s extremely likely that it’ll be one, or the other.


    Tyler Durden

    Sat, 04/25/2020 – 17:35

  • Global Coronavirus Deaths Top 200k: Live Updates
    Global Coronavirus Deaths Top 200k: Live Updates

    Summary:

    • WHO warns against “immunity passports”
    • Global case total nears 2.8 million, deaths near 200k
    • Brussels relaxes rules on state financing for companies
    • Global Times editor continues to dunk on the president
    • US death toll passes 50k while total cases passes 900k 
    • Trump admin decides against participating in global vaccine and drug initiative organized by the WHO
    • 107-year-old Spanish woman who survived Spanish flu also beat coronavirus
    • Oregon finds its distancing measures may have prevented 70k infections
    • New York reports 437 deaths as Cuomo signs order to start testing in pharmacies
    • UK deaths surpass 20k
    • Trump slams WSJ editorial board
    • Global single-day deaths declined for third-straight day on Friday
    • Internet traffic is up 20% across Europe and US as lockdowns drag on
    • Spain sees promising decline in deaths
    • Former UK Chancellor urges gov’t to share plan for reopening with the people

    *       *       *

    Update (1615ET): Illinois just reported its latest numbers:

    • ILLINOIS REPORTS 80 ADDITIONAL CORONAVIRUS DEATHS TO TOTAL OF 1,874 – STATE OFFICIAL

    Update (1540ET): After Spain reported yet another batch of promising numbers suggesting Europe’s deadliest outbreak is truly waning, PM Pedro Sanchez announced Saturday that his government would loosen the lockdown to allow for more outdoor exercise by May 2 if the numbers continue to fall.

    Meanwhile, a Spanish woman who who is 107 years old and reportedly survived the Spanish flu in 1918 has now also beaten the coronvirus in the latest example of a centenarian being infected and surviving.

    The Spanish Flu was known to also infect children and infants – something that scientists aren’t sure about in regards to the coronavirus. Actually, research continues to try and determine if closing schools is worthwhile in terms of the disruptive impact it has on the economy.

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    And in the latest report about young people either exhibiting strange reactions to the virus, or facing strange and sometimes lethal afflictions that have little to do with the cardiovascular system, WaPo says that a surprising number of COVID-19 patients in their 30s and 40s have been dying of strokes.

    *       *       *

    Update (1400ET): In the latest global milestone, the number of coronavirus deaths has surpassed 200k.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Meanwhile, GT editor Hu Xijin continues to dunk on the president.

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    *       *       *

    Update (1345ET): In a decision that will undoubtedly outrage liberals, the US has decided against taking part in a global initiative on Friday to speed the development, production and distribution of drugs and vaccines against COVID-19, a spokesman for the U.S. mission in Geneva told Reuters.

    “There will be no U.S. official participation,” he said in an email reply to a query. “We look forward to learning more about this initiative in support of international cooperation to develop a vaccine for COVID-19 as soon as possible.”

    In other news, for every American European with cabin fever, this is what Causeway Bay in Hong Kong looked like on Saturday.

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    *       *       *

    Update (1340ET): The UK Department of Health and Social Care just released the latest figures from the battle against COVID-19, confirming what was widely expected: The UK has become the latest country to see its death toll surpass 20k as another 813 deaths, bringing the total to 20,380. All told, the UK has reported 149,554 cases.

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    As one FT reporter explains, roughly 150 of these deaths occurred before April 6, but are only just now being counted.

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    Watch the latest coronavirus presser below:

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    During the briefing, Home Secretary Priti Patel described the country’s latest grim milestone as “deeply tragic and moving moment” and warned that “we are not out of the woods yet.” The Home Secretary also used the daily press briefing at Downing Street to warn criminals that “our outstanding police and law enforcement agencies are absolutely on to you.”

    *       *       *

    Update (1220ET): As Italians everywhere celebrate italy’s “Liberation Day” – the date of the Italians’ victory over fascism – the Civil Protection Service reports another decline in new cases and deaths. The total number of confirmed cases in Italy climbed to 195,351 on Friday, up +1,22%, or 2,357, roughly even with the average pace from the last few days, while the death toll climbed 1.6% to 26,384 after breaking above the 25k mark a day earlier.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    The number of hospitalizations, and the number of patients in intensive care, both continued to fall, with the number of patients listed as officially recovered once again nearly equaling the number of day yesterday.

    In Washington, President Trump has apparently taken umbrage with a recent WSJ editorial that failed to make it completely clear that Trump did not approve of the governor’s decision to reopen.

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    Something that was news to the governor when Trump first said it Thursday night.

    *       *       *

    Update (1200ET): New York Governor Andrew Cuomo started his Saturday press briefing by announcing his plans to sign an executive order allowing independent pharmacists to carry out coronavirus tests, making New York State the first in the country to embrace technology and protocols allowing more tests to be conducted outside hospital and clinical care settings.

    It’s all part of Cuomo’s attempt to implement mass surveillance testing in the state, a long-term strategy to keep numbers down.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Cuomo also reported 437 deaths over the last 24 hours, a slight increase over the prior day, but still in keeping with the recent trend of fewer than 500 deaths per day, roughly half the level from the ‘peak’ earlier this month.

    • NEW YORK GOVERNOR CUOMO SAYS TO SIGN EXECUTIVE ORDER ALLOWING INDEPENDENT PHARMACISTS TO CONDUCT CORONAVIRUS TESTS
    • NEW YORK STATEWIDE TOTAL CORONAVIRUS HOSPITALIZATIONS FALL TO SAME LEVEL AS 21 DAYS AGO – GOVERNOR CUOMO
    • NEW YORK STATEWIDE CORONAVIRUS DEATHS RISE BY 437 ON APRIL 24, VS INCREASE OF 422 A DAY EARLIER – GOVERNOR CUOMO
    • NEW YORK NEW COVID-19 HOSPITAL PATIENTS HAS FALLEN TO ABOUT 1,100 PER DAY, VS AROUND 1,300 PREVIOUSLY
    • NEW YORK GOVERNOR SAYS TO EXPAND TESTING CRITERIA TO INCLUDE MORE NEW YORKERS, STARTING WITH FIRST RESPONDERS AND OTHER ESSENTIAL WORKERS

    Hospitalizations also continued to decline, as capacity increased to its highest level in 3 weeks.

    Watch Cuomo live:

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    *       *       *

    Bill Gates might want to rethink his decision to firmly defend the WHO against President Trump’s decision to defund the organization – technically an arm of the UN – over allegations that it aided China’s initial dissembling about the virus.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Gates and others have loudly cheered the expansion of surveillance methods to aid in efforts like ‘contact tracing’ and other advanced techniques to try and track who may or may not have been exposed to the virus. Many proponents of civil liberties, meanwhile, have argued that some of the more extreme measures in play offer little benefit in exchange for such a dramatic expansion of the security state.

    One of this movement’s favorite proposals is the “immunity passport”, which would, in theory, allow those who are theoretically immune go about their lives while everybody else remains stuck inside.

    In an announcement early Saturday in Europe, the WHO warned members against issuing so-called “immunity passports”, essentially a document allowing individuals who test positive for coronavirus antibodies to return to work. The organization explained that – as we’ve noted numerous times over the past few months – there’s no actual evidence that patients with antibodies – including those who’ve recovered from the virus, a group that includes at least 800,000 people – will be immune to reinfection.

    “There is currently no evidence that people who have recovered from Covid-19 and have antibodies are protected from a second infection,” the WHO said. The health agency said it is reviewing the evidence on whether people who recover from Covid-19 become immune, but that there are no studies on whether the presence of antibodies indicates immunity in humans. It said giving people who have antibodies special rights to travel or work “may therefore increase the risks of continued transmission.”

    Of course, that’s bad news for everybody who hoped that ‘anitbody testing’ would save us from the ‘rona.

    Meanwhile, the number of confirmed coronavirus cases continues to expand at a roughly steady pace. Thankfully, the surge in daily fatalities observed over the past 2 weeks has finally begun to subside.

    The FT reports that the worldwide COVID-19 death toll has risen by 6,182 on Friday to stand at 182,690. This is the third consecutive day where the number of new deaths has been lower than the previous day.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Still, if this pace of expansion continues, we should expect to see the global total pass the 3 million mark by Tuesday, if not earlier. Public health authorities from around the world reported 105,825 new cases yesterday, bringing the total to 2.76 million, according to data from Worldometers.

    The global death toll is rapidly approaching 200k, with the US is responsible for 25% of them. As businesses in Georgia continue to reopen, the White House is debating a new legal liability shield for American businesses to prevent them from being sued over the coronavirus.

    In the US, the number of deaths passed 50k on Friday while the case total passed 900k early Saturday, leaving the country well on the way to the 1 million case mark. The US would be the first country to report 1 million confirmed cases. 

    In Brussels, bureaucrats have rushed to relax state aid rules, and regulators have approved a series of multi-billion-euro schemes to allow member states to extend financing to companies – in some cases via direct equity injections – to help them weather the pandemic. Although leaders of both factions have told reporters that important progress was made at Thursday’s virtual summit to work out the details of a massive pan-European relief program to help the worst-hit governments in the bloc. As one might expect, German and a handful of wealthy northern states have gotten into an intense disagreement with the poorer, worst-hit southern states (Spain, Italy joined in this instance by Emmanuel Macron’s France) over how the program should be financed, and whether the loans should come in the form of loans, or outright grants.

    As the country with the highest mortality rate in Europe, Spain has eased its lockdown measures only slightly, while warning that the current target date to begin reopening is May 9. But in a promising bit of news, the country reported fewer than 400 fatalities for the second consecutive day on Saturday (the count was accurate as of 9pm Madrid Time Friday) while the spread of new cases has also slowed.

    Across Europe and the US, Internet traffic is up 20%, according to the FT and Media analytics group ComScore, which measured the number of unique page views and compared it with an “average” benchmark across several key markets.

    With no end to a strict national lockdown in sight, millions of Britons are starting to get a little squirrely. To try to assuage these anxieties, former UK Chancellor Philip Hammond has suggested that No. 10 share its plan for reopening the economy with the public.

    “The reality is that we have to start reopening the economy but we have to do it living with Covid,” Mr Hammond told BBC’s Today. “We can’t wait until a vaccine is developed… and rolled out across the population. The economy won’t survive that long.”

    Now that the pace of new cases and deaths has slowed, it’s clear that lockdowns and social distancing measures are pretty effective at slowing the virus’s spread, which – remember – is the whole point of this: Eventually, scientists say, much of the global population will be exposed to this virus. It’s just a question of whether that’s going to happen over a few years, or a few months. In the latest positive indication, Oregon health officials have found that their state’s aggressive social distancing measures may have prevented more than 70,000 cases since early March.


    Tyler Durden

    Sat, 04/25/2020 – 17:25

  • How Shutdowns Will Keep Killing The Economy, Even When They're Over
    How Shutdowns Will Keep Killing The Economy, Even When They’re Over

    Authored by Ryan McMaken via The Mises Institute,

    Imagine what it is like right now to plan for the future as a business owner. The owner doesn’t know if he or she will even be allowed to be open for business two weeks from now, or a month from now.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Indeed, politicians and their unelected (and unaccountable) health advisors keep insisting that they might elect to close down businesses or impose new restrictions on large portions of the economy at any time.

    The uncertainly associated with all this is immense. Consider some examples: thanks to moratoria on evictions in many cities, renters who can’t pay rent — thanks in part to government-forced lockdowns — can stay in their rental units indefinitely. Landlords have no idea when they will next be able to actually collect revenues again from paying customers. Meanwhile, “elective” healthcare services like eye care and dental care have been deemed “unessential” by bureaucrats and governors in many states. These offices will be closed and collecting little-to-no revenue. Restaurants, of course, aren’t permitted to do business beyond take-out service in places with lockdowns. (Although these restaurants still have to pay rent for their dining rooms.)

    Even beyond the short term, business owners have no way to plan. If a business owner is allowed to actually conduct business during the summertime this year, it may still be that politicians will later elect to shut businesses whenever it is decided the risk of spreading viruses demands another “shutdown.” We’re even told this could go on for years.

    One would have to be impressively naive and deeply ignorant about how businesses work to think that commerce, investment, and entrepreneurship would just continue as usual under these conditions. In reality,  the threat of a government-mandated lockdown hanging over the heads of countless business owners and entrepreneurs will mean there will be far less willingness and ability to invest in businesses, offer products and services, or employ people.

    The Problem with Regime Uncertainty

    This problem has a name: “regime uncertainty.” Economic historian Robert Higgs defines it as “a pervasive lack of confidence among investors in their ability to foresee the extent to which future government actions will alter their private-property rights.”

    Broadly understood, of course, “investing” isn’t just a matter of people putting money in mutual funds or buying municipal bonds. “Investors” are people who buy and manage apartment buildings. Investors include doctors and dentists who invest enormous amounts of time and money into a private healthcare office. Investors are people who put their life savings into starting a new restaurant or tavern.

    As Higgs has shown, when the legal environment and property rights can be so radically altered so quickly, economic growth slows and economic depressions are drawn out and made worse.

    Specifically, Higgs has illustrated that regime uncertainty was a significant factor in making the Great Depression such a long and unpleasant affair. The Roosevelt administration’s numerous and enormous changes to the legal regime — through new taxes, regulations, and labor laws — made the Depression far worse than it needed to be. Higgs explains how thanks to a multitude of state interventions during the Depression:

    the Roosevelt administration “abruptly and dramatically altered the institutional framework within which private business decisions were made, not just once but several times” … with the result that regime uncertainty was heightened and recovery substantially retarded.

    As one investor at the time observed:

    Uncertainty rules the tax situation, the labor situation, the monetary situation, and practically every legal condition under which industry must operate. Are taxes to go higher, lower or stay where they are? We don’t know. Is labor to be union or nonunion?… Are we to have inflation or deflation, more government spending or less?… Are new restrictions to be placed on capital, new limits on profits?… It is impossible to even guess at the answers.

    The result was “the New Deal prolonged the Great Depression by creating an extraordinarily high degree of regime uncertainty in the minds of investors.”

    The recovery was slowed, of course, because investing, building businesses, and engaging in innovation became far riskier and unpredictable thanks to the chances that governments might once again impose draconian new restrictions on businesses. This changed the calculus completely.

    Regime Uncertainty vs. Regular Uncertainty

    Admittedly, even in a laissez-faire policy regime, it is more difficult for investors to calculate risk and future conditions when consumers and employees become far more fearful about an outbreak of disease. But, as Brendan Brown notes, private firms are likely to adjust quickly to attempt to address the needs of consumers who may now demand less crowded rooms and more “precautions.” Uncertainty is always a problem for investors and entrepreneurs. But regime uncertainty is worse because it limits the ability of property owners to adapt. Regime uncertainty also tends to be done in a haphazard and arbitrary way across a multitude of markets. 

    Consumers will still drive some owners out of business because consumers constantly change their demands and values.  On a whim, consumers may decide to spend their money elsewhere.  But in an unhampered market, businesses and investors can learn from watching others, plan for the future in their specific markets, and adjust accordingly. Unlike governments in the business of ruling by decree, investors and business owners seek to serve as wide a swath of the public as possible.

    But this sort of flexibility is destroyed when governments impose lockdowns. There is no learning and no adjusting. Statewide lockdowns don’t take into account diversity in health, demographics, and market conditions.  Instead economic activity is halted in a one-size-fits-all fashion based on what politicians — not consumers, mind you — deem to be “essential.” Even worse, changes can be be quickly imposed by a small handful of policymakers without public debate or consultation. There is no time for businesses to adjust.

    This is far worse than any ordinary market shock.

    Wall Street vs. Main Street, Again

    Ultimately, this process will also accelerate wealth inequality by contributing to the further financialization of the economy. Thanks to the maximization of the “too big to fail” narrative at the Fed and in Washington, the financial sector continues to grow as the safe go-to place for investment. Why invest in community businesses and small medical firms when it is much lower risk to invest in a bank or a financial firm that’s sure to be bailed out? The constant threat of forced shutdowns makes this risk assessment even more stark: non-financial firms can be shut down and destroyed at any time. But Wall Street will be bailed out.

    Since the financial sector employs a relatively small number of people, this shutdown-bailout dichotomy means employment will suffer. It means the working class and the middle class will suffer. It means people with sizable Wall Street portfolios will benefit while Main Street businesses go bankrupt.

    But even Wall Street will eventually suffer because an economy cannot survive on bailouts forever. At some point, people have to produce actual goods and services. This requires capital. It requires planning. It requires many things that arbitrary shutdowns make far more difficult to find.


    Tyler Durden

    Sat, 04/25/2020 – 17:10

  • "It's '08 All Over Again" – Carl Icahn Warns Investors "Be Extremely Careful"
    “It’s ’08 All Over Again” – Carl Icahn Warns Investors “Be Extremely Careful”

    Some people are intentionally hoarding toilet paper; others are stockpiling hand sanitizers and masks; and the glut of oil around world grows concerningly higher day after day. But, while stock markets rebound by the most ever (after their fastest collapse ever), there is (at least) one billionaire investor who is not buying it and instead is hoarding something else in readiness for what comes next… 

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    In an insightful (and unusual for mainstream business media) interview with Bloomberg TV, Carl Icahn isn’t buying stocks right now. He’s hoarding cash, shorting commercial real estate and preparing for COVID-19 to wreak more havoc.

    This is a time to be “extremely careful,” Icahn said in an interview Friday on Bloomberg Television.

    The 84-year-old’s reasoning is simple – and terrifying for the average commission-raker and asset-gatherer – having traded through every stock-market crash since the Great Depression, the future is just too unpredictable for the S&P 500 to be trading at almost 20 times next 12m earnings estimates

    “You cannot really justify that multiple,” Icahn said.

    “Short-term, you may have some big downdrafts.”

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Source: Bloomberg

    Unlike Boeing, IBM, and, the airlines, and cruise lines, the veteran investors hasn’t blown through his cash in recent years chasing dreams, he has instead been preparing and building cash positions – what he says he always keeps for “a stormy day.”

    His thesis is straight forward – he disagrees with the market’s apparent belief that we will ‘return to normal’ sometime soon and everything that was will be again.

    Having donated over $200 million to the medical school at Mount Sinai Hospital in New York, the 1980s corporate raider says he has been talking to “some of the smartest guys in this area” and formed an opinion of the virus that doesn’t leave him optimistic.

    He’s concerned about recurrences of infection and believes the economy will reopen in “spurts.”

    “It’s not like turning on a spigot,” he said.

    However, there are opportunities amid the carnage as Icahn took advantage of the recent collapse in crude oil prices with a secondary trade, as Bloomberg details:

    Because refiner CVR constantly needs oil to supply its two refineries, Icahn realized he could use it to profit from the frenzy. He said he instructed the Sugar Land, Texas-based company to make space in its storage tanks and put in orders for 1 million to 2 million barrels at negative prices he doesn’t expect ever to see again.

    We made some money on it,” Icahn said in an interview Friday with Bloomberg Television.

    “We did get a fair amount.”

    You’ll never see that again in history,” Icahn said.

    But, while that opportunistic position was quickly taken advantage of, Icahn’s largest position is a multibillion bet he initiated in mid-2019 against the CMBX 6, an index of commercial real estate mortgage-backed securities that should be very familiar to ZeroHedge readers:

    Back in March 2017, a bearish trade emerged which quickly gained popularity on Wall Street, and promptly received the moniker “The Next Big Short.”

    As we reported at the time, similar to the run-up to the housing debacle, a small number of bearish funds were positioning to profit from a “retail apocalypse” that could spur a wave of defaults. Their target: securities backed not by subprime mortgages, but by loans taken out by beleaguered mall and shopping center operators which had fallen victim to the Amazon juggernaut. And as bad news piled up for anchor chains like Macy’s and J.C. Penney, bearish bets against commercial mortgage-backed securities kept rising.

    The trade was simple: shorting malls by going long default risk via CMBX 6 (BBB- or BB) or otherwise shorting the CMBS complex. For those who have not read our previous reports (here, here, here, here, here, here and here) on the second Big Short, here is a brief rundown via the Journal:

    each side of the trade is speculating on the direction of an index, called CMBX 6, which tracks the value of 25 commercial-mortgage-backed securities, or CMBS. The index has grabbed investor attention because it has significant exposure to loans made in 2012 to malls that lately have been running into difficulties. Bulls profit when the index rises and shorts make money when it falls.

    The various CMBX series are shown in the chart below, with the notorious CMBX 6 most notable for its substantial, 40% exposure to retail properties.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    One of the firms that had put on the “Big Short 2” trade back in late 2016 was hedge fund Alder Hill Management – an outfit started by protégés of hedge-fund billionaire David Tepper – which ramped up wagers against the mall bonds. Alder Hill joined other traders which in early 2017 bought a net $985 million contracts that targeted the two riskiest types of CMBS.

    “These malls are dying, and we see very limited prospect of a turnaround in performance,” said a January 2017 report from Alder Hill, which began shorting the securities.

    “We expect 2017 to be a tipping point.”

    Alas, Alder Hill was wrong, because while the deluge of retail bankruptcies…

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    … and mall vacancies accelerated since then, hitting an all time high in 2019…

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    …  not only was 2017 not a tipping point, but the trade failed to generate the kinds of desired mass defaults that the shorters were betting on, while the negative carry associated with the short hurt many of those who were hoping for quick riches.

    One of them was investing legend Carl Icahn who as we reported last November, emerged as one of the big fans of the “Big Short 2“, although as even he found out, CMBX was a very painful short as it was not reflecting fundamentals, but merely the overall euphoria sweeping the market and record Fed bubble (very much like most other shorts in the past decade). The result was what we said four months ago was “tens if not hundreds of millions in losses so far” for the storied corporate raider.

    That said, while Carl Icahn was far from shutting down his family office because one particular trade has gone against him, this trade put him on a collision course with two of the largest money managers, including Putnam Investments and AllianceBernstein, which for the past few years had a bullish view on malls and had taken the other side of the Big Short/CMBX trade, the WSJ reports. This face-off, in the words of Dan McNamara a principal at the NY-based MP Securitized Credit Partners, was “the biggest battle in the mortgage bond market today” adding that the showdown is the talk of this corner of the bond market, where more than $10 billion of potential profits are at stake on an obscure index.

    However, as they say, good things come to those who wait, and are willing to shoulder big losses as they wait for a massive payoffs, and for the likes of Carl Icahn, McNamara and others who were short the CMBX, payday has just arrived.

    Behold the CMBX as it stands now: 

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    That, in the parlance of our times, is what traders call a “jackpot.”

    The epic crash in the CMBX 6 BBB (the junk-rated BB tranche has fallen 25% in the past fortnight) meant all those shorts who for years suffered the slings and stones of outrageous margin calls but held on to this “big short”, are about to get very rich (and in the case of Icahn, even richer) it has also means the pain is just starting for all those “superstar” funds on the other side of the trade who were long CMBX over the past few years, collecting pennies and clipping coupons in front of a P&L mauling steamroller.

    One of them, as noted above, is mutual fund giant AllianceBernstein, which has suffered massive paper losses on the trade, amid soaring fears that the coronavirus pandemic is the straw on the camel’s back that will finally cripple US shopping malls whose debt is now expected to default en masse.

    According to the FT, more than two dozen funds managed by AllianceBernstein have sold over $4 billion worth of CMBX protection to the likes of Icahn. One among them is AllianceBernstein’s $29 billion American Income Portfolio, which is down 15% since the beginning of March, having written $1.9bn of protection on CMBX 6, while some of the group’s smaller funds have higher concentrations.

    The trade reflected AB’s conviction that American malls are “evolving, not dying,” as the firm put it last October, in a paper entitled “The Real Story Behind the CMBX. 6: Debunking the Next ‘Big Short’” (reader can get some cheap laughs courtesy of Brian Philips, AB’s CRE Credit Research Director, at this link).

    Hilariously, that paper quietly “disappeared” from AllianceBernstein’s website, but magically reappeared on Friday, shortly after the Financial Times asked about it.

    “We definitely still like this,” said Gershon Distenfeld, AllianceBernstein’s co-head of fixed income. “You can expect this will be on the potential list of things we might buy [more of].”

    Sure, quadruple down, why not. Meanwhile, one of America’s biggest mall operators, Simon Property Group, has closed all its US properties until March 29, and it is unclear not only when it will reopen but what viable tenants it will still have that are able and willing to pay rent. For a broader perspective on what Simon has to look forward to when it reopens, read “Widespread Panic” Hits Commercial Property Markets: Deals Implode, Renters Disappear, Businesses Shut Down”.

    Good luck on the quadruple down – as Icahn notes of the “mall short” – the more the pandemic slows economic activity and drives consumers to shop online, the greater the chances that some of those loans will default.

    “It’s ‘08 all over again,” Icahn said, likening the trade to wagers that paid off massively when subprime mortgage debt collapsed more than a decade ago.

    In which case, as we noted at the very beginning, Icahn’s warning to investors to be “extremely careful” would seem very timely.


    Tyler Durden

    Sat, 04/25/2020 – 16:45

Digest powered by RSS Digest

Today’s News 25th April 2020

  • How The "West Point Mafia" Runs Washington
    How The “West Point Mafia” Runs Washington

    Authored by Danny Sjursen via TomDispatch.com,

    Every West Point class votes on an official motto. Most are then inscribed on their class rings. Hence, the pejorative West Point label “ring knocker.” (As legend has it, at military meetings a West Pointer “need only knock his large ring on the table and all Pointers present are obliged to rally to his point of view.”) Last August, the class of 2023 announced theirs: “Freedom Is Not Free.” Mine from the class of 2005 was “Keeping Freedom Alive.” Each class takes pride in its motto and, at least theoretically, aspires to live according to its sentiments, while championing the accomplishments of fellow graduates.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    But some cohorts do stand out. Take the class of 1986 (“Courage Never Quits”). As it happens, both Secretary of Defense Mark Esper and Secretary of State Mike Pompeo are members of that very class, as are a surprisingly wide range of influential leaders in Congress, corporate America, the Pentagon, the defense industry, lobbying firms, big pharma, high-end financial services, and even security-consulting firms. Still, given their striking hawkishness on the subject of American war-making, Esper and Pompeo rise above the rest. Even in a pandemic, they are as good as their class motto. When it comes to this country’s wars, neither of them ever quits.

    Once upon a time, retired Lt. Gen. Douglas Lute (Class of ’75), a former US Ambassador to NATO and a senior commander in Iraq and Afghanistan, taught both Esper and Pompeo in his West Point social sciences class. However, it was Pompeo, the class of ’86 valedictorian, whom Lute singled out for praise, remembering him as “a very strong student—fastidious, deliberate.” Of course, as the Afghanistan Papers, released by The Washington Post late last year, so starkly revealed, Lute told an interviewer that, like so many US officials, he “didn’t have the foggiest notion of what we were undertaking in Afghanistan.” Though at one point he was President George W. Bush’s “Afghan war czar,” the general never expressed such doubts publicly and his record of dissent is hardly an impressive one. Still, on one point at least, Lute was on target: Esper and Pompeo are smart, and that’s what worries me (as in the phrase “too smart for their own good”).

    Esper, a former Raytheon lobbyist, had particularly hawkish views on Russia and China before he ever took over at the Pentagon and he wasn’t alone when it came to the urge to continue America’s wars. Pompeo, then a congressman, exhibited a striking pre–Trump era foreign policy pugnacity, particularly vis-à-vis the Islamic world. It has since solidified into a veritable obsession with toppling the Iranian regime.

    Their militarized obsessions have recently taken striking form in two ways: The secretary of defense instructed US commanders to prepare plans to escalate combat against Iranian-backed militias in Iraq, an order the mission’s senior leader there, Lt. Gen. Robert “Pat” White, reportedly resisted; meanwhile, the secretary of state evidently is eager to convince President Trump to use the Covid-19 pandemic, now devastating Iran, to bomb that country and further strangle it with sanctions. Worse yet, Pompeo might be just cunning enough to convince his ill-informed, insecure boss (so open to clever flattery) that war is the answer.

    The militarism of both men matters greatly, but they hardly pilot the ship of state alone, any more than Trump does (whatever he thinks). Would that it were the case. Sadly, even if voters threw them all out, the disease runs much deeper than them. Enter the rest of the illustrative class of ’86.

    As it happens, Pompeo’s and Esper’s classmates permeate the deeper structure of imperial America. And let’s admit it, they are, by the numbers, an impressive crew. As another ’86 alumnus, Congressman Mark Green (R-TN), bragged on the House floor in 2019, “My class [has] produced 18 general officers…22-plus presidents and CEOs of major corporations…two state legislators…[and] three judges,” as well as “at least four deans and chancellors of universities.” He closed his remarks by exclaiming, “Courage never quits, ’86!”

    However, for all his gushing, Green’s list conceals much. It illuminates neither the mechanics nor the motives of his illustrious classmates; that is, what they’re actually doing and why. Many are key players in a corporate-military machine bent on, and reliant on, endless war for profit and professional advancement. A brief look at key ’86ers offers insight into President Dwight D. Eisenhower’s military-industrial complex in 2020—and it should take your breath away.

    THE WEST POINT MAFIA

    The core group of ’86 grads cheekily refer to themselves as “the West Point Mafia.” And for some, that’s an uplifting thought. Take Joe DePinto, CEO of 7-Eleven. He says that he’s “someone who sleeps better at night knowing that those guys are in the positions they’re in.” Of course, he’s an ’86 grad, too.

    Back when I called the academy home, we branded such self-important cadets “toolbags.” More than a decade later, when I taught there, I found my students still using the term. Face facts, however: those “toolbags,” thick as thieves today, now run the show in Washington (and despite their busy schedules, they still find time to socialize as a group).

    Given Donald Trump’s shady past—one doesn’t build an Atlantic City casino-and-hotel empire without “mobbing it up“—that “Mafia” moniker is actually fitting. So perhaps it’s worth thinking of Mike Pompeo as the president’s latest consigliere. And since gangsters rarely countenance a challenge without striking back, Lieutenant General White should watch his back after his prudent attempt to stop the further escalation of America’s wars in Iraq and Iran in the midst of a deadly global pandemic. Worse yet for him, he’s not a West Pointer (though he did, oddly enough, earn his Army commission on the very day that class of ’86 graduated). White’s once promising career is unlikely to be long for this world.

    In addition to Esper and Pompeo, other Class of ’86 alums serve in key executive branch roles. They include Vice Chief of Staff of the Army Gen. Joseph Martin, the director of the Army National Guard, the commander of NATO’s Allied Land Command, the deputy commanding general of Army Forces Command, and the deputy commanding general of Army Cyber Command. Civilian-side classmates in the Pentagon serve as: deputy assistant secretary of the Army for installations, energy, and environment; a civilian aide to the secretary of the Army; and the director of stabilization and peace operations policy for the secretary of defense. These Pentagon career civil servants aren’t, strictly speaking, part of the “Mafia” itself, but two Pompeo loyalists are indeed charter members.

    Pompeo brought Ulrich Brechbuhl and Brian Butalao, two of his closest cadet friends, in from the corporate world. The three of them had, at one point, served as CEO, CFO, and COO of Thayer Aerospace, named for the “father” of West Point, Colonel Sylvanus Thayer, and started with Koch Industries seed money. Among other things, that corporation sold the Pentagon military aircraft components.

    Brechbuhl and Butalao were given senior positions at the CIA when Pompeo was its director. Currently, Brechbuhl is the State Department’s counselor (and reportedly Pompeo’s de facto chief of staff), while Butalao serves as under secretary for management. According to his official bio, Butalao is responsible “for managing the State Department on a day-to-day basis and [serving as its] Chief Operating Officer.” Funny, that was his exact position under Pompeo at that aerospace company.

    Still, this Mafia trio can’t run the show by themselves. The national security structure’s tentacles are so much longer than that. They reach all the way to K Street and Capitol Hill.

    FROM CONGRESS TO K STREET: THE ENABLERS

    Before Trump tapped Pompeo to head the CIA and then the State Department, he represented Wichita, Kansas, home to Koch Industries, in the House of Representatives. In fact, Pompeo rode his ample funding from the political action committee of the billionaire Koch brothers straight to the Hill. So linked was he to those fraternal right-wing energy tycoons and so protective of their interests that he was dubbed “the congressman from Koch.” The relationship was mutually beneficial. Pompeo’s selection as secretary of state solidified the previously strained relationship of the brothers with President Trump.

    The ’86 Mafia’s current congressional heavyweight, however, is Mark Green. An early Trump supporter, he regularly tried to shield the president from impeachment as a minority member of the House Oversight and Reform Committee. The Tennessee representative nearly became Trump’s secretary of the Army, but ultimately withdrew his nomination because of controversies that included his sponsoring gender-discrimination bills and commenting that “transgender is a disease.”

    Legislators like Green, in turn, take their foreign policy marching orders from the military’s corporate suppliers. Among those, Esper, of course, represents the gold standard when it comes to “revolving door” defense lobbying. Just before ascending the Pentagon summit, pressed by Senator Elizabeth Warren during his confirmation hearings, he patently refused to “recuse himself from all matters related to” Raytheon, his former employer and the nation’s third-largest defense contractor. (And that was even before its recent merger with United Technologies Corporation, which once employed another Esper classmate as a senior vice president.) Incidentally, one of Raytheon’s “biggest franchises” is the Patriot missile defense system, the very weapon being rushed to Iraq as I write, ostensibly as a check on Pompeo’s favored villain, Iran.

    Less well known is the handiwork of another ’86 grad, longtime lobbyist and CNN paid contributor David Urban, who first met the president in 2012 and still recalls how “we clicked immediately.” The consummate Washington insider, he backed Trump “when nobody else thought he stood a chance” and in 2016 was his senior campaign adviser in the pivotal swing state of Pennsylvania.

    Esper and Urban have been close for more than 30 years. As cadets, they served in the same unit during the Persian Gulf War. It was Urban who introduced Esper to his wife. Both later graced The Hill’s list of Washington’s top lobbyists. Since 2002, Urban has been a partner and is now president of a consulting giant, the American Continental Group. Among its clients: Raytheon and 7-Eleven.

    It’s hard to overstate Urban’s role. He seems to have landed Pompeo and Esper their jobs in the Trump administration and was a key go-between in marrying class of ’86 backbenchers and moneymen to that bridegroom of our moment, The Donald.

    GREASING THE MACHINE: THE MONEYMEN

    Another ’86er also passed through that famed military-industrial revolving door. Retired Col. Dan Sauter left his position as chief of staff of the 32nd Army Air and Missile Defense Command for one at giant weapons maker Lockheed Martin as business developer for the very systems his old unit employed. Since May 2019, he’s directed Lockheed’s $1.5 billion Terminal High Altitude Area Defense (THAAD) program in Saudi Arabia. Lockheed’s THAAD systems have streamed into that country to protect the kingdom, even as Pompeo continually threatens Iran.

    If such corporate figures are doing the selling, it’s the Pentagon, naturally, that’s doing the buying. Luckily, there are ’86 alumni in key positions on the purchasing end as well, including a retired brigadier general who now serves as the Pentagon’s principal adviser to the under secretary for acquisition, technology, and logistics.

    Finally, there are other key consultants linked to the military-industrial complex who are also graduates of the class of ’86. They include a senior vice president of Hillwood—a massive domestic and international real estate development company, chaired by Ross Perot Jr.—formerly a consultant to the government of the United Arab Emirates. The Emiratis are US allies in the fight against Pompeo’s Iranian nemesis and, in 2019, awarded Raytheon a $1.5 billion contract to supply key components for its Air Force missile launchers.

    Another classmate is a managing partner for Patriot Strategies, which consults for corporations and the government but also separately lands hefty defense contracts itself. His previous “ventures” included “work in telecommunications in the Middle East…and technical security upgrades at U.S. embassies worldwide.”

    Yet another grad, Rick Minicozzi, is the founder and CEO of Thayer Leader Development Group (TLDG), which prides itself on “building” corporate leaders. TLDG clients include: 7-Eleven, Cardinal Glass, EMCOR, and Mercedes-Benz. All either have or had ’86ers at the helm. The company’s CEO also owns the Thayer Hotel located right on West Point’s grounds, which hosts many of the company’s lectures and other events. Then there’s the retired colonel who, like me, taught on the West Point history faculty. He’s now the CEO of Battlefield Leadership, which helps corporate leaders “learn from the past” in order to “prepare for an ever-changing business landscape.”

    A CLASS-WIDE CONFLICT OF INTEREST

    Don’t for a moment think these are all “bad” people. That’s not faintly my point. One prominent ’86 grad, for instance, is Lt. Gen. Eric Wesley, the deputy of Army Futures Command. He was my brigade commander at Fort Riley, Kansas, in 2009 and I found him competent, exceptionally empathetic, and a decidedly decent man, which is probably true of plenty of ’86ers.

    So what exactly is my point here? I’m not for a second charging conspiracy or even criminal corruption. The lion’s share of what all these figures do is perfectly legal. In reality, the way the class of ’86 has permeated the power structure only reflects the nature of the carefully crafted, distinctly undemocratic systems through which the military-industrial complex and our political world operate by design. Most of what they do couldn’t, in fact, be more legal in a world of never-ending American wars and national security budgets that eternally go through the roof. After all, if any of these figures had acted in anything but a perfectly legal fashion, they might have run into a classmate of theirs who recently led the FBI’s corruption unit in New Jersey—before, that is, he retired and became CEO of a global security consulting firm. (Sound familiar?)

    And that’s my point, really. We have a system in Washington that couldn’t be more lawful and yet, by any definition, the class of ’86 represents one giant conflict of interest (and they don’t stand alone). Alums from that year are now ensconced in every level of the national security state: from the White House to the Pentagon to Congress to K Street to corporate boardrooms. And they have both power and a deep stake, financial or otherwise, in maintaining or expanding the (forever) warfare state.

    They benefit from America’s permanent military mobilization, its never-ending economic war footing, and all that comes with it. Ironically, this will inevitably include the blood of future West Point graduates, doomed to serve in their hopeless crusades. Think of it all as a macabre inversion of their class motto in which it’s not their courage but that of younger graduates sent off to this country’s hopeless wars that they will never allow to “quit.”

    Speaking of true courage, lately the only exemplar we’ve had of it in those wars is Gen. “Pat” White. It seems that he, at least, refused to kiss the proverbial rings of those Mafia men of ’86.

    But of course, he’s not part of their “family,” is he?

    *  *  *

    Danny Sjursen is a retired U.S. Army major and former history instructor at West Point. He served tours in Iraq and Afghanistan, and now lives in Lawrence, Kansas. He has written a memoir of the Iraq War, Ghost Riders of Baghdad: Soldiers, Civilians, and the Myth of the Surge, and his forthcoming book, Patriotic Dissent: America in the Age of Endless War, is available for pre-order. Follow him on Twitter at @SkepticalVet and check out his podcast “Fortress on a Hill.”


    Tyler Durden

    Fri, 04/24/2020 – 23:55

  • Clubbing Under Quarantine: People Are Paying To Log On To Zoom And Attend Virtual Concerts And Raves
    Clubbing Under Quarantine: People Are Paying To Log On To Zoom And Attend Virtual Concerts And Raves

    With actual clubs shut down, how are insecure ravers going to get their fix of attention, booze and music that sounds like pneumatic drills hooked up to amplifiers? Meet virtual nightlife.

    Following in the lead of Asia during the outbreak, livestreaming has now made its way onto the club scene. U.S. musicians across all genres are logging on, instead of packing seats, to perform. And it isn’t just the newfound acoustic singer-songwriter you went to high school with appearing on your Facebook timeline performing. Major DJs like Diplo and A-Trak have been performing, often times to raise money for Covid-19 relief. 

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Eryka Badu has put on livestream concerts for $1 and $2 per person

    The virus has hit the nightlife and the $27.9 billion live music industry hard. For many working musicians, performing online is a way for them to raise money. But it’s not showing impressive results, according to Bloomberg. Artist and tech researcher Mat Dryhurst calls it “e-busking”. “The tech isn’t there to make it more engaging than, say, radio. Even in this charitable climate, it isn’t producing impressive financial results.”

    While smaller artists may only make $50 per stream, artists like Erykah Badu have had more success. She pulled in 10,000 viewers – at $1 per person – for a performance she did on March 23 from her home. She did a second one, charging $2, to help support her and her band. 

    And the spillover into dance music and rave culture was inevitable. At a Zoom party called Club Quarantee, guests buy tickets for $10 or can pay $80 for a private room to party with Instagram-famous DJs and burlesque dancers. Bloomberg said: “On a recent weekend, the party is full of European models and bearded men in fedoras, dancing along to Macarena.”

    Sounds like it’s definitely worth $80.

    Club Quarantee’s founder said: “A bottle-service club is a symbol of exclusivity and high-quality entertainment. Of course, we can’t sell bottles, but we try to deliver this vibe.”

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    A former NYC celebrity hang-out host, he says he has lost about $10,000 in income since the city has shut down. His first virtual party brought in about 300 people, covering half of his costs, which included talent, a videographer and staffers. On his second try, he broke even.

    “The main objective is to create a space where promoters can maintain important relationships with our clients and keep them entertained during this time. People are longing for social interactions, and we can offer an important part of the club experience: the emotional connection,” he said.

    Then there’s Club Q, a “safe space” for the LGBTQ community recently called the “hottest club on Zoom”. It has 40,000 followers on Instagram. One of its founders said: “We have access to people who can’t attend clubs because they have children, social anxiety, disabilities, or live in places that don’t have clubs. We want to maintain this equality, with no elitism.”

    And Club Q is starting to look into branding opportunities. Companies remain skittish in spending, however. “Without knowing how long the quarantine will be, brands don’t know if they should throw money and commit to this as something for the future,” co-founder Brad Allen said.

    “There’s a learning process. At first, people were not willing to spend money on Netflix; they were used to streaming movies illegally. It takes a while to be accepted and for people to understand it’s not a scam,” Club Quarantee’s founder concluded.

    The digital parties being pitched look like this:

     
     
     
     
     
     
     
     
     
     
     
     
     

    Keep the vibe alive! Every Saturday we meet on our digital dancefloor to groove, move, and stay connected ❣️Cuz Zoom parties are totally a thing now!? THANK YOU to everyone who has joined the party so far – the next one goes down tonight at 8pm EST!! We’re also doing a Bottomless Brunch party on Sunday at 3pm EST 🍑 ⠀ Extra special thanks to @davidk1ss for providing the jams and mastering the broadcast setup 🙏🏽 ⠀ 🎥 @1986ph 🎶 Todd Terje ‘Alfonso Muskedunder’ Cameos by @rawblane @captaincerf @kd_kinetic @dance.heals.all @theteaganlee @costumejim @kaeburke @shenryxshmenry @amyvandoran @lalolacarter @little.cinema @kmora11 @jonesywine @pixelwitchadventures @davidjamesmountain @chiquitabrujita @ugretchen @gutter.face @lovelivingart @kylemcmahonworks @chop_suiie @eyeroll.gif @sabdiee @subtleaesthetics ⠀ #houseofyes #socialdisdance

    A post shared by Circus • Performance • Club (@houseofyesnyc) on Apr 4, 2020 at 9:09am PDT

    //www.instagram.com/embed.js


    Tyler Durden

    Fri, 04/24/2020 – 23:35

  • A Real New Deal & Debt Jubilee Or A Green New Deal & Global Dictatorship?
    A Real New Deal & Debt Jubilee Or A Green New Deal & Global Dictatorship?

    Authored by Mathew Ehret via The Strategic Culture Foundation,

    As scary as it is for some to admit even at this stage of the game, the current financial system sits precariously on the edge of a meltdown beyond anything ever recorded in human history. Normally, such a systemic meltdown would generate such turbulence and panic that the masses of complacent subjects would be induced to action in defense of their families and nations, however under current circumstances, the coronavirus pandemic has ensured that no such mass movement, or policy fight has taken shape.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    As I wrote in a February 27th editorial Why the Coming Economic Collapse Will NOT be Caused by Coronavirus, the inevitability of the meltdown has been well known to all leading central bankers and highly placed officials in “a position to know” for a very long time. This fact was known even before the new wave of emergency bailouts were begun in September 2019 starting with $50 billion/night of overnight repo loans. It was known even before the age of bailout was created to postpone the 2008-09 collapse of the system under threat of Martial Law. It was known before Glass-Steagall was repealed in 1999 and over-the-counter derivatives were deregulated in 2001. Let’s just say it’s been a part of a very ugly plan for a very long time.

    But make no mistake, you didn’t have to be a “highly placed” banker or technocratic social engineer to know this collapse was going to happen. No crystal ball was ever needed.

    All a thinking person had to do was assess the observable underpinnings of the post-1971 financial order and look with unbiased eyes upon the consistent rate of collapse of the PHYSICAL economic platform that supports life while taking note of the paradoxical hyperbolic increase of monetary assets, and speculative claims in the system every year since the age of “deregulation” was ushered in (and the post WWII paradigm of industrial growth economics was thrown in the trash). Outsourcing of vital manufacturing, decay of infrastructure maintenance and improvement, privatization of public goods, and loss of machine tool powers simply resulted in the transfer of wealth into the hands of a small elite, and the stripping of nation states from the economic sovereignty they once enjoyed.

    Where monetary growth used to be tied to the measurable growth of physical economic variables mentioned above, the post-1971 world order demanded that money could only grow according to debts that were ever more disassociated from reality. Instead of justifying the growth of infrastructure, and improvements in the productive powers of labor, debts became tied to mere speculative activities setting in place a time bomb in the form of a new bubble economy. Whether artificially induced or left to their own devices, bubbles by their very nature ALWAYS pop

    Since the chaos of the collapse of the trans-Atlantic bubbles has not yet occurred, we still have a choice.

    Hyperinflation 101: How NOT to Run an Economy

    Either we can break up the banks with Glass-Steagall bank separation, and a total bankruptcy reorganization (aka: Debt Jubilees) or we can pump more money into the zombie banks in order to accelerate hyperinflation and fascism following the 1923 German model.

    Sadly, up until the present moment, the playbook used was published in 1923.

    In response to the collapse, and precipitated by the covid-19 pandemic which has been used to justify the shutdown of the economies of the world, the NY Federal Reserve has been converted into a giant Hedge Fund designed to purchase trillions of dollars of junk debts from private banks to the tune of $6.13 trillion as of April 13. This represents a 42% increase in only one month from the $4.31 trillion balance sheet on March 11. Most of these assets take the form of Special purchase vehicles authorized to purchase over $4.5 trillion of toxic debt under the secret supervision of Blackrock, as well as tranches of Collateralized Loan Obligations (CLOs) which are highly toxic derivatives tied to leveraged corporate junk debt to the scale of $2.2 trillion.

    Former banker and author of Planet Ponzi, Mitchel Feierstein recently wrote an RT editorial on April 10 that put it succinctly: “The fed is socializing hedge fund investments gone bad placing tax payers at risk.”

    Unlike too many analysts who prefer to merely opinionate about the crisis, Feierstein happily strikes the nail on the head by zeroing in on the conceptual issue of good vs false standards of value and debt. Is all debt evil? Of course not. If a farmer wishes to take out a debt to buy a better tractor which will improve his productivity then it will extinguish itself over time. If a heroine addict wishes to take out a debt to feed his addiction then that debt would obviously be destructive.

    In this vein Feierstein states: “Debt is never a bad thing if it is used to create organic growth or fund infrastructure development that creates opportunities and employment. Debt is dangerous when used to develop grotesque weapons of financial destruction by structuring synthetic derivatives products that use leverage of 300 to 1 or more- meaning that $1 million can control $300 million in assets.”

    The system of derivatives products and leverage referred to by Fierstein has now attained levels which “officially” amount to $700 trillion, but which most expert economists claim runs as high as $1.5 quadrillion of fictitious capital. World GDP is no greater than $80 trillion. This is the bubble that threatens to tear apart the nations of the world now.

    The Importance of a Debt Jubilee

    Feierstein is joined by a surge in Ibero-American voices who have loudly begun calling for a debt jubilee in the face of the oncoming blowout. Founded by Latin American leaders, including Argentina’s current president Alberto Fernandez in July 2019, the Puebla Group has now come out calling for a total write off of the unplayable IMF and World Bank debts that have held Latin America hostage for decades under the weight of conditionalities and usury. After a 3 hour conference call with its 40 members, the group published a declaration stating that “the priorities of the [existing] global model led to the abandonment of social policies, especially those related to healthcare systems” and that “health, research, and public policy cannot be subordinated to the interests of the market.” Other founders of the Pueblo Group include former presidents Fernando Lugo (Paraguay), Rafael Correa (Ecuador), Dilma Rousseff (Brazil), and former cabinet ministers, diplomats and senators.

    This dovetails the March 20 call by the Latin American Center for Geopolitics (CELAG) to support a new multipolar system and a cancelation of all usurious Ibero-American debts. A director of CELAG named Alfredo Serrano wrote that “after the tsunami”, hopefully “a kind of New Deal, a new social and economic contract will emerge, in which health and other basic rights will be at the center of the economy and that the financial economy will be at the service of the real economy and not the other way around.”

    While not going as far as the Pueblo Group or CELAG, Mexico’s President Lopez Obrador, made headlines on April 8 by stating the fact that the crisis will require a new system and that said system must be based upon the total rejection of neoliberalism. In his speech, Obrador stated “that the neo-liberal model is collapsing. That is what is happening; that is, the coronavirus precipitated the fall of a failed model….“How is it possible that the pandemic has such a huge effect, economically and socially? … Among other things, social investment was stopped; healthcare was privatized. There are countries today which do not have public services for the population. They are the ones worst hit.”

    Although he did not explicitly state that a debt cancellation must occur, Obrador called for a New Deal solution to the crisis asking:

    “What did President Roosevelt do in a situation like this? Reactivate the economy with investment; employment for everyone; a minimum salary for everyone, especially the youth. Reactivate the construction industry. That is how he lifted up the United States and returned tranquility, happiness to his people…. So, why not do the same thing today?”

    Real New Deal NOT Green New Deal

    As I wrote in my previous paper How to Crush a Bankers’ Dictatorship: A Lesson from 1933, Franklin Roosevelt’s New Deal was NOTHING like the “Green New Deal” which many leading central bankers have been promoting as a replacement to the dying neo-liberal order. When Sir Michael Bloomberg (yes he was made a knight of the British Empire in 2014) or the Bank of England’s Mark Carney, or some other Malthusian technocrat call for a Global Green New Deal it is important to recognize that this is a trap and similar to the original in name only. Since this fact is still not widely known, a few words on this must be stated.

    Carbon taxes, cap and trade schemes, biofuels (to burn the food supplies), or inefficient windmill and solar energy infrastructure may create a momentary spike in jobs that would satisfy Keynesian economists who think economic progress comes from individual “bottom up” purchasing power, but the longer term EFFECT will be the opposite of that attained during the New Deal of the 1930s and the needed remedies to support today’s nearly 8 billion people.

    Rather than increasing industrial activity, large scale infrastructure and ultimately sustain social safety nets the way FDR achieved, the Green New Deal will crush nations’ abilities to produce for themselves, sustain their people or even maintain global populations at current levels which this author developed in a 2014 lecture entitled “The Imperial Fraud of Entropy” featured below. As sick a fact as this is, depopulation is considered a “utilitarian necessity” for certain oligarchical social engineers attempting to manage humanity as a system from the top.

    The real New Deal, as Obrador desires, or as China, Russia and other pro-Belt and Road nations demand, must be anti-Malthusian as well as anti-neoliberal. It must be based upon activities that increase human life both quantitatively as well as qualitatively on every level: material, intellectual and spiritual. Long term infrastructure projects funded by low interest/conditionality-free loans made the original New Deal work and it would have ended colonialism if FDR hadn’t died pre-maturely months into his fourth term under conditions which Stalin stated in an interview with FDR’s son Elliot, was the effect of poisoning by “Churchill’s gang”.

    These principles worked then, and they continue to work today as China and 135 nations working together under the Belt and Road Initiative framework have demonstrated beautifully.

    This growth of humanity as a species made in the image of a Creator is what the Malthusian technocrats hate and fear, and this is why the Trump-Putin-Xi commitment to asteroid defense, lunar, mars and asteroid mining and cooperation on space exploration more generally is so necessary to fuel the sort of anti-Malthusian, open system discussion for a genuine Global New Deal which must govern the transition from the age of parasitic globalization and empire to a new Multipolar age of cooperation and creative reason.


    Tyler Durden

    Fri, 04/24/2020 – 23:15

  • Will Coronavirus Wreck The Classic Car Market? 
    Will Coronavirus Wreck The Classic Car Market? 

    In August 2019, we suggested how it might be a good time to thin out the classic car collection. Now vintage automobile prices are moving lower, which could result in a sharp correction. 

    With an economic depression unfolding in the second quarter, the classic car market could see downward pressure. Understanding how deep a correction would be is anyone’s guess at the moment, but what is evident is that a record number of Americans were just laid off and will need to sell assets to build cash. Some of those assets include, as this piece is centered around, classic cars, as well as art, wine, etc… 

    To show automobile prices, we are sourcing Hagerty Market Rating, which provides a variety of classic car indexes. 

    Hagerty’s Muscle Car Index appears to have “recorded the largest drop” of any automobile index for the “second time in a row, falling 7 percent to a five-year low” in January, said Hagerty valuation editor Andrew Newton. 

    “While more than three-quarters of the index’s component cars recorded no change at all, another large drop for the 1970 Hemi Cuda convertible (among the most valuable muscle cars of all) and a 4 percent decrease for the 1964 Impala SS were more than enough to pull the overall score down,” Newton said. 

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Next is 1950s American Hagerty Index that slumped 5% in 2019, and now sits at a 5-year low in January. 

    “The 1950s American Index continued its slide to close out 2019 with a 5 percent drop, and now sits at a 5-year low. While the 1954 Buick Skylark notched a significant gain of 5 percent, more than half the index’s component cars recorded a serious loss. The 1955 Packard Caribbean took an especially serious blow with a 21 percent drop. The index’s most expensive car, the 1953 Cadillac Eldorado, dropped 13 percent,” Newton said. 

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Hagerty’s British Car Index remains at an all-time high but has hit resistance over the last several years. 

    “Half of this group’s component cars recorded a loss over the past four months, and just one car—the 1972 Triumph TR6—recorded a gain. That increase was a minor 1 percent,” Newton said. 

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Hagerty’s German Car Index remains slightly off the all-time high. 

    “Nearly three-quarters of the component cars recorded no movement at all. Three of them dropped, including previously red-hot Porsches like the 1973 911 Carrera RS Touring (one of the more expensive cars in the index) with a 12 percent decrease and the 1979 930, which continued its gradual slide with a 6 percent decrease. The only serious gain of any car in the index this past period was for the Mercedes-Benz 280SL, which bounced back with a 17 percent surge after two years of continuous drops,” Newton said. 

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Hagerty’s Blue Chip Index, consisting of the top 25 most sought-after post-war era cars in the world, was down 6% in January over the prior 12 months, one of the most significant slides since January 2010. 

    “Upper echelon cars have faced headwinds for the last four years, and buyers at this level are increasingly selective with their purchases. Seven-figure cars with excellent history and specifications that are carefully represented are still achieving steady prices, but any car with less than the best story is a tough sell at the moment. Several years in, owners are still coming to terms with this dynamic.” 

    “Five Blue Chip component cars fell more than 10 percent since September 2019, including the Aston Martin DB5, the Ferrari 275 GTB/4, the Jaguar D-Type, the Plymouth Hemi Cuda convertible, and the 1973 Porsche 911 Carrera RS. The Cuda excluded, most of these cars have historically seen strong interest among European buyers, and many of those buyers are hesitating due to unfavorable currency exchange rates and other macro-economic concerns,” said Hagerty valuation editor Brian Rabold. 

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Hagerty’s Ferrari Index “fell 3 percent to close out 2019. This slip leaves the group 6 percent down year over year. More importantly, the index is now 2 percent below where it was five years ago, effectively rolling prices back to 2014 levels. Ferrari Index,” Rabold said. 

    “The biggest culprits in this period’s change are the 250 GT SWB, which dropped 15 percent, and the 275 GTB/4, which fell 13 percent. Meanwhile, Daytona coupes and 246 Dinos both seem to have stabilized with two consecutive periods of unchanged prices,” he said. 

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    With classic car auctions, shows, and meets canceled for the first half of the year because of the COVID-19 pandemic, this is an unprecedented period to own classic cars as the global economy stumbles into a recession, if not depression, which could result in a sharp correction in the overall classic car market in 2020. 


    Tyler Durden

    Fri, 04/24/2020 – 22:55

  • A Handful Of Cops Are Standing Up To Tyranny With The People
    A Handful Of Cops Are Standing Up To Tyranny With The People

    Authored by Mac Slavo via SHTFplan.com,

    Some police officers have awoken to the world they are leaving for their children and are standing with the people against tyranny.  While these instances are still few and far between, it’s a good sign that at least a few may be realizing what kind of world they are enforcing at this point in human history.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    For a long time, police officers and the military have done nothing more than blindly obey the commands of politicians and enforce even the most immoral of laws on the public.  That seems to be changing, and we can always hope it will change more rapidly in the coming days.

    According to a report from the Federalist, police chiefs from Texas to Washington are standing up against the draconian orders from local power-hunger tyrants demanding strict adherence to extreme social distancing measures to curb the spread of the novel coronavirus. Even with manipulated statics designed to strike fear into the masses being blasted all over the news, there is no excuse for the tyranny we are seeing spread all over the planet at a much more rapid rate than this virus could ever hope to achieve. People, by and large, have started looking beyond the falsified “facts” provided by those who don’t care about your health, only about controlling you.

    The following are examples of police standing against tyranny:

    The Houston Police Officers’ Union declared Wednesday that its members would refrain from enforcing local County Judge Lina Hidalgo’s ruling deeming it mandatory for any individual over the age of 10 to wear a mask in public.

    The Federalist

    In Washington, Snohomish County Sheriff Adam Fortney announced Tuesday that his officers would also abstain from enforcement of lockdown orders, joining Franklin County Sheriff J.D. Raymond who said he would not stop churches and business from opening with reasonable distancing measures in place.

    – The Federalist

    Further east in Michigan, four sheriffs in the northwest part of the mitten also announced last week that they would refuse to enforce Democratic Gov. Gretchen Whitmer’s lockdown orders which have been the most extreme in the country.

    The Federalist

    For every one story about cops defying the orders to enforce tyranny, there are ten about cops following the commands of tyrants and arresting peaceful people. The mainstream media has quickly done an about-face when it comes to their views of the police. Force and violence used against “anti-vaxxers” and those who value freedom more than security are fine. Police brutality before COVID-19, however, was bad.  The hypocrisy is unbelievable. It’s apparent that the media is working hard to keep your mind locked in the fearful slave mentality.

    We need more order followers to just stop at this point.  There is a big wall of violence created by the police state and the huge military that can be used to forcibly “keep people in line.” Once that dissolves, the elitists have no way to control the public any longer.  True justice, peace, and freedom is within our reach if more and more police officers and service members wake up to realize what kind of a world they are enforcing.

    Just because it’s legal, it isn’t necessarily right, and just because it’s right doesn’t necessarily mean it’s legal. It appears that even a few police officers have figured it out at this point. Perhaps they know people are standing up and they don’t want to be on the wrong side of history, or perhaps they really do care about the kind of world they are enforcing and leaving to their children.


    Tyler Durden

    Fri, 04/24/2020 – 22:35

  • Surprise Cruise Ship Outbreak In Nagasaki Exposes Staggering Negligence
    Surprise Cruise Ship Outbreak In Nagasaki Exposes Staggering Negligence

    The story of the outbreak aboard the “Costa Atlantica” has left many readers amazed by the staggering negligence of both local officials in Nagasaki, as well as the Japanese and Italian governments. After the dozens of deaths and thousands of infections reported aboard cruise ships around the world, the notion that more than 600 crewmembers were left to live on-board this ship for months while it was being repaired is simply mind-blowing, given the obvious risk.

    Then again, governments around the world from Europe to the US to Asia have largely failed to protect the most vulnerable in society, that being, in this case, patients in nursing homes. But as Bloomberg pointed out in a Friday update on the situation, there’s another familiar player involved – one that really has no excuse for allowing this to happen.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    That’s right. Somehow,  the “Costa Atlantica” is a Carnival Corp ship (owned by a subsidiary). Carnival has been far and away the worst offender in the travel and leisure industry in terms of its management of the many crises and outbreaks that have unfolded aboard its cruises. It failed to act fast enough to shut down operations, and even after it did, the company and personnel made many decisions which suggested they blithely placed the company’s bottom line before the well-being of customers.

    Australia has already launched a criminal investigation into Carnival over the “Ruby Princess” fiasco…

    The number of confirmed Covid-19 infections on the Costa Atlantica had climbed to 91 as of Thursday from 48 a day earlier, the Nagasaki prefecture said.

    The Atlantica is operated by CSSC Carnival Cruise Shipping, a partnership between Carnival Corp. and state-owned China State Shipbuilding Corp. The Chinese entity is the majority owner.

    Coronavirus cases at sea forced the industry to suspend new sailings in mid-March. Many ships were caught mid-voyage, leading to weeks of drama as companies hustled to get passengers to ports.

    Even now, ships around the world still have crew on board.

    The episode has captured the attention of Japan’s government, which already faced widespread Covid-19 on Carnival’s Diamond Princess, at one point the largest concentration of coronavirus outside of mainland China.

    Japan’s Health Minister Katsunobu Kato said Thursday that all crew will now be tested on the Costa Atlantica.

    Since the first case was confirmed on Monday, authorities have been investigating how the outbreak began, since the ship has been at port without passengers for weeks, and crew members weren’t supposed to have left the vessel.

    Kato said some of the crew apparently got off the vessel at some point.

    …will Japan, or perhaps Italy, be next to join in?

    And yet, somehow, hundreds maybe thousands of crew members continue to live onboard hastily recalled cruise ships all around the world, apparently.

    Let’s hope they’re at least getting some hazard pay.


    Tyler Durden

    Fri, 04/24/2020 – 22:15

  • Here Is The Missing Manual For Defending Yourself Against Deplatforming And Cancel Culture
    Here Is The Missing Manual For Defending Yourself Against Deplatforming And Cancel Culture

    Submitted by Mark Jeftovic of Guerrilla-Capitalism; co-founder & CEO, easyDNS Technologies Inc. and author of Unassailable: Protect Yourself From Deplatform Attacks and Cancel Culture

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Things are moving quickly.

    In the old adage “Never let a crisis go to waste”, governments everywhere are using the pandemic opportunity to:

    • Rule by decree
    • Stifle freedoms guaranteed under various rights and charters
    • Enact mandatory surveillance
    • Silence dissenting speech

    Their enablers in this are the mainstream media and Big Tech, who have formed an ideological simpatico to form and control public opinion. You may have heard the expression Overton Window, which defines the allowable spectrum of opinion and the limits beyond which public discourse is not permissible. When the institutional scaffolding of a system begins to buckle, and when the credibility of traditional sources of mainstream news go into secular decline, the Overton Window constricts.

    Of the Government / Mainstream Media / Big Tech triumvirate, only Big Tech is on the ascendency. It seeks to carve out an indispensable role of one manner or another in the next world order which has been emerging for over a decade, and is now accelerating amid the pandemic.

    The components of The Triumvirate do understand viscerally, what has been known by those who seek to retain power since Edward Bernays wrote his blueprints for controlling the public mind back in 1920s (those were “Propaganda”, “Public Relations” and “Crystallizing Public Opinion“)

    “The conscious and intelligent manipulation of the organized habits and opinions of the masses is an important element in democratic society. Those who manipulate this unseen mechanism of society constitute an invisible government which is the true ruling power of our country. …We are governed, our minds are molded, our tastes formed, our ideas suggested, largely by men we have never heard of.

    This is a logical result of the way in which our democratic society is organized. Vast numbers of human beings must cooperate in this manner if they are to live together as a smoothly functioning society. …In almost every act of our daily lives, whether in the sphere of politics or business, in our social conduct or our ethical thinking, we are dominated by the relatively small number of persons…who understand the mental processes and social patterns of the masses. It is they who pull the wires which control the public mind.”
    – Propaganda, Chapter 1: Ordering Chaos

    Not to put too fine a point on it,

    There are invisible rulers who control the destinies of millions. It is not generally realized to what extent the words and actions of our most influential public men are dictated by shrewd persons operating behind the scenes.

    Now, what is still more important, to the extent to which our thoughts and habits are modified by authorities.

    In departments of our daily life, in which we imagine ourselves free agents, we are ruled by dictators exercising great power”.

    — Propaganda, Chapter 3: The New Propagandists

    The narrative must be controlled, it must be shaped and deviations from it must be curtailed and marginalized. As I say in my book, Unassailable (now free, see below),

    “The ramifications of successfully asserting one [narrative] trajectory over any other challengers may never be fully grasped by the public at large.”

    This occurs through repeated accusations of  the “conspiracy theory” monicker, or blaming everything that goes wrong on Russian meddling, white nationalists and the like. It even looks like narrative enforcers even go so far as to cherry pick the most absurd elements and participants out of a given area of concern and amplify those, so as to “poison the well’, so to speak against an entire stream of debate around a given concern:

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Via The Guardian

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Thus, nobody respectable will ever take a serious look at possible concerns around any debatable  aspects of COVID-19, 5G, or anything that doesn’t originate from an official source like the WHO. Because from here on in if you even talk about an “off-limits” topic you will have your name linked to the most reviled and ostracized elements of society via negative branding:

    “One of the most favored propaganda tactics of establishment elites and [those] they employ … is to relabel or redefine an opponent before they can solidly define themselves. In other words, elites [and their media] will seek to “brand” you (just as corporations use branding) in the minds of the masses so that they can take away your ability to define yourself as anything else.” (emphasis added)

    — Brandon Smith, Alt-Market.

    We see a similar dynamic among evangelical environmentalists, where anybody who expresses any skepticism toward computer models that are put forward as incontrovertible truths, or that the “New Green Deal”-style remedies proffered are the only possible course of action are labeled “deniers” and witch-hunted. (If you’re curious as to what a New Green Deal, Greta Thunberg-style radical decarbonization program looks like, what is happening now is just a modest hint of what that would be like. I would recommend Alex Epstein’s “The Moral Case for Fossil Fuels” to get an example of  alternative approaches around how to think about environmental issues. I say this as someone who believes the medium-to-long-term trajectory of humanity is away from fossil fuels. Paradoxically, one of the most viable near term substitutes available to us, nuclear and thorium energy, is also off limits for serious discussion).

    If the marginalization doesn’t work, if the public seems resistant to mainstream media gaslighting, if the construct of hypernormalisation is in danger of being challenged or outright debunked, then matters get taken to the next level.

    That’s when deplatforming and cancel culture come into play

    As I mentioned in Unassailable,

    propaganda comprises techniques and strategies to push elite approved narratives into the public mind and to have them accepted. Bernays deemed this a necessity of a smooth operating society. The other side of controlling the narrative necessitates the suppression of any contending streams of thought. That’s where deplatforming comes in.

    As I’ve said elsewhere, and I’ll say it again here:

    It doesn’t matter if you believe Coronavirus is real, fake, caused by 5G, a full moon, in a lab or eating batshit sandwiches, you should be able to believe any of those things and still behave civilly without disturbing anyone. What your beliefs induce you to do in the real world brings their own consequences and you should be prepared to deal with that.

    But what anybody says online has to be sacrosanct. If you really want to protect the world from bad conspiracy theories then write a crash course in developing critical thinking skills and personal responsibility. Then give that away far and wide.

    The fact is the internet is a type of gas release valve. People discharge angst, frustration, fear and sexual tension out through the internet because they think it’s a safe release. And it should be.

    There are too many initiatives seeking to control that release and infringe upon real world liberties.

    Right now things are extraordinarily tense and brittle. The global economy has all but ceased operating, essentially by decree. Millions of people have lost their jobs, countless businesses have shut down, many to never reopen.

    To now step into the open forum of discourse and into the marketplace of ideas and tell people what is and isn’t permissible to believe and think is just adding more fuel to an already building pressure cooker that is primed to foment social unrest.

    Unassailable: The anti-dote to Cancel-Culture and Deplatforming is now free

    After being contacted earlier this week on behalf people who were deplatformed from Facebook who are trying to organize anti-lockdown protests and online dissent, I’ve decided to make my latest book, Unassailable: Defend Yourself from Deplatform Attacks, Cancel-Culture and Other Online Disasters free for download, for anybody.

    This book is the missing manual for defending your content and your free speech online. It will step you through each component of your online presence: from web hosting, email, e-commerce models, social media and domain names and show you where your weak spots are and how to fortify them against the ideological pronouncements of other people. The foreword is by Charles Hugh Smith, and part one looks at the ideological and philosophical underpinnings of cancel culture.

    I bent my own rule a bit and set it up on BookFunnel, the download link can be accessed here.

    If you don’t want the book and just want to get on the AxisOfEasy mailing list, sign up here, or follow the Axis on Mastodon or (if you’re woke), on Twitter.

    I also write more about economics and business from Guerrilla Capitalism which you can join here.


    Tyler Durden

    Fri, 04/24/2020 – 22:09

  • "The Ripple-Effects Of The Government Lockdown Are Only Starting To Take Shape…"
    “The Ripple-Effects Of The Government Lockdown Are Only Starting To Take Shape…”

    Via Doug Casey’s InternationalMan.com,

    David Stockman on the Real Reason Why the Government Shutdown Caused an Economic Collapse

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    International Man: Is the government’s reaction to COVID-19 worse than the virus itself? What are your thoughts?

    David Stockman: I think for once, Donald Trump was right when he worried out loud the other day that the cure may be far worse than the disease.

    Governors – mostly Democratic governors and mayors of major areas of the country – have imposed Lockdown Nation. It’s a complete economic disaster.

    It’s a wrong policy from a public health point of view and an economic point of view.

    It is hitting, like a ton of bricks, a highly fragile and vulnerable economy that was living hand to mouth anyway because of the kind of highly counterproductive monetary and fiscal policies and debt build-up we’ve had over the last 30 years.

    If you look at the data for New York—which is the epicenter of the whole COVID-19 pandemic—it is abundantly clear that COVID is not some kind of latter-day Black Death plague that takes down the young, the old, the healthy, the sick, and everyone in between.

    It is a kind of super winter flu that strikes fatally, almost entirely, the elderly population that is already afflicted with many life-threatening medical conditions—or what the technicians call comorbidities.

    The shutdown, which I call the “plenary lockdown policy,” is wrong. Closing all the businesses except a tiny, arbitrary set of essential operations is courting disaster for no good reason.

    Here’s what the New York data showed us recently.

    New York is ground zero and the epicenter. But if you look at the breakdown of that number by age and by medical condition, it’s startling.

    For those under 50 years of age in the state of New York, the death rate is slightly under 5 per 100,000.

    That isn’t a disaster. That isn’t a plague or a calamity.

    Five per 100,000 is half the rate of suicides per 100,000 annually among the 50 and under population. It is a small fraction of the 90 deaths per 100,000 annually that occur for all kinds of reasons: accidents and illnesses—including suicide.

    You would not, in the slightest, in any kind of sane world, shut down an entire economy and lock down everything when you have a 5 per 100,000 death rate for the overwhelming share of the population.

    On the other hand, if you look at the population 80 years and older in New York state—the death rate is 1,086 deaths per 100,000. In other words, it’s night and day.

    The virus is not a fatal problem for the overwhelming share of the population.

    Lots of people get infected. Most are asymptomatic. Some get sick and stay in bed for a couple of days, and they recover. A tiny fraction of the under-50-years population gets seriously ill and is hospitalized for treatment, and an infinitesimal number end up as fatalities. That’s the case for the healthy population under 50.

    It’s in the over-70 age group, and especially in the over-80 age group, that the overwhelming share of these severe cases has developed.

    The strategy shouldn’t be a plenary lockdown. The right approach is to trace, identify, isolate, support, and treat the vulnerable population that already has many illnesses.

    If we look at New York again, of those deaths among the elderly population, 60% had hypertension or high blood pressure, 31% had diabetes, etc. All of them, almost overwhelmingly, had one, two, or three comorbidities.

    We don’t need Governor Cuomo to shut down the state. We need Governor Cuomo to tell the health department to mobilize the doctors and the healthcare apparatus of New York to identify the vulnerable elderly population. This population is already being treated in many cases for serious respiratory problems, heart ailments, and other diseases—and we are making sure that they’re as isolated and protected from this bad winter flu as they possibly can be. 

    It’s not merely a matter of degree. It’s that they’ve got it ass-backward. 

    You don’t lock down the population. You target the sub-population, the small minority of very vulnerable people, and do everything you can to shield them from this virus until it passes into the summer temperatures and the normal herd immunity that eventually will make it go away.

    International Man: Those are excellent points. That’s not to mention that in the US, two out of three Americans are overweight or obese and have a pre-chronic or chronic condition. And of those people, the risk goes up substantially for those who have two or more conditions. It puts them at higher risk for something like COVID-19 to take them down.

    David Stockman: I think that’s true, but even if you look at the New York data, again, it’s startling.

    For the under-50-year-old population, I can’t emphasize it enough—it’s 5 per 100,000. That’s a rounding error in the scheme of things. 

    You can’t run a society based on the risk of 5 out of 100,000 people. 

    So, I think you’re hitting it right on the head.

    What we need to think about is how much longer—and we’re not talking about months and quarters, we’re talking about days and weeks—we can possibly stand a shutdown that has already put 22 million people on unemployment claims in four weeks.

    Let’s compare this to the worst four weeks of the Great Recession, which is the worst economic calamity that we’ve had since the Great Depression.

    During the worst three-week period in the winter of 2008/2009, the cumulative new unemployment claims were 2.7 million, not 22 million. So, this is eight times worse.

    We might add that it’s going to be 30 million, or close to that, very soon. 

    We have an economy that’s in free fall, unlike anything we’ve ever seen before, and we have a government that’s in total hysteria, trying to compensate for the economic collapse that is being ordered by the government itself. 

    What I’m talking about is the Everything Bailout that was signed without a record vote in the house, with no hearings—$2.2 trillion, on top of two or three other bills that had passed earlier. There’s another trillion that they’re talking about in the pipeline as a sort of a replenishment bill.

    Even beyond that, then they’re talking about a stimulus and infrastructure bill, where the bidding starts at $2 billion. It is insanity. 

    Let’s just look at what’s happening in the here and now.

    What the government is trying to do is hold everyone in America harmless, and every business in America harmless, for the massive dislocation, disruption of business cash flow, and interruption of paychecks that have resulted from these lockdown orders. 

    Where is it taking us? 

    This year alone—and these are not my numbers; they come from the most credible Washington DC agency, which I’m a part of, The Committee for a Responsible Federal Budget. That’s kind of an oxymoron, but it exists.

    They had projected that during the fiscal year underway—which was half over before the whole COVID lockdown even got started—that the deficit is going to total $3.8 trillion. 

    I’m not talking about total spending. I’m talking about just the deficit. It’s roughly 19% of GDP.

    It’s a deficit in the same order of magnitude as we had during the darkest days of World War II. During that time, the whole economy was producing military material and weapons, and nobody could spend any money on anything except necessities because everything else was rationed or wasn’t being produced. So they bought a lot of government war bonds.

    So where we are right now, suddenly, overnight, is in a disastrous fiscal situation. 

    This self-inflicted shock has transformed the Trump-Republican trillion dollar per year deficits at the top of the business cycle.

    It has transformed a terrible situation into a catastrophic situation, where they’re going to borrow $3.8 trillion this year alone. The number for fiscal 2021—which starts in October—is going to be another $2.5 trillion at minimum, or probably more. 

    Now the reason I bring this up is because we’re looking at a two-year period in which the combined deficits are likely to exceed $6 trillion in two years. These numbers are so humongous that they’re almost impossible for ordinary people—or even people who study this subject regularly—to grasp.

    I think the best way to look at it is to see that $6 trillion of new debt in two years is equivalent to what it took 213 years and 43 presidents to produce—that’s how long it took to get to the first $6 trillion of public debt. 

    That’s how bad this has gotten, and it will destroy any remaining semblance of market capitalism we have in this country. 

    When you have a coast-to-coast soup line, with the government underwriting 100% of what everybody was getting in January 2020 by merely piling it onto the public debt, and then having the Fed printing money to fund it, you’re asking for a calamity—a financial and economic disaster of biblical proportions.

    *  *  *

    The ripple effects of the government lock down are only stating to take shape. That’s not to mention the unprecedented amount of money the that is being pumped into every corner of the economy by the Federal Reserve. The consequences of which could be crippling to the the average person. That’s exactly why Legendary speculator Doug Casey and David Stockman have just released this urgent new video which outlines exactly what’s happening and how it will impact retirees, savers, and investors. It reveals what you could do to prevent becoming financial roadkill. Click here to watch it now.


    Tyler Durden

    Fri, 04/24/2020 – 21:55

  • Japanese Mayor: Men Should Do Shopping Since Women Are 'Indecisive And Take Forever'
    Japanese Mayor: Men Should Do Shopping Since Women Are ‘Indecisive And Take Forever’

    The mayor of Osaka, Japan is taking heat after suggesting that men should do the grocery shopping amid the coronavirus pandemic because women are indecisive and “take a long time.”

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Residents in certain parts of the island nation have been asked to shop less frequently and only send one family member to the store for supplies in order to to minimize the spread of COVID-19, according to CNA.

    Osaka Mayor Ichiro Matsui told reporters on Thursday (Apr 23) that men should be entrusted with grocery runs because women “take a long time as they browse around and hesitate about this and that”, Kyodo news agency reported.

    Men can snap up things they are told (to buy) and go, so I think it’s good that they go shopping, avoiding human contact,” the 56-year-old added.

    When challenged by a reporter, he acknowledged his remarks might be viewed as out-of-touch, but said they were true in his family.

    As one might expect, the mayor is now the focus of angry feminists, as Twitter users called him ‘full of prejudice against women,’ and ‘disrespectful to women and men.’

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Osaka Mayor Ichiro Matsui

    “There are indecisive men and nimble and sharp women,” said one user.

    “Does he think (shoppers) like to take time?” added a third. “They are thinking about menus and prices.”

    Others, perhaps those who have lived with a woman, supported the mayor.

    “That’s right. Elderly women, in particular, are always chatting away, unconcerned about shopping,” wrote another user.
     


    Tyler Durden

    Fri, 04/24/2020 – 21:35

  • Stop Thinking!!! The Russians & Chinese Are Your Enemy
    Stop Thinking!!! The Russians & Chinese Are Your Enemy

    Authored by Caitlin Johnstone via Medium.com,

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    The Russians and the Chinese are your enemy.
    Not the oligarchic class in your own country that has been exploiting, propagandizing, deceiving, oppressing and robbing you every moment of your life since you were born.
    The Russians and the Chinese.

    The Russians and the Chinese are your enemy.
    Not the people who have been engineering and advancing endless bloodbaths around the world at no benefit to you using your money and your resources and your political energy.
    The Russians and the Chinese.

    The Russians and the Chinese are your enemy.
    Not the political/media class and their plutocratic puppeteers who’ve been manipulating your mind to accept omnicide, ecocide, austerity and increasingly Orwellian dystopia as normal and not to be opposed.
    The Russians and the Chinese.

    The Russians and the Chinese are your enemy.
    Not the sociopathic manipulators who give you two thieving, warmongering, power-worshipping sock puppets to choose from in fake election after fake election to give you the illusion of control.
    The Russians and the Chinese.

    The Russians and the Chinese are your enemy.
    Not the people who pour vast troves of treasure into convincing your countrymen that it’d be evil and insane to demand the same social safety nets afforded to everyone else in every major country on earth.
    The Russians and the Chinese.

    The Russians and the Chinese are your enemy.
    Not the people who could have paid you a living wage to stay home safely but instead chose to give you $1200 and tell you to fuck off while transferring trillions to the plutocratic class.
    The Russians and the Chinese.

    The Russians and the Chinese are your enemy.
    Not the war profiteers and ecocidal devourers who are destroying your ecosystem and endangering the life of every organism on this planet.
    The Russians and the Chinese.

    The Russians and the Chinese are your enemy.
    Not the billionaire class who has a vested interest in making sure you stay poor in a system where money equals power and power is relative.
    The Russians and the Chinese.

    The Russians and the Chinese are your enemy.
    Not the people who are doing everything they can to roll out systems of internet censorship, surveillance and police militarization as quickly as possible in your own country.
    The Russians and the Chinese.

    The Russians and the Chinese are your enemy.
    Not the authoritarian rulers who demand complete control over what substances you put in your body while creating the largest prison population in the history of human civilization.
    The Russians and the Chinese.

    The Russians and the Chinese are your enemy.
    Not the two-headed one-party system which repeatedly threatens to destroy the rights and lives of marginalized groups if you don’t give at least one of those heads your full unbridled support.
    The Russians and the Chinese.

    The Russians and the Chinese are your enemy.
    Not the nationless alliance of oligarchs who use your resources to encircle the planet with military bases, wage countless undeclared wars and destroy any nation which refuses to bow to their empire.

    The Russians and the Chinese.

    The Russians and the Chinese are your enemy.
    Not the people who infiltrate, undermine, sabotage and smear any political movement which tries to help ordinary people the moment it begins gaining any traction.
    The Russians and the Chinese.

    The Russians and the Chinese are your enemy.
    Not the people who are working to normalize the extradition and life imprisonment of any journalist anywhere in the world who exposes the war crimes of your government.
    The Russians and the Chinese.

    The Russians and the Chinese are your enemy.
    Not the thugs who demand the unthinking loyalty of not just you and your countrymen but everyone in the world on pain of violent retribution.
    The Russians and the Chinese.

    The Russians and the Chinese are your enemy.
    Not the media-owning class who uses their unrivaled narrative control to sow division among your brothers and sisters at home and around the world so you don’t realize who’s really been fucking you over.
    The Russians and the Chinese.

    *  *  *

    Thanks for reading! The best way to get around the internet censors and make sure you see the stuff I publish is to subscribe to the mailing list for my website, which will get you an email notification for everything I publish. My work is entirely reader-supported, so if you enjoyed this piece please consider sharing it around, liking me on Facebook, following my antics onTwitter, checking out my podcast on either YoutubesoundcloudApple podcasts or Spotify, following me on Steemit, throwing some money into my hat on Patreon or Paypal, purchasing some of my sweet merchandise, buying my books Rogue Nation: Psychonautical Adventures With Caitlin Johnstone and Woke: A Field Guide for Utopia Preppers. For more info on who I am, where I stand, and what I’m trying to do with this platform, click here. Everyone, racist platforms excluded, has my permission to republish, use or translate any part of this work (or anything else I’ve written) in any way they like free of charge.

    Bitcoin donations:1Ac7PCQXoQoLA9Sh8fhAgiU3PHA2EX5Zm2


    Tyler Durden

    Fri, 04/24/2020 – 21:15

  • China Sent Medical Expert Team To Attend To North Korea's Kim Jong Un
    China Sent Medical Expert Team To Attend To North Korea’s Kim Jong Un

    Update: Following an earlier report that North Korean leader Kim Jong Un may have been evacuated from Pyongyang (as he was nowhere to be seen during the national holiday celebration of his grandfather’s birthday on April 15) amid speculation about his failing health following a report from a Seoul-based website that Kim was recovering after undergoing a cardiovascular procedure on April 12, late on Friday Reuters reported that China has “dispatched a team to North Korea including medical experts to advise on North Korean leader Kim Jong Un.”

    Citing “three people familiar with the situation”, Reuters writes that a delegation led by a senior member of the Chinese  Communist Party’s International Liaison Department – which is the main Chinese body dealing with North Korea – left Beijing for North Korea on Thursday.

    Meanwhile, both South Korean government officials and a Chinese official with the Liaison Department challenged subsequent reports suggesting that Kim was in grave danger after surgery, while South Korean officials said they had detected no signs of unusual activity in North Korea. On Thursday, President Donald Trump also downplayed earlier reports that Kim was gravely ill. “I think the report was incorrect,” Trump told reporters, but he declined to say if he had been in touch with North Korean officials.

    One day later, on Friday, a South Korean source told Reuters their intelligence was that Kim was alive and would likely make an appearance soon. The person said he did not have any comment on Kim’s current condition or any Chinese involvement. An official familiar with U.S. intelligence said that Kim was known to have health problems but they had no reason to conclude he was seriously ill or unable eventually to reappear in public.

    Secretary of State, Mike Pompeo, when asked about Kim’s health on Fox News after Trump spoke said, “I don’t have anything I can share with you tonight, but the American people should know we’re watching the situation very keenly.”

    The last time North Korea’s state media reported on Kim’s whereabouts was when he presided over a meeting on April 11. However, as noted above, state media did not report that he was in attendance at an event to mark the birthday of his grandfather, Kim Il Sung, on April 15, an important anniversary in North Korea.

    Kim, believed to be 36, has disappeared from coverage in North Korean state media before. In 2014, he vanished for more than a month and North Korean state TV later showed him walking with a limp. Speculation about his health has been fanned by his heavy smoking, apparent weight gain since taking power and family history of cardiovascular problems.

    When Kim Jong Un’s father, Kim Jong Il, suffered a stroke in 2008, South Korean media reported at the time that Chinese doctors were involved in his treatment along with French physicians.

     

    Earlier:

    Kim Jong Un was last seen publicly on the weekend of April 11th, but after he was nowhere in sight during the national holiday celebration of his grandfather’s birthday on April 15 — highly unusual for the important “Day of the Sun” commemorations, this triggered multiple unconfirmed reports that the North Korean leader was in critical condition after receiving heart surgery.

    First, it should be noted that the Western mainstream press often gets North Korea completely wrong and in the case of the latest speculation a high degree of critical skepticism is warranted further given the initial source for the heart surgery claims was a US state-funded media outlet based in South Korea, the Daily NK website.

    South Korean officials also downplayed the news, which had initially riled markets at the start of the week, suggesting he was “touring provincial areas”. President Trump also during the regular White House briefing Thursday evening called rumors of Kim’s ill health “fake news”.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    North Korean leader Kim Jong Un, via KCNA.

    While there’s been lots of questions and speculation, it still remains no satisfactory answers have been given.

    Instead, more contradictory reports out of Seoul based on intelligence sources, which suggest he’s been “evacuated” from Pyongyang to a coastal city. The new reports say he’s on the move and out of the public eye primarily due to COVID-19 outbreaks among key sectors of the country, also which Pyongyang officials have sought to downplay. 

    UPI outlines the latest reports as follows:

    Kim may have been evacuated to the coastal city of Wonsan, Kangwon Province, where he may have been providing field guidance at a resort construction site, South Korean news service Newsis reported Friday, citing Seoul’s national intelligence sources.

    According to Newsis, movement has been observed among “dedicated vehicles” for Kim that suggest he may have been evacuated from Pyongyang. A special train for Kim’s use was stationed in Wonsan, but Kim’s private plane remained in Pyongyang, the report says.

    And further, “In the new location, Kim may be carrying out field guidance activities, at Tanchon Hydroelectric Power Plant, or visiting a North Korean artillery unit in Sondok, where short-range projectiles were fired in March,” the report speculates based on official sources.

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    If he does make an appearance anytime soon, it’s likely to be related to North Korea’s Military Foundation Day events on Saturday, though reports and official photographs could still take days to be released. 

    Assuming he is rapidly moving to different locations of the country, it’s unlikely his condition would be “gravely ill” as the initial dire headlines speculated. US intelligence is said to be monitoring the situation. 

    Meanwhile, joint US-South Korea military drills have just wrapped up. The five-day long regularly scheduled air exercise came following the North launching at least five missile tests so far this year, and as Pyongyang’s anger and frustration over stalled nuclear talks with Washington is increasingly on display.


    Tyler Durden

    Fri, 04/24/2020 – 21:00

  • Violent Food & Fuel Shortage Riots Grip Venezuela Amid COVID-19 Lockdown
    Violent Food & Fuel Shortage Riots Grip Venezuela Amid COVID-19 Lockdown

    Despite a six week mandated nationwide coronavirus lockdown, broad protests have once again gripped parts of Venezuela amid crippling food and fuel shortages. Citizens are being asked to stay home, yet can’t get enough food to survive. 

    New reporting by Bloomberg counts at least 500 protests across 15 states so far this month, which has included multiple killed and scores wounded and arrested in often violent clashes with police, also as protests turn to looting.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Riot and looting scene in Venezuela this week.

    Riots have also reportedly erupted in some instances over police attempting to enforce quarantine rules, such as the wearing of masks being enforced in all public spaces. This as only 311 cases of coronavirus and 10 deaths have been reported nationwide according to official government figures.

    However, in part thanks to US-led sanctions, what little personal protective gear was available flew off the shelves last month, with few options available for most citizens other than sewing their own masks

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    While most families in North America have Amazon and Walmart deliveries of food and vital items coming to their door, also amid an abundance of cheap gas, Venezuleans are forced to venture out of self-isolation seeking out needed resources to survive.

    “Stocking up and hunkering down isn’t an option for many people who are too poor to buy enough food in advance,” as Bloomberg notes.

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    Bloomberg further emphasizes the situation is only set to continue spiraling downward, possibly into political unrest

    Vast gasoline shortages are taking a toll on already fragile supply chains, disrupting food deliveries and public transportation everywhere. The situation is likely to continue: there are few signs of long-term relief for local refineries. In the meantime, crops in rural states have gone to waste as farmers are unable to collect fruit and grains on empty tanks. 

    Dozens of Venezuelans clashed with police forces in the countryside of southern Bolivar state on Thursday.

    Looting has also been observed as the poor get desperate. They find themselves in a dangerous Catch-22: on the one hand risking arrest for going outside in town streets, but on the other risking their family’s starvation if they don’t venture far out for food and vital supplies.

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    The food and fuel crises are directly intertwined, exacerbated by American sanctions which especially seek to choke Venezuelan oil exports, refining and operations, as Reuters describes

    Irrigation systems are halted in the western Andean highlands and laborers cannot get to fields for harvest. The fuel shortages have worsened in recent weeks as Washington has tightened sanctions on the socialist government of President Nicolas Maduro.

    Even before the coronavirus crisis, some 9 million Venezuelans already were suffering from malnutrition, according to the U.N. World Food Programme, and the latest developments may make it increasingly difficult to keep the country in quarantine.

    Simply put, vast stores of food are rotting as producers lack the means to get them to market

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    It was a crisis already in the making, sent hurling over the edge by Caracas’ stay-at-home orders. As Reuters details further

    The OPEC country’s decrepit refineries are in near collapse and the U.S. State Department has pressured companies not to sell gasoline to Venezuela, according to sources, creating long lines at service stations around the country.

    Maduro blames the fuel shortages and the economic problems on U.S. sanctions.

    Venezuela’s heavy fuel subsidies have made it so cheap that drivers rarely bother paying for it when they fill up at PDVSA service stations.

    “This is what humanitarian activists hoped to never see: a sanitary crisis on top of a nutritional crisis,” a Venezuelan health expert, Susana Raffalli, said of the accelerating crisis. 

    In the town of Calabozo this week, a local police station was attacked reportedly after mass arrests over violating the mask mandate and ‘stay at home’ orders. Angry crowds could be seen attempting to break in to the police station to free relatives. 

    //www.instagram.com/embed.js

    “It hits us as the country does not have gasoline, protective equipment or a clear response to COVID-19,” Raffalli added.


    Tyler Durden

    Fri, 04/24/2020 – 20:55

  • Reopen The Economy While Protecting Those Truly At Risk… Or Risk Another Great Depression
    Reopen The Economy While Protecting Those Truly At Risk… Or Risk Another Great Depression

    Authored by Mark Glennon via Wirepoints.org,

    Please, please, wake up. A calamity far worse than COVID-19 itself is at hand.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Frightening as the death toll from the virus is, a more terrifying consequence looms: a depression, and a major one.

    If you think that’s exaggeration, it’s because expert opinion and news on the economy is drowned out by “frightening, click-bait headlines” that are “not useful” on meaningless numbers.

    The assessments from sources of all political stripes are everywhere, though you won’t see them mentioned by politicians or most of the media the general public reads. Here are a few:

    “We are experiencing an economic contraction that is faster and deeper than anything we have seen in the past century, or possibly several centuries,” Bank of England interest-rate setter Jan Vlieghe said. [Emphasis added.]

    The coronavirus collapse has the ingredients to surpass the disaster of the 1930s…. Let’s hope this depression won’t last a decade, but an unprecedented slump followed by years of pain seems inevitable, said a Bloomberg commentary.

    From economist Nouriel Roubini: “The best economic outcome that anyone can hope for is a recession deeper than that following the 2008 financial crisis. But given the flailing policy response so far, the chances of a far worse outcome are increasing by the day.”

    Forget recession, this is a depression,” says the left wing Guardian.

    The coronavirus pandemic will push the global economy into the deepest recession since the Great Depression, with the world’s poorest countries suffering the most, the head of the International Monetary Fund said Thursday.

    “The expectation of market participants is that we’re in the Great Depression and that in a sense, the news can’t get much worse,” said BNY Mellon chief strategist Alicia Levine.

    “At this point it would take a miracle to keep this recession from turning into the Great Depression II,” says Chris Rupkey, of Mitsubishi’s economic unit.

    We are fighting the last war. Politicians and most of the press talk incessantly about “the curve” on virus infections, the point of which was to ensure that hospital capacity wasn’t exceeded. But we already won that, having excess capacity that is growing every day.

    It’s time to bend different, more terrifying curves. Here’s one. It’s unemployment claims, from the St. Louis Federal Reserve Bank:

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Unemployment is likely already at Great Depression-era highs.

    And take no solace from the stock market, which has held up quite well. It’s artificially pumped up by Federal Reserve Bank stimulants. The reality for most Americans is very different, which was captured beautifully on a screenshot from earlier this month showing the market soaring while unemployment surged:

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    To contain or head off the looming depression, our policy on the Wuhan Virus must change immediately. Two Stanford experts summarized the right approach as follows:

    The appropriate policy, based on fundamental biology and the evidence already in hand, is to institute a more focused strategy like some outlined in the first place: Strictly protect the known vulnerable, self-isolate the mildly sick and open most workplaces and small businesses with some prudent large-group precautions. This would allow the essential socializing to generate immunity among those with minimal risk of serious consequence, while saving lives, preventing overcrowding of hospitals and limiting the enormous harms compounded by continued total isolation. Let’s stop underemphasizing empirical evidence while instead doubling down on hypothetical models. Facts matter.

    Please, please wake up.


    Tyler Durden

    Fri, 04/24/2020 – 20:35

  • EU Leaders Rewrite Document On Government Coronavirus Disinfo After China's Government Freaks Out
    EU Leaders Rewrite Document On Government Coronavirus Disinfo After China’s Government Freaks Out

    EU leaders bowed to China this week, softening their criticism of the communist regime in a report documenting how governments have pushed disinformation about the coronavirus pandemic.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Illustration: Aïda Amer/Axios

    China has continued to run a global disinformation campaign to deflect blame for the outbreak of the pandemic and improve its international image,” read the initial report, according to a copy seen by the New York Times. “Both overt and covert tactics have been observed.”

    It cited Beijing’s efforts to curtail mentions of the virus’s origins in China, in part by blaming the United States for spreading the disease internationally. It noted that Beijing had criticized France as slow to respond to the pandemic and had pushed false accusations that French politicians used racist slurs against the head of the World Health Organization. The report also highlighted Russian efforts to promote false health information and sow distrust in Western institutions. –NYT

    But after China ‘moved quickly to block the document’s release,’ European officials immediately delayed – and then rewrote the document which “diluted the focus on China, a vital trading partner.

    “The Chinese are already threatening with reactions if the report comes out,” said EU diplomat Lutz Güllner in a Tuesday email seen by The Times.

    The original report said that European analysts had assessed a “continued and coordinated push by official Chinese sources to deflect any blame.” That wording now says: “We see continued and coordinated push by some actors, including Chinese sources, to deflect any blame.” –NYT

    Notably, the sentence about China’s “global disinformation” campaign was shelved, as well as the claims made against France, along with other language.

    It’s near-universal knowledge (outside of China) that the CCP muzzled doctors and journalists who were reporting facts about the Wuhan coronavirus as the virus began to spread out of control late last year – while the Trump administration has consistently blamed China for their poor handling of the outbreak, as well as spreading false information about the disease, such as whether it was transmissible between humans.

    President Trump said last week that his government was trying to figure out whether the virus came from a Chinese lab, while China has accused the American government of trying to distract the public from its own mistakes. –NYT

    The European Union, meanwhile, was set to issue its report on Tuesday – until Chinese officials “quickly contacted the European Union’s representatives in Beijing to try to kill the report,” according to two diplomats.

    The Times notes that the report’s alteration comes at a time when the EU is trying to get better treatment for its companies in China, with two-way trade estimated at over $1.6 billion per day before the pandemic. Both German automakers and French farmers are among the EU industries which heavily rely on Chinese exports, according to the report.

    EU spokesman Peter Stano said on Friday that the report hadn’t been delayed, saying “It is ready once it is complete, cleared in an editorial process and ready to be uploaded.”

    Except on Tuesday morning, an email which circulated within the disinformation task force with the subject line: “READY for publication.” The report was reportedly approved and a summary was moments away from publication after it was ordered held by Esther Osorio – a senior adviser to the EU’s top diplomat, Josep Borrell, according to the Journal, citing an email.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Esther Osorio (Twitter profile)

    Central and Eastern Europe, in particular, are a hotbed for disinformation tactics, diplomats say. “Poland is the petri dish for Russia and China to try out their disinformation, their trolls and bots,” the American ambassador in Poland, Georgette Mosbacher, said in an interview on Thursday.

    As officials in Brussels delayed publishing their report, Chinese officials in Beijing kept up the pressure with at least two high-level calls to the European representatives there, according to emails and interviews with diplomats. Chinese officials expressed alarm at the news of a coming report and urged the bloc not to release the document. –NYT

    According to the report, Osorio asked analysts to revise the document and lighten up on China and Russia to avoid accusations of bias – making sure they differentiated between ‘pushing disinformation and aggressively pushing a narrative.’

    “Such appeasement will set a terrible precedent and encourage similar coercion in the future,” said analyst Monika Richter, adding that EU diplomats are “self-censoring to appease the Chinese Communist Party.


    Tyler Durden

    Fri, 04/24/2020 – 20:15

  • Daily Briefing – April 24, 2020
    Daily Briefing – April 24, 2020

    a


    Tyler Durden

    Fri, 04/24/2020 – 20:00

  • "It Will All End Badly" – The Coming Economic End-Game
    “It Will All End Badly” – The Coming Economic End-Game

    Authored by Bruce Wilds via Advancing Time blog,

    The wonderful thing about numbers is that when they are not jockeyed, jerked around, and falsified they tend to tell the truth. Continuing on this thought looking down the road the numbers do not work. This is where the late, Allen Meltzer, recognized for his wisdom and achievements in economics, enters the story. Meltzer was a professor of political economy at Carnegie Mellon University and a visiting fellow at the Hoover Institution.

    He authored the three-volume “A History of the Federal Reserve” and for over 25 years he chaired the Shadow Open Market Committee, a group that meets regularly to discuss the policy of the Federal Reserve.

    To say Meltzer was not a fan of the economic policies that have unfolded since 2008 is an understatement.

    “We’re in the biggest mess we’ve been in since the 1930s,” he has been quoted as saying, before he went on to claim that, “We’ve never had a more problematic future.” 

    This is about a person born in 1928 that while viewed by many economists as America’s foremost expert in monetary policy is little known by the masses. Meltzer was not been a fan of recent economic policy.

    In a Wall Street Journal opinion piece on June 30, 2010, titled “Why Obamanomics Has Failed” Meltzer wrote about how uncertainty about future taxes and regulations was the biggest enemy facing future economic growth. He goes on to say that the administration’s stimulus program failed. Two overreaching reasons explain the failure of Obamanomics.

    • First, administration economists and their outside supporters neglected the longer-term costs and consequences of their actions.

    • Second, the administration and Congress have through their deeds and words heightened uncertainty about the economic future.

    Meltzer said most of the earlier spending was a very short-term response to long-term problems. Part of the money financed temporary tax cuts, this was a mistake because it ignores the role of expectations in the economy. Unless tax cuts are expected to last, consumers save the proceeds and pay down debt. Another large part of the stimulus went to relieve state and local governments of their budget deficits. Transferring a deficit from the state to the federal government changes very little. Some teachers and police got an additional year of employment, but their gain is temporary. Any benefits to them must be balanced against the negative effect of the increased public debt and the temporary nature of the transfer.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Soaring National Debt

    This seems to coincide with what Peter Schiff says, printing money is to the economy what taking drugs is to a drug addict. In the short term, it makes the economy feel good, but in the long run, it is much worse off. What was once the “long-run” or “distant future” may be getting very near. Soon the dollar and the American economy will be nearly dead. I recently reviewed a book I read years ago, in his book “A Time For Action” written in 1980 William Simon, a former Secretary of the Treasury tells how he was “frightened and angry”.  In short, he was sounding the trumpet about how he saw the country was heading down the wrong path. Looking back, it is hard to imagine how we have made it this long without addressing the concerns that Simon wrote about so many years ago. Back then it was about billions of dollars of debt, today it is about trillions of dollars.

    People have been forced into riskier assets because of low-interest rates. When interest rates rise, as they will at some point, the value of these risky investments will decline, and these investors will be hurt. Making things worse is the fact that interest payments on the public debt will rise increasing the budget deficit which has grown massively in past years. It is clear that prices in some sectors of the economy have been rising rapidly and major distortions exist within the marketplace. When the large “too big to fail” banks like Goldman and Bank of America report they made profits in the market on roughly 95% of trading days in 2012 we have to raise an eyebrow. This is an indication that the game is manipulated as no trader is that good.

    Returning to Allen Meltzer he penned a piece that appeared in the Wall Street Journal in May of 2014, in the article Meltzer gives his take on where the economy is headed. I highly value his opinion, not only because it is based on his long developed work and studies, but he seems to have far less motivation to lie than many of those currently involved in forming policies today. Meltzer wrote;

    The U.S. Department of Agriculture forecasts that food prices will rise as much as 3.5% this year, the biggest annual increase in three years. Over the past 12 months from March, the consumer-price index increased 1.5% before seasonal adjustment. These are warnings. Never in history has a country that financed big budget deficits with large amounts of central-bank money avoided inflation. Yet the U.S. has been printing money—and in a reckless fashion—for years.

    The Obama administration has run huge budget deficits every year, which, together with the Bush administration, has amounted to $6.7 trillion from 2006 to 2013. The Federal Reserve financed almost $3 trillion of these deficits by purchasing Treasury bonds and notes. The Fed has also purchased massive amounts of mortgage-backed securities. Today, with more than $2.5 trillion of idle reserves on bank balance sheets, there is enormous fuel for greater inflation once lending and money growth rises

    To avoid the kind of damaging inflation the U.S. experienced in the 1970s and early ’80s, the Fed could raise interest rates, including the interest it pays banks on reserves, inducing banks to hold most of the $2.5 trillion of reserves idle. But interest rates high enough to discourage borrowing and lending would likely send the economy into another damaging recession

    Fed Chairwoman Janet Yellen recently admitted that the central bank doesn’t have a good model of inflation. It relies on the Phillips Curve, which charts what economist Alban William Phillips in the late 1950s saw as a tendency for inflation to rise when unemployment is low and to fall when unemployment is high. Two of the most successful Fed chairmen, Paul Volcker and Alan Greenspan, considered the Phillips Curve unreliable. The Fed’s forecasts of inflation ignore Milton Friedman’s dictum that “inflation is always and everywhere” a result of excessive money growth relative to the growth of real output.

    The Fed focuses far too much attention on distracting monthly and quarterly data while ignoring the longer-term effects of money growth. The country’s present dilemma originated in 2008 when the Fed properly and forcefully prevented a collapse of the payments system. But long before idle reserves reached $2.5 trillion, the Fed didn’t ask itself: What can we do by adding more reserves that banks cannot do by using their massive idle reserves? The fact that the reserves sat idle to earn one-quarter of a percent a year should have been a clear signal that banks didn’t see demand to borrow by prudent borrowers.

    The Fed’s unprecedented quantitative easing since 2008 failed to lead to a robust recovery. The unemployment rate has gradually declined, but the main reason is that workers have withdrawn from the labor force. The stock market boomed, bringing support from traders, but the rise in asset prices of equities didn’t stimulate growth by inducing investment in new capital. Investment continues to be sluggish.

    And some side effects of the Fed policies have had ugly consequences. One of the worst is that ultra-low interest rates induced retired citizens to take substantially greater risk than the bank CDs that many of them relied on in the past. Decisions of this kind end in tears. Another is the loss that bondholders cannot avoid when interest rates rise, as they have started to do.

    Accumulating data from the sluggish loan market and the weak responses of employment and investment should have alerted the Fed that the growth of reserves and the low interest rates haven’t been achieving much. Similarly, the Fed should have noticed in recent years that instead of a strong housing-market recovery, not many individuals were taking out first mortgages. Many of the sales were to real-estate speculators who financed their purchases without mortgages and are now renting the houses, planning to resell them later.

    Most of all the Fed years ago should have recognized that the country’s economic problems weren’t arising from monetary factors. Instead of keeping interest rates low to finance deficits, the Fed should have explained that costly regulation, increased health-care costs, wasteful spending and repeated threats to raise tax rates were holding back the recovery.

    Broadly speaking, the Obama administration has pursued a course the opposite of that taken by the Kennedy and Johnson administrations in the 1960s (and the Reagan administration in the 1980s). Kennedy-Johnson enacted across-the-board tax cuts: Promoting growth came first, redistribution later. By putting redistribution first and sacrificing growth, the Obama administration got neither.

    Ironically, despite often repeated demands for increased redistribution to favor middle- and lower-income groups, the policies pursued by the Obama administration and supported by the Federal Reserve have accomplished the opposite.

    When the president campaigns in the midterm election, he will talk about the relative gains by the 1%. Voters should recognize that goosing the stock market through very low interest rates, not to mention the subsidies and handouts to cronies, have contributed to that result. We are now left with the overhang. Inflation is in our future. Food prices are leading off, as they did in the mid-1960s before the “stagflation” of the 1970s. Other prices will follow.

    The point of this post is to clarify that just because we have muddled along putting band-aids on our economy does not mean that we have accomplished a great deal. The Trump economy has been a continuation of deficit spending. We have postponed the day of reckoning but most likely made it far worse. Allen Meltzer was a true old school economist that understood this. The time the Federal Reserve has bought for the country to come to terms with its many problems has been squandered at a great cost. While many people claim the American economy was great before covid-19 hit, others like me who work on Main Street beg to differ. For years, an ugly reality has been masked by easy money and deficit spending. While it is difficult to time when our false economy will finally give up the ghost, it is clear this will all end badly.

    *  *  *

    This has become a two-part article because of its length. The second part which focuses on where all the is likely to lead will be published soon. 


    Tyler Durden

    Fri, 04/24/2020 – 19:55

  • Goldman CEO David "DJ D-Sol" Solomon Will Appear In Upcoming Season Of "Billions"
    Goldman CEO David “DJ D-Sol” Solomon Will Appear In Upcoming Season Of “Billions”

    Goldman CEO David Solomon was called a Wall Street “trendsetter” for embracing his favorite hobby, DJing under the stagename “DJ D-Sol.”

    Now, Solomon has once again found himself a step ahead of the curve: While millions of Americans open LetGo accounts, sign up for ride-share apps amid a desperate scramble to compensate for hours/wages lost during the shutdown, Solomon is taking up another another side-hustle, too.

    The longtime Goldman executive, whose bank recently settled the 1MDB case with the DoJ in what some might all a ‘sweetheart’ deal, will make a cameo appearance during the upcoming season of the Showtime hit “Billions”, a taught, sexy corporate thriller about a hero hedge fund manager’s unsolicited oppression at the hands of a federal prosecutor/pisspig.

    The Goldman Sachs CEO filmed a guest appearance for the latest season of “Billions” – the Showtime series chronicling fictional hedge fund outlaw Bobby Axelrod that’s drawn a cult viewership in the real industry. Solomon was roped into the gig at the end of last year and shot his cameo, playing himself, in early March.

    It’s another way the 58-year-old is striking an unusually public persona atop the historically staid investment bank. Predecessors for generations have tried to separate themselves from Wall Street’s flashier impulses. Solomon, in contrast, is famous for his side-gigs as DJ D-Sol, finding himself at a ritzy Super Bowl party in February on a lineup alongside the Black Eyed Peas, Marshmello, and the rapper DaBaby.

    “Billions” is known for its Wall Street cameos, including the likes of Omeed Malik, Marc Lasry and Mark Cuban. The next season premieres in May. Showtime wouldn’t confirm or deny Solomon’s part. And in showbiz, there’s always a chance he might not make the final cut.

    Solomon has a relatively low-stress role for his first turn in front of the camera: he will be playing a fictionalized version of himself. But given Solomon’s relatively low public profile relative to his successor, we can’t help but wonder if the producers tried to phone in a favor with the former ‘most powerful man on Wall Street’.

    We’d imagine Lloyd was probably too busy hanging out on David Geffen’s yacht to give a shit.


    Tyler Durden

    Fri, 04/24/2020 – 19:35

  • 6 Obnoxious Spending Habits Of The 'Sheltering In Place' Rich & Famous
    6 Obnoxious Spending Habits Of The ‘Sheltering In Place’ Rich & Famous

    Authored by Josh Owens via SafeHaven.com,

    In the American economic shutdown, the poor are suffering loss of jobs because they’re not benefitting from wealthy spending sprees amid COVID-19, while the rich… well, they’re just on an extended vacation. 

    Celebrities are making fools of themselves as they try to play the everyman, and the non-celebrity wealthy are obnoxiously bingeing on things that will make the not-so-wealthy cringe at a time when hard-working people are wondering how much longer they can hold out. 

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    They don’t necessarily want hand-outs, and there’s no place in their world for sushi-to-go that costs nearly as much as rent, nor do they have the option of buying their own private island to wait it out.

    Here’s the SafeHaven.com list of top wealthy buys on their COVID-19 vacations:

    #1 Private Chefs for an Expensive One-Off Meal

    The wealthy are under quarantine like everybody else, but it seems they’ve realized they are not cut for cooking, even if their long-lost inner baker is calling them. 

    During the pandemic, inquiries to hire in-house chefs have surged and several new companies have emerged as a result across New York City and California, connecting prospective clients with private, recently unemployed, home chefs.

    For instance, the private cooking company the Culinistas charges as much as $250 a meal, not including the cost of groceries. The chefs procure the necessary groceries and bring them to cook in the client’s kitchen, and they clean up afterwards, too. 

    #2 We’re All In Food Delivery Together (Not Really)

    “We’re all in this together,” many marketers and celebrities are telling on TV. But it is clear that we are “togethering” in a different way. Since the start of the pandemic, food delivery services and apps are experiencing a surge in demand, but the super-rich are doing it differently.

    Those quarantined are reporting weeks-long waits on Instacart, Shipt and other leading platforms as demand is far outpacing supply. But for the wealthy, the wait is much shorter. That’s primarily because they use special grocery delivery services that cater specifically to the rich. 

    For instance, with orders of $275 or more, Regalis Foods will throw in a free ounce of caviar. The company, which catered upscale restaurants before the pandemic, is now delivering to peoples’ homes, and it’s not just when you run out of flour or toilet paper: They’ll even deliver live king crab for $395.

    Sushi eatery Masa, one of the priciest restaurants in the country, which was closed down in wake of the COVID-19 pandemic, has begun selling takeout meals for the price of $800. Only 20 box-sets are available per week.

    The price appears to be a bargain, as the restaurant explained that it box feeds up to four people, making it about $200 per person, compared to the regular price which runs for $595 per person.

    #3 Can’t Travel Safely? Book An Entire Hotel/Motel

    Vacation rental platforms have seen the majority of their bookings canceled in a trend that has already been dubbed “AirBnB Apocalypse”. Several cities in the US and Canada have also  banned short-term rentals. However, there are few lucky hosts who have managed to lure in the wealthy by renting out their entire complex. 

    While overall reservations have dropped between 50% and 60% a week since the outbreak, reservations in more remote areas have still been consistent.

    CNN Travel reported that wealthy families are booking out entire hotels to wait out the quarantine. One of them is the Blantyre Country Resort, available for a small group or a single family for $38,000 a day. Several other hotels and inns across the country are offering unique packages for families. 

    #4 Private Islands, Why Not?

    In the last two months, upscale real estate agencies have been reporting a massive increase in inquiries for private islands for sale or rent in the Caribbean.  

    One agency reported receiving a lot of “desperate” inquiries from people on yachts, who after being “stranded” offshore for weeks, are circling islands “trying to find a safe place to go and are willing to pay a premium”. 

    #5 Survival Condos for Wealthy 

    The rich are literally hunkering down.

    Bunker and bomb shelter manufacturers have seen business increase fourfold compared to the same period last year. U.S.-based bunker maker Survival Condo offers several models and the unit prices range from around $500,000 to $2.4 million and include facilities such as indoor pools, gyms and even rock climbing walls.

    #6 The Travel Bag You Simply Must Have

    Hand sanitizer is in short supply. People are piling toilet paper even if they aren’t sure why. And every household should have an air purifier. But hunkering down and isolation is nothing without the ultimate survival bag. 

    Anyone with an extra $5000 can now bug out in style. Emergency kit maker Preppi, whose sales increased 5,000% last month, is offering a bag that includes a satellite phone, night vision glasses, sleeping bags…and a Caviar Cooler Case and serving set. The basic model costs only $445.

    For a more sober take, the Centers for Disease Control and Prevention (CDC) recommends having at least one gallon of water per person per day, and a three-day supply of food–no caviar necessary. 

    Earlier this week, the CDC warned that the novel coronavirus could have a second wave – which could be even more catastrophic than the last. According to historians, the 1918 pandemic also came in two waves. The first wave hits the poor, the second wave hits the rich, according to the academic research


    Tyler Durden

    Fri, 04/24/2020 – 19:15

  • The Data Is In… Stop The Panic & End The Total Isolation
    The Data Is In… Stop The Panic & End The Total Isolation

    Authored by Scott Atlas, M.D., op-ed via The Hill,

    The tragedy of the COVID-19 pandemic appears to be entering the containment phase. Tens of thousands of Americans have died, and Americans are now desperate for sensible policymakers who have the courage to ignore the panic and rely on facts. Leaders must examine accumulated data to see what has actually happened, rather than keep emphasizing hypothetical projections; combine that empirical evidence with fundamental principles of biology established for decades; and then thoughtfully restore the country to function.

    Five key facts are being ignored by those calling for continuing the near-total lockdown.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Fact 1: The overwhelming majority of people do not have any significant risk of dying from COVID-19.

    The recent Stanford University antibody study now estimates that the fatality rate if infected is likely 0.1 to 0.2 percent, a risk far lower than previous World Health Organization estimates that were 20 to 30 times higher and that motivated isolation policies.  

    In New York City, an epicenter of the pandemic with more than one-third of all U.S. deaths, the rate of death for people 18 to 45 years old is 0.01 percent, or 11 per 100,000 in the population. On the other hand, people aged 75 and over have a death rate 80 times that. For people under 18 years old, the rate of death is zero per 100,000. 

    Of all fatal cases in New York state, two-thirds were in patients over 70 years of age; more than 95 percent were over 50 years of age; and about 90 percent of all fatal cases had an underlying illness. Of 6,570 confirmed COVID-19 deaths fully investigated for underlying conditions to date, 6,520, or 99.2 percent, had an underlying illness. If you do not already have an underlying chronic condition, your chances of dying are small, regardless of age. And young adults and children in normal health have almost no risk of any serious illness from COVID-19.

    Fact 2: Protecting older, at-risk people eliminates hospital overcrowding.

    We can learn about hospital utilization from data from New York City, the hotbed of COVID-19 with more than 34,600 hospitalizations to date. For those under 18 years of age, hospitalization from the virus is 0.01 percent per 100,000 people; for those 18 to 44 years old, hospitalization is 0.1 percent per 100,000. Even for people ages 65 to 74, only 1.7 percent were hospitalized. Of 4,103 confirmed COVID-19 patients with symptoms bad enough to seek medical care, Dr. Leora Horwitz of NYU Medical Center concluded “age is far and away the strongest risk factor for hospitalization.” Even early WHO reports noted that 80 percent of all cases were mild, and more recent studies show a far more widespread rate of infection and lower rate of serious illness. Half of all people testing positive for infection have no symptoms at all. The vast majority of younger, otherwise healthy people do not need significant medical care if they catch this infection.

    Fact 3: Vital population immunity is prevented by total isolation policies, prolonging the problem.

    We know from decades of medical science that infection itself allows people to generate an immune response — antibodies — so that the infection is controlled throughout the population by “herd immunity.” Indeed, that is the main purpose of widespread immunization in other viral diseases — to assist with population immunity. In this virus, we know that medical care is not even necessary for the vast majority of people who are infected. It is so mild that half of infected people are asymptomatic, shown in early data from the Diamond Princess ship, and then in Iceland and Italy. That has been falsely portrayed as a problem requiring mass isolation. In fact, infected people without severe illness are the immediately available vehicle for establishing widespread immunity. By transmitting the virus to others in the low-risk group who then generate antibodies, they block the network of pathways toward the most vulnerable people, ultimately ending the threat. Extending whole-population isolation would directly prevent that widespread immunity from developing.

    Fact 4: People are dying because other medical care is not getting done due to hypothetical projections.

    Critical health care for millions of Americans is being ignored and people are dying to accommodate “potential” COVID-19 patients and for fear of spreading the disease. Most states and many hospitals abruptly stopped “nonessential” procedures and surgery. That prevented diagnoses of life-threatening diseases, like cancer screening, biopsies of tumors now undiscovered and potentially deadly brain aneurysms. Treatments, including emergency care, for the most serious illnesses were also missed. Cancer patients deferred chemotherapy. An estimated 80 percent of brain surgery cases were skipped. Acute stroke and heart attack patients missed their only chances for treatment, some dying and many now facing permanent disability.

    Fact 5: We have a clearly defined population at risk who can be protected with targeted measures.

    The overwhelming evidence all over the world consistently shows that a clearly defined group — older people and others with underlying conditions — is more likely to have a serious illness requiring hospitalization and more likely to die from COVID-19. Knowing that, it is a commonsense, achievable goal to target isolation policy to that group, including strictly monitoring those who interact with them. Nursing home residents, the highest risk, should be the most straightforward to systematically protect from infected people, given that they already live in confined places with highly restricted entry.

    The appropriate policy, based on fundamental biology and the evidence already in hand, is to institute a more focused strategy like some outlined in the first place: 

    • Strictly protect the known vulnerable,

    • self-isolate the mildly sick, and 

    • open most workplaces and small businesses with some prudent large-group precautions. 

    This would allow the essential socializing to generate immunity among those with minimal risk of serious consequence, while saving lives, preventing overcrowding of hospitals and limiting the enormous harms compounded by continued total isolation. Let’s stop underemphasizing empirical evidence while instead doubling down on hypothetical models. Facts matter.

    *  *  *

    Scott W. Atlas, MD, is the David and Joan Traitel Senior Fellow at Stanford University’s Hoover Institution and the former chief of neuroradiology at Stanford University Medical Center.


    Tyler Durden

    Fri, 04/24/2020 – 18:55

Digest powered by RSS Digest

Today’s News 24th April 2020

  • COVID-Chaos Triggers Record Losses For Swiss National Bank 
    COVID-Chaos Triggers Record Losses For Swiss National Bank 

    In the first quarter of 2020, the hedge fund known as the Swiss National Bank (SNB) suffered its worst quarterly loss in over a century. The central bank posted a record loss of 38.2 billion Swiss francs (or about $39.34 billion) for the quarter on Thursday morning. It said the coronavirus outbreak “seriously impacted financial markets.” 

    The SNB recorded a loss of 31.9 billion francs ($32.69 billion) from its equity portfolio while suffering an exchange rate-related loss of 17.1 billion francs ($17.52 billion) as the increase in the franc reduced the value of its foreign stocks and bonds.

    “The first quarter of 2020 was dominated by the global spread of coronavirus. The measures taken to contain the pandemic seriously impacted the financial markets from mid-quarter onwards, and accordingly also the SNB’s result,” SNB wrote in a press release. 

    Reuters said the loss was the largest decline in SNB’s history, dating back to when it was founded in 1907. UBS economists were projecting a loss of around 30 billion francs ($30.74 billion).

    As market panic unfolded in the latter half of the first quarter, SNB’s losses were countered by an increase in the value of its gold holdings, which rose in value 2.8 billion francs ($2.87 billion). 

    SNB shares have clawed back some losses after it was nearly halved in the latest market rout. 

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    “The scale of the adverse economic impact of the COVID-19 crisis is still difficult to assess and we would caution that we may also see further reserve build and impairments in the coming quarters,” the SNB warned.

    “We are well prepared to continue to serve our clients and we believe we can maintain a resilient financial performance through this crisis.”

    SNB’s 800 billion francs ($820 billion) portfolio makes it one of the largest institutional investors in the world. We noted in November, the central bank owned a record amount of US stocks, including Facebook, Apple, Netflix, and Google

    SNB’s Form 13F filing for the fourth quarter of 2019 also showed it was a seller as markets ripped to new highs before the virus pandemic. 

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    And with global central banks printing trillions in stimulus last month, with trillions more expected this month, we suspect the SNB has become a buyer of stocks once more… 


    Tyler Durden

    Fri, 04/24/2020 – 02:35

  • Iran's Ayatollahs Will Struggle To Survive The Oil Slump
    Iran’s Ayatollahs Will Struggle To Survive The Oil Slump

    Authored by Con Coughlin via The Gatestone Institute,

    At a time when Iran’s Islamic regime is already facing unprecedented pressure over its handling of the coronavirus outbreak, as well as its disastrous handling of the economy, the global slump in oil prices could well prove to be the final straw for the ayatollahs.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Even before this week’s dramatic collapse in global oil prices, which saw the key gauge of U.S. crude prices, the West Texas Intermediate benchmark, tumble into negative territory for the first time in history, the mullahs were already under intense pressure over their catastrophic running of the country during their four decades in power.

    A combination of the regime’s clumsy attempts to cover up the true extent of the coronavirus outbreak in Iran, combined with the disastrous impact the US sanctions are having on the Iranian economy, have resulted in the regime facing the most sustained period of domestic dissatisfaction since the 1979 revolution.

    With the collapse in the global oil market, the pressure on the ayatollahs is set to increase even further as they risk losing a vital income stream at a time when the country’s economy is already on its knees.

    According to recent estimates by the International Monetary Fund (IMF), Iran needs global oil prices to reach the highly unlikely benchmark of $195 a barrel just in order to meet its budget requirements for 2020.

    With current predictions suggesting oil prices are likely to remain around the $19 a barrel mark, the ayatollahs are facing the prospect of an economic Armageddon: the oil slump means there is little prospect of a revival in the country’s economic fortunes for the foreseeable future.

    With inflation running at 35%, and the country facing widespread unemployment, the ayatollahs have become increasingly dependent on the country’s oil revenues to keep the economy functioning. Their ability to generate revenue from oil sales, though, has already been severely affected by the impact of US sanctions, with Iranian oil exports declining from their pre-sanctions level of two million barrels of oil per day to around 300,000 — a decline of more than 80%. Now, following this week’s slump, even that modest amount is under threat.

    The scale of Iran’s deepening economic crisis is reflected in the regime’s recent decision to seek $5 billion in emergency funding from the IMF, its first request for outside help since the 1979 revolution.

    Iranian President Hassan Rouhani has tried to put a brave face on the latest setback to hit the regime, claiming that Iran is unlikely to suffer as much as other countries from the oil price drop because it is less reliant than others on crude exports.

    If that were truly the case, then Tehran would not be asking the IMF for a bailout, and Mr Rouhani, together with Javad Zarif, Iran’s Foreign Minister, would not be begging Washington to remove sanctions.

    The truth of the matter is, for all the regime’s attempts to claim it has everything under control, that the country is teetering on the brink of collapse, and the ayatollahs are fast running out of options to save themselves.

    One indication of the growing disconnect between the regime and ordinary Iranians is the claim by the Islamic Revolutionary Guard Corps (IRGC) that it has successfully launched a military satellite into orbit for the first time, an undertaking that seems completely inappropriate for a country teetering on the brink of bankruptcy.

    In times of crisis, the regime has often resorted to stirring up tensions in the Gulf, and elsewhere in the Middle East, as a means of increasing pressure on the US and its allies. To that end, Iran’s IRGC have been accused of conducting a number of confrontational operations in the Gulf this month, including the temporary seizure of a Chinese tanker in the Strait of Hormuz, which proved to be deeply embarrassing for Tehran, as China is one of the few countries still buying its oil.

    There has also been an increase in Revolutionary Guard patrol boats harassing US warships operating in the Gulf, a development which has prompted U.S. President Donald Trump to order the US Navy “to shoot down and destroy” Iranian gunboats if they continue with their provocative actions.

    The ayatollahs may still believe they can survive the current crisis, but the reality is that their prospects of overcoming all the obstacles they face, from coronavirus to the collapse of the Iranian economy, become more challenging by the day.


    Tyler Durden

    Fri, 04/24/2020 – 02:00

  • Which States Are Most At Risk From The Economic "Reopening"
    Which States Are Most At Risk From The Economic “Reopening”

    Since the conventionally accepted explanation for the artificially induced shutdown of the US economy was to minimize human interaction in hopes of dramatically reducing the R0 of the coronavirus pandemic, and force social distancing during the period of potential covid incubation to prevent its spread among the population, it stands to reason that states in the US that are most at risk from a second wave of infections once the economy reopens, are those where a high level of physical contact makes social distancing difficult if not impossible.

    To quantify said risk, Deutsche Bank has analyzed US states from the perspective of contact intensive occupations, and broken down the results in terms of low to high “contact” states. The results, shown in the map below, demonstrate which states have the highest risk of a new breakout (in black) and where an early reopening (light gray) may not have adverse consequences.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Putting the above map in context, here is a separate analysis from the The Institute for Health Metrics and Evaluation at the University of Washington, which predicts the “ideal dates” to relax social distancing.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Those worried about a second, more powerful infection wave – a la the Spanish Flu – will want to focus on the states that are dark in the first map and light in the second – that’s where the risk will be highest.


    Tyler Durden

    Fri, 04/24/2020 – 00:17

  • Escobar: What Did U.S. Intel Really Know About The "Chinese" Virus?
    Escobar: What Did U.S. Intel Really Know About The “Chinese” Virus?

    Authored by Pepe Escobar via The Saker blog,

    Hybrid War 2.0 on China, a bipartisan U.S. operation, is already reaching fever pitch.

    Its 24/7 full spectrum infowar arm blames China for everything coronavirus-related – doubling as a diversionist tactic against any informed criticism of woeful American unpreparedness.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Hysteria predictably reigns. And this is just the beginning.

    A deluge of lawsuits is imminent – such as the one in the Southern District of Florida entered by Berman Law Group (linked to the Democrats) and Lucas-Compton (linked to the Republicans). In a nutshell: China has to shell out tons of cash. To the tune of at least $1.2 trillion, which happens to be – by surrealist irony – the amount of U.S. Treasury bills held by Beijing, all the way to $20 trillion, claimed by a lawsuit in Texas.

    The prosecution’s case, as Scott Ritter memorably reminded us, is straight out of Monty Python. It works exactly like this:

    “If she weighs the same as a duck…

    …she’s made of wood!”

    “And therefore…”

    “A witch!!!!!”

    In Hybrid War 2.0 terms, the current CIA-style narrative translates as evil China never telling us, the civilized West, there was a terrible new virus around. If they did, we would have had time to prepare.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    And yet they lied and cheated – by the way, trademark CIA traits, according to Mike “We Lie, We Cheat, We Steal” Pompeo himself. And they hid everything. And they censored the truth. So they wanted to infect us all. Now they have to pay for all the economic and financial damage we are suffering, and for all our dead people. It’s China’s fault.

    All this sound and fury forces us to refocus back to late 2019 to check out what U.S. intel really knew then about what would later be identified as Sars-Cov-2.

    “No such product exists”

    The gold standard remains the ABC News report according to which intel collected in November 2019 by the National Center for Medical Intelligence (NCMI), a subsidiary of the Pentagon’s Defense Intelligence Agency (DIA), was already warning about a new virulent contagion getting out of hand in Wuhan, based on “detailed analysis of intercepted communications and satellite imagery”.

    An unnamed source told ABC, “analysts concluded it could be a cataclysmic event”, adding the intel was “briefed multiple times” to the DIA, the Pentagon’s Joint Chiefs of Staff, and even the White House.

    No wonder the Pentagon was forced to issue the proverbial denial – in Pentagonese, via one Col. R. Shane Day, the director of the DIA’s NCMI:

    “In the interest of transparency during this current public health crisis, we can confirm that media reporting about the existence/release of a National Center for Medical Intelligence Coronavirus-related product/assessment in November of 2019 is not correct. No such NCMI product exists.”

    Well, if such “product” existed, Pentagon head and former Raytheon lobbyist Mark Esper would be very much in the loop. He was duly questioned about it by ABC’s George Stephanopoulos.

    Question: “Did the Pentagon receive an intelligence assessment on COVID in China last November from the National Center for Medical Intelligence of DIA?”

    Esper: “Oh, I can’t recall, George,” (…) “But, we have many people who watch this closely.”

    Question: “This assessment was done in November, and it was briefed to the NSC in early December to assess the impact on military readiness, which, of course, would make it important to you, and the possible spread in the United States. So, you would have known if there was a brief to the National Security Council in December, wouldn’t you?”

    Esper: “Yes (…) “I’m not aware of that.”

    So “no such product exists” then? Is it a fake? Is it a Deep State/CIA concoction to trap Trump? Or are the usual suspects lying, trademark CIA style?

    Let’s review some essential background.

    On November 12, a married couple from Inner Mongolia was admitted to a Beijing hospital, seeking treatment for pneumonic plague.

    The Chinese CDC, on Weibo – the Chinese Twitter – told public opinion that the chances of this being a new plague were “extremely low.” The couple was quarantined.

    Four days later, a third case of pneumonic plague was identified: a man also from Inner Mongolia, not related to the couple. Twenty-eight people who were in close contact with the man were quarantined. None had plague symptoms. Pneumonic plague has symptoms of respiratory failure similar to pneumonia.

    Even though the CDC repeated, “there is no need to worry about the risk of infection”, of course there was plenty of skepticism. The CDC may have publicly confirmed on November 12 these cases of pneumonic plague. But then Li Jifeng, a doctor at Chaoyang Hospital where the trio from Inner Mongolia was receiving treatment, published, privately, on WeChat, that they were first transported to Beijing actually on November 3.

    The key point of Li Jinfeng’s post – later removed by censors – was when she wrote, “I am very familiar with diagnosing and treating the majority of respiratory diseases (…) But this time, I kept on looking but could not figure out what pathogen caused the pneumonia. I only thought it was a rare condition and did not get much information other than the patients’ history.”

    Even if that was the case, the key point is that the three Inner Mongolian cases seem to have been caused by a detectable bacteria. Covid-19 is caused by the Sars-Cov-2 virus, not a bacteria. The first Sars-Covid-2 case was only detected in Wuhan in mid to late December. And it was only last month that Chinese scientists were able to positively trace back the first real case of Sars-Cov-2 to November 17 – a few days after the Inner Mongolian trio.

    Knowing exactly where to look

    It’s out of the question that U.S. intel, in this case the NCMI, was unaware of these developments in China, considering CIA spying and the fact these discussions were in the open on Weibo and WeChat. So if the NCMI “product” is not a fake and really exists, it only found evidence, still in November, of some vague instances of pneumonic plague.

    Thus the warning – to the DIA, the Pentagon, the National Security Council, and even the White House – was about that. It could not possibly have been about coronavirus.

    The burning question is inevitable: how could the NCMI possibly know all about a viral pandemic, still in November, when Chinese doctors positively identified the first cases of a new type of pneumonia only on December 26?

    Add to it the intriguing question of why the NCMI was so interested in this particular flu season in China in the first place – from plague cases treated in Beijing to the first signs of a “mysterious pneumonia outbreak” in Wuhan.

    There may have been subtle hints of slightly increased activity at clinics in Wuhan in late November and early December. But at the time nobody – Chinese doctors, the government, not to mention U.S. intel – could have possibly known what was really happening.

    China could not be “covering up” what was only identified as a new disease on December 30, duly communicated to the WHO. Then, on January 3, the head of the American CDC, Robert Redfield, called the top Chinese CDC official. Chinese doctors sequenced the virus. And only on January 8 it was determined this was Sars-Cov-2 – which provokes Covid-19.

    This chain of events reopens, once again, a mighty Pandora’s box. We have the quite timely Event 201; the cozy relationship between the Bill and Melinda Gates Foundation and the WHO, as well as the Word Economic Forum and the Johns Hopkins galaxy in Baltimore, including the Bloomberg School of Public Health; the ID2020 digital ID/vaccine combo; Dark Winter – which simulated a smallpox bio-attack on the U.S., before the 2001 anthrax attack being blamed on Iraq; U.S. Senators dumping stocks after a CDC briefing; more than 1,300 CEOs abandoning their cushy perches in 2019, “forecasting” total market collapse; the Fed pouring helicopter money already in September 2019 – as part of QE4.

    And then, validating the ABC News report, Israel steps in. Israeli intel confirms U.S. intel did in fact warn them in November about a potentially catastrophic pandemic in Wuhan (once again: how could they possibly know that on the second week of November, so early in the game?) And NATO allies were warned – in November – as well.

    The bottom line is explosive: the Trump administration as well as the CDC had an advance warning of no less than four months – from November to March – to be properly prepared for Covid-19 hitting the U.S. And they did nothing. The whole “China is a witch!” case is debunked.

    Moreover, the Israeli disclosure supports what’s nothing less than extraordinary: U.S. intel already knew about Sars-Cov-2 roughly one month before the first confirmed cases detected by doctors in a Wuhan hospital. Talk about divine intervention.

    That could only have happened if U.S. intel knew, for sure, about a previous chain of events that would necessarily lead to the “mysterious outbreak” in Wuhan. And not only that: they knew exactly where to look. Not in Inner Mongolia, not in Beijing, not in Guangdong province.

    It’s never enough to repeat the question in full: how could U.S. intel have known about a contagion one month before Chinese doctors detected an unknown virus?

    Mike “We Lie, We Cheat, We Steal” Pompeo may have given away the game when he said, on the record, that Covid-19 was a “live exercise”. Adding to the ABC News and Israeli reports, the only possible, logical conclusion is that the Pentagon – and the CIA – knew ahead of time a pandemic would be inevitable.

    That’s the smokin’ gun. And now the full weight of the United States government is covering all bases by proactively, and retroactively, blaming China.


    Tyler Durden

    Thu, 04/23/2020 – 23:45

  • SoCal Nurses Who Were Suspended For Refusing To Work Without N95 Masks Have Been Reinstated
    SoCal Nurses Who Were Suspended For Refusing To Work Without N95 Masks Have Been Reinstated

    Roughly 10 nurses who were suspended from their job because they demanded protective respirator masks are returning to work this week, according to the National Nurses United union. The nurses, who work at Providence St. John’s Health Center, had refused to treat coronavirus patients without N95 masks. 

    Along with being reinstated to work, their hospital, located in Southern California, is also supplying N95 masks to nurses working with infected patients, according to the NY Post

    It was reported last week that these nurses were place on leave after telling their managers they would not go into the rooms of patients with coronavirus without the protection.

    Providence had said last week that they had a system set up to disinfect and reprocess the masks. 

    Not surprisingly, the hospital was unavailable for comment. 

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    N95 masks filter out about 95% of all airborne particles, including ones that are too tiny to be blocked by other masks and face coverings. At the time, hospital administrators said they weren’t necessary and didn’t provide them. 

    Which is funny, because early on in this crisis, the U.S. government also told people that N95 masks would not help them at all, while at the same time urging people to donate them to healthcare workers.

    Now, in many places across the U.S., facemasks are becoming mandatory, as we wrote about a week ago. 

    Governors of Connecticut, Maryland, New York, and Pennsylvania have issued orders or recommendations that residents wear face masks while out in public, reported Reuters.

    “If you are going to be in public and you cannot maintain social distancing, then have a mask, and put that mask on,” said New York Governor Andrew Cuomo.


    Tyler Durden

    Thu, 04/23/2020 – 23:25

  • JCPenney Prepares To File For Bankruptcy
    JCPenney Prepares To File For Bankruptcy

    It’s finally here. After a decade of management turnover, near misses, last minute rescues, and one valeant (sic) if disastrous attempt at an activist turnaround, one of the most iconic US retailers and mall anchors, J.C. Penney, is preparping to file for bankruptcy.

    According to the Journal, J.C. Penney is in advanced talks for bankruptcy funding with a group of lenders, a sign the troubled retailer about to make a visit to 1 Bowling Green. JCP is in discussions with existing lenders including Wells Fargo, Bank of America and JPMorgan for a debtor-in-possession loan that would keep the department-store chain’s operations funded during a court-supervised bankruptcy, according to people familiar with the matter.

    The DIP loan would be roughly $800 million to $1 billion, with some of that money potentially including existing debt, and priming all the other unsecured creditors who will end up with a chunk of the post-petition equity, assuming of course it is not a Chapter 7. 

    The Journal sources said that a bankruptcy filing could take place within the next few weeks, and certainly before May 15 as JCP entered into a 30-day grace period after missing an interest payment due to bondholders on April 15. It is possible creditors enter into a forbearance agreement if the company needs additional time to iron out negotiations before filing, but the endgame is clear.

    Along with Sears, J.C. Penney was one of the dominant department-store chains of the last century. But the 118-year-old company has been losing money for years. With its mall-based stores closed and unlikely to reopen any time soon, the company has been forced to put aside its latest turnaround strategy and face its creditors at the negotiating table.

    While department stores were struggling before the pandemic, the coronavirus quarantine forced the closure of most U.S. stores. The result has been a deluge of imminent bankruptcy filings in the retail space, including that other stalwart, Neiman Marcus, which as we reported previously is planning to file for bankruptcy any day.

    Retailers are far from alone in seeing their businesses walloped by the pandemic and the collapse of business activity. Energy companies have been pummeled in recent weeks by the combination of a market downturn and plummeting oil prices, leading several to seek restructuring advice or bankruptcy protection. A total of seven U.S. oil-and-gas drillers filed for bankruptcy in the first quarter of 2020, and more are expected to do so.

    Should the shutdown of the economy last for several more months, or should a second wave of coronavirus infection strike the US, companies in all other industries are expected to follow suit.


    Tyler Durden

    Thu, 04/23/2020 – 23:17

  • COVID-19 Pandemic – Another 9/11 Moment For The West
    COVID-19 Pandemic – Another 9/11 Moment For The West

    Authored by Richard Kemp via The Gatestone Institute,

    The coronavirus pandemic is a 9/11 moment.

    Al Qaida had been at war with the West for years before the destruction of the twin towers. But it took that barbarism to galvanise its largely supine prey into action.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Now we have Covid-19. Unlike 9/11 we have seen no evidence so far that China deliberately unleashed this virus on the world. There is certainly evidence, however, that it resulted from the policies of the Chinese Communist Party and that Beijing’s habitually duplicitous and criminally irresponsible actions allowed it to spread around the globe, leading to tens of thousands of deaths that could have been avoided.

    Commentators and politicians today worry that the current situation might trigger a new cold war with China. They fail to understand that, in a similar but much more far-reaching pattern to the jihadist conflict, China has been fighting a cold war against the West for decades, while we have refused to recognise what is going on. The reality, in Beijing’s book, is that the cold war between China and the West, which began with the communist seizure of China in 1949, never ended. Despite the Sino-Soviet split and subsequent US-China rapprochement in the early 1970s, for the Chinese leadership the US was still the implacable enemy.

    Like 9/11, Covid-19 must now force the West to wake up and fight back.

    China today is by far the greatest threat to Western values, freedom, economy, industry, communications and technology. It threatens our very way of life. China’s objective is to push back against the US and become the dominant world power by 2049, a century after the creation of the People’s Republic. Dictator for life Xi Jinping has no intention of doing this through military conflict. His war is not fought on the battlefield but in the boardroom, the markets, the press, universities, cyberspace and in the darkest shadows.

    Those who argue China’s right to compete with the West in free markets and on a level playing field seem not to comprehend that Beijing has no free market and no intention of playing on a level field. The world’s leading executioner, China is an incomparably ruthless dictatorship that tortures, disappears and imprisons its people at will and controls its massive population through a techno-surveillance infrastructure that it’s busy exporting around the world to extend its political and economic control to us.

    For decades, China has been working on its three-pronged strategy:

    1. building its economy and fighting capability, including intelligence, technology, cyber and space as well as hard military power;

    2. developing global influence to exploit resources and secure control;

    3. thrusting back and dividing the US and its capitalist allies.

    China has built its economy on Western money and at Western expense, by industrial-scale theft of intellectual property and technology, copyright violation, illicit data mining, cyberwar, deceit, duplicity, enslavement and uncompromising state control of industry and commerce.

    It continues to expand its already immense influence through a Belt and Road Initiative that marches across the globe; massive investment in Africa, Asia, Europe, Australasia and north and south America; and direct aggression in the Pacific including the South China Sea (where Beijing’s artificial island programme has created one of the greatest ecological disasters in history).

    All of this is supported by a multi-million dollar propaganda operation, in President Xi’s words: “to tell China’s story well” — in other words: to advance the ideology of the CCP everywhere. This includes buying support or silence from global media outlets, threats and coercion. Just one high profile example of this influence occurred last year when the US National Basketball Association was forced to make a grovelling public apology after the Houston Rockets’ general manager tweeted in support of pro-democracy campaigners in Hong Kong.

    Although military conflict is not China’s preferred strategic instrument, Beijing has not neglected fighting capabilities, spending an estimated $230 billion annually, second only to the US. Xi has been rebuilding his forces on an unprecedented scale, with particular emphasis on a naval war with America. Planned military contingency options also include moves against Taiwan and other territories it intends to control directly. China has also now become the second biggest arms seller in the world, including to countries subject to UN sanctions such as North Korea and Iran. This month, 15 armoured vehicles were delivered to Nigeria, including VT-4 main battle tanks, already in service with the Royal Thai Army and, like most of China’s defence equipment, incorporating technology stolen from the West. China’s arms exports are not motivated primarily by revenue generation, but as a means to impose influence and control, create proxies and challenge the US.

    Chinese investment penetrates every corner of the United Kingdom, giving unparalleled influence here as in so many countries. Plans to allow Chinese investment and technology into our nuclear power programme and 5G network will build vulnerability into our critical national infrastructure of an order not seen in any other Western nation. Even the BBC, which receives funding from China, has produced and promoted a propaganda video supporting Huawei, to the alarm of some of its own journalists. All this despite MI5’s repeated warnings that Chinese intelligence continues to work against British interests at home and abroad.

    The Chinese government has spent billions of dollars establishing Confucius Institutes around the world, mainly at universities. There are over 500 globally, including 29 in the UK and over 70 in the US. Ostensibly aimed at promoting Chinese culture, these bodies are used to infiltrate universities and high schools to indoctrinate students in communist ideology, as well as for espionage activities. More than 100,000 Chinese are studying in the UK. Last year, MI5 and GCHQ warned universities their research and computer systems are under threat from Chinese intelligence assets among these students. The Director of the FBI , Christopher Wray, said recently that China was aggressively exploiting US academic openness to steal technology, using “campus proxies” and establishing “institutes on our campuses.” More broadly he concluded that “no country poses a greater threat to the US than Communist China.”

    A senior CCP official unguardedly admitted the Confucius Institutes are “an important part of China’s overseas propaganda set-up”. Increasingly reliant on foreign funding, Western universities have been pressured by Chinese officials to censor debate on politically explosive issues such as Hong Kong, Taiwan, Tibet and Tiananmen Square.

    Few in the West fully recognise the threat to our own economies, security and liberty. Many who do refuse to speak out for four reasons. First, fear of coming into China’s crosshairs, provoking economic harm or character assassination. Second, fear of accusations of racism, a concern readily exploited by the Chinese state whose own egregious racism is only too obvious. Third, belief that our liberal values can change those that oppose us. The hope that Chinese exposure to free trade, including entry into the WTO in 2001, would have this effect has proven woefully misguided and served only to strengthen Beijing’s oppressive regime. Fourth, many political leaders, businessmen, academics and journalists have been bought and paid for by Beijing whether by financial incentive or blackmail.

    How can the West fight back?

    Although still militarily and economically inferior to the US, China is a formidable and growing economic power, interwoven with Western economies to an unprecedented degree.

    We must begin to divest from and sanction China, repatriate and use alternative sources of manufacturing and technology, restrict capital investment there and curb Chinese investment here, especially in our infrastructure.

    We must re-invigorate and develop our own technology, much long abandoned to the Chinese juggernaut.

    We must enforce the norms of international trade and act vigorously to prevent and penalise China’s orgy of industrial theft that has gone largely unchallenged for decades.

    We must push back globally against Beijing’s imperialism and propaganda wherever it occurs. We must also prepare for military conflict, with an emphasis on deterring Chinese aggression.

    America will have to lead the fightback as it did previously in the cold war, but success will require Europe and our allies around the world to stand with them for the long term. This is not a party political issue, but must become a fundamental element of enduring Western grand strategies. This is the task of decades and will be high-risk and costly. The alternative is to remain on the hook and in hock to the Chinese communist state and let future generations suffer the incalculable consequences of our continued purblind inaction.


    Tyler Durden

    Thu, 04/23/2020 – 23:05

  • "ISIS Has Nothing Over Saudi Arabia": Kingdom Reaches 800 Beheadings Under Salman
    “ISIS Has Nothing Over Saudi Arabia”: Kingdom Reaches 800 Beheadings Under Salman

    Another grim milestone was reached this week, but not on the COVID-19 front. Human rights monitors have recorded that Saudi Arabia has carried out its 800th execution since King Salman bin Abdulaziz (and by extension MbS) began his rule five years ago — most being in the form of the kingdom’s ‘favored’ beheadings.

    The British nonprofit Reprieve said the kingdom’s rate of execution in Saudi Arabia has doubled since 2015 when King Salman took over following the death of his half-brother, King Abdullah. Of course, as Salman’s health was reportedly increasingly fragile from the start of his rule, it’s widely believed crown prince Mohammed bin Salman (MbS) has remained the true power and day-to-day decision maker.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    King Salman attending a 2016 ‘sword dance’ ceremony, via Saudi Gazette.

    MbS was widely hailed as a ‘reformer’ – among other things promising to greatly reduce the number of annual executions, which include the ghastly methods of beheading and crucifixion. But this is nowhere near the reality.

    So much for empty talk of ‘reform’, ‘modernization’ and ‘progress’ – as Middle East Eye reports of Reprieve’s findings:

    By comparison, Saudi authorities executed 423 people between 2009 and 2014.

    Currently, there are at least 13 juvenile defendants on death row – including Ali al-Nimr, Dawood al-Marhoon and Abdullah al-Zaher – who are “at imminent risk of execution”, Reprieve and the European Saudi Organisation for Human Rights said.

    Saudi Arabia executed six young men last year who were children at the time of their alleged offences, in a mass execution of 37 people. 

    Riyadh’s concerns no doubt now lie far elsewhere regarding the prior MbS rhetoric of reform, given the kingdom is now scrambling to bring oil prices back up after the historic global price crash this week. 

    Reform vs. Reality — public beheadings as a form of political suppression: 

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    Apparently ‘Chop Chop Square’ was busy as usual even amid the more pressing crisis of the accelerating oil glut. As of only last week, Amnesty International recorded 789 executions under the king, which only days later grew to 800.

    As one Newsweek headline years ago aptly observed, “when it comes to beheadings, ISIS has nothing over Saudi Arabia.”


    Tyler Durden

    Thu, 04/23/2020 – 22:45

  • Trump: Live By The Oil, Die By The Oil
    Trump: Live By The Oil, Die By The Oil

    Authored by Tom Luongo via The Strategic Culture Foundation,

    From the very beginning I’ve been a staunch critic of President Trump’s “Energy Dominance” policy. And I was so for a myriad of reasons, but mostly because it was stupid.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Not just stupid, monumentally stupid. Breathtakingly stupid.

    And I don’t say this as someone who hates Trump without reservation. In fact, I continue to hope he will wake up one day and stop being the Donald Trump I know and be the Donald Trump he needs to be.

    I don’t have Trump Derangement Syndrome of any sort. Neither MAGApede nor Q-Tard, an Orange Man Bad cultist or NPC Soy Boy, I see Trump for what he is – a well-intentioned, if miseducated man with severe personal deficiencies which manifest themselves in occasionally brilliant but mostly disastrous behavior.

    Energy Dominance was always a misguided and Quixotic endeavor. Why? Because Trump could never turn financial engineering a shale boom into a sustainable advantage over lower-cost producers like Russia and the OPEC nations.

    The policy of blasting open the U.S. oil spigots to produce a production boom built on an endless supply of near-zero cost credit was always going to run into a wall of oversupply and not enough demand.

    The dramatic collapse of U.S. oil prices in the futures markets which saw the May contract close on April 20th at $-40.57 per barrel is the Shale Miracle hitting the fan of low demand and leaving the producers and consumers in a state which can only happen thanks to biblical levels of government intervention.

    A broken market.

    The next morning, ever needing to look like the good guy, Trump tweets out:

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    It’s clear from this statement that Trump is ready to throw more trillions at the oil industry to keep it and the millions of jobs from disappearing as he does what he always does when confronted with a real problem, doubles down on the behavior that caused it in the first place.

    Politicians, even the best ones, are ultimately vandals. They have no other tool than to reallocate scarce capital towards their ends rather than that demanded by the market.

    And the main reason why Trump was never going to win the Energy Dominance War he started was because the world doesn’t want the type and kind of oil the U.S. produces at the quantities needed to “Win!”

    Ultra-light sweet crude coming from the Bakken, Eagle Ford and Permian simply isn’t that high in demand for export. It’s of limited usage. And, in the end, if the price is right enough, offering oil for sale in ‘not-dollars’ only makes that demand curve even more elastic.

    The collapse in oil prices which Trump is desperate to stop won’t simply because Trump stands there like King Canute, arms outstretched. He and his terrible energy policy stand naked now that the tide has gone out.

    And the reason for this is simple. There is more to the world economy than money. Money is what makes the economy work but it, in and of itself, is incapable of creating wealth. All money does is act as a means to express our needs and desires at the moment of the trade.

    Trump’s vandalizing the world’s energy markets for the past three and a half years now comes back to bite him. To prop up surging U.S. production he has:

    • Supported a disastrous war against the people of Yemen

    • Repurposed U.S. troops clinging to positions in Syria while stealing their oil

    • Nearly started a shooting war with Iran…. Twice.

    • Embargoed Venezuela, stole its money, attempted a failed coup and brought even more support to President Maduro from Russia and China.

    • Spent billions pointing missiles at Russia via NATO.

    • Supported a vicious war to prevent the secession of the Donbass.

    • Delayed the construction of Nordstream 2.

    • Sowed chaos enough to set Turkey to claiming the Eastern Mediterranean while fighting a losing war in Libya.

    • Started a massive trade war with China.

    • Spent trillions throwing the U.S. budget deficit for 2020 out beyond 20% of the U.S.’s 2019 GDP.

    I could go on, but I think you get the point. None of these acts are defensible as anything other than immoral and counterproductive.

    Having antagonized literally more than three-quarters of the world with this insanity, Trump will now turn his destructive gaze on the very people he purports to serve, the American people. Saving jobs through subsidies is capital destructive. It doesn’t matter who does it, Trump, Putin, Xi or FDR.

    If Trump tariffs on imports it will only keep the cost of energy for Americans higher than it should be at a time when they need it to be as cheap as possible.

    The incentive to improve performance by these companies, shutter expensive wells, default on debt or shift capital away from the unproductive will not happen. The healthy cleansing of bankruptcy is averted. The vultures who profited on the way up will not go bankrupt because the bust is avoided and those that were prudent waiting for this moment will not be rewarded with the reins of the means of production.

    And again, we see another one-way trade for Wall St.

    All Trump will do here is entrench the very powers that he thinks he’s been fighting, destroying small businesses, nationalizing, in effect, whole swaths of the U.S. economy and setting up the day when everyone else around the world shrugs when he bark.

    Because the net effect has been to see the rise in more of the oil trade conducted in currencies other than the U.S. dollar. That trend will continue in a deflating price environment where the need to service dollar-denominated debt is soaking up the supply of dollars faster than the Fed can monetize the debt issued by the U.S. Treasury.

    The oil trade will shift from dollars. Dollars will be used to pay off debt, the world will decouple from the dollar and all those dollars currently hoarded overseas and whose demand today will be supply tomorrow will ensure the U.S. economy suffers the worst kind of depression, one of rising commodity prices, falling asset prices and falling wages.

    So, Trump will continue to be, as I put it recently, The Master of the Seen, choosing, as always, to ignore the unseen effects of propping up firms that should rightly go the way of all bad ideas, like Marxism.

    The U.S. had a grenade dropped on its budget. It looks like a nuclear bomb, but that’s only because of the continued arrogance and necessity of politicians, like Trump, needing to be ‘seen’ doing something caused far more damage than it would have if they hadn’t intervened in the first place.

    The adage, “never let a crisis go to waste,” is apropos here. Politicians use the cover of crisis to act. They have to be ‘seen’ acting rather than not. Trump is acutely aware of this because he truly can’t stand criticism.

    A man without principles, Trump acts mostly out of his need to deflect criticism and be ‘seen’ by his base as their champion.

    But no, Trump outs himself as the biggest Marxist of all time, defending the workers while robbing them of their future through the destruction of their real wealth. His policy mistakes become our real problems. And he compounded those problems by listening to the medical complex vultures about COVID-19 and now he’s trapped but everyone else will pay the price.

    He is someone without the sense or the understanding that sometimes the best thing to do is admit defeat, reverse course and put down the scepter of power. But Trump doesn’t know how to do that. He doesn’t know how to actually lead.

    Energy Dominance will turn into an Energy Albatross and it will weigh on Trump’s neck in his second term that will see him leave office reviled as the great destroyer of not only the U.S.’s wealth, but more importantly, its standing in the world.


    Tyler Durden

    Thu, 04/23/2020 – 22:25

  • Unintended Consequences: The Fed's Record Liquidity Flood Has Broken Europe's Funding Markets
    Unintended Consequences: The Fed’s Record Liquidity Flood Has Broken Europe’s Funding Markets

    Another week, another record in the Fed’s balance sheet, which as of April 22 hit an all time high $6.573 trillion, an increase of $205 billion on the week, up $2.644 trillion compared to a year ago and well on its way to $10 trillion. 

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Yet while the liquidity flood unleashed by the Fed’s balance sheet, and its expanded swap lines has calmed dollar funding markets which were paralyzed as recently as a month ago, and USD Libor dropped below 1% for the first time in a month, an unintended consequence of the Fed’s monetary flood is that it now appears to be paralyzing Europe’s interbank market.

    This can be seen in Europe’s version of Libor, 3-Month Euribor, or the rate at which banks borrow from one another, which jumped another 2.9 bps to a fresh four-year high on Thursday, of just above -0.20% even after the ECB tried to ease funding pressures by moderating collateral restrictions for financial institutions seeking to borrow from the central bank.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    A key driver behind the Euribor spike is that, in Bloomberg’s view, the Fed has helped bring down the cost of dollars to such an extent that they’re cheaper to borrow in cross-currency markets than any major currency.  As a result, opportunistic players are tapping local markets to swap into dollars, elevating domestic borrowing costs.

    Others have a more nuanced view, with Bank of America pointing out that the rise in EURIBOR to its highest level since 2016 “signals stress in the euro area’s interbank market.

    According to BofA, the surge in Euribor means that the wholesale euro unsecured borrowing rate of 18 panel banks in the EU and European Free Trade Association (EFTA) countries has increased. As the bank explains, EURIBOR fixing submissions are based on a hybrid methodology that uses transactions to the extent possible. But eligible EURIBOR volumes are low, especially for tenors above 1W.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    In February, between 48% and 66% of EURIBOR fixings were based on level 3 contributions, which are least dependent on eligible transactions.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    EURIBOR’s Governance Framework states that level 3 contributions are based on additional transactions data in the underlying interest that were excluded from level 1 and level 2 contributions, and other data from a range of markets closely related to the unsecured euro money market.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    The data should then be used through a combination of modeling techniques and/or the panel bank’s judgment. A particular model is not mandated by the administrator and panel banks should determine their contribution based on their own circumstances. This implies there is unlikely to be a one-size-fits-all model for level 3 contributions across panel banks and different markets could have varying influence over time.

    BofA then suggests that the recent stress in key markets has impacted level 3 EURIBOR submissions via other data closely related to the unsecured euro money market. One such transmission mechanism involves the increase in bank bond yields, which could have put upward pressure on EURIBOR forwards.

    It is at this point that the two narratives combine, because in picking up on Bloomberg’s story, BofA observes that the recent tightening (less negative) of the cross currency basis due to the FX swap lines established by the US Federal Reserve with central banks globally and high USD funding costs have also increased supply of, and decreased demand for, EUR-denominated bank paper swapped back into USD.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Indeed, the EUR FRA-OIS spread also increased to its highest level since 2012, which suggests the rise in bank bond yields is related to interbank stress (Chart 3). But BofA previously noted there were no liquidity concerns in the euro overnight repo market when the FRA-OIS spread first started to widen. Therefore its interpretation is that the increase in the FRA-OIS spread is driven by broad credit concerns due to developments in COVID-19 and in the oil market negatively affecting the global outlook. Furthermore, broad credit concerns may have also been reflected in the rise in non-financial CP issuance and yields (Chart 4).

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Looking ahead, BofA is optimistic and believes that the ECB’s inclusion of non-financial CPs to its asset purchasing programme (APP) and Pandemic Emergency Purchasing Programme (PEPP) could act as a strong backstop for the rise in non-financial CP yields. A rebound in global oil prices would also help. But while these measures may address the negative consequences of COVID-19, they do not address the issue of COVID-19 itself. As such, the prospect of deterioration in the COVID-19 situation remains a key upside risk for EURIBOR.

    Bloomberg is similarly optimistic, writing that some analysts view the latest ECB measures as helping, and Pictet’s Frederik Ducrozet who wrote that “it provides a backstop for the market not to be concerned about bank funding issues related to a shrinking collateral pool in case of rating downgrades.”

    Meanwhile, early signs in the futures market already suggest Euribor will ease lower within the next couple of months. One such easing will impact dollar Libor, whose spreads over swaps are expected to tighten – as indicated by futures markets – at which point three-month cross-currency basis should drift lower to erode the funding advantage for local currencies, and reduce the incentive for opportunists to bid up the cost of funds in domestic markets, in other words, the market is confident that the ECB’s massive liquidity injection will offset a similar action by the Fed, and offset the cheapness of the dollar in cross fx.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    While Euribor is soaring, US Libor appears to have gotten over its recent scare, and has been declining, falling by 2.9bps on Thursday, below 1% for the first time since the covid crisis, and driving its premium above OIS by a similar amount. As we have noted previously, some traders are even bracing for negative Libor prints as the Fed inches closer to NIRP.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Yet as the US inches to the monetary singularity of negative rates, sub-zero rates are already a reality in Japan, where the three-month euro-yen Tibor fixing dropped 6.6 bps to -0.048%, posting a negative fix for the first time ever, with Euroyen futures popping higher in response.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    With yen-OIS rates steady, Bloomberg suggests that the move was unrelated to policy expectations, and instead, overseas banks could be in the driving seat, potentially a result of the same stress that is pushing Euribor higher.

    Whatever the explanation behind this odd squeeze in European money market rates, one thing is clear: we have gotten to the point where overly aggressive intervention by one central bank immediately necessitates an equal and offsetting intervention by all other central banks, or else the entire domestic banking system of whichever bank isn’t debasing its current the fastest faces immediate peril. And another dire consequence: we may have gotten to the point where it is no longer possible to find an equilibrium funding level for global currencies, one which – by definition – exists in a world of positive rates; however when interest rates everywhere are negative (or expected to be), then all bets are off and every single day is a new struggle by the central bankers to keep the system from collapsing.


    Tyler Durden

    Thu, 04/23/2020 – 22:12

  • Nevada Brothel Causes Stir With Stimulus Request
    Nevada Brothel Causes Stir With Stimulus Request

    Authored by Jonathan Turley,

    There is an interesting controversy brewing in Nevada over stimulus money and morality.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Bella Cummins is the owner of a lawful small business who was initially refused an emergency loan under the pandemic stimulus money.

    “It was interesting… that the bank… wanted to tell me that I wasn’t going to qualify and they weren’t going to send it in.”

    The reason? Her business is a brothel.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    The CARES Act makes no distinction between moral and immoral businesses so long as they are lawful (and such a distinction in my view would challengeable). Brothels are lawful in Nevada. 

    Yet, Cummins was eventually allowed to apply for the loan but there are objections to giving stimulus money to an over-stimulating business.

    “It isn’t about them coming up with a decision on how they think or feel, it’s about following a federal policy,” Cummins said.

    Cummins has allowed her workers to remain on the property at Bella’s Hacienda Ranch in Well, Nevada.  Her business was deemed nonessential.  While some might disagree, that distinction seems perfectly reasonable.  However, that still leaves the fact that when she went to Nevada State Bank to apply for an emergency loan from the Small Business Administration the bank balked.

    Given social distancing rules, this is one business that will face the greatest delay and downturn in recovering from the pandemic.  Social distancing would seem the antithesis of the business model of a brothel.

    Since applying for federal help earlier this week, the SBA has notified Cummins that her application to the Paycheck Protection Program for some $70,000 has been approved.

    However, she was then told by the bank that the funds were put on hold.

    It is not clear if that is based on the nature of her business or simply a pause in the program.

    The question remains about the objections and whether there will be a move to limit future loans.  In my view, such restrictions would be arbitrary and discriminatory.  As many on this blog know, I have been a long critic of morality legislation. This is simply another variation in forcing citizens to adhere to majoritarian morals in my view if the loan is denied or the regulations changed on the basis of the business.


    Tyler Durden

    Thu, 04/23/2020 – 21:45

  • 40 More Coronavirus Cases Confirmed Aboard "Costa Atlantica": Live Updates
    40 More Coronavirus Cases Confirmed Aboard “Costa Atlantica”: Live Updates

    Summary:

    • Russia reports thousands of new cases
    • Turkey becomes first country in Asia to cross 100k cases in “official” count
    • Indonesia reports dozens of new deaths
    • UK sees deaths slow for 2nd day
    • Merkel warns “we’re still at the beginning” of the outbreak
    • German leader told fellow EU leaders that fiscal package must be “huge”
    • Cuomo says 14% of random sample of NYers tested positive for COVID-19 antibodies; 21.2% in NYC
    • NY deaths continue to slow
    • Oklahoma becomes latest state to start reopening Friday
    • Trump says he “strongly disagrees” with Georgia’s plan to reopen
    • 40 more crew members test positive aboard “Costa Atlantica” 
    • Trump says 40% of counties have seen a decline in coronavirus cases
    • China pledges $30 million to WHO
    • California reports 115 deaths
    • Pompeo demands China permanently close all wet markets
    • NJ on cusp of reporting 100k cases as state unveils new saliva test
    • France’s stretch of slowing case growth hits 1 week mark
    • Turkey cases top 100k
    • Lagarde says relief fund needed fast
    • Cuomo says McConnell’s remark about allowing states to file for bankruptcy was “dumb”
    • Vietnam, Greece announce plans to start reopening
    • Data shows nearly 90% of patients placed on ventilator never recover
    • Some Wuhan doctors see virus reemerge in patients 70 days after negative test
    • Malaysia extends lockdown for 3rd time

    *       *       *

    Update (2130ET): Last night, we reported that a new cluster of coronavirus cases has been discovered aboard an Italian cruise ship, the Costa Atlantica, currently docked in Nagasaki – where it has been sitting idle since January.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Apparently, more than 600 members of the ship’s crew were living onboard (somehow, despite the obvious infection risk, they were not moved to less cramped quarters).

    Now, Japanese broadcaster NHK reports that 40 more crew members have tested positive, bringing the total onboard to 90.

    And just like that, Japan has another floating nightmare on its hands.

    *       *       *

    Update (1800ET): Kicking off tonight’s coronavirus press conference, President Trump told the accumulated press that 40% of counties in the US have seen a decline in new cases since the lockdown began. We don’t have the resources to “fact-check” this claim (we’re not the Washington Post), but it certainly sounds plausible.

    *       *       *

    Update (1600ET): As the market closes, Reuters has released its latest update on US coronavirus stats.

    Reuters counted roughly 30,000 new cases reported for Wednesday (remember, the numbers are reported with a 24 hour lag), the biggest daily increase in five, though the numbers were pretty much in line of the average of 30k cases a day reported for all of April. So far this month, the US has been reporting roughly 2k deaths per day.

    However, since the overall numbers have remained flat, today’s 30k increase was actually the slowest rate of growth this month, with the overall number of cases rising by 2.5% on the day.

    *       *       *

    Update (1545ET): Oklahoma governor says salons and barbershops can reopen statewide for ‘appointments only’ on this Friday, while restaurants, gyms and theaters will be allowed to reopen on May 1.

    As of Thursday, the Oklahoma State Department of Health had reported 3,017 confirmed positive coronavirus cases, along with 179 people who have died. Nine more deaths were reported Thursday, with six having occurred in the past 24 hours, and the others having died between April 18-April 21.

    Meanwhile, Illinois Gov JB Pritzker said his state has flattened the curve enough for some small businesses to reopen on a limited basis, and for hospitals and surgical centers to begin non-life-threatening surgeries.

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    *       *       *

    Update (1535ET): California recorded 115 deaths from COVID-19 over the past 24 hours, making Wednesday the deadliest day so far for America’s most populous state. Meanwhile, the number of occupied hospitalizations declined, (down 4.4%) and ICU numbers fell 1.2%.

    *       *       *

    Update (1430ET): New Jersey Gov. Phil Murphy said Thursday that New Jersey is on the cusp of reporting its 100,000th confirmed case of the virus, as the state ramps up testing. On Thursday, the total number of COVID-19 cases in New Jersey jumped to 99,989, with more than 4,000 new cases confirmed over the last 24 hours.

    “Of the nearly 100,000 total cases we’ve reported since our first positive case on March 4th, roughly 46,000 of these individuals have now exited the two-week incubation window,” Murphy said during his briefing.

    At least 5,368 people have died from coronavirus-related complications with 307 more deaths reported over the past 24 hours.

    Preexisting conditions like cardiovascular disease and diabetes have been extremely prevalent among those who have succumbed to the virus in the state, with as many as 60% exhibiting cardiovascular disease.

    Despite the increase in deaths and cases, Murphy said that the spread has slowed. He also said that the state is going to start using new saliva tests developed by Rutgers University. That saliva-based test is going to be used starting next week at five testing centers.

    “This is a total of more than 5,500 tests – more than 1,200 residents, and in excess of 4,300 staff,” Murphy said. “We are working to expand testing to other state workers and the individuals we serve,” he said. The Rutgers’ saliva test in 100% accurate compared to a traditional swab test in the nose, Rutgers Biomedical and Health Sciences Chancellor Dr. Brian Strom said.

    Murphy believes that the state needs enough testing to start randomly testing – like New York has – before it moves ahead with reopening.

    *       *       *

    Update (1410ET): In the latest good news out of Europe, France’s coronavirus epidemic has continued to slow with the national lockdown in its sixth week. On Thursday, France reported another 311 deaths in hospitals and another 205 in nursing homes and other long-term care facilities, bringing the country’s death toll to 21,856, of which 13,547 were in hospitals and 8,309 in care homes. Earlier, Finance Minister Bruno Le Maire said the government is shooting to reopen most small businesses on May 11.

    Public-health officials also reported a drop in occupied hospital beds and ICU beds.

    In Italy, Italian health officials confirmed another 2,646 new cases of the virus and another 464 new deaths, bringing the countrywide total to 189,973 cases and 25,549 deaths. PM Giuseppe Conte told reporters that EU leaders have made “great progress” that was “almost unthinkable a few weeks ago.” So far, it seems like the EU countries have agreed to establish a recovery fund, but how to finance the fund, and whether support should be doled out in the form of loans, or grants, are sources of contention between the northern and southern blocs. New cases and total hospitalizations continued to decline, though the single-day death toll ticked slightly higher.

    Iran also reported 1,030 new cases of coronavirus and 90 new deaths, with a total of 87,026 cases and 5,481 deaths.

    *       *       *

    Update (1316ET): Today’s EU meeting to work out a bloc-wide rescue package ended with no agreement, as was widely expected. And as the euro comes under pressure, anonymously-sourced reports claimed that the four wealthy northern states (led by Germany) are insisting on tying the recovery aid to the next EU long-term budget. Meanwhile, the badly hit already indebted nations like Italy are demanding that the bloc agree to issue “coronabonds” to finance what will in all likelihood become a huge recovery effort.

    In other news, the number of confirmed coronavirus cases in Turkey surpassed 100,000 on Thursday, with the death toll topping 2,491. A week ago, Turkey surpassed Iran to become the country with the worst outbreak in the Middle East, but it’s not the only country suffering: Saudi Arabia, the UAE, Oman and Qatar are all seeing cases and deaths climb at disturbingly high rates despite precautionary measures and travel restrictions imposed across the region.

    Interestingly enough, Turkey is actually the first country in Asia to cross the 100k-case threshold (since China’s “official” count topped out around 80k). Of course, it’s widely believed that the number of cases in China was many times more. Turkey is also only the 7th country in the world to cross the threshold.

    *       *       *

    Update (1155ET): Offering his rundown of the latest stats, Cuomo said that deaths have come down (the state reported 438 on Thursday vs 474 yesterday), though not by as much as state officials would like. Cuomo also noted that the number of people ‘walking in the door’ at NY State hospitals with COVID-19 has remained “about even” at roughly 1,300 per day.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    But by far the most interesting piece of information shared by Cuomo on Thursday was the outcome of a random surveillance test – the first of what’s expected to be many rounds of random testing that the state will be conducting to help aid the response. Cuomo said that out of 3,000 people tested for COVID-19 antibodies, roughly 14% tested positive.

    Even more alarming, that rate rose to 21.2% positive rate in NY. If that rate is confirmed via further testing, it would suggest that roughly 2 million NYC residents have been exposed to the virus.

    “It changes the theories of what the death rate is,” Cuomo explained. “It’s preliminary data”…but there are likely more unconfirmed “at home deaths” from the virus, he sad.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Of course, if these data are borne out by more studies, it would dramatically lower the virus’s mortality rate.

    During Mayor de Blasio’s press briefing earlier on Thursday, Health Commissioner Oxiris Barbot said that she would not be surprised if “close to a million New Yorkers” had been exposed to COVID-19. And as the city’s economy slides into a recessionary slump, De Blasio also offered a stark statistic: he expects that an additional one million residents could become food insecure under the pandemic, putting the total number of food insecure New Yorkers at around two million.

    Moving on, the governor also responded to a comment by Majority Leader Mitch McConnell, reportedly made during an appearance on a conservative talk show, that he would be in favor of some US states using “the bankruptcy route” to shed the onerous debt obligations they’re accruing during the outbreak.

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    Of course, the minute a US state files for bankruptcy, we suspect the market selloff will be even more swift than the unprecedented plunges seen just last month.

    If there’s even anything left of the American economy at that point.

    In other news, as the US pulls its funding from the WHO, China is stepping up with a $30 million donation, virtually guaranteeing that Beijing’s influence over the NGO – which is essentially an independent organization despite technically being an arm of the UN – will only continue to grow. Foreign Ministry spokesperson Geng Shuang praised the organization during a briefing, saying the WHO played “an important role” in assisting countries during the pandemic response.

    Meanwhile, Secretary of State Mike Pompeo warned that the US “may never” restore funding to the WHO, unless major reforms are implemented. “We reformed this back in 2007, so this isn’t the first time we’ve had to deal with the shortcomings of this organization that sits inside the United Nations. We need a fix. We need a structural fix with the WHO,” Pompeo said. Trump suspended US funding for the organization, accusing it of supporting China’s “disinformation,” Reuters reports.

    *       *       *

    Update (1140ET): Andrew Cuomo said 438 New Yorkers died from COVID-19 yesterday, bringing the state’s death toll to 15,740. Cuomo is delivering his daily briefing. Hospitalizations across the state fell by more than 500 on April 22 to a total of roughly 15.

    Watch the briefing below:

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    *       *       *

    Update (1050ET): A recent Reuters report quoted doctors in Wuhan who say they’ve found some patients who tested negative for the virus who later tested positive, suggesting that either they were somehow reinfected (studies have shown that some recovered patients have low or no levels of antibodies needed for immunity) or that the virus simply reemerged on its own.

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    Its just the latest example of patients claiming they’ve suffered a relapse in symptoms, or have seen them persist for 2 months or longer.

    The unusual nature of the virus, and the vastly different behavior documented in different patients, is something that has puzzled scientists, as some wonder whether the virus might linger in patients, then occasionally reemerge, like herpes or HIV.

    Months ago, we reported that scientists had discovered some unusual “HIV-like” mutations that purportedly would allow the virus to more easily attach to certain receptors, allowing for easier human-to-human infection.

    Of course, if the virus does behave this way, this would definitely lessen the impact of a lockdown over time, though at least lockdowns would give hospitals more time to prepare for the inevitable onslaught of infected patients.

    In other news, Malaysia has extended its national lockdown for a third time: “While the figures show a positive trend, the steps we take must continue to a point where we believe the Covid-19 outbreak can be fully contained,” said Muhyiddin Yassin, Malaysia’s prime minister. The lockdown, which was supposed to end next week, will be extended to May 12.    

    *      *       *

    Update (1010ET): Members of the EU are holding a virtual summit on Thursday to hammer out a rescue package to alleviate the immense financial pressure facing several of its largest member states – including Italy, Spain and France – who were particularly hard-hit by the coronavirus outbreak.

    However, hope for the issue to be resolved today is gradually sinking as both sides dig in their heels.

    Italian PM Giuseppe Conte has threatened to veto any conclusions reached by his colleagues that doesn’t fit with the “coronabonds” plan that Rome believes is 100% essential to stave off a devastating economic collapse. Conte also demanded that the costs borne by Italy and Spain be borne in part by their neighbors, since Brussels initially advised against lockdowns and border closures, hampering the continent’s response to the virus.

    Curiously, as the summit begins, Chancellor Angela Merkel had some interesting words for her colleagues. Merkel’s Germany has opposed the ‘coronabonds’ plan in favor of routing money through one of Europe’s many existing mechanisms for pumping ‘liquidity’ into failing states.

    Earlier in the day, Merkel made headlines during a speech where she chastised Germans for pushing to reopen the German economy too quickly by warning that we’re “still at the beginning” of the crisis.

    “Nobody likes to hear this but it is the truth. We are not living through the final phase of this crisis, we are still at its beginning. We will still have to live with this virus for a long time.”

    Despite Merkel’s words of caution, Germany has continued to move ahead with its plan to gradually reopen the country, making Merkel, in at least one sense, the anti-Trump: Trump pushes to reopen more quickly while officially advocating a gradual reopening, while Merkel is doing the opposite.

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    Now, Merkel is advising her colleagues that the response to the crisis must be “huge enough” to save Europe, as the leaders of both France and Italy have warned that failure to meet member states’ needs during this critical crisis could result in the end of the ‘European project’.

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    Maybe she was talking about Germany’s fiscal response?

    In other European news, the UK reported its latest numbers, showing a modest slowdown in deaths for a second day.

    • REPORTS 616 NEW CORONAVIRUS DEATHS, TOTAL RISES TO 18,738
    • U.K. DAILY CORONAVIRUS DEATHS DECREASE FOR SECOND DAY

    Meanwhile, Christine Lagarde kept up her pressure for governments to do more, saying a “strong and flexible” recovery fund is needed, and fast.

    *      *      *

    Just 48 hours before Georgia was set to become the first state in the country to start reopening its economy, President Trump revealed in what sounded like an offhanded answer to a reporter’s question that he “strongly disagrees” with Gov Kemp’s decision because it didn’t follow the federal guidelines.

    Trump’s u-turn outraged some supporters who believe the lockdown “cure” is worse than the viral “disease”, just in time for the latest reminder of how many jobs have been destroyed by the pandemic so far. Before blaming them as “covidiots”, it’s worth remembering that many red states haven’t been hit nearly as badly as most other states. Even the outbreak at the Smithfield Food’s processing plant in South Dakota – an incident that the MSM labeled “the biggest outbreak in the country” and cited as evidence of GOP Gov. Kirsti Noem’s “anti-science” agenda – has already subsided, and the rate of new cases has slowed, and the state has only recorded 9 deaths.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Millions of people around the world are beginning to question the wisdom of strict lockdown strategies. Sweden, a country that was once routinely bashed by conservatives for refusing to close its economy and borders, has found that its approach appears to be working. As once doctor who appeared on CNBC Thursday morning pointed out, the number of deaths and cases per capita in Sweden is higher than its neighbors. But not by much. For the record, Sweden has left its schools, gyms, cafes, bars and restaurants open throughout the spread of the pandemic. Instead, the government has urged citizens to act responsibly and follow social distancing guidelines. The country has suffered fewer than 2,000 deaths, and has only confirmed 16k cases, and the strategy has proved broadly popular: Swedish Prime Minister Stefan Lofven is now one of the most popular leaders in the modern history of Sweden.

    To be sure, even Lofven has admitted that Sweden made mistakes – for example, authorities should have invested more resources in protecting the elderly –  and when deaths and cases started to spike a few weeks ago, there were a few uncomfortable days when he faced a hail of doubt and criticism. But he stayed the course, and the country appears to be emerging from the pandemic relatively unscathed. In what is perhaps the country’s biggest sign of renewal, Volvo, which was forced to halt production across Europe and furlough about 20,000 Swedish employees, will resume production at its Swedish plants on Monday.

    Earlier this week, the mainstream press flew into a tizzy following a report that a leading American vaccine expert named Rick Bright had been ousted as director of the Biomedical Advanced Research and Development Authority, allegedly for resisting efforts to join President Trump in pushing hydroxychloroquine. A recent small-scale VA study recently found the drug to be ineffective, news that liberals have weaponized to bash the president, after dismissing virtually every other study suggesting the opposite (particularly when the drug is taken in combination with a Z-Pak).

    As it turns out, Bright’s claim that his ouster was an act of retaliation for not “toeing the line” turned out to be somewhat embellished.

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    In the UK, where daily death numbers have remained stubbornly, the government’s top medic said Thursday that restrictions on everyday life in Britain will likely remain in place in one form or another until the “next calendar year” due to the time needed to develop and roll out vaccines or find a cure, the country’s top medic said on Wednesday.

    South Korea, meanwhile, is already preparing for a second wave of the virus in the fall and winter, according Yoon Tae-ho, director general of health ministry, who announced the plans during a press briefing. Many public health experts – including FDA Director Dr. Stephen Hahn, before he “clarified” his statement the other day – have warned that the virus could come roaring back in the fall, combining with the seasonal flu to overwhelm hospitals once again.

    The country also plans to secure more medical resources in the event of a bigger outbreak than what it experienced in Daegu, the city at the epicenter of the crisis. SK will continue to remain “on alert” until a vaccine is available.

    Indonesia reported 357 new cases of the virus, bringing its total to 7,775. The country has reported a total of 647 deaths and 950 recovered cases, numbers that experts say are likely well short of the totals for both cases and deaths.

    US Secretary of State Mike Pompeo called on China to permanently close all wet markets and other illegal markets selling wildlife for human consumption – something that China has already technically outlawed, just like they ‘outlawed’ the production of black-market fentanyl.

    As more countries begin rolling back lockdown measures, tiny Vietnam, which has reported fewer than 300 cases of coronavirus and no deaths since the first infections were detected in January, said on Wednesday it would start lifting tough movement restrictions, according to Reuters, even as many of its neighbors remain on lockdown. Greece extended its lockdown until May 4, but said some small businesses will start reopening after that date, per the FT. A spokesman for the Greek government warned that “at each stage the impact on public health will be assessed. We’re going to take it week by week,” he added. A detailed timetable for re-starting the economy will be announced next week.”

    More countries appear to be reopening as millions confront the undeniable reality that, when faced with the choice of sacrificing their livelihoods or risking infection, most people would opt for the second, even as the WHO’s Dr. Tedros warned during a press briefing on Wednesday that the rolling back the quarantines too soon might cause the virus to reignite.

    The situation in Russia, which took early steps to keep foreigners out yet never followed up with widespread testing and surveillance, continued to worsen as the country reported 4,774 new cases of coronavirus and 42 new deaths, another record number of new cases, bringing the country’s total of 62,773 cases and 555 deaths.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Perhaps the biggest news overnight came out of Australian, where PM Scott Morrison called on all member states of the WHO to support an “independent review” of the origins of the novel coronavirus outbreak, further jeopardizing what has been an incredibly prosperous economic relationship with China that had helped the Aussie economy achieve an unprecedented 30-year stretch of growth.

    Finally, the Washington Post reports that new data from New York’s largest hospital system showed that survival rates for patients placed on ventilators are even lower than previously believed. The data showed that a staggering 88% of coronavirus patients who were placed on ventilators in the state’s hospitals didn’t survive. Doctors, meanwhile, are also seeing more strange complications from the disease involving blood clots and the cardiovascular system. One doctor in China who barely survived his struggle with the virus experienced an extremely strange shift in skin pigmentation.

    This news follows yesterday’s report which found more than 10,000 nursing home residents in 35 states have succumbed to the virus, representing roughly one-fifth of all deaths in the US.

    The number of confirmed deaths from the virus around the world is approaching 200k, while the number of confirmed cases has surpassed 2,645,000.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>


    Tyler Durden

    Thu, 04/23/2020 – 21:44

  • UN Calls For Trillion Dollar Debt Jubilee For Poorest Countries 
    UN Calls For Trillion Dollar Debt Jubilee For Poorest Countries 

    For weeks, the United Nations, International Monetary Fund, and World Bank have stated the only solution for emerging market economies severely damaged by the coronavirus outbreak is a “debt jubilee.”

    The United Nations Conference on Trade and Development (UNCTAD) published a note on Thursday morning that said about $1 trillion in debt owed by developing countries should be canceled to avoid an emerging market debt crisis. 

    “This is a world where defaults by developing nations on their debt is inevitable,” warned Richard Kozul-Wright, director of UNCTAD’s Division on Globalization and Development Strategies.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    UNCTAD’s report calls for a global debt relief deal for emerging market economies. It indicates “the vital need for decisive action to provide substantive debt relief to developing countries to free up sorely needed resources to respond to the raging pandemic.” 

    Last month, UNCTAD called for an international effort to create an economic relief package for emerging market economies that would amount to at least $2.5 trillion. It said even before the virus pandemic, many of these developing countries had insurmountable dollar debts. 

    “The international community should urgently take more steps to relieve the mounting financial pressure that debt payments are exerting on developing countries as they get to grips with the economic shock of COVID-19,” said UNCTAD Secretary-General Mukhisa Kituyi.

    Here are some of the countries that have unsustainable debt burdens: 

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    UNCTAD said developing countries “now face a wall of debt service repayments throughout the 2020s. In 2020 and 2021 alone, repayments on their public external debt are estimated at nearly $3.4 trillion – between $2 trillion and $2.3 trillion in high-income developing countries and between $666 billion and $1.06 trillion in the middle- and low-income countries.”

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    With the pandemic still raging across the world, emerging market economies battered, commodities crashed, and the global economy shifting into a deep depression, it now appears the end game has finally arrived and the need to rescue the world from a prolonged depression will likely be through a debt jubilee. 

    For some color on the current global situation. Raoul Pal, the former hedge-fund manager who founded Real Vision, recently had this to say: “The whole world’s f**ked.”

    Pal’s most recent thoughts on dollar debts and a debt jubilee can be found below: 

    Less available dollars, in a world of a massive dollar shortage, drives up the dollar creating a shortage both home and abroad. Money printing does not make the dollars available. They get stuck in the financial system and hoarded.

    Money for the banks, no money for the debtors…

    The domestic shortage of dollars means that money gets hoarded while defaults rise. And the shortage abroad means that $13tn of debt scrambles for the available dollars as world growth slows and banks are less free with capital.

    Don’t forget – the $13tn short dollar positions (foreign dollar debt held mainly by foreign corporation and investment vehicles) is the largest position ever taken in the history of global financial markets.

    It can only mean a massive, uncontrolled dollar rally.

    QE will not fix this. Swap lines will not fix this. A debt jubilee would fix this or multiple trillions of dollars in write-downs and defaults.

    It is the dollar strength that brings to world to its nadir (just like the 1930s). It is the dollar system that is the really big problem.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

     The dollar has eaten all of its competitors and now it is going to eat itself.

    And after decades of “kicking the can down the road” – it appears the end game has finally arrived for countries with insurmountable dollar debts: debt jubilee. 


    Tyler Durden

    Thu, 04/23/2020 – 21:25

  • China Denies US Request For Access To Wuhan Lab Which May Be Source Of Coronavirus Pandemic
    China Denies US Request For Access To Wuhan Lab Which May Be Source Of Coronavirus Pandemic

    China has denied a request by US Secretary of State Mike Pompeo to grant international inspectors access to labs in order to assess whether dangerous pathogens might be accidentally released, according to Fox News.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    The request comes amid a US investigation into whether the Wuhan coronavirus escaped from the Wuhan Institute of Virology, where they were conducting a host of experiments on bat coronavirus – and had collected bats in a cave over 1,000 miles away in Yunnan which carried COVID-19.

    “There are multiple labs inside of China that are handling these things,” Pompeo said on Wednesday at the State Department. “It’s important that those materials are being handled in a safe and secure way such that there isn’t accidental release.”

    “We have to make sure that the Chinese Government is handling those materials in an appropriate way not only in the Wuhan Institute of Virology but elsewhere,” Pompeo added, according to the report.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    “Any objective person will see that some U.S. politicians have been peddling lies that discredit China’s anti-epidemic efforts to fuddle people’s minds and deflect attention from the fact that they fell short of fulfilling their own anti-epidemic responsibilities,” said Chinese Foreign Ministry spokesman Geng Shuang on Thursday in response to Pompeo’s call for inspections at the Wuhan Institute of Virology and other Chinese labs studying coronaviruses and other pathogens.

    Beijing has refuted claims that COVID-19 originated in a laboratory. Intelligence operatives have begun gathering information about the Wuhan lab and are piecing together a timeline of the events following the outbreak.

    U.S. officials told Fox News they have ruled out the possibility of a man-made coronavirus to be used as a bioweapon. Instead, they believe it was part of China’s attempt to demonstrate that its efforts to identify and combat viruses are equal to or greater than the capabilities of the United States,

    Some officials believe China purposefully covered up the virus and that the World Health Organization (WHO) is complicit. President Trump took aim at the WHO over its role in the crisis and announced last week that the U.S. will halt all funding to the group, saying it had put “political correctness over lifesaving measures.” –Fox News

    On Wednesday, Pompeo told “The Ingraham Angle” that the World Health Organization (WHO) had dropped the ball in helping the United States gather critical data from China.

    “Look, we know it began at one [lab], but we need to figure this out,” he said, adding “There’s an ongoing pandemic. We still don’t have the transparency and openness we need in China.”


    Tyler Durden

    Thu, 04/23/2020 – 21:12

  • The Seven-Step Path From Pandemic To Totalitarianism
    The Seven-Step Path From Pandemic To Totalitarianism

    Authored by Rosemary Frei via Off-Guardian.org,

    There are just seven steps from pandemic declaration to permanent totalitarianism – and many jurisdictions are about to start Step 5…

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    As if it was planned in advance, billions of people around the globe are being forced step by rapid step into a radically different way of life, one that involves far less personal, physical and financial freedom and agency

    Here is the template for rolling this out.

    STEP 1

    A new virus starts to spread around the world. The World Health Organization (WHO) declares a pandemic.

    International agencies, public-health officials, politicians, media and other influential voices fan fear by focusing almost exclusively on the contagiousness of the virus and the rising numbers of cases, and by characterizing the virus as extremely dangerous.

    Within a few days governments at national and local levels also declare states of emergency. At lightning speed they impose lock-down measures that confine most people to their homes – starting with closing schools – and shut down much of the global economy. World markets implode.

    The stunned, fearful and credulous public – convinced over the previous few years that their bodies do not have the natural ability to react to pathogens by producing antibodies that confer long-lasting immunity – largely complies willingly.

    The first weekly virtual class on local emergency and crisis responses to COVID19 is held for mayors and other city officials around the world. Coordinated by a handful of American organizations in the academic, medical, financial, political and transportation spheres, the classes feature guests ranging from Barack Obama to Bill Gates.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    STEP 2

    National, state/provincial and municipal leaders, as well as public-health officials, start daily press briefings. They use them to pump out frightening statistics and modelling asserting the virus has the potential to kill many millions.

    Most of this information is hard to decipher and sheds little real light on the natural course of the virus’s spread through each geographic area.

    Officials and media downplay or distort inconveniently low death tolls from the virus and instead focus on alarming statistics produced by compliant academics, social-media influencers and high-profile organizations.

    The main message is that this is a war and many lives are at stake unless virtually everybody stays at home. Mainstream media amplify the trope that the world is at the mercy of the virus.

    Simultaneously, central banks and governments hand out massive amounts of cash largely to benefit the big banks. And they bring in giant private-sector financial firms to manage the process despite these global companies’ very poor track record in the 2008-2009 crash. Governments also rapidly start to create trillions of pounds’ worth of programs that include compensating businesses and workers for their shutdown-related losses.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    STEP 3

    There is a concerted effort by all levels of government and public health to very rapidly ramp up testing for viral RNA, along with production of personal protective equipment.

    They push aside the need for regulation, including quality standards and independent verification of tests’ rates of accuracy, by insisting that fast approval and roll-out are imperative for saving lives.

    Models are released that predict snowballing of numbers of cases, hospitalizations and deaths even under best-case scenarios.

    At about the same time, public-health officials significantly loosen the criteria for viral infections, outbreaks and deaths, particularly in the oldest members of society. That increases the numbers of cases and deaths ascribed to the new pathogen.

    The media continue to clamour for more testing and for severe punishment of people who aren’t completely compliant with the lock-down measures.

    As a result, there’s little backlash as police and military with sweeping new powers enforce these measures and give stiff penalties or even jail terms to those who disobey orders. States also monitor with impunity massive numbers of people’s movements via their cellphones.

    Vast human resources are focused on tracking down people who have had contact with a virus-positive individual and confining them to their homes. Thus the portion of the public exposed to the virus remains relatively small.

    It also contributes to social isolation. Among many effects, this enables those in control to even further erase individual and collective choices, voices and power.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    STEP 4

    When the numbers of cases and deaths start to plateau, local officials claim it’s too early to tell whether the virus has finished passing through their population and therefore, restrictive measures must continue.

    An alternative narrative is that if such measures aren’t kept in place there will be a resurgence of cases and deaths. Yet another is that the continuing climb in elderly persons’ deaths means all bets are off for the time being.

    They admit that initial models incorrectly predicted there would be a tsunami of cases, ICU admissions and deaths. However, they assert more time is needed before it can be determined whether it’s safe to loosen some of the restrictions and let children return to school or adults go back to work.

    Officials do not try to calculate the overall skyrocketing cost to their populations and economies of the shut-downs and other measures against, nor do they discuss what cost level may be too high.

    They and powerful media organizations also push for the massive virus-testing over-capacity to be used to surveil the general population for viral DNA in their bodies. At the same time, the roll-out begins of widespread blood testing for antibodies to the virus.

    Meanwhile, new data are published showing the virus has a high capacity to mutate. Scientists and officials interpret this as meaning a larger medical arsenal will be needed to combat it.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Image source: The Spectator

    STEP 5

    About two or three weeks later, the dramatic increase in testing for viral DNA produces the desired goal of a significant upsurge in the number of people found positive for the virus.

    Public-health officials add jet fuel to the surge by adding to their case and death tallies the large number of people who are only suspected – and not lab-test-confirmed – to have had an infection. Politicians and public-health officials tell the populace this means they cannot return to their jobs or other activities outside the home for the time being.

    Governments work with public-health agencies, academics, industry, the WHO and other organizations to start to design and implement immunity-passport systems for using the results of the widespread antibody testing to determine who can be released from the lock-downs. This is one of many goals of the seven steps.

    Meanwhile, government leaders continue to highlight the importance of vaccines for besting the virus.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    STEP 6

    Large-scale human testing of many different types of antivirals and vaccines begins, thanks to a concerted push from the WHO, Bill Gates and his collaborators, pharmaceutical and biotech companies, governments and universities.

    Large swaths of the population don’t have the antibodies to the virus because they’ve been kept from being exposed to it; they eagerly accept these medications even though they’ve been rushed to market with inadequate safety testing. They believe these medical products offer the only hope for escaping the virus’s clutches.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    STEP 7

    Soon the new virus starts another cycle around the globe – just as influenza and other viruses have every year for millennia. Officials again fan the flames of fear by positing the potential for millions of deaths among people not yet protected from the virus.

    They rapidly roll out virus and antibody testing again, while companies sell billions more doses of antivirals and booster vaccines.

    Governments simultaneously cede control of all remaining public assets to global companies. This is because local and national governments’ tax bases were decimated during Step 1 and they’re virtually bankrupt from their unprecedented spending in the war against the virus in the other steps.

    The overall result is complete medicalization of the response to the virus, which on a population level is no more harmful than influenza.

    This is coupled with the creation of permanent totalitarianism controlled by global companies and a 24/7 invasive-surveillance police state supported by widespread blossoming of ‘smart’ technology.

    The key players repeat the cycle of hysteria and massive administration of antivirals and booster shots every few months.

    And they implement a variation of steps 1 to 7 when another new pathogen appears on the planet.

    Sounds far-fetched? Unfortunately, it’s not.

    With the arrival of COVID19 many countries quickly completed Steps 1, 2 and 3.

    Step 4 is well under way in a large number of jurisdictions.

    Step 5 is on track to start in early May.


    Tyler Durden

    Thu, 04/23/2020 – 21:05

  • Debt-Stricken Lebanon Becomes First Arab Country To Legalize Cannabis Growth
    Debt-Stricken Lebanon Becomes First Arab Country To Legalize Cannabis Growth

    Lebanon, the tiny Mediterranean country with hugely outsized debt, has become the first country in the Middle East to legalize the growing of cannabis in an unlikely precedent.

    The Lebanese Parliament approved a law on Tuesday which allows its growth for medicinal and industrial use, which ironically enough was strongly recommended by economic advisers as a way to boost the country’s troubled economy by regulating what was reportedly already a booming but illicit trade, especially in the Bekaa Valley.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Cannabis plantation in Lebanon’s eastern Bekaa Valley. AFP via Getty

    Lebanon’s national newspaper The Daily Star linked the move directly to the country’s recent debt woes:

    Although it is illegal, Lebanon has long been one of the world’s biggest producers of hashish.

    Lawmakers have long been trying to legalize cannabis production for medical use. They argue it would pump revenue into the struggling economy, currently in its worst crisis since the 1975-90 civil war.

    In March, Lebanon announced it would suspend payments of all the maturing Eurobonds in foreign currency in order to safeguard its foreign currency reserves.

    Raed Khoury, Lebanon’s former caretaker minister for economy and trade, went so far as to brag in a July 2018 interview with Bloomberg that Lebanese marijuana “is one of the best in the world” in terms of quality.

    Crucially, the legislation does not allow for recreational use of marijuana among citizens, but brings its cultivation under the regulation of the state, primarily for medicinal exports, CBD oils, and pharmaceutical and industrial purposes. 

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Firas Maksad, a foreign policy analyst and professor at George Washington University, told UAE’s The National of cannabis growth’s legalization: “If regulated and taxed properly, this is a net positive for Lebanon.”

    “It is important to note that Lebanon spent many millions of foreign assistance dollars in the nineties to fight cannabis farming in the Bekaa,” Maksad added, explaining that Hezbollah’s opposition to legalization stemmed from wanting to maintain control of trafficking.

    The Shia political movement and paramilitary organization essentially runs things in the Bekaa, and publicly opposed the legislation of Islamic grounds.

    And Lebanon’s deputy parliament speaker Elie Ferzli recently told Al-Monitor: “The global consultancy firm McKinsey suggested, in a study about setting a vision for Lebanon’s economy to grow its GDP and create jobs through selecting productive sectors, that legalizing the cultivation of cannabis would bring in up to $1 billion per year in revenue for the government.”


    Tyler Durden

    Thu, 04/23/2020 – 20:45

  • Live Webcast With Mohamed El-Erian: Ask Questions On Markets, The Economy And Covid-19
    Live Webcast With Mohamed El-Erian: Ask Questions On Markets, The Economy And Covid-19

    Join Mohamed El-Erian for a deep dive into the future of the global economy after COVID19 in this live webcast courtesy of the Munk Dialogues, who will also be taking readers questions live during the broadcast on its Facebook page .


    Tyler Durden

    Thu, 04/23/2020 – 20:29

  • COVID-19 Is Not Like The Flu At All
    COVID-19 Is Not Like The Flu At All

    Authored by Ari Schulman, Brendan Foht, Samuel Matlack via The New Atlantis,

    How deadly is Covid-19 compared to seasonal flu, past pandemics, or car crashes? It’s about the spike…

    To offer context, we have produced two charts showing coronavirus deaths along with deaths from other common causes in the past to which the disease has recently been compared. One chart shows deaths for the United States, the other for New York, the state hardest hit.

    Note that the data sets begin at different points in the year (as marked on the left). Also note that the figures shown here are for new deaths each week, not for cumulative deaths.

    United States

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    The chart shows deaths per capita to allow for comparison of data from different years. Deaths are shown from:

    • Covid-19, starting from February 17. (Covid Tracking Project)

    • The 2017-18 flu season: This was the deadliest recent flu season. The chart shows one line for deaths attributed directly to flu, and another for deaths attributed to either flu or pneumonia. The smaller line is an undercount of flu-caused deaths, the larger is an overcount, with the real number lying somewhere in between. (More on this below.) The data begin on October 1, 2017, which the CDC considered the first week of that flu season. (CDC)

    • Heart disease and cancer: The first and second leading causes of death in the United States. The chart shows total 2017 deaths averaged per week. (CDC)

    • Car crashes: Weekly deaths beginning from January 1, 2018. (National Highway Traffic Safety Administration)

    • 1957-58 Asian flu pandemic: Weekly influenza and pneumonia deaths beginning from August 24, 1957. These data come from a contemporary CDC program that surveilled 108 American cities with a total population of about 50 million people. We have used that figure, rather than the total U.S. population at the time, to calculate deaths per million. (CDC)

    We need your support.Help us sustain and grow our work by April 30.

    New York State

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Because the number of weekly Covid-19 deaths in New York is now larger than the typical number of weekly deaths from all causes, we are omitting most of the individual causes from the chart. And because the state’s population has been highly stable over the time periods considered — decreasing by just 0.7 percent since 2017, according to the latest Census Bureau estimates — we have chosen to show both absolute deaths and deaths per capita. The causes shown are:

    • Covid-19 deaths, starting from March 2. (Covid Tracking Project)

    • The 2017-18 flu season, with week 1 beginning on October 1, 2017. (CDC)

    • All deaths from all causes for the same period as the 2017-18 flu season. (CDC)

    Note the markedly larger scale of deaths per million on the New York chart as compared to the United States — indicating how much harder Covid-19 has hit that state than the country as a whole.

    Uncertainty about Flu and Covid-19 Deaths

    There is considerably more uncertainty about how many deaths are caused by the flu than public discussion might suggest. Determining this number is not as simple as counting up death certificates listing influenza as the cause.

    Many deaths have multiple causes. The flu can cause other illnesses, such as pneumonia, which in turn can cause death. The CDC thus includes “influenza-associated deaths” in its estimate of the toll of the flu. Conventionally, statistics often group together deaths from influenza and pneumonia. Furthermore, many estimates try to account for under-reporting of flu deaths: Not everyone who dies of an influenza-associated illness has been tested for the flu.

    In short, the number of flu deaths as reported by the CDC and often cited in public discussions — between 24,000 and 62,000 deaths for this past season — is a rough estimate of how many people had the flu and died of illnesses that were likely associated with it, whether or not directly caused.

    Instead of using estimates, on our U.S. chart, we have shown one line for deaths in which influenza was listed as a cause (which undercounts influenza-associated deaths); and another line showing deaths in which influenza or pneumonia was a cause (which overcounts flu deaths, as many pneumonia cases are not caused by flu).

    With Covid-19, there are similar difficulties in arriving at the true number of deaths caused by the virus. Skeptics of the reported death counts have argued that most people who die with the virus don’t die of the virus. This is surely true in some cases, as it is with the flu. In many deaths, webs of causation are tangled.

    However, in addition to some possible overcounting, there may also be significant undercounting. Reports from Northern Italy and New York suggest that far more people are dying in outbreak areas than are being reported:

    In the first five days of April, 1,125 people were pronounced dead in their homes or on the street in New York City, more than eight times the deaths recorded during the same period in 2019, according to the Fire Department.

    Many of these people — as well as many who die in hospitals — are not being tested for the virus, and therefore are not included in the official death counts.

    The Deaths in Context

    Even with the limits of the available data, we can still draw some reasonable conclusions about how Covid-19 compares to other causes of death — and about what these comparisons often miss:

    Different time scales: We are still early in this pandemic. It has only been a few weeks since the first reported U.S. deaths. Comparing these deaths to, say, an entire year of deaths from car crashes or influenza is not meaningful.

    A spike: Perhaps the most noticeable feature of both graphs is the Covid-19 spike — the rapid growth in deaths since the pandemic began. Car crashes, by contrast, show little variation week to week. And even compared to past flu seasons or pandemics, the rate of increase in Covid-19 deaths is markedly faster.

    The number of new deaths reported in the U.S. in the week beginning March 16 was 678 percent higher than the previous week. In New York State, the number grew thirty-six-fold the same week. By comparison, the worst one-week increase in new flu and pneumonia deaths during the 2017-18 flu season was 26 percent, and during the 1957-58 Asian flu was 48 percent. Although the growth in Covid-19 deaths is now slowing, the number of new deaths for the week ending on April 5 was still more than double that of the week before.

    A leading cause of death in the United States: Several weeks ago, coronavirus deaths were few in comparison with other causes. But last week, reported U.S. Covid-19 deaths were just shy of the normal rate from heart disease, usually the leading cause of death.

    More than all typical deaths in New York: Strikingly, in the state of New York, the number of people who died with coronavirus last week was more than any other cause of death — in fact, 76 percent more than the average number who die in a week from all causes combined.

    In the worst week of the 2017-18 flu season, New York saw 445 deaths from flu and pneumonia and 3,481 total from all causes. Last week, the state saw 4,694 reported Covid-19 deaths alone. These figures must put to rest the “dying with but not of” line of skepticism. The idea that this many people would have died anyway even without Covid-19 is simply not credible.

    Any serious attempt to put coronavirus deaths in context by comparing it to some other cause of death in a previous year must acknowledge the marked differences in the Covid-19 trend — most notably, the rapid spike in deaths that is still underway, and the wide range of uncertainty about when it will peak, how high it will peak, and whether it will peak only once. As long as the pandemic is rapidly spreading, these comparisons will be fraught.

    Perhaps a better way to state the danger posed by the coronavirus is just that we cannot easily compare it to any precedent in recent history. Nor do we need to dispute projections about future deaths to recognize what has happened already. Amid the statistical noise is a powerful signal. The question is whether we choose to see it.


    Tyler Durden

    Thu, 04/23/2020 – 20:25

  • Credit Card Companies Are Cutting Limits For Riskier Customers As Millions Of Jobs Evaporate
    Credit Card Companies Are Cutting Limits For Riskier Customers As Millions Of Jobs Evaporate

    Many large and public companies have already hoovered up much of the ’emergency liquidity’ loans that were supposed to flow to small businesses, leaving small business owners with only one real option to salvage their livelihoods: putting it on the card.

    Thanks to the American consumers’ insatiable love for debt, credit-card businesses endured boom year after boom year in the aftermath of the last crash, earning healthy margins from clients who like to carry a balance. Naturally, insurers and other large institutions (pension funds etc) bought up the bonds backed by these revenue streams like hotcacks. It was a good business.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    However, even during the pre-corona “Before Time”, analysts covering those bonds warned that lending standards were growing too lax. In the event of an economic downturn, the bonds could be vulnerable.

    Many consumers probably still remember how credit card lenders suddenly reined in credit limits for some riskier borrowers during the depths of the crash and its aftermath, leaving some customers, already scrambling to try and save their homes, with one fewer option.

    Are we already seeing a repeat of this behavior?

    Bloomberg reports that several major credit-card issuers have acknowledged reining in credit limits on riskier borrowers – some have indicated these might apply to existing customers, while others said only for new applicants – or making other adjustments to try to mitigate the risk of a mountain of balances drifting toward that 90-day-past-due territory like the Titanic toward an iceberg. Some banks even made a habit of stockpiling riskier bonds on their balance sheets in recent years due to shifting customer tastes (though overall, bank balance sheets are much stronger than they were during the runup to the crisis, some weak spots remain).

    Discover Financial Services just became the largest lender yet to acknowledge it’s begun reining in lines of credit for new customers. In a regulatory filing late Wednesday, the firm said it’s also easing off efforts to sign up consumers and that it expects to take a hit from programs letting existing borrowers skip payments or delay the accrual of interest.

    “As the number of loans enrolled in these programs increases, our financial results will be adversely impacted in the short term due to forgone interest,” Discover said.

    The announcement came a day after Synchrony Financial, the company behind cards for J.C. Penney Co., Gap Inc. and American Eagle Outfitters Inc., said it will try to stem losses by closely managing customers’ accounts. In a conference call with analysts Tuesday, Chief Financial Officer Brian Wenzel said the firm is using its own vast trove of data, as well as information from credit bureaus, to “dynamically reevaluate a customer’s creditworthiness.” That means some may be allowed to spend more, but others less.

    The defensive moves are a pivot for both companies, which more often give updates on marketing campaigns and their progress in building up interest-bearing balances. On a conference call with analysts Thursday morning, Discover Chief Executive Officer Roger Hochschild said efforts to curtail risk since the crisis began include conducting additional verification of employment and setting lower limits for new accounts, while offering fewer increases to existing cardholders.

    “As part of our credit response to Covid-19, we haven’t made any changes in terms of closing inactive accounts or doing more line decreases,” Hochschild said in a separate interview Thursday. “We think it’s very challenging to do those now. Pulling away credit when they need it most can have tremendously adverse impacts.”

    Angela Merkel made the point earlier that the coronavirus crisis is only just beginning. In all likelihood, we will be living with the virus, and its economic consequences, for a long time.

    Americans might need to start getting used to the idea of living within their means – or at least closer to it. Unfortunately, for many, there aren’t any obvious alternatives.


    Tyler Durden

    Thu, 04/23/2020 – 20:05

Digest powered by RSS Digest

Today’s News 23rd April 2020

  • Unsealed Court Docs Expose Spanish Spy Firm Dirty Tricks: Stealing Assange's Son's Dirty Diaper, Tracking Mom
    Unsealed Court Docs Expose Spanish Spy Firm Dirty Tricks: Stealing Assange’s Son’s Dirty Diaper, Tracking Mom

    Bombshell revelations via court documents this week reveal how a Spanish security firm tracked the mother of Julian Assange’s fiancée, illegally recorded hours of footage of Assange’s son, and also stole his son’s dirty diapersreported RT News.

    Stella Morris, a 37-year old South African-born lawyer, revealed herself as WikiLeaks founder’s fiancée on April 11, several days before a London court was about to lift a non-publication order on her name.

    Morris had two children with Assange in the Ecuadorian embassy in London between 2012 and 2019.

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    Spanish court documents this week expose how Spanish security firm UC Global’s owner, David Morales, has been accused of privacy violation, bribery, and money laundering.

    The Ecuadorian embassy in London contracted Morales’ company for security work, but it turns out Morales was surveilling Assange for US intelligence agencies.

    The document shows that Morales sent an email to staff on September 21, 2017, requesting “special attention on Stella Morris.”

    He ordered his team to follow Morris’ mother and found she was living in Catalonia.

    “If necessary, I want a person fully dedicated to this activity, so if you have to hire someone to do it, let me know,” Morales wrote in an email. 

    “All this has to be considered top secret so the dissemination will be limited,” the email continued.

    Morales also had staff videotape the child stored on computer hard drives were turned over to the Spanish courts by a former UC Global employee.

    The former staff member gave a sworn statement to the Spanish courts indicating that Morales was overly obsessed in determining if Assange was the father of Morris’ child. The statement also said they were instructed to steal the baby’s dirty diapers to conduct DNA tests.

    El Pais newspaper said earlier this week that DNA on the diaper wouldn’t be sufficient for a paternity test, which led Morales to devise a plan among staff members to steal the baby’s pacifier.

    The former staff member eventually confronted Morris outside of the embassy and spilled the beans about the operation.

    “I went to the child’s mother outside the embassy and asked her please indicate that you will no longer take the child to the embassy because they planned to steal his diapers to prove that he was the son of Julian Assange,” the statement said. 

    Assange’s lawyers indicate that Morales was working for US intelligence agencies at the time.

    And the story gets more strange. At one point, Morales blackmailed Ecuador’s foreign intelligence agency SENAIN with nudes of a diplomat stolen from her computer after he found his contract with the embassy was going to be terminated. 

    “These extremely private photographs were allegedly in the possession of UC GLOBAL, were printed and were part of an extortion report that sought to prevent SENAIN from terminating the contract,” Assange’s lawyers wrote in a criminal complaint. 

    Morales faces 175 years’ imprisonment for the spy crimes he allegedly committed on Assange.


    Tyler Durden

    Thu, 04/23/2020 – 02:45

  • Global COVID-19 Lockdown – What You're Not Being Told, Part 2
    Global COVID-19 Lockdown – What You’re Not Being Told, Part 2

    Authored by Iain Davis via Off-Guardian.org,

    In Part 1 we looked at the reasons why questioning the coronavirus lockdown, despite the ever present allegation, does not demonstrate a callous disregard for human life. We are going to expand on why it doesn’t in this article.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    I am based in the UK so much of this discussion relates to the decisions of the British State, but this is a global policy agenda and similar policies are found across the developed world. Effectively a small group of policy decision makers have placed an estimated 3.5 billion people under house arrest. It is only possible for them to do so with our consent. Consent is carefully cultivated by controlling the information we are given.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    For the vast majority their only source of information is the corporate mainstream media (MSM) and the public announcements of the State. This article is written, as ever, in the hope people will do their own research and make up their own minds.

    We are going to look at the evidence which strongly suggests the State and the MSM, adhering to a globalist agenda, have colluded to mislead the public into believing the COVID 19 (C19) threat is far greater than it actually is.

    C19 can be fatal for those with pre-existing comorbidities, and possibly even some without, as can other forms of pneumonia and influenza-like respiratory illness. However, while every C19 death has been reported, none of the far greater number of people who have died in the UK this year from other respiratory infections have even been mentioned.

    Systems have been created to ensure the C19 statistics are as terrifying as possible. Their statistical product is so vague it borders upon meaningless. It seems we have been inculcated with misplaced fear to justify the lockdown regime, to convince us to accept it and prepare us for what is to come.

    I apologise for the article’s length but I hope you will read it in its entirety. There’s a lot of ground to cover, so please grab a coffee before we begin.

    LOCKDOWN ADVISED BY WHO?

    The World Health Organisation (WHO) is financed through a combination of assessed and voluntary contributions.

    Assessed contributions are paid by nation states for WHO membership and figures are released quarterly.

    Voluntary contributions are additional contributions from member states and “other partners.” For some reason these figures haven’t been reported for more than three years.

    About 80% of the WHO’s finances come from voluntary contributions.

    In its most recent 2017 voluntary contribution report the WHO accounted for the $2.1 billion it received from private foundations and global corporations.

    This compared to just over $1 billion voluntarily provided by governments.

    Contributors included GlaxoSmithKline, Bayer AG, Sanofi, Merck and Gilead Sciences whose drug remdesivir is currently being trialled, along side the off patent hydroxychloroquine, as a possible preventative treatment for COVID 19.

    The remdesivir trial is part of the WHO’s SOLIDARITY trials.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    The third-largest single contributor in 2017 was GAVI. Formerly called the Global Alliance for Vaccines and Immunization, they contributed nearly $134 million. GAVI are partnered with the WHO, UNICEF, the Bill & Melinda Gates Foundation and the World Bank to sell vaccines globally.

    The World Bank contributed nearly $146 million themselves and the largest individual payment, by some margin, at nearly $325 million came from the Bill & Melinda Gates Foundation (BMGF). Though like many other foundations and corporations, through their various networks of interlinked partnerships, their overall contribution was much higher.

    Among other beneficiaries of the BMGF’s generosity are the Vaccine Impact Modelling Consortium (VIMC) led by Professor Neil Ferguson.  They are based at Imperial College London and are directly funded by the BMGF and GAVI. Their objective is to provide statistical data analysis for the BMGF and GAVI in order for them to sell more vaccines.

    Prof. Ferguson not only led the team who created the hopelessly inaccurate prediction which the U.S and UK governments based their lockdown regimes upon, he also co-founded the MRC Centre for Outbreak Analysis and Modelling who worked with the WHO in 2009 to create ridiculous computer models predicting the H1N1 pandemic.

    In 2009 the world went crazy after the WHO declared the H1N1 influenza pandemic. This resulted in billions being spent on very expensive H1N1 vaccines and antiviral treatments although it turned out the pandemic was indistinguishable from seasonal flu.

    The only people who benefited from pointless vaccines and unnecessary medication were the manufacturers GlaxoSmithKline, Roche and Novartis. Each of these pharmaceutical corporations were among the largest voluntary contributors to the WHO in 2008/2009 financial year.

    With an $84 million investment, the Swiss pharmaceutical giant Roche were the largest single contributor into the WHO’s coffers that year. Luckily, as it turned out, they could afford it because sales of their unnecessary Tamiflu H1N1 medication rocketed to more than £3 billion following the WHO’s declared H1N1 pandemic. Which was just a coincidence.

    The whole debacle resulted in the Parliamentary Assembly of the Council of Europe (PACE) launching an investigation into the WHO to look into the issue of a “falsified pandemic.” During the subsequent hearing the epidemiologist Dr Wolfgang Wodarg said:

    The WHO basically held the trigger for the pandemic preparedness plans, they had a key role to play in deciding on the pandemic. Around 18 billion dollars was spent on this pandemic worldwide. Millions were vaccinated for no good reason. It is not even clear that the vaccine had a positive effect, because it was not clinically tested.”

    At the same hearing Professor Dr Ulrich Keil, Director of the WHO Collaborating Centre for Epidemiology at the University of Munster, said:

    A number of scientists and others are questioning the decision of the WHO to declare an international pandemic. The H1N1 virus is not a new virus, but has been known to us for decades […] In Germany, about 10,000 deaths are attributed to seasonal ‘flu, especially among older and frail people. Only a very small number of deaths, namely 187, can be attributed to the H1N1 virus in Germany – and many of those are dubious.”

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Dr. Tedros Adhanom Ghebreyesus

    Of course nothing came of it because PACE were making allegations against the World Health Organisation. The WHO don’t break the rules, they make the rules. Amazingly, probably because no one ever learns anything from history, we all believed the WHO this time.

    To imagine these huge investments made by pharmaceutical corporations and private foundations don’t buy influence is so naive it barely warrants mention. The WHO is essentially a policy lobby group for the powerful globalists who own it. Why an organisation with such significant and clear conflicts of financial interests should be considered a global health authority is anyone’s guess.

    On the 11th March the WHO declared the SARS-CoV-2 global pandemic. On 15th March 2020 UK Health Secretary Matt Hancock stated that vulnerable people would be required to quarantine themselves or self isolate. 

    The State issued a set of guidelines for avoiding the spread of infection. On the 16th March UK Prime Minister Boris Johnson issued a statement advising people to practice social distancing, avoid non essential travel and warned that drastic measures may be needed to protect the NHS and the most vulnerable.

    On the 18th of March the Director General of the BMGF funded WHO Dr. Tedros Adhanom Ghebreyesus gave a virtual press conference. He stated:

    WHO continues to call on all countries to implement a comprehensive approach with the aim of slowing down transmission and flattening the curve. This approach is saving lives and buying time for the development of vaccines and treatments. As you know, the first vaccine trial has begun……This virus is presenting us with an unprecedented threat”

    We are about to discuss why COVID 19 is not an unprecedented threat. On the 20th of March Boris Johnson ordered the closure of all venues for social gathering, such as pubs, cafes and restaurants. On March 23rd the UK State legislated for the Coronavirus Act and placed the UK in lockdown. Just as the WHO and their other partners called on them to do.

    LOCKDOWN TO PROTECT THE NHS

    The NHS was created to protect us, that’s why we pay for it. It is difficult to pinpoint exactly when this relationship flipped on its head.

    After years of chronic underfunding by successive governments of all persuasions, interminable mismanagement, savage ideologically driven austerity cuts, crippling Private Finance Initiative debts and increasing privatisation for corporate profit, there is absolutely no reason to believe the State cares about either our health or the NHS.

    Every single major health policy and legislative decision, made over the last few decades, clearly demonstrates that it doesn’t.

    The basic premise, apparently believed by so many, that the State has now decided to act to keep us safe is tragically comical. For us to swallow this tripe we need to be sufficiently terrified to willingly accept the imagined protection of the State. The MSM has been doing its best to make sure we are and that we do. The 24 hour fear-porn cycle is a wonder to behold.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    NHS dance routines are a sensation

    Most of this is based upon claims about deaths and stories about desperately overloaded hospitals struggling to cope with the pressure. Meanwhile, as millions of British people remain under house arrest, glued to their TV’s and fondle pads, the data that has been released by official sources doesn’t back up any of the tales we have been spun.

    This inconvenient truth has been reported by very few in the MSM print media and has been met with deafening silence on our TV’s. Rather, the data has been convincingly spun to tell a story that doesn’t stand up to scrutiny.

    Evidence of NHS overload is entirely absent. The State will claim this is thanks to the lockdown regime. Certainly the fact that people with other serious conditions haven’t been treated has alleviated pressure on the NHS. Unfortunately, the evidence also indicates the lockdown regime is probably killing them in increasing numbers. Though it seems unlikely the State will claim responsibility for that.

    The Financial Times reported that close to half of the UK’s hospital beds were empty. With just 60% of acute beds occupied this is 30% less than this time last year.

    In the same period last year the NHS was creaking under the pressure of demand, prompting then Prime Minister Theresa May to suggest scrapping NHS targets. Once again, the State was only concerned with how the figures looked not about people dying on trolleys in corridors. This year it cares, honest!

    During a supposed global pandemic we’ve had the lowest ever national A&E attendance. Manchester hospitals report a 57% bed occupation rate compared to their average of 94%.

    Most concerning is the huge drop in cardiology patients. With Heart disease killing more than 40,000 people under the age of 75 every year in the UK, and with a reported rise in fatalities last year, this prompted Professor John Howarth from North Cumbria Integrated Care NHS Foundation Trust to express grave concern.

    “I am really worried that people are not seeking the help they need for important conditions other than Covid-19.”

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Nightingales – empty!

    Indeed, if your world view is supplied by the MSM, deaths from anything other than C19 seem to have become practically irrelevant in the space of a few weeks. The Health Service journal (HSJ) reports that the NHS has four times as many empty beds as normal. Confirming that more than 40% of acute beds are unoccupied.

    Even in London, the alleged epicentre of the C19 pandemic, that figure is still nearly 29%.

    The much publicised Nightingale temporary hospitals, a mobilisation the MSM were keen to portray as putting the nation on a war footing, which were allegedly required to cope with the surge of C19 patients, aren’t necessary.

    Of the 1,555 Intensive Care Unit (ICU) beds available in London 1,245 are occupied. So questions must be asked why 19 patients, who presumably needed intensive care, were seemingly moved unnecessarily into the 4,000 bed London Nightingale over the Easter weekend.

    Contrary to the claimed justification for the lockdown, as many have repeatedly warned, the health consequences of the lockdown regime could far outweigh the risks presented by C19.

    Excess mortality this year is higher than average but reported coronavirus deaths form a smaller part of that bigger picture.

    The HSJ reported a senior NHS sources who stated:

    There could be some very serious unintended consequences. While there will be a lot of covid-19 fatalities, we could end up losing more ‘years of life’ because of fatalities relating to non-covid-19 health complications.”

    The deputy director of research at the Nuffield Trust Sarah Scobie echoed this concern:

    The PHE [Public Health England] data suggests there could be significant problems already developing for heart disease related conditions patients, for example. Attendances relating to myocardial infarction at emergency departments have dropped right down, whereas ambulance calls in relation to chest pain have gone right up.”

    Not only is there no evidence that the NHS is even close to struggling to cope with a non-existent surge, the likely severe health consequences of the State’s lockdown policy are starting to emerge. When we look at the data on claimed COVID 19 deaths the picture only becomes more alarming.

    LOCKDOWN & REPORTED DEATHS

    Everyday, for weeks, the MSM has reported every single UK death which was supposedly due to COVID 19. This has been central to their effort to convince us of the severity of the pandemic. The reporting always supports the State’s narrative that the lockdown is necessary.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Under normal circumstances, when someone dies, a person who knows them well, such as a family member, or someone who was physically close to the person at the time of death, is the qualified informant who can notify the registrar of the circumstances and non medical details of the death.

    That is not true for suspected C19 patients. For them a funeral director, who has almost certainly never met the deceased, can be the qualified informant. This places far more emphasis on the Medical Certificate of Cause of Death (MCCD) as registration can take place without any input from family or anyone else familiar with the circumstances of the death.

    Prior to the Coronavirus Act, the last attending doctor to the deceased had the responsibility to register the death. However, in the case of suspected C19 deaths, that duty can be discharged by a doctor who has never met the patient.

    The UK State guidance for C19 patients states:

    A doctor who attended the deceased during their last illness has a legal responsibility to complete a MCCD….. this duty may be discharged through another doctor who may complete an MCCD in an emergency period….In an emergency period, any doctor can complete the MCCD….For the purposes of the emergency period, the attendance may be in person, via video/visual consultation, but not audio (e.g. via telephone)….Where the certifying doctor has not seen the deceased before death they should delete the words last seen alive by me on.

    When an MCCD is completed the medical causes are listed sequentially with the immediate cause of death at the top and the underlying cause of death at the bottom of the list. For example, heart failure caused by pneumonia stemming from influenza would list the immediate cause of death as a heart attack and the underlying cause as influenza. That underlying cause is usually diagnosed through positive test results.

    It is crucial to understand that for C19 to be recorded on the MCCD, as the underlying cause of death, there does not need to be any test based diagnosis of the syndrome. Diagnosis can simply be from observation of symptoms or CT scans. The guidance to medical practitioners states:

    if before death the patient had symptoms typical of COVID 19 infection, but the test result has not been received, it would be satisfactory to give ‘COVID-19’ as the cause of death, tick Box B and then share the test result when it becomes available. In the circumstances of there being no swab, it is satisfactory to apply clinical judgement.

    Given this seeming lack of clarity, guidance from the Royal College of Pathologists (RCP) is also concerning.

    In circumstances where C19 is merely believed to be a factor they advise that there is no need for a post mortem.

    If a death is believed to be due to confirmed COVID-19 infection, there is unlikely to be any need for a post-mortem examination to be conducted and the Medical Certificate of Cause of Death should be issued.”

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Karry Mullis

    Post-mortems are not standard procedure and are normally required only where the cause of death is unknown or where the circumstances appear suspicious. However, the recommendation of the RCP is another part of a systemic approach to C19 deaths which is inexplicably opaque.

    Even when a sample test is undertaken to identify C19, questions remain. The RT-PCR test commonly used to test for C19 does not appear to be very reliable, nor is it designed as a diagnostic tool for identifying viruses.

    study from the Department of Microbiology, Queen Mary Hospital, University of Hong Kong found wild variations in RT-PCR accuracy. It was found to be between 22%  – 80% reliable depending on how it was applied. This general unreliability has been confirmed by other studies. Further studies show clear discrepancies between RT-PCR test results and clinical indication from CT scans.

    Most of these studies indicate RT-PCR failure to detect C19 in symptomatic patients, so-called “false negative” tests. When Chinese researchers from the Department of Epidemiology and Biostatistics School of Public Health conducted data analysis of the RT-PCR tests of asymptomatic patients they also found an 80% false positive rate.

    Having passed peer review and publication the paper was subsequently withdrawn for what seem quite bizarre reasons. It was removed from the scientific literature because it “depended on theoretical deduction.” The paper was not testing an experimental hypothesis, it was an epidemiological analysis of the available statistical data. All such statistical analysis relies upon theoretical deduction. The claimed reason for withdrawal suggests that all data analysis is now considered to be completely useless.

    It seems scientific claims that C19 numbers are underestimated are fine, claims they are overestimated are not. Either way, whether false negative or false positive, there is plenty of evidence to question the reliability of the RT-PCR test for diagnosing COVID 19.

    The MSM has suggested that enhanced RT-PCR testing can detect the virus SARS-CoV-2 and, in particular, the amount of it in the patient’s system, the viral load. This is disinformation.

    The Nobel winning scientist who devised PCR, Karry Mullis, speaking about the use of PCR to detect HIV stated:

    Quantitative PCR is an oxymoron. PCR is intended to identify substances qualitatively, but by its very nature is unsuited for estimating numbers [viral load]…These tests cannot detect free, infectious viruses at all…The tests can detect genetic sequences of viruses, but not viruses themselves.”

    Reported C19 deaths can be registered without a test clearly diagnosing any coronavirus, let alone C19. The death can be signed off by a doctor who has never seen the patient and can then be registered by someone who has never met the deceased and was nowhere near them when they died.

    Further provision in the Coronavirus Act then allows for the body to be cremated, potentially against the family’s wishes, ensuring a confirmatory autopsy is impossible, though it is unlikely one will be conducted anyway.

    To say this raises questions about the official reported statistics is an understatement. Questions in no way allege either medical malpractice or negligence. Neither are required for significant confusion to occur because the potential for widespread misreporting of causes of death seems to be a core element of the C19 MCCD process the State has constructed.

    LOCKDOWN THE DATA

    At the time of writing The UK is said to have 93,873 cases with 12,107 deaths attributed to C19. Both the infection and mortality rates are showing a declining trend.

    Given the apparent haphazard reliability of tests, strange reporting procedures and oddly relaxed registration requirements, the claimed attribution is pretty weak.

    Coupled with the data which shows unusually low hospital admissions, with little to no evidence of the widely anticipated “surge,” justification for the State’s lockdown of society and the economy appears painfully thin. The evidence base does not improve when we look at the official data.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    ONS Data

    The Office of National Statistics (ONS) have released analysis of the C19 deaths that occurred during March 2020

    In total 3,912 deaths were recorded of which 3,372 (86%) listed C19 as the underlying cause of death. Of these, 38 (1%) were cases where C19 was only suspected as the underlying cause, meaning neither a test nor any clear clinical presentation was observed. The problem is that the RT-PCR test, supposedly confirming C19, doesn’t tell us much either.

    Of the 3,372 deaths recorded with underlying C19, approximately 3,068 had at least one comorbidity with the majority having more than two. Not only does the RT-PCR test fail to provide any reliable proof that these people even had C19 the existence of other comorbidities provides further reason to question if the C19 was a contributory factor.

    Of the 3,912 people who died, 540 of them merely mentioned C19 on the MCCG with no indication that it contributed to the deaths. With at least 91% of patients having comorbidities, there is very little evidence that the people who died with a C19 infection wouldn’t have died without.

    The age profile of the deceased is practically identical to standard all cause mortality in the UK. If C19 is a viral pandemic it is one that behaves like normal mortality.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    And yet, despite all this, the MSM reported every one of them to the public as confirmed C19 deaths.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Another, perhaps even more alarming possibility has arisen. While heart disease accounts for 14% of C19 comorbidities, reported deaths from heart disease have mysteriously dropped by the corresponding amount during the same period. This clearly indicates that patients dying from other causes, such as heart failure, are being recorded, and certainly reported by the MSM, as dying from C19.

    This illustrates a far more complex picture than we have been given to believe. Why have the State and the MSM made so many alarming claims about people dying from C19 when the evidence supporting those claims is, at best, questionable?

    None of this is the fault of medical practitioners or bodies like the Office Of National Statistics (ONS). The ONS system has been both reliable and informative for many years. Yet once again, in the case of C19 deaths, the State felt it was necessary to make some changes.

    On the March 30th the MSM reported that the UK State had instructed the ONS to change the way they record C19 deaths. Explaining the change to recording “mentions” of COVID 19 an unnamed spokesperson for the ONS said:

    It will be based on mentions of Covid-19 on death certificates. It will include suspected cases of Covid-19 where someone has not been tested positive for Covid-19.”

    This habit of states deciding to change the C19 mortality data, by adding in people who are assumed to have died from it, appears to be a global policy. The China CDC did the same and the U.S have just added a significant number to their statistics.

    In every case the revision increases and never decreases the fatality statistics. Why do states around the world feel the need to do this? Is it because they are concerned about statistical rigour or are they more concerned about justifying their lockdown regimes?

    The ONS reported all cause mortality for week 14 ending April 3rd. They recorded 16,387 deaths which was 6,082 higher than the ONS 5 year average. They stated that 21.2% of total deaths “mentioned” Covid 19. The MSM immediately pounced on this claiming this meant COVID 19 had pushed up the death toll to unprecedented levels. This was outrageous disinformation. That is not what the data showed.

    The ONS stated that of the 6,082 excess deaths 3,475 “mentioned” coronavirus. Of those 1,466 also mentioned influenza and pneumonia. Consequently, while registered deaths are 6,082 above the 5 year average, only 2009 of those solely mentioned C19 with 4,073 mentioning other underlying causes. It is worth remembering only C19 deaths can be “mentioned” without a clear positive test result

    Therefore, at least 67% of that excess mortality is being caused by other unknown factors that no one seems to care about. The MSM have absolutely no interests at all in this more severe health crisis. Why not? Once again they have completely misled the public and deny the existence of another, more significant reason for concern. Perhaps anticipating this the ONS stated:

    “Influenza and Pneumonia” has been included for comparison, as a well-understood cause of death involving respiratory infection that is likely to have somewhat similar risk factors to COVID-19.”

    Short of openly stating that C19 is no more deadly than any other pneumonia like illnesses, the ONS appear to be trying to get a message across. Perhaps they can’t say it directly.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    ONS data showing mortality in 2020 comparing C19 to other respiratory illness

    As the so called pandemic has progressed more in depth studies have begun to emerge. Initial findings from Chinese scientists indicate that SARS-CoV-2 has an infection fatality rate (IFR) of between 0.04% and 0.12%. which is comparable to flu pandemics with an estimated IFR of 0.1%. None of these have required a lockdown regime.

    Further studies have highlighted the overestimated risk allegedly presented by SARS-CoV-2. [Including a new study released just yesterday – ed.]

    For the year to date, the ONS showed a comparison of the deaths mentioning C19 and deaths mentioning pneumonia and Influenza. Deaths this year from pneumonia and influenza appear to stand at around 30,000.

    Quite clearly, according to the ONS, other respiratory infections, like pneumonia and influenza, currently pose a significantly greater threat to life than COVID 19. Something is certainly pushing up mortality in the UK but, at the very most, only 33% of that increase is vaguely attributable to C19.

    LOCKDOWN TO COVER A MYRIAD OF SINS

    The MSM have recently started floating the idea that the lockdown regime could become the new normal.

    According to the State it may be necessary to go in an out of various levels of the regime from time to time, depending on the State’s threat assessment. This is based on scientific research bought and paid for by pharmaceutical corporations and private foundations including GlaxoSmithKline (Wellcome Trust).

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Immunity control citizen

    Seeing as it is increasingly evident that the C19 threat has been massively over-hyped, why would the State and its globalist partners want the economic destruction to continue?

    Firstly it delivers on a number of long held globalist objectives.

    A cashless society, mandatory vaccination, universal basic income, a surveillance state, restricted freedom of movement and a complete restructuring of the global economy have already been touted as necessary following the “pandemic.” All of these ambitions and economic realities existed before the pandemic first emerged in China.

    The State has already moved towards censoring anyone who questions vaccines. It is vital to understand that the canard of the antivaxxer is a meaningless trope.

    It is entirely possible to accept that vaccines can contribute towards effective preventative public health programs while, at the same time, questioning the efficacy and purpose of some vaccines. Vaccines are not all the same.

    The State’s and the MSM’s insistence that anyone who question any vaccines is some sort of whacked out, new age, science Luddite is total nonsense. No one will be permitted to question vaccines, and that fact alone should be sufficient to raise anyone’s suspicion.

    From GAVI to the WHO and from the BMGF to Imperial College the response to the C19 pandemic has been driven by foundations and pharmaceutical corporations with considerable investments in vaccine development. Of course they would like to see global mandatory vaccination.

    To just ignore this, because you’ve been told by the MSM that questioning any vaccine is a “conspiracy theory”, not only evidences a lack of critical thinking it demonstrates a degree of brainwashing.

    Global financial institutions, such as the IMF, have been advocating the cashless society for years. A cashless society will allow central banks to control every aspect of your life.

    Everything you buy can be tracked and your purchases could easily be limited to exclude certain items.

    Although there is very little evidence that handling cash presents any increased threat of infection that hasn’t stopped the MSM from selling the idea.

    The impact of the lockdown regime across the globe has already had a devastating economic impact. All the indicators are that the regime will throw the global economy into a deep depression. The longer it continues the worse it will get.

    The tendency of some to claim this doesn’t matter because saving life is the only concern is hopelessly myopic. The link between poverty and significantly increased mortality is beyond dispute. The cure will definitely be far worse than the disease.

    As millions are forced into unemployment the outlook isn’t good. However, while the State will undoubtedly claim that unemployment has been caused by the C19 crisis, in truth the imminent economic collapse was already driving up unemployment before the crisis began.

    This has led to increasing calls for the State to provide a Universal Basic Income.

    This will create mass dependency upon the State for  huge swathes of the population. Affording the State immeasurable control over people’s lives. In a cashless society, people who don’t behave in accordance with State regulations, could be punished financially. Instant fines will be commonplace.

    We are already seeing how that control can be deployed within a surveillance society as the State and its compliant MSM put the idea of immunity passports into the public imagination.

    The link between this and mandatory vaccination is obvious. This proposed policy comes straight from the heart of the globalist think tanks.

    ID2020 is a globalist initiative which intends to provide everyone on earth with an authorised identity. GAVI, Microsoft, BMGF and the Rockerfeller Foundation are among the happy ID2020 alliance who will decide who you are allowed to be.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Biometric ID controlled by your friendly ID2020 globalists – Because they care!

    Comically they claim that proving who you are to the State is somehow a human right. This is utter bilge. I don’t know about you, but I know who I am and so do the people I care about. I couldn’t care less who the State thinks I am. Like everyone else on Earth you were born with inalienable human rights. The State doesn’t define what they are, they just choose to ignore them.

    ID2020 is in no way objective. Your digital biometric ID can be “good” which means it can also be “bad.” Bill Gates and Rockerfellers are among those who state:

    With a “good” digital identity you can enjoy your rights to privacy, security, and choice.”

    Which means you can’t if its “bad.” As longs as you are a good citizen, do as you are told, get your mandatory vaccinations and don’t step out of line, you can have your rights because megalomaniacs think they are gods who have the power to allow or deny them.

    Your digital ID will control the information you are allowed to access and your immunity passport will almost certainly be part of your State authorised identity as we move towards something indistinguishable from China’s social credit system.

    It will be used to monitor your behaviour.

    Your immunity passport status will depend upon where you go and who with. The State has decided that we all need contact tracing apps to regulate who we meet and limit our freedom of movement.

    If you meet the wrong person or go to the wrong area, or perhaps fail to produce your authorisation Q-code on demand, then you will be locked down.

    Perhaps the biggest deception of all is yet to come as the State manoeuvres to blame the C19 for the economic collapse.

    Firstly, it isn’t C19 but rather the lockdown regime that has sped up destruction of the economy, but that destruction was inevitable anyway. The 2008 credit crunch was a failure of the banks. They speculated in the markets and lost.

    As a result we have endured a decade of austerity to bail them out. Socialism only applies to those who can afford it. Austerity has reduced essential public services to rubble, and now, when we supposedly need them most, we’ve all been placed under house arrest to stop us using them while many of the most vulnerable have been ignored. The irony is laughable.

    While we’ve all suffered austerity, the central banks have been printing funny money, blowing up the debt bubble to unimaginable proportions.

    The result has been increasing consumer debt, staggering levels of corporate borrowing and, though government deficits have reduced, government debt is off the charts, even in comparison to 2010 levels.

    This kind of debt-based economy was never sustainable and global financiers have known it for years.

    What the globalists needed was a reason to reset the economy without losing power. Perhaps it is another coincidence that the C19 lockdown regime just happens to deliver both the mechanism and the excuse to press that global reset button. That it also ushers in all the globalist’s desires is just another in a very long line of remarkable coincidences.

    Now that global terrorism is no longer a daily threat and global warming has been put on the back burner, the new normal of the ever shifting threat from pandemic seems to be the novel war on terrorTraining, funding and equipping terrorist groups has served the State well in the first two decades of the 21st century but now it is ready to move on to the next phase by exploiting a terror closer to the heart of every home. Disease.

    In their totality, for those willing to look, it is transparent that these response measures have coalesced to create the framework for a totalitarian dictatorship. One rolling out at pace in the UK. Similar draconian diktats have sprung up across the globe.

    A coordinated global effort like this doesn’t just happen. It takes years of training and planning. The only people who can’t see it are those who, for whatever reason, choose not to.


    Tyler Durden

    Thu, 04/23/2020 – 02:00

  • Iran Hails First 'Successful' Military Satellite Launch, But US Intelligence Says 'Failure' To Orbit
    Iran Hails First ‘Successful’ Military Satellite Launch, But US Intelligence Says ‘Failure’ To Orbit

    Amid soaring tensions with the US and on the same day that President Trump issued a provocative tweet ordering the Navy to “shoot down and destroy” Iranian gunboats in the gulf, Iran’s Revolutionary Guards (IRGC) announced the successful launch of the country’s first military satellite on Wednesday.

    Calling the surprise satellite launch (to the West that is) a “great success,” the IRGC statement hailed that “The first satellite of the Islamic Republic of Iran has been successfully launched into orbit by the Islamic Revolutionary Guard Corps.” State media and the elite guard further called it “a great success and a new development in the field of space for Islamic Iran.”

    However, unnamed American defense sources are pouring cold water on the claim, with Fox News citing that “U.S. intelligence has not detected any new satellites orbiting Earth, indicating Iran’s satellite launch likely a failure, officials say.”

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    The United States has long countered that the Islamic Republic’s satellite and space program is actually cover the further development of banned ballistic missiles. Western leaders as well as Israel have charged that Tehran desires to achieve nuclear warhead delivery capability through the program.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Wednesday’s successful launch, via Iranian state media.

    Undeterred by the fact that two recent satellite launch attempts in August of last year and in February of this year were spectacular failures (with a US or Israeli cyberattack allegedly involved in sabotaging the latter), Iran pushed forward with the launch which has apparently caught Washington by surprise

    This also explains in part Trump’s seemingly ‘random’ lashing out at Iran Wednesday morning: “I have instructed the United States Navy to shoot down and destroy any and all Iranian gunboats if they harass our ships at sea,” the president tweeted early morning.

    Iranian state TV covered the launch, further details of which are described by AFP as follows:

    The satellite dubbed the Nour — meaning “light” in Persian — had been launched from the Markazi desert, a vast expanse in Iran’s central plateau.

    The satellite “orbited the Earth at 425 kilometres (264 miles)” above sea level, said Sepahnews.

    The rocket itself was named  Qassed, meaning “messenger”, and contained a Koranic inscription that read: “Glory be to God who made this available to us, otherwise we could not have done it.” 

    The milestone unleashed national celebrations at a moment Iran’s leaders needed to show their population a positive achievement, given the multiple disasters of the past months

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    This includes losing Gen. Qassem Soleimani to a US assassination by drone, and the subsequent Ukrainian airline disaster which the IRGC belatedly owned up to, but mostly the more recent coronavirus pandemic which has sent the economy plunging further amid the state of national emergency.

    Meanwhile, the real question remains whether the satellite is actually now orbiting the earth, which early US intelligence statements appear to dispute.


    Tyler Durden

    Thu, 04/23/2020 – 01:00

  • Human Lab Rats: The US Government's Secret History Of Grisly Experiments
    Human Lab Rats: The US Government’s Secret History Of Grisly Experiments

    Authored by John Whitehead via The Rutherford Institute,

    “They were monsters with human faces, in crisp uniforms, marching in lockstep, so banal you don’t recognize them for what they are until it’s too late.”

    – Ransom Riggs, Miss Peregrine’s Home for Peculiar Children

    I have never known any government to put the best interests of its people first, and this COVID-19 pandemic is no exception.

    Now this isn’t intended to be a debate over whether COVID-19 is a legitimate health crisis or a manufactured threat. Such crises can—and are—manipulated by governments in order to expand their powers. As such, it is possible for the virus to be both a genuine menace to public health and a menace to freedom.

    Yet we can’t afford to overlook the fact that governments the world over, including the U.S. government, have unleashed untold horrors upon the world in the name of global conquest, the acquisition of greater wealth, scientific experimentation, and technological advances, all packaged in the guise of the greater good.

    While the U.S. government is currently looking into the possibility that the novel coronavirus spread from a Chinese laboratory rather than a market, the virus could just as easily have been created by the U.S. government or one of its allies.

    After all, grisly experiments, barbaric behavior and inhumane conditions have become synonymous with the U.S. government, which has meted out untold horrors against humans and animals alike.

    For instance, did you know that the U.S. government has been buying hundreds of dogs and cats from “Asian meat markets” as part of a gruesome experiment into food-borne illnesses?

    The cannibalistic experiments involve killing cats and dogs purchased from Colombia, Brazil, Vietnam, China and Ethiopia, and then feeding the dead remains to laboratory kittens, bred in government laboratories for the express purpose of being infected with a disease and then killed.

    It gets more gruesome.

    The Department of Veterans Affairs has been removing parts of dogs’ brains to see how it affects their breathing; applying electrodes to dogs’ spinal cords (before and after severing them) to see how it impacts their cough reflexes; and implanting pacemakers in dogs’ hearts and then inducing them to have heart attacks (before draining their blood). All of the laboratory dogs are killed during the course of these experiments.

    It’s not just animals that are being treated like lab rats by government agencies.

    “We the people” have also become the police state’s guinea pigs: to be caged, branded, experimented upon without our knowledge or consent, and then conveniently discarded and left to suffer from the after-effects.

    Back in 2017, FEMA “inadvertently” exposed nearly 10,000 firefighters, paramedics and other responders to a deadly form of ricin during simulated bioterrorism response sessions. In 2015, it was discovered that an Army lab had been “mistakenly” shipping deadly anthrax to labs and defense contractors for a decade.

    While these particular incidents have been dismissed as “accidents,” you don’t have to dig very deep or go very back in the nation’s history to uncover numerous cases in which the government deliberately conducted secret experiments on an unsuspecting populace—citizens and noncitizens alike—making healthy people sick by spraying them with chemicals, injecting them with infectious diseases and exposing them to airborne toxins.

    At the time, the government reasoned that it was legitimate to experiment on people who did not have full rights in society such as prisoners, mental patients, and poor blacks.

    In Alabama, for example, 600 black men with syphilis were allowed to suffer without proper medical treatment in order to study the natural progression of untreated syphilis. In California, older prisoners had testicles from livestock and from recently executed convicts implanted in them to test their virility. In Connecticut, mental patients were injected with hepatitis.

    In Maryland, sleeping prisoners had a pandemic flu virus sprayed up their noses. In Georgia, two dozen “volunteering” prison inmates had gonorrhea bacteria pumped directly into their urinary tracts through the penis. In Michigan, male patients at an insane asylum were exposed to the flu after first being injected with an experimental flu vaccine. In Minnesota, 11 public service employee “volunteers” were injected with malaria, then starved for five days.

    In New York, dying patients had cancer cells introduced into their systems. In Ohio, over 100 inmates were injected with live cancer cells. Also in New York, prisoners at a reformatory prison were also split into two groups to determine how a deadly stomach virus was spread: the first group was made to swallow an unfiltered stool suspension, while the second group merely breathed in germs sprayed into the air. And in Staten Island, children with mental retardation were given hepatitis orally and by injection to see if they could then be cured.

    As the Associated Press reports, “The late 1940s and 1950s saw huge growth in the U.S. pharmaceutical and health care industries, accompanied by a boom in prisoner experiments funded by both the government and corporations. By the 1960s, at least half the states allowed prisoners to be used as medical guinea pigs … because they were cheaper than chimpanzees.”

    Moreover, “Some of these studies, mostly from the 1940s to the ’60s, apparently were never covered by news media. Others were reported at the time, but the focus was on the promise of enduring new cures, while glossing over how test subjects were treated.”

    Media blackouts, propaganda, spin. Sound familiar?

    How many government incursions into our freedoms have been blacked out, buried under “entertainment” news headlines, or spun in such a way as to suggest that anyone voicing a word of caution is paranoid or conspiratorial?

    Unfortunately, these incidents are just the tip of the iceberg when it comes to the atrocities the government has inflicted on an unsuspecting populace in the name of secret experimentation.

    For instance, there was the U.S. military’s secret race-based testing of mustard gas on more than 60,000 enlisted men. As NPR reports, “All of the World War II experiments with mustard gas were done in secret and weren’t recorded on the subjects’ official military records. Most do not have proof of what they went through. They received no follow-up health care or monitoring of any kind. And they were sworn to secrecy about the tests under threat of dishonorable discharge and military prison time, leaving some unable to receive adequate medical treatment for their injuries, because they couldn’t tell doctors what happened to them.”

    And then there was the CIA’s MKULTRA program in which hundreds of unsuspecting American civilians and military personnel were dosed with LSD, some having the hallucinogenic drug slipped into their drinks at the beach, in city bars, at restaurants. As Time reports, “before the documentation and other facts of the program were made public, those who talked of it were frequently dismissed as being psychotic.”

    Now one might argue that this is all ancient history and that the government today is different from the government of yesteryear, but has the U.S. government really changed?

    Has the government become any more humane, any more respectful of the rights of the citizenry?

    Has it become any more transparent or willing to abide by the rule of law? Has it become any more truthful about its activities? Has it become any more cognizant of its appointed role as a guardian of our rights?

    Or has the government simply hunkered down and hidden its nefarious acts and dastardly experiments under layers of secrecy, legalism and obfuscations? Has it not become wilier, more slippery, more difficult to pin down?

    Having mastered the Orwellian art of Doublespeak and followed the Huxleyan blueprint for distraction and diversion, are we not dealing with a government that is simply craftier and more conniving that it used to be?

    Consider this: after revelations about the government’s experiments spanning the 20th century spawned outrage, the government began looking for human guinea pigs in other countries, where “clinical trials could be done more cheaply and with fewer rules.”

    In Guatemala, prisoners and patients at a mental hospital were infected with syphilis, “apparently to test whether penicillin could prevent some sexually transmitted disease.” In Uganda, U.S.-funded doctors “failed to give the AIDS drug AZT to all the HIV-infected pregnant women in a study… even though it would have protected their newborns.” Meanwhile, in Nigeria, children with meningitis were used to test an antibiotic named Trovan. Eleven children died and many others were left disabled.

    The more things change, the more they stay the same.

    Case in point: back in 2016, it was announced that scientists working for the Department of Homeland Security would begin releasing various gases and particles on crowded subway platforms as part of an experiment aimed at testing bioterror airflow in New York subways.

    The government insisted that the gases released into the subways by the DHS were nontoxic and did not pose a health risk. It’s in our best interests, they said, to understand how quickly a chemical or biological terrorist attack might spread. And look how cool the technology is—said the government cheerleaders—that scientists can use something called DNATrax to track the movement of microscopic substances in air and food. (Imagine the kinds of surveillance that could be carried out by the government using trackable airborne microscopic substances you breathe in or ingest.)

    Mind you, this is the same government that in 1949 sprayed bacteria into the Pentagon’s air handling system, then the world’s largest office building. In 1950, special ops forces sprayed bacteria from Navy ships off the coast of Norfolk and San Francisco, in the latter case exposing all of the city’s 800,000 residents.

    In 1953, government operatives staged “mock” anthrax attacks on St. Louis, Minneapolis, and Winnipeg using generators placed on top of cars. Local governments were reportedly told that “‘invisible smokescreen[s]’ were being deployed to mask the city on enemy radar.” Later experiments covered territory as wide-ranging as Ohio to Texas and Michigan to Kansas.

    In 1965, the government’s experiments in bioterror took aim at Washington’s National Airport, followed by a 1966 experiment in which army scientists exposed a million subway NYC passengers to airborne bacteria that causes food poisoning.

    And this is the same government that has taken every bit of technology sold to us as being in our best interests—GPS devices, surveillance, nonlethal weapons, etc.—and used it against us, to track, control and trap us.

    So, no, I don’t think the government’s ethics have changed much over the years. It’s just taken its nefarious programs undercover.

    The question remains: why is the government doing this? The answer is always the same: money, power and total domination.

    It’s the same answer no matter which totalitarian regime is in power.

    The mindset driving these programs has, appropriately, been likened to that of Nazi doctors experimenting on Jews. As the Holocaust Museum recounts, Nazi physicians “conducted painful and often deadly experiments on thousands of concentration camp prisoners without their consent.”

    The Nazi’s unethical experiments ran the gamut from freezing experiments using prisoners to find an effective treatment for hypothermia, tests to determine the maximum altitude for parachuting out of a plane, injecting prisoners with malaria, typhus, tuberculosis, typhoid fever, yellow fever, and infectious hepatitis, exposing prisoners to phosgene and mustard gas, and mass sterilization experiments.

    The horrors being meted out against the American people can be traced back, in a direct line, to the horrors meted out in Nazi laboratories. In fact, following the second World War, the U.S. government recruited many of Hitler’s employees, adopted his protocols, embraced his mindset about law and order and experimentation, and implemented his tactics in incremental steps.

    Sounds far-fetched, you say? Read on. It’s all documented.

    As historian Robert Gellately recounts, the Nazi police state was initially so admired for its efficiency and order by the world powers of the day that J. Edgar Hoover, then-head of the FBI, actually sent one of his right-hand men, Edmund Patrick Coffey, to Berlin in January 1938 at the invitation of Germany’s secret police, the Gestapo.

    The FBI was so impressed with the Nazi regime that, according to the New York Times, in the decades after World War II, the FBI, along with other government agencies, aggressively recruited at least a thousand Nazis, including some of Hitler’s highest henchmen.

    All told, thousands of Nazi collaborators—including the head of a Nazi concentration camp, among others—were given secret visas and brought to America by way of Project Paperclip. Subsequently, they were hired on as spies, informants and scientific advisers, and then camouflaged to ensure that their true identities and ties to Hitler’s holocaust machine would remain unknown. All the while, thousands of Jewish refugees were refused entry visas to the U.S. on the grounds that it could threaten national securi

    Adding further insult to injury, American taxpayers have been paying to keep these ex-Nazis on the U.S. government’s payroll ever since. And in true Gestapo fashion, anyone who has dared to blow the whistle on the FBI’s illicit Nazi ties has found himself spied upon, intimidated, harassed and labeled a threat to national security.

    As if the government’s covert, taxpayer-funded employment of Nazis after World War II wasn’t bad enough, U.S. government agencies—the FBI, CIA and the military—have since fully embraced many of the Nazi’s well-honed policing tactics, and have used them repeatedly against American citizens.

    It’s certainly easy to denounce the full-frontal horrors carried out by the scientific and medical community within a despotic regime such as Nazi Germany, but what do you do when it’s your own government that claims to be a champion of human rights all the while allowing its agents to engage in the foulest, bases and most despicable acts of torture, abuse and experimentation?

    When all is said and done, this is not a government that has our best interests at heart.

    This is not a government that values us.

    Perhaps the answer lies in The Third Man, Carol Reed’s influential 1949 film starring Joseph Cotten and Orson Welles. In the film, set in a post-WW II Vienna, rogue war profiteer Harry Lime has come to view human carnage with a callous indifference, unconcerned that the diluted penicillin he’s been trafficking underground has resulted in the tortured deaths of young children.

    Challenged by his old friend Holly Martins to consider the consequences of his actions, Lime responds, “In these days, old man, nobody thinks in terms of human beings. Governments don’t, so why should we?

    “Have you ever seen any of your victims?” asks Martins.

    “Victims?” responds Limes, as he looks down from the top of a Ferris wheel onto a populace reduced to mere dots on the ground. “Look down there. Tell me. Would you really feel any pity if one of those dots stopped moving forever? If I offered you twenty thousand pounds for every dot that stopped, would you really, old man, tell me to keep my money, or would you calculate how many dots you could afford to spare? Free of income tax, old man. Free of income tax — the only way you can save money nowadays.”

    As I make clear in my book Battlefield America: The War on the American People, this is how the U.S. government sees us, too, when it looks down upon us from its lofty perch.

    To the powers-that-be, the rest of us are insignificant specks, faceless dots on the ground.

    To the architects of the American police state, we are not worthy or vested with inherent rights. This is how the government can justify treating us like economic units to be bought and sold and traded, or caged rats to be experimented upon and discarded when we’ve outgrown our usefulness.

    To those who call the shots in the halls of government, “we the people” are merely the means to an end.

    “We the people”—who think, who reason, who take a stand, who resist, who demand to be treated with dignity and care, who believe in freedom and justice for all—have become obsolete, undervalued citizens of a totalitarian state that, in the words of Rod Serling, “has patterned itself after every dictator who has ever planted the ripping imprint of a boot on the pages of history since the beginning of time. It has refinements, technological advances, and a more sophisticated approach to the destruction of human freedom.”

    In this sense, we are all Romney Wordsworth, the condemned man in Serling’s Twilight Zone episode “The Obsolete Man.”

    The Obsolete Man” speaks to the dangers of a government that views people as expendable once they have outgrown their usefulness to the State. Yet—and here’s the kicker—this is where the government through its monstrous inhumanity also becomes obsolete. As Serling noted in his original script for “The Obsolete Man,” “Any state, any entity, any ideology which fails to recognize the worth, the dignity, the rights of Man…that state is obsolete.

    How do you defeat a monster? You start by recognizing the monster for what it is.


    Tyler Durden

    Thu, 04/23/2020 – 00:00

  • Visualizing How Oil Prices Went Sub-Zero: Explaining The COVID-19 Oil Crash
    Visualizing How Oil Prices Went Sub-Zero: Explaining The COVID-19 Oil Crash

    The Great Lockdown continues to turn markets on their head.

    Last week, Visual Capitalist’s Jeff Desjardins dug into the unprecedented number of initial jobless claims coming out of the United States, which topped 22 million in a period of four weeks.

    It’s just days later, and we already have our next market abnormality: this time, traders were baffled by West Texas Intermediate (WTI) crude — the U.S. benchmark oil price — which somehow flipped negative for the first time in history.

    How is that possible? And how does it tie into the COVID-19 oil price crash in general?

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Setting the Geopolitical Stage

    Oil is a geopolitical game, and big price swings always come with a geopolitical undercurrent.

    This particular story picked up steam in February as OPEC+ producers tried to negotiate a production cut, amid concerns that COVID-19 could impact demand. Russia walked out on these meetings, and Saudi Arabia responded by undercutting oil prices by $6-8 per barrel.

    The world went into lockdown, energy demand dissipated, and oil producers continued to pump at will. Then on April 9th, nearly a full month after COVID-19 was declared a pandemic, Russia and Saudi Arabia finally settled their differences.

    However, this truce came too late — prices had already fell about 60% from February highs.

    How Prices Went Subzero

    Up until recently, this was a fairly run-of-the-mill oil price crash — but then prices suddenly sunk below zero, with May futures for WTI oil closing at -$37.63 on April 20th.

    For the first time in history, producers were willing to pay traders to take oil off their hands. This oddity is partially a function of the particularities of futures contracts:

    • Buyers Wanted (At Any Cost!)
      Futures contracts normally rollover to the next month without much happening, but in this case traders saw the May contract as a “hot potato”. No one wanted to be stuck taking delivery of oil when the world is awash in it and the country is in lockdown.

    • A Time and a Place
      Oil futures contracts specify a time and place for delivery. For WTI oil, that specific place is Cushing, Oklahoma. With most storage capacity booked already, taking physical delivery wasn’t even an option for many players.

    In other words, sellers outnumbered buyers by a crazy margin — and because oil is a physical commodity, someone has to ultimately take the contract.

    At time of publishing, the May contract and spot prices have “rebounded” to about $10. The June contract is slightly higher, at $13.

    “Never before has the oil industry come this close to testing its logistics capacity to the limit.”

    – International Energy Agency (IEA), Oil Market Report for April

    Overcoming the Supply Glut

    What do you do when oil is practically free?

    You store as much of it as you can, and hope that at some point you can sell it for more.

    Unfortunately, everyone has the exact same idea, and as a result there is a historic glut that is filling up the world’s storage capacity both on land and at sea:

    • In March, it was estimated that 76% of the world’s available oil storage capacity was already full.

    • A record-setting 160 million barrels of oil is being stored on tankers at sea, according to Reuters.

    • The cost of renting an oil supertanker has gone through the roof. It’s jumped from $20,000 per day to $200,000-$300,000 per day, according to Rystad Energy.

    It remains to be seen how fast the transportation industry will recover in a post-COVID-19 world, but for now the outlook for all oil producers is grim. The continued fallout will not only affect industry, but also the countries that rely on oil exports to balance their budgets.


    Tyler Durden

    Wed, 04/22/2020 – 23:40

  • YouTube Sides With World Health Organization On Coronavirus
    YouTube Sides With World Health Organization On Coronavirus

    Submitted by ValueWalk

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    YouTube says it will take down any videos that contradict what the World Health Organization says about the coronavirus. As the WHO finds itself in the middle of controversy over China’s handling of COVID-19, it sounds like any videos even criticizing the agency could be removed.

    Of course, the issue of censorship by the world’s biggest tech firms isn’t new, and it’s unlikely to change anytime soon.

    YouTube backs World Health Organization on coronavirus

    In an interview with CNN, YouTube CEO Susan Wojcicki said they’ve seen a 75% increase in video views for news from “authoritative sources” since the beginning of 2020. She also said they’ve been busy removing “problematic information” like anything that is “medically unsubstantiated.”

    Susan gave examples of videos advising people to take vitamin C or turmeric as content that violates YouTube’s policies. She also said YouTube will remove anything that goes against World Health Organization recommendations.

    Another example of a topic the video platform cracked down on is the conspiracy theory claiming 5G towers cause coronavirus symptoms. She added that even during non-pandemic times, they’ve been removing information that is a violation of their policy. She also said YouTube has made “numerous policy changes” to stay ahead of the rapid changes

    WHO says coronavirus didn’t come from a lab

    One of the most widespread theories about the coronavirus is that it originated in a lab in Wuhan, the original epicenter of the virus. The theory has picked up so much steam that the U.S. has reportedly launched an official investigation into it.

    However, YouTube could theoretically remove videos that talk about this theory because the World Health Organization officially said on Tuesday that COVID-19 did not come from any lab. A spokesperson for the WHO said on Tuesday that the virus is likely of animal origin.

    USA Today and Reuters report that a spokesperson for the agency said it’s unclear how the novel coronavirus made the leap from bats to humans. They believe an intermediate animal served as a bridge.

    This isn’t the first time public health experts have said that COVID-19 wasn’t engineered in a lab. However, that doesn’t seem to be the big issue where theories about the Wuhan Institute of Virology’s possible involvement are concerned.

    Reuters specifically asked the WHO spokesperson to elaborate on whether the coronavirus may have accidentally escaped from a lab, but she declined. The Wuhan Institute of Virology has repeatedly dismissed theories that lax safety protocols allowed the virus to escape accidentally.

    Trump and others take aim at the WHO

    President Donald Trump wants to halt funding for the WHO due to its handling of the coronavirus, but he’s not the only one calling into question the agency’s efforts. The WHO has accepted China’s statements of the number of infections and deaths from COVID-19 without questioning the accuracy of the data. Meanwhile, numerous reports out of China have suggested that Beijing isn’t being totally transparent about the severity of the illness within its borders.

    WHO chief Tedros Adhanom Ghebreyesus has landed in the crosshairs amid calls for him to step down. Some are calling him a puppet of the Chinese Communist Party. He was Beijing’s choice for the position of WHO director general, Rep. Michael McCaul of the House Foreign Affairs Committee told USA Today. He said Tedros “used the WHO to trumpet their [China’s] lies about the virus.”

    Lawrence Gostin of the O’Neill Institute for National and Global Health Law at Georgetown University, told The New York Times in May 2017 that while Tedros was Ethiopia’s health minister, the government covered up three cholera outbreaks. Tedros denies the claim, and he became director general of the WHO due to his track record of fighting malaria and other serious diseases while serving as Ethiopia’s health minister.

    Lawsuit filed against the World Health Organization

    Trump isn’t the only one taking aim at the World Health Organization. Three Westchester, New York men are suing the agency, alleging that it mishandled the pandemic response. The lawsuit demands that the WHO pay “incalculable” damagers for the “injury, damage and loss” they suffered due to the pandemic.

    According to USA Today, the attorney who represents the plaintiffs in the lawsuit said in the lawsuit that the agency didn’t do enough to make sure the Chinese government was open and honest about the safeguards it was taken to protect against COVID-19.


    Tyler Durden

    Wed, 04/22/2020 – 23:20

  • Liquidity Crisis Over? In Drastic Reversal, Companies Issue Bonds To Repay Revolvers
    Liquidity Crisis Over? In Drastic Reversal, Companies Issue Bonds To Repay Revolvers

    Starting one month ago, hit by a dramatic flashback to events from the global financial crisis, US corporations panicked and rushed to obtain as much funding as they possibly could – especially since such key short-term funding markets such as Commercial Paper were effectively frozen – ahead of what would soon become an unprecedented shutdown of the US economy, or as Bank of America puts it, there were fears that the US economy would be hit by a liquidity crisis on top of a deep recession.

    Companies responded by drawing over $300 billion in revolvers…

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    … and from February until about two weeks ago C&I loans on bank balance sheets – which include revolvers and most other secured loans – grew more than $500bn.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Then, in late March, the Fed came to the rescue and announced primary and secondary market corporate credit facilities about a month ago, which was followed by a period where companies both drew credit lines and were able to issue record volumes of IG rated corporate bonds.

    Indeed, as BofA shows, more than 170 US companies have announced over $120bn credit line drawdowns over the past few weeks. That includes 77 IG-rated names, of which 22 issued corporate bonds shortly thereafter.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    With the primary market wide open – and backstopped by the Fed no less – more will follow. In addition, companies have also increased the sizes of their revolver/credit facilities without actually drawing. Revolver utilization ratio for US IG companies was around 12% as of 4Q19 and 30% during the financial crisis.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    But now, as BofA’s Hans Mikkelsen writes, in a stark reversal of the liquidity drawdown dynamics of the past month, we are seeing the clearest signs that some companies have confidence they can get to the other side because they are now issuing corporate bonds to pay down credit lines, with roughly $7 billion in IG bonds issued to repay revolvers.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Of course, as even Bank of America admits, the main if not only reason behind this striking reversal in liquidity dynamics, is the Fed and the record policy response, now that the US central banks is explicitly backstopping an even bigger corporate bond bubble.


    Tyler Durden

    Wed, 04/22/2020 – 23:17

  • China Sends US "Contaminated" COVID Test-Kits 
    China Sends US “Contaminated” COVID Test-Kits 

    It’s bad enough that China has frozen exports of medical equipment to the US during the pandemic. Now a new report sheds light on some COVID-19 test kits from the country that were sent “contaminated.” 

    The South China Morning Post (SCMP) said the University of Washington School of Medicine (UW Medicine) “went to extraordinary lengths to airlift tens of thousands of Covid-19 testing kits” during the start of the US outbreak to only discover last week that some of the tests are tainted. 

    “I’ve just recommended everyone who has these things pause and not use them at all,” said Geoff Baird, the interim chair of the UW Department of Laboratory Medicine, who led the group to secure the tests. “I can’t say I’m not disappointed.”

    Baird told SCMP that a colleague informed him on April 16 that some of the “liquid in vials he had sent appeared to have changed in color.” In shock, he said he stormed out of his office down to the UW Medicine storage facility where the test kits were being held and started to “tear through boxes.” 

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    COVID-19 testing vial.  (Photo: AFP)

    He said many of the vials looked “fine,” but a “small percentage of them had turned to an orange or yellow color, rather than hot pink,” which indicated bacterial growth and, ultimately, contamination. 

    Baird also had scientists add novel coronavirus to the contaminated vials and compared to uncontaminated liquid.

    The conclusions, he said: “There’s absolutely no difference.”

    After that, Baird immediately suspended future orders with the Chinese manufacturer. 

    Anita Nadelson, the Seattle businesswoman who helped the university secure the tests, said the Chinese firm would refund their money. 

    “They’re working diligently to identify and cure the issue,” Nadelson said. “We vetted these as best we could. It’s an unexpected turn on both sides.”

    Baird said the contamination is concentrated in the specimen-preserving liquid, which makes no contact with patients, adding that “we don’t expect there’s any real mechanism of harm to patients.”

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    A scientist runs a clinical test at UW Virology’s lab. (Photo by Karen Ducey/Getty Images)

    He said S. maltophilia was the bacterium found in the contaminated vials: 

    “It lives on surfaces and it lives on factory things and tubing,” he said. “I would think it’s in your home, my home, it’s on everything.” 

    Baird said the university gave 20,000 test kits to Public Health–Seattle & King County and another 15,000 to the state. 

    “I don’t know how many they’ve distributed yet,” he said.

    On Sunday, the state recalled 12,000 kits it handed out to counties.

    “We are working with our partners to have them discard the product and will work to replace them as quickly as we can,” said John Wiesman, the state secretary of health, in a statement.

    “About 5,000 of the 20,000 they gave us had been distributed by us, and approximately 300 had been used,” said James Apa, a Public Health–Seattle & King County spokesman, adding that “the problem with the kit itself shouldn’t present any health risk to patients.”

    Baird said while the contaminated test kits are a setback – there appears to be a national shortage of kits.

    “We should be doing more, but we’ve not seen our volume go up,” Baird said of testing at the UW Medicine facility. “There’s a cap on the amount of testing that can be done globally, and certainly nationally, there aren’t enough kits for swabs and VTM (viral transport media) for testing.” 

    Defective tests from China were not limited to the US. We noted earlier this month Spain received 640,000 tests that were later considered useless. 

    While China attempts to restore its image as a global leader and focus on distributing humanitarian relief to countries in need, the latest snafu of contaminated or defective COVID-19 testing kits is a public relations disaster.


    Tyler Durden

    Wed, 04/22/2020 – 23:00

  • Techno-Tyranny: How The US National Security State Is Using COVID-19 To Fulfill An Orwellian Vision
    Techno-Tyranny: How The US National Security State Is Using COVID-19 To Fulfill An Orwellian Vision

    Authored by Whitney Webb via TheLastAmericanVagabond.com,

    LAST YEAR, A GOVERNMENT COMMISSION CALLED FOR THE US TO ADOPT AN AI-DRIVEN MASS SURVEILLANCE SYSTEM FAR BEYOND THAT USED IN ANY OTHER COUNTRY IN ORDER TO ENSURE AMERICAN HEGEMONY IN ARTIFICIAL INTELLIGENCE. NOW, MANY OF THE “OBSTACLES” THEY HAD CITED AS PREVENTING ITS IMPLEMENTATION ARE RAPIDLY BEING REMOVED UNDER THE GUISE OF COMBATING THE CORONAVIRUS CRISIS.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Last year, a U.S. government body dedicated to examining how artificial intelligence can “address the national security and defense needs of the United States” discussed in detail the “structural” changes that the American economy and society must undergo in order to ensure a technological advantage over China, according to a recent document acquired through a FOIA request. This document suggests that the U.S. follow China’s lead and even surpass them in many aspects related to AI-driven technologies, particularly their use of mass surveillance. This perspective clearly clashes with the public rhetoric of prominent U.S. government officials and politicians on China, who have labeled the Chinese government’s technology investments and export of its surveillance systems and other technologies as a major “threat” to Americans’ “way of life.”

    In addition, many of the steps for the implementation of such a program in the U.S., as laid out in this newly available document, are currently being promoted and implemented as part of the government’s response to the current coronavirus (Covid-19) crisis. This likely due to the fact that many members of this same body have considerable overlap with the taskforces and advisors currently guiding the government’s plans to “re-open the economy” and efforts to use technology to respond to the current crisis.

    The FOIA document, obtained by the Electronic Privacy Information Center (EPIC), was produced by a little-known U.S. government organization called the National Security Commission on Artificial Intelligence (NSCAI). It was created by the 2018 National Defense Authorization Act (NDAA) and its official purpose is “to consider the methods and means necessary to advance the development of artificial intelligence (AI), machine learning, and associated technologies to comprehensively address the national security and defense needs of the United States.”

    The NSCAI is a key part of the government’s response to what is often referred to as the coming “fourth industrial revolution,” which has been described as “a revolution characterized by discontinuous technological development in areas like artificial intelligence (AI), big data, fifth-generation telecommunications networking (5G), nanotechnology and biotechnology, robotics, the Internet of Things (IoT), and quantum computing.”

    However, their main focus is ensuring that “the United States … maintain a technological advantage in artificial intelligence, machine learning, and other associated technologies related to national security and defense.” The vice-chair of NSCAI, Robert Work – former Deputy Secretary of Defense and senior fellow at the hawkish Center for a New American Security (CNAS)described the commission’s purpose as determining “how the U.S. national security apparatus should approach artificial intelligence, including a focus on how the government can work with industry to compete with China’s ‘civil-military fusion’ concept.”

    The recently released NSCAI document is a May 2019 presentation entitled “Chinese Tech Landscape Overview.” Throughout the presentation, the NSCAI promotes the overhaul of the U.S. economy and way of life as necessary for allowing the U.S. to ensure it holds a considerable technological advantage over China, as losing this advantage is currently deemed a major “national security” issue by the U.S. national security apparatus. This concern about maintaining a technological advantage can be seen in several other U.S. military documents and think tank reports, several of which have warned that the U.S.’ technological advantage is quickly eroding.

    The U.S. government and establishment media outlets often blame alleged Chinese espionage or the Chinese government’s more explicit partnerships with private technology companies in support of their claim that the U.S. is losing this advantage over China. For instance, Chris Darby, the current CEO of the CIA’s In-Q-Tel, who is also on the NSCAI, told CBS News last year that China is the U.S.’ main competitor in terms of technology and that U.S. privacy laws were hampering the U.S.’ capacity to counter China in this regard, stating that:

    “[D]ata is the new oil. And China is just awash with data. And they don’t have the same restraints that we do around collecting it and using it, because of the privacy difference between our countries. This notion that they have the largest labeled data set in the world is going to be a huge strength for them.”

    In another example, Michael Dempsey – former acting Director of National Intelligence and currently a government-funded fellow at the Council on Foreign Relations – argued in The Hill that:

    “It’s quite clear, though, that China is determined to erase our technological advantage, and is committing hundreds of billions of dollars to this effort. In particular, China is determined to be a world leader in such areas as artificial intelligence, high performance computing, and synthetic biology. These are the industries that will shape life on the planet and the military balance of power for the next several decades.”

    In fact, the national security apparatus of the United States is so concerned about losing a technological edge over China that the Pentagon recently decided to join forces directly with the U.S. intelligence community in order “to get in front of Chinese advances in artificial intelligence.” This union resulted in the creation of the Joint Artificial Intelligence Center (JAIC), which ties together “the military’s efforts with those of the Intelligence Community, allowing them to combine efforts in a breakneck push to move government’s AI initiatives forward.” It also coordinates with other government agencies, industry, academics, and U.S. allies. Robert Work, who subsequently became the NSCAI vice-chair, said at the time that JAIC’s creation was a “welcome first step in response to Chinese, and to a lesser extent, Russian, plans to dominate these technologies.”

    Similar concerns about “losing” technological advantage to China have also been voiced by the NSCAI chairman, Eric Schmidt, the former head of Alphabet – Google’s parent company, who argued in February in the New York Times that Silicon Valley could soon lose “the technology wars” to China if the U.S. government doesn’t take action. Thus, the three main groups represented within the NSCAI – the intelligence community, the Pentagon and Silicon Valley – all view China’s advancements in AI as a major national security threat (and in Silicon Valley’s case, threat to their bottom lines and market shares) that must be tackled quickly.

    TARGETING CHINA’S “ADOPTION ADVANTAGE”

    In the May 2019 “Chinese Tech Landscape Overview” presentation, the NSCAI discusses that, while the U.S. still leads in the “creation” stage of AI and related technologies, it lags behind China in the “adoption” stage due to “structural factors.” It says that “creation”, followed by “adoption” and “iteration” are the three phases of the “life cycle of new tech” and asserts that failing to dominate in the “adoption” stage will allow China to “leapfrog” the U.S. and dominate AI for the foreseeable future.

    The presentation also argues that, in order to “leapfrog” competitors in emerging markets, what is needed is not “individual brilliance” but instead specific “structural conditions that exist within certain markets.” It cites several case studies where China is considered to be “leapfrogging” the U.S. due to major differences in these “structural factors.” Thus, the insinuation of the document (though not directly stated) is that the U.S. must alter the “structural factors” that are currently responsible for its lagging behind China in the “adoption” phase of AI-driven technologies.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Chief among the troublesome “structural factors” highlighted in this presentation are so-called “legacy systems” that are common in the U.S. but much less so in China. The NSCAI document states that examples of “legacy systems” include a financial system that still utilizes cash and card payments, individual car ownership and even receiving medical attention from a human doctor. It states that, while these “legacy systems” in the US are “good enough,” too many “good enough” systems “hinder the adoption of new things,” specifically AI-driven systems.

    Another structural factor deemed by the NSCAI to be an obstacle to the U.S.’ ability to maintain a technological advantage over China is the “scale of the consumer market,” arguing that “extreme urban density = on-demand service adoption.” In other words, extreme urbanization results in more people using online or mobile-based “on-demand” services, ranging from ride-sharing to online shopping. It also cites the use of mass surveillance on China’s “huge population base” is an example of how China’s “scale of consumer market” advantage allowing “China to leap ahead” in the fields of related technologies, like facial recognition.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    In addition to the alleged shortcomings of the U.S.’ “legacy systems” and lack of “extreme urban density,” the NSCAI also calls for more “explicit government support and involvement” as a means to speed up the adoption of these systems in the U.S. This includes the government lending its stores of data on civilians to train AI, specifically citing facial recognition databases, and mandating that cities be “re-architected around AVs [autonomous vehicles],” among others. Other examples given include the government investing large amounts of money in AI start-ups and adding tech behemoths to a national, public-private AI taskforce focused on smart city-implementation (among other things).

    With regards to the latter, the document says “this level of public-private cooperation” in China is “outwardly embraced” by the parties involved, with this “serving as a stark contrast to the controversy around Silicon Valley selling to the U.S. government.” Examples of such controversy, from the NSCAI’s perspective, likely include Google employees petitioning to end the Google-Pentagon “Project Maven,” which uses Google’s AI software to analyze footage captured by drones. Google eventually chose not to renew its Maven contract as a result of the controversy, even though top Google executives viewed the project as a “golden opportunity” to collaborate more closely with the military and intelligence communities.

    The document also defines another aspect of government support as the “clearing of regulatory barriers.” This term is used in the document specifically with respect to U.S. privacy laws, despite the fact that the U.S. national security state has long violated these laws with near complete impunity. However, the document seems to suggest that privacy laws in the U.S. should be altered so that what the U.S. government has done “in secret” with private citizen data can be done more openly and more extensively. The NSCAI document also discusses the removal of “regulatory barriers” in order to speed up the adoption of self-driving cars, even though autonomous driving technology has resulted in several deadly and horrific car accidents and presents other safety concerns.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Also discussed is how China’s “adoption advantage” will “allow it to leapfrog the U.S.” in several new fields, including “AI medical diagnosis” and “smart cities.” It then asserts that “the future will be decided at the intersection of private enterprise and policy leaders between China and the U.S.” If this coordination over the global AI market does not occur, the document warns that “we [the U.S.] risk being left out of the discussions where norms around AI are set for the rest of our lifetimes.”

    The presentation also dwells considerably on how “the main battleground [in technology] are not the domestic Chinese and US markets,” but what it refers to as the NBU (next billion users) markets, where it states that “Chinese players will aggressively challenge Silicon Valley.” In order to challenge them more successfully, the presentation argues that, “just like we [view] the market of teenagers as a harbinger for new trends, we should look at China.”

    The document also expresses concerns about China exporting AI more extensively and intensively than the U.S., saying that China is “already crossing borders” by helping to build facial databases in Zimbabwe and selling image recognition and smart city systems to Malaysia. If allowed to become “the unambiguous leader in AI,” it says that “China could end up writing much of the rulebook of international norms around the deployment of AI” and that it would “broaden China’s sphere of influence amongst an international community that increasingly looks to the pragmatic authoritarianism of China and Singapore as an alternative to Western liberal democracy.”

    WHAT WILL REPLACE THE US’ “LEGACY SYSTEMS”?

    Given that the document makes it quite clear that “legacy systems” in the U.S. are impeding its ability to prevent China from “leapfrogging” ahead in AI and then dominating it for the foreseeable future, it is also important to examine what the document suggests should replace these “legacy systems” in the U.S.

    As previously mentioned, one “legacy system” cited early on in the presentation is the main means of payment for most Americans, cash and credit/debit cards. The presentation asserts, in contrast to these “legacy systems” that the best and most advanced system is moving entirely to smartphone-based digital wallets.

    It notes specifically the main mobile wallet provider in India, PayTM, is majority owned by Chinese companies. It quotes an article, which states that “a big break came [in 2016] when India canceled 86% of currency in circulation in an effort to cut corruption and bring more people into the tax net by forcing them to use less cash.” At the time, claims that India’s 2016 “currency reform” would be used as a stepping stone towards a cashless society were dismissed by some as “conspiracy theory.” However, last year, a committee convened by India’s central bank (and led by an Indian tech oligarch who also created India’s massive civilian biometric database) resulted in the Indian government’s “Cashless India” program.

    Regarding India’s 2016 “currency reform,” the NSCAI document then asserts that “this would be unfathomable in the West. And unsurprisingly, when 86% of the cash got cancelled and nobody had a credit card, mobile wallets in India exploded, laying the groundwork for a far more advanced payments ecosystem in India than the US.” However, it has become increasingly less unfathomable in light of the current coronavirus crisis, which has seen efforts to reduce the amount of cash used because paper bills may carry the virus as well as efforts to introduce a Federal Reserve-backed “digital dollar.”

    In addition, the NSCAI document from last May calls for the end of in-person shopping and promotes moving towards all shopping being performed online. It argues that “American companies have a lot to gain by adopting ideas from Chinese companies” by shifting towards exclusive e-commerce purchasing options. It states that only shopping online provides a “great experience” and also adds that “when buying online is literally the only way to get what you want, consumers go online.”

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Another “legacy system” that the NSCAI seeks to overhaul is car ownership, as it promotes autonomous, or self-driving vehicles and further asserts that “fleet ownership > individual ownership.” It specifically points to a need for “a centralized ride-sharing network,” which it says “is needed to coordinate cars to achieve near 100% utilization rates.” However, it warns against ride-sharing networks that “need a human operator paired with each vehicle” and also asserts that “fleet ownership makes more sense” than individual car ownership. It also specifically calls for these fleets to not only be composed of self-driving cars, but electric cars and cites reports that China “has the world’s most aggressive electric vehicle goals….and seek[s] the lead in an emerging industry.”

    The document states that China leads in ride-sharing today even though ride-sharing was pioneered first in the U.S. It asserts once again that the U.S. “legacy system” of individual car ownership and lack of “extreme urban density” are responsible for China’s dominance in this area. It also predicts that China will “achieve mass autonomous [vehicle] adoption before the U.S.,” largely because “the lack of mass car ownership [in China] leads to far more consumer receptiveness to AVs [autonomous vehicles].” It then notes that “earlier mass adoption leads to a virtuous cycle that allows Chinese core self-driving tech to accelerate beyond [its] Western counterparts.”

    In addition to their vision for a future financial system and future self-driving transport system, the NSCAI has a similarly dystopian vision for surveillance. The document calls mass surveillance “one of the ‘first-and-best customers’ for AI” and “a killer application for deep learning.” It also states that “having streets carpeted with cameras is good infrastructure.”

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    It then discusses how “an entire generation of AI unicorn” companies are “collecting the bulk of their early revenue from government security contracts” and praises the use of AI in facilitating policing activities. For instance, it lauds reports that “police are making convictions based on phone calls monitored with iFlyTek’s voice-recognition technology” and that “police departments are using [AI] facial recognition tech to assist in everything from catching traffic law violators to resolving murder cases.”

    On the point of facial recognition technology specifically, the NSCAI document asserts that China has “leapt ahead” of the US on facial recognition, even though “breakthroughs in using machine learning for image recognition initially occurred in the US.” It claims that China’s advantage in this instance is because they have government-implemented mass surveillance (“clearing of regulatory barriers”), enormous government-provided stores of data (“explicit government support”) combined with private sector databases on a huge population base (“scale of consumer market”). As a consequence of this, the NSCAI argues, China is also set to leap ahead of the U.S. in both image/facial recognition and biometrics.

    The document also points to another glaring difference between the U.S. and its rival, stating that: “In the press and politics of America and Europe, Al is painted as something to be feared that is eroding privacy and stealing jobs. Conversely, China views it as both a tool for solving major macroeconomic challenges in order to sustain their economic miracle, and an opportunity to take technological leadership on the global stage.”

    The NSCAI document also touches on the area of healthcare, calling for the implementation of a system that seems to be becoming reality thanks to the current coronavirus crisis. In discussing the use of AI in healthcare (almost a year before the current crisis began), it states that “China could lead the world in this sector” and “this could lead to them exporting their tech and setting international norms.” One reason for this is also that China has “far too few doctors for the population” and calls having enough doctors for in-person visits a “legacy system.” It also cited U.S. regulatory measures such as “HIPPA compliance and FDA approval” as obstacles that don’t constrain Chinese authorities.

    More troubling, it argues that “the potential impact of government supplied data is even more significant in biology and healthcare,” and says it is likely that “the Chinese government [will] require every single citizen to have their DNA sequenced and stored in government databases, something nearly impossible to imagine in places as privacy conscious as the U.S. and Europe.” It continues by saying that “the Chinese apparatus is well-equipped to take advantage” and calls these civilian DNA databases a “logical next step.”

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    WHO ARE THE NSCAI?

    Given the sweeping changes to the U.S. that the NSCAI promoted in this presentation last May, it becomes important to examine who makes up the commission and to consider their influence over U.S. policy on these matters, particularly during the current crisis. As previously mentioned, the chairman of the NSCAI is Eric Schmidt, the former head of Alphabet (Google’s parent company) who has also invested heavily in Israeli intelligence-linked tech companies including the controversial start-up “incubator” Team8. In addition, the committee’s vice-chair is Robert Work, is not only a former top Pentagon official, but is currently working with the think tank CNAS, which is run by John McCain’s long-time foreign policy adviser and Joe Biden’s former national security adviser.

    Other members of the NSCAI are as follows:

    • Safra Catz, CEO of Oracle, with close ties to Trump’s top donor Sheldon Adelson

    • Steve Chien, supervisor of the Artificial Intelligence Group at Caltech’s Jet Propulsion Lab

    • Mignon Clyburn, Open Society Foundation fellow and former FCC commissioner

    • Chris Darby, CEO of In-Q-Tel (CIA’s venture capital arm)

    • Ken Ford, CEO of the Florida Institute for Human and Machine Cognition

    • Jose-Marie Griffiths, president of Dakota State University and former National Science Board member

    • Eric Horvitz, director of Microsoft Research Labs

    • Andy Jassy, CEO of Amazon Web Services (CIA contractor)

    • Gilman Louie, partner at Alsop Louie Partners and former CEO of In-Q-Tel

    • William Mark, director of SRI International and former Lockheed Martin director

    • Jason Matheny, director of the Center for Security and Emerging Technology, former Assistant director of National Intelligence and former director of IARPA (Intelligence Advanced Research Project Agency)

    • Katharina McFarland, consultant at Cypress International and former Assistant Secretary of Defense for Acquisition

    • Andrew Moore, head of Google Cloud AI

    As can be seen in the list above, there is a considerable amount of overlap between the NSCAI and the companies currently advising the White House on “re-opening” the economy (Microsoft, Amazon, Google, Lockheed Martin, Oracle) and one NSCAI member, Oracle’s Safra Katz, is on the White House’s “economic revival” taskforce. Also, there is also overlap between the NSCAI and the companies that are intimately involved in the implementation of the “contact tracing” “coronavirus surveillance system,” a mass surveillance system promoted by the Jared Kushner-led, private-sector coronavirus task force. That surveillance system is set to be constructed by companies with deep ties to Google and the U.S. national security state, and both Google and Apple, who create the operating systems for the vast majority of smartphones used in the U.S., have said they will now build that surveillance system directly into their smartphone operating systems.

    Also notable is the fact that In-Q-Tel and the U.S. intelligence community has considerable representation on the NSCAI and that they also boast close ties with Google, Palantir and other Silicon Valley giants, having been early investors in those companies. Both Google and Palantir, as well as Amazon (also on the NSCAI) are also major contractors for U.S. intelligence agencies. In-Q-Tel’s involvement on the NSCAI is also significant because they have been heavily promoting mass surveillance of consumer electronic devices for use in pandemics for the past several years. Much of that push has come from In-Q-Tel’s current Executive Vice President Tara O’Toole, who was previously the director of the Johns Hopkins Center for Health Security and also co-authored several controversial biowarfare/pandemic simulations, such as Dark Winter.

    In addition, since at least January, the U.S. intelligence community and the Pentagon have been at the forefront of developing the U.S. government’s still-classified “9/11-style” response plans for the coronavirus crisis, alongside the National Security Council. Few news organizations have noted that these classified response plans, which are set to be triggered if and when the U.S. reaches a certain number of coronavirus cases, has been created largely by elements of the national security state (i.e. the NSC, Pentagon, and intelligence), as opposed to civilian agencies or those focused on public health issues.

    Furthermore, it has been reported that the U.S. intelligence community as well as U.S. military intelligence knew by at least January (though recent reports have said as early as last November) that the coronavirus crisis would reach “pandemic proportions” by March. The American public were not warned, but elite members of the business and political classes were apparently informed, given the record numbers of CEO resignations in January and several high-profile insider trading allegations that preceded the current crisis by a matter of weeks.

    Perhaps even more disconcerting is the added fact that the U.S. government not only participated in the eerily prescient pandemic simulation last October known as Event 201, it also led a series of pandemic response simulations last year. Crimson Contagion was a series of four simulations that involved 19 U.S. federal agencies, including intelligence and the military, as well as 12 different states and a host of private sector companies that simulated a devastating pandemic influenza outbreak that had originated in China. It was led by the current HHS Assistant Secretary for Preparedness and Response, Robert Kadlec, who is a former lobbyist for military and intelligence contractors and a Bush-era homeland security “bioterrorism” advisor.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    In addition, both Kadlec and the Johns Hopkins Center for Health Security, which was intimately involved in Event 201, have direct ties to the controversial June 2001 biowarfare exercise “Dark Winter,” which predicted the 2001 anthrax attacks that transpired just months later in disturbing ways. Though efforts by media and government were made to blame the anthrax attacks on a foreign source, the anthrax was later found to have originated at a U.S. bioweapons lab and the FBI investigation into the case has been widely regarded as a cover-up, including by the FBI’s once-lead investigator on that case.

    Given the above, it is worth asking if those who share the NSCAI’s vision saw the coronavirus pandemic early on as an opportunity to make the “structural changes” it had deemed essential to countering China’s lead in the mass adoption of AI-driven technologies, especially considering that many of the changes in the May 2019 document are now quickly taking place under the guise of combatting the coronavirus crisis.

    THE NSCAI’S VISION TAKES SHAPE

    Though the May 2019 NSCAI document was authored nearly a year ago, the coronavirus crisis has resulted in the implementation of many of the changes and the removal of many of the “structural” obstacles that the commission argued needed to be drastically altered in order to ensure a technological advantage over China in the field of AI. The aforementioned move away from cash, which is taking place not just in the U.S. but internationally, is just one example of many.

    For instance, earlier this week CNN reported that grocery stores are now considering banning in-person shopping and that the U.S. Department of Labor has recommended that retailers nationwide start “‘using a drive-through window or offering curbside pick-up’ to protect workers for exposure to coronavirus.” In addition, last week, the state of Florida approved an online-purchase plan for low income families using the Supplemental Nutrition Assistance Program (SNAP). Other reports have argued that social distancing inside grocery stores is ineffective and endangering people’s lives. As previously mentioned, the May 2019 NSCAI document argues that moving away from in-person shopping is necessary to mitigate China’s “adoption advantage” and also argued that “when buying online is literally the only way to get what you want, consumers go online.”

    Reports have also argued that these changes in shopping will last far beyond coronavirus, such as an article by Business Insider entitled “The coronavirus pandemic is pushing more people online and will forever change how Americans shop for groceries, experts say.” Those cited in the piece argue that this shift away from in-person shopping will be “permanent” and also states that “More people are trying these services than otherwise would have without this catalyst and gives online players a greater chance to acquire and keep a new customer base.” A similar article in Yahoo! News argues that, thanks to the current crisis, “our dependence on online shopping will only rise because no one wants to catch a virus at a shop.”

    In addition, the push towards the mass use of self-driving cars has also gotten a boost thanks to coronavirus, with driverless cars now making on-demand deliveries in California. Two companies, one Chinese-owned and the other backed by Japan’s SoftBank, have since been approved to have their self-driving cars used on California roads and that approval was expedited due to the coronavirus crisis. The CPO of Nuro Inc., the SoftBank-backed company, was quoted in Bloomberg as saying that “The Covid-19 pandemic has expedited the public need for contactless delivery services. Our R2 fleet is custom-designed to change the very nature of driving and the movement of goods by allowing people to remain safely at home while their groceries, medicines, and packages are brought to them.” Notably, the May 2019 NSCAI document references the inter-connected web of SoftBank-backed companies, particularly those backed by its largely Saudi-funded “Vision Fund,” as forming “the connective tissue for a global federation of tech companies” set to dominate AI.

    California isn’t the only state to start using self-driving cars, as the Mayo Clinic of Florida is now also using them. “Using artificial intelligence enables us to protect staff from exposure to this contagious virus by using cutting-edge autonomous vehicle technology and frees up staff time that can be dedicated to direct treatment and care for patients,” Kent Thielen, M.D., CEO of Mayo Clinic in Florida stated in a recent press release cited by Mic.

    Like the changes to in-person shopping in the age of coronavirus, other reports assert that self-driving vehicles are here to stay. One report published by Mashable is entitled “It took a coronavirus outbreak for self-driving cars to become more appealing,” and opens by stating “Suddenly, a future full of self-driving cars isn’t just a sci-fi pipe dream. What used to be considered a scary, uncertain technology for many Americans looks more like an effective tool to protect ourselves from a fast-spreading, infectious disease.” It further argues that this is hardly a “fleeting shift” in driving habits and one tech CEO cited in the piece, Anuja Sonalker of Steer Tech, claims that “There has been a distinct warming up to human-less, contactless technology. Humans are biohazards, machines are not.”

    Another focus of the NSCAI presentation, AI medicine, has also seen its star rise in recent weeks. For instance, several reports have touted how AI-driven drug discovery platforms have been able to identify potential treatments for coronavirus. Microsoft, whose research lab director is on the NSCAI, recently put $20 million into its “AI for health” program to speed up the use of AI in analyzing coronavirus data. In addition, “telemedicine”– a form of remote medical care – has also become widely adopted due to the coronavirus crisis.

    Several other AI-driven technologies have similarly become more widely adopted thanks to coronavirus, including the use of mass surveillance for “contact tracing” as well as facial recognition technology and biometrics. A recent Wall Street Journal report stated that the government is seriously considering both contact tracing via phone geolocation data and facial recognition technology in order to track those who might have coronavirus. In addition, private businesses – like grocery stores and restaurants – are using sensors and facial recognition to see how many people and which people are entering their stores.

    As far as biometrics go, university researchers are now working to determine if “smartphones and biometric wearables already contain the data we need to know if we have become infected with the novel coronavirus.” Those efforts seek to detect coronavirus infections early by analyzing “sleep schedules, oxygen levels, activity levels and heart rate” based on smartphone apps like FitBit and smartwatches. In countries outside the U.S., biometric IDs are being touted as a way to track those who have and lack immunity to coronavirus.

    In addition, one report in The Edge argued that the current crisis is changing what types of biometrics should be used, asserting that a shift towards thermal scanning and facial recognition is necessary:

    “At this critical juncture of the crisis, any integrated facial recognition and thermal scanning solution must be implemented easily, rapidly and in a cost-effective manner. Workers returning to offices or factories must not have to scramble to learn a new process or fumble with declaration forms. They must feel safe and healthy for them to work productively. They just have to look at the camera and smile. Cameras and thermal scanners, supported by a cloud-based solution and the appropriate software protocols, will do the rest.”

    Also benefiting from the coronavirus crisis is the concept of “smart cities,” with Forbes recently writing that “Smart cities can help us combat the coronavirus pandemic.” That article states that “Governments and local authorities are using smart city technology, sensors and data to trace the contacts of people infected with the coronavirus. At the same time, smart cities are also helping in efforts to determine whether social distancing rules are being followed.”

    That article in Forbes also contains the following passage:

    “…[T]he use of masses of connected sensors makes it clear that the coronavirus pandemic is–intentionally or not–being used as a testbed for new surveillance technologies that may threaten privacy and civil liberties. So aside from being a global health crisis, the coronavirus has effectively become an experiment in how to monitor and control people at scale.”

    Another report in The Guardian states that “If one of the government takeaways from coronavirus is that ‘smart cities’ including Songdo or Shenzhen are safer cities from a public health perspective, then we can expect greater efforts to digitally capture and record our behaviour in urban areas – and fiercer debates over the power such surveillance hands to corporations and states.” There have also been reports that assert that typical cities are “woefully unprepared” to face pandemics compared to “smart cities.”

    Yet, beyond many of the NSCAI’s specific concerns regarding mass AI adoption being conveniently resolved by the current crisis, there has also been a concerted effort to change the public’s perception of AI in general. As previously mentioned, the NSCAI had pointed out last year that:

    “In the press and politics of America and Europe, Al is painted as something to be feared that is eroding privacy and stealing jobs. Conversely, China views it as both a tool for solving major macroeconomic challenges in order to sustain their economic miracle, and an opportunity to take technological leadership on the global stage.”

    Now, less than a year later, the coronavirus crisis has helped spawn a slew of headlines in just the last few weeks that paint AI very differently, including “How Artificial Intelligence Can Help Fight Coronavirus,” “How AI May Prevent the Next Coronavirus Outbreak,” “AI Becomes an Ally in the Fight Against COVID-19,” “Coronavirus: AI steps up in battle against COVID-19,” and “Here’s How AI Can Help Africa Fight the Coronavirus,” among numerous others.

    It is indeed striking how the coronavirus crisis has seemingly fulfilled the NSCAI’s entire wishlist and removed many of the obstacles to the mass adoption of AI technologies in the United States. Like major crises of the past, the national security state appears to be using the chaos and fear to promote and implement initiatives that would be normally rejected by Americans and, if history is any indicator, these new changes will remain long after the coronavirus crisis fades from the news cycle. It is essential that these so-called “solutions” be recognized for what they are and that we consider what type of world they will end up creating – an authoritarian technocracy. We ignore the rapid advance of these NSCAI-promoted initiatives and the phasing out of so-called “legacy systems” (and with them, many long-cherished freedoms) at our own peril.


    Tyler Durden

    Wed, 04/22/2020 – 22:40

  • Jerusalem's City Hall Complex Goes Up In Flames After Molotov Cocktail Attack
    Jerusalem’s City Hall Complex Goes Up In Flames After Molotov Cocktail Attack

    Police in Jerusalem are investigating a possible terror attack after a massive fire broke out at Jerusalem’s City Hall on Wednesday afternoon. 

    Given multiple building at the sprawling complex were shown in local media reports set ablaze, it appears the result of an arson attack

    Unconfirmed Israeli media reports say a suspect was seen hurling molotov cocktails at the buildings before fleeing on foot

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    The Jerusalem Post reports that a 40-year-old man from East Jerusalem has been apprehended, even as firefighters at the scene continue battling the blaze. 

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    JPost reports the following:

    The Jerusalem City Hall spokesperson said that once the fire was detected emergency procedures were activated and police and firefighters were called to the scene. The cause of the fire is still unknown.

    Eight teams of firefighters are currently at work putting out the fire and searching for anyone who might be trapped in the building.

    Police arrested a 40-year-old man for allegedly starting the fire. The man is reportedly a resident of East Jerusalem.

    Staff from Jerusalem Mayor Moshe Lion’s office were seen evacuating, as well as other city hall employees, though it’s as yet unknown if anyone is trapped inside the burning complex.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Any potential casualties or injuries are also unknown, but early reports suggest everyone escaped uninjured.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    “Multiple reports state that an eyewitness has told police that he witnessed someone throwing a molotov cocktail into the building,” a separate local Israeli media report indicated

    “A spokesperson for City Hall tells the media in a written statement that Police have arrested a suspect,” the report said.

    By the evening hours (local time) the blaze was reportedly subdued, however, damage to the building appeared substantial and far-reaching.

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    The attacker’s motive is also as yet unclear. It may be related to the ongoing Arab Palestinian-Israeli conflict, which has led to continually tense situations in East Jerusalem. 

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    Or the attack was possibly connected with Israel’s draconian coronavirus lockdown – seen as among the most aggressive police-enforced ‘stay at home’ mandates in the world, itself recently driving local protests and even riots among both Arab residents of Jerusalem and ultra-Orthodox Jews.


    Tyler Durden

    Wed, 04/22/2020 – 22:20

  • Watch: John Pilger's "The Coming War On China"
    Watch: John Pilger’s “The Coming War On China”

    Authored by Caitlin Johnstone,

    “The aim of this film is to break a silence: the United States and China may well be on the road to war, and nuclear war is no longer unthinkable,” Pilger says in his 2016 documentary The Coming War on China, which you can watch free on Youtube here or on Vimeo here.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    “In a few years China has become the world’s second-biggest economic power,” Pilger’s introduction continues.

    “The United States is the world’s biggest military power, with bases and missiles and ships covering every continent and every ocean. China is a threat to this dominance, says Washington. But who is the threat? This film is about shifting power, and great danger.”

    As we’ve been discussing for years now, the relentless quest of the US-centralized empire-like power alliance for total world domination has put it on a collision course with the surging economic powerhouse of China which refuses to be absorbed into the imperial blob. The empire’s continued existence depends upon its ability to undermine China before it grows too powerful or the empire grows too weak to stop its ascent, at which point global hegemony becomes impossible and we are living in a truly multipolar world.

    Watch the full documentary below:

    China has therefore always been the final boss fight in the global campaign of violence and domination by what Pilger calls the “empire which never speaks its name”. And the ramping up of anti-China narrative management by the US government indicates that we are being psychologically primed to accept this world-threatening confrontation, just as Pilger warned in 2016.

    “The danger of confrontation grows by the day,” Pilger says.

    The powerful film breaks down the way the USA has been encircling China with a “noose” of military bases since the Korean War, which all have massive amounts of military firepower, including nuclear firepower, pointed right at China’s cities. Pilger shows the psychopathic toll this has inflicted upon the people who live in the areas where the US war machine has set up shop in the Pacific, including an especially enraging segment on the use of Bikini Atoll natives as human guinea pigs to test the effects of nuclear radiation on people. Also deeply disturbing is the revelation of just how close the US came to launching nuclear warheads at China due to a miscommunication during the Cuban missile crisis.

    The film describes China’s recent history and explains its climb in economic power which led us to this point, and the USA’s generations-long history of provocation and hostility toward its government. It also addresses the silly projection so many westerners harbor that if the US wasn’t bullying and slaughtering the world into compliance, China would take over doing the same.

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    Back in 2016 it was harder for people to see this escalation on the horizon, but now in the wake of the COVID-19 pandemic we’re hearing a frantic, disproportionate amount of anti-China sentiment from the Trump administration and its supporters, in the same way we heard Russia hysteria amplified over the last three years by Trump’s enemies. Trump was politically pressured to dangerously escalate cold war tensions with Russia, and he’s now being politically incentivized to pass the blame for his administration’s spectacular failures in addressing this pandemic on to the Chinese government in a way which manufactures support for escalations on that front as well. Two different narratives, same agenda.

    “The new president, Donald Trump, has a problem with China,” Pilger says at the end of the documentary.

    “The urgent question now is will Trump continue with the provocations revealed in this film and take us all to the edge of war?”

    The answer to that question appears to be coalescing. It’s a good time for us all to watch this film.

    *  *  *

    Thanks for reading! The best way to get around the internet censors and make sure you see the stuff I publish is to subscribe to the mailing list for my website, which will get you an email notification for everything I publish. My work is entirely reader-supported, so if you enjoyed this piece please consider sharing it around, liking me on Facebook, following my antics onTwitter, checking out my podcast on either YoutubesoundcloudApple podcasts or Spotify, following me on Steemit, throwing some money into my hat on Patreon or Paypalpurchasing some of my sweet merchandise, buying my books Rogue Nation: Psychonautical Adventures With Caitlin Johnstone and Woke: A Field Guide for Utopia Preppers. For more info on who I am, where I stand, and what I’m trying to do with this platform, click here. Everyone, racist platforms excluded, has my permission to republish, use or translate any part of this work (or anything else I’ve written) in any way they like free of charge.

    Bitcoin donations:1Ac7PCQXoQoLA9Sh8fhAgiU3PHA2EX5Zm2


    Tyler Durden

    Wed, 04/22/2020 – 22:00

  • Lululemon Fires Art Director Over 'Bat Fried Rice' Shirt
    Lululemon Fires Art Director Over ‘Bat Fried Rice’ Shirt

    Lulumemon has issued an apology and fired its art director, Trevor Fleming, after he shared an Instagram link on Sunday to a shirt created by artist Jess Sluder featuring a Chinese take-out box decorated with bat wings and the words “no thank you” on the sleeves and back.

    The shirt, titled “Bat Fried Rice” was listed for sale at $60 until it was taken down. Meanwhile, Fleming’s Instagram account has since been deleted, according to USA Today.

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    The shirt was criticized as racist, as the coronavirus pandemic originated in Wuhan, China – where researchers at the Wuhan Institute of Virology were studying coronavirus from horseshoe bat samples they had collected in caves 1,000 miles away in Yunnan, which is genetically identical to the original virus that causes COVID-19.

    “At lululemon, our culture and values are core to who we are, and we take matters like this extremely seriously,” said Lululemon spokeswoman Erin Hankinson in a statement to USA Today. “We apologize that an employee was affiliated with promoting an offensive t-shirt… The image and the post were inappropriate and inexcusable and we do not tolerate this behaviour.”

    “We acted immediately, and the person involved is no longer an employee of lululemon,” the statement continues.


    Tyler Durden

    Wed, 04/22/2020 – 21:40

  • Cluster Of Coronavirus Cases Reported Aboard Italian Cruise Ship Docked In Nagasaki: Live Updates
    Cluster Of Coronavirus Cases Reported Aboard Italian Cruise Ship Docked In Nagasaki: Live Updates

    Summary:

    • German biotech company begins clinical trials for vaccine
    • Oxford U. begins human testing for vaccine
    • FT says UK coronavirus deaths 2x+ official number
    • NY death toll passes 15k
    • Trump: “Our Country is starting to OPEN FOR BUSINESS”
    • Outbreak reported aboard Italian cruise ship docked in Japan
    • Middle East coronavirus cases continue to climb everywhere except Iran
    • Texas drops controversial temporary abortion ban
    • FDA director “clarifies” WaPo story
    • WHO’s Dr. Tedros asks US to reconsider cutting funding
    • 2 cats become first pets in US to catch the virus
    • Chinese scientist finds deadly new coronavirus mutations
    • Cali officials reveal first US coronavirus death occurred weeks earlier than realized
    • Dominic Raab says at least 69 health-care workers have died in the UK
    • South Korea unveils ‘New Deal’-style stimulus

    *      *      *

    Update (2130ET): Here we go again…

    Outbreaks aboard cruise ships have become a tiresome cliche since the novel coronavirus first left Wuhan back in December, and amazingly, despite the fact that most major cruise operators have had their operations suspended for going on six weeks, shipboard outbreaks are still happening.

    A Japanese television station reported Thursday morning that an outbreak has been reported aboard a ship that has been docked for repairs since January. Apparently, hundreds of crew members were still living aboard the ship, despite the fact that it has been docked all this time.

    NHK reports that 48 crew members on an Italian cruise ship docked in Nagasaki have tested positive for coronavirus, NHK reports, citing an unidentified local official. The Italy-owned Costa Atlantica has been docked at Mitsubishi Heavy’s Koyagi shipyard for repairs since Jan. 29; 623 crew members were apparently still living on board the ship. No passengers have been present during the outbreak.

    Chief Cabinet Secretary Yoshihide Suga said Wednesday that the Health Ministry sent officials and experts to the ship after a request from the Italian government.

    Japan of course was home to the original cruise ship “nightmare at sea” when the “Diamond Princess” docked in Yokohama with thousands of passengers and crew aboard. Hundreds were sickened and nearly 2 dozen died.

    Since then, there have been a handful of outbreaks involving cruise ships, including one aboard the “Ruby Princess” in Sydney that has triggered a criminal investigation down under.

    Given the wave of repatriations and evacuations that have taken place since the outbreak began, once can’t help but wonder: Why are these 600+ sailors still living on this ship in presumably cramped crewmen’s quarters?

    In a rare win for abortion-rights advocates, Texas has reportedly dropped its order banning abortions while the pandemic is ongoing.

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    Finally, some good news for liberals to enjoy.

    *      *      *

    Update (1900ET): We imagine FDA Director Dr. Stephen Hahn found himself on the ass-end of a classic President Trump rage-fueled shitstorm earlier when the Washington Post quoted him in a story warning that the second wave of the virus would be “even more devastating”.

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    Trump tweeted earlier that the article was “false,” however, in a statement during Wednesday evening’s press conference, Dr. Hahn walked all that back, admitted that his quote was accurate, but accused the Washington Post of omitting some context – namely that he had clarified the reason it would be deadlier is because it would coincide with the entirety of the next flu season.

    *      *      *

    Update (1850ET): Now that President Trump has done pretty much everything possible to convince the public to blame him for the coronavirus fallout, despite having delegated all genuine authority to the states, he is moving to ensure the public understands that, if he had his druthers, the whole country would be reopened by now, by reopening the only pieces of land for which he has retained the authority to reopen: the National Parks.

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    He added during tonight’s press caution that the reopening would be done “as we take reasonable precaution.”

    *      *      *

    Update (1805ET): With the CDC remaining mostly tight-lipped about the breakdown of coronavirus patients in the US (a ploy that critics say began as an effort to conceal the lack of testing in the US), more states are releasing breakdowns of COVID-19 patients including those who died in hospital settings, and those who died in managed-care facilities like nursing homes, clusters of vicious disease.

    And a recent analysis of these data by WSJ found that facilities that primarily house older people who are often in frail health have been the source of roughly 25% of the deaths linked to the coronavirus in the US. A WSJ survey has found at least 10,783 fatalities among more than 35 states that either report data online, or responded to requests for information.

    And that’s only with 70% of states (and zero territories) reporting.

    States including Massachusetts, West Virginia are trying to ramp up testing in nursing homes in their states, and while Cuomo has tried to do the same in NY, he did say earlier that “it’s not our job” to provide PPE to nursing homes” – meaning Americans private and public corporations, entities that, despite their tremendous economic power, have proved just as impotent as the federal government in helping alleviate the crisis. In fact, as we explained earlier, one could argue that corporations are actively hurting the rest of the economy by sucking up resources that should be flowing to small business owners who are in danger of shutting down.

    *      *      *

    Update (1550ET): Earlier in the afternoon, remarks made by WHO Director-General Dr. Tedros Adhanom Ghebreyesus drew the attention of the international press as he asked the US to “reconsider” cutting funding to the organization, insisting that the organization acts to combat discrimination and fight for human rights everywhere (except China). The organization also released a list of six conditions that should be met before countries begin to reopen.

    Earlier, Saudi Arabia reported 1,141 new cases of coronavirus and 5 new deaths for a total of 12,772 cases and 114 deaths, while the UAE reported 483 new cases of coronavirus and 6 new deaths for a total of 8,238 cases and 52 deaths.

    Meanwhile, the state of California said it recorded 86 new COVID-19-linked deaths since yesterday, an increase of 6.8% to nearly 1,300 deaths.

    Earlier, two cats in the US tested positive for the coronavirus, becoming the first household pets in the country to be confirmed positive for the virus after at least one tiger at the Bronx Zoo was found to be carrying strains of the virus. At least one of the cats was experiencing mild symptoms, per the CDC.

    *      *      *

    Update (1330ET): New York has reached another grim milestone: the state’s death toll has surpassed 15k on Wednesday, though the pace of deaths continued to slow. Deaths climbed to 15,302.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Texas, meanwhile, reported another 18% jump in new cases. France reported 3,201 new cases on Wednesday, the highest number in four days, to right around 160k cases. The WHO noted that in the Middle East, cases are rising everywhere except Iran.

    *      *      *

    Update (1205ET): Though it sounded almost as if he was speaking to his fellow governors, Cuomo urged local officials in his state to “resist political pressure” to reopen their towns too early, warning that they might risk ruining all the hard work of the American people. “We make a bad move, it’s going to set us back…Frankly, this is no time to act stupidly. Period. I don’t know how else to say it,” Cuomo said.

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    Cuomo added: “This is not the time for confusion or disagreement among government…”local laws can’t counteract state laws, anyway.”

    “We can’t have people lose their life because we acted imprudently.”

    In other news, Italy reported a jump in new cases, while the pace of new deaths continued to slow. 3,370 new patients tested positive yesterday, said Italy’s Civil Protection Service, compared with an increase of 2,729 the day before (Italy’s countrywide total is 187,327). Deaths continued to slow, with another 437 new deaths reported, compared with 534 new deaths a day ago, as the curve continues to slow at a rate that’s even surprising some of Italy’s leading scientists. In total, 25,085 Italians have died – with deaths in the country moving above 25k, becoming only the second country to hit this number after the US.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Another 54,543 Italians have recovered, including another 2,943 declared “recovered” over the last day, an increase of +5.7% as more patients finally recover from the illness. Of course, as we’ve noted, many patients who struggle in serious condition for days or weeks have a higher likelihood of suffering long-term consequences. Finally, the number of tests run in the country has surpassed 1.5 million.

    *      *      *

    Update (1130ET): One day after Singapore extended its lockdown until the end of June amid a stunning resurgence in coronavirus infections involving the city’s migrant workers, the city-state has reported another record jump in new cases.

    The Health Ministry reported 1,016 new cases of coronavirus, bringing its total to 10,141 cases in total. Of the new cases confirmed over the last day, 1,001 of them were foreigners, likely mostly migrant workers.

    Meanwhile, during Wednesday’s press conference, NY Gov. Andrew Cuomo warned “what we do today, we will see the results in 3, or 4, or 5 days”, since most of the worst viral cases tend to manifest within 10 or 11 days, tops, though some cases have taken far longer.

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    His big theme is that New Yorkers have arrived at a “profound moment” in history, where everybody will be judged for their actions during the reopening. “If we get reckless today, we’ll suffer the consequences tomorrow.”

    *      *      *

    Update (0810ET): President Trump is starting the day by once again encouraging the ‘reopen now’ protesters and courting even more responsibility for the eventual outcome of the reopening – something that we’ve repeatedly argued is a boneheaded political strategy.

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    The president also affirmed plans to sign his executive order prohibiting immigration into the US for 60 days.

    *      *        *

    Now that the Senate has passed the $484 billion relief bill to top off the ‘Paycheck Protection Program’ (which hasn’t been able to make any new loans in five days), Washington reporters claim that the House should follow that up with a vote on Thursday, before hopefully sending it to the president’s desk.

    Last night, we reported on a new study out of China authored by the same scientist who first proposed Beijing’s lockdown plan that highlighted some troubling new discoveries that might complicate the quest for a vaccine. The researchers isolated and analyzed new mutant strains of the virus that appeared to be much more ‘aggressive’ (i.e. likely deadlier) than earlier strains. Furthermore, these deadlier strains were not only found to carry higher viral loads – making them much more infectious – but they were also found to have genetic similarities to strains isolated in New York and Europe, potentially explaining the strikingly high mortality rates.

    During the early days of the US response, Dr. Fauci and others insisted that there was “no evidence” of any significant mutations in the virus that might impede research into a possible vaccine. While that might have been true given the evidence at the time, clearly, it no longer is.

    Whether this leads to a revision in vaccine timeline targets remains to be seen, but we would be surprised to see any such information released through official channels.

    Curiously, the only vaccine-related news we’re seeing on Wednesday are reports about two companies, one German, one British, that have just received a ‘green light’ to move on to the next phase of vaccine-related study.

    German biotech company BioNTech will become the first European company to proceed to clinical trials of a potential COVID-19 vaccine after receiving regulatory approval to accelerate the firm’s testing. Presumably, the firm’s experimental vaccine has already shown some success in preliminary human studies – typically a prerequisite before moving on to clinical trials. The German Federal Institute for Vaccines was responsible for issuing the approval.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    The Times of London reported last night that the first British human trials of a coronavirus vaccine will start on Wednesday as Britain ‘throws everything it has’ at developing a vaccine, according to Health Secretary Matt Hancock. Scientists in Oxford are expected to begin to test the safety of their experimental vaccine. Hancock also announcing another £20 million in funding to speed the quasi-public project through larger-scale human trials over the summer, as well as £22.5 million for a parallel vaccine project at Imperial College London.

    For anybody hoping that these early-stage triumphs might herald an even earlier time-frame for a vaccine, try not to get too excited: Remember the words of Sir Patrick Vallance, the UK’s chief scientific adviser, who once warned that every vaccine is a “long shot”.

    However, the biggest bombshell to drop overnight was probably a statement from health authorities in California that the first coronavirus deaths in the US likely occurred weeks earlier than initially thought. Officials told the local press that forensic scientists in Santa Clara had discovered two autopsies on people who had died undiagnosed at home on Feb. 6 and Feb. 17 that showed signs of COVID-19.

    A third death on March 6 was also found to be caused by COVID-19. The first virus-related death in the US was reported in California on Feb. 26.

    “These three people died at home at a time when testing was very limited and only possible to get via the Centers for Disease Control and Prevention,” the forensics department said. Tests at that time were only available to people who returned from high-risk areas, or those who went to a doctor with serious and obvious coronavirus symptoms. Notably, a recent study in Santa Clara County also found that the viral penetration in the area was “50-80x higher” than official statistics suggested.

    As India begins the process of reopening its economy, a new issue is arising: Indian doctors and nurses report that they have been subjected to horrifying treatment at the hands of their fellow townspeople and community members, as family members of dead patients have, in some cases, attacked doctors for failing to save their family member. The situation has gotten so bad that a funeral procession for a doctor who died fighting the virus was attacked by an angry mob, forcing the doctor’s family and colleagues to flee. A colleague returned later to dig a grave for his friend.

    To try and stop doctors from simply walking off the job as India’s rate of confirmed infections climbs above 20k and the bodies continue to pile up, the Indian government has, at the behest of the Indian Medical Association, issued an emergency order making violence against health-care professionals a serious crime. Doctors around the country have said they will observe a “Black Day” on Friday, with any opting to wear black armbands to identify themselves as health-care workers.

    Spain announced a slight relaxation of its five-week lockdown earlier this week when the government caved to popular demands that children under the age of 14 be allowed to leave their homes unaccompanied by an adult.

    And now, as Spain’s rate of deaths ticks higher, PM Pedro Sanchez is pushing ahead with his plan to extend the lockdown until May 9, asking his country’s parliament to approve the extension, which he first announced days ago. Sanchez said that the lifting of the quarantine order must be “slow and gradual” to save lives.

    “The general requirement to stay at home will not be lifted until we are prepared,” he said, although he added that in future the conditions of the lockdown “will not be the same as up to now,” with shifts in the rules in the second half of May.

    Finally, an FT analysis of data released by the ONS has determined that the actual death toll from COVID-19 across the UK might be as high as 41k, more than double the roughly 17.5k ‘official’ death toll according to the Department of Health and Social Care. Here’s more on that from FT reporter Chris Giles.

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    Following the report’s release, UK Foreign Minister Dominic Raab announced that the death toll of UK health care workers has climbed to 69, significantly higher than the previous number.

    And in South Korea, while the world waits to learn more about what’s going on with KJU, South Korean President Moon Jae-in unveiled a $32.4 billion relief package for hard-hit businesses, while pushing for a New Deal-style program that would put out-of-work South Koreans to work building new national projects.


    Tyler Durden

    Wed, 04/22/2020 – 21:33

  • Mankind's Best Friend: Dogs Being Trained To Detect COVID-19 Odors Could Test 750 People Per Hour
    Mankind’s Best Friend: Dogs Being Trained To Detect COVID-19 Odors Could Test 750 People Per Hour

    Authored by Elias Marat via TheMindUnleashed.com,

    There’s plenty of reason why dogs have historically been considered man’s best friend. For at least the past 15,000 years, dogs have served human societies in myriad ways. Whether by hunting pray, helping to herd sheep and cattle, or simply providing us with unconditional love, they have proved themselves to be indispensable companions.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    In modern times, dogs have also provided crucial help sniffing out pests such as bedbugs, narcotics, trapped humans or broken gas mains after earthquakes, improvised explosive devices in war zones, and even ailments such as migraine headaches, malaria Parkinson’s disease, and cancer. After all, with some 200 to 300 million sense receptors in dogs’ noses—versus 5 million in human noses—our trusty canine comrades have olfactory abilities that can sense odors we have no ability to perceive.

    And now, an ambitious project hopes to wield dogs’ uncanny sense of smell to train them to detect CoViD-19, the infectious disease caused by the novel coronavirus SARS-COV-2.

    British charity Medical Detection Dogs has partnered with the London School of Hygiene and Tropical Medicine (LSHTM) and Durham University to begin efforts to train their elite sniffing dogs for the task. According to behavioral psychologist Dr. Claire Guest, CEO of Medical Detection Dogs, there is no reason to doubt that the canines are up to the task.

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    Guest told CTV News:

    “We already train dogs in the past… [there is] absolutely no reason why a dog can’t detect the virus.”

    And it’s not just a matter of confidence—it’s also an approach that is rooted in the rigorous science of over a dozen peer-reviewed papers that Medical Detection Dogs has produced in the course of training dogs to detect serious illnesses.

    Head of the disease control department at LSHTM Prof. James Logan explained:

    “Our previous work demonstrated that dogs can detect odors from humans with a malaria infection with extremely high accuracy – above the World Health Organization standards for a diagnostic.”

    After six weeks of intensive training we could see a brigade of dogs who are capable of providing a speedy and non-invasive diagnosis at the tail end of the pandemic. The dogs would undergo some of the same training they received to detect bacterial infections, prostate cancer, and Parkinson’s—mainly through sniffing samples, indicating when they found it, and being able to detect the subtle changes in skin temperature indicating a fever, according to a statement from the group.

    Logan cautioned that it still remains early for detecting any specific odor belonging to CoViD-19. However, because other respiratory diseases cause body odor changes, it is quite likely that CoViD-19 does as well, which means that dogs would definitely be able to detect it. Such a new diagnostic tool has the potential to provide a revolutionary new method to help curb the pandemic.

    On the Medical Detection Dogs website, Guest wrote:

    “The aim is that dogs will be able to screen anyone, including those who are asymptomatic and tell us whether they need to be tested.  This would be fast, effective and non-invasive and make sure the limited NHS testing resources are only used where they are really needed.

    We know that other respiratory diseases like COVID-19, change our body odor so there is a very high chance that dogs will be able to detect it. This new diagnostic tool could revolutionize our response to COVID-19 in the short term, but particularly in the months to come, and could be profoundly impactful.”

    Professor Steve Lindsay at Durham University says:

    “If the research is successful, we could use COVID-19 detection dogs at airports at the end of the epidemic to rapidly identify people carrying the virus. This would help prevent the re-emergence of the disease after we have brought the present epidemic under control.”


    Tyler Durden

    Wed, 04/22/2020 – 21:20

  • Trump Says He "Strongly Disagrees" With Gov Kemp's Decision To Reopen Georgia
    Trump Says He “Strongly Disagrees” With Gov Kemp’s Decision To Reopen Georgia

    After a week in which President Trump deliberately courted blame for the entire coronavirus pandemic response by egging on demonstrators, reopening the national parks and repeatedly made snide remarks about the risks of waiting too long, it appears the president is finally listening to his advisors – at least on the messaging front.

    In his first major break with Republican governors since the beginning of the pandemic, President Trump said during Wednesday evening’s press briefing that he “strongly disagreed” with Georgia Gov. Brian Kemp’s decision to start reopening his state on Friday.

    “I told the governor of Georgia, Brian Kemp, that I disagree strongly with his decision to open certain facilities which are in violation of the phase one guidelines for the incredible people of Georgia,” the president said during his nightly press conference on Wednesday. “But at the same time, he must do what he thinks is right, I want him to do what he thinks is right.”

    Specifically, Trump cited Georgia’s non-compliance with the standards laid out in the ‘Phase 1’ federal guidelines as his reason for disagreeing with the decision. Remember, qualifying for phase one requires seeing a 14-day decline in new infections, though cases have declined from record highs seen earlier this month.

    Trump’s comment prompted a torrent of amazed tweets and more than a few jokes about what many imagine is Kemp’s utter shock at Trump’s decision to distance himself from the governors.

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    Kemp might be disappointed, but this represents a critical turning point for the president, who appears to be listening to the advice of his closest advisors once again instead of almost pathological thirst for political confrontation. According to Kempe’s plan, The state would begin loosening some lockdown restrictions on Friday, and by Monday, gyms, beauty salons and even restaurants and bars would be allowed to reopen.

    The governor’s decision, which he announced on Monday, was met with a hail of criticism from scientists, the press, Democrats and even some Republicans. Many small business owners have said they probably won’t reopen right away despite the decision, and the mayors of the state’s biggest cities – all of whom are Democrats – are telling residents to simply ignore the governor.


    Tyler Durden

    Wed, 04/22/2020 – 21:04

  • Mitch McConnell Says Struggling States Should File For Bankruptcy
    Mitch McConnell Says Struggling States Should File For Bankruptcy

    Over the past month, the economic shutdown resulting from the coronavirus pandemic – which as we hear every day was “nobody’s fault” just to make sure there are no unpleasant mentions of moral hazard during the biggest bailout in history

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    … has emerged as the perfect excuse for anyone and everyone in need of additional funds or a full-blown bailout to come begging for some generosity. Unfortunately for insolvent US states, they may be too late to get a piece of the bailout pie because as Senate Majority Leader Mitch McConnell, said Wednesday, he is open to allowing states to declare bankruptcy – rather than sending governors more federal money to deal with their own ballooning deficits. Because after $10 trillion in fiscal and monetary funds was allocated to bailout mostly America’s rich in just the past month, somehow states don’t quite cut it.

    McConnell made the comments on “The Hugh Hewitt Show” amid a growing chorus of state governors imploring the federal government for urgent fiscal help and congressional Democrats seeking to work with the Trump administration to provide it. McConnell, instead, said he “would certainly be in favor of allowing states to use the bankruptcy route,” an option that is not currently available to them – as he called for a “pause” in such aid from Washington.

    “I mean, we all represent states. We all have governors regardless of party who would love to have free money,” McConnell said in response to a question on what the federal government should do to help states in tricky financial situations. “And that’s why I said yesterday we’re going to push the pause button here, because I think this whole business of additional assistance for state and local governments need[s] to be thoroughly evaluated.”

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    McConnell also said that many states are struggling with funding pensions or similar programs, saying “[t]here’s not going to be any desire on the Republican side to bail out state pensions by borrowing money from future generations.” And yet, when it comes to corporations, that’s precisely what the Republican side is doing, so who gets to decide where the line is drawn.

    After Hewett weighed in, criticizing liberal states that racked up significant liabilities, McConnell said he favored letting states declare bankruptcy, as local governments are allowed to.

    “Yeah, I would certainly be in favor of allowing states to use the bankruptcy route. It saves some cities,” McConnell said. “And there’s no good reason for it not to be available.”

    McConnell’s comments come one day after the Senate advanced an interim stimulus package to restock funds in the Paycheck Protection Program (PPP) and address a handful of other priorities. He initially sought to have the bill include only funding for the PPP but Democrats held up the legislation until they could extract concessions from the majority leader. Though McConnell ceded to some of their requests, he kept funding for state governments out of the bill, which is expected to see a vote in the House of Representatives on Thursday.

    Democrats, predictably, were not happy: “Democrats are disappointed that the Administration has not agreed to more funding for state, tribal, and local governments on the front lines of this crisis who desperately need an infusion of funds to pay the essential workers who keep us safe,” House Speaker Nancy Pelosi, and Senate Minority Leader Chuck Schumer, said in a joint statement Tuesday, quoted by Fox News.

    “However, we are pleased that the President has committed to addressing this critical priority in CARES 2 and will work with urgency to see that this commitment is fulfilled,” they continued, indicating that the president was on their side of the issue rather than McConnell’s.

    New York Gov. Andrew Cuomo, a Democrat, said in his daily coronavirus briefing Monday that Trump told him “he’s going to work very hard” to secure funding for states in what Pelosi referred to as CARES 2, another massive stimulus bill that many in Congress, along with Trump, hope to pass once legislators return to Washington, D.C., on May 4.

    “We have to have state funding,” Cuomo said Wednesday. “The states have a role basically in a deficit situation. And we need funding from Washington.” It’s unclear whether fiscal concerns, though, could lead some in Congress to reconsider the scope of any additional aid packages.

    Governors have been calling for federal help for over a week. Maryland Republican Gov. Larry Hogan, the chairman of the National Governors Association, issued a statement on April 11 pleading with Congress to appropriate $500 billion for state governments as they deal with the economic and fiscal consequences of the coronavirus pandemic.

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    “In the absence of unrestricted fiscal support of at least $500 billion from the federal government, states will have to confront the prospect of significant reductions to critically important services all across this country, hampering public health, the economic recovery, and — in turn — our collective effort to get people back to work,” Hogan said in a statement that also touted the work of governors to fight the coronavirus pandemic.

    McConnell’s comments Wednesday were not the first time allowing states to declare bankruptcy has been discussed. In the wake of the 2008 financial crisis, some advocated allowing hurting states to reorganize in bankruptcy. But Republicans at the time squashed the idea, even as they also panned the possibility of the federal government bailing states out.

    “While bankruptcy for states may seem like an attractive alternative to state bailouts, there are significant constitutional concerns that should be addressed by congressional hearings,” former Rep. Lamar Smith, R-Texas, said at the time.

    McConnell concluded that states are likely to agree that bankruptcy shouldn’t be the first option.

    “My guess is their first choice would be for the federal government to borrow money from future generations to send it down to them now so they don’t have to do that,” he said. “That’s not something I’m going to be in favor of.”

    Somehow we doubt that what McConnell is or is not in favor of will matter.


    Tyler Durden

    Wed, 04/22/2020 – 21:03

  • Japanese PMI Collapses To Record Low, Signals 10% Crash In GDP
    Japanese PMI Collapses To Record Low, Signals 10% Crash In GDP

    After China’s ugliest GDP print ever, and the collapse of US economic surprise index data, it should be no real surprise that Japan’s manufacturing and services industry PMIs would plunge (despite the “everything’s fine, the Olympics is imminent” narrative puked forth by the government for most of the month).

    But, to crash to record lows is something else…

    • Japan’s April flash manufacturing purchasing managers’ index falls to 43.7 from 44.8 in March – Lowest reading since April 2009

    • Japan’s April flash services purchasing managers’ index falls to 22.8 from 33.8 in March – Lowest reading since series began

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Which combined to leave Japan’s April flash composite purchasing managers’ index plunging to to 27.8 from 36.2 in March – the lowest reading since records began.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Across the indices everything was a disaster…

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Commenting on the latest survey results, Joe Hayes, Economist at IHS Markit, said:

    “PMI data for Japan tell us that the crippling economic impact from the global corona virus pandemic intensified in April. Furthermore, the data show us the initial impact of Japan’s lockdown. The survey was conducted between 7 and 21 April The 7th was the day Prime Minister Abe announced a state of emergency in some parts of Japan, although this was upgraded to a nationwide state of emergency on the 16th and extended the lockdown to the whole country. “

    The decline in combined output across both manufacturing and services was the strongest ever recorded by the survey in almost 13 years of data collection, surpassing declines seen during the global financial crisis and in the aftermath of the 2011 tsunami.”

    Overall, GDP looks set to decline at an annual rate in excess of 10% in the second quarter…

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    And it is not about to get better anytime soon:

    “The current state of emergency will stay in place until 6May, although given Japan’s lagged response relative to other parts of the world, one would expect this to be extended, meaning the harsh economic effects are likely to drag out further.”


    Tyler Durden

    Wed, 04/22/2020 – 20:47

  • Here's Why 2/3rds Of US Oil & Gas Companies May Not Exist A Year From Now
    Here’s Why 2/3rds Of US Oil & Gas Companies May Not Exist A Year From Now

    Authored by Bryce Coward via Knowledge Leaders Capital blog,

    Energy companies are facing a life or death moment in 2020 with the price of WTI crude oil falling to $13.64/barrel as of this writing. Indeed the collapse in energy prices combined with poor fundamentals leading into the COVID crisis make most of the oil and gas sector vulnerable to takeover or bankruptcy in the not too distant future.

    For example, a simple analysis of the 96 companies in the US Integrated Oil & Gas companies, E&P companies, Drilling, Equipment & Services sub-industries shows that 67% of these firms have total liabilities in excess of equity as of their latest reporting period. That would be strike one in any situation, but with oil prices about 80% below the price that prevailed at the beginning of the year, the ability of these companies to meet debt payments or pay suppliers is further brought into question.

    If that wasn’t enough, we ran a simple extrapolation to estimate how many of these companies will have enough cash on hand to pay current liabilities this year. We simply take 2019 EBITDA and estimate what 2020 EBITDA will be if WTI prices average $25/barrel in 2020 and assume total 2020 consumption will be 85% of 2019 consumption.

    If this situation comes to pass, then 71% of these firms will have 2020 EBITDA + Cash that is less than 2020 Current Liabilities. Now, maybe these assumptions are wildly off the mark and WTI will average $35/barrel or higher. Maybe these businesses will be able to access vast sums of new capital to stay afloat. I suppose they could sell assets, too, if there were willing buyers. If that’s the case then it would certainly take some pressure off, but even then the bulk of these firms would be under severe distress.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Now, to be fair, even though oil prices have absolutely collapsed in recent days, the equities themselves as well as their credit risk seem to be hanging in there. For example, the energy sector has actually outperformed the S&P 500 by about 9% since March 16th.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    High yield energy spreads also peaked in mid-March (blue line below) as the WTI near-term futures contract (red line, right inverted axis) traded in the $20 range. These credit spreads have backed off considerably since then even though they have turned back up modestly as WTI has collapsed.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    So, the message from the fundamentals tells us that unless something changes and fastlike energy prices rise a lot and/or consumption rebounds to pre-crisis levels and/or these companies get a Federal bailoutmuch of the US energy sector is going to pursue restructuring in 2020 or get purchased by a stronger hand.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Yet, the price signals from the market are telling us it’s all good. You be the judge. We suppose the next several weeks will be telling.


    Tyler Durden

    Wed, 04/22/2020 – 20:40

  • What Rebound? Hedge Funds Have Been Selling For 8 Of Past 9 Days As "Global HF Heavyweights Remain Bearish"
    What Rebound? Hedge Funds Have Been Selling For 8 Of Past 9 Days As “Global HF Heavyweights Remain Bearish”

    Today’s market rebound was impressive, but after the first major sell-off in some time on Monday and Tuesday, it was not impressive enough for Nomura’s quant Masanari Takada who writes that what is going on in the market – i.e., the unprecedented arrival of negative WTI crude oil futures prices which seems to have dealt a blow to investor confidence – looks like the sort of shakeout from long positions that he has been expecting and “at almost precisely the timing we had expected.”

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    But while a gut feeling is one thing, a tangible reversal is something far more notable, and according to the Nomura quant, “it appears that CTAs have put a stop to their accumulation of long positions in NASDAQ 100 futures” and as a result, a key concern is whether the NASDAQ 100 manages to hold the line at around 8,180 that Nomura estimates is the average entry point for CTAs’ net buying of futures since the beginning of April.

    In terms of technical patterns, CTAs may take another stab at chasing the market up starting around 29 April, provided that the index stays above this line. However, if such an upside attempt were to fail to squeeze some investors out of shorts or convince others to stake out fresh longs, Takada expects the buying pressure generated by these CTAs on their own in the US equity market to fizzle out on or around 8 May: “This would imply a need to brace for selling in tune with the “sell in May” adage.”

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Recent reversal in the Nasdaq aside, CTAs still have outstanding net short positions in Russell 2000 futures and DJIA futures. However, their net short position in Russell 2000 futures is now 80% smaller than it was at its most recent peak, while their net short position in DJIA futures is similarly about 60% smaller than it was at its peak. So “what we are seeing now looks like a pause after a period of concentrated short-covering.”

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    One notable observation, and a continuation of a trend we discussed late last week when we discussed that “Record Human Hedge Fund Selling Meets Furious Robot CTAs Buying“, is that unlike CTAs, global macro hedge funds – i.e., those controlled by humans – appear to be targeting further downside in DM equities. Indeed, as Takada writes overnight, “that the risk-off mood arrived just when historical patterns suggested it might lends further support to the idea that the buying of DM equities in April thus far has been powered by CTAs and other short-term trend-followers along with fundamental value hedge funds and other such perma-contrarians. Meanwhile, the funds looking least interested in buying have been those that focus mostly on fundamentals.”

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Most interesting, and yet another indication that humans are not buying this rally at all – literally –  is that according to Nomura, “the global heavyweights among macro hedge funds are still bearish on equities” and their trades targeting the downside are snuffing out early attempts by some investors to feel out the upside. “We suspect that global macro hedge funds will remain bearish until there is some reason to believe that DM economies are on their way to finding a floor”, according to Nomura.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Of course, investors could quickly become more optimistic before economic indicators have had a chance to bottom out. Should that happen, global macro hedge funds might have to make an emergency rush for the exits from their short trades.

    However, with equity sentiment stubbornly parked in negative territory, Nomura’s impression is that there is not much impetus among global macro hedge funds to rethink their current strategies just now.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    All of this helps explain why as Morgan Stanley’s quants write, long/short hedge funds have sold longs for 8 of the past 9 days, and were net sellers of equities again on Tues with selling led by L/S funds who were adding to shorts, and also selling on the long side.” As a result, net exposures fell further, down another 2% to 38%– a level which represents a near record low, or 2nd %-tile, over the last 12M and the 1st %-tile since 2010.

    In other words, the ongoing war between human and machine investors wages with the former expecting the worst, while robots – who are obviously immune to the wu flu – understandably eager to push stocks back to all time highs.


    Tyler Durden

    Wed, 04/22/2020 – 20:25

Digest powered by RSS Digest